FUJI MEDICAL DRY IMAGER

DRYPIX 2000
DRYPIX Lite
DRYPIX 2000
SERVICE MANUAL

Copyright © 2006-2012 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic, mechani-
cal, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.

Document No. 016-201-07E

First Edition Jan. 31, 2006
Revised Edition Apr. 27, 2012

Printed in Japan
 0.1
1. HANDLING THIS SERVICE MANUAL 1.3 About Notation in the Manual

n Notation of Cautions, Warning, etc.

1.1 About This Service Manual The notation formats of "WARNING", "CAUTION", "INSTRUCTIONS", "NOTE",
"REMARKS" and "REFERENCE" are shown below.
n Scope
This Service Manual applies to the Fuji Medical Dry Imager DRYPIX 2000.
WARNING
Note, however, that "Model: DRYPIX 2000" is available in two versions: DRYPIX Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in death or
2000 and DRYPIX Lite, and therefore, some of the descriptions in this manual contain serious injuries.
version-specific information.

n Notation of Unit Symbols CAUTION

For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in light or
(SI) are used, as a rule. However, some metric units that are not allowed in the SI but moderate injuries, or serious malfunction (unrecoverable or difficult to recover)
are permitted under the Measurement Law are partially used. of the equipment.

1.2 Service Manual Appropriations <INSTRUCTIONS>

1. All rights are reserved by the FUJIFILM Corporation (FUJIFILM). Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in damage to
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service the equipment, or other problems.
personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore <NOTE>
proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
Indicated where special attention is required during a work procedure.
4. FUJIFILM's prior consent is required in regard to the following.
• Manual copying in whole or in part. <REMARKS>
• Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
• Manual uses for purposes other than technical service. Indicated where description of the term used or supplementary explanation is given.
5. The contents of this manual are subject to changes for product improvement.
6. Accompanying documents were originally drafted in the English language. n Indication of Refer To
The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below.
{MC:1.1_Cover}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.1

n Indication of Operation Panel Key (For DRYPIX 2000 only)
Each key on the operation panel is indicated in this Service Manual as follows.
• Counter display key: <UP> key, or
• Counter reset key: <DOWN> key, or
• Automatic density measurement key: <ENTER> key, or
• Offline key: <CANCEL> key, or
0.2
1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools That
Require Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and
tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and
tools.

n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Name Inspection Calibration
Digital multimeter 
Densitometer 
Steel ruler (300 mm) 

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.2
GENERAL CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTION 0.3

SAFETY PRECAUTION
(DRYPIX 2000)
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION.............................................. 1
1.1 General Precautions.........................................................................1

2. LABELS..................................................................... 3
2.1 Caution Labels.................................................................................3
2.2 Other Labels.....................................................................................4
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark....................................6

3. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS................................. 7

4. CLASSIFICATION...................................................... 7

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.3
GENERAL CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTION 0.4

SAFETY PRECAUTION
(DRYPIX Lite)
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION.............................................. 1
1.1 General Precautions.........................................................................1

2. LABELS..................................................................... 3
2.1 Caution Labels.................................................................................3
2.2 Other Labels.....................................................................................4
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark....................................5

3. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS................................. 6

4. CLASSIFICATION...................................................... 6

5. CAUTION ON ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES............. 7

5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)...............................................7
5.2 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2..............................................7

6. CAUTIONS ON NETWORK....................................... 10

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.4
GENERAL CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS 0.5

SPECIFICATIONS

1. SPECIFICATIONS...................................................... 1
1.1 Part Name........................................................................................1
1.1.1 DRYPIX 2000...............................................................................................1
1.1.2 DRYPIX Lite.................................................................................................1
1.2 List of Optional Parts........................................................................2
1.2.1 DRYPIX 2000...............................................................................................2
1.2.2 DRYPIX Lite.................................................................................................2
1.3 General Specifications.....................................................................3
1.4 Equipment Dimensions and Weight.................................................6
1.4.1 DRYPIX 2000...............................................................................................6
1.4.2 DRYPIX Lite.................................................................................................7
1.5 Environmental Requirements...........................................................8
1.6 Electrical Requirements...................................................................9
1.7 Equipment Installation Space.........................................................10
1.7.1 DRYPIX 2000.............................................................................................10
1.7.2 DRYPIX Lite............................................................................................... 11
1.8 Disposing the Equipment...............................................................11

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.5
GENERAL CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)
DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
(MD) (DRYPIX 2000)
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT................................... MD-1
1.1 Functions of Equipment.............................................................MD-1
1.2 System Configuration................................................................MD-2
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts................................MD-4
1.3.1 External View........................................................................................ MD-4
1.3.2 Operation Panel.................................................................................... MD-5
1.3.3 Layout of External Interface Connectors............................................... MD-7
1.3.4 Layout of Units...................................................................................... MD-8
1.3.5 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions................................. MD-9
1.3.6 Board Layout....................................................................................... MD-14
1.3.7 Film Path and Jam Detection Sensor................................................. MD-15
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE EQUIPMENT.MD-16
2.1 Powering ON...........................................................................MD-16
2.2 Flow of Equipment Startup......................................................MD-16
2.3 Display Transition during Equipment Startup..........................MD-17
2.4 Handling of Equipment Errors.................................................MD-18
2.4.1 Level 1 Error........................................................................................ MD-18
2.4.2 Level 0 Error........................................................................................ MD-18
2.5 Powering OFF.........................................................................MD-19
2.5.1 Ending Process................................................................................... MD-19
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
0.6
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANISM OPERATIONS.MD-20
3.1 Magazine Set Section.............................................................MD-20
3.1.1 Outline................................................................................................. MD-20
3.1.2 Magazine Detection/Magazine Number Identification......................... MD-20
3.1.3 Magazine Management...................................................................... MD-21
3.1.4 Detection of Film Type........................................................................ MD-21
3.1.5 Protection of Removal Mechanism..................................................... MD-21
3.2 Removal Section.....................................................................MD-22
3.2.1 Outline................................................................................................. MD-22
3.2.2 Magazine Shutter Open/Close Mechanism........................................ MD-23
3.2.3 Operation Flow.................................................................................... MD-23
3.3 Conveyor Section....................................................................MD-28
3.3.1 Outline................................................................................................. MD-28
3.3.2 Film Positioning Section...................................................................... MD-28
3.3.3 Operation Flow.................................................................................... MD-29
3.4 Sub-Scanning Section.............................................................MD-31
3.4.1 Outline................................................................................................. MD-31
3.4.2 Film Edge Sensor................................................................................ MD-32
3.4.3 Cleaning Roller Detection................................................................... MD-32
3.4.4 Operation Flow.................................................................................... MD-33
3.5 Head........................................................................................MD-34
3.5.1 Outline................................................................................................. MD-34
3.5.2 Head Up/Down Section....................................................................... MD-34
3.5.3 Thermal Head..................................................................................... MD-35
3.5.4 Operation Flow.................................................................................... MD-36
3.5.5 Precautions on Opening/Closing the Head Assembly..................... MD-37.1
3.6 Film Release Section..............................................................MD-38
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.6
GENERAL CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 0.7

3.6.1 Outline................................................................................................. MD-38 6. PRINTING FORMATS......................................... MD-57

3.6.2 Density Measurement......................................................................... MD-38
3.6.3 Operation Flow.................................................................................... MD-38
6.1 Reading the Format Name......................................................MD-57
6.2 Standard Formats....................................................................MD-57
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL....... MD-39 6.3 Mixed Formats.........................................................................MD-58
4.1 System Block Diagram............................................................MD-39
4.2 Outline of Power Supply..........................................................MD-40
4.3 Interlock Control......................................................................MD-42
4.4 Functions of Boards................................................................MD-44
4.4.1 CPU Board.......................................................................................... MD-44
4.4.2 SND Board.......................................................................................... MD-45
4.4.3 THC Board.......................................................................................... MD-46
4.4.4 PNL Board........................................................................................... MD-48
4.4.5 Power Supply Unit.............................................................................. MD-49

5. IMAGE PROCESSING........................................ MD-50

5.1 Image Input.............................................................................MD-50
5.1.1 Valid Services...................................................................................... MD-50
5.1.2 Service Availability.............................................................................. MD-50
5.1.3 Image Data Reception Availability....................................................... MD-50
5.1.4 DICOM Settings and Restrictions....................................................... MD-50
5.2 Image Spool Management Function.......................................MD-51
5.3 Image Processing....................................................................MD-53
5.3.1 Image Processing 1............................................................................ MD-53
5.3.2 Image Processing 2............................................................................ MD-54
5.3.3 Image Processing 3............................................................................ MD-54
5.3.4 Annotation........................................................................................... MD-55
5.3.5 Recording Pixel Size........................................................................... MD-56

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.7
GENERAL CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 0.8

DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
(MD) (DRYPIX Lite)
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT................................... MD-1 4. IMAGE PROCESSING........................................ MD-20
1.1 Functions of Equipment.............................................................MD-1
5. PRINTING FORMATS......................................... MD-21
1.2 System Configuration................................................................MD-1
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts................................MD-2
1.3.1 External View........................................................................................ MD-2
1.3.2 Operation Panel.................................................................................... MD-3
1.3.3 Layout of External Interface Connectors............................................... MD-4
1.3.4 Layout of Units...................................................................................... MD-5
1.3.5 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions................................. MD-6
1.3.6 Board Layout....................................................................................... MD-11

2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE EQUIPMENT.MD-12

2.1 Powering ON...........................................................................MD-12
2.2 Handling of Equipment Errors.................................................MD-12
2.2.1 Level 1 Error........................................................................................ MD-12
2.2.2 Level 0 Error........................................................................................ MD-13
2.3 Powering OFF.........................................................................MD-14
2.3.1 Ending Process................................................................................... MD-14

3. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL....... MD-15

3.1 System Block Diagram............................................................MD-15
3.2 Interlock Control......................................................................MD-16
3.3 Functions of Boards................................................................MD-16
3.3.1 CPU Board.......................................................................................... MD-16
3.3.2 SND Board.......................................................................................... MD-17
3.3.3 RLY Board........................................................................................... MD-18
3.3.4 Power Supply Unit.............................................................................. MD-19

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.8
GENERAL CONTENTS TROUBLESHOOTING (MT) 0.9

TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
(DRYPIX 2000)
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD........................... MT-1

2. ERROR CODE...................................................... MT-2

2.1 Checking Error Codes.............................................................. MT-2
2.2 Format of Detailed Information.................................................. MT-4
2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information.......................MT-4
2.2.2 MFC Related (Data Setting/System Related) Error Detailed Information......
MT-7
2.2.3 HED Related (Head Control Related) Error Detailed Information.........MT-8
2.3 Error Code Table....................................................................... MT-9
2.3.1 Printer...................................................................................................MT-10
2.3.2 Formatter..............................................................................................MT-39

3. ABNORMAL OPERATIONS................................ MT-58

3.1 Initialization Error at Startup.................................................... MT-58

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.9
GENERAL CONTENTS TROUBLESHOOTING (MT) 0.10

TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
(DRYPIX Lite)
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD........................... MT-1

2. ERROR CODE...................................................... MT-2

2.1 Checking Error Codes.............................................................. MT-2
2.2 Format of Detailed Information.................................................. MT-2
2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information.......................MT-3
2.2.2 MFC Related (Data Setting/System Related) Error Detailed Information......
MT-5
2.2.3 HED Related (Head Control Related) Error Detailed Information.........MT-5
2.3 Error Code Table....................................................................... MT-6
2.3.1 Printer.....................................................................................................MT-7
2.3.2 Formatter..............................................................................................MT-34

3. Initializing IP Address...................................... MT-53

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.10
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT
(MC) (DRYPIX 2000)
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS,
AND ADJUSTMENTS........................................... MC-1
CONTENTS................................................................ MC-2
1. COVER................................................................. MC-4
1.1 Covers which can be Removed Individually..............................MC-4
1.1.1 Upper Cover.......................................................................................... MC-4
1.2 Covers which Need to be Removed in Certain Order...............MC-5
1.2.1 Head Up/Down Secion Cover............................................................... MC-5
1.2.2 Ejection Cover....................................................................................... MC-6
1.2.3 Front Cover.................................................................................................MC-6
1.2.4 Right Cover/Left Cover......................................................................... MC-7
1.2.5 Upper Rear Cover................................................................................. MC-7
1.2.6 Rear Cover............................................................................................ MC-8
1.2.7 Rear Open/Close Cover........................................................................ MC-8
1.2.8 Lower Front Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit)............................................... MC-9
1.2.9 Lower Right Cover/Lower Left Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit)................. MC-10
1.2.10 Lower Rear Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit).............................................. MC-11
1.2.11 Lower Rear Open/Close Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit).......................... MC-12
2. FRAME............................................................... MC-13
2.1 Head Cover Interlock Switch (SK12).......................................MC-13
2.2 Rear Cover Interlock Switches (Upper) (SK11).......................MC-14
3. MAGAZINE SET SECTION................................. MC-15
3.1 Film Size Detection Sensor Assembly (SA11/SA12/SA13).....................MC-15
3.2 Magazine Shutter Open/Close Mechanism.............................MC-16
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
0.11
4. REMOVAL SECTION.......................................... MC-17
4.1 Film Removing Motor (MB11)..................................................MC-17
4.2 Suction Cup Arm.....................................................................MC-18
4.3 Suction Cup.............................................................................MC-20
4.4 Bellows....................................................................................MC-21
4.5 Removal Drive Cam................................................................MC-23
4.6 Removal Conveyance Roller (Lower)......................................MC-26
4.7 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor (SB11).......................MC-27
4.8 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB12)...................................MC-28
4.9 Suction Cup Arm Upper Deadpoint Detection Sensor (SB13)....... MC-29
5. CONVEYOR SECTION........................................ MC-30
5.1 Positioning Guide Assembly....................................................MC-30
5.2 Reference Plate Drive Motor (MD12)......................................MC-32
5.3 Reference Plate Assembly......................................................MC-33
5.4 Film Edge Sensor Assembly...................................................MC-34
5.5 Cleaning Roller Detection Sensor (SD14)...............................MC-36
6. SUB-SCANNING SECTION................................ MC-37
6.1 Sub-scanning Motor (ME1).....................................................MC-37
6.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-37
6.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Sub-scanning Motor (ME1).............. MC-39
6.2 Flywheel..................................................................................MC-40
6.3 Platen Roller............................................................................MC-42
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.11
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.12

7. HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION................................ MC-44 10.8 CF (Compact Flash Memory)..................................................MC-69

10.8.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-69
7.1 Head Cooling Fan (FANP1, FANP2)............................................. MC-44
10.8.2 Recovery of CF................................................................................... MC-69
7.2 Head UP/Down Drive Motor (MH1)........................................... MC-46
10.9 Control Box..............................................................................MC-70
7.3 Head Pressurization Arm Assembly.....................................................MC-47
10.10 Head Voltage Switching Relay Assembly................................MC-73
7.4 Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head Pressure.....................MC-47.1
11. SHEET-FEEDER UNIT........................................ MC-75
8. HEAD................................................................. MC-48
11.1 Sheet-feeder Unit Film Removing Motor (MB21)....................MC-77
8.1 Thermal Head Assembly.........................................................MC-48
11.2 Sheet-feeder Unit Positioning Guide Assembly.......................MC-78
8.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-48
8.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Thermal Head................................... MC-50
12. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE....... MC-80
9. FILM RELEASE SECTION.................................. MC-54 12.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing.........................................MC-81
12.1.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing.......................... MC-81
9.1 Density Measurement Light-Sensing Board (PDD15A)..........MC-54
12.1.2 Upgrading the Version from the PC for Servicing............................... MC-82
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board (LED15A)...........MC-56 12.1.3 Full Installation from the PC for Servicing........................................... MC-83
12.2 Installing from the USB Memory..............................................MC-85
10. CONTROLLER.................................................... MC-58
12.2.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the USB Memory............................... MC-85
10.1 Operation Panel......................................................................MC-58 12.2.2 Upgrading the Version from the USB Memory.................................... MC-87
10.2 Controller Cooling Fan (FANK1)..............................................MC-59 12.2.3 Full Installation from the USB Memory............................................... MC-88
10.3 CPU Board..............................................................................MC-60
13. RECOVERY PROCEDURE FOR CF (COMPACT FLASH
10.4 SND Board..............................................................................MC-61 MEMORY).......................................................... MC-90
10.4.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-61
13.1 When not Using the Main Unit Software CD-R at the Installed
10.4.2 Precautions on Replacement of SND Board.................................... MC-61.1
Place.......................................................................................MC-90
10.5 Power Supply Unit...................................................................MC-62 13.1.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing.................... MC-90
10.5.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-62 13.1.2 Transferring the Main Unit Software to CF.......................................... MC-91
10.5.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Power Supply Unit............................ MC-64
13.2 When Using the Main Unit Software CD-R at the Installed Place......
10.6 ME1 Driver Board....................................................................MC-67 ................................................................................................MC-92
10.7 Lithium Battery........................................................................MC-68
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.12
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.13

14. CF IMAGE ACQUISITION TOOL (CF-Tool Frontend)...

.......................................................................... MC-93

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.13
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.14

REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT

(MC) (DRYPIX Lite)
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS, 4.2 Suction Cup Arm.....................................................................MC-13
AND ADJUSTMENTS........................................... MC-1 4.3 Suction Cup.............................................................................MC-14
4.4 Bellows....................................................................................MC-15
1. COVER................................................................. MC-2
4.5 Removal Drive Cam................................................................MC-16
1.1 Right Cover...............................................................................MC-2
4.6 Removal Conveyance Roller (Lower)......................................MC-20
1.2 Left Cover..................................................................................MC-2
4.7 Film Conveyance Guide..........................................................MC-21
1.3 Head Cover...............................................................................MC-3
4.8 Conveyance Entrance Sensor (SD11)....................................MC-22
1.4 Upper Tray Cover......................................................................MC-3
4.9 Reference Plate HP Detection Sensor (SD13)........................MC-22
1.5 Lower Tray Cover......................................................................MC-4
4.10 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor (SB11).......................MC-23
1.6 Front Cover...............................................................................MC-4
4.11 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB12)...................................MC-24
1.7 Upper Rear Cover.....................................................................MC-5
4.12 Suction Cup Arm Upper Deadpoint Detection Sensor (SB13)....... MC-24
1.8 Rear Cover................................................................................MC-5
1.9 Lower Right Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit)....................................MC-6 5. CONVEYOR SECTION........................................ MC-26
1.10 Lower Left Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit)......................................MC-6 5.1 Positioning Guide Assembly....................................................MC-26
1.11 Lower Front Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit)....................................MC-7 5.2 Conveyor section motor (MD11)..............................................MC-28
5.3 Reference Plate Drive Motor (MD12)......................................MC-28
2. FRAME................................................................. MC-8
5.4 Reference Plate Assembly......................................................MC-29
2.1 Head Cover Interlock Switch (SK12).........................................MC-8
5.5 Film Edge Sensor Assembly...................................................MC-30
2.2 Rear Cover Interlock Switch (SK21)..........................................MC-9
5.6 Conveyance exit sensor (SD12)..............................................MC-31
3. MAGAZINE SET SECTION................................. MC-10
6. SUB-SCANNING SECTION................................ MC-32
3.1 Film Size Detection Sensor Assembly (SA11/SA12/SA13).....MC-10
6.1 Sub-scanning Motor (ME1).....................................................MC-32
3.2 Magazine Shutter Open/Close Mechanism.............................MC-10
6.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-32
6.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Sub-scanning Motor (ME1).............. MC-34
4. REMOVAL SECTION.......................................... MC-12
6.2 Flywheel..................................................................................MC-35
4.1 Film Removing Motor (MB11)..................................................MC-12

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.14
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.15

6.3 Platen Roller............................................................................MC-37 10.8 CF (Compact Flash Memory)..................................................MC-57

10.8.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-57
7. HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION................................ MC-39 10.8.2 Recovery of CF................................................................................... MC-58
7.1 Head Cooling Fan (FANP1).....................................................MC-39 10.9 Power Switch and AC Inlet......................................................MC-58
7.2 Head UP/Down Drive Motor (MH1).........................................MC-40
11. RECOVERY PROCEDURE FOR CF (COMPACT FLASH
7.3 Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head Pressure........................MC-42 MEMORY)}......................................................... MC-60
8. HEAD................................................................. MC-43 11.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing.........MC-60

8.1 Thermal Head Assembly.........................................................MC-43 11.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF..............................MC-61

8.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Thermal Head.......................MC-45

8.2.1 Transferring the Head Power Voltage................................................. MC-45
8.2.2 Adjusting the Head Power Voltage..................................................... MC-45
8.2.3 Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head Pressure.................................... MC-46
8.2.4 Checking the Image............................................................................ MC-46

9. FILM RELEASE SECTION.................................. MC-47

9.1 Density Measurement Light-Sensing Board (PDD28A)..........MC-47
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board (LED28A)...........MC-48

10. CONTROLLER.................................................... MC-50

10.1 Operation Panel......................................................................MC-50
10.2 Control Box..............................................................................MC-50
10.3 Controller Cooling Fan (FANK1)..............................................MC-52
10.4 CPU Board..............................................................................MC-53
10.5 SND Board..............................................................................MC-54
10.6 Power Supply Unit...................................................................MC-55
10.7 RLY32A Board.........................................................................MC-57

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.15
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU)
SERVICE MODE (MU)
(DRYPIX 2000)
1. OUTLINE OF SERVICE MODE.............................MU-1
1.1 Transition of Modes in DRYPIX 2000........................................MU-1
1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode..............................................MU-1
1.3 Operations of Main Unit Service Modes....................................MU-2
1.4 Details of Message Display.......................................................MU-2
1.5 Note on Executing Service Mode..............................................MU-3
2. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY)................................MU-4
2.1 U-Utility Menu Tree....................................................................MU-4
2.2 Starting and Ending U-Utility.....................................................MU-4
2.3 Details of U-Utility Commands..................................................MU-5
[1] Set Date>....................................................................................... MU-5
[1-1] Check Date.......................................................................... MU-5
[1-2] YYYY>................................................................................. MU-5
[2] Check Version................................................................................ MU-5
[3] Film Counters>............................................................................... MU-6
[3-1] User Counter>..................................................................... MU-6
[3-1-1] Check Counters........................................................ MU-6
[3-1-2] Initiate>..................................................................... MU-6
[3-2] Set Rem.Films>................................................................... MU-6
[3-2-1] Initiate>..................................................................... MU-6
[4] Film Output>.................................................................................. MU-7
[4-1] 17-Steps>............................................................................ MU-7
[4-2] SMPTE>.............................................................................. MU-7
[4-3] Cleaning Film....................................................................... MU-7
[5] QC>................................................................................................ MU-8
[5-1] QC PATTERN...................................................................... MU-8
[5-2] SETTINGS>......................................................................... MU-8
[5-2-1] BUILD-IN DEN.>....................................................... MU-8
[5-2-1-1] Auto................................................................. MU-8
[5-2-1-2] Manual>........................................................... MU-8
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
0.16
[6] Sleep Mode>.................................................................................. MU-9
[7] Calibration...................................................................................... MU-9
2.4 Other Utilities . ........................................................................MU-10
[8] Counter Display........................................................................... MU-10
[9] Counter Reset.............................................................................. MU-10
[10] Automatic Density Correction...................................................... MU-10
3. M-UTILITY (MAINTENANCE-UTILITY)................MU-11
3.1 U-Utility Menu Tree.................................................................. MU-11
3.2 Starting and Ending M-Utility...................................................MU-13
3.2.1 Starting M-Utility.................................................................................. MU-13
3.2.2 Ending M-Utility................................................................................... MU-13
3.3 Details of M-Utility Commands................................................MU-14
[1] System>....................................................................................... MU-14
[1-1] Configuration>................................................................... MU-14
[1-1-1] Set Date>................................................................ MU-14
[1-1-1-1] Check Date.................................................... MU-14
[1-1-1-2] YYYY>........................................................... MU-14
[1-1-2] Set Magazines>...................................................... MU-14
[1-1-3] Option Slot>............................................................ MU-15
[1-1-3-1] Enable Slot.................................................... MU-15
[1-1-4] Set QC>.................................................................. MU-15
[1-1-4-1] Enable QC> . ................................................ MU-15
[1-1-4-2] Set Tgt. Den.>............................................... MU-15
[1-1-4-3] Printing Dmax>.............................................. MU-16
[1-1-6] Film Counters>....................................................... MU-16
[1-1-6-1] Check Counters............................................. MU-16
[1-1-6-2] Init.Trip-cnt>.................................................. MU-17
[1-1-6-3] Set Odo-cnt>................................................. MU-17
[1-1-6-4] Set Rem.Films>............................................. MU-17
[1-1-7] Set Network>.......................................................... MU-18
[1-1-7-1] DICOM>........................................................ MU-18
[1-1-7-1-1] AE-title>............................................... MU-18
[1-1-7-1-2] Port No.>.............................................. MU-18
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.16
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU)
[1-1-7-2] NETWORK>.................................................. MU-19
[1-1-7-2-1] IP Address............................................ MU-19
[1-1-7-2-2] SubNetMask........................................ MU-19
[1-1-7-2-3] Hostname............................................. MU-20
[1-1-7-2-4] Gateways.>.......................................... MU-20
[1-1-7-2-5] Show Mac Addr.>................................. MU-20
[1-1-7-2-6] Regist PC>........................................... MU-21
[1-1-8] Ele Save Mode>..................................................... MU-21
[1-1-8-1] Transit.Time>................................................. MU-21
[1-1-9] User 17-Steps>....................................................... MU-22
[1-1-10] User SMPTE>......................................................... MU-22
[1-2] Error Log>.......................................................................... MU-22
[1-2-1] Show Err. Log......................................................... MU-22
[1-2-2] Clear....................................................................... MU-22
[1-2-3] Save Log File>........................................................ MU-22
[1-2-4] Logging mode>....................................................... MU-23
[1-3] Set Panel>...................................................................... MU-23.1
[1-3-1] Alarm Sound>...................................................... MU-23.1
[1-3-2] Alarm Volume>.................................................... MU-23.1
[1-3-3] Language>.............................................................. MU-24
[1-3-4] Size Type>.............................................................. MU-24
[2] USB Memory................................................................................ MU-25
[2-1] Installation>........................................................................ MU-25
[2-1-1] Upgrade.................................................................. MU-25
[2-1-2] Full install................................................................ MU-25
[2-2] Save/Load.......................................................................... MU-26
[2-2-1] Save to USB>......................................................... MU-26
[2-2-2] Load from USB>..................................................... MU-27
[3] Film Output>................................................................................ MU-28
[3-3] Grid&FlatPat.>................................................................... MU-28
[3-6] SMPTE>............................................................................ MU-28
[3-13] CleaningFilm>.................................................................... MU-28
[4] F.D.C.>......................................................................................... MU-29
[4-1] AUTO F.D.C.>.................................................................... MU-29
[4-2] Check Density>.................................................................. MU-29
[4-3] 24-Steps>.......................................................................... MU-30
[4-4] Manual F.D.C.>.................................................................. MU-30
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual
0.17
[4-5] Densitometer..................................................................... MU-31
[4-5-1] 24-Steps>............................................................... MU-31
[4-5-2] Set Colle. T.>.......................................................... MU-31
[4-5-3] Clr Colle. T.>........................................................... MU-32
[4-5-4] DM Sen. Moni. ....................................................... MU-32
[4-6] Densito.Lamp>................................................................... MU-32
[6] Print Posit.>.................................................................................. MU-33
[6-1] Side Margin........................................................................ MU-33
[6-2] Enable Shift>..................................................................... MU-34
[6-3] Top Margin>....................................................................... MU-34
[6-3-1] Adjust>.................................................................... MU-34
[6-3-2] Initialize>.............................................................. MU-34.1
[7] Check Mech.>.............................................................................. MU-35
[7-1] Film Removing>................................................................. MU-35
[7-2] Motor Ope.>....................................................................... MU-36
[7-2-1] MD11>.................................................................... MU-36
[7-2-2] ME1>...................................................................... MU-37
[7-3] HEAD U/D>........................................................................ MU-38
[7-4] Print Posi.>........................................................................ MU-39
[7-4-1] MD12>.................................................................... MU-39
[7-4-2] MD22>.................................................................... MU-39
[7-5] Sub Scan.>........................................................................ MU-40
[7-5-1] Sub Scan.Speed..................................................... MU-40
[7-5-2] Initialize>................................................................. MU-40
[7-5-3] Adjust>.................................................................... MU-40
[7-6] Edge Sen.Po.>................................................................... MU-41
[7-7] Edge Sen.Mo.>.................................................................. MU-42
[7-8] Edge Sen.LED>................................................................. MU-42
[7-9] Sensor Monit.>................................................................... MU-43
[7-10] NipAdjustment>.............................................................. MU-43.1
[8] Head Check>............................................................................... MU-44
[8-1] Temperature....................................................................... MU-44
[8-2] Fan Operation>.................................................................. MU-44
[8-3] Head Voltage..................................................................... MU-44
[8-4] 16VH Ope.>....................................................................... MU-44
0.17
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU)
4. PC-Utility...........................................................MU-45
4.1 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing....................................MU-45
4.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing......................................................... MU-45
4.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing....................................... MU-46
4.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC............................................. MU-46
4.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols.................................................................. MU-48
4.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder....................................................... MU-50
4.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing.MU-51
4.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations..................................................MU-55
4.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network....................................... MU-55
4.2.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Web Server Start)........
............................................................................................................ MU-55
4.2.3 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)........
............................................................................................................ MU-55
4.2.4 PC-Utility Operations........................................................................... MU-57
4.2.5 Disconnecting the Equipment............................................................. MU-62
4.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree...............................................................MU-63
4.4 PC-Utility Command Details....................................................MU-67
[PC1] System information and setup..................................................... MU-67
[PC1-1] Setting1.............................................................................. MU-67
[PC1-1-1] Set DICOM............................................................. MU-67
[PC1-1-1-1] AE Title.......................................................... MU-67
[PC1-1-1-2] Port No.......................................................... MU-67
[PC1-1-2] Set Network............................................................ MU-67
[PC1-1-2-1] IP Address..................................................... MU-67
[PC1-1-2-2] Sub Net Mask................................................ MU-68
[PC1-1-2-3] Gateway........................................................ MU-68
[PC1-1-2-4] Host Name.................................................... MU-68
[PC1-1-3] Display Mac address.............................................. MU-68
[PC1-1-4] Registration service pc........................................... MU-69
[PC1-2] Setting2.............................................................................. MU-69
[PC1-2-1] Set Magazines........................................................ MU-69
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual
0.18
[PC1-2-2] Option Slot.............................................................. MU-69
[PC1-2-3] Enable QC.............................................................. MU-70
[PC1-2-4] Set Target Den........................................................ MU-70
[PC1-2-5] Printing Dmax......................................................... MU-70
[PC1-2-6] Set Rem. Films....................................................... MU-70
[PC1-2-7] User 17-Steps......................................................... MU-70
[PC1-2-8] User SMPTE........................................................... MU-71
[PC1-2-9] Display indv. data.................................................... MU-71
[PC1-3] Setting3.............................................................................. MU-71
[PC1-3-1] Set Date.................................................................. MU-71
[PC1-3-2] Ele Save Mode....................................................... MU-71
[PC1-3-3] Set Alarm................................................................ MU-72
[PC1-3-4] Set Language......................................................... MU-72
[PC1-3-5] Size Type................................................................ MU-72
[PC1-4] Log data............................................................................. MU-73
[PC1-4-1] Display Error Log.................................................... MU-73
[PC1-4-2] Clear Error Log....................................................... MU-73
[PC1-4-3] Display DICOM Log................................................ MU-73
[PC1-4-4] Logging Mode...................................................... MU-73.1
[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data.................................................................... MU-73.2
[PC3] Client Configuration..................................................................... MU-74
[PC3-1] Add Client.......................................................................... MU-74
[PC3-2] Delete Client...................................................................... MU-76
[PC3-3] Change Client Name......................................................... MU-77
[PC3-3a] Read CLTInfo.................................................................. MU-77.1
[PC3-4] Clients................................................................................ MU-78
[PC3-4-1] Protocol................................................................... MU-79
[PC3-4-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)............... MU-79
[PC3-4-1-2] N Event Report RQ....................................... MU-79
[PC3-4-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H Warning).......
...................................................................... MU-80
[PC3-4-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H
Warning)........................................................ MU-80
[PC3-4-1-5] Change Film Size.......................................... MU-80
[PC3-4-1-6] Use System Timeout..................................... MU-81
[PC3-4-1-7] Presentation LUT.......................................... MU-81
[PC3-4-1-8] Precede Picking Up....................................... MU-81
0.18
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU)
[PC3-4-1-9] Use Max/Min Density.................................... MU-81
[PC3-4-1-10] Extension Format ID...................................... MU-82
[PC3-4-1-11] Use Default Annotation.................................. MU-82
[PC3-4-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F]).......... MU-82
[PC3-4-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14.............................. MU-83
[PC3-4-2] Magnify................................................................... MU-83
[PC3-4-2-1] Default Smoothing Type................................ MU-83
[PC3-4-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior.MU-84
[PC3-4-2-3] Magnification Type........................................ MU-85
[PC3-4-2-4] Requested Image Size.................................. MU-85
[PC3-4-2-5] Default Magnification Type............................ MU-85
[PC3-4-2-6] Default Smoothing Type................................ MU-85
[PC3-4-2-7] Default Requested Image Size...................... MU-86
[PC3-4-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior................... MU-86
[PC3-4-2-9] Procedure...................................................... MU-86
[PC3-4-2-10] Edge Detection.............................................. MU-86
[PC3-4-2-11] Detection Level.............................................. MU-87
[PC3-4-2-12] Sharpness..................................................... MU-87
[PC3-4-2-13] Character Color............................................. MU-87
[PC3-4-3] LUT Common.......................................................... MU-88
[PC3-4-3-1] Default LUT................................................... MU-88
[PC3-4-3-2] Illumination.................................................... MU-88
[PC3-4-3-3] Ambient Light................................................ MU-88
[PC3-4-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)..... MU-88
[PC3-4-3-5] Default Illumination........................................ MU-89
[PC3-4-3-6] Default Ambient Light.................................... MU-89
[PC3-4-3-7] Procedure...................................................... MU-89
[PC3-4-4] LUT1 to LUT8......................................................... MU-90
[PC3-4-4-1] Max Density................................................... MU-90
[PC3-4-4-2] Min Density.................................................... MU-90
[PC3-4-4-3] γ Table No..................................................... MU-90
[PC3-4-4-4] Contrast......................................................... MU-90
[PC3-4-4-5] Number of Tuning Points............................... MU-91
[PC3-4-4-6] Density.......................................................... MU-91
[PC3-4-4-7] Shift............................................................... MU-91
[PC3-4-4-8] Contrast......................................................... MU-91
[PC3-4-5] Output Format......................................................... MU-92
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual
0.19
[PC3-4-5-1] Film Size........................................................ MU-92
[PC3-4-5-2] Medium Type................................................. MU-92
[PC3-4-5-3] Film Orientation............................................. MU-92
[PC3-4-5-4] Border Density............................................... MU-92
[PC3-4-5-5] Polarity.......................................................... MU-92
[PC3-4-5-6] Trim............................................................... MU-93
[PC3-4-5-7] Trim Width..................................................... MU-93
[PC3-4-5-8] Trim Density.................................................. MU-93
[PC3-4-5-9] Number of Copies......................................... MU-93
[PC3-4-5-10] Print Priority................................................... MU-93
[PC3-4-5-11] Default Number of Copies............................. MU-94
[PC3-4-5-12] Default Print Priority...................................... MU-94
[PC3-4-5-13] Default Medium Type.................................... MU-94
[PC3-4-5-14] Default Film Orientation................................. MU-94
[PC3-4-5-15] Default Film Size........................................... MU-95
[PC3-4-5-16] Default Border Density.................................. MU-95
[PC3-4-5-17] Default Trim................................................... MU-95
[PC3-4-5-18] Default Polarity.............................................. MU-95
[PC3-4-5-19] Mirror............................................................. MU-96
[PC3-4-5-20] Margin Between Image................................. MU-96
[PC3-4-5-21] Image Layout................................................. MU-96
[PC3-4-5-22] Processing Type............................................ MU-97
[PC3-4-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area............................. MU-97
[PC3-4-5-24] Image Crop Side Area................................... MU-97
[PC3-4-6] Annotation............................................................... MU-98
[PC3-4-6-1] Annotation Font............................................. MU-98
[PC3-4-6-2] Annotation Extend......................................... MU-98
[PC3-4-6-3] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/
Lower Center/Lower Right............................. MU-98
[PC3-5] Common............................................................................ MU-99
[PC3-5-1] Data Transfer Timeout............................................ MU-99
[PC3-5-2] Association Count................................................... MU-99
[PC3-5-3] Logging DICOM...................................................... MU-99
[PC3-5-4] Model.................................................................... MU-100
[PC3-5-5] Manufacturer......................................................... MU-100
[PC3-5-6] Default Client........................................................ MU-100
[PC3-6] Sarmaker......................................................................... MU-101
0.19
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.20

[PC4] File Transfer............................................................................... MU-104 [PC10-6] Edge Sensor.................................................................... MU-118

[PC4-1] Single File........................................................................ MU-104 [PC10-6-1] Edge Sen.Posi...................................................... MU-118
[PC4-2] Analysis Data................................................................... MU-104 [PC10-6-2] LED ON/OFF........................................................ MU-119
[PC4-3] Head Data........................................................................ MU-105 [PC10-7] Nip Adjust......................................................................... MU-120
[PC4-4] G-curve Data................................................................... MU-105
[PC4-5] Operation Data................................................................ MU-105 APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE...
[PC5] Upgrading.................................................................................. MU-106 ........................................................................MU-122
[PC5-1] Full Install......................................................................... MU-106
[PC5-2] Upgrading........................................................................ MU-106
[PC6] OutputFilm.............................................................................. MU-107.1
APPENDIX 2. AUTOMATIC INITIAL SETTING TOOL FOR
[PC6-1] Cleaning Film................................................................ MU-107.1 PC FOR SERVICING (ImagerServicePCSetting).........
[PC6-2] Grid & Flat..................................................................... MU-107.1 ........................................................................MU-123
[PC6-3] SMPTE......................................................................... MU-107.2
[PC6-4] No Edge mode.............................................................. MU-107.2
[PC7] F.D.C.......................................................................................... MU-109
[PC7-1] Auto F.D.C....................................................................... MU-109
[PC7-2] Check Density.................................................................. MU-109
[PC7-3] 24-Steps.......................................................................... MU-110
[PC7-4] Display 24-Steps.............................................................. MU-110
[PC7-5] Manual F.D.C................................................................... MU-110
[PC7-6] Set Collect. T.....................................................................MU-111
[PC7-7] Clear Collect. T..................................................................MU-111
[PC8] Head Check............................................................................... MU-112
[PC8-1] Fan Operation.................................................................. MU-112
[PC8-2] 16VH................................................................................ MU-112
[PC8-3] Head Voltage................................................................... MU-112
[PC8-4] Head Regist..................................................................... MU-112
[PC9] Print Position.............................................................................. MU-113
[PC9-1] Side Margin...................................................................... MU-113
[PC9-2] Top Margin....................................................................... MU-114
[PC10] Check Mech............................................................................... MU-115
[PC10-1] Film Removing................................................................. MU-115
[PC10-2] Motor Ope........................................................................ MU-115
[PC10-3] HEAD U/D........................................................................ MU-116
[PC10-4] Positioning Film............................................................... MU-116
[PC10-4-1] Unit Ope................................................................ MU-116
[PC10-5] Sub Scan......................................................................... MU-117

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.20
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU)
SERVICE MODE (MU)
(DRYPIX Lite)
1. OUTLINE OF SERVICE MODE.............................MU-1
1.1 Transition of Modes in DRYPIX Lite..........................................MU-1
1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode..............................................MU-1
3.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree...............................................................MU-37
2. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY)................................MU-2
3.4 PC-Utility Command Details....................................................MU-41
2.1 U-Utility Menu Tree....................................................................MU-2
2.2 Starting and Ending U-Utility.....................................................MU-2
2.3 Details of U-Utility Commands..................................................MU-3
[U-1] Automatic Density Correction........................................................ MU-3
[U-2] QC.................................................................................................. MU-3
[U-3] Setting the Date and Time............................................................. MU-3
[U-4] Calibration...................................................................................... MU-3
[U-5] SMPTE Pattern.............................................................................. MU-3
[U-6] 17-Steps......................................................................................... MU-3
[U-7] Cleaning Film................................................................................. MU-4
[U-8] Reset Film Counters...................................................................... MU-4
[U-9] Film Counter Zero Clear................................................................ MU-4
3. PC-Utility.............................................................MU-5
3.1 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing......................................MU-5
3.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing........................................................... MU-5
3.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing......................................... MU-6
3.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC............................................... MU-6
3.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols.................................................................... MU-8
3.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder....................................................... MU-10
3.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing.MU-11
3.1.7 Settings in the Use of Windows Vista PC for Servicing...................... MU-15
3.1.8 Settings in the Use of Windows 7 PC for Servicing............................ MU-22
3.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations..................................................MU-28
3.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network....................................... MU-28
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual
0.21
3.2.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)........
............................................................................................................ MU-28
3.2.3 PC-Utility Operations........................................................................... MU-29
3.2.4 Disconnecting the Equipment............................................................. MU-36
[PC1] System information and setup..................................................... MU-41
[PC1-1] Setting1.............................................................................. MU-41
[PC1-1-1] Check Version......................................................... MU-41
[PC1-1-2] Set DICOM............................................................. MU-41
[PC1-1-2-1] AE Title.......................................................... MU-41
[PC1-1-2-2] Port No.......................................................... MU-41
[PC1-1-3] Set Network............................................................ MU-41
[PC1-1-3-1] IP Address..................................................... MU-41
[PC1-1-3-2] Sub Net Mask................................................ MU-42
[PC1-1-3-3] Gateway........................................................ MU-42
[PC1-1-3-4] Host Name.................................................... MU-42
[PC1-1-4] Display Mac address.............................................. MU-42
[PC1-1-5] Registration service pc........................................... MU-43
[PC1-2] Setting2.............................................................................. MU-43
[PC1-2-1] Set Magazines........................................................ MU-43
[PC1-2-2] Option Slot.............................................................. MU-43
[PC1-2-3] Enable QC.............................................................. MU-44
[PC1-2-4] Set Target Den........................................................ MU-44
[PC1-2-5] Printing Dmax......................................................... MU-44
[PC1-2-6] Set Rem. Films....................................................... MU-44
[PC1-2-7] User 17-Steps......................................................... MU-44
[PC1-2-8] User SMPTE........................................................... MU-45
[PC1-2-9] Set Side Position Revision ON/OFF....................... MU-45
[PC1-2-10] Check Counters...................................................... MU-45
[PC1-2-11] Display indv. data.................................................... MU-45
[PC1-3] Setting3.............................................................................. MU-46
[PC1-3-1] Set SMPTE............................................................. MU-46
[PC1-3-2] Set Date.................................................................. MU-46
[PC1-3-3] Ele Save Mode....................................................... MU-46
0.21
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU)
[PC1-3-4] Set Alarm................................................................ MU-46
[PC1-3-5] Automated F.D.C.................................................... MU-47
[PC1-3-6] Set OEM................................................................. MU-47
[PC1-3-7] Reboot.................................................................... MU-47
[PC1-4] Log data............................................................................. MU-47
[PC1-4-1] Display Error Log.................................................... MU-47
[PC1-4-2] Clear Error Log....................................................... MU-47
[PC1-4-3] Display DICOM Log................................................ MU-47
[PC1-4-4] Logging Mode......................................................... MU-48
[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data....................................................................... MU-49
[PC3] Client Configuration..................................................................... MU-50
[PC3-1] Add Client.......................................................................... MU-50
[PC3-2] Delete Client...................................................................... MU-52
[PC3-3] Change Client Name......................................................... MU-53
[PC3-4] Read CLTInfo..................................................................... MU-54
[PC3-5] Clients................................................................................ MU-55
[PC3-5-1] Protocol................................................................... MU-57
[PC3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)............... MU-57
[PC3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ....................................... MU-57
[PC3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H Warning).......
...................................................................... MU-57
[PC3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H
Warning)........................................................ MU-57
[PC3-5-1-5] Change Film Size.......................................... MU-58
[PC3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout..................................... MU-58
[PC3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT.......................................... MU-58
[PC3-5-1-8] Precede Picking Up....................................... MU-59
[PC3-5-1-9] Use Max/Min Density.................................... MU-59
[PC3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID...................................... MU-59
[PC3-5-1-11] Use Default Annotation.................................. MU-60
[PC3-5-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F]).......... MU-60
[PC3-5-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14.............................. MU-60
[PC3-5-2] Magnify................................................................... MU-61
[PC3-5-2-1] Default Smoothing Type................................ MU-61
[PC3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior.MU-61
[PC3-5-2-3] Magnification Type........................................ MU-62
[PC3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size.................................. MU-62
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual
0.22
[PC3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type............................ MU-63
[PC3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type................................ MU-63
[PC3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size...................... MU-63
[PC3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior................... MU-63
[PC3-5-2-9] Procedure...................................................... MU-64
[PC3-5-2-10] Edge Detection.............................................. MU-64
[PC3-5-2-11] Detection Level.............................................. MU-64
[PC3-5-2-12] Sharpness..................................................... MU-64
[PC3-5-2-13] Character Color............................................. MU-65
[PC3-5-3] LUT Common.......................................................... MU-65
[PC3-5-3-1] Default LUT................................................... MU-65
[PC3-5-3-2] Illumination.................................................... MU-65
[PC3-5-3-3] Ambient Light................................................ MU-66
[PC3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)..... MU-66
[PC3-5-3-5] Default Illumination........................................ MU-66
[PC3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light.................................... MU-66
[PC3-5-3-7] Procedure...................................................... MU-67
[PC3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8......................................................... MU-67
[PC3-5-4-1] Max Density................................................... MU-67
[PC3-5-4-2] Min Density.................................................... MU-67
[PC3-5-4-3] γ Table No..................................................... MU-68
[PC3-5-4-4] Contrast......................................................... MU-68
[PC3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points............................... MU-68
[PC3-5-4-6] Density.......................................................... MU-68
[PC3-5-4-7] Shift............................................................... MU-69
[PC3-5-4-8] Contrast......................................................... MU-69
[PC3-5-5] Output Format......................................................... MU-69
[PC3-5-5-1] Film Size........................................................ MU-69
[PC3-5-5-2] Medium Type................................................. MU-69
[PC3-5-5-3] Film Orientation............................................. MU-70
[PC3-5-5-4] Border Density............................................... MU-70
[PC3-5-5-5] Polarity.......................................................... MU-70
[PC3-5-5-6] Trim............................................................... MU-70
[PC3-5-5-7] Trim Width..................................................... MU-70
[PC3-5-5-8] Trim Density.................................................. MU-71
[PC3-5-5-9] Number of Copies......................................... MU-71
[PC3-5-5-10] Print Priority................................................... MU-71
0.22
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU)
[PC3-5-5-11] Default Number of Copies............................. MU-71
[PC3-5-5-12] Default Print Priority...................................... MU-71
[PC3-5-5-13] Default Medium Type.................................... MU-72
[PC3-5-5-14] Default Film Orientation................................. MU-72
[PC3-5-5-15] Default Film Size........................................... MU-72
[PC3-5-5-16] Default Border Density.................................. MU-72
[PC3-5-5-17] Default Trim................................................... MU-73
[PC3-5-5-18] Default Polarity.............................................. MU-73
[PC3-5-5-19] Mirror............................................................. MU-73
[PC3-5-5-20] Margin Between Image................................. MU-73
[PC3-5-5-21] Image Layout................................................. MU-74
[PC3-5-5-22] Processing Type............................................ MU-74
[PC3-5-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area............................. MU-75
[PC3-5-5-24] Image Crop Side Area................................... MU-75
[PC3-5-6] Annotation............................................................... MU-75
[PC3-5-6-1] Annotation Font............................................. MU-75
[PC3-5-6-2] Annotation Extend......................................... MU-75
[PC3-5-6-3] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/
Lower Center/Lower Right............................. MU-76
[PC3-6] Common............................................................................ MU-76
[PC3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout............................................ MU-76
[PC3-6-2] Association Count................................................... MU-76
[PC3-6-3] Logging DICOM...................................................... MU-77
[PC3-6-4] Model...................................................................... MU-77
[PC3-6-5] Manufacturer........................................................... MU-77
[PC3-6-6] Default Client.......................................................... MU-78
[PC3-7] Sarmaker........................................................................... MU-78
[PC4] File Transfer................................................................................. MU-82
[PC4-1] Single File.......................................................................... MU-82
[PC4-2] Analysis Data..................................................................... MU-82
[PC4-3] Analysis Data (USB).......................................................... MU-82
[PC4-4] Head Data.......................................................................... MU-83
[PC4-5] G-curve Data..................................................................... MU-83
[PC4-6] Operation Data.................................................................. MU-83
[PC5] Upgrading.................................................................................... MU-84
[PC5-1] Full Install........................................................................... MU-84
[PC5-2] Upgrading.......................................................................... MU-84
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual
0.23
[PC5-3] Full Install (USB)................................................................ MU-86
[PC5-4] Upgrading (USB)............................................................... MU-86
[PC6] OutputFilm................................................................................... MU-87
[PC6-1] Cleaning Film..................................................................... MU-87
[PC6-2] Grid & Flat.......................................................................... MU-87
[PC6-3] SMPTE.............................................................................. MU-88
[PC6-4] No Edge mode................................................................... MU-88
[PC7] F.D.C............................................................................................ MU-89
[PC7-1] Auto F.D.C......................................................................... MU-89
[PC7-2] Check Density.................................................................... MU-89
[PC7-3] 24-Steps............................................................................ MU-90
[PC7-4] Display 24-Steps................................................................ MU-90
[PC7-5] Manual F.D.C..................................................................... MU-90
[PC7-6] Set Collect. T...................................................................... MU-91
[PC7-7] Clear Collect. T................................................................... MU-91
[PC7-8] DM Sensor Monitor............................................................ MU-91
[PC7-9] Density LED ON/OFF........................................................ MU-91
[PC8] Head Check................................................................................. MU-92
[PC8-1] Temperature....................................................................... MU-92
[PC8-2] Fan Operation.................................................................... MU-92
[PC8-3] Head Voltage..................................................................... MU-92
[PC8-4] 16VH.................................................................................. MU-93
[PC8-5] Head Regist....................................................................... MU-93
[PC9] Print Position................................................................................ MU-93
[PC9-1] Side Margin........................................................................ MU-93
[PC9-2] Top Margin......................................................................... MU-94
[PC10] Check Mech................................................................................. MU-95
[PC10-1] Film Removing................................................................... MU-95
[PC10-2] Motor Ope.......................................................................... MU-95
[PC10-3] HEAD U/D.......................................................................... MU-96
[PC10-4] Positioning Film................................................................. MU-96
[PC10-4-1] Unit Ope.................................................................. MU-96
[PC10-5] Sub Scan........................................................................... MU-97
[PC10-6] Sensor Monitor.................................................................. MU-97
[PC10-7] Edge Sensor...................................................................... MU-98
[PC10-7-1] Edge Sen.Posi........................................................ MU-98
[PC10-7-2] Edge Sensor Monitor.............................................. MU-99
0.23
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.24

[PC10-7-3] LED ON/OFF.......................................................... MU-99

[PC10-8] Nip Adjust......................................................................... MU-100

APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE...

........................................................................MU-101

APPENDIX 2. AUTOMATIC INITIAL SETTING TOOL FOR

PC FOR SERVICING (ImagerServicePCSetting).........
........................................................................MU-102

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.24
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) 0.25

SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

(DRYPIX 2000)
How to Use Service Parts List..................................SP-1 07A HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 1.............................SP-17

INDEX.........................................................................SP-2 07B HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 2.............................SP-18

01A COVER 1..............................................................SP-3 08 HEAD...................................................................SP-19

01B COVER 2..............................................................SP-4 09 FILM RELEASE SECTION....................................SP-20

02 FRAME...................................................................SP-5 10A CONTROLLER 1................................................SP-21

03A MAGAZINE SET SECTION 1................................SP-6 10B CONTROLLER 2................................................SP-22

03B MAGAZINE SET SECTION 2................................SP-7 11A SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 1.....................................SP-23

03C MAGAZINE SET SECTION 3................................SP-8 11B SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 2.....................................SP-24

04A REMOVAL SECTION 1.........................................SP-9 11C SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 3.....................................SP-25

04B REMOVAL SECTION 2.......................................SP-10 11D SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 4.....................................SP-26

04C REMOVAL SECTION 3.......................................SP-11 11E SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 5.....................................SP-27

05A CONVEYOR SECTION 1....................................SP-12 11F SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 6.....................................SP-28

05B CONVEYOR SECTION 2....................................SP-13 11G SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 7....................................SP-29

05C CONVEYOR SECTION 3....................................SP-14 11H SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 8....................................SP-30

05D CONVEYOR SECTION 4....................................SP-15 11I SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 9......................................SP-31

06 SUB-SCANNING SECTION..................................SP-16 11J SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 10...................................SP-32

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.25
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) 0.26

11K SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 11..................................SP-33

12 MOUNTING ACCESSORY KIT.............................SP-34

13 CABLE.................................................................SP-35

14 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM..............................................SP-36

15 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE..............................SP-43

16 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring...SP-45

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.26
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) 0.27

SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

(DRYPIX Lite)
How to Use Service Parts List..................................SP-1 09 FILM RELEASE SECTION....................................SP-17

01 COVER..................................................................SP-2 10 CONTROLLER......................................................SP-18

02 FRAME..................................................................SP-3 11A SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 1.....................................SP-19

03A MAGAZINE SET SECTION 1................................SP-4 11B SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 2.....................................SP-20

03B MAGAZINE SET SECTION 2................................SP-5 11C SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 3.....................................SP-21

03C MAGAZINE SET SECTION 3................................SP-6 11D SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 4.....................................SP-22

04A REMOVAL SECTION 1.........................................SP-7 11E SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 5.....................................SP-23

04B REMOVAL SECTION 2.........................................SP-8 11F SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 6.....................................SP-24

05A CONVEYOR SECTION 1......................................SP-9 11G SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 7....................................SP-25

05B CONVEYOR SECTION 2....................................SP-10 11H SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 8....................................SP-26

05C CONVEYOR SECTION 3....................................SP-11 13 CABLE.................................................................SP-27

05D CONVEYOR SECTION 4....................................SP-12 14 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM..............................................SP-28

06 SUB-SCANNING SECTION..................................SP-13 15 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE..............................SP-37

07A HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 1.............................SP-14 16 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring...SP-39

07B HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 2.............................SP-15

08 HEAD...................................................................SP-16
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.27
GENERAL CONTENTS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 0.28

P R E V E N T I V E M A I N T E NA N C E
(PM) (DRYPIX 2000)
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS................. PM-1 3.16 Checking/Adjusting the DC Voltage........................................ PM-27
1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items....................................... PM-1 3.17 Calibration............................................................................... PM-31
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle................................................ PM-6 3.18 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images.............................. PM-32
1.3 Precautions on Periodic Maintenance....................................... PM-6 3.19 Setting Date and Time............................................................. PM-34
3.20 Cleaning Covers...................................................................... PM-35
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW.................. PM-7
3.21 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding.......................... PM-35
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............................. PM-8 3.22 Replacing the Film Cutter........................................................ PM-36
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs.............................. PM-8 3.23 Work Completion Report......................................................... PM-36
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images.................... PM-9
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function.............................................. PM-11
3.4 Checking Fan Operations........................................................ PM-13
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection................................................. PM-14
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing Air Filters................................................. PM-15
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller.................................. PM-16
3.8 Removing Covers.................................................................... PM-17
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Cleaning Inside the Equipment........
................................................................................................ PM-18
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section and Film Release
Section.................................................................................... PM-22
3.11 Greasing.................................................................................. PM-24
3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head.................................................... PM-25
3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Conveyor Exit Roller.............. PM-25
3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt....................................... PM-26
3.15 Reinstalling Covers................................................................. PM-26

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.28
GENERAL CONTENTS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 0.29

P R E V E N T I V E M A I N T E NA N C E
(PM) (DRYPIX Lite)
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM........... PM-1 3.16 Calibration............................................................................... PM-16
1.1 How to Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume..................... PM-1 3.17 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images.............................. PM-17
1.2 Notation of Age.......................................................................... PM-1 3.18 Setting Date and Time............................................................. PM-17
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List...................................... PM-2 3.19 Cleaning Covers...................................................................... PM-18
1.3.1 Maintenance Program at the Age of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 Years................. PM-3 3.20 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding.......................... PM-18
3.21 Replacing the Film Cutter........................................................ PM-19
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW.................. PM-4
3.22 Work Completion Report......................................................... PM-19
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............................. PM-5
3.1 Checking the Error Logs............................................................ PM-5
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images.................... PM-5
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function................................................ PM-6
3.4 Checking Fan Operations.......................................................... PM-6
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection................................................... PM-7
3.6 Cleaning the Air Filters.............................................................. PM-7
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller.................................... PM-8
3.8 Removing Covers...................................................................... PM-8
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Cleaning Inside the Equipment........
.................................................................................................. PM-9
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section and Film Release
Section.................................................................................... PM-12
3.11 Greasing.................................................................................. PM-14
3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head.................................................... PM-14
3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Conveyor Exit Roller.............. PM-15
3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt....................................... PM-15
3.15 Reinstalling Covers................................................................. PM-16

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.29
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN)
INSTALLATION (IN)
(DRYPIX 2000)
1. SPECIFICATIONS................................................. IN-1
1.1 Equipment Dimensions and Weight............................................IN-1
1.2 Environmental Requirements......................................................IN-2
1.3 Electrical Requirements..............................................................IN-4
1.4 Other Specifications....................................................................IN-5
1.5 Equipment Installation Space......................................................IN-5
1.5.1 Installation Space.................................................................................... IN-5
1.5.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work.................................................. IN-5
5. R E M O V I N G S H I P P I N G F I X T U R E S A N D
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW..................... IN-6
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION........................... IN-9
3.1 Precautions on Installation..........................................................IN-9
3.2 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing......................................IN-10
3.2.1 Environment of PC for Servicing........................................................... IN-10
3.2.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing......................................... IN-10
3.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC............................................... IN-11
3.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbols.................................................................... IN-12
3.2.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder......................................................... IN-14
3.2.6 Precautions and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing.IN-15
3.2.7 How to Operate PC-Utility..................................................................... IN-19
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts............................................................IN-24
3.4 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves.........................................IN-25
3.4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)................................................... IN-25
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION............................. IN-28
4.1 Carrying.....................................................................................IN-28
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
0.30
4.2 Unpacking and Unloading.........................................................IN-28
4.2.1 Equipment Main Body........................................................................... IN-28
4.2.2 Sheet-feeder Unit (Option).................................................................... IN-30
4.2.3 Cart (Option)......................................................................................... IN-31
4.2.4 Magazine (Option)................................................................................ IN-31
4.2.5 Expanded Memory Board (Option)....................................................... IN-31
4.2.6 Mounting Accessory Kit (Option)........................................................... IN-31
4.3 Checking Components..............................................................IN-32
ASSEMBLING/INSTALLING OPTIONS................ IN-34
5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures (Tape)..........................................IN-34
5.1.1 Equipment Main Body........................................................................... IN-34
5.1.2 Sheet-feeder Unit.................................................................................. IN-35
5.1.3 Magazine............................................................................................... IN-35
5.2 Assembling of Cart.................................................................IN-35.1
5.3 Temporary Installation onto Cart............................................IN-35.1
5.4 Installing Equipment Fixtures....................................................IN-36
5.4.1 When Installing Only Equipment Main Body......................................... IN-36
5.4.2 When Installing the Equipment with the Sheet-feeder Unit................... IN-38
5.5 Affixing the Car-mounting Tape.................................................IN-40
5.6 Installing the Sheet-feeder Unit to the Equipment Main Body...IN-41
5.7 Exchanging the Image Memory Board......................................IN-48
5.8 Setting Magazines.....................................................................IN-49
5.8.1 Affixing the Film Size Label................................................................... IN-49
5.8.2 Changing the Magazine Size................................................................ IN-50
5.8.3 Setting the Magazine Number.............................................................. IN-50
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.30
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN)
6. CONNECTING CABLES...................................... IN-53
6.1 Connecting the Network Cable..................................................IN-53
6.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance.....IN-54
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT........................ IN-56
7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility.........................................IN-56
7.1.1 Setting the Magazine and Powering ON............................................... IN-56
7.1.2 Starting the M-Utility.............................................................................. IN-57
7.2 System Settings........................................................................IN-58
7.2.1 Configuration Setting............................................................................ IN-58
7.2.2 Operation Panel Settings...................................................................... IN-63
7.2.3 Network Settings................................................................................... IN-65
7.3 Ending System Settings............................................................IN-68
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS................... IN-69
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance
Operations.................................................................................IN-69
8.2 Checking Density......................................................................IN-70
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness
and Scratches...........................................................................IN-71
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function................................................IN-72
8.5 Checking Fan Operations..........................................................IN-74
8.6 Ending the M-Utility...................................................................IN-75
8.7 Settings the Image QC Function...............................................IN-75
8.8 Connecting to the Network........................................................IN-75
9. CLIENT SETTINGS............................................. IN-76
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
0.31
9.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network.......................IN-76
9.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Web Server
Start)..........................................................................................IN-77
9.3 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Starting PC-
Utility)........................................................................................IN-77
9.4 System Settings via PC-Utility...................................................IN-79
9.5 Registering the PC for Servicing...............................................IN-79
9.6 Client Settings...........................................................................IN-80
9.7 Disconnecting the Equipment....................................................IN-83
9.8 Ending the Equipment...............................................................IN-83
10. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION................ IN-84
10.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment ..................................IN-84
10.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment........
..................................................................................................IN-84
10.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment..............................IN-84
11. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT.......................... IN-85
11.1 Backing Up Individual Data.......................................................IN-85
11.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs When Errors Occur
during Installation......................................................................IN-87
11.2.1 Checking Error Logs............................................................................. IN-87
11.2.2 Deleting Error Logs............................................................................... IN-87
11.3 Installation.................................................................................IN-88
11.3.1 Installing the Equipment without Using Fixtures................................... IN-88
11.3.2 Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing with Fixtures........ IN-88
11.3.3 Securing the Equipment Main Body to the Cart.................................... IN-88
11.3.4 Installing the Equipment in a Vehicle.................................................... IN-89
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.31
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN) 0.32

11.4 Cleaning the Equipment............................................................IN-89

11.5 Affixing the Main Power Switch OFF Caution Label..................IN-89

APPENDIX 1 ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING....

........................................................................... IN-90

APPENDIX 2 DENSITOMETER CONVERSION TABLES.....

........................................................................... IN-91

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.32
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN)
INSTALLATION (IN) (DRYPIX Lite)
1. SPECIFICATIONS................................................. IN-1
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW..................... IN-2
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION........................... IN-5
3.1 Precautions on Installation..........................................................IN-5
3.2 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing........................................IN-7
3.3 Flow of PC-Utility Operations......................................................IN-7
3.4 Embedding Anchor Nuts..............................................................IN-7
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION............................... IN-8
4.1 Carrying.......................................................................................IN-8
4.2 Unpacking and Unloading...........................................................IN-8
4.2.1 Equipment Main Body............................................................................. IN-8
4.2.2 Sheet-feeder Unit (Option).................................................................... IN-10
4.2.3 Cart (Option)......................................................................................... IN-10
4.2.4 Magazine (Option)................................................................................ IN-10
4.2.5 Mounting Accessory Kit (Option)........................................................... IN-10
4.3 Checking Components..............................................................IN-10
5. R E M O V I N G S H I P P I N G F I X T U R E S A N D
ASSEMBLING/INSTALLING OPTIONS................ IN-12
5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures (Tape and Buffer material)...........IN-12
5.1.1 Equipment Main Body........................................................................... IN-12
5.1.2 Sheet-feeder Unit.................................................................................. IN-13
5.1.3 Magazine............................................................................................... IN-13
5.2 Assembling of Cart....................................................................IN-13
5.3 Temporary Installation onto Cart...............................................IN-13
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
0.33
5.4 Installing the Sheet-feeder Unit to the Equipment Main Body...IN-14
5.5 Setting Magazines.....................................................................IN-24
5.5.1 Affixing the Film Size Label................................................................... IN-24
5.5.2 Attach the Guide................................................................................... IN-25
5.5.3 Setting the Magazine Number.............................................................. IN-25
6. CONNECTING CABLES...................................... IN-27
6.1 Connecting the Network Cable..................................................IN-27
6.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance.....IN-28
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT........................ IN-30
7.1 Setting the Magazine and Powering ON...................................IN-30
7.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)....................IN-31
7.3 System Settings........................................................................IN-31
7.3.1 Setting 1................................................................................................ IN-32
7.3.2 Setting 2................................................................................................ IN-34
7.3.3 Setting 3................................................................................................ IN-35
7.4 Rebooting the Equipment..........................................................IN-36
7.5 Client Settings ..........................................................................IN-36
8. CHECKING OPERATIONS......................................... IN-40
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance
Operations.................................................................................IN-40
8.2 Checking Density......................................................................IN-41
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness
and Scratches...........................................................................IN-41
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function................................................IN-42
8.4.1 Checking the Head Cover Interlock...................................................... IN-42
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.33
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN) 0.34

8.4.2 Checking the Lower Rear Open/Close Cover Interlock (Only when the APPENDIX 2. DENSITOMETER CONVERSION TABLES....
sheet-feeder unit is installed)................................................................ IN-42 ........................................................................... IN-51
8.5 Checking Fan Operations..........................................................IN-42
8.5.1 Checking the Controller Fan................................................................. IN-42 APPENDIX 3. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE...
8.5.2 Checking the Head Cover Fan.............................................................. IN-43 ........................................................................... IN-59
8.6 Settings the Image QC Function...............................................IN-43
8.7 Power OFF................................................................................IN-44
8.8 Connecting to the Network........................................................IN-44

9. CHECKING CONNECTION.................................. IN-45

9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment ..................................IN-45
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment........
..................................................................................................IN-45
9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment..............................IN-45

10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT.......................... IN-46

10.1 Backing Up Individual Data.......................................................IN-46
10.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs..............................IN-46
10.2.1 Checking Error Logs............................................................................. IN-46
10.2.2 Deleting Error Logs............................................................................... IN-47
10.3 Installing the Equipment............................................................IN-47
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment........................................................................ IN-47
10.3.2 Installation onto Cart............................................................................. IN-47
10.3.3 Securing the Cart with Fixtures............................................................. IN-48
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment............................................................IN-49

APPENDIX 1. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING...

........................................................................... IN-50

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.34
GENERAL CONTENTS PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) 0.35

PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

(DRYPIX 2000)
INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX 2000 - Checklist.....PC-1

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.35
GENERAL CONTENTS PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) 0.36

PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

(DRYPIX Lite)
INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX Lite - Checklist......PC-1

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.36
GENERAL CONTENTS PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) 0.37
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.37
GENERAL CONTENTS PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) 0.38
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.38
GENERAL CONTENTS PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) 0.39
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual 0.39
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.31.2006 00 New release (FM4832) All pages

03.24.2006 01 Revised (FM4903) All pages
06.30.2006 01 Revised (FM4924) 2-5
08.31.2006 02 Revised (FM4958) 3

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 10.02.2006 03 Revised (Change of corporate name and
corporate logo) (FM4992)
5

10.18.2006 03 Revised (FM5036)

02.15.2007 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software 4, 5
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5075)
01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) Cover
04.27.2012 07 Revised (FM6040) 1

SAFETY PRECAUTION
(DRYPIX 2000)

016-201-07E DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual

04.27.2012 FM6040
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-1

1. SAFETY PRECAUTION n Heavy Weights

To avoid accidents, observe the following precautions.
1.1 General Precautions
WARNING
No modification of this equipment is allowed.
n Power Supply
• Be sure to turn OFF the power of the main power switch and switch board before
starting operation. Starting operations with the power ON may result in electric
shock, fire hazards, or machine malfunction. Some parts are not fully discharged
and other parts (e.g. heater) remain heated immediately after power OFF. Be
careful not to touch such parts. When performing steps (e.g. voltage measurement)
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, observe the instructions set forth in
this manual and operate with care to avoid electric shock and other hazards.
• When restarting the machine, turn OFF the power, wait for more than 5 seconds,
and then turn it ON. If the interval from power OFF to ON is too short, the machine
may not be properly started.
• Do not connect any unspecified device.
• In an emergency disconnect the power plug or the inlet Ensure sufficient space
around the power plug or the inlet.
• When installing or removing heavy weights, complete it with an assistant or a
hoisting or other appropriate device. Weights above 20 kg must be lifted by more
than two persons.
• The weight of this equipment is approximately 41 kg for one magazine specifications
and 55 kg for two magazine specifications, with the magazine removed. Take the
following precautions when moving the equipment, etc.
• To prevent injuries resulting in back pain, pay attention to your posture during
the work.
• Be careful not to drop the equipment as this may cause serious injuries.
• Remove the magazine when lifting the equipment.
• The equipment should be lifted by more than one persons in front and more
than one persons at the back. When lifting by two persons, each person should
stand on the left and right side each. As the center of gravity of the equipment
is inclined towards the back, it may turn over or fall.
• When lifting up the equipment, lift at the position shown in the following figure,
hook fingers to the equipment firmly and then lift.

n Drive Section Inspection

To avoid accidents, be sure to turn OFF the power before initiating inspection or
adjustment procedures. When performing an inspection or adjustment procedure
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, operate carefully while observing the
instructions set forth in this manual.

n Safety Devices
Ensure that the accident prevention functions of fuses, interlock switches, panels,
covers, and other safety devices are always operative. Also refrain from introducing
such modifications which may impair the safety device functions.

n Thermal Head Handling Precautions

A heater is used for the thermal head. Touching it during operations may result
in burns. Turn the power OFF and wait until the heater temperature drops before
handling the thermal head.

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-2

n Grounding n Interlock Release Tool

Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts with retaining
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon installation. After the
parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are
securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
To operate the equipment with the upper front cover, upper right cover, lower right
cover, upper small cover, and/or sorter right cover of the equipment opened, use the
special tool provided with this equipment to release the interlock. To avoid danger, do
not touch rotating parts. Also take precautions against getting your hands, feet, hair,
and clothes caught by the equipment.
After completing servicing return the tool back to its original position.

n Other General Precautions

• When servicing the board for maintenance, be sure to wear a wristband to ground
yourself. Failure to do so may result in damage of electronic components on the
board due to static electricity from your body.
• Do not stain or peel off the product nameplates, labels of safety standards, or
product No. indications attached on the machine, and do not attach other labels
over them.
• After completion of operation, return the protective enclosure, fixing screws, and
other removed components to the original positions and fix fully.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-3

2. LABELS n List of Labels

l High Temperature Caution Label
2.1 Caution Labels Be aware that the temperature may be high in the area where the following label
is affixed.

n Locations of Labels

• Heater maximum load power: 50 W x 2

• Thermal head maximum load power: 1152 W

l Caution Label

l Left Cover
Do not touch metal part and the patient at the same time under normal operation
or service.
l LAN Connector
• Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this
equipment. Only IEC60950/UL60950 specification cables are suitable for
connection to this connector.
• When touching the blind plate of the USB connector, be sure to use a wristband
to ground yourself. Otherwise the equipment may not operate properly.

l Power Cable

m For U.S. and Canada

• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
• Hospital-grade Type Plug
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
• Cable type: SJT

m For Europe
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
• Cable type: H05VV-F

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-4

2.2 Other Labels

n Locations of Other Labels

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-5

n List of Labels l Cleaning Roller Cleaning Instruction Label

l Rating Information Label

Old Label

l Film Jam Cleaning Label

New Label

l Main Power Switch OFF Caution Label

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-6

2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark

l Earth Mark

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-7

3. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS 4. CLASSIFICATION

Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC 60950 for data processing
equipment and IEC 60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations
shall comply with the system standard IEC 60601-1-1. Everybody who connects
additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part configures a medical
system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements
of IEC 60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local
representative.
1) According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
2) According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
NO APPLIED PART
3) Protection against harmful ingress of water
IPXO
4) According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of
a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous
oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5) According to the mode of operation
CONTINUOUS OPERATION

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) All pages

04.27.2012 07 Revised (FM6040) 1, 3-6, 10

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL

SAFETY PRECAUTION (DRYPIX Lite)

016-201-07E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

04.27.2012 FM6040
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-1

1. SAFETY PRECAUTION n Heavy Weights

To avoid accidents, observe the following precautions.
1.1 General Precautions
WARNING
No modification of this equipment is allowed.
n Power Supply
• Be sure to turn OFF the power of the main power switch and switch board before
starting operation. Starting operations with the power ON may result in electric
shock, fire hazards, or machine malfunction. Some parts are not fully discharged
and other parts (e.g. heater) remain heated immediately after power OFF. Be
careful not to touch such parts. When performing steps (e.g. voltage measurement)
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, observe the instructions set forth in
this manual and operate with care to avoid electric shock and other hazards.
• When restarting the machine, turn OFF the power, wait for more than 5 seconds,
and then turn it ON. If the interval from power OFF to ON is too short, the machine
may not be properly started.
• When using at 240V in United States, power must be supplied from center-tapped,
240V, single phase circuit.
• Do not connect any unspecified device.
• In an emergency disconnect the power plug or the inlet Ensure sufficient space
around the power plug or the inlet.
• When installing or removing heavy weights, complete it with an assistant or a
hoisting or other appropriate device. Weights above 20 kg must be lifted by more
than two persons.
• The weight of this equipment is approximately 30 kg for one magazine specifications
and 41 kg for two magazine specifications, with the magazine removed. Take the
following precautions when moving the equipment, etc.
• To prevent injuries resulting in back pain, pay attention to your posture during
the work.
• Be careful not to drop the equipment as this may cause serious injuries.
• Remove the magazine when lifting the equipment.
• The equipment should be lifted by more than one persons in front and more
than one persons at the back. When lifting by two persons, each person should
stand on the left and right side each. As the center of gravity of the equipment
is inclined towards the back, it may turn over or fall.
• When lifting up the equipment, lift at the position shown in the following figure,
hook fingers to the equipment firmly and then lift.

n Drive Section Inspection

To avoid accidents, be sure to turn OFF the power before initiating inspection or
adjustment procedures. When performing an inspection or adjustment procedure
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, operate carefully while observing the
instructions set forth in this manual.

n Safety Devices
Ensure that the accident prevention functions of fuses, interlock switches, panels,
covers, and other safety devices are always operative. Also refrain from introducing
such modifications which may impair the safety device functions. B0001.ai

n Thermal Head Handling Precautions

A heater is used for the thermal head. Touching it during operations may result
in burns. Turn the power OFF and wait until the heater temperature drops before
handling the thermal head.

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-2

n Grounding n Interlock Release Tool

Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts with retaining
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon installation. After the
parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are
securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
To operate the equipment with the head cover opened, use the special tool provided
with this equipment to release the interlock. To avoid danger, do not touch rotating
parts. Also take precautions against getting your hands, feet, hair, and clothes caught
by the equipment.
The equipment does not have an interlock release jig. Purchase the interlock release
tool as a service part.

n Other General Precautions

• When servicing the board for maintenance, be sure to wear a wristband to ground
yourself. Failure to do so may result in damage of electronic components on the
board due to static electricity from your body.
• Do not stain or peel off the product nameplates, labels of safety standards, or
product No. indications attached on the machine, and do not attach other labels
over them.
• After completion of operation, return the protective enclosure, fixing screws, and
other removed components to the original positions and fix fully.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-3

2. LABELS n List of Labels

l High Temperature Caution Label
2.1 Caution Labels Be aware that the temperature may be high in the area where the following label
is affixed.

n Locations of Labels
Head high temperature
caution label FPDI0012.AI

• Heater maximum load power: 48 W x 2

• Thermal head maximum load power: 1152 W

l Caution Label (network cable connection and power cable

connection)
<NOTE>
For this equipment, 2 types of CAUTION Labels are respectively labeled
corresponding to its specification.
Caution label
<IEC60601-1 : Ed3 : 2005> <IEC60601-1 : Ed2 : 2004>

09Safe0024.ai 09Safe0010.ai

l Left Cover
Do not touch metal part and the patient at the same time under normal operation
or service.
l LAN Connector
• Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this
equipment. Only UTP type straight LAN cable of category 5E or more are
suitable for connection to this connector.
Caution label • When touching the blind plate of the USB connector, be sure to use a wristband
to ground yourself. Otherwise the equipment may not operate properly.

B0004.ai

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-4

l Power Cable 2.2 Other Labels

CAUTION
If the power cable is not packed together with the equipment, be sure to use a
n Locations of Other Labels
power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.
Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an
electric shock or a fire.

m For U.S. and Canada

• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
• Hospital-grade Type Plug
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
• Cable type: SJT

m For Europe
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
Rating information label
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
B0007.ai

• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher

• Cable type: H05VV-F Caution label

B0008.ai

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-5

n List of Labels 2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark

l Rating Information Label
n Location of Earth Mark

B0005.ai

l Caution Label

Earth mark
B0006.ai
B0002.ai

n Earth Mark

FPCI0129.AI

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-6

3. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS 4. CLASSIFICATION

Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950 for data processing
equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations
shall comply with the system standard IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005
chapter16. Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part
or signal output part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that
the system complies with the requirements of IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-
1:2005 chapter16. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local
representative.
1) According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
2) According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
NO APPLIED PART
3) Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter
IP00
4) According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of
a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous
oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5) According to the mode of operation
CONTINUOUS OPERATION

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-7

5. CAUTION ON ELECTROMAGNETIC 5.2 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2

WAVES • Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs
to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as
follows.
• Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical • The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
devices to the IEC60601-1-2, Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC. exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
interference in a typical medical installation. immunity of the machine.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not List of Cables
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to other devices in the vicinity. FUJIFILM
Name General specification
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular parts code
installation. I/F Cable - TIA/EIA-568 Cat5E or more.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be Straight cable of UTP type.
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures; • The machine should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving device. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the machine should be observed to verify
• Increase the separation between the equipment. normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
other device(s) are connected.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-8

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The cus- The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The cus-
tomer or the user of the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment. tomer or the user of the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance Electromagnetic
Immunity test IEC 60601test level Compliance level environment -
RF emissions The machine uses RF energy only for its inter- guidance
CISPR 11 nal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are
Group 1
very low and are not likely to cause any inter- Electrostatic discharge ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be
ference in nearby electronic equipment. (ESD) ±4kV contact wood, concrete or ce-
±8kV air ±6kV contact ramic tile.
RF emissions IEC 61000-4-2 If floors are covered
Class A
CISPR 11 ±2kV air with synthetic materi-
The machine is suitable for use in all establish- ±4kV air al, the relative humid-
Harmonic emissions ments other than domestic and those directly ±8kV air ity should be at least
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage power 30%.
supply network that supplies buildings used for
Voltage fluctuations/ domestic purposes. Electrical fast ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
flicker emissions Complies transient/burst IEC lines lines should be that of a
IEC 61000-3-3 ±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or
61000-4-4 lines lines hospital environment.
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality
should be that of a
±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or
hospital environment.
Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) should be that of a
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
power supply input hospital environment.
lines 40 % UT 40 % UT If the user of the ma-
(60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) chine requires contin-
IEC 61000-4-11 for 5 cycles for 5 cycles ued operation during
power mains interrup-
70 % UT 70 % UT tions, it is recommend-
(30% dip inUT) (30% dip in UT) ed that the machine
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles be powered from an
uninterruptible power
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT supply or a battery.
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT)
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency mag-
(50/60 Hz) magnetic netic fields should be
field at levels characteristic
of a typical location in
IEC 61000-4-8 a typical commercial
or hospital environ-
ment.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-9

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment and the machine
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The cus-
tomer or the user of the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment. The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF dis-
turbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the machine can help prevent electromag-
Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance netic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF commu-
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
test test level level nications equipment (transmitters) and the machine as recommended below, according to the
maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
IEC 61000-4-6 150kHz - part of the machine, including cables, than output power of m
80MHz the recommended separation distance cal- transmitter
culated from the equation applicable to the W 150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz
frequency of the transmitter. d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3

Recommended separation distance 0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23

Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 Vrms d = 1.2 0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73

IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz - 1 1.2 1.2 2.3

d = 1.2 80 MHz - 800 MHz
2.5GHz 10 3.8 3.8 7.3
d = 2.3 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
100 12 12 23
where P is the maximum output power rat-
ing of the transmitter in watts (W) according For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separa-
to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the tion distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency
recommended separation distance in metres of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
(m). according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range ap-
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, plies.
as determined by an electromagnetic site NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
survey,a should be less than the compliance fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
level in each frequency range.b

Interference may occur in the vicinity of

equipment marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) tele-
phones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broad-
cast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environ-
ment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If
the measured field strength in the location in which the machine is used exceeds the appli-
cable RF compliance, the machine should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnor-
mal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or
relocating the machine.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-10

6. CAUTIONS ON NETWORK
• Before connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the
other systems are not affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as
network separation.
• After modifying the network, confirm that this system is not affected. If it is affected,
take appropriate countermeasures including.
• Replacing connected devices
• Connecting additional devices
• Removing devices
• Updating devices
• Upgrading devices

016-201-07E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-10

04.27.2012 FM6040
 SAFETY PRECAUTION-11

BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-11

01.27.2012 FM5920
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.31.2006 00 New release (FM4832) All pages

03.24.2006 01 Revised (FM4903) All pages
06.30.2006 01 Revised (FM4924) 1, 3-9
08.31.2006 02 Revised (FM4958) 1, 3, 7

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 02.15.2007 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5075)
1-3

03.31.2008 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software 7

version V2.2, V2.3 and V2.4, etc.) (FM5332)
01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) All pages
04.27.2012 07 Revised (FM6040) 8, 9, 10

SPECIFICATIONS

016-201-07E DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

04.27.2012 FM6040
 SPECIFICATIONS-1

1. SPECIFICATIONS 1.1.2 DRYPIX Lite

Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks
DRYPIX LITE E Overseas specifications main unit 000Y5001102 Without magazine
1.1 Part Name (Countries except for China)
Film removal unit - -

1.1.1 DRYPIX 2000 Buffer memory board: 1 102N100037 1GB

Individual data: 1 - CD-R
Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks
Main unit software: 1 - CD-R
DRYPIX 2000 E Overseas specifications main 000Y5001 Without magazine
unit (VOS) Operation manual - -
Film removal unit: standard 810Y100001 Magazine can be inserted Head data: 1 - CD-R
only up to two by installing op-
tional sheet-feeder unit. Reference guide / Quality control - CD-R
guide: 1
Power cable - None
DRYPIX LITE China specifications main unit 000Y5001103 Without magazine
Buffer memory board: 1 102N100001 512 MB x1 CN E
Film removal unit - -
Individual data FD: 2 - FD (Individual data)
FD (Head data) Buffer memory board: 1 102N100037 1GB

Main unit software: 1 - CD-R Individual data: 1 - CD-R

Operation Manual - - Main unit software: 1 - CD-R

Quality Assurance Function - - Operation manual - -

Operation Manual Head data: 1 - CD-R
Reference guide / Quality control - CD-R
guide: 1

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-1
 SPECIFICATIONS-2

1.2 List of Optional Parts 1.2.2 DRYPIX Lite

Lists of components are described below. Product Code Product Parts No. Remarks
Product codes ending in # are for domestic use in Japan while those ending in E are DPX LITE FEEDER E Sheet-Feeder Unit 810Y10045 Without magazine
for overseas use.
DPX LITE MAGAZINE L E Large magazine 819Y100013 35 x 43 cm size
<NOTE>
DPX LITE MAGAZINE S E Small magazine 819Y100012 26 x 36 cm size
The following List of Components enumerate items required for each configuration, so 25 x 30 cm size
they do not correspond to units (quantities) of orders or packages. 20 x 25 cm size
Use the product codes (Product Code) indicated only as a reference for unpacking Default setting size:
and follow the order lists provided separately when placing orders. 26 x 36 cm size
DPX 2000 AC CORD UL E Power cable 136N0427 Common to DRYPIX
(U.S.A. hospital grade) 2000
1.2.1 DRYPIX 2000
DPX 2000 AC CORD EU E Power cable (EU) 136N0377 Common to DRYPIX
Product Code Product Parts No. Remarks 2000
DPX 2000 FEEDER E Sheet-Feeder Unit 810Y0234 Without magazine DPX 2000 AC CORD UK E Power cable (U.K.) 136N0450 Common to DRYPIX
2000
DPX 2000 MAGAZINE L E Large magazine 819Y100001 35 x 43 cm size
DPX 2000 10x12 KIT E 25 x 30 cm size film kit 898Y100173 Common to DRYPIX
DPX 2000 MAGAZINE S E Small magazine 819Y100002 26 x 36 cm size 2000
25 x 30 cm size ・Label
20 x 25 cm size ・Guide
Default setting size:
26 x 36 cm size
DPX 2000 MBL KIT E Mounting accessory kit 898Y100007 Fixtures for mobile type,
buffing tapes
DPX 2000 AC CORD UL E Power cable 136N0427 Common to IR362
(U.S.A. hospital grade)
DPX 2000 AC CORD EU E Power cable (EU) 136N0377 Common to IR346
DPX 2000 AC CORD UK E Power cable (U.K.) 136N0450 Common to DRYPIX
4000
DPX 2000 1GB MEM E Expanded frame buffer 102N100002 1GB
memory
DPX 2000 10x12 KIT E 25 x 30 cm size film kit 898Y100173 ・Label
・Guide

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-2
 SPECIFICATIONS-3

1.3 General Specifications l Image Compression Rate

100 ±0.5 % (Maximum 1.3 % image chipping)
n Recording Method l Curl After Processing
Thermal head method DRYPIX 2000 : Floating from Shaukasten below 20 mm
DRYPIX Lite : Floating from Shaukasten below 25 mm
n First Printing Time (Test printing)
35 x 43 cm size: Approximately 105 seconds
n Film
26 x 36 cm size: Approximately 80 seconds
25 x 30 cm size: Approximately 90 seconds l Applicable Types
20 x 25 cm size: Approximately 70 seconds DI-HT
n Processing Ability l Applicable Film Size/Number of Sheets in One Pack
35 x 43 cm size: Approximately 50 films/hour 101 sheets
26 x 36 cm size: Approximately 75 films/hour
25 x 30 cm size: Approximately 65 films/hour l Number of Supplies
20 x 25 cm size: Approximately 90 films/hour Maximum 2 supplies
(Upper: Standard/ Lower: Option)
n Start-up Time • Two magazines can be used together
Approximately 4 min. (Room temperature 25 ˚C) • Magazine film size setting is service setting
Approximately 3 min. (Room temperature 25 ˚C/ Sleep mode)
l Loading Method
n Image Quality Daylight conditions loading

l Recording Resolution l Maximum Ejected Film Capacity

12 bits DRYPIX 2000 : 50 films
DRYPIX Lite : 20 films
l Maximum Density
n Input I/F
Dmax 3.0
DICOM Network input only, 1 channel
l Recording Pixel Size
84.7 µm (300 dpi) n Network Connection Interface
• 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (automatic switching)
l Maximum Number of Recording Pixels
• Half duplex/Full duplex (automatic switching)
35 x 43 cm size: 4160 x 5008 pix
26 x 36 cm size: 4212 x 2972 pix
25 x 30 cm size: 2912 x 3514 pix
20 x 25 cm size: 2928 x 2334 pix
l Thermal Head Heat Generation Device Width
357.6 mm (No. of heat generation devices: 4224)

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-3
 SPECIFICATIONS-4

n Network Connection n Image Processing

l DICOM Protocol l Interpolation
Direct connection (standard) SSM interpolation, A-VR interpolation (Can be switched automatically for each AE
Title by Configuration settings)
l TOSHIBA Protocol
Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link l Tone Processing
BAR method, SAR method (Can be switched automatically for each AE Title by
l FINP Protocol Configuration settings)
Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link
l Format
n Modality Connection
m Standard Format (for all film sizes)
l A/D-I/F Connection (Analog/Digital) 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40, 42, 48, 49, 54,
56, 60, 63, 64, 70
Connection via DRYPIX Link
Applicable equipment: Diagnostic devices such as CT/MRI m Mixed Format
l E-I/F Connection 35 x 43 cm size portrait mix: six types
26 x 36 cm size portrait mix: one type
Network connection via DRYPIX Link 26 x 36 cm size landscape mix: four types
Applicable equipment: Image reader after FCR 7000, MF-300/MF-300S/MF- 20 x 25 cm size portrait mix: one type
300L, FN-PS551 20 x 25 cm size landscape mix: four types
n DICOM Connection Specifications n Memory Capacity (1 slot only)
l Supported DICOM services DRYPIX 2000 : Standard 512 MB, maximum 1 GB (Option)
DRYPIX Lite : Standard 1GB
• Verification SOP Class
• Basic GrayScale Print Management Meta SOP Class n Image Spooling
• Print Job SOP Class Received image data is spooled in the DRAM until completion of printing.
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class Total spool capacity of unprinted images: 235 MB (Standard)/747 MB (Maximum)
• Print Queue Management SOP Class
• Presentation LUT SOP Class n Density Correction
Automatic density correction function
l Number of Connectable Units
Maximum 64 (client) can be registered
l Number of Simultaneous Connection Associations
Maximum 10
l Number of Allowable Film Boxes in One Session
32
l Maximum Input Image Size
Row: 7000, Column: 7000

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-4
 SPECIFICATIONS-5

n Noise
l DRYPIX 2000
Printing: Approximately 49 dB
Stand-by: Approximately 42 dB
l DRYPIX Lite
Printing: Approximately 53 dB
Stand-by: Approximately 45 dB

n Earthquake Measures (DRYPIX 2000 only)

Fall prevention fixture kit (Optional mounting accessory kit)

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-5
 SPECIFICATIONS-6

1.4 Equipment Dimensions and Weight n Weight

l 1 Magazine Specifications
1.4.1 DRYPIX 2000
Approximately 43 kg (Not including the magazine and film)
n Dimensions l 2 Magazine Specifications
Approximately 59 kg (Not including the magazine and film)
l 1 Magazine Specifications
530 mm x 590 mm x 400 mm (W x D x H) n Center of gravity
l 2 Magazine Specifications l 1 Magazine Specifications
530 mm x 590 mm x 580 mm (W x D x H) Height: 177 mm
<REMARKS> From right side: 261 mm
From rear side: 183 mm
External depth represents a measurement including the magazine for 35 x 43 cm film.
(Approx. 470 mm including the magazine for 26 x 36 cm/20 x 25 cm film) l 2 Magazine Specifications
Height: 280 mm
530 mm
From right side: 261 mm
From rear side: 179 mm

590 mm

470 mm

400 mm

580 mm

180 mm
C0004.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-6
 SPECIFICATIONS-7

1.4.2 DRYPIX Lite n Weight

n Dimensions l 1 Magazine Specifications
Approximately 32 kg (Not including the magazine and film)
l 1 Magazine Specifications
l 2 Magazine Specifications
530 mm x 590 mm x 365 mm (W x D x H)
Approximately 43 kg (Not including the magazine and film)
l 2 Magazine Specifications
530 mm x 590 mm x 545 mm (W x D x H) n Center of gravity
<REMARKS>
l 1 Magazine Specifications
External depth represents a measurement including the magazine for 35 x 43 cm film. Height: 177 mm
(Approx. 470 mm including the magazine for 26 x 36 cm/20 x 25 cm film) From right side: 261 mm
From rear side: 183 mm
530 mm
l 2 Magazine Specifications
Height: 280 mm
From right side: 261 mm
From rear side: 179 mm

590 mm

470 mm C0002.ai

365 mm

545 mm

180 mm
C0001.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-7
 SPECIFICATIONS-8

1.5 Environmental Requirements n When Mounted Onboard a Vehicle

l Operating (with the Power Conducted)
n When Installed at a Fixed Location
Temperature/Humidity : 15 ˚C (40 - 70 %RH) to 30 ˚C (15 - 70 %RH)
l Operating (with the Power Conducted) (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa
Temperature/Relative humidity : 15 ˚C (40 - 70 %RH) to 30 ˚C (15 - 70 %RH)
(No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa

l Non-operating (with No Power Conducted/Not Including Film)

l Non-operating (with No Power Conducted/Not Including Film)
Temperature : 0 to 45 ˚C (No freezing)
Relative humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa
l Transit or Storage
Temperature : -10 to 50 ˚C (No freezing)
Relative humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa
Temperature : -10 to 55 ˚C (no icing allowed)
Humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa
n Floor (Installation Surface) Vibration Requirement
Frequency: 10 to 55 Hz
Amplitude: 0.015 mm or less
n Floor Levelness
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around

n Floor Flatness
10 mm or less

n Static Magnetic Field

DC 100 Gauss or less

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-8
 SPECIFICATIONS-9

n Vibration Conditions When Mounted Onboard a Vehicle 1.6 Electrical Requirements

(When the Optional Mounting Accessory Kit is Used.)
• Random vibration 5 to 500Hz n Frequency
• 24-hour vibrations for each of X, Y and Z axis Single phase 50 to 60 Hz
72 hours in totality (300,000 km are assumed.)
• Acceleration 1G n Line Voltage
100 - 240 VAC
Acceptable variation: ±10%
Single-phase

n Capacity
l DRYPIX 2000
500 VA or less
l DRYPIX Lite
700 VA or less

n Rated Current
100 - 240 VAC/5 - 2 A

n Power Consumption
Maximum 500 W

n Electric Energy
Printing: Approximately 270 Wh
Stand-by: Approximately 150 Wh
Sleep mode: Approximately 100 Wh
Remote standby mode: Approximately 10 Wh

n Maximum Heat Generation

Printing: Approximately 1000 kJ
Stand-by: Approximately 550 kJ

n Heater Maximum Load Power

48 W x 2

n Thermal Head Maximum Load Power

1152 W

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-9
 SPECIFICATIONS-10

n Grounding Resistance 1.7 Equipment Installation Space

100 Ω or less
<NOTE>
n Overload Protection The following space does not include space for people.
10 A

n Power Cable 1.7.1 DRYPIX 2000

CAUTION n Installation Space
If the power cable is not packed together with the equipment, be sure to use a Front: Magazine S; More than 400 mm
power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. Magazine L; More than 500 mm
Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an Rear: More than 150 mm
electric shock or a fire. Top: More than 500 mm
Left: More than 50 mm
l For U.S. and Canada Right: More than 50 mm

• UL-listed detachable power supply cable

n Space Required for Maintenance Work
• Hospital-grade Type Plug
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor Front: Magazine S; More than 400 mm
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher Magazine L; More than 500 mm
Rear: More than 200 mm
• Cable type: SJT Top: More than 700 mm
Left: More than 100 mm
l For Europe Right: More than 100 mm
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
• Cable type: H05VV-F

n Network Cable
{IN (DRYPIX 2000):6.1_Connecting the Network Cable}
{IN (DRYPIX Lite):6.1_Connecting the Network Cable}

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-10
 SPECIFICATIONS-11

1.7.2 DRYPIX Lite 1.8 Disposing the Equipment

n Installation Space When disposing the equipment, remove the CPU board first. Be sure to return the
removed CPU board to the Service Parts Center.
Front: More than 500 mm
Rear: More than 150 mm
Top: More than 500 mm
Left: More than 70 mm
Right: More than 120 mm

n Space Required for Maintenance Work

Front: More than 500 mm
Rear: More than 200 mm
Top: More than 700 mm
Left: More than 200 mm
Right: More than 200 mm

Back

Left Right Top

Front Back

Front

C0003.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX 2000 / DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-11
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.31.2006 00 New release (FM4832) All pages

03.24.2006 01 Revised (FM4903) All pages
06.30.2006 01 Revised (FM4924) 4-7, 10, 13, 14, 16, 19, 21, 22, 27,
34, 35, 37-39

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 08.31.2006

08.31.2006
02
02
Revised (FM4958)
Revised (FM4958)
5, 6, 16-23, 28, 29, 31-36, 38-47
5, 6, 16-23, 28, 29, 31-36, 38-47
10.02.2006 03 Revised (Change of corporate name and 42, 44
corporate logo) (FM4992)
10.18.2006 03 Revised (FM5036) 17
02.15.2007 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software 1, 4, 6, 14, 17-21, 26-28, 34-37,
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5075) 37.1, 37.2, 39-59
03.31.2008 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software 5, 21, 26
version V2.2, V2.3 and V2.4, etc.) (FM5332)
01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) Cover

DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 04.27.2012 07 Revised (FM6040) 2

(DRYPIX 2000)

016-201-07E DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual

04.27.2012 FM6040
 MD-1
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT

1.1 Functions of Equipment

n Outline of Equipment
• This equipment is a network printer dedicated to DICOM protocol, and adopts the
thermal head recording method.
• Film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, and 20 x 25 cm can be used. 25 x 30 cm size
films can also be used by using the optional 25 x 30 cm film kit.
• It has a processing ability of 50 sheets/hour for 35 x 43 cm size film, 75 sheets/hour
for 26 x 36 cm size film, 90 sheets/hour for 20 x 25 cm size film, and 65 sheets/hour
for 25 x 30 cm size film.
• The equipment is standard-equipped with one magazine slot, however by mounting
the sheet-feeder unit, magazine slot can be increased to two. Use of two magazine
slots allows use of two types of film sizes together. Both magazine slots can also be
set with the same type of film.
• Up to seven magazines can be identified for each magazine slot, which means
that seven types of films can be used as desired by replacing the magazines.
Data identified according to magazine include film size, number of remaining films,
density correction data.
• Films can be loaded with the magazines set in the equipment in a completely bright
room.
• The equipment has an automatic density measurement function which automatically
outputs image patterns required for density measurement and measures density.
• Because it is compact, it can be installed anywhere.
• Power consumption of the equipment can be saved by setting the power saving
mode.
• The following DICOM protocols are supported.
• Verification SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Grayscale Print Management SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Job SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Queue Management SOP Class (SCP)
• Presentation LUT SOP Class (SCP)
• It can be mounted on medical examination buses, etc. (Supports options and
variations)

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-1
 MD-2
1.2 System Configuration l System Configuration Example 2

This device use a compliant network with IEEE802.3 and adopts FRUP as a data
communication protocol.
<NOTE>
If the network is shut down due to a network device failure or any other cause , image
data is no longer transferred to this device.

n Connecting with Dicom Compatible Devices

l System Configuration Example 1

l System Configuration Example 3

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-2
 MD-3
l System Configuration Example 4 l System Configuration Example 6

l System Configuration Example 5

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-3
 MD-4
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts

1.3.1 External View

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-4

1.3.2 Operation Panel
n Layout
MD-5
n Names and Functions
No. Name Color Function
1 Message display - 16 characters x 2 lines LCD
2 Status lamp (*) Green When lit: Normal (Printable)
When blinking: Currently performing initialization self-
diagnosis
Printing
Currently powering OFF
Orange When blinking: Film empty/level 0 error/level 1 error has
occurred
3 Counter key - Refer to “nAction When a Key is Pressed”
(UP key)
“nAction When a Key is Pressed”
4 Counter reset key -
(DOWN key)
5 Automatic density -
measurement key
(ENTER key)
6 Offline key -
(CANCEL key)
7 Power switch Green Press to turn ON/OFF the power of the equipment
8 Sleep mode lamp - When lit: At sleep mode
When OFF: Normal
9 Power lamp Green When lit: Main power switch is ON.
When OFF: Main power switch is OFF.
* : Cannot set status lamp.
As the status lamp cannot be controlled until the equipment OS is started, if electric
errors occur, the status lamp will go off.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-5
 MD-6
n Action When a Key is Pressed
Combination of keys pressed
Equipment status Pressed time <UP> key + <UP> key +
<UP> key <DOWN> key <ENTER> key <CANCEL> key
<DOWN> key <CANCEL> key
Currently displaying Less than 2 sec. - - - - - -
version
More than 2 sec. - - - Shifts to U-Utility mode - Shifts to M-Utility mode
Less than 5 sec.
More than 5 sec. - - - - Starts Web Server -
Idling Less than 2 sec. Displays user counter Resets user counter Executes automatic - - -
{MU:2.4 [8]} {MU:2.4 [9]} density measurement
{MU:2.4 [10]}
More than 2 sec. - - - Shifts to U-Utility mode - Shifts to M-Utility mode
Less than 5 sec.
More than 5 sec. - - - - Starts Web Server -
U-Utility/M-Utility Less than 2 sec. Displays upper items of Displays lower items of Confirms the selected Cancels the displayed - -
menu tree menu tree menu, shifts the display menu.
to a lower tree level
menu, or executes the
menu

More than 2 sec. - - - Ends U-Utility/M-Utility - -

Less than 5 sec. mode and shifts to on-
line mode

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-6
 MD-7
1.3.3 Layout of External Interface Connectors CAUTION
When touching the blind plate of the USB connector, be sure to use a wristband
to ground yourself. Otherwise the equipment may not operate properly.

<NOTE>
It is impossible to use two USB memories simultaneously. Only the one
recognized first will be enabled.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-7
 MD-8
1.3.4 Layout of Units

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-8
 MD-9
1.3.5 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions Section Symbol Name Type Remarks

n Magazine Set Section/Removal Section Upper maga-

zine set section
SA11 Film size detection sensor Penetration
1 (Upper) type sensor
• Upper magazine detec-
tion
(A1) (PI: 5mm) • Detection of magazine
number by combination
SA12 Film size detection sensor Penetration of sensor state
2 (Upper) type sensor
(PI: 5mm)
SA13 Film size detection sensor Penetration
3 (Upper) type sensor
(PI: 5mm)
Upper removal MB11 Film removing motor (Up- 2-phase Drives suction cup arm
section (B1) per) pulse motor
SB11 Suction cup arm HP de- Penetration ON when suction cup
tection sensor (Upper) type sensor arm is at HP
(PI: 5mm)
SB12 Film surface detection Penetration ON when film surface is
sensor (Upper) type sensor detected/OFF during film
(PI: 5mm) suction
Suction cup arm upper Penetration ON when upper dead-
SB13 dead-point detection sen- type sensor point is detected
sor (Upper) (PI: 5mm)

<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor: Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor: Film present/ Detects actuator

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-9
 MD-10
n Conveyor Section/Sub-Scanning Section Section Symbol Name Type Remarks
Conveyor sec- MD11 Conveyance motor 2-phase Conveys film from re-
tion (D1) pulse motor moval section to convey-
or exit
MD12 Reference plate drive mo- 2-phase Moves film positioning
tor (Upper) pulse motor guide assembly refer-
ence plate, and positions
film
SD11 Conveyance entrance Reflection ON when film is at upper
sensor (Upper) type sensor conveyor entrance
SD12 Conveyance exit sensor Reflection ON when film is between
type sensor cleaning roller and platen
roller
SD13 Reference plate HP de- Penetration ON when film position-
tection sensor (Upper) type sensor ing guide assembly
(PI: 5mm) reference plate is at HP
(open)
SD14 Cleaning roller detection Reflection ON when cleaning roller
sensor type sensor is detected
Sub-scanning ME1 Sub-scanning motor 5-phase Sub-scanning section
section (E) pulse motor film conveyance motor
ME1 driver board is set
part with ME1

<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor: Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor: Film present/ Detects actuator

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-10
 MD-11
n Head/Film Edge Sensor Section Symbol Name Type Remarks
Head (H) MH1 Head up/down drive mo- 2-phase Perform thermal head
tor pulse motor pressurization/depres-
surization
H1 Thermal head - -
HH1, Head heater - Adjust thermal head tem-
HH2 perature
TPH1 Thermal protector - Cuts off head power,
head heater (HH1, HH2)
power when the thermal
head is abnormally hot
SH1 Head position detection Penetration ON when the head arm
sensor type sensor is at HP (When depres-
(PI: 5mm) surization)
THH6 Ambience thermistor Thermistor Controller vicinity tem-
perature detection
Scanner (S) SS1 Film edge sensor 1 - • PIS25A board
• Detects left/right edge
SS2 Film edge sensor 2 - positions of 35x43 cm
size film

<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor: Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor: Film present/ Detects actuator

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-11
 MD-12
n Frame/Covers Section Symbol Name Type Remarks
Upper frame SK11 Rear cover interlock Microswitch When the rear open/
(K1) switch (Upper) close cover is open,
+24V power supplied to
load parts is cut off
SK12 Head cover interlock Microswitch When the head cover is
switch open, +24V power sup-
plied to load parts is cut
off
FANK1 Controller fan DC fan -
Cover (P) FANP1 Head cooling fan 1 DC fan Voltage control
FANP2 Head cooling fan 2 DC fan Voltage control

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-12
 MD-13
n Sheet-Feeder Unit (Option) Section Symbol Name Type Remarks
Lower maga- SA21 Film size detection sensor Penetration • Lower magazine detec-
zine set section 1 (Lower) type sensor tion
(A2) (PI: 5mm) • Detects magazine
number when com-
SA22 Film size detection sensor Penetration bined with sensor state
2 (Lower) type sensor
(PI: 5mm)
SA23 Film size detection sensor Penetration
3 (Lower) type sensor
(PI: 5mm)
Lower removal MB21 Film removing motor 2-phase Drives suction cup arm
section (B2) (Lower) pulse motor
SB21 Suction cup arm HP de- Penetration ON when suction cup
tection sensor (Lower) type sensor arm is at HP
(PI: 5mm)
SB22 Film surface detection Penetration ON when film surface is
sensor (Lower) type sensor detected/OFF when film
(PI: 5mm) is suctioned
SB23 Suction cup arm upper Penetration ON when upper dead-
dead-point detection sen- type sensor point is detected
sor (Lower) (PI: 5mm)
Lower film posi- MD22 Reference plate drive mo- 2-phase Moves film positioning
tioning section tor (Lower) pulse motor guide assembly refer-
(D2) ence plate, and positions
film
SD21 Conveyance entrance Reflection ON when film is at lower
sensor (Lower) type sensor conveyor section en-
trance
SD23 Reference plate HP de- Penetration ON when film position-
tection sensor (Lower) type sensor ing guide assembly
(PI: 5mm) reference plate is at HP
(open)
Lower frame SK21 Rear cover interlock Microswitch When the rear lower
(K2) switch (Lower) open/close cover is
open, +24V power sup-
plied to load parts is cut
off

<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor: Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor: Film present/ Detects actuator

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-13

1.3.6 Board Layout Name
LED15A
PDD15A
CPU25A (CPU board)
Power supply unit
SND25A (Sensor driver
board)
(CF) Compact flash memory
DIMM (Memory)
RLY (Head voltage switching
relay)
PNL25A (Operation panel
board)
THC25A (Head control board)
MD-14
Main function
Density measurement section light-emitting board
Density measurement section light-sensing board
Overall control of equipment, network input, image pro-
cessing
DC power supply to equipment
Mechanical drive parts drive, I/O parts control, signal
counter from film edge sensor, thermistor signal and den-
sity measurement section data AD conversion
Main program storage, error log storage, 64MB
CPU25A board main memory, standard specification is
512 MB (1 slot)
Switches measurement circuit during head resistance
measurement
Message display (16 digits 2 lines black and white charac-
ter display)
Key input, LED display, status lamp display
Image data output (PCI board), recording control, head
distribution data generation, head resistance measure-
ment pattern output

l Fuse Layout
Board Symbol. Model No. Part No. Rating
SND25A board F1 LM50 (D) 137S1280 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND25A board F2 LM50 (D) 137S1280 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND25A board F3 LM50 (D) 137S1280 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND25A board F4 LM50 (D) 137S1280 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND25A board F5 LM50 (D) 137S1280 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND25A board F7 LM50 (D) 137S1280 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND25A board F8 LM20 (D) 137S1277 AC/DC 48V 2A
SND25A board F9 LM20 (D) 137S1277 AC/DC 48V 2A
THC25A board F1 LM32 (D) 137S1278 AC/DC 48V 3.2A
CPU25A board Replace the CPU25A board when the fuse blow out.
Power supply unit Replace the power supply unit when the fuse blow out.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-14
 MD-15
1.3.7 Film Path and Jam Detection Sensor

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-15
 MD-16
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE A

EQUIPMENT
FMT Unit Initialization

2.1 Powering ON Image Management

When the main power switch of the equipment is at ON position, the equipment starts
up under the following conditions:
Means Conditions
Power switch on the opera- Press the power switch on
tion panel the operation panel.
WakeOnLAN feature Enables to receive incoming
WakeOnLan packets from
network devices.
Image Input
Magazine Check
Remarks
- PRT Unit Initialization
Mechanism Initialization
To use this feature, the rel-
evant network device must
support WakeOnLan feature. Head Initialization

Head Temperature Adjustment

2.2 Flow of Equipment Startup
Startup Complete
Below is a schematized flow of operation during the equipment startup.

Powering ON <REMARKS>
Before initializing the FMT unit, the following three items are checked.
BIOS Processing • Check of whether the file system created on the compact flash (CF) is normal.
• Check of whether the required amount of memory is installed. If not installed, the
Chipset Initialization startup process is interrupted and an error is displayed.
• Check of whether SND and THC boards are installed.
Memory Test

Loading Program from CF

Loading/Initializing Operating System

Loading Application

Starting Application

Checking Items

A
016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-16
 MD-17
2.3 Display Transition during Equipment n Approximate Remaining Time
Startup Upon the start of the head heater temperature measurement, the time for initialization
is estimated and displayed with “-”, each representing 30 seconds.
With each lapse of 30 seconds, one “-” is replaced with one “*”.
n Startup
After the equipment is powered on, self-diagnostic steps (IL) by the startup application
are displayed.

n Initial Display
Appears upon the startup of the PRT unit after the self-diagnosis is completed.

n Version Display
Appears for 15 seconds upon the start of the PRT unit initialization after the FMT unit n Initialization Complete
initialization is completed. M-Utility or U-Utility is accessible from this phase.
Upon completion of initialization, the standby display appears.

<REMARKS>
While the system is going off-line from the Version Display, the status lamp is off. The
Approximate Remaining Time described below is not displayed, either.

n Self-Diagnosis during Initialization

After the Version Display is completed, the initialization steps (0005 to 0001) are
displayed in a countdown manner.
0005: Initializing FMT unit
0004 to 0001: Initializing PRT unit

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-17

2.4 Handling of Equipment Errors
2.4.1 Level 1 Error
The following errors can be recovered by user intervention. These errors are
automatically logged. When the error occurs during film conveyance, the error is
displayed after the mechanism is initialized so that the film can be removed.
n Cleaning Roller Not Found
Cleaning roller is detected during mechanism initialization. When the cleaning roller
is absent, the initialization is interrupted and the error is displayed. The initialization
resumes upon detection of the cleaning roller presence and cover closure.
n Magazine Not Found
This error notifies the absence of magazine. Even when a magazine absence is
detected at the equipment startup, the operation proceeds normally without invoking a
fallback.
n No Film
No film error message is displayed if the remaining film counter is 0 and the film was
not successfully removed from the magazine (no change detected at SD11/SD21).
n Film Removal Error
Film removal error message is displayed when the remaining film counter is not 0 but
the film was not successfully removed from the magazine during film removal process
(no change detected at SD11/SD21).
n Cover Open
Head cover interlock switch (SK12) and rear cover interlock switches (SK11, SK21)
are constantly monitored. When one of these switches is OPEN, the motor is stopped
by the interlock and an error message is displayed at the same time. When all the
switches are closed, the error disappears and the system returns to the normal state.
When these covers are open during a film jam removal or cleaning roller installation,
no cover open error message is displayed because one of the “Film Jam” or “Cleaning
Roller Not Found” errors has already occurred.
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
MD-18
n Film Jam
When no change is detected at the sensor within a predetermined time during the
film conveyance process, an error message is displayed, assuming that a jam has
occurred. Upon detection of an error, film conveyance is stopped, the rollers are
released, and the motors are de-energized.
Upon closure of all covers after the removal of the jammed film, the error is cleared,
the mechanism is initialized, and the system returns to the normal state.
n Density Measurement Error
An error message is displayed when the expected density value was not obtained
from a density measurement. Each stepedge is checked for difference from the
standard value to determine whether it is within tolerance.
This error occurs when a film other than DI-HT is loaded.
2.4.2 Level 0 Error
Imaginable fatal errors are check failure at initialization, head movement failure, and
edge detection failure at the film edge detection sensor.
n Memory Not Installed
An error message is displayed when the required amount of memory is not installed.
Memory amount check is performed by writing and reading data at the final address.
n Board Not Installed
An error message is displayed when either of SND board or HCT board is not
installed. Assumed to be absent when not found via PCI bus scan.
n Head Up-down Movement Failure
An error message is displayed when the head position detection sensor (SH1) fails
to detect the up-down movement of the head. Upon detection of this error, any
subsequent film removal is canceled. When a film has been already removed, it
continues to be conveyed but not print-processed. The film is output but the job is not
deleted from the spool.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-18
 MD-19
2.5 Powering OFF PFIF log
Records message transmission/reception between the formatter and printer.
When the main power switch of the equipment is at ON position, the equipment shuts
down under the following conditions: Jam log
Collects logs related to jams when jams occur.
Means Conditions Remarks
l Analysis Log
Power switch on the opera- Keep pressing the power Perform the ending process.
tion panel switch. The following items are saved as the logs for analysis. While the equipment is in
operation, the data is written into the file system on the RAMDISK instead of the
Main power switch Turn off the main power The equipment is completely
switch. powered off immediately re-
CF itself. When an error occurred or the equipment is shutting down, the data is
gardless of its condition. transferred to the CF.
DICOM log
Upon the start of powering off operation, reception of any subsequent image data from
the DICOM is canceled. All image data already received is print-processed before the DICOM communication log with connected part. Log volume is heavy.
ending process is started. Main log
2.5.1 Ending Process Log on control of all applications. Records start and termination time, control
transition time with each sub-system, etc.
The ending process includes saving logs to the compact flash memory (CF) and
powering off. Output log
Records progress to printing after image processing completes.
n Saving Logs
The logs to be saved are operation data log and analysis log. PCUTL log
It can be set at the M-Utility or PC-Utility whether to save analysis logs. PC-Utility function processing trace.
{MU:3.3 [1-2-4]_Logging mode>}
Spooler log
{MU:4.4 [PC1-4-4]_Logging Mode}
Records results of printing request. Also records information such as remaining
l Operation Data Log films when printing is requested.
The following logs are saved as operational data of the equipment: Trace log
Error log Records start state between sub-systems on chart.
Records equipment failures. Cover open is also recorded as error. Magazine n Powering OFF
open is not taken as error.
The equipment is powered off in a manner that enables startup via WakeOnLan next
IOT time.
Records ON/OFF state of sensors and motors in timechart format. Special viewer
is required for referencing.
ISC
Records reception of messages between tasks of conveyance and print functions.
Mechanism log
Records control of ON/OFF of sensors and motors, etc.
Edge sensor log
Records edge sensor reading values during 35x43 cm size printing.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-19
 MD-20
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANISM 3.1.2 Magazine Detection/Magazine Number
Identification
OPERATIONS The presence of magazines is detected by the film size detection sensors (upper:
SA11/SA12/SA13, lower: SA21/SA22/SA23).
When a magazine is inserted into the equipment, the actuators attached to the
3.1 Magazine Set Section magazines turn ON the sensors to detect them.
The attached position of these actuators can be varied between magazine No. 1 to 7.
(service setting)
3.1.1 Outline When a magazine is inserted into the equipment, the magazine number is identified
from the combination of the ON/OFF status of the three film size detection sensors.
This equipment is able to mount up to two magazines by mounting the sheet-feeder
unit. There are two types of magazines; large magazine for 35 x 43 cm film and small
magazine for 26 x 36 cm/20 x 25 cm film. With the small magazine, film size can be
switched between 26 x 36 cm and 20 x 25 cm size by changing the position of the
partition plate. By mounting the optional 25 x 30 cm film kit, 25 x 30 cm size films can
also be used.
The size of film used can be switched by the user by changing the magazine, and up
to seven magazines can be used.
Films are loaded onto resin sealed type magazines at the center. The magazine
shutter opens and closes together with the movement of the suction cup arm and films
are removed one at a time.
This magazine can be replenished with films without having to remove it from the
equipment.

Sensor
Magazine No.
SA11/SA21 SA12/SA22 SA13/SA23
No magazine loaded OFF OFF OFF
Magazine No. 1 ON OFF OFF
Magazine No. 2 OFF ON OFF
Magazine No. 3 ON OFF ON
Magazine No. 4 ON ON OFF
Magazine No. 5 ON ON ON
Magazine No. 6 OFF ON ON
Magazine No. 7 OFF OFF ON

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-20
 MD-21
3.1.3 Magazine Management
The following shows the data managed by magazine.

No Data Update/Setting
1 Film size Set using M-utility
2 No. of films remaining Update with output start/correct with M-Utility or
U-Utility
3 Density correction data Update with automatic density correction, manual
density correction

3.1.4 Detection of Film Type

Density characteristics are determined during density correction, and when film is
determined to be not suitable for this equipment, an error message is displayed on the
operation panel.

3.1.5 Protection of Removal Mechanism

To prevent damage that may occur when the magazine is pulled out during removal
operations, removal operations are stopped when all film size detection sensors go
OFF during operations from start of removal to film release.
(Main unit software version V2.4 or later)

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-21
 MD-22
3.2 Removal Section

3.2.1 Outline
The removal section opens the magazine shutter synchronized with the suction cup
arm operations, suctions the suction cup, and removes the film from the magazine
one at a time.
The suction cup arm of this equipment adopts the bellows suction cup method.
The suction cup arm is driven by the film removing motor (MB11/MB21) and its
position is detected by the following three sensors.
• Suction cup arm HP detection sensor (SB11/SB21): Detects the suction cup arm
home position
• Film surface detection sensor (SB12/SB22): Detects the film surface
• Suction cup arm upper deadpoint detection sensor (SB13/SB23): Detects the
suction cup arm upper deadpoint
Film is conveyed in the removal section by the drive of the conveyance motor (MD11).

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-22
 MD-23
3.2.2 Magazine Shutter Open/Close Mechanism 3.2.3 Operation Flow
The following mechanism opens/closes the magazine shutter and <REMARKS>
maintains its opened state.
The following describes the upper removal section as an example. For the lower
removal section, simply take B1 as B2.
<Example of suction cup arm HP detection sensor>
Upper removal section: SB11
Lower removal section: SB21

n Checking the Magazine

After checking that magazine suited to print requirements is loaded by the film size
detection sensor, removal operations start. If no magazine exists, an error message is
displayed and loading of the magazine is waited.

n Suction Cup Arm Home Position

In the standby state of the equipment, the suction cup arm is at the suction cup arm
position.
This position is the position at which the suction cup arm HP detection sensor (SB11)
switches from ON to OFF, and the removal conveyance roller (upper) touches the
removal conveyance roller (lower).

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-23

n Magazine Shutter Open
The film removing motor (MB11) rotates in the normal direction (CW) at high speed
by the removal permission signal and the suction cup arm starts moving. The removal
drive cam operates by the drive of MB11, and by moving the magazine shutter open/
close mechanism. The magazine shutter opens.
The open state of the magazine shutter is maintained by the gear cam and stopper.
016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
MD-24
n Film Surface Detection
The suction cup arm passes the upper deadpoint by moving along the
groove of the removal section frame. When this passage of the upper
deadpoint is detected by the film upper deadpoint detection sensor
(SB13), MB11 switches to medium speed rotation.
When the removal conveyance roller (upper) reaches the film surface and the film
surface detection sensor (SB12) turns ON, MB11 switches to low speed rotation.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-24

n Film Suction
After MB11 switches to low speed rotation, it continues moving in the normal direction
until SB12 goes OFF and pushes the suction cup against the film while pushing in the
bellows.
When the bellows is pushed in, negative pressure generated inside the bellows and
the film is suctioned to the suction cup.
MD-25
n Film Flapping Operations
With the suction cup suctioning the film, MB11 starts moving in the
reverse direction (CCW). MB11 raises the suction cup arm until the
position where SB13 turns ON, and stops once to peel apart the film
lead edges.
<REMARKS>
The peeling apart of the film lead edges is done by the pick in the magazine, and the
central area of the film sags by the suction cup and removal conveyance roller (upper).

When the upper deadpoint is reached, MB11 repeats movements in the normal and
reverse directions, and repeats raising/lowering the suction cup arm five times (film
flapping operations).
This flapping operations supplies air to the film trail edge by moving the film lead
edge, preventing conveyance faults due to adherence of the film trail edge.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-25

n Film Release
After flapping operations end, MB11 moves in the reverse direction at high speed to
move the film to the removal conveyance roller (lower). During this movement, when
SB11 turns ON, MB11 switches to low speed and continues moving in the reverse
direction at regular pulse.
When the film reaches the removal conveyance roller (lower) and the bellows is
pushed in, film is released from the suction cup by the discharge of air inside the
bellows and weight of the removal conveyance roller (upper), and is as a result
gripped by the removal conveyance roller (upper) and removal conveyance roller
(lower).
However, in equipment using main unit software version V2.2 or later, MB11 is moved
in the reverse direction for the specified pulses when SB13 turns ON.
MD-26
n Removal Conveyance
After the film is released, the conveyance motor (MD11) rotates and the film is
conveyed to the conveyance entrance sensor (SD11) and stops. At this time, if SD11
does not turn ON within the specified time, two retries are made. If SD11 still remains
OFF, the film is determined to have dropped, and an error code is displayed.
<REMARKS>
When the film counter is “0”, it is determined as “no film” instead of dropping of film.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-26

n Magazine Shutter Close
When the film lead edge stops at SD11, MB11 rotates in the normal direction for the
specified pulse and raises the suction cup arm.
MD-27
When the precedent film trail edge passes the conveyance exit sensor (SD12), it
resumes film conveyance.
After a certain period of time from film trail edge passage of SD11, MB11 moves in the
reverse direction, SB11 turns ON, MB11 moves further in the reverse direction for a
certain distance and closes the magazine shutter.

n Home Position Return

To return the suction cup arm to the home position, MB11 moves in the
normal direction and stops when SB11 goes OFF.

n Count Up
The software counter counts up when removal completes.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-27
 MD-28
3.3 Conveyor Section 3.3.2 Film Positioning Section

n Mechanism
3.3.1 Outline
The film positioning section moves the reference plate (moves in the right and left
The film conveyance route of this equipment serves as the center reference, and the directions of the equipment) according to the film size, and regulates the film position
film conveyed from the removal section is regulated by the center by the reference to the center.
plate of the film positioning section, and is conveyed to the sub-scanning section. The reference plate is moved by the drive of the reference plate drive motor (MD12/
The film conveyance at the removal section and conveyor section is performed by MD22), and the reference plate home position is detected by the reference plate HP
conveyance motor (MD1). detection sensor (SD13/SD23).

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-28
 MD-29
n Pressing Against Reference Plate 3.3.3 Operation Flow
Film is pressed in the diagonally left direction by the pressing plate and tilt roller <REMARKS>
located at the entrance of the film positioning section, and against the left reference
plate to position it. The following describes the upper conveyor as an example. For the lower conveyor,
simply read D1 as D2.
<Example of conveyor entrance sensor>
Upper conveyor: SD11
Lower conveyor: SD21

n Reference Plate Home Position

When the equipment is in the stand by state, the reference plate of the film positioning
section is at the home position.
The home position of the reference plate is the position at which the reference plate
HP detection sensor (SD13) switches from ON to OFF.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-29
 MD-30
n Reference Plate Movements n Reference Plate Return
Before removal operations starts by the reception of the print start signal, the After the specified time from MD11 stop, MD12 rotates and returns the
reference plate is moved according to the specified film size. reference plate to the home position.

n Conveyance
Film is conveyed to the sub-scanning section.
After the specified time from the film lead edge passage of SD12, MD11 stops. Film
conveyance hereafter is done by the sub-scanning motor (ME1).
<REMARKS>
The head starts descending as MD11 stops.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-30
 MD-31
3.4 Sub-Scanning Section

3.4.1 Outline
Film conveyance of the sub-scanning section is done by the drive of the sub-scanning
motor (ME1), the conveyor exit roller and platen roller convey simultaneously while
printing images.
In front of the platen roller is a pair of left and right film edge sensors (SS1, SS2). They
detect the left and right edge positions of conveyed 35 x 43 cm size film and perform
left/right frameless printing.
<REMARKS>
The sub-scanning motor (ME1) is a component part composed of 5-phase pulse
motor and ME1 driver board.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-31

3.4.2 Film Edge Sensor
The film edge sensors (SS1, SS2) detect the film left and right edge
positions just before printing. The detected values are fed back to the
thermal head, areas outside the image are blackened by Dmax to
perform left/right frame-less printing. (35 x 43 cm size film only)
MD-32
3.4.3 Cleaning Roller Detection
To remove dirt on the film printing surface (Em surface), cleaning rollers are located
at the top of the sub-scanning section roller. The presence of the cleaning rollers is
detected by the cleaning roller detection sensor (SD14).

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-32
 MD-33
3.4.4 Operation Flow
At the same time film is conveyed from the conveyor, the sub-scanning motor
(ME1) rotates, drives via the flat belt (right/left) to rotate the sub-scanning section
conveyance roller, platen roller, and film release section roller.
ME1 stops when the film lead edge reaches the platen roller upper (image printing
start position).

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-33
 MD-34
3.5 Head 3.5.2 Head Up/Down Section

n Head Up/Down Mechanism

3.5.1 Outline
The thermal head up/down and pressurization are performed by the drive of the head
The head is composed of the thermal head printing images on film and head up/down up/down drive motor (MH1), and the head position home position is detected by the
section which raises/lowers and applies pressure to the thermal head. head position detection sensor (SH1).

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-34
 MD-35
l Head Home Position 3.5.3 Thermal Head
When not printing, the thermal head waits at a position where it does not touch the
platen roller. (Head home position) n Structure
When the thermal head is at the head home position, the head pressurization arm
rises, enabling the head assembly to be opened. l Thermal Head
Printing pixel size: 84.7 μm (300 dpi)
Head generation element width: 357.6 mm (number of heat generation elements
4224)
l Temperature Control Thermistor ×5 (THH1 to THH5)

l Head Heater (HH1, HH2)

50 W ×2
For thermal head heat generation (50 °C)
l Head Cooling Fan (FANP1, FANP2)

l Thermal Protector (TPH1)

For shutting head heater power during abnormal overheating

n Temperature Control
This equipment controls temperature of the head for printing optimum images.
Temperature control is performed by changing the control according to the state of the
l Head Pressurization Position equipment at start, idling, temperature control stop, and printing.
Temperature control is also stopped during sleep mode.
During printing, the thermal head is pressed to the platen roller by the head
pressurization arm.
The pressure differs according to the film size, and it is set by the compression
amount of the two types of pressure springs available for 35 x 43/26 x 36 cm films and
25 x 30/20 x 25 cm films.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-35

n Adjustment of Position between Head and Platen
The positions of the thermal head printing section (heat generation element) and
platen roller can be adjusted by the adjustment plate attached to both sides of the
thermal head. However, this adjustment need not be performed on the field.
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
MD-36
3.5.4 Operation Flow
Film conveyed to the sub-scanning section reaches the platen roller and stops.
At this time, MH1 starts rotating in the normal direction, which causes the head
pressurization arm to rotate, the thermal head held to the head arm is released and
touches the platen roller.
MH1 continues to move in the normal direction. When the pressurization spring is
pressed by the head pressurization arm, the printing section of the thermal head is
pressed to the platen by the specified pressure.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-36
 MD-37
When image printing on the film completes, the sub-scanning motor (ME1) stops.
When film conveyance stops, MH1 starts moving in the reverse direction, and the
thermal head rises. When the head pressurization arm reaches the head home
position, MH1 stops.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-37
 MD-37.1
3.5.5 Precautions on Opening/Closing the Head Assembly Contact Points
l
Open and close making sure the following parts do not touch each other.
CAUTION
Opening/closing the head assembly with the head cooling fan assembly and Bracket (Two locations)
duct removed may cause the flexible cable of the thermal head assembly to
touch the head pressurization arm assembly bracket and damage. To open/
close the head assembly in this state, perform the following procedure.

Position of the Head Cooling Fan Assembly and Duct

l

Flexible cable

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-37.1
 MD-37.2
Open/Close Procedure
l 2. With the thermal head assembly moved to the shaft side, open/close
the head assembly.
1. Hold the heat sink portion of the thermal head and shaft of the
equipment body, and move the thermal head assembly to the shaft To open:
side. Loosen hands grasping the shaft just before the thermal head assembly moves
onto the arm.

<REMARKS>
With the head cooling fan and duct attached, as the thermal head will be
positioned to the shaft side, it will not touch the head pressurization arm assembly
during open/close of the thermal head. When they are removed, as the thermal
head will be moved to the head pressurization arm assembly side, it will touch the
assembly. To prevent this, there is a need to move the thermal head assembly to To close:
the shaft side by hand.
Loosen hand grasping the shaft just after the thermal head assembly moves past
the head pressurization arm assembly bracket.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-37.2
 MD-38
3.6 Film Release Section 3.6.2 Density Measurement
Image density correction is performed by measuring film density and creating density
correction tables after printing at the density section.
3.6.1 Outline When printed film (17-step pattern) by the density measurement menu of the
After printing, film is conveyed to the film, ejection unit and ejected outside the operation panel passes between the light-emitting face of the LED board of the film
equipment. release section and light-receiving face of the PDD board, the penetrated light amount
is measured and the density data is measured.

3.6.3 Operation Flow

When printing by the thermal head completes and the head rises, ME1 switches to
high speed rotation and film is ejected outside the equipment at high speed. However,
If density measurement is being performed, high speed ejection is not performed.
ME1 stops after the specified time from film ejection.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-38
 MD-39
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL
CONTROL

4.1 System Block Diagram

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-39
 MD-40
4.2 Outline of Power Supply

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-40
 MD-41
AC power is supplied to the power supply unit when the main power switch is turned
ON. The power supply unit outputs the following power based on this AC power.
• When AC power is input, the power supply unit outputs +5VS to the CPU board and
for the power lamp on the operation panel.
• The power supply unit outputs +5V, ±12V, +24V, and +3.3V when the power ON
switch is pushed.
The CPU board has a lithium battery for the clock.
<REMARKS>
Each output block of the power supply unit of this equipment has a protection circuit
for overvoltage and overcurrent. When problems are detected, the present DC output
is stopped.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-41
 MD-42
4.3 Interlock Control
The drive power supply cutoff by the interlock switch of this equipment is shown below.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-42
 MD-43
n Detection of Disconnection by Photocoupler
The ON/OFF state of interlock switches, relays, and fuses is converted to the ON/OFF
signal by the photocoupler, and used for software control.

n Stop Load by Interlock

When the interlock function operates, the power supply of the following load is cut off.
Power cutoff load

Section Symbol Name SK11 SK12 SK21 TPH1

Upper removal Film removing motor (Up-

MB11
section (B1) per)

Lower removal Film removing motor

MB21
section (B2) (Lower)

MD11 Conveyance motor

Upper conveyor
section (D1) Reference plate drive mo-
MD12
tor (Upper)

Lower conveyor Reference plate drive mo-

MD22
section (D2) tor (Lower)

Sub-scanning
ME1 Sub-canning motor
section (E)

HH1 Head heater

HH2 Head heater

Head (H)
Head up/down drive mo-
MH1
tor

H1 Thermal head

FANP1 Head cooling fan 1

Cover (P)
FANP2 Head cooling fan 2

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-43
 MD-44
4.4 Functions of Boards

4.4.1 CPU Board

n Outline
The CPU board performs overall control of the equipment, network input, and image
processing.

n Main Functions
l CPU
Celeron M 1.3 GHz
l LAN
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
l IDE-I/F
ATA100: CF card
l Memory
512 MB/1 GB
l PCI
Print head control board
l CAN
CAN2.0B: Mechanical control
l USB (Software version upgrade)
USB 2.0

l Lithium Battery
For RTC (CR17335SE-CN18)

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-44
 MD-45
4.4.2 SND Board n Main Functions
n Outline l Sensor Input Block Functions
The SND board performs I/O control of the equipment by controlling the CPU board.
Control from the CPU board is performed via the CAN I/F. Input Block
• Photointerrupter.........................................................................×19
• Film edge sensor.......................................................................×2
• Interlock state detection.............................................................×2
• Fuse disconnection detection....................................................×8
• Version notification....................................................................×1

Control Block
• LED lighting control (Reflective sensor, film edge sensor)........×4
• Edge sensor LED ON/OFF........................................................×2

l Analog Input Block Functions

Input Block
• Head thermistor.........................................................................×5
• Environment thermistor.............................................................×1
• Density measurement photodiode.............................................×1
• Head resistance measurement..................................................×1

Control Block
• Density measurement LED lighting control...............................×1
• Head voltage switching..............................................................×2

l Drive Block Functions

• 2-phase pulse motor control......................................................×6
• 5-phase pulse motor control (with external driver)....................×1
• Control fan voltage ON/OFF......................................................×1
• Head fan voltage control............................................................×1
• Head fan ON/OFF.....................................................................×1
• Head heater ON/OFF................................................................×2
l Drive Block Functions
• Power supply fan alarm detection.............................................×1
• ATX sequence control output....................................................×1

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-45
 MD-46
4.4.3 THC Board l Control Sequence at Recording
Generation of head distribution data by hardware can be divided into the following
n Outline three operations.
• Input of data via the PCI bus from the main memory (line memory write)
The THC board has recording control, head resistance measurement pattern output,
and host interface functions, and is connected to the host CPU/main memory via the • Bitmap deployment (line memory read, intermediate data memory write)
PCI bus. • Transfer of serial data to head (heat generation pattern control table read,
intermediate data memory read)

l Image Data on Main Memory

The pixel format of the image data on the main memory is saved as 12 bit/pix by 16
bit boundary LSB-alignment.
l Import of Image Data to Line Memory
12 bit image data DMA-transferred via the PCI bus from the main memory by
hardware is saved in the line memory in units of lines by betaenumerate.
l Bitmap Deployment
12 bit image data in the line memory is deployed to 192 pixels x 22 bits intermediate
data for every bit weight by hardware. The respective bits of 22 bit data corresponds
to the serial signal line of the head.
As the physical data of the memory is 16 bits, taking the 22 bits of one intermediate
data after bitmap deployment to be 16 bits + 6 bits, it is saved by two memory writes.
l Heat Generation Pattern Control (Tonal Expression Method)
For each weight bit of the image data to correspond to the recording positions dividing
image pixel in the sub-scanning direction, the THC board is provided with a heat
n Main Functions generation pattern control table which can be set from the host.
The heat generation pattern control table corresponding to the recording position is
l Interrupt referred by the hardware, the designated bit weight data is read from the intermediate
data memory, and serial transfer is executed as head heat generation data.
The interrupt sources are as follows.
• End of recording l Recording Base Time Setting
• End of main memory transfer
Taking the recording time of one heat generation data (time of dividing one sub-
l Reset scanning direction pixel by the number of distributions) as the recording base time,
register setting is performed from the host.
The head distribution data generation section is reset by the reset signal from the PCI Based on this setting time, the recording time (main-scanning period) of one sub-
bus. scanning direction pixel is determined.
l Control FPGA/ Board Version Register l Heat Generation Time Control
Enables reading of the 4 bits of the head control FPGA and board version respectively The actual time is set from the host for the logic heat generation time of heat
by the version register. generation pattern control.
l Head Resistance Measurement Pattern Output Mode
The heat generation pattern for converting 1 dot of the head to the heat generation
state is output for head resistance measurement.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-46
 MD-47
l Memory Test
Memory access from the host side is enabled for testing the memory of the head
distribution data generation section
l Head Logic Power Supply (Fuse)
+5 V is supplied to the thermal head via the 3.2 A fuse.
Fuse disconnection can be detected by the status register.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-47
 MD-48
4.4.4 PNL Board n External Interface
n Outline l SIO
The PNL board is a user operation board installed on the operation panel. RS232C (No hardware flow control)
Panel displays are controlled by the CPU board. LCD display, operation switch ON/OFF, function display LED (other than power supply
LED) display/control
n Main Functions
l Power Supply Switch
l LCD Display ON/OFF is output directly
Type : Monochrome character display l Power Supply LED
No. of characters : 16 digits x 2 lines
No. of dots per character : 5 dots x 7 dots Directly connected to +5VS (Current restriction resistance is provided in CPU board)
Display font : ASCII/one-byte katakana l Power Supply
Extended character : Above 16 characters
+5V/GND
l Switch
Power switch : Momentary push method
Short-circuiting between two pints at power ON
Operation switches : Momentary push method
Used for operations. By pressing the button, button codes
are sent via SIO. Button codes are notified when pressed
and when released.
l LED
Power supply display : Green
LCD lighting : Green
Status lamp : Green and yellow
Sleep mode : Green
l Buzzer
The buzzer sound can be switched between three types by serial communication.
High : 2.4 kHz
Middle : 1.2 kHz
Low : 500 Hz

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-48
 MD-49
4.4.5 Power Supply Unit

n Outline of Power Supply Specifications

Input AC voltage
100 to 240VAC/5 to 2A
Output DC voltage
• +5VS/0.5A: Standby power supply
• +5V/7.5A: Whole control board
• +3.3V/3.0A: Whole control board
• +12V/5.0A: For CPU power supply
• +24V/4.5A: Drive block power supply (Motors, heaters, etc.)
• +13.8V/20A: Drive block power supply (Thermal head)

Input frequency
50 to 60 Hz ±3 Hz
Input capacity
500VA or less
Current leakage
0.5mA or less

n Main Functions
Head Power Supply Output (Slot/Module)
• ON/OFF control by SND board control
• Head voltage stabilization by remote sense function

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-49
 MD-50
5. IMAGE PROCESSING 5.1.2 Service Availability
The following shows the transition conditions for enabling/disabling reception of image
This equipment receives image data from devices connected by DICOM protocol from data.
the network, spools them on the SDRAM, and prints them after performing image
processing. This section describes DICOM services supported by this equipment,
l Transition Conditions for Reception Disabled→Reception Enabled
operation timing, and image processing. • After start, use of the communication function was enabled
• If the number of associations which can be accepted does not meet the upper limit
5.1 Image Input l Transition Conditions for Reception Enabled→Reception Disabled
• System end
5.1.1 Valid Services • System down error occurs
The following table shows the DICOM services supported. • The number of association simultaneous acceptances reaching the upper limit
No. Service Name Details <REMARKS>
1 Verification SOP Class Returns response for Echo request (C-Echo). If the service
has been started and response can be returned to the re- Receives image data during start of utility/power save mode. In this case, this
quest, Success is returned. equipment prints film when it returned to the routine status.
2 Basic Grayscale Print Consists of the following four services.
Management Meta 1) Basic Film Session SOP Class
SOP Class 2) Basic Film Box SOP Class 5.1.3 Image Data Reception Availability
3) Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class When request for printing of film size not loaded on the equipment is received,
4) Printer SOP Class processing is carried out according to the DICOM substitution specification. Error is
1 Basic Film Session Indicates the parameter common to all film sessions. returned when no corresponding film.
SOP Class For example, number of films, film destination, etc.
2 Basic Film Box Indicates common parameter for one film in the film session. 5.1.4 DICOM Settings and Restrictions
SOP Class Common for all images on one film. The following shows details and restrictions which can be set.
3 Basic Grayscale Indicates parameter applicable for single films in one film and Item Details
Image Box SOP image pixel data.
Class DICOM tag enable/disable Service can be set whether to adopt modality request/configu-
ration setting value for the DICOM tag. Can be set for each
4 Printer SOP Class Exchanges data on printer status. client.
3 Basic Annotation Box Indicates film annotation (normally displays character string). Number of simultaneous The upper limit for associations which can be communi-
SOP Class Created according to the annotation display format ID (2010, connection associations cated with the client at the same time is 10. Settings can be
0030) value of the Basic Film Box SOP. changed using PC-Utility.
4 Print Job SOP Class Executes print process. Created by ACTION such as Basic Number of permitted film The number of permitted film boxes in one session is 32.
Film Session SOP, Basic Film Box SOP, etc. Deleted after boxes in session
completion of output or output failure.
Maximum input image size The maximum input image size is 7000 (Rows) x 7000 (Col-
5 Print Queue Manage- For performing status monitoring of print queue, deletion umns).
ment SOP Class of jobs for which job information in queue or owner ID are
known, change of priority. Requested Decimate/Crop “FAIL” is specified for this tag, and if images which do not fit
Behavior tag (2020,0040) into the recordable image frame are sent, reception is denied.
6 Presentation LUT Prints using LUT information sent from client.
SOP Class (Normally, LUT information is registered at this equipment) Maximum number of con- 64
nection clients registered

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-50
 MD-51
5.2 Image Spool Management Function
The following four image spool functions are available.
• Manages print request of image data received.
• Maintains spool area (above 140 MB) for which maximum size image can be
received.
• As it may not be possible to print due to reasons such as film empty, etc., the print
request is deleted after the completion of printing on film.
• If the magazine is replaced, check if image data of the previous size is remaining as
print request. If remaining, the DICOM service is set to offline, and error is notified.
DICOM does not recover from offline until magazine of the previous size is loaded.
<REMARKS>
Three levels of priority (HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW) can be set for the print request
managed as the priority of spooled images. Amongst images with the same priority,
those with older print request time have higher priority.
Though DICOM service is supported, it cannot be changed from this operation panel.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-51
 MD-52
n Guideline for Image Spool Amount Varying with Memory Capacity
l Input Image Area
Image memory board Standard Optional
- 512 MB 1 GB (1024 MB)
- 7000*7000 7000*7000
OS, image information 31 MB 31 MB
Print buffer 88 MB 88 MB
Image processing area 42 MB 42 MB
Input image interpolation 94 MB 94 MB
area
Log file, etc. 22 MB 22 MB
Input image area 235 MB 747 MB
(117 MW) (373 MW)

l Spool Amount
Standard Optional
Data size (Maximum image size: 7000*7000) (Maximum image size: 7000*7000)
Source Image size
(235 MB) (747 MB)
2 byte image 1 byte image 2 byte image 1 byte image 2 byte image 1 byte image

CR 35x43 cm size (3520*4280) 28.7 MB - 7 sheets - 24 sheets -

(2 byte image) 26x36 cm size (3600*2540) 17.4 MB - 12 sheets - 41 sheets -
8000*8000 122.1 MB 61.0 MB - - - -
7000*7000 93.5 MB 46.7 MB 1 frame 3 frames 6 frames 14 frames
5000*5000 47.7 MB 23.8 MB 3 frames 8 frames 14 frames 30 frames
Modality
2000*2000 7.6 MB 3.8 MB 29 frames 59 frames 96 frames 193 frames
(1 byte or 2 byte image)
1024*1024 2.0 MB 1.0 MB 114 frames 230 frames 370 frames 742 frames
512*512 0.5 MB 0.3 MB 462 frames 926 frames 1486 frames 2974 frames
640*512 0.6 MB 0.3 MB 369 frames 740 frames 1189 frames 2379 frames
(9 bits or more) (8 bit image)

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-52
 MD-53
5.3 Image Processing l CR Image
Same magnification printing by x13/11 enlargement processing. Images are cut by
This section describes image processing details and information added to film. about 1% for 35 x 43 cm/26 x 36 cm and by about 1.3% for 25 x 30 cm/20 x 25 cm.
5.3.1 Image Processing 1
<REMARKS>
5.3.2 Image Processing 2
5.3.3 Image Processing 3 When printed from DRYPIX Link, there is a need to set “Dicom Standard Printer” to
5.3.4 Annotation DRYPIX Link.

5.3.1 Image Processing 1

n Tone Processing
With image processing 1, compensation magnification/reduction processing, tone
processing, and format processing are implemented. This equipment corresponds to Dmax=3.0.
It supports two tone processing methods (BAR method/SAR method). Which method
n Compensation Magnification/Reduction Processing is used depends on the Configuration information of each AE-Title. The default setting
is SAR method.
Processing differs between IM images and CR images. In the case of the SAR method, the Type 1/Type 2 density processing calculation
l IM Image method can be selected. The default value is Type 2.
Corresponds to the three processes SSM, A-VR, and VR. The following table shows <REMARKS>
the processing details. Type 1: Density calculation method implementing compensation for the measured
density
Priority Evaluation conditions Processing details Type 2: Density processing calculation method with smoother tone expression than
High NONE is specified for Magnifica- Compensation magnification/reduction processing Type 1. Tone continuity improves in low density areas below 0.4
tion Type (2010, 0060) using the is not performed
DICOM tag
DICOM output size specification Increases the magnification/reduction rate to n Format Processing
(Reqested Image Size:2020,0030) 1/255-255/1 and processes in specified unit of 0.1
mm Print format processing for arrangement in one film is performed. The maximum
↓
number of image frames is 70. Supports film annotation function for displaying the
Configuration information available Processed according to the configuration hospital name, etc.
(For AE-Title)
Also supports the Extension Format of the following devices.
Configuration not available Processed according to the default configuration
Low (For AE-Title) Manufacturer Model ID
Processing is carried out according to the following if recording of images larger than Siemens -- SM
the image frame is requested. Phillips EasyVision EV
Priority Evaluation conditions Processing details HITACHI Medico DR2000 Series HM
High When Requested Decimate/Crop DECIMATE: Reduced in size so that fits inside im-
Behavior tag is present age frame Clavis View HM
CROP: Recordable area center is adjusted to FUJIFILM HI-C655QA CR
the center of the specified image and
excess parts are cut off HI-C655D CR
FAIL: Reception is rejected. As rejection is CR-IR346CL CR
↓ returned during image input, no pro- (Console for FCR XG-1)
cessing is carried out
Configuration information available Processed according to the configuration CR-IR348CL CR
(For AE-Title) (Console for FCR 5000)

Configuration not available Reduced until fits the image frame Synapse CR
Low (For AE-Title)

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-53
 MD-54
5.3.2 Image Processing 2 5.3.3 Image Processing 3
In image processing 2, sharpness correction, density correction, uniformity correction, In image processing 3, black percentage correction, load variation correction, and
and resistance correction are performed. temperature rise correction are implemented.
<REMARKS>
n Sharpness Correction
Though image processing 1 and image processing 2 do not depend on the status of
Secondary vagueness masking is performed on input images. The calculation
the equipment, image processing 3 executes correction according to the temperature
parameters are mask size (main scanning, sub-scanning directions), and emphasis
of the head just before printing. Consequently, it needs to be performed synchronized
(main scanning, sub-scanning directions).
with conveyance processing.
n Density Correction
Converts image data to output 12-bits according to the density correction table to set n Black Percentage Correction
the total density tone of the system to the designated tone characteristics. The density If there are many thermal head devices turning ON, the voltage drop due to wiring
correctable table is provided for each magazine. resistance will increase and density will drop. This is corrected.
n Uniformity Correction n Load Variation Correction
The uniformity correction data is classified into the following two types of data; one for Film conveyance torque has density dependency. The streaks which occur due to
high density and another for low density. conveyance speed variation caused by recording density changes are corrected.
• Uniformity correction data: Created during head manufacturing. Must be updated
when replacing the head. n Temperature Rise Correction
• Uniformity unit data: Created in the process after the head is mounted on the
equipment. The head temperature rises due to heat generated according to the image pattern
during image recording. The density varying according to this is corrected.
n Resistance Correction
Corrects inconsistency of the print density occurring due to the inconsistency of the
resistance of each device of the thermal head.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-54
 MD-55
5.3.4 Annotation Item Details
This equipment supports the following functions for annotation. Macro support Supports macro. The following table shows the supported macro.
Macro Expanded data
Item Details
%YYYY% Year accepted
Character layout Six patterns can be specified for the character layout setting.
1) Only upper (lower) left is defined %MM% Month accepted
Characters are left-aligned and printed. The whole film printing area
width is used. %DD% Day accepted
2) Only upper (lower) right is defined %MON% Month accepted in English
Characters are right-aligned and printed. The whole film printing area
width is used. %TIME% Time accepted
3) Only upper (lower) center is defined
Characters are center-aligned and printed. The whole film printing %IPADDR% IP address
area width is used. %AET% AE title
4) The two layouts upper (lower) left and upper (lower) right are defined.
The printing area width is divided into two left and right, and printed. %ALIAS% Name by client
They are printed left-aligned and right-aligned. %RESOLUTION% Resolution (following output)
5) The two layouts upper (lower) left and upper (lower) center, or upper Normal density/high density
(lower) right and upper (lower) center are defined. STD/HIGH
The printing area width is divided into three areas and printed.
6) The three layouts upper (lower) left, upper (lower) right, and upper The respective two-byte displays are also supported except for “%AET%”
(lower) center are defined. and “%ALIAS%”. This equipment outputs “%RESOLUTION%” by “STD”.
The printing area width is divided into three areas and printed.
Image annotation By using the (2031, 1020) Annotation Image Sequence private tag (on
Character code One-byte kana and two-byte kanji are support. The character code fol- condition that it is used between FUJIFILM equipment), image data is ar-
lows the tag specification (0008, 0005). ranged on the film as annotation.
The following table shows the corresponding character set.
Character set Supported characters
Without tag/ISO_IR_6 Default repertory
ISO_IR100 Latin alphabet No. 1
ISO_IR13 One-byte kana
ISO 2022 OR13\ISO 2022 IR One-byte Kana+ Kanji. This is
87 the Japanese supported pattern.

Priority order of Synthesis is performed by the following priority order (high to low).
synthesis 1) Image data from client
2) Character data from client
3) Client setting default annotation
4) Default client setting default annotation
Display area Annotation area which is twice/three times/four times the default can be
set by client in the height direction.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-55
 MD-56
5.3.5 Recording Pixel Size
The following table shows the number of recording pixels according to each film size
when outputting CR images. These are data for same magnification printing (13/11
enlarged). The number of pixels of the head used on this equipment is 4224, and the
pixel size is 84.7 µm.

35 x 43 cm 26 x 36 cm 25 x 30 cm 20 x 25 cm
No. of recording pix- Main scanning 4160 4212 2912 2928
els
Sub scanning 5008 2972 3514 2334
Recording size Main scanning 352.2 356.6 246.5 247.9
(mm)
Sub scanning 422.4 250.7 296.4 196.9
(mm)
CR image cut pixels Main scanning 0 43 50 38
(Sum of upper and
lower/sum of left and Sub scanning 50 30 50 30
right)
CR image cut per- Main scanning 0.00 1.01 1.70 1.31
centage (%)
(Sum of upper and
lower/sum of left and Sub scanning 1.00 1.00 1.43 1.27
right) (%)

<REMARKS>
For 35 x 43 cm size, the main scanning CR image cut percentage is 0.00%. However,
if the image area is bigger than the film, the image will be cut by the film edge sensor.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-56
 MD-57
6. PRINTING FORMATS 6.2 Standard Formats
This equipment supports the following standard formats for all film sizes.
This chapter describes printing formats such as format names, standard formats, and No. of frames/film: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40,
mixed formats. 42, 48, 49, 54, 56, 60, 63, 64, 70

6.1 Reading the Format Name Portrait Landscape

In “STANDARD\c, r”, c and r indicate the following values. STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\5,5 STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\6,6
c (Column) : No. of frames in the horizontal direction STANDARD\1,2 STANDARD\5,6 STANDARD\1,2 STANDARD\7,4
r (Row) : No. of frames in the vertical direction
STANDARD\1,3 STANDARD\5,7 STANDARD\2,1 STANDARD\7,5
For example, they are as shown in the following for “STANDARD\3, 4”. STANDARD\2,1 STANDARD\5,8 STANDARD\2,2 STANDARD\7,6
STANDARD\2,2 STANDARD\6,6 STANDARD\3,1 STANDARD\7,7
STANDARD\2,3 STANDARD\6,7 STANDARD\3,2 STANDARD\8,4
STANDARD\2,4 STANDARD\6,8 STANDARD\3,3 STANDARD\8,5
STANDARD\3,3 STANDARD\6,9 STANDARD\4,2 STANDARD\8,6
STANDARD\3,4 STANDARD\6,10 STANDARD\4,3 STANDARD\8,7

STANDARD\3,5 STANDARD\7,7 STANDARD\4,4 STANDARD\8,8
STANDARD\3,6 STANDARD\7,8 STANDARD\5,3 STANDARD\9,6
STANDARD\4,4 STANDARD\7,9 STANDARD\5,4 STANDARD\9,7
STANDARD\4,5 STANDARD\7,10 STANDARD\5,5 STANDARD\10,6
STANDARD\4,6 STANDARD\8,8 STANDARD\6,3 STANDARD\10,7
STANDARD\4,7 STANDARD\6,4
STANDARD\4,8 STANDARD\6,5

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-57
 MD-58
6.3 Mixed Formats l 10” x 14” (26 cm x 36 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT

The following shows the frame layout of the mixed formats of each film size supported
by this equipment.
l 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT

l 10” x 14” (26 cm x 36 cm) LANDSCAPE MIXED FORMAT

l 8” x 10” (20 cm x 25 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT

l 8” x 10” (20 cm x 25 cm) LANDSCAPE MIXED FORMAT

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-58
 MD-59
BLANK PAGE

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MD-59
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) All pages

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL

DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

(DRYPIX Lite)

016-201-06E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 MD-1
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT 1.2 System Configuration
{MD (DRYPIX 2000):1.2_System Configuration}

1.1 Functions of Equipment

n Outline of Equipment
• This equipment is a network printer dedicated to DICOM protocol, and adopts the
thermal head recording method.
• Film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, and 20 x 25 cm can be used. 25 x 30 cm size
films can also be used by using the optional 25 x 30 cm film kit.
• It has a processing ability of 50 sheets/hour for 35 x 43 cm size film, 75 sheets/hour
for 26 x 36 cm size film, 90 sheets/hour for 20 x 25 cm size film, and 65 sheets/hour
for 25 x 30 cm size film.
• The equipment is standard-equipped with one magazine slot, however by mounting
the sheet-feeder unit, magazine slot can be increased to two. Use of two magazine
slots allows use of two types of film sizes together. Both magazine slots can also be
set with the same type of film.
• Up to seven magazines can be identified for each magazine slot, which means
that seven types of films can be used as desired by replacing the magazines.
Data identified according to magazine include film size, number of remaining films,
density correction data.
• Films can be loaded with the magazines set in the equipment in a completely bright
room.
• The equipment has an automatic density measurement function which automatically
outputs image patterns required for density measurement and measures density.
• Because it is compact, it can be installed anywhere.
• Power consumption of the equipment can be saved by setting the power saving
mode.
• The following DICOM protocols are supported.
• Verification SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Grayscale Print Management SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Job SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Queue Management SOP Class (SCP)
• Presentation LUT SOP Class (SCP)

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-1
 MD-2
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts

1.3.1 External View

Head cover
Extension tray
Upper rear cover

Upper tray cover

Right cover
Lower tray cover
Main power switch
(ON ( I ):Main power source ON
OFF (O):Main power source OFF)
Front cover

Lower front cover*

Power connector

Rear cover Left cover

Lower right cover*
Upper magazine
(Slot 1) Lower rear open/close cover* Lower left cover* *: Optional
D0002 ai

Lower magazine* Operation panel *: Optional

(Slot 2) D0001.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-2

1.3.2 Operation Panel
n Layout
1 2 3 4
n Names and Functions
No. Name
1 Utility button
2 Enter button
3 Display panel
4 Stand-by switch
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
MD-3
n Example Display
Display Meaning
Indicates that the equipment is currently starting up. (From
power ON to initialization)
Indicates that the equipment is currently initializing
Error code (203 in this example)
Indicates sleep state
Indicates currently service utility mode.
Indicates that the equipment is currently being terminated
n
D0003.ai
Function
Pressing this button switches to U-Utility. U-Utility
can be set only when the equipment is in the ready
state.
• Pressing this button releases the tray lock.
• For executing the menu displayed. If a lower menu
exists, shifts to the next menu.
• 7-segment LED indicating the status of the equip-
ment.
(See “n Example Display” in the right table.)
• Blinks when film jam occurs.
• Turn ON/OFF the equipment power.
• Press five seconds longer to turn OFF the equip-
ment power.
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-3
 MD-4
1.3.3 Layout of External Interface Connectors
CAUTION
When touching the blind plate of the USB connector, be sure to use a wristband
to ground yourself. Otherwise the equipment may not operate properly.

<NOTE>
It is impossible to use two USB memories simultaneously. Only the one recognized
first will be enabled.

USB memory
connector (x2)

Network cable connector

D0012 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-4
 MD-5
1.3.4 Layout of Units
Head (H)

Frame (K1) Cover (P)

Sub-scanning section (E)

Controller
Upper conveyor section (D1)

Upper magazine
set section (A1)
Upper removal section (B1)

Lower conveyor section (D2)

(Optional)

Lower magazine
set section (A2) Lower removal section (B2)
(Optional) (Optional)

Lower frame (K2)

(Optional)

D0021.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-5
 MD-6
1.3.5 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions Section Symbol Name Type Remarks

n Magazine Set Section/Removal Section Upper maga-

zine set section
SA11 Film size detection sensor Penetration
1 (Upper) type sensor
• Upper magazine detec-
tion
SB12 (A1) (PI: 5mm) • Detection of magazine
number by combination
SA12 Film size detection sensor Penetration of sensor state
SB13 2 (Upper) type sensor
MB11 (PI: 5mm)
SA13 Film size detection sensor Penetration
3 (Upper) type sensor
SB11 (PI: 5mm)
Upper removal MB11 Film removing motor (Up- 2-phase Drives suction cup arm
section (B1) per) pulse motor
SB11 Suction cup arm HP de- Penetration ON when suction cup
tection sensor (Upper) type sensor arm is at HP
(PI: 5mm)
SB12 Film surface detection Penetration ON when film surface is
sensor (Upper) type sensor detected/OFF during film
(PI: 5mm) suction
SA13 Suction cup arm upper Penetration ON when upper dead-
SB13 dead-point detection sen- type sensor point is detected
SA12 sor (Upper) (PI: 5mm)
SA11 D0016 ai
<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor: Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor: Film present/ Detects actuator

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-6
 MD-7
n Conveyor Section/Sub-Scanning Section Section Symbol Name Type Remarks

ME1 SD13 Conveyor sec- MD11 Conveyance motor 2-phase Conveys film from re-
SD12 tion (D1) pulse motor moval section to convey-
or exit
SD11 MD12 Reference plate drive mo- 2-phase Moves film positioning
tor (Upper) pulse motor guide assembly refer-
MD12 ence plate, and positions
film
SD11 Conveyance entrance Reflection ON when film is at upper
sensor (Upper) type sensor conveyor entrance
MD11
SD12 Conveyance exit sensor Reflection ON when film is between
type sensor cleaning roller and platen
roller
SD13 Reference plate HP de- Penetration ON when film position-
tection sensor (Upper) type sensor ing guide assembly
(PI: 5mm) reference plate is at HP
(open)
Sub-scanning ME1 Sub-scanning motor 5-phase Sub-scanning section
section (E) pulse motor film conveyance motor

<REMARKS>
D0017.ai

The ON of each sensor and switch means the following

• Penetration type sensor: Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor: Film present/ Detects actuator

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-7
 MD-8
n Head/Film Edge Sensor Section Symbol Name Type Remarks

THH6 Head (H) MH1 Head up/down drive mo- 2-phase Perform thermal head
tor pulse motor pressurization/depres-
surization
H1 Thermal head - -
HH1, Head heater - Adjust thermal head tem-
HH2 perature
TPH1 Thermal protector - Cuts off head power,
head heater (HH1, HH2)
power when the thermal
head is abnormally hot
SH1 Head position detection Penetration ON when the head arm
sensor type sensor is at HP (When depres-
(PI: 5mm) surization)
THH6 Ambience thermistor Thermistor Controller vicinity tem-
perature detection
SH1
D0018.ai Scanner (S) SS1 Film edge sensor 1 - • PIS28A board
• Detects left/right edge
H1 SS2 Film edge sensor 2 - positions of 35x43 cm
HH1
size film

SS1 <REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor: Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor: Film present/ Detects actuator

TPH1
MH1
SS2
HH2 D0019.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-8
 MD-9
n Frame/Covers Section Symbol Name Type Remarks
SK12 FANP1 Upper frame SK12 Head cover interlock Microswitch When the head cover is
(K1) switch open, +24V power sup-
plied to load parts is cut
off
FANK1 FANK1 Controller fan DC fan -
Cover (P) FANP1 Head cooling fan 1 DC fan Voltage control

D0014 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-9
 MD-10
n Sheet-Feeder Unit (Option) Section Symbol Name Type Remarks
SK21 Lower maga- SA21 Film size detection sensor Penetration • Lower magazine detec-
SB22 zine set section 1 (Lower) type sensor tion
SD21 (A2) (PI: 5mm) • Detects magazine
number when com-
SA22 Film size detection sensor Penetration bined with sensor state
2 (Lower) type sensor
SB23 (PI: 5mm)
SA23 Film size detection sensor Penetration
MB21 3 (Lower) type sensor
(PI: 5mm)
Lower removal MB21 Film removing motor 2-phase Drives suction cup arm
SB21 section (B2) (Lower) pulse motor
SB21 Suction cup arm HP de- Penetration ON when suction cup
tection sensor (Lower) type sensor arm is at HP
(PI: 5mm)
SB22 Film surface detection Penetration ON when film surface is
sensor (Lower) type sensor detected/OFF when film
(PI: 5mm) is suctioned
SB23 Suction cup arm upper Penetration ON when upper dead-
dead-point detection sen- type sensor point is detected
sor (Lower) (PI: 5mm)
Lower conveyor SD21 Conveyance entrance Reflection ON when film is at lower
section (D2) sensor (Lower) type sensor conveyor section en-
SA23 trance
Lower frame SK21 Lower rear open/close Microswitch When the lower rear
SA22 (K2) cover interlock switch open/close cover is
SA21 D0020.ai
open, +24V power sup-
plied to load parts is cut
off

<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor: Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor: Film present/ Detects actuator

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-10
 MD-11
1.3.6 Board Layout Name Main function
PIS28A
LED28A Density measurement section light-emitting board
PNL28A PDD28A PDD28A Density measurement section light-sensing board
SND32A/B LED28A CPU32A (CPU board) Overall control of equipment, network input, image pro-
cessing
PIS28A Power supply unit DC power supply to equipment
SND32A/B (Sensor driver Mechanical drive parts drive, I/O parts control, signal
CPU32A/DIMM board) ＊ counter from film edge sensor, thermistor signal and den-
sity measurement section data AD conversion
(CF) Compact flash memory Main program storage, error log storage, 512MB
DIMM (Memory) CPU25A board main memory, standard specification is
1GB
RLY32A (Head voltage switch- Switches measurement circuit during head resistance
ing relay) measurement
PNL28A (Operation panel Message display (16 digits 2 lines black and white charac-
board) ter display)
Key input, LED display, status lamp display

Power supply unit PIS28A (Film edge detection Film edge detection for record start timing
CF board)
RLY32A D0015.ai ＊ : SND32A_Countries except China
SND32B_Only inside China
l Fuse Layout
Board Symbol. Rating
SND32A board F1 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND32A board F2 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND32A board F3 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND32A board F4 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND32A board F5 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND32A board F7 AC/DC 48V 5A
SND32A board F8 AC/DC 48V 2A
SND32A board F9 AC/DC 48V 2A
SND32A board F10 AC/DC 48V 5A

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-11
 MD-12
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE 2.2 Handling of Equipment Errors
EQUIPMENT 2.2.1 Level 1 Error
The following errors can be recovered by user intervention. These errors are
2.1 Powering ON automatically logged. When the error occurs during film conveyance, the error is
displayed after the mechanism is initialized so that the film can be removed.
When the main power switch of the equipment is at ON position, the equipment starts
up under the following conditions: n Cleaning Roller Not Found
Cleaning roller is detected during mechanism initialization. When the cleaning roller
Means Conditions Remarks is absent, the initialization is interrupted and the error is displayed. The initialization
resumes upon detection of the cleaning roller presence and cover closure.
Power switch on the opera- Press the power switch on -
tion panel the operation panel.
n Magazine Not Found
This error notifies the absence of magazine. Even when a magazine absence is
detected at the equipment startup, the operation proceeds normally without invoking a
fallback.

n No Film
No film error message is displayed if the remaining film counter is 0 and the film was
not successfully removed from the magazine (no change detected at SD11/SD21).

n Film Removal Error

Film removal error message is displayed when the remaining film counter is not 0 but
the film was not successfully removed from the magazine during film removal process
(no change detected at SD11/SD21).

n Cover Open
Head cover interlock switch (SK12) are constantly monitored. When one of these
switches is OPEN, the motor is stopped by the interlock and an error message is
displayed at the same time. When all the switches are closed, the error disappears
and the system returns to the normal state.
When these covers are open during a film jam removal or cleaning roller installation,
no cover open error message is displayed because one of the “Film Jam” or “Cleaning
Roller Not Found” errors has already occurred.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-12

n Film Jam
When no change is detected at the sensor within a predetermined time during the
film conveyance process, an error message is displayed, assuming that a jam has
occurred. Upon detection of an error, film conveyance is stopped, the rollers are
released, and the motors are de-energized.
Upon closure of all covers after the removal of the jammed film, the error is cleared,
the mechanism is initialized, and the system returns to the normal state.
n Density Measurement Error
An error message is displayed when the expected density value was not obtained
from a density measurement. Each stepedge is checked for difference from the
standard value to determine whether it is within tolerance.
This error occurs when a film other than DI-HT is loaded.
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
MD-13
2.2.2 Level 0 Error
Imaginable fatal errors are check failure at initialization, head movement failure, and
edge detection failure at the film edge detection sensor.
n Memory Not Installed
An error message is displayed when the required amount of memory is not installed.
Memory amount check is performed by writing and reading data at the final address.
n Board Not Installed
An error message is displayed when either of SND board or HCT board is not
installed. Assumed to be absent when not found via PCI bus scan.
n Head Up-down Movement Failure
An error message is displayed when the head position detection sensor (SH1) fails
to detect the up-down movement of the head. Upon detection of this error, any
subsequent film removal is canceled. When a film has been already removed, it
continues to be conveyed but not print-processed. The film is output but the job is not
deleted from the spool.
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-13
 MD-14
2.3 Powering OFF PFIF log
Records message transmission/reception between the formatter and printer.
When the main power switch of the equipment is at ON position, the equipment shuts
down under the following conditions: Jam log
Collects logs related to jams when jams occur.
Means Conditions Remarks
l Analysis Log
Power switch on the opera- Keep pressing the power Perform the ending process.
tion panel switch. The following items are saved as the logs for analysis. While the equipment is in
operation, the data is written into the file system on the RAMDISK instead of the
Main power switch Turn off the main power The equipment is completely
switch. powered off immediately re-
CF itself. When an error occurred or the equipment is shutting down, the data is
gardless of its condition. transferred to the CF.
DICOM log
Upon the start of powering off operation, reception of any subsequent image data from
the DICOM is canceled. All image data already received is print-processed before the DICOM communication log with connected part. Log volume is heavy.
ending process is started. Main log
2.3.1 Ending Process Log on control of all applications. Records start and termination time, control
transition time with each sub-system, etc.
The ending process includes saving logs to the compact flash memory (CF) and
powering off. Output log
Records progress to printing after image processing completes.
n Saving Logs
The logs to be saved are operation data log and analysis log. PCUTL log
It can be set at the PC-Utility whether to save analysis logs. PC-Utility function processing trace.
l Operation Data Log Spooler log
The following logs are saved as operational data of the equipment: Records results of printing request. Also records information such as remaining
films when printing is requested.
Error log
Records equipment failures. Cover open is also recorded as error. Magazine Trace log
open is not taken as error. Records start state between sub-systems on chart.
IOT
Records ON/OFF state of sensors and motors in timechart format. Special viewer
is required for referencing.
ISC
Records reception of messages between tasks of conveyance and print functions.
Mechanism log
Records control of ON/OFF of sensors and motors, etc.
Edge sensor log
Records edge sensor reading values during 35x43 cm size printing.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-14
 MD-15
3. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL
CONTROL

3.1 System Block Diagram

AC input (100-120V/200-240V)

Power supply unit Thermal head

+14.8V Relay board

SND board
Operation panel
CPU Thermal protector
(V850)
Head heater

Head thermistor
PS_ON ADC
PS_ON Control
circuit Density measurement PDD
CPU board
Density measurement LED
SPI
CPU Edge sensor
(D425)

Sensor
PCI 32bit
DDR PCI104 FPGA
SO-DIMM Fan

Fan
CF LAN

SRAM Interlock switch

+24V 1Mbit
+12V
+5V 2-phase/3-phase pulse motor
+3.3V DC/DC
+5VAUX
CTL signal

LAN compatible external device

D0010.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-15
 MD-16
3.2 Interlock Control 3.3 Functions of Boards
The drive power supply cutoff by the interlock switch of this equipment is shown
below. 3.3.1 CPU Board
n Detection of Disconnection by Photocoupler n Outline
The ON/OFF state of interlock switches, relays, and fuses is converted to the ON/OFF
The CPU board performs overall control of the equipment, network input, and image
signal by the photocoupler, and used for software control.
processing.
n Stop Load by Interlock n Main Functions
When the interlock function operates, the power supply of the following load is cut off.
l CPU
Power cutoff load
Atom Dual Core D425 1.8GHz
Section Symbol Name SK12 TPH1

Upper removal
l Chip set
MB11 Film removing motor (Upper)
section (B1) Intel NH82801HBM (1CH8M)
Lower removal
section (B2)
MB21 Film removing motor (Lower) l LAN
10Base-T/100Base-TX
MD11 Conveyance motor
Upper conveyor
section (D1) l IDE
MD12 Reference plate drive motor (Upper)
CF card
Lower conveyor
MD22 Reference plate drive motor (Lower) l Memory
section (D2)

Sub-scanning DDR3 SDRAM

ME1 Sub-canning motor
section (E)
l PCI
HH1 Head heater
1slot (PCI 104)
HH2 Head heater
Head (H)
l USB
MH1 Head up/down drive motor USB 2.0
H1 Thermal head

Cover (P) FANP1 Head cooling fan 1

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-16
 MD-17
3.3.2 SND Board n Main Functions
n Outline l Sensor I/F
The SND board performs I/O control of the equipment by controlling the CPU board.
Sensor input
Head resistance
SND board measurement • PI 5mm GAP type......................................................................×11
ADC Density measure- • PI reflection type........................................................................×3
ment PD
Board Head thermistor • Interlock state detection.............................................................×1
version Sensor
input I/F • Fuse disconnection detection....................................................×10
Operation 5mm GAP sensor • Edge sensor..............................................................................×2
panel Reflective sensor
Sensor
ON/OFF A/D conversion
driver
• Thermistor.................................................................................×6
Serial SCI ON/OFF Changing • Density measurement photo diode............................................×1
CPU fan driving Fan
monitor voltage
(V850) Sensor control
LED ON/OFF • LED lighting control (Reflection type, film edge sensor)............×5
board Interlock • Density measurement LED lighting control...............................×1
circuit Interlock
l Drive I/F
Motor
ADC current Control
Fuse/power supply detection
disconnection • 2-phase/5-phase pulse motor control........................................×6
detection • Relay board control...................................................................×1
• Cooling fan control.....................................................................×1
Drive
CPU PCI 32bits 2-phase/5-phase
Motor stepping • 2-phase/5-phase pulse motor drive...........................................×6
board driver motor • Relay board drive......................................................................×1
Power supply fan alarm • Cooling fan drive........................................................................×1
Head power supply Thermal Thermal
remote control l Interlock
head I/F head
ON/OFF
Power 24V FPGA Microswitch
supply 12V PIS board
3.3V
• Head cover................................................................................×1
5V • Lower rear open/close cover (Optional)....................................×1
SRAM
(1Mb)
±12V ±12V
DCDC Switching head power supply/
PDD resistance measurement circuit
RLY board
board
D0013.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-17
 MD-18
l Operation Panel I/F 3.3.3 RLY Board
• LED ON/OFF control.................................................................×11
• Switch........................................................................................×3 n Outline
• Buzzer.......................................................................................×1 The RLY board performs switching between the head power supply and the resistance
measurement.
l Others
+14.8V
For Analysis
RLY32A Head
• Fuse disconnection detection circuit Power
• Board version information is controlled by the difference of pullup/down supply
resistance inplementation

Resistance
measurement
SND32A
Head power supply/resistance measurement switching signal D0011.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-18
 MD-19
3.3.4 Power Supply Unit

n Outline of Power Supply Specifications

Input AC voltage
100 to 240VAC
Output DC voltage
• +14.8V
• +24.0V
• +12.0V
• +5.0V
• +3.3V
• +5VAUX

Input frequency
50 to 60 Hz
Current leakage
0.5mA or less

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-19
 MD-20
4. IMAGE PROCESSING
{MD (DRYPIX 2000) :5._IMAGE PROCESSING}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-20
 MD-21
5. PRINTING FORMATS
{MD (DRYPIX 2000) :6._PRINTING FORMATS}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-21
 MD-22
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-22
 MD-23
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MD-23
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.31.2006 00 New release (FM4832) All pages

03.24.2006 01 Revised (FM4903) All pages
08.31.2006 02 Revised (FM4958) 1, 3, 5-8, 10-13, 15, 29, 30, 32, 33,
35-55

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 10.18.2006

02.15.2007
03
04
Revised (FM5036)
Revised (Revision for main unit software
55
3, 10-21, 26-59
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5075)
01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) Cover

TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
(DRYPIX 2000)

016-201-06E DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 MT-1
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD
When malfunctions occur in the equipment, analyze them from error codes, abnormal
image, and abnormal operation and perform the required corrections.

n Troubleshooting Methods

l Troubleshooting from Error Codes

When an error code is displayed on the screen, analyze the malfunction from that
error code.
When no error codes are displayed, the malfunction can be analyzed if an error is
logged in the error log.
{MT:2_ERROR CODE}

l Troubleshooting from Abnormal Operations

When analyzing malfunctions from abnormal operations, such as an errored-out
initialization, refer to “3.ABNORMAL OPERATIONS”.
{MT:3_ABNORMAL OPERATIONS}
When checking the equipment in troubleshooting, refer also to “SERVICE PARTS
LIST, 14. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
{SP:14_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-1
 MT-2
2. ERROR CODE n Checking Error Logs
The following describes how to check error logs.

2.1 Checking Error Codes 1. Start the M-Utility.

2. Select [1-2-1. Show Err. Log].
n Reading Error Codes
[0. RETURN>] → → [1. System>] → → [1-1. Configuration>]

→ → [1-2. Error Log>] → → [1-2-1.Show Err. Log] →

→ The latest error log is displayed. If there are no error logs, “nothing” is
displayed.

<Remarks>
The following shows the displayed details of error logs.
Format

Displayed details
YY : Index display
X : Place of error (P: Printer, F:Formatter)
AAAA : Error code (4-digit hexadecimal)
BBBB : Detailed error code (4-digit hexadecimal)
CCCCCC : Date error occurred
DDDD : Time error occurred

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-2
 MT-3
3. For details on error codes, refer to “2.3 Error Code Table” for the
meaning of the error which has occurred, suspected cause, and
remedy. When analyzing an error code, also refer to the detailed code
provided.

Sub System Error Type Place of Error

FLH Film conveyance related error
MFC Data setting/system related error Printer error
HED Head control related error
DICOM DICOM error
Spooler Spooler error
ImgPrc Image processing error
Output Output control error
Panel Panel control error
Utility Utility error
Formatter error
JobMake Test pattern generation error
Main MAIN control error
File transfer error
PCUTL
(Using the PC Tool in normal state)
File transfer error
Installer
(Using the PC Tool at initialization)
StartUp Initialization error

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-3
 MT-4
2.2 Format of Detailed Information 2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information
Perform this check only for analyzing error codes of the printer. n 2-A (Sensor Related Errors)
In the usual troubleshooting, find the corresponding error code from the error code
tables, and refer to the suspected causes and remedy methods indicated to resolve Errors occurring in initialization self-diagnosis, removal, recording, constant
the problem. monitoring, etc. (Including mechanism, etc.)
However if the problem persists, or to investigate the problem in further detail, check Convert the hexadecimal 4-digit code to binary, compare the bit maps, and investigate
the following detailed information to analyze the problem. the input state corresponding to each bit.
1=ON (Close), 0=OFF (Open)
n Checking Detailed Information of Error Codes

1. Check the corresponding error code and its detailed information at the
error message display, or at [Display Error Log] of the M-Utility.

2. Check the detailed information format number at “2.3 Error Code

Table” and refer to the corresponding format.
l 2-A-1 (Electricity Related Information (Type E))
3. Find the format information from the 4-digit detailed information, and Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
analyze the problem.

l 2-A-2 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S1))

Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-4
 MT-5
l 2-A-3 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S2)) n 2-B (File I/O Error)
Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
l 2-B-1 (Type F)
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the number
of the file causing the error and the causes.

l 2-A-4 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S3))

Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs. File number
201 : Conveyance timer file (For mechanism)
202 : Conveyance timer file (For size)
203 : Conveyance timer file (For M-Utility)
204 : Conveyance counter file
205 : PM control parameter file (For mechanism)
206 : PM control parameter file (For size)
207 : PM control parameter file (For M-Utility)
208 : Timer file for PM time monitoring
209 : FLH individual data file (leading edge recording parameter)
20D : FLH individual data file (subscanning speed parameter)
20F : FLH individual data file (head grip adjustment parameter)
l 2-A-5 (Other Information (Type S4))
Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs. Causes
1 : Open error
2 : Read error
3 : Write error
4 : Conversion error
5 : Line specification error
6 : Column specification error
7 : Size specification error
8 : External file data error
A : Data range error (Detected by application)

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-5
 MT-6
n 2-E (M-Utility Operation Error)
l 2-E-1 (Type U)
Displays the M-Utility command number which occur when the removal operation
of the M-Utility was not executed as specified and parameter of errors which were
executed at the last time.

M-Utility command number

04 : Removal mechanism individual operation/Removal mechanism continuous
operations
Parameter number
0: Home Positioning
1: Film surface detection position
2: Suction position
3: Upper deadpoint detection position
4: Film fanning
5: Film release
6: Conveyance

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-6
 MT-7
2.2.2 MFC Related (Data Setting/System Related) Error
Detailed Information

n 3-B (File I/O Error)

Error which occurs when file could not be accessed correctly. Displays the cause of
the access error.

File Number
300: IO trace data
301: ISC log
302: Mechanism log
303: PF-I/F log
304: Edge sensor log
Cause
1: Open error
2: Lead error
3: Write error
4: Conversion error
5: Line specification error
6: Column specification error
7: Size specification error
8: External file data error
A: Data range error (Detected by application)

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-7
 MT-8
2.2.3 HED Related (Head Control Related) Error Detailed n 9-2 (Thermistor Temperature Adjustment Error)
Information When temperature adjustment error of the thermistor (temperature adjustment
timeout, AD conversion timeout, temperature exceeded) is detected, the detected
n 5-1 (Density Measurement Error) thermistor number will be displayed.
If the measured value is insufficient during density measurement, the measured data
count will be displayed.

n 9-1 (Thermistor Disconnection Error) Number

When disconnection of the thermistor is detected, the detected thermistor number will 1 to 6: Head thermistor number
be displayed.
l If one thermistor is disconnected

l If two thermistors are disconnected

Number
1 to 6: Head thermistor number/ambient thermistor number

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-8
 MT-9
2.3 Error Code Table
Names abbreviated in error code tables are as follows.

Abbreviated
Formal Name
Name
SND board SND25A board
CPU board CPU25A board
THC board THC25A board
PNL board PNL25A board
LED board LED15A board
PDD board PDD15A board
PRT Printer/print mechanism
FMT Formatter
CF Compact flush memory

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-9
 MT-10
2.3.1 Printer
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Conveyance system related external file
access error The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
• File read error defective or CPU board malfunction.
• File write error Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Conveyance system file
0201 error
• File conversion error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. 2-B-1
• File line specification error 2. Replace the card with a new one.
• File column specification error 3. Replace the CPU board.
• Size specification error 4. Reinstall the software and check again.
• External file data error

0202 FPMC error (At start) FPMC status is error during motor drive. Conflict in processing at CAN communication mechanism. 2-C-1

FPMC status is error status when motor

0203 FPMC error (At stop)
is stopping.
Conflict in processing at CAN communication mechanism. 2-C-1

FPMC error (No response Stop response is not issued from the
0204 at cancellation) driver when motor drive is stopped.
Conflict in processing at CAN communication mechanism. 2-D-1

Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.

Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At initialization, attempted to deviate
board SH1 port, MH1 controller.
Initialization head HP head position from HP, but SH1 does not
0218 deviation detection error become OPEN.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-4
adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At initialization, attempted to return head
board SH1 port, MH1 controller.
Initialization head HP position to HP, but SH1 does not become
0219 return detection error CLOSE.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-4
adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-10
 MT-11
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At initialization, attempted to deviate
Initialization main body board SB11 port, MB11 controller.
suction cup arm from HP, but SB11 does
0222 removal section HP
not become CLOSE.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
deviation detection error adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At initialization, attempted to deviate
Initialization sheet-feeder board SB21 port, MB21 controller.
suction cup arm from HP, but SB21 does
0223 unit removal section HP
not become CLOSE.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-3
deviation detection error adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At initialization, attempted to return
Initialization main body board SB11 port, MB11 controller.
suction cup arm position to HP, but SB11
0226 removal section HP return
does not become OPEN.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
detection error adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At initialization, attempted to return
Initialization sheet-feeder board SB21 port, MB21 controller.
suction cup arm position to HP, but SB21
0227 unit removal section HP
does not become OPEN.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-3
return detection error adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
At film removal, attempted to move the Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
suction cup arm from the upper deadpoint board SB12 port, MB11 controller.
Main body removal section
0230 film surface detection error
to the film surface detection position, but 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
SB12 does not become CLOSE. adjustments.
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-11

Error
Error Name Significance
Code
At film removal, attempted to move the
Sheet-feeder unit removal suction cup arm from the upper deadpoint
0231 section film surface to the film surface detection position, but
detection error SB22 does not become CLOSE.
(Retryover)
At film removal, attempted to push the
suction cup arm from the film surface
Film suction detection
0236 error
detection position into the bellows, but
SB12 does not become OPEN.
(Retryover)
At film removal, attempted to push the
suction cup arm from the film surface
Film suction detection er-
0237 ror
detection position into the bellows, but
SB22 does not become OPEN.
(Retryover)
At film removal, attempted to move the
suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint
Main body removal section
0244 HP rise detection error
after film suction, but SB13 does not
become CLOSE.
(Retryover)
At film removal, attempted to move the
Sheet-feeder unit removal suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint
0245 section HP rise detection after film suction, but SB23 does not
error become CLOSE.
(Retryover)
MT-12
Detailed Information
Probable Cause and Remedy
Format
Malfunction of SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SB22 port, MB21 controller.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-3
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SB12 port, MB11 controller.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SB22 port, MB21 controller.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-3
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB13 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SB13 port, MB11 controller.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB23 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SB23 port, MB21 controller.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
2-A-3
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-12

Error
Error Name
Code
Main body film positioning
0246 reference plate HP devia-
tion error
Sheet-feeder unit film
0247 positioning reference plate
HP deviation error
Main body film positioning
0248 reference plate HP detec-
tion error
0251 Head rise error
Main body removal section
0252 HP return detection error
at grip release
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
Significance
During film positioning reference plate
operations, attempted to move outside
HP, but SD13 did not become CLOSE.
During film positioning reference plate
operations, attempted to move outside
HP, but SD23 did not become CLOSE.
During film positioning reference plate
operations, attempted to move to HP, but
SD13 did not become OPEN
At recording, attempted to move the head
position from the recording position to the
HP, but SH1 does not become CLOSE.
During grip release, attempted to deviate
suction cup arm position from HP, but
SB11 did not become OPEN.
MT-13
Detailed Information
Probable Cause and Remedy
Format
Malfunction of SD13 sensor or MD12 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SD13 port, MD12 controller.
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
2-A-2
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SD23 sensor or MD22 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SD23 port, MD22 controller.
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
2-A-3
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SD13 sensor or MD12 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SD13 port, MD12 controller.
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
2-A-2
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SH1 port, MH1 controller.
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-4
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SB11 port, MB11 controller.
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
2-A-2
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-13
 MT-14
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Sheet-feeder unit removal Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
During grip release, attempted to deviate
section HP return board SB21 port, MB21 controller.
0253 detection error at grip
suction cup arm position from HP, but
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
2-A-3
SB21 did not become OPEN.
release 2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
TPH1 disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board TPH1 port.
Attempted to check the state of TPH1,
0257 TPH1 operation
but could not confirm.
1. Perform sensor check using the M-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If detection, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE1 disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board FUSE1 port.
Attempted to check the FUSE1 state, but
0259 FUSE1 operation
could not confirm.
1. Perform sensor check using the M-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If detection, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE2 disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board FUSE2 port.
Attempted to check the FUSE2 state, but
0260 FUSE2 operation
could not confirm.
1. Perform sensor check using the M-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If detection, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE3 disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board FUSE3 port.
Attempted to check the FUSE3 state, but
0261 FUSE3 operation
could not confirm.
1. Perform sensor check using the M-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If detection, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE4 disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board FUSE4 port.
Attempted to check the FUSE4 state, but
0262 FUSE4 operation
could not confirm.
1. Perform sensor check using the M-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If detection, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE5 disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board FUSE5 port.
Attempted to check the FUSE5 state, but
0263 FUSE5 operation
could not confirm.
1. Perform sensor check using the M-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If detection, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-14
 MT-15
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
FUSE6 disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board FUSE6 port.
Attempted to check the FUSE6 state, but
0264 FUSE6 operation
could not confirm.
1. Perform sensor check using the M-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If detection, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
(+24VMRD) OFF
Or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND board (+24VRD)
port.
0265 (+24VMRD) operation (+24VMRD) state is OFF.
1. Perform sensor check using the M-Utility.
2-A-1
2. If detection, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
(+24VHRD) OFF
1. Perform sensor check using the M-Utility.
0272 (+24VHRD) operation (+24VHRD) state is OFF.
2. If detection, replace parts.
2-A-1
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board FUSE7 port.
Attempted to check FUSE7 state, but
0281 FUSE7 operations
could not confirm.
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check. None
2. If problems are detected, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board FUSE8 port.
Attempted to check FUSE8 state, but
0282 FUSE8 operations
could not confirm.
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check. None
2. If problems are detected, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE disconnection or malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board FUSE9 port.
Attempted to check FUSE9 state, but
0283 FUSE9 operations
could not confirm.
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check. None
2. If problems are detected, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB13 sensor or MB11 motor.
At film removal, attempted to move the
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
Main body removal section suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint
board SB13 port, MB11 controller.
0284 upper deadpoint detection after film suction, but SB13 does not
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
None
error become CLOSE.
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
(Retryover)
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-15
 MT-16
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Malfunction of SB23 sensor or MB21 motor.
At film removal, attempted to move the
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
Sheet-feeder unit removal suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint
board SB23 port, MB21 controller.
0285 section upper deadpoint after film suction, but SB23 does not
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
None
detection error become CLOSE.
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
(Retryover)
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SD23 sensor or MD22 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
Sheet-feeder unit film During film positioning reference plate
board SD23 port, MD22 controller.
0286 positioning reference plate operations, attempted to move to HP, but
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
None
HP detection error SD23 did not become OPEN.
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Sensor driver, FMPC driver setup error
02FF Device set error • FMPC time monitoring setup error Error which should not occur due to software bug, incorrect settings, etc. 2-D-1
• Message ID specification error
All removal mechanisms No magazines can be used due to
0304 use disabled abnormal state, etc.
Inspection of refill section or removal mechanism. None

Failed in startup of conveyance control Program codes are not processed appropriately.
0333 Start timeout: FLH
subsystem Reinstall or replace the memory.
None

Failed in startup of head control Program codes are not processed appropriately.
0334 Start timeout: HED
subsystem Reinstall or replace the memory.
None

Before image processing 3 ends, recording ended.

Malfunction of CPU board or SND board
Recording processing
051E sequence error
Recording processing sequence error 1. Replace the CPU board. None
2. Replace the SND board.
3. Reinstall the software and check again..
Image processing 3 does not end.
Image processing 3 CPU board error
0558 timeout error
Image processing 3 error
1. Replace the CPU board.
None
2. Reinstall the software and check again..

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-16
 MT-17
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Recording cannot execute.
1. Replace the CPU board.
0559 Head control board error Head control board error
2. Replace the SND board.
None
3. Reinstall the software and check again..
Recording does not end.
Head control board 1. Replace the CPU board.
055A timeout error
Head control board timeout error
2. Replace the SND board.
None
3. Reinstall the software and check again.
Head unit is not installed or head unit connectors are not connected, or
malfunction of CPU board.
Head resistance value Head resistance value check error during 1. Check the connection of the head unit.
05A0 error start up 2. Replace the SND board.
None
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Head correction parameter Head correction parameter file open error
05A2 file open error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Head correction parameter Head correction parameter file read error
05A3 file read error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-17
 MT-18
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Head correction parameter file close Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Head correction parameter
05A4 file close error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Density measurement Density measurement value conversion Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05A5 value conversion parameter file open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
parameter file open error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Density measurement Density measurement value conversion Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05A6 value conversion parameter file read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
parameter file read error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
Density measurement defective or CPU board malfunction.
value conversion Density measurement value conversion Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05A7 parameter file close error parameter file close error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
error) 3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-18
 MT-19
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05AE correction parameter file parameter file open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
open error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05AF correction parameter file parameter file read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
read error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05B0 correction parameter file parameter file close error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
close error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Temperature rise Temperature rise correction parameter Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05B1 correction parameter file file open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
open error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-19
 MT-20
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Temperature rise Temperature rise correction parameter Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05B2 correction parameter file file read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
read error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Temperature rise Temperature rise correction parameter Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05B3 correction parameter file file close error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
close error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Black ratio correction parameter file open Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Black ratio correction
05B4 parameter file open error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Black ratio correction parameter file read Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Black ratio correction
05B5 parameter file read error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-20
 MT-21
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Black ratio correction parameter file close
Black ratio correction 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board.
05B6 parameter file close error
error
2. Replace the card with a new one.
None
(CF memory card access error)
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Load fluctuation correction table file open Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction
05B7 table file open error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Load fluctuation correction table file read Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction
05B8 table file read error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Load fluctuation correction table file close Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction
05B9 table file close error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Temperature Temperature measurement table file Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05BA measurement table file open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
open error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-21
 MT-22
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Temperature Temperature measurement table file read Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05BB measurement table file error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
read error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Temperature Temperature measurement table file Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05BC measurement table file close error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
close error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Temperature rise Temperature rise correction table file Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05C9 correction table file open open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Temperature rise Temperature rise correction table file Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05CA correction table file read read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-22
 MT-23
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Temperature rise Temperature rise correction table file Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05CB correction table file close close error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Load fluctuation correction Load fluctuation correction weighting Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05CC weighting table file open table file open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Load fluctuation correction Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction weighting
05CD weighting table file read
table file read error
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
error 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Load fluctuation correction Load fluctuation correction weighting Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05CE weighting table file close table file close error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-23
 MT-24
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction data Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05CF correction data table open table open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction data Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05D0 correction data table read table read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction data Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
05D1 correction data table close table close error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction data
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board.
05D2 correction data table write table write error
2. Replace the card with a new one.
None
error (CF memory card access error)
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-24
 MT-25
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Heat generation pattern table file open Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Heat generation pattern
05D8 table file open error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Heat generation pattern table file read Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Heat generation pattern
05D9 table file read error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Heat generation pattern table file close Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Heat generation pattern
05DA table file close error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Density measurement parameter file read Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Density measurement
05DB parameter file read error
error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-25

Error
Error Name
Code
Image processing 3
05DC parameter file read error
Parameter file read error
in response to insufficient
05DD density at 30 mm point
from leading edge
Frameless processing
05DE upper/lower curved portion
parameter file read error
Image processing 3
05DF parameter file write error
05E0 Edge sensor error
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
Significance
Image processing 3 parameter file read
error
(CF memory card access error)
Leading edge 30 mm point insufficient
density response parameter file read
error
(CF memory card access error)
Frameless processing upper/lower
curved portion parameter file read error
(CF memory card access error)
Image processing 3 parameter file write
error
(CF memory card access error)
Left edge sensor error
MT-26
Detailed Information
Probable Cause and Remedy
Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The edge sensor is not operating properly, or CPU board malfunction.
1. Replace the edge sensor.
2. Replace the SND board. None
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-26
 MT-27
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The edge sensor is not operating properly, or CPU board malfunction.
1. Replace the edge sensor.
05E1 Edge sensor error Right edge sensor error 2. Replace the SND board. None
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, or the card is
defective or CPU board malfunction.
Clear film compensation parameter file Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Clear film compensation
05E2 parameter file read error
read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. None
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
Malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or around SND board thermistor,
More than two thermistors for or CAN communication mechanism or around SND board malfunction.
More than two thermistors
0900 disconnection error
heater temperature detection have 1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related connectors are 9-1
disconnected. set normally.
2. Replace the disconnected thermistor.
Malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or around SND board thermistor,
cooling fan, heater, or CAN communication mechanism or around SND board
Designated value malfunction.
0901 temperature rise error
Designated value temperature rise error
1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related connectors are
9-2
set normally.
2. Replace the cooling fan and thermistor.
Malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or around SND board thermistor,
cooling fan, heater, or CAN communication mechanism or around SND board
AD conversion timeout malfunction.
0904 error
AD conversion timeout error
1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related connectors are
9-2
set normally.
2. Replace the cooling fan and thermistor.

1212 Cover open Cover is opened. Close the cover. 2-A-1

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-27
 MT-28
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Jam occurred during feeding from just below the cleaning roller to just below the
head.
When jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head cover, then remove
Conveyed film to directly below the head,
Conveyor section jam the film.
1249 error
but SD12 did not become CLOSE (film
1. Check the sensors/motors.
2-A-4
leading edge detection).
SD12, MD11, ME1
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.
Jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image recording).
When jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head cover, then remove
Conveyed film to recording section, but the film.
Conveyor section jam
1254 error
SD11 did not become OPEN (film trailing 1. Check the sensors/motors. 2-A-2
edge detection). SD11, SD12, MD11, ME1
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.
Jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image recording).
When jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head cover, then remove
Conveyed film to recording section, but the film.
Conveyor section jam
1255 error
SD21 did not become OPEN (film trailing 1. Check the sensors/motors. 2-A-3
edge detection). SD21, SD12, MD11, ME1
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.
Jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image recording).
When jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head cover, then remove
the film.
[Example]
Conveyed film to recording section, but This problem can occur when 26 x 36 cm size film is set in the 26 x 36 cm size
Recording section jam
1256 error
SD12 did not become OPEN (film trailing magazine. 2-A-4
edge detection). 1. Check the film size.
2. Check the sensors/motors.
SD12, MD11, ME1
3. Check the cleaning rollers.
4. Check the head.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-28
 MT-29
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Film dropped During film removal.
Or, malfunction of the SB11, SB12, SD11 sensors or MB11 motor.
Malfunction of mecha-mechanism, CAN communication mechanism, or
malfunction of SND board SB11, SB12, SD11 port, MB11 controller.
Conveyor section After completing removal processing,
1266 conveyance error SD11 did not become CLOSE normally.
1. Check if film has dropped. 2-A-2
2. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Film dropped During film removal.
Or, malfunction of the SB21, SB22, SD21 sensors or MB21 motor.
Malfunction of mecha-mechanism, CAN communication mechanism, or
malfunction of SND board SB21, SB22, SD21 port, MB21 controller.
Conveyor section After completing removal processing,
1267 conveyance error SD21 did not become CLOSE normally.
1. Check if film has dropped. 2-A-3
2. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
During remaining film ejection, SD11 and
SD21 become CLOSE at the same time,
Remaining film ejection SD11 becomes CLOSE when the upper Judging that film in the magazine cannot be ejected, jam occurs.
1268 removal section jam error removal section is in the fallback state, or When jam occurs, pull out the magazine and remove the film.
2-A-4
SD21 becomes CLOSE when the lower
removal section is in the fallback state.
Jam occurred during transmission at the recording section.
When jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head cover, then remove
During remaining film ejection, conveyed
the film.
Remaining film ejection film to the recording section, but SD11
1269 conveyor jam error and SD21 did not become OPEN (film
1. Check the sensors/motors. 2-A-4
SD11, SD21, MD11, ME1
trailing edge detection).
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-29
 MT-30
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Jam occurred during transmission from the recording section to the film release
section.
During remaining film ejection, conveyed
When jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head cover, then remove
Remaining film ejection film from the recording section to the
the film.
1270 recording section jam film release section, but SD12 did
1. Check the sensors/motors.
2-A-4
error not become OPEN (film trailing edge
SD12, MD11, ME1
detection).
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.
Jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image recording).
When jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head cover, then remove
Conveyed film to the recording section, the film.
but SD21 did not become OPEN (film [Example]
Conveyor section jam
1278 error
trailing edge detection). This problem can occur when 26x36 cm size film is set in the 30 x 36 cm size 2-A-4
Detected when any halting factor occurs magazine.
internally. 1. Check the film size.
2. Check the sensors/motors.
SD12, ME1
Jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image recording).
When jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head cover, then remove
Conveyed film to the recording section,
the film.
Recording section jam but any halting factor occurs internally
1279 error before detecting SD12 OPEN (film trailing
[Example] 2-A-4
This problem can occur when the ME1 motor overruns.
edge detection).
1. Check the sensors/motors.
SD12, ME1
Jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image recording).
When jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head cover, then remove
Conveyed film to the recording section
the film.
Recording section jam and detected SD12 OPEN (film trailing
1280 error edge detection), but detected timeout
[Example] 2-A-4
This problem can occur when the SD12 is unstable.
before finishing recording.
1. Check the sensors/motors.
SD12, ME1
Jam occurred during conveyance until just before the cleaning roller.
Although film was conveyed to the
Conveyor section jam Open the rear cover and remove the film.
1289 error
recording unit, failed to detect SD21
1. Check the sensors/motors.
2-A-4
OPEN (film trailing edge detection).
SD21, MD11

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-30
 MT-31
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
The cleaning roller is not mounted.
Failure to insert cleaning Checked the cleaning roller, but SD14 is Open the head cover and mount the cleaning roller.
1290 roller not CLOSE. 1. Check the sensors/motors.
2-D
SD14
Failed to open the magazine shutter.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
During film removal, attempted to move
Main body removal section board SB12 port, MB11 controller.
the suction cup arm from the HP to upper
1291 suction cup arm upper
deadpoint, but SB13 did not CLOSE.
1. Pull out the magazine and open/clese the magazine shutter manually. 2-A-2
deadpoint detection error 2. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
(Retryover)
mechanismadjustments.
3. f the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Failed to open the magazine shutter.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
Sheet-feeder unit removal During film removal, attempted to move
board SB12 port, MB11 contr oller.
section suction cup arm the suction cup arm from the HP to upper
1292 upper deadpoint detection deadpoint, but SB13 did not CLOSE.
1. Pull out the magazine and open/clese the magazine shutter manually. 2-A-3
2. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
error (Retryover)
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Cannot open log files in path under /VDISK/F/LOG/.
1301 M-UTL log file open error Cannot open log file
Re-install the OS, or replace the memory board.
3-B

Cannot write in log files in path under /VDISK/F/LOG/.

1303 M-UTL log file open error Cannot write in log file
Re-install the OS, or replace the memory board.
3-B

Resistance value Cause: Head disconnection or incorrect resistance measurement.

153A disconnection error
Resistance value disconnection error
Solution: Replace the head or resistance unit.
None

Resistance value Cause: Head disconnection or incorrect resistance measurement.

153B difference NG
Resistance value difference NG
Solution: Replace the head or resistance unit.
None

Resistance value Cause: Head disconnection or resistance was not measured correctly.
153F measurement error
Resistance value measurement error
Remedy: Replace head or replace resistance unit.
None

No recording temperature Cause: Executed save without recording temperature data.

1542 save table
No recording temperature save table
Solution: Turn ON the temperature recording mode.
None

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-31
 MT-32
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
CF memory card is not set in CPU board correctly, or card error, or malfunction
of CPU board.
Or data is inappropriate or insufficient.
Temperature data file
1C01 open error
Temperature data file open error 1. Set card in CPU correctly. None
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
CF memory card is not set in CPU board correctly, or card error, or malfunction
of CPU board.
Or data is inappropriate or insufficient.
Temperature data file read
1C02 error
Temperature data file read error 1. Set card in CPU correctly. None
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
CF memory card is not set in CPU board correctly, or card error, or malfunction
of CPU board.
Or data is inappropriate or insufficient.
Temperature data file write
1C03 error
Temperature data file write error 1. Set card in CPU correctly. None
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

2104 Sequence error Sequence error has occurred Re-initialize or restart. None

Error caused by software bug and incorrect control timing which essentially does
2202 FMPC error (At start) FMPC motor cannot drive.
not occur.
2-C-1

Head rise sequence error The head returned to the HP more Loss of synchronism of MH1 motor when the head is descending, or software
2205 (Level 2) quickly than expected. operation error during the previous head rise processing.
2-C-4

Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.

Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At initialization, attempted to deviate board SH1 port, MH1 controller.
Initialization head HP
2217 deviation detection error
head position from HP, but SH1 does not 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-1
become OPEN. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-32
 MT-33
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
Initialization removal At initialization, attempted to deviate board SB11 port, MB11 controller.
2220 section HP deviation suction cup arm position from HP, but 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
detection error SB11 does not become CLOSE. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
Initialization removal At initialization, attempted to deviate board SB21 port, MB21 controller.
2221 section HP deviation suction cup arm position from HP, but 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-3
detection error SB21 does not become CLOSE. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
Initialization removal At initialization, attempted to return board SB11 port, MB11 controller.
2224 section HP return suction cup arm position to HP, but SB11 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
detection error does not become OPEN. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
Initialization removal At initialization, attempted to return board SB21 port, MB21 controller.
2225 section HP return suction cup arm position to HP, but SB21 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-3
detection error does not become OPEN. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At film removal, attempted to move
board SB12 port, MB11 controller.
Film surface detection suction cup arm from the upper deadpoint
2228 error to the film surface detection position, but
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
adjustments.
SB12 does not become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-33
 MT-34
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Malfunction of SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At film removal, attempted to move
board SB22 port, MB21 controller.
Film surface detection suction cup arm from the upper deadpoint
2229 error to the film surface detection position, but
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-3
adjustments.
SB22 does not become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB13 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
During film removal, attempted to move
Suction cup arm upper board SB13 port, MB11 controller.
2232 deadpoint detection error
the suction cup arm from the HP to upper
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
None
deadpoint, but SB13 did not CLOSE
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB23 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
During film removal, attempted to move
Suction cup arm upper board SB23 port, MB21 controller.
2233 deadpoint detection error
the suction cup arm from the HP to upper
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check, mechanism adjustment.
None
deadpoint, but SB23 did not CLOSE
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At film removal, attempted to push the
board SB12 port, MB11 controller.
Film suction detection suction cup arm from the film surface
2234 error detection position into the bellows, but
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
adjustments.
SB12 does not OPEN.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At film removal, attempted to push the
board SB22 port, MB21 controller.
Film suction detection suction cup arm from the film surface
2235 error detection position into the bellows, but
1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-3
adjustments.
SB22 does not OPEN.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-34
 MT-35
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At film removal, attempted to move the board SB11 port, MB11 controller.
Removal section HP rise
2242 detection error
suction cup arm to HP after the film 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-2
suction, but SB11 does not CLOSE. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At film removal, attempted to move the board SB21 port, MB21 controller.
Removal section HP rise
2243 detection error
suction cup arm to HP after the film 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-3
suction, but SB21 does not CLOSE. adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
At recording, attempted to move the head board SH1 port, MH1 controller.
2250 Head rise error position from the recording position to the 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism 2-A-4
HP, but SH1 does not become CLOSE adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Problem in operational procedure • Perform HP detection and then request for other operations.
Error due to incorrect during M-Utility command removal unit • In the case of removal unit individual operations:
2271 operational procedure operation, film positioning operation, Perform in the order of [1. Film Surface] g [2. Film Suction] g [3. Upper Limit] g
2-E-1
head up/down drive processing. [4. Film Fanning] g [5. Film Release] g [6. Pre-feeding] g [7. Grip Release]
TPH1 operation Thermal protector 1 status confirmation
2273 confirmation standby standby
Occurs due to the electrical circuit, and is not a defect. 2-A-1

(+24MRD) operation
2276 confirmation standby
(+24MRD) status confirmation standby Occurs due to the electrical circuit, and is not a defect. 2-A-1

TPH confirmation standby Occurs due to the electrical circuit, and is not a defect. In this case, open and
2277 timeout
Failed to confirm TPH1, FUSE6 status.
close the cover to re-initialize.
2-A-1

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-35
 MT-36
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Film dropped During film removal.
Or, malfunction of the SB11, SB12, SD11 sensors or MB11 motor.
Malfunction of mecha-mechanism, CAN communication mechanism, or
malfunction of SND board SB11, SB12, SD11 port, MB11 controller.
Conveyor section After completing removal processing,
2287 conveyance error SD11 did not become CLOSE normally.
1. Check if film has dropped. 2-A-2
2. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Film dropped During film removal.
Or, malfunction of the SB21, SB22, SD21 sensors or MB21 motor.
Malfunction of mecha-mechanism, CAN communication mechanism, or
malfunction of SND board SB21, SB22, SD21 port, MB21 controller.
Conveyor section After completing removal processing,
2288 conveyance error SD21 did not become CLOSE normally.
1. Check if film has dropped. 2-A-3
2. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Temperature rise Error occurred during temperature
2550 compensation coefficient rise compensation coefficient Vb/Vh No correction is required. None
Vb/Vh calculation error calculation
Malfunction of SND board or density measurement section.
Density measurement
25E0 sequence error
Density measurement sequence error 1. Replace the SND board. None
2. Replace the density measurement board.
Density measurement Cause: Density measurement did not carried out property.
25E1 error
Density measurement error
Solution: Replace the density measurement board.
None

Density measurement Cause: Density measurement did not carried out property.
25E2 starting point error
Density measurement starting point error
Solution: Replace the density measurement board.
None

Density measurement Cause: Density measurement did not carried out property.
25E3 ending point error
Density measurement ending point error
Solution: Replace the density measurement board.
None

Density measurement Density measurement valid data count Cause: Density measurement did not carried out property.
25E4 valid data count error error Solution: Replace the density measurement board.
5-1

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-36
 MT-37
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND board.
Density measurement Measurement can not be completed 1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related connectors are Completion code of
25E5 driver timeout within the predetermined time. set normally. device driver
2. Replace the cooling fan and thermistor.
THC board test: Initialization failed when THC board Cause: Board may be faulty
25F0 Initialization error loopback test was executed Solution: Replace THC board
None

THC board test: Memory Memory access failed when THC board Cause: Board may be faulty
25F1 address error loopback test was executed Solution: Replace THC board
None

Line memory error

THC board test: Line Line memory comparison failed when Cause: Board may be faulty
25F2 memory comparison error THC board loopback test was executed Solution: Replace THC board
location
(0000h~107Fh)
Intermediate memory
error location (Part
THC board test: Intermediate memory comparison failed A:2 digits+Part B:2
Cause: Board may be faulty
25F3 Intermediate memory when THC board loopback test was
Solution: Replace THC board
digits)
comparison error executed Part A:Bit No.00~0b
Part B:Pixel position
00~BF
Malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or around SND board thermistor,
or CAN communication mechanism SND board malfunction.
Head heating standby
2901 warning
Head heating standby warning 1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related connectors are 9-1
set normally.
2. Replace the cooling fan and thermistor.
Malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or around SND board thermistor,
cooling fan, heater, or CAN communication mechanism SND board malfunction.
Head cooling standby
2902 warning
Head cooling standby warning 1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related connectors are 9-1
set normally.
2. Replace the cooling fan and thermistor.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-37
 MT-38
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or around SND board thermistor,
cooling fan, heater, or CAN communication mechanism SND board malfunction.
Atmosphere thermistor
2903 disconnection
Atmosphere thermistor disconnection 1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related connectors are 9-1
set normally.
2. Replace the disconnected thermistor.
Jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (printing).
After it occurs, open the rear open/close cover/head cover and remove the film.
[Example]
Trailing edge no detection If this occurs when setting 26x36 film in 20x25 cm film size magazine.
2904 error
Trailing edge no detection error
1. Check the film size.
None
2. Check sensors and motors.
3. Check the cleaning roller.
4. Check the head.
Error in vicinity of CAN communication mechanism or SND board thermistor or
One thermistor CAN communication mechanism or SND board error.
One thermistor for heater temperature
2905 disconnection warning
detection has disconnected.
1. Check that the SND board, input boards, and related connectors are set 9-1
error properly.
2. Replace the disconnected thermistor.
SND board malfunction or CAN communication error.
24V start device driver 1. Check that the SND board, input boards, and related connectors are set
2906 warning error
24V start failed.
properly.
None
2. Replace the 24 head voltage switching relay.
SND board malfunction or CAN communication error.
Heater device driver 1. Check that the SND board, input boards, and related connectors are set
2907 warning error
Heater could not be started.
properly.
None
2. Replace the 24 head voltage switching relay.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-38
 MT-39
2.3.2 Formatter

n DICOM
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot
0001 0001 Failed in starting DICOM main thread.
system, and observe conditions.
None

0001 0002 Invalid Dicom.dat contents Save equipment individual data (requires Dicom.dat analysis). Tag number with error

Failed in starting DICOM communication main

0001 0003 thread.
Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm analysis). Port number

1:No file
0001 0004 Invalid Netinf.prm contents Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm analysis). 2:Non existing keyword
3:Non existing value
1:No file
0001 0005 Invalid UserImageNum.txt Save equipment individual data (requires UserImageNum.txt). 2:Non existing keyword
3:Non existing value
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot
0001 FFFF Insufficient virtual memory
system, and observe conditions.
None

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-39
 MT-40
n Spooler
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0002 0001 Failed in creating thread. (Internal error)
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0002 0002 Failed in sending messages. (Internal error)
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0002 0003 Failed in securing memory. (Internal error)
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in creating Print Job objects in recovering Place of occurrence in source
0002 0004 unprocessed JOBs.
Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis)
code
Place of occurrence in source
0002 0005 Failed in reading PrintJob files. Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis).
code
Place of occurrence in source
0002 0007 Failed in acquiring PrintJob and FILM object data. Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis).
code
Place of occurrence in source
0002 0008 Failed in registering spooler queue. Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis).
code
Place of occurrence in source
0002 0009 Invalid film object, or insufficient data Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis).
code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0002 000B Invalid status
and observe conditions. code, status
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0002 000C Failed in accessing PrintJob.
and observe conditions. code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0002 000D Specified Film number is invalid.
and observe conditions. code
Could not find Print Job deleted when requesting Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0002 000E queue deletion. and observe conditions. code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0002 0010 Specified change priority level is invalid.
and observe conditions. code
Place of occurrence in source
0002 0011 Failed in setting PrintJob and FILM object data. Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis).
code
Place of occurrence in source
0002 0012 Failed in opening and creating files. Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis).
code, file name
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0002 0013 Requested print ID is illegal.
and observe conditions. code

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-40
 MT-41
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0002 0014 Failed in moving file.
and observe conditions. code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0002 0015 Unexpected case occurred.
and observe conditions. code

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-41
 MT-42
n ImgPrc
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0003 0001 Error occurred due to system call.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0003 0002 Failed in acquiring memory.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0003 0003 Failed in creating image processing objects.
system, and observe conditions. code
Data to be acquired was not found in PrintJOB, FILM Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.prm analysis), acquire Place of occurrence in source
0003 0004 object, nor image processing parameter. error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm). code
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.prm analysis), acquire Place of occurrence in source
0003 0005 Failed in opening and creating files.
error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm). code, file name
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.prm analysis), acquire Place of occurrence in source
0003 0006 Execution of image processing resulted in error.
error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm). code
As the leading edge margin parameter is outside the Equipment individual data save (TOP_MARGIN.txt) analysis is
0003 0007 range, use the default value. required.
Type, outside range value

Re-executed format calculation without annotation Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.prm analysis), acquire Place of occurrence in source
0003 0008 information error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm). code

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-42
 MT-43
n Output
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code

0004 0001 Number of ejected films None Number of ejected films

Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system,

0004 0002 Failed in acquiring ISC log of PRT.
and observe conditions.
None

Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot

0004 1EB1 Failed in starting output main thread.
system, and observe conditions.
None

Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot

0004 1F7C Level 0 error occurred in formatter.
system, and observe conditions.
None

Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot

0004 1F7D Start timeout of printer.
system, and observe conditions.
None

Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot

0004 1F7E Timeout of command request for printer and driver.
system, and observe conditions.
None

0004 1F80 Error occurred with start printer command. Install the printer from the M-Utility. None

Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system,

0004 1F83 Failed in storing automatic density results file.
and observe conditions.
None

Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system,

0004 1F84 Density correction calculation results are abnormal.
and observe conditions.
None

Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system,

0004 1F85 Unable to continue operations due to internal error.
and observe conditions.
None

0004 1F90 File does not exist. Check if file is present None

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-43
 MT-44
n Panel
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no
0701 xxxx PDM task panel driver initialization error
improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no

2701 xxxx PNL task setting information file read error
improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no

2702 xxxx PNL task language message file read error
improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

PNL task external character registration pattern file Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no
2703 xxxx read error improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no

2704 xxxx PNL task external character registration error
improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no

2705 xxxx PNL task setting information file description error
improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the conditions. If no

2706 xxxx PNL unit LCD abnormal error
improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-44
 MT-45
n Utility
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Message file format NG error (Mainly due to file
2600 xxxx damage)
Reinstall the main unit software. xxxx is arbitrary value

Message file number of items NG error (mainly due

2601 xxxx to file damage)
Reinstall the main unit software. xxxx is arbitrary value

xxxx is arbitrary value.

Error in system date at start (when there is conflict in
2610 xxxx time itself)
Reboot the system and observe conditions. Incorrect time-keeping is not
detected.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-45
 MT-46
n JobMake
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0007 0001 Failed in creating thread (internal error).
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0007 0002 Failed in sending message (internal error).
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0007 0003 Failed in securing memory (internal error).
system, and observe conditions. code, request size
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0007 000A Failed in opening and creating files.
and observe conditions. code, file name
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot system, Place of occurrence in source
0007 000B Invalid status
and observe conditions. code, status

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-46
 MT-47
n Main
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Failed in securing area for communication Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0001 processing. system, and observe conditions. code
Mounted memory does not satisfy operating Place of occurrence in source
0008 0002 conditions of the system.
Check SDRAM capacity.
code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0003 Invalid parameter was specified.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0004 Failed in DICOM control execution start request.
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in communication end request to DICOM Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0005 control. system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0006 Failed in calling GUI method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0007 Failed in JOB completion communication processing.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0008 Failed in calling the print request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0009 Failed in image initializing request.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 000A Failed in calling image processing request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in re-reading instruction of density correction Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 000B table. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling JOB generation request (SMPTE/ Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 000C execution) method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling JOB generation request (scanner Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment indivqidual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 000D diagnosis) method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling JOB generation request (flat pattern) Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 000E method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling JOB generation request (cleaning) Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 000F method. system, and observe conditions. code

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-47
 MT-48
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Failed in calling JOB priority order change Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0010 completion method. system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0011 Failed in initializing output control unit.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0012 Failed in calling utility request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0013 Failed in calling energy-saving instruction method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0014 Failed in calling print request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0015 Failed in calling transfer request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling output control end instruction Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0016 method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling removal permission notification Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0017 method. system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0018 Failed in calling end request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0019 Failed in calling PC-Utility method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling image processing completion setting Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 001A request method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling removal process JOB acquisition Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 001B request method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling image processing JOB acquisition Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 001C request method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling RAW data transfer JOB acquisition Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 001D request method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling tray information renewal notification Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 001E method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling output processing completion Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 001F notification method. system, and observe conditions. code

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-48
 MT-49
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0020 Failed in spooler control execution start request.
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in spooler control transfer completion Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0021 notification. system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0022 Failed in calling JOB spool request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling unprocessed JOB recovery request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0023 method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling JOB priority order change request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0024 method. system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0025 Failed in calling deletion request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0026 Failed in calling initialization method of output control
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling Queue deletion request results Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0027 notification method system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0028 Failed in calling JOB start notification method
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling preprint response notification Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0029 method system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling printer information request response Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 002A method system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling image reception completion Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 002B notification method system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 002C Failed in calling system information printing method
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 002D Request in unexpected mode
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 002E Failed in calling uniformity table re-reading method
system, and observe conditions. code

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-49
 MT-50
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Failed in calling printer image correction mode Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 002F setting method system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling tray state change notification Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0030 method. system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0031 Failed in calling delete all JOB request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0038 Failed in reprint verification request.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0039 Failed in reprint spool request.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 003A Failed in calling QC test pattern output method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling printer state change notification Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 003B method. system, and observe conditions. code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 003C USB installation: USB related error Check MAIN error log
code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 003D USB installation: Path or USB drive does not exist Check USB connection, and USB drive setup file.
code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 003E USB installation: Insufficient USB capacity Check USB capacity.
code
Check USB details. Place of occurrence in source
0008 003F USB installation: No USB load object
Cannot acknowledge that it is for installer. code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 0040 USB installationn: No USB save object Check system state.
code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 0041 Equipment information: USB related error Check MAIN error log.
code
Equipment information: Insufficient USB capacity Place of occurrence in source
0008 0042 when saving
Check/add USB capacity.
code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 0043 Analysis log information: USB related error Check MAIN error log.
code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 0044 Reprint image: USB related error Check MAIN error log.
code

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-50
 MT-51
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 0045 Reprint image: No image of specified print ID Recheck reprint ID and implement again.
code
Failed in calling system information acquisition Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0046 method. system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0047 Failed in copying file
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0048 Failed in loading file
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling resistance correction reloading Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0049 method system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling main scanning image position Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 004A adjustment parameter table reloading method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling resistance correction reloading Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 004B method. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling setting method of the number of Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 004C films remaining in magazine. system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 004D Failed in loading setting file of the energy-saving.
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling direction method of the energy- Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 004E saving. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling tranferring request method of the Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 004F energy-saving. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling recovering request method of the Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0050 energy-saving. system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling control notification method of the Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0051 status lamp. system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0052 Failed in saving USB.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0053 Failed in loading USB.
system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in renewing number of the accumulated used Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0054 films. system, and observe conditions. code

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-51
 MT-52
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0055 Failed in calling power off request method.
system, and observe conditions. code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 0056 Failed in copying installtion data. Install the software and replace CF memory card.
code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 0057 Failed in creating the version up direction file. Install the software and replace CF memory card.
code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 0058 Failed in creating the full installation direction file. Install the software and replace CF memory card.
code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0059 Failed in deleting log files.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 005A Failed in creating normal completed flag file.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 005B Failed in starting up the Web task.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 005C Notified unknown state.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 005D Occured inconsistency in the file system.
system, and observe conditions. code
Place of occurrence in source
0008 005E Did not end normally the last time. Reboot the system and observe the conditions.
code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 005F Failed in deleting pas log.
system, and observe conditions. code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual data, reboot Place of occurrence in source
0008 0060 Failed in identifying log acquisition mode.
system, and observe conditions. code

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-52
 MT-53
n PCUTL
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the equipment, and
000A 0001 Failed in FTP data transfer
observe conditions.
Name of file which failed transfer

Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the path and user of the
000A 0002 FTP port does not open
FTP directory of the PC for servicing, and observe conditions.
None

000A 0003 Searched for corresponding file but did not exist Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed search

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-53
 MT-54
n Installer (PCUTL)
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the equipment, and
000B 0001 Failed in FTP data transfer
observe conditions.
Name of file which failed transfer

Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the path and user of the
000B 0002 FTP port does not open
FTP directory of the PC for servicing, and observe conditions.
None

n Installer (StartUp)
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code

000B 0003 Searched for corresponding file but did not exist Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed search

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-54
 MT-55
n StartUp
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
1. Install the software.
000C 0001 Panel driver initialization error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0002 Semaphore table initialization error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0003 Round robin processing error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0004 Message ID acquisition error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0005 PNL task instance error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Check the SND board cable.
000C 0006 Motor initialization response error 2. Check the unit operations of the motor. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Check that the PNL board connector is set properly.
000C 0007 Panel display error
2. Replace the PNL board.
None

1. Check the memory capacity.

000C 000B RAMDISK generation error
2. Replace the memory.
None

1. Check the memory capacity.

000C 000C Folder generation error from RAMDISK
2. Replace the memory.
None

1. Check the memory capacity.

000C 000D File copy error to RAMDISK
2. Replace the memory.
None

1. Check the memory capacity.

000C 000E Image processing memory initialization error
2. Replace the memory.
None

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-55
 MT-56
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
1. Install the software.
Parameter file copy error
000C 000F (E folder TO BKUP folder)
2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
Parameter file copy error
000C 0010 (BKUP folder TO E folder)
2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0011 Th2ONFLG generation error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0012 TIMETASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0013 MAINTASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0014 ISCTASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0015 DBGTASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0016 MFCTASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0017 Th2ONFLG deletion error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0018 Message error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-56
 MT-57
Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
1. Install the software.
000C 0019 Install processing error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0020 Occured inconsistency in the file system. 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0021 Gateway address read error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
000C 0022 Gateway address set error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
As several board errors may
1. Check that the PNL board connector is set properly.
000C 1001 LCD connection board disconnected
2. Replace the PNL board.
occur at the same time, determine
according to Bit.
As several board errors may
1. Check that the THC board connector is set properly.
000C 1002 THC connection board disconnected
2. Replace the THC board.
occur at the same time, determine
according to Bit.
As several board errors may
1. Check that the SND board connector is set properly.
000C 1004 SND connection board disconnected
2. Replace the SND board.
occur at the same time, determine
according to Bit.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-57
 MT-58
3. ABNORMAL OPERATIONS

3.1 Initialization Error at Startup

When an error is detected during initialization, the step number of the errord-out
initialization is displayed instead of an error code.
When this happens, note down the step number displayed, and restart the equipment.
<NOTE>
If the error persists after the equipment is restarted, contact the service
headquarters.

n Panel Display of Initialization Error

n Initialization Step Number and Its Description

Step Description
IL-0 • File system check of CF (compact flash).
• Preparation for communication between Panel Task and
Main Control Task.
• Initialization of various drivers.
Absence/presence check for PNL, THC, and SND boards.
IL-2 • Internal memory capacity check.
• Creation of a virtual disk for the internal memory.
IL-3 Creation of a specified folder in the virtual disk.
IL-4 Preparation of an image editing area.
IL-5 None.
IL-6 Creation of a timer task.
IL-7 Creation of Main Control Task and PRT Control Task.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-58
 MT-59
BLANK PAGE

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MT-59
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) All pages

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL

TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
(DRYPIX Lite)

016-201-06E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 MT-1
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD
When malfunctions occur in the equipment, analyze them from error codes, abnormal
image, and abnormal operation and perform the required corrections.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-1
 MT-2
2. ERROR CODE 2.2 Format of Detailed Information
Perform this check only for analyzing error codes of the printer.
In the usual troubleshooting, find the corresponding error code from the error code
2.1 Checking Error Codes tables, and refer to the suspected causes and remedy methods indicated to resolve
the problem.
However if the problem persists, or to investigate the problem in further detail, check
n Checking Error Logs the following detailed information to analyze the problem.
The following describes how to check error logs.
n Checking Detailed Information of Error Codes
1. Start the PC-Utility.
1. Check the corresponding error code and its detailed information at the
2. Select display error log. error message display, or at [Display Error Log] of the PC-Utility.

3. For details on error codes, refer to “2.3 Error Code Table” for the 2. Check the detailed information format number at “2.3 Error Code
meaning of the error which has occurred, suspected cause, and Table” and refer to the corresponding format.
remedy. When analyzing an error code, also refer to the detailed code
provided. 3. Find the format information from the 4-digit detailed information, and
analyze the problem.
Sub System Error Type Place of Error 0236 0025
FLH Film conveyance related error
MFC Data setting/system related error Printer error
(1)
HED Head control related error
Error Detailed Information
DICOM DICOM error Code Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Format
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
At removal, attempted to push in the suc-
Spooler Spooler error Film suction detection tion unit from the surface detection po-
Or mechanism error, malfunction of CAN communication mechanism or SND
board SB12 port, MB11 controller.
2-A-2
0236 error sition to the bellows, but SB12 does not 1. Using the M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism
ImgPrc Image processing error OPEN.
(Retryover)
adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Output Output control error (2)
Panel Panel control error
Utility Utility error
Formatter error
JobMake Test pattern generation error  2-A-2 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S1))
Main MAIN control error
0 0 0 SD12 0 0 SD13 SD11 0 SB13 SB12 SB11 0 SA13 SA12 SA11
File transfer error
PCUTL
(Using the PC Tool in normal state)
(3)
File transfer error
Installer
(Using the PC Tool at initialization) 0 0 2 5
StartUp Initialization error 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
E0001.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-2
 MT-3
2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information l 2-A-3 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S2))
Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
n 2-A (Sensor Related Errors) [Bit map]
Errors occurring in initialization self-diagnosis, removal, recording, constant a b c d
monitoring, etc. (Including mechanism, etc.)
Convert the hexadecimal 4-digit code to binary, compare the bit maps, and investigate 0 0 0 SD12 0 0 SD23 SD21 0 SB23 SB22 SB21 0 SA23 SA22 SA21
the input state corresponding to each bit.
1=ON (Close), 0=OFF (Open)
Conveyor exit Width adjusting Removal section Magazine
Detailed error code
(4-digit hexadecimal) a b c d conveyance FPDT0203.AI

FPDT0200.AI
l 2-A-4 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S3))
l 2-A-1 (Electricity Related Information (Type E)) Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs. [Bit map]
a b c d
[Bit map]
a b c d
0 0 0 SD21 0 0 0 SD11 0 0 0 SD12 0 0 0 SH1

0 HF_9 HF_8 HF_7 0 HF_6 HF_5 HF_4 0 HF_3 HF_2 HF_1 0 0 TPH1 INTLK

Conveyor Conveyor Conveyor Head

entrance entrance exit FPDT0204.AI
Fuse(1) Fuse(2) Fuse(3) Thermal protector
/interlock
l 2-A-5 (Other Information (Type S4))
FPDT0201 AI

l 2-A-2 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S1)) Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs. [Bit map]
a b c d
[Bit map]
a b c d
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INTLK 0 0 0 SD14

0 0 0 SD12 0 0 SD13 SD11 0 SB13 SB12 SB11 0 SA13 SA12 SA11

None None Interlock Cleaning roller

FPDT0206.AI

Conveyor exit Width adjusting Removal section Magazine

conveyance FPDT0202.AI

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-3
 MT-4
n 2-B (File I/O Error) n 2-E (Operation Error)
l 2-B-1 (Type F) l 2-E-1 (Type U)
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the number Displays the PC-Utility command number which occur when the removal operation
of the file causing the error and the causes. of the PC-Utility was not executed as specified and parameter of errors which were
executed at the last time.
Detailed error code 2 0 X X Detailed error code 0 4 0 Y
File number Cause FPDT0207 AI

PC-Utility Parameter
File number command number
number E0002.ai

201 : Conveyance timer file (For mechanism)

202 : Conveyance timer file (For size) PC-Utility command number
203 : Conveyance timer file
204 : Conveyance counter file 04 : Removal mechanism individual operation/Removal mechanism continuous
205 : PM control parameter file (For mechanism) operations
206 : PM control parameter file (For size)
207 : PM control parameter file
Parameter number
208 : Timer file for PM time monitoring 0: Home Positioning
209 : FLH individual data file (leading edge recording parameter) 1: Film surface detection position
20D : FLH individual data file (subscanning speed parameter) 2: Suction position
20F : FLH individual data file (head grip adjustment parameter) 3: Upper deadpoint detection position
4: Film fanning
Causes 5: Film release
1 : Open error 6: Conveyance
2 : Read error
3 : Write error
4 : Conversion error
5 : Line specification error
6 : Column specification error
7 : Size specification error
8 : External file data error
A : Data range error (Detected by application)

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-4
 MT-5
2.2.2 MFC Related (Data Setting/System Related) Error 2.2.3 HED Related (Head Control Related) Error Detailed
Detailed Information Information

n 3-B (File I/O Error) n 5-1 (Density Measurement Error)

Error which occurs when file could not be accessed correctly. Displays the cause of If the measured value is insufficient during density measurement, the measured data
the access error. count will be displayed.

Detailed error code 3 X X X Detailed error code X X X X

FPDT0212.AI

File number Cause FPDT0215 AI

n 9-1 (Thermistor Disconnection Error)
When disconnection of the thermistor is detected, the detected thermistor number will
File Number be displayed.
300: IO trace data l If one thermistor is disconnected
301: ISC log
302: Mechanism log
303: PF-I/F log
304: Edge sensor log
Detailed error code
(4-digit hexadecimal)
0 X 0 0
Cause
1: Open error
2: Lead error Number 1 FPDT0213 AI

3: Write error
4: Conversion error l If two thermistors are disconnected
5: Line specification error
6: Column specification error
7: Size specification error
8: External file data error
Detailed error code
(4-digit hexadecimal)
0 X 0 X
A: Data range error (Detected by application)

Number 1 Number 2
FPDT0214 AI

Number
1 to 6: Head thermistor number/ambient thermistor number

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-5
 MT-6
n 9-2 (Thermistor Temperature Adjustment Error) 2.3 Error Code Table
When temperature adjustment error of the thermistor (temperature adjustment Names abbreviated in error code tables are as follows.
timeout, AD conversion timeout, temperature exceeded) is detected, the detected
thermistor number will be displayed.
Abbreviated
Formal Name
Name
Detailed error code
(4-digit hexadecimal)
0 X 0 0 SND board SND32A board
CPU board CPU32A board
PNL board PNL28A board
Number 1 FPDT0213 AI
LED board LED28A board

Number PDD board PDD28A board

1 to 6: Head thermistor number PRT Printer/print mechanism
FMT Formatter
CF Compact flush memory

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-6
 MT-7
2.3.1 Printer

LED Error Detailed

Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
201 1212 Cover open A cover is open. Close the cover. 2-A-5
No magazine loaded
203 1210 (Main unit)
No magazine is loaded. Load the magazine. 2-A-2

No magazine loaded
204 1211 (Sheet feeder unit)
No magazine is loaded. Load the magazine. 2-A-3

A jam occurred during feeding from just below the cleaning roller
to just below the head.
When a jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head
Conveyed film to directly below the head, but
cover, then remove the film.
205 1249 Conveyor section jam error SD12 did not become CLOSE (film leading
1. Check the sensors/motors.
2-A-4
edge detection).
SD12, MH1, ME1
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.
A jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image
recording).
When a jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head
Conveyed film to the recording section, but
Conveyor section jam error cover, then remove the film.
206 1254 (Main unit)
SD11 did not become OPEN (film trailing
1. Check the sensors/motors.
2-A-2
edge detection).
SD11, SD12, MH1, ME1
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.
A jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image
recording).
When a jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head
Conveyed film to the recording section, but
Conveyor section jam error cover, then remove the film.
207 1255 (Sheet feeder unit)
SD21 did not become OPEN (film trailing
1. Check the sensors/motors.
2-A-3
edge detection).
SD21, SD12, MH1, ME1
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-7
 MT-8
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
A jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image
recording).
When a jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head
cover, then remove the film.
[Example]
Conveyed film to the recording section, but
This problem can occur when 26 x 36 cm size film is set in the 26
208 1256 Recording section jam error SD12 did not become OPEN (film trailing
x 36 cm size magazine.
2-A-4
edge detection).
1. Check the film size.
2. Check the sensors/motors.
SD12, MH1, ME1
3. Check the cleaning rollers.
4. Check the head.
Film dropped During film removal.
Or, malfunction of the SB11, SB12, and SD11 sensors or the
MB11 motor.
Malfunction of the mechanical system or the PCI communication
system, or malfunction of the SB11, SB12, SD11 ports or the
Conveyor section conveyance After completing removal processing, SD11
209 1266 error did not become CLOSE normally.
MB11 controller on the SND board. 2-A-2
1. Check if film has dropped.
2. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Film dropped During film removal.
Or, malfunction of the SB21, SB22, SD21 sensors or MB21
motor.
Malfunction of the mechanical system or the PCI communication
system, or malfunction of the SB21, SB22, SD11 ports or the
Conveyor section conveyance After completing removal processing, SD21
210 1267 error did not become CLOSE normally.
MB21 controller on the SND board. 2-A-3
1. Check if film has dropped.
2. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
During remaining film ejection, SD11 and
SD21 become CLOSE at the same time,
Judging that the film in the magazine cannot be ejected, a jam
Remaining film ejection SD11 becomes CLOSE when the upper
211 1268 removal section jam error removal section is in the fallback status,
occurs. 2-A-4
When jam occurs, pull out the magazine and remove the film.
or SD21 becomes CLOSE when the lower
removal section is in the fallback status.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-8
 MT-9
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Jam occurred during transmission at the recording section.
When a jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head
During remaining film ejection, conveyed film
cover, then remove the film.
Remaining film ejection to the recording section, but SD11 and SD21
212 1269 conveyor jam error did not become OPEN (film trailing edge
1. Check the sensors/motors. 2-A-4
SD11, SD21, MH1, ME1
detection).
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.
A jam occurred during transmission from the recording section to
the film release section.
During remaining film ejection, conveyed film When a jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head
Remaining film ejection from the recording section to the film release cover, then remove the film.
213 1270 recording section jam error section, but SD12 did not become OPEN (film 1. Check the sensors/motors.
2-A-4
trailing edge detection). SD12, MH1, ME1
2. Check the cleaning rollers.
3. Check the head.
A jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image
recording).
When a jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head
Conveyed film to the recording section, but
cover, then remove the film.
SD12 did not become OPEN (film trailing
[Example]
214 1278 Conveyor section jam error edge detection).
This problem can occur when 26 x 36 cm size film is set in the 30
2-A-4
* Detected when any halting factor occurs
x 36 cm size magazine.
internally.
1. Check the film size.
2. Check the sensors/motors.
SA4, MH1, ME1
A jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image
recording).
Conveyed film to the recording section, but When a jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head
any halting factor occurs internally before cover, then remove the film.
215 1279 Recording section jam error
detecting SD12 OPEN (film trailing edge [Example]
2-A-4
detection). This problem can occur when the ME1 motor overruns.
1. Check the sensors/motors.
SD12, MH1, ME1

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-9
 MT-10
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
A jam occurred during sub-scanning conveyance (image
recording).
Conveyed film to the recording section and When a jam occurs, open the rear open/close cover and head
detected SD12 OPEN (film trailing edge cover, then remove the film.
216 1280 Recording section jam error
detection), but detected timeout before [Example]
2-A-4
finishing recording. This problem can occur when the SD12 is unstable.
1. Check the sensors/motors.
SD12, MH1, ME1
Jam occurred during conveyance until just before the cleaning
Conveyed film to the recording section, but roller.
217 1289 Conveyor section jam error SD21 did not become OPEN (film trailing Open the rear cover and remove the film. 2-A-4
edge detection). 1. Check the sensors/motors.
SD21, MD11
Failed to open the magazine shutter.
Malfunction of the SB13 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error or malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB13 port or MB11 controller on
During film removal, attempted to move the
Main body removal section the SND board.
suction cup arm from the HP to the upper
218 1291 suction cup arm upper
deadpoint, but SB13 did not become CLOSE.
1. Pull out the magazine and open/close the magazine shutter 2-A-2
deadpoint detection error manually.
(Retryover)
2. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Failed to open the magazine shutter.
Malfunction of the SB23 sensor or the MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB23 port or the MB21 controller
During film removal, attempted to move the
Sheet-feeder unit removal on the SND board.
suction cup arm from the HP to the upper
219 1292 section suction cup arm upper
deadpoint, but SB13 did not become CLOSE.
1. Pull out the magazine and open/close the magazine shutter 2-A-3
deadpoint detection error manually.
(Retryover)
2. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Magazines of the same number are loaded in both the main body
Magazines of the same number are found in and the sheet feeder unit.
220 - Same magazines loaded error
both the main body and the sheet feeder unit. 1. Change the magazine to another one.
-
2. If the problem persists, check the related sensor.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-10
 MT-11
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
A magazine set to "disable" is loaded in the main body.
Referred to the information on the main body
Main body magazine setting 1. Load a magazine available.
221 - error
magazine and found that the magazine was
2. Use PC-Utility to enable the magazine.
-
disabled.
3. If the problem persists, check the related sensor.
A magazine set to "disable" is loaded in the sheet feeder unit.
Referred to the information on the sheet
Sheet feeder unit magazine 1. Load a magazine available.
222 - setting error
feeder unit magazine and found that the
2. Use PC-Utility to enable the magazine.
-
magazine was disabled.
3. If the problem persists, check the related sensor.
Density measurement resulted in an abnormal Film other than DI-HT is loaded.
223 - Wrong film error
value. 1. Change the film to the correct one.
-

Failed in starting the conveyance control Program codes are not processed appropriately.
601 0333 Start timeout: FLH
subsystem Reinstall the software or replace the memory.
-

Program codes are not processed appropriately.

602 0334 Start timeout: HED Failed in starting the head control subsystem
Reinstall the software or replace the memory.
-

603 2104 Sequence error A sequence error has occurred Re-initialize or restart. -
All removal mechanisms are No magazines can be used due to abnormal
604 0304 disabled status, etc.
Inspection of refill section or removal mechanism. -

Cannot open log files in path under /VDISK/F/LOG/.

605 1301 S-UtL log file open error Cannot open log file
Re-install the OS, or replace the memory board.
-

Cannot write in log files in path under /VDISK/F/LOG/.

606 1303 S-UtL log file write error Cannot write in log file
Re-install the OS, or replace the memory board.
-

Conveyance system-related external file

access error The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
• File read error card or the CPU board is faulty.
• File write error Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
611 0201 Conveyance system file error • File conversion error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. 2-B-1
• File line specification error 2. Replace the card with a new one.
• File column specification error 3. Replace the CPU board.
• Size specification error 4. Reinstall the software and check again.
• External file data error
Setup error of Sensor driver or FMPC driver
Error which should not occur due to software bug, incorrect
612 02FF Device set error • FMPC time monitoring setup error
settings, etc.
2-D-1
• Message ID specification error
The FPMC status is error when the motor is
613 0202 FPMC error (At start)
driven.
An error occurred at the PCI communication system. 2-C-1

The FPMC status is error when the motor is

614 0203 FPMC error (At stop)
at rest.
An error occurred at the PCI communication system. 2-C-1

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-11
 MT-12
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
FPMC error Stop response is not issued from the driver
615 0204 (No response at cancellation) when the motor is stopped.
An error occurred at the PCI communication system. 2-D-1

Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.

Or mechanical system error, or malfunction of the PCI
At initialization, attempted to deviate the head communication system or the SH1 port on the SND board.
Initialization head HP deviation
616 0218 detection error
from HP, but SH1 does not become OPEN. 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-4
(Retryover) mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.
Or mechanical system error, or malfunction of the PCI
At initialization, attempted to return the head communication system or the SH1 port on the SND board.
Initialization head HP return
617 0219 detection error
to HP, but SH1 does not become CLOSE. 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-4
(Retryover) mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB11 port or MB11 controller on
Initialization main body At initialization, attempted to deviate suction
the SND board.
618 0222 removal section HP deviation cup arm from HP, but SB11 does not become
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
detection error CLOSE. (Retryover)
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB21 port or MB21 controller on
Initialization sheet-feeder unit At initialization, attempted to deviate suction
the SND board.
619 0223 removal section HP deviation cup arm from HP, but SB21 does not become
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
detection error CLOSE. (Retryover)
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB11 port or MB11 controller on
Initialization main body At initialization, attempted to return suction
the SND board.
620 0226 removal section HP return cup arm position to HP, but SB11 does not
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
-
detection error become OPEN. (Retryover)
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-12
 MT-13
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB21 port or MB21 controller on
Initialization sheet-feeder unit At initialization, attempted to return suction
the SND board.
621 0227 removal section HP return cup arm position to HP, but SB21 does not
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
detection error become OPEN. (Retryover)
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to move the communication system or the SB12 port or MB11 controller on
Main body removal section film suction cup arm from the upper deadpoint to the SND board.
622 0230 surface detection error the film surface detection position, but SB12 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
does not become CLOSE. (Retryover) mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to move the communication system or the SB22 port or MB21 controller on
Sheet-feeder unit removal
suction cup arm from the upper deadpoint to the SND board.
623 0231 section film surface detection
the film surface detection position, but SB22 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
error
does not become CLOSE. (Retryover) mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to push the suction communication system or the SB12 port or MB11 controller on
cup arm from the film surface detection the SND board.
624 0236 Film suction detection error
position into the bellows, but SB12 does not 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
become OPEN. (Retryover) mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to push the suction communication system or the SB22 port or MB21 controller on
cup arm from the film surface detection the SND board.
625 0237 Film suction detection error
position into the bellows, but SB22 does not 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
become OPEN. (Retryover) mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-13
 MT-14
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Malfunction of SB13 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the SB13 port or
At film removal, attempted to move the
MB11 controller on the SND board.
Main body removal section HP suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint after
626 240 rise detection error film suction, but SB13 does not become
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-2
mechanism adjustments.
CLOSE. (Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB23 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the SB23 port or
At film removal, attempted to move the
MB21 controller on the SND board.
Sheet-feeder unit removal suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint after
627 241 section HP rise detection error film suction, but SB23 does not become
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-3
mechanism adjustments.
CLOSE. (Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to move the communication system or the SB1311 port or MB11 controller on
Main body removal section HP suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint after the SND board.
628 0244 rise detection error film suction, but SB11 does not become 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
CLOSE. (Retryover) mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to move the communication system or the SB2321 port or MB21 controller on
Sheet-feeder unit removal suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint after the SND board.
629 0245 section HP rise detection error film suction, but SB21 does not become 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
CLOSE. (Retryover) mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SD13 sensor or MD12 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
During film positioning reference plate communication system or the SD13 port or MD12 controller on
Main body film positioning
operations, attempted to move the reference the SND board.
630 0246 reference plate HP deviation
plate outside HP, but SD13 did not become 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
error
CLOSE. mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-14
 MT-15
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Malfunction of SD13 sensor or MD12 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SD13 port or MD12 controller on
Main body film positioning During film positioning reference plate
the SND board.
631 0248 reference plate HP detection operations, attempted to move the reference
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
error plate to HP, but SD13 did not become OPEN.
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.
Or mechanical system error, or malfunction of the PCI
At recording, attempted to move the head communication system or the SH1 port on the SND board.
632 0251 Head rise error position from the recording position to the HP, 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-4
but SH1 does not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB11 port or MB11 controller on
Main body removal section HP During grip release, attempted to deviate
the SND board.
633 0252 return detection error at grip suction cup arm position from HP, but SB11
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
release did not become OPEN.
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB21 port or MB21 controller on
Sheet-feeder unit removal During grip release, attempted to deviate
the SND board.
634 0253 section HP return detection suction cup arm position from HP, but SB21
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
error at grip release did not become OPEN.
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
TPH1 wire break or malfunction of PCI communication system or
TPH1 port on the SND board.
Attempted but could not confirm the status of
635 0257 TPH1 operation
TPH1.
1. Perform sensor check using the PC-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If a problem is found, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-15
 MT-16
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
FUSE3 wire break or malfunction of PCI communication system
or the FUSE3 port on the SND board.
Attempted but could not confirm the status of
636 0261 FUSE3 operation
FUSE3.
1. Perform sensor check using the PC-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If a problem is found, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE5 wire break or malfunction of the PCI communication
system or the FUSE5 port on the SND board.
Attempted but could not confirm the status of
637 0263 FUSE5 operation
FUSE5.
1. Perform sensor check using the PC-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If a problem is found, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
(+24VMRD) OFF
Or malfunction of the PCI communication system or (+24VMRD)
port on the SND board.
638 0265 (+24VMRD) operation (+24VMRD) status is OFF.
1. Perform sensor check using the PC-Utility.
2-A-1
2. If a problem is found, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
(+24VHRD) OFF
Or malfunction of the PCI communication system or (+24VHRD)
port on the SND board.
639 0272 (+24VHRD) operation (+24VHRD) status is OFF.
1. Perform sensor check using the PC-Utility.
2-A-1
2. If a problem is found, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE7 wire break or malfunction of the PCI communication
system or the FUSE7 port on the SND board.
Attempted but could not confirm the status of
640 0281 FUSE7 operations
FUSE7.
1. Perform sensor check using the PC-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If a problem is found, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE8 wire break or malfunction of the PCI communication
system or the FUSE8 port on the SND board.
Attempted but could not confirm the status of
641 0282 FUSE8 operations
FUSE8.
1. Perform sensor check using the PC-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If a problem is found, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
FUSE10 wire break or malfunction of the PCI communication
system or the FUSE10 port on the SND board.
Attempted but could not confirm the status of
642 0283 FUSE10 operations
FUSE10.
1. Perform stand-alone test printing using PC-Utility. 2-A-1
2. If nothing is printed, replace parts.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-16
 MT-17
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Malfunction of SB13 sensor or MB11 motor.
At film removal, attempted to move the
Or mechanical system error or malfunction of the PCI
suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint after
communication system or the SB13 port or MB11 controller on
Main body removal section film suction, but SB13 does not become
the SND board.
643 0284 suction cup arm upper OPEN.
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
deadpoint detection error Or, attempted to move the suction cup arm
mechanism adjustments.
to the upper deadpoint after film suction, but
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
SB13 does not become CLOSE. (Retryover)
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB23 sensor or MB21 motor.
At film removal, attempted to move the
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint after
communication system or the SB23 port or the MB21 controller
Sheet-feeder unit removal film suction, but SB23 does not become
on the SND board.
644 0285 section suction cup arm upper OPEN.
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
deadpoint detection error Or, attempted to move the suction cup arm
mechanism adjustments.
to the upper deadpoint after film suction, but
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
SB23 does not become CLOSE. (Retryover)
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB13 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error or malfunction of the PCI
At the end of film flapping operation,
communication system or the SB13 port or MB11 controller on
attempted to move the suction cup arm
Suction cup arm upper the SND board.
645 0295 deadpoint detection error
from the bottom end position of the flapping
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
operation to the upper deadpoint, but SB13
mechanism adjustments.
does not become CLOSE. (Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB23 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At the end of film flapping operation,
communication system or the SB23 port or the MB21 controller
attempted to move the suction cup arm
Suction cup arm upper on the SND board.
646 0296 deadpoint detection error
from the bottom end position of the flapping
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
operation to the upper deadpoint, but SB23
mechanism adjustments.
does not become CLOSE. (Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
The head unit is not installed or the head unit connectors are not
connected, or the CPU board is faulty.
Head resistance value check error during 1. Check the connection of the head unit.
650 05A0 Head resistance value error
start up 2. Replace the SND32A board.
-
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-17
 MT-18
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Head correction parameter file Head correction parameter file open error
651 05A2 open error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Head correction parameter file Head correction parameter file read error
652 05A3 read error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Head correction parameter file Head correction parameter file close error
653 05A4 close error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Density measurement value Density measurement value conversion Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
654 05A5 conversion parameter file open parameter file open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Density measurement value Density measurement value conversion Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
655 05A6 conversion parameter file read parameter file read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-18
 MT-19
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Density measurement value Density measurement value conversion Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
656 05A7 conversion parameter file close parameter file close error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
657 05AE correction parameter file open parameter file open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
658 05AF correction parameter file read parameter file read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
659 05B0 correction parameter file close parameter file close error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Temperature rise correction parameter file Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature rise correction
660 05B1 parameter file open error
open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
(CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-19
 MT-20
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature rise correction Temperature rise correction parameter file
661 05B2 parameter file read error read error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature rise correction Temperature rise correction parameter file
662 05B3 parameter file close error close error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Black ratio correction Black ratio correction parameter file open
663 05B4 parameter file open error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Black ratio correction Black ratio correction parameter file read
664 05B5 parameter file read error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Black ratio correction Black ratio correction parameter file close 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board.
665 05B6 parameter file close error error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
-
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-20
 MT-21
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction Load fluctuation correction table file open
666 05B7 table file open error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction Load fluctuation correction table file read
667 05B8 table file read error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction Load fluctuation correction table file close
668 05B9 table file close error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature measurement Temperature measurement table file open
669 05BA table file open error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature measurement Temperature measurement table file read
670 05BB table file read error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-21
 MT-22
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature measurement Temperature measurement table file close
671 05BC table file close error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature rise correction Temperature rise correction table file open
672 05C9 table file open error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature rise correction Temperature rise correction table file read
673 05CA table file read error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature rise correction Temperature rise correction table file close
674 05CB table file close error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction Load fluctuation correction weighting table file
675 05CC weighting table file open error open error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-22
 MT-23
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction Load fluctuation correction weighting table file
676 05CD weighting table file read error read error
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Load fluctuation correction Load fluctuation correction weighting table file
677 05CE weighting table file close error close error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction data Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
678 05CF correction data table open table open error (CF memory card access 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
error error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Resistance inconsistency correction data Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Resistance inconsistency
679 05D0 correction data table read error
table read error (CF memory card access 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Resistance inconsistency Resistance inconsistency correction data Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
680 05D1 correction data table close table close error (CF memory card access 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
error error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-23
 MT-24
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Resistance inconsistency correction data
Resistance inconsistency 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board.
681 05D2 correction data table write error
table write error (CF memory card access
2. Replace the card with a new one.
-
error)
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Heat generation pattern table Heat generation pattern table file open error
682 05D8 file open error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Heat generation pattern table Heat generation pattern table file read error
683 05D9 file read error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Heat generation pattern table Heat generation pattern table file close error
684 05DA file close error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Density measurement Density measurement parameter file read
685 05DB parameter file read error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-24
 MT-25
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Image processing 3 parameter Image processing 3 parameter file read error
686 05DC file read error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Parameter file read error in Parameter file read error in response to
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
response to insufficient density insufficient density at 30 mm point from
687 05DD at 30 mm point from leading leading edge
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
edge (CF memory card access error)
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Frameless processing upper/ Frameless processing upper/lower curved Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
688 05DE lower curved portion parameter portion parameter file read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
file read error (CF memory card access error) 2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Image processing 3 parameter Image processing 3 parameter file write error
689 05DF file write error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The edge sensor is not operating properly, or CPU board
malfunction.
1. Replace the edge sensor.
690 05E0 Edge sensor error Left edge sensor error
2. Replace the SND32A board.
-
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The edge sensor is not operating properly, or CPU board
malfunction.
1. Replace the edge sensor.
691 05E1 Edge sensor error Right edge sensor error
2. Replace the SND32A board.
-
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-25
 MT-26
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Clear film compensation Clear film compensation parameter file read
692 05E2 parameter file read error error (CF memory card access error)
1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
Before image processing 3 ends, recording ended.
Malfunction of CPU board or SND board
Recording processing
693 051E sequence error
Recording processing sequence error 1. Replace the CPU board. -
2. Replace the SND32A board.
3. Reinstall the software and check again.
Image processing 3 does not end.
Image processing 3 timeout CPU board error
694 0558 error
Image processing 3 error
1. Replace the CPU board.
-
2. Reinstall the software and check again.
Recording cannot be executed.
Malfunction of CPU board or SND board
695 0559 Head control board error Head control board error 1. Replace the CPU board. -
2. Replace the SND32A board.
3. Reinstall the software and check again.
Recording does not end.
Malfunction of CPU board or SND board
Head control board timeout
696 055A error
Head control board timeout error 1. Replace the CPU board. -
2. Replace the SND32A board.
3. Reinstall the software and check again.
Malfunction related to thermistors on the PCI communication
system or on the SND board or malfunction of the PCI
More than two thermistors wire More than two thermistors for heater communication system or the SND board.
697 0900 break error temperature detection have a wire break. 1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related
-
connectors are set properly.
2. Replace the thermistors with a wire break.
Malfunction related to thermistors, cooling fans, or heaters on the
PCI communication system or on the SND board or malfunction
Designated value temperature of the PCI communication system or the SND board.
698 0901 rise error
Designated value temperature rise error
1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related
-
connectors are set properly.
2. Replace the cooling fans and thermistors.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-26
 MT-27
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Malfunction related to thermistors, cooling fans, or heaters on the
PCI communication system or on the SND board or malfunction
of the PCI communication system or the SND board.
699 0904 AD conversion timeout error AD conversion timeout error
1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related
-
connectors are set properly.
2. Replace the cooling fans and thermistors.
Malfunction related to thermistors, or heaters on the PCI
communication system or on the SND board or malfunction of the
PCI communication system or the SND board.
700 2901 Head heating standby warning Head heating standby warning
1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related
9-1
connectors are set properly.
2. Replace the heaters and thermistors.
Malfunction related to thermistors, cooling fans, or heaters on the
PCI communication system or on the SND board or malfunction
of the PCI communication system or the SND board.
701 2902 Head cooling standby warning Head cooling standby warning
1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related
9-1
connectors are set properly.
2. Replace the cooling fans and thermistors.
Malfunction related to thermistors on the PCI communication
system or on the SND board.
Atmosphere thermistor wire
702 2903 break
Atmosphere thermistor wire break 1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related 9-1
connectors are set properly.
2. Replace the thermistors with a wire break.
Trailing edge no detection
703 2904 error
Trailing edge no detection error Same as Error Code 1256 -

Malfunction related to thermistors on the PCI communication

system or on the SND board or malfunction of the PCI
One thermistor wire break One thermistor for heater temperature communication system or the SND board.
704 2905 warning error detection has a wire break. 1. Check that the SND board, various input boards, and related
9-1
connectors are set properly.
2. Replace the thermistors with a wire break.
Malfunction of the SND32A board or PCI communication.
24V start device driver warning 1. Check that the SND32A board, input boards, and related
705 2906 error
24V start failed.
connectors are set properly.
-
2. Replace the 24 head voltage switching relay.
Malfunction of the SND32A board or PCI communication.
Heater device driver warning 1. Check that the SND32A board, input boards, and related
706 2907 error
Heater could not be started.
connectors are set properly.
-
2. Replace the 24 head voltage switching relay.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-27
 MT-28
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Malfunction of the PCI communication system, the SND board, or
Density measurement the density measurement section.
707 25E0 sequence error
Density measurement sequence error
1. Replace the PCI communication system or the SND board.
-
2. Replace the PDD board or LED board.
Cause: Density measurement was not carried out property.
708 25E1 Density measurement error Density measurement error
Solution: Replace the PDD board or LED board.
-

Density measurement starting Cause: Density measurement was not carried out property.
709 25E2 point error
Density measurement starting point error
Solution: Replace the PDD board or LED board.
-

Density measurement ending Cause: Density measurement was not carried out property.
710 25E3 point error
Density measurement ending point error
Solution: Replace the PDD board or LED board.
-

Density measurement valid Cause: Density measurement was not carried out property.
711 25E4 data count error
Density measurement valid data count error
Solution: Replace the PDD board or LED board.
5-1

Density measurement driver Measurement can not be completed within Cause: Density measurement was not carried out property. Completion code of
712 25E5 timeout the predetermined time. Solution: Replace the PDD board or LED board. device driver
Density measurement Cause: An abnormal value resulted because the data before
The average density values were abnormal
713 25E6 calculation results are
during the density measurement calculation.
averaging included "0" that cannot result under normal situations. -
abnormal. Solution: Retrieve the logs.
Density measurement Cause: The density data value calculated from the average
The density value was abnormal during the
714 25E7 calculation results are
density measurement calculation.
reached 4.2 or more. -
abnormal. Solution: Retrieve the logs.
Cause: The head has a wire break or the resistance
Resistance value
720 153A disconnection error
Resistance value disconnection error measurement cannot be executed correctly. -
Solution: Replace the head.
Cause: The head has a wire break or the resistance
Resistance value difference
721 153B NG
Resistance value difference NG measurement cannot be executed correctly. -
Solution: Replace the head.
Cause: The head has a wire break or the resistance
Resistance value
722 153F measurement error
Resistance value measurement error measurement cannot be executed correctly. -
Solution: Replace the head.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature data file open
724 1C01 error
Temperature data file open error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-28
 MT-29
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature data file read
725 1C02 error
Temperature data file read error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
The CF memory card is not set in the CPU board properly, the
card or the CPU board is faulty.
Or data is inappropriate, or data is insufficient.
Temperature data file write
726 1C03 error
Temperature data file write error 1. Set the card properly in the CPU board. -
2. Replace the card with a new one.
3. Replace the CPU board.
4. Reinstall the software and check again.
Error caused by software bug and incorrect control timing which
743 2202 FPMC error (At start) FMPC motor cannot be driven.
essentially cannot occur.
2-C-1

Loss of synchronism of MH1 motor when the head is descending,

Head rise sequence error The head returned to the HP more quickly
744 2205 (Level 2) than expected.
or software operation error during the previous head rise 2-C-4
processing.
Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.
Or mechanical system error, or malfunction of the PCI
At initialization, attempted to deviate head communication system or the SH1 port on the SND board.
Initialization head HP deviation
745 2217 detection error
position from HP, but SH1 does not become 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-4
OPEN. mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.
Or mechanical system error, or malfunction of the PCI
At initialization, attempted to return head communication system or the SH1 port on the SND board.
Initialization head HP return
746 2218 detection error
position to HP, but SH1 does not become 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-1
OPEN. mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-29
 MT-30
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB11 port or MB11 controller on
At initialization, attempted to deviate suction
Initialization removal section the SND board.
746 2220 HP deviation detection error
cup arm from HP, but SB11 does not become
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
CLOSE.
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB21 port or MB21 controller on
At initialization, attempted to deviate suction
Initialization removal section the SND board.
747 2221 HP deviation detection error
cup arm from HP, but SB21 does not become
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
CLOSE.
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB11 port or MB11 controller on
At initialization, attempted to return suction
Initialization removal section the SND board.
748 2224 HP return detection error
cup arm position to HP, but SB11 does not
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
become OPEN.
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB21 port or MB21 controller on
At initialization, attempted to return suction
Initialization removal section the SND board.
749 2225 HP return detection error
cup arm position to HP, but SB21 does not
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
-
become OPEN.
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to move the communication system or the SB12 port or MB11 controller on
suction cup arm from the upper deadpoint to the SND board.
750 2228 Film surface detection error
the film surface detection position, but SB12 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
does not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-30
 MT-31
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Malfunction of SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to move the communication system or the SB22 port or MB21 controller on
suction cup arm from the upper deadpoint to the SND board.
751 2229 Film surface detection error
the film surface detection position, but SB22 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
does not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB13 sensor or MB11 motor.
At film removal, attempted to move the
Or mechanical system error or malfunction of the PCI
suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint after
communication system or the SB13 port or MB11 controller on
film suction, but SB13 does not become
Suction cup arm upper the SND board.
752 2232 deadpoint detection error
OPEN.
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
Or, attempted to move the suction cup arm
mechanism adjustments.
to the upper deadpoint after film suction, but
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
SB13 does not become CLOSE.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB23 sensor or MB21 motor.
At film removal, attempted to move the
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint after
communication system or the SB23 port or the MB21 controller
film suction, but SB23 does not become
Suction cup arm upper on the SND board.
753 2233 deadpoint detection error
OPEN.
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
Or, attempted to move the suction cup arm
mechanism adjustments.
to the upper deadpoint after film suction, but
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
SB23 does not become CLOSE.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to push the suction communication system or the SB12 port or MB11 controller on
cup arm from the film surface detection the SND board.
754 2234 Film suction detection error
position into the bellows, but SB12 does not 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
become OPEN. mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB22 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At film removal, attempted to push the suction communication system or the SB22 port or MB21 controller on
cup arm from the film surface detection the SND board.
755 2235 Film suction detection error
position into the bellows, but SB22 does not 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
become OPEN. mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-31
 MT-32
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB11 port or MB11 controller on
At film removal, attempted to move the
Removal section HP rise the SND board.
756 2242 detection error
suction cup arm to HP after the film suction,
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
but SB11 does not become CLOSE.
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB21 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
communication system or the SB21 port or MB21 controller on
At film removal, attempted to move the
Removal section HP rise the SND board.
757 2243 detection error
suction cup arm to HP after the film suction,
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
but SB21 does not become CLOSE.
mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SH1 sensor or MH1 motor.
Or mechanical system error, or malfunction of the PCI
At recording, attempted to move the head communication system or the SH1 port on the SND board.
758 2250 Head rise error position from the recording position to the HP, 1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-4
but SH1 does not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
• Perform HP detection and then request other operations.
Problem in operational procedure during PC-
• In the case of removal unit individual operations, perform the
Error due to incorrect Utility command removal unit operation, film
759 2271 operational procedure positioning operation, head up/down drive
following in order: 2-E-1
[1. Film Surface] > [2. Film Suction] > [3. Upper Limit] > [4. Film
processing.
Fanning] > [5. Film Release] > [6. Pre-feeding] > [7. Grip Release]
TPH1 operation confirmation Thermal protector 1 status confirmation
760 2273 standby standby
Occurs due to the electrical circuit. 2-A-1

(+24MRD) operation
761 2276 confirmation standby
(+24MRD) status confirmation standby Occurs due to the electrical circuit. 2-A-1

TPH confirmation standby Failed to confirm the status of TPH1 and Occurs due to the electrical circuit. In this case, open and close
762 2277 timeout FUSE6. the cover to re-initialize.
2-A-1

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-32
 MT-33
LED Error Detailed
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Display code information Format
Film dropped During film removal.
Or, malfunction of the SB11, SB12, SB13, SD11 sensors or MB11
motor.
Malfunction of the mechanical system or the PCI communication
system, or malfunction of the SB11, SB12, SB13, SD11 ports or
Conveyor section conveyance After completing removal processing, SD11
763 2287 error did not become CLOSE normally.
MB11 controller on the SND board. 2-A-2
1. Check if film has dropped.
2. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Film dropped During film removal.
Or, malfunction of the SB21, SB22, SB23, SD21 sensors or MB21
motor.
Malfunction of the mechanical system or the PCI communication
system, or malfunction of the SB21, SB22, SB23, SD21 ports or
Conveyor section conveyance After completing removal processing, SD21
764 2288 error did not become CLOSE normally.
MB21 controller on the SND board. 2-A-3
1. Check if film has dropped.
2. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB13 sensor or MB11 motor.
Or mechanical system error or malfunction of the PCI
At the end of film flapping operation,
communication system or the SB13 port or MB11 controller on
attempted to move the suction cup arm
Suction cup arm upper the SND board.
765 2293 deadpoint detection error
from the bottom end position of the flapping
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-2
operation to the upper deadpoint, but SB13
mechanism adjustments.
does not become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Malfunction of SB23 sensor or MB21 motor.
Or mechanical system error, malfunction of the PCI
At the end of film flapping operation,
communication system or the SB23 port or the MB21 controller
attempted to move the suction cup arm
Suction cup arm upper on the SND board.
766 2294 deadpoint detection error
from the bottom end position of the flapping
1. Using the PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-3
operation to the upper deadpoint, but SB23
mechanism adjustments.
does not become CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-33
 MT-34
2.3.2 Formatter

n DICOM
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data,
420 0001 0001 Failed in starting the DICOM main thread.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

421 0001 0002 Invalid Dicom.dat contents Save equipment individual data (requires Dicom.dat analysis). Tag number with error
Failed in starting DICOM communication main
422 0001 0003 thread.
Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm analysis). Port number

1:No file
423 0001 0004 Invalid Netinf.prm contents Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm analysis). 2:Non existing keyword
3:Non existing value
1:No file
424 0001 0005 Invalid UserImageNum.txt Save equipment individual data (requires UserImageNum.txt). 2:Non existing keyword
3:Non existing value
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data,
425 0001 FFFF Insufficient virtual memory
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-34
 MT-35
n Spooler
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
430 0002 0001 Failed in creating a thread. (Internal error)
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
431 0002 0002 Failed in sending messages. (Internal error)
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
432 0002 0003 Failed in securing memory. (Internal error)
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in creating print job objects when resuming Place of occurrence in source
433 0002 0004 unprocessed jobs.
Retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis)
code
Place of occurrence in source
434 0002 0005 Failed in loading PrintJob files. Retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis)
code
Place of occurrence in source
435 0002 0007 Failed in retrieving PrintJob and FILM object data. Retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis)
code
Place of occurrence in source
436 0002 0008 Failed in registering in the spooler queue. Retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis)
code
Place of occurrence in source
437 0002 0009 Invalid film object, or insufficient data Retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis)
code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
438 0002 000B Invalid status
system, and observe whether the problem persists. code, status
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
439 0002 000C Failed in accessing PrintJob.
system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
440 0002 000D Specified Film number is invalid.
system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Could not find the print job to be deleted when Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
441 0002 000E queue deletion was requested. system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
442 0002 0010 Specified change priority level is invalid.
system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Place of occurrence in source
443 0002 0011 Failed in setting PrintJob and FILM object data. Retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis)
code
Place of occurrence in source
444 0002 0012 Failed in opening and creating files. Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis).
code, file name
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
445 0002 0013 Requested print ID is invalid.
system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
446 0002 0014 Failed in moving file.
system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
447 0002 0015 An unexpected case occurred.
system, and observe whether the problem persists. code

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-35
 MT-36
n ImgPrc
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
450 0003 0001 An error occurred due to system call.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
451 0003 0002 Failed in securing memory.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
452 0003 0003 Failed in creating image processing objects.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Data to be retrieved was not found in PrintJOB, Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.prm analysis), or Place of occurrence in source
453 0003 0004 FILM object, nor image processing parameter. retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm). code
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.prm analysis), or Place of occurrence in source
454 0003 0005 Failed in opening and creating files.
retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm). code, file name
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.prm analysis), or Place of occurrence in source
455 0003 0006 Execution of image processing resulted in error.
retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm). code
As the leading edge margin parameter is out of the Equipment individual data save (TOP_MARGIN.txt) analysis is
456 0003 0007 range, the default value is used. required.
Type, outside range value

Re-executed format calculation without annotation Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.prm analysis), or Place of occurrence in source
457 0003 0008 information retrieve error job information (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm). code

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-36
 MT-37
n Output
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data,
460 0004 1EB1 Failed in starting output main thread.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data,

461 0004 1F7C Level 0 error occurred in formatter.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data,

462 0004 1F7D Start timeout of printer.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data,

463 0004 1F7E Timeout of command request for printer and driver.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

An error occurred with the request to start the

464 0004 1F80 printer.
Install the printer from the PC-Utility. None

Failed in saving the automatic density Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the
465 0004 1F83 measurement results file. system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

Density correction calculation results are Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the
466 0004 1F84 abnormal. system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the

467 0004 1F85 Unable to continue operations due to internal error.
system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

468 0004 1F90 File does not exist. Check if file is present. None
469 3004 0001 Number of remaining film sheets ejected None Number of ejected films
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the
470 2004 0002 Failed in retrieving ISC log of PRT.
system, and observe whether the problem persists.
None

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-37
 MT-38
n Panel
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Reboot the system or reinstall, and observe whether the problem
775 0701 xxxx PDM task panel driver initialization error
persists. If no improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

Reboot the system or reinstall, and observe whether the problem

776 2701 xxxx PNL task setting information file read error
persists. If no improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

Reboot the system or reinstall, and observe whether the problem

777 2705 xxxx PNL task setting information file description error
persists. If no improvements are seen, replace the CF.
xxxx is arbitrary value

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-38
 MT-39
n Utility
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Message file format NG error
490 2600 xxxx (Mainly due to file corruption)
Reinstall the software. xxxx is arbitrary value

Message file number of items NG error

491 2601 xxxx (Mainly due to file corruption)
Reinstall the software. xxxx is arbitrary value

xxxx is arbitrary value.

Error in system date at startup
492 2610 xxxx (when there is conflict in time)
Reboot the system and observe whether the problem persists. Incorrect time-keeping is not
detected.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-39
 MT-40
n JobMake
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
473 0007 0001 Failed in creating a thread. (Internal error)
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
474 0007 0002 Failed in sending messages. (Internal error)
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
475 0007 0003 Failed in securing memory. (Internal error)
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code, request size
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
476 0007 000A Failed in opening and creating files.
system, and observe whether the problem persists. code, file name
Save equipment individual data (requires log analysis), reboot the Place of occurrence in source
477 0007 000B Invalid status
system, and observe whether the problem persists. code, status

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-40
 MT-41
n Main
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Failed in securing the area for communication Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
300 0008 0001 processing. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Mounted memory does not satisfy the operating Place of occurrence in source
301 0008 0002 conditions of the system.
Check the SDRAM capacity.
code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
302 0008 0003 An invalid parameter was specified.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
303 0008 0004 Failed in requesting to start DICOM control.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in requesting to end the communication with Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
304 0008 0005 DICOM control. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
305 0008 0006 Failed in calling the GUI method.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in processing the notification of JOB Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
306 0008 0007 completion. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
307 0008 0008 Failed in calling the print request method.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
308 0008 0009 Failed in requesting image initialization processing.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting image Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
309 0008 000A processing. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in instructing to reload the density correction Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
310 0008 000B table. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the JOB generation request Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
311 0008 000C (SMPTE/ execution) method. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the JOB generation request Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
312 0008 000D (scanner diagnosis) method. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the JOB generation request (flat Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
313 0008 000E pattern) method. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the JOB generation request Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
314 0008 000F (cleaning) method. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of completing job Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
315 0008 0010 priority change. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
316 0008 0011 Failed in starting the output control unit.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
317 0008 0012 Failed in calling the utility request method.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-41
 MT-42
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Failed in calling the method of instructing energy Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
318 0008 0013 saving. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
319 0008 0014 Failed in calling the print request method.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
320 0008 0015 Failed in calling the transfer request method.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of instructing to end Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
321 0008 0016 the output control. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of notifying removal Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
322 0008 0017 permission. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
323 0008 0018 Failed in calling the end request method.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
324 0008 0019 Failed in calling the PC-Utility method.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting to set Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
325 0008 001A image processing completion. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting to Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
326 0008 001B retrieve the job for removal processing. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting to Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
327 0008 001C retrieve the job for image processing. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting to Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
328 0008 001D retrieve the job for RAW data transfer. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of notifying tray Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
329 0008 001E information update. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of notifying output Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
330 0008 001F processing completion. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
331 0008 0020 Failed in requesting to start control.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in notifying the completion of transfer Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
332 0008 0021 processing of spooler control. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting to spool Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
333 0008 0022 the job. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting to Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
334 0008 0023 resume processing the unprocessed job. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting to Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
335 0008 0024 change the job priority. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
336 0008 0025 Failed in calling the method of requesting deletion.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-42
 MT-43
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Failed in calling the method of initializing the Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
337 0008 0026 output control. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of notifying the queue Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
338 0008 0027 deletion request result. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
339 0008 0028 Failed in calling the method of notifying job start.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of notifying the preprint Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
340 0008 0029 response. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of printer information Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
341 0008 002A request response. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of notifying the Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
342 0008 002B completion of image reception. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of printing system Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
343 0008 002C information. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
344 0008 002D Request in unexpected mode
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of reloading the Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
345 0008 002E uniformity table. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of setting printer Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
346 0008 002F image correction processing. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of notifying tray status Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
347 0008 0030 change. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting to delete Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
348 0008 0031 all jobs. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
355 0008 0038 Failed in requesting to confirm reprinting.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
356 0008 0039 Failed in requesting to spool for reprinting.
reboot the system, and observe the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of outputting the QC Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
357 0008 003A test pattern. reboot the system, and observe the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of notifying printer Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
358 0008 003B status change. reboot the system, and observe the problem persists. code
Place of occurrence in source
359 0008 003C USB installation: USB-related error Check MAIN error log
code
USB installation: The path or the USB drive does Place of occurrence in source
360 0008 003D not exist
Check USB connection, and USB drive configuration file.
code
Place of occurrence in source
361 0008 003E USB installation: Insufficient USB capacity Check the USB capacity.
code

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-43
 MT-44
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check the content of the USB storage. Place of occurrence in source
362 0008 003F USB installation: No files to be loaded via USB.
Cannot recognize it as the installer. code
Place of occurrence in source
363 0008 0040 USB installation: No files to be saved to USB. Check the system status.
code
Place of occurrence in source
364 0008 0041 Equipment information: USB-related error Check MAIN error log
code
Equipment information: Insufficient USB capacity Place of occurrence in source
365 0008 0042 when saving
Check/add USB capacity.
code
Place of occurrence in source
366 0008 0043 Analysis log information: USB-related error Check MAIN error log
code
Place of occurrence in source
367 0008 0044 Reprint image: USB-related error Check MAIN error log
code
Place of occurrence in source
368 0008 0045 Reprint image: No image of specified print ID Recheck the reprint ID and retry.
code
Failed in calling the method of notifying system Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
369 0008 0046 information. reboot the system, and observe the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
370 0008 0047 Failed in copying file
reboot the system, and observe the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
371 0008 0048 Failed in loading file
reboot the system, and observe the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of reloading the Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
372 0008 0049 resistance correction table. reboot the system, and observe the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of reloading the main
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
373 0008 004A scanning image position adjustment parameter
reboot the system, and observe the problem persists. code
table.
Failed in calling the method of reloading the Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
374 0008 004B resistance correction table. reboot the system, and observe the effects. code
Failed in calling the method of setting the number Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
375 0008 004C of film sheets remaining in the magazine. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in loading the setting file of energy saving Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
376 0008 004D time. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of instructing energy Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
377 0008 004E saving. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting to Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
378 0008 004F transition to the energy-saving mode. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of recovering from the Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
379 0008 0050 energy-saving mode. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-44
 MT-45
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Failed in calling the method of notifying the status Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
380 0008 0051 lamp control. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
381 0008 0052 Failed in saving to USB.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
382 0008 0053 Failed in loading from USB.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in updating the accumulated number of film Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
383 0008 0054 sheets used. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Failed in calling the method of requesting power- Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
384 0008 0055 off. reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Place of occurrence in source
385 0008 0056 Failed in copying the installation data. Install the software and replace the CF memory card.
code
Failed in creating the version upgrade instruction Place of occurrence in source
386 0008 0057 file.
Install the software and replace the CF memory card.
code
Place of occurrence in source
387 0008 0058 Failed in creating the full installation instruction file. Install the software and replace the CF memory card.
code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
388 0008 0059 Failed in deleting log files.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
389 0008 005A Failed in creating normally completed flag file.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
390 0008 005B Failed in starting up the Web task.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
391 0008 005C An unknown status was notified.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
392 0008 005D Inconsistency occurred in the file system.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Place of occurrence in source
393 0008 005E Did not end normally the last time. Reboot the system and observe whether the problem persists.
code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
394 0008 005F Failed in deleting history log.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
395 0008 0060 Failed in recognizing the log retrieval mode.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
396 0008 0061 Failed in updating the Z-Mode setting file.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
397 0008 0062 Failed in updating the DICOM.DAT file.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
398 0008 0063 Failed in loading the NETINF file.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-45
 MT-46
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check the SDRAM capacity, save the equipment individual data, Place of occurrence in source
399 0008 0064 Failed in updating the NETINF file.
reboot the system, and observe whether the problem persists. code

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-46
 MT-47
n PCUTL
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the equipment, and
480 200A 0001 Failed in FTP data transfer
observe whether the problem persists.
Name of file which failed transfer

Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the path and user of
481 200A 0002 FTP port does not open the FTP directory of the PC for servicing, and observe whether the None
problem persists.
Searched for but did not find the corresponding
482 200A 0003 file.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed search

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-47
 MT-48
n Installer
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the equipment, and
486 200B 0001 Failed in FTP data transfer
observe whether the problem persists.
Name of file which failed transfer

Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the path and user of
487 200B 0002 FTP port does not open the FTP directory of the PC for servicing, and observe whether the None
problem persists.
Searched for but did not find the corresponding
488 200B 0003 file.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed search

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-48
 MT-49
n StartUp
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
1. Install the software.
250 000C 0001 Panel driver initialization error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
251 000C 0002 Semaphore table initialization error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
252 000C 0003 Round robin processing error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
253 000C 0004 Message ID retrieval error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
254 000C 0005 PNL task instance error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Check the harness of the board.
255 000C 0006 Motor initialization response error 2. Check that the motor itself operates. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Check that the LCD board connector is set properly.
256 000C 0007 Panel display error
2. Replace the LCD board.
None

1. Check that the LCD board connector is set properly.

257 000C 1001 LED connection board disconnected
2. Replace the LCD board.
None

1. Check that the SND board connector is set properly.

258 000C 1004 SND connection board disconnected
2. Replace the SND board.
None

1. Check the memory capacity.

259 000C 000B RAMDISK generation error
2. Replace the memory.
None

1. Check the memory capacity.

260 000C 000C Folder generation error from RAMDISK
2. Replace the memory.
None

1. Check the memory capacity.

261 000C 000D File copy error to RAMDISK
2. Replace the memory.
None

1. Check the memory capacity.

262 000C 000E Image processing memory initialization error
2. Replace the memory.
None

1. Install the software.

Parameter file copy error
263 000C 000F (E folder TO BKUP folder)
2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-49
 MT-50
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
1. Install the software.
Parameter file copy error
264 000C 0010 (BKUP folder TO E folder)
2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
265 000C 0011 Th2ONFLG generation error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
266 000C 0012 TIMETASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
267 000C 0013 MAINTASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
268 000C 0014 ISCTASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
269 000C 0015 DBGTASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
270 000C 0016 MFCTASK start error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
271 200C 0017 Th2ONFLG deletion error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
272 000C 0018 Message error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Check that the software to be installed is correct.
273 000C 0019 Install processing error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
274 000C 0020 inconsistency occurred in the file system. 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
275 200C 0021 Gateway address read error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
276 200C 0022 Gateway address setting error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-50
 MT-51
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
1. Install the software.
277 000C 0023 File open error during file open checking 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
278 000C 0024 Disc flash error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.
1. Install the software.
279 000C 0025 Disc unmount error 2. Check that CF memory card is set correctly. None
3. Replace CF memory card.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-51
 MT-52
n Satellite
LED Error Detailed
Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Detailed Information Format
Display code code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the equipment, and
483 200D 0001 Failed in FTP data transfer
observe whether the problem persists.
Name of file which failed transfer

Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the path and user of
484 200D 0002 FTP port does not open the FTP directory of the PC for servicing, and observe whether the None
problem persists.
Searched for but did not find the corresponding
485 200D 0003 file.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed search

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-52
 MT-53
3. Initializing IP Address 8. Check that the IP address has been reset to the default (172.16.1.30).
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC1-1-3-1]_IP Address}
To initialize the IP address of the equipment, perform the following procedure.

1. Turn OFF the power of the equipment. 9. End the PC-Utility.

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.2.4_Disconnecting the Equipment}
2. Remove the control box cover. 10. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.2_Control Box}

3. Turn ON the dip switch No.1 of S1 on the SND board. 11. Remove the control box cover.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.2_Control Box}
S1
12. Turn OFF the dip switch No.1 of S1 on the SND board.
S1

S1 S1
4 4
3 3 S1 S1
2 2
1 1 4 4
3 3
ON ON E0003.ai
2 2
1 1
4. Install the control box cover. ON ON E0004.ai
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.2_Control Box}

5. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which 13. Install the control box cover.

the equipment is connected. {MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.2_Control Box}

6. Turn ON the power of the equipment.

7. Start the PC-Utility.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the
Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-53
 MT-54
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-54
 MT-55
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MT-55
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.31.2006 00 New release (FM4832) All pages

03.24.2006 01 Revised (FM4903) All pages
06.30.2006 01 Revised (FM4924) All pages
08.31.2006 02 Revised (FM4958) 49, 53, 60, 69, 70

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 10.18.2006

02.15.2007
03
04
Revised (FM5036)
Revised (Revision for main unit software
3, 47, 47.1, 47.2, 49-53
1, 1.1, 1.2, 3, 8, 15, 17, 22, 32, 33,
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5075) 42, 44, 45, 48, 48.1, 48.2, 48.3,
48.4, 49, 50, 60, 61, 61.1, 61.2, 63,
67, 69-93
03.31.2008 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software 3, 47.1, 48.4, 61.1, 82-84, 93-95
version V2.2, V2.3 and V2.4, etc.) (FM5332)
01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) Cover

REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

(DRYPIX 2000)

016-201-06E DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 MC-1
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, <INSTRUCTIONS>
The diagrams in this manual display the CHECK and FIT ON icons where
REPLACEMENTS, AND ADJUSTMENTS necessary.
When removing/reinstalling, following these icons.

This chapter does not describe parts which require no special note or adjustments in
removal and installation.
For details on the removal of these parts, refer to the Service Parts List.
Also follow the precautions below when performing inspections, replacements, and
adjustments of parts.
• CHECK icon
: When reinstalling removed parts, this is indicated if
reinstalling positions must be checked or adjusted.
This symbol is shown in illustrations of parts removal
procedures. Whenever this is shown, be sure to refer to “n
CHECK/Adjusting procedure”.

WARNING • FIT ON icon : When installing parts, this is indicated if alignment to the
boss is required. However, this is not indicated on bosses
To prevent electrical shocks, be sure to turn OFF the power of this equipment used for enhancing assembly and preventing assembly
before starting work. accidents.

WARNING/CAUTION
<REMARKS>
Observe the warnings and cautions described in “SAFETY PRECAUTION”. As the TP screws and DT screws have similar shapes, differentiate them according to
{SAFETY PRECAUTION} their colors.
TP screw: Blue
DT screw: Silver
CAUTION
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance
of boards. Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to
electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
• Never remove the screws painted in red.

<INSTRUCTIONS>
• The screws painted in yellow must be adjusted after the installation of parts.
When installing parts, follow the check/adjustment procedure provided.
• Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power
cable and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing
the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and
retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original
states upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to
the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service
manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly
secure the parts.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-1
 MC-1.1
n Precautions on Opening/Closing the Head Assembly Contact Points
l
Open and close making sure the following parts do not touch each other.
CAUTION
Opening/closing the head assembly with the head cooling fan assembly and
Bracket (Two locations)
duct removed may cause the flexible cable of the thermal head assembly to
touch the head pressurization arm assembly bracket and damage. To open/
close the head assembly in this state, perform the following procedure.

Position of the Head Cooling Fan Assembly and Duct

l

Flexible cable

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-1.1
 MC-1.2
Open/Close Procedure
l 2. With the thermal head assembly moved to the shaft side, open/close
the head assembly.
1. Hold the heat sink portion of the thermal head and shaft of the
equipment body, and move the thermal head assembly to the shaft To open:
side. Loosen hands grasping the shaft just before the thermal head assembly moves
onto the arm.

<REMARKS>
With the head cooling fan and duct attached, as the thermal head will be
positioned to the shaft side, it will not touch the head pressurization arm assembly
during open/close of the thermal head. When they are removed, as the thermal
head will be moved to the head pressurization arm assembly side, it will touch the
assembly. To prevent this, there is a need to move the thermal head assembly to To close:
the shaft side by hand. Loosen hand grasping the shaft just after the thermal head assembly moves past
the head pressurization arm assembly bracket.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-1.2

CONTENTS
1. COVER MC-4
1. COVER
1.1 Covers which can be Removed Individually MC-4
1.2 Covers which Need to be Removed in Certain 4.6 Removal Conveyance Roller (Lower) MC-26
Order MC-5
FPDC001A.AI
2. FRAME MC-13
2. FRAME
2.1 Head Cover Interlock Switch (SK12) MC-13
2.2 Rear Cover Interlock Switches (Upper) (SK11) MC-14
FPDC002A.AI
3. MAGAZINE SET SECTION 3. MAGAZINE SET SECTION MC-15
3.1 Film Size Detection Sensor Assembly
(SA11/SA12/SA13) MC-15
3.2 Magazine Shutter Open/Close Mechanism MC-16
FPDC003A.AI
016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
4. REMOVAL SECTION
FPDC004A.AI
5. CONVEYOR SECTION
FPDC005A.AI
6. SUB-SCANNING SECTION
FPDC006A.AI
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual
MC-2
4.
4.1
REMOVAL SECTION
Film Removing Motor (MB11)
MC-17
MC-17
4.2 Suction Cup Arm MC-18
4.3 Suction Cup MC-20
4.4 Bellows MC-21
4.5 Removal Drive Cam MC-23
4.7 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor (SB11) MC-27
4.8 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB12) MC-28
4.9 Suction Cup Arm Upper Deadpoint
Detection Sensor (SB13) MC-29
5. CONVEYOR SECTION MC-30
5.1 Positioning Guide Assembly MC-30
5.2 Reference Plate Drive Motor (MD12) MC-32
5.3 Reference Plate Assembly MC-33
5.4 Film Edge Sensor Assembly MC-34
5.5 Cleaning Roller Detection Sensor (SD14) MC-36
6. SUB-SCANNING SECTION MC-37
6.1 Sub-scanning Motor (ME1) MC-37
6.2 Flywheel MC-40
6.3 Platen Roller MC-42
MC-2

7. HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION MC-44
7. HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION
7.1 Head Cooling Fan (FANP1, FANP2) MC-44
7.2 Head UP/Down Drive Motor (MH1) MC-46
7.3 Head Pressurization Arm Assembly MC-47
7.4 Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head 10.4 SND Board MC-61
Pressure MC-47.1
FPDC007A.AI
8. HEAD 8. HEAD MC-48
8.1 Thermal Head Assembly MC-48
FPDC008A.AI
9. FILM RELEASE SECTION 9. FILM RELEASE SECTION MC-54
9.1 Density Measurement Light-Sensing Board SOFTWARE
(PDD15A) MC-54
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board
(LED15A) MC-56
FPDC009A.AI
016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
MC-3
10. CONTROLLER MC-58
10. CONTROLLER
10.1 Operation Panel MC-58
10.2 Controller Cooling Fan (FANK1) MC-59
10.3 CPU Board MC-60
10.5 Power Supply Unit MC-62
10.6 ME1 Driver Board MC-67
10.7 Lithium Battery MC-68
10.8 CF (Compact Flash Memory) MC-69
10.9 Control Box MC-70
10.10 Head Voltage Switching Relay Assembly MC-73
FPDC010A.AI
11. SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 11. SHEET-FEEDER UNIT MC-75
11.1 Sheet-feeder Unit Film Removing Motor
(MB21) MC-77
11.2 Sheet-feeder Unit Positioning Guide Assembly MC-78
FPDC011A.AI
12. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT 12. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE MC-80
12.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing MC-81
12.2 Installing from the USB Memory MC-85
13. RECOVERY PROCEDURE 13. RECOVERY PROCEDURE FOR CF
FOR CF (COMPACT FLASH (COMPACT FLASH MEMORY) MC-90
MEMORY) 13.1 When not Using the Main Unit Software
CD-R at the Installed Place MC-90
13.2 When Using the Main Unit Software
CD-R at the Installed Place MC-92
14. C F I M A G E A C Q U I S I T I O N 14. CF IMAGE ACQUISITION TOOL
TOOL (CF-Tool Frontend) (CF-Tool Frontend) MC-93
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-3
 MC-4
1. COVER 1. Remove the upper cover.

1.1 Covers which can be Removed

Individually

1.1.1 Upper Cover

FPDC0122.AI

n Removing Procedure
<NOTE>
Generally, the upper cover must be removed together with the head cover.
When replacing the head cover only, leave the upper cover on the equipment.
{SP:01A_COVER 1}

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-4
 MC-5
1.2 Covers which Need to be n Reinstalling Procedure
Removed in Certain Order Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

1.2.1 Head Up/Down Secion Cover

FPDC0123.AI

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover.

2. Open the head assembly.
3. Remove the head up/down section cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-5
 MC-6
1.2.2 Ejection Cover 1.2.3 Front Cover

n Removing Procedure n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover. 1. Remove the upper cover.

2. Remove the ejection cover. 2. Remove the front cover.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-6
 MC-7
1.2.4 Right Cover/Left Cover 1.2.5 Upper Rear Cover

n Removing Procedure n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover. 1. Remove the upper cover.

2. Remove the right cover and left cover. 2. Remove the upper rear cover.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-7
 MC-8
1.2.6 Rear Cover 1.2.7 Rear Open/Close Cover

n Removing Procedure n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover. 1. Remove the upper cover.

2. Remove the right cover and left cover. 2. Remove the right cover and left cover.
3. Remove the rear cover. 3. Remove the rear cover.
4. Remove the rear open/close cover.

n Reinstalling Procedure n Reinstalling Procedure

Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-8
 MC-9
1.2.8 Lower Front Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit) n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover
• Front cover

2. Remove the lower front cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-9
 MC-10
1.2.9 Lower Right Cover/Lower Left Cover (Sheet-Feeder 4. Remove the lower right cover and lower left cover.
Unit)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover
• Front cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Remove the lower front cover.

3. Remove the right handle and left handle.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-10
 MC-11
1.2.10 Lower Rear Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit) n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover
• Front cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Remove the lower front cover.

3. Remove the lower right cover and lower left cover.
4. Remove the lower rear cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-11
 MC-12
1.2.11 Lower Rear Open/Close Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit) n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover
• Front cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Remove the lower front cover.

3. Remove the lower right cover and lower left cover.
4. Remove the lower rear cover.
5. Remove the lower open/close cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-12
 MC-13
2. FRAME <NOTE>
To disconnect the faston terminal of micro-switch, press the unlocking
latch located on the connector as shown below.
2.1 Head Cover Interlock Switch
(SK12)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover. FPDC0210.AI

2. Remove the head cover interlock switch (SK12).

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
When connecting the faston terminal, ensure that they are facing as shown
below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to disconnect when
performing periodic maintenance, etc.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-13
 MC-14
2.2 Rear Cover Interlock Switches <NOTE>
To disconnect the faston terminal of micro-switch, press the unlocking
(Upper) (SK11) latch located on the connector as shown below.

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover and left cover. FPDC0211.AI

2. Remove the rear cover interlock switches (upper) (SK11).

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
When connecting the faston terminal, ensure that they are facing as shown
below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to disconnect when
performing periodic maintenance, etc.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-14
 MC-15
3. MAGAZINE SET SECTION n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal
<NOTE>
3.1 Film Size Detection Sensor Assembly On the sensor bracket, there are numbers marked, each of which denotes that
(SA11/SA12/SA13) the sensor of that number should be held there.

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the positioning guide assembly. FPDC0310.AI

{MC:5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly}

{MC:11.2_Sheet-Feeder Unit Positioning Guide Assembly}

2. Remove the film size detection sensor assemblies (SA11/SA12/SA13).

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-15
 MC-16
3.2 Magazine Shutter Open/Close n Reinstalling Procedure
Mechanism Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
n Removing Procedure Assemble each link as shown in the following figure.

1. Remove the upper cover and left cover. FPDC0311.AI

2. Remove the magazine shutter open/close mechanism.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-16
 MC-17
4. REMOVAL SECTION 3. Remove the film removing motor (MB11).

4.1 Film Removing Motor (MB11)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover FPDC0430.AI

• Ejection cover
• Front cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Remove the control box assembly.

{MC:10.9_Control Box}

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-17
 MC-18
4.2 Suction Cup Arm 3. Move the suction cup arm.
<REMARKS>
n Removing Procedure When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as
shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the positioning guide assembly.
{MC:5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly} FPDC0431.AI

{MC:11.2_Sheet-feeder Unit Positioning Guide

Assembly}

2. Remove the film conveyance guide.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-18
 MC-19
4. Remove the suction cup arm.
<NOTE>
When removing the suction cup arm, be sure not to fall the parts shown
below. (left and right)

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
After reinstallation, move the suction cup arm to the home position before
inserting the magazines.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-19
 MC-20
4.3 Suction Cup

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the suction cup arm. FPDC0432.AI

{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}

2. Remove the suction cup.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-20
 MC-21
4.4 Bellows 3. Remove the bellows.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
n Removing Procedure
When removing the bellows, press down the bellows and rotate to remove.
1. Remove the suction cup arm. FPDC0433.AI

{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}

2. Remove the suction cup unit.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-21
 MC-22
n Reinstalling Procedure nCHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Check for air leak by the following steps.
<INSTRUCTIONS> 1. Suction the film with the suction cup manually and check that the film
• If the bellows has been removed, be sure to replace the O-ring. does not drop off for about 60 seconds.
• When reinstalling, insert the second groove from the top of the bellows into
the plate. 2. Press the suction cup arm against the film until the bottommost
• Leave a clearance of about 0.5 to 1.0 mm between the bellows anf holder. position of the actuator for detection SB12 passes the SB12 detection
point.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-22
 MC-23
4.5 Removal Drive Cam 3. Remove the removal drive cam together with the crank.
<NOTE>
n Removing Procedure
When removing the removal drive cam, be careful not to drop or lose the
suction cup arm assembly bearing.
1. Remove the following covers.
• Upper cover FPDC0434.AI

• Front cover
• Left cover
<NOTE>
• As the procedure for removing the removal drive cam is the same for the
left and right sides, only that of the left side is described here.
• When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm
assembly to the home position and then begin work.

2. Remove the two gears and gear fixing cover (left).

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-23

n Reinstalling Procedure
<NOTE>
• As the procedure for installing the removal drive cam is the same for the left
and right sides, only that of the left side is described here.
• When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm to the
home position and then begin work.
MC-24
3. Insert the pins into the two holes on gear 1, adjust the phase of the
removal drive cam, and reinstall the gear fixing cover (left).
<NOTE>
• Do not install the bearing at this time.
• The pins to be used must not be extremely thin or easy to deform and
should fit the holes on the gear as closely as possible.

1. Reinstall the crank and the removal drive cam as well to the removal
section.

2. Align the rib position of gear 1 to the l mark on gear 2, and reinstall to
the gear fixing cover (left).
<NOTE>
At this time, the two holes on gear 1 should be at the following positions
(upper).

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-24
 MC-25
4. Disconnect the pin and check that each gear is reinstalled properly. n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
<NOTE> After reinstalling the removal drive cam, check that the suction cup arm moves
smoothly. Also visually check that the suction cup arm is horizontal.
• The positions of the two holes on gear 1 and the holes on the removal <REMARKS>
drive cam must be aligned.
• The position of the rib on gear 1 and l mark on gear 2 must be aligned. When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as shown
in the following figure.

5. If with the phases of the right removal drive section and that of the
left removal drive section corresponding, disengage gear 3, align the
rib position of gear 2 and that of gear 3, and adjust the left and right
phases.
<NOTE>
After checking the operation, move the suction cup arm to the home position.

6. Reinstall the bearing on the shaft of gear 3.

7. Connect the cable to the clamp of the gear fixing cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-25
 MC-26
4.6 Removal Conveyance Roller n Reinstalling Procedure
(Lower) Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the positioning guide assembly. FPDC0435.AI

{MC:5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly}

{MC:11.2_Sheet-feeder Unit Positioning Guide Assembly}

2. Remove the magazine shutter open/close mechanism.

{MC:3.2_Magazine Shutter Open/Close Mechanism}
<NOTE>
When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm
assembly to the upper deadpoint first.

3. Remove the removal conveyance roller (lower).

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-26
 MC-27
4.7 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection 3. Remove the suction cup arm HP detection sensor (SB11).
Sensor (SB11)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the positioning guide assembly. FPDC0436.AI

{MC:5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly}

{MC:11.2_Sheet-feeder Unit Positioning Guide Assembly}

2. Remove the film conveyance guide.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-27
 MC-28
4.8 Film Surface Detection Sensor
(SB12)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the suction cup arm.

FPDC0437.AI

{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}

2. Remove the film surface detection sensor (SB12).

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-28
 MC-29
4.9 Suction Cup Arm Upper Deadpoint
Detection Sensor (SB13)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the suction cup arm. FPDC0438.AI

{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}

2. Remove the suction cup arm upper deadpoint detection sensor (SB13).

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-29
 MC-30
5. CONVEYOR SECTION 3. Remove the conveyance roller.
<NOTE>

5.1 Positioning Guide Assembly Remove the #6 vertical conveyance roller only when the sheet-feeder unit
(option) is installed.

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover FPDC0520.AI

• Right cover
• Left cover
• Rear open/close cover
• Rear cover

2. Remove the vertical conveyance guide.

<NOTE>
Only when the sheet-feeder unit (option) is reinstalled, implement this
procedure.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-30
 MC-31
4. Remove the positioning guide assembly.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
When installing the positioning guide assembly, be sure to move the left and
right reference plates inside and then install.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-31
 MC-32
5.2 Reference Plate Drive Motor
(MD12)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the positioning guide assembly. FPDC0521.AI

{MC:5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly}

{MC:11.2_Sheet-feeder Unit Positioning Guide Assembly}

2. Remove the reference plate operation motor (MD12).

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-32
 MC-33
5.3 Reference Plate Assembly n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Removing Procedure <NOTE>
Reinstall so that the gears engage with the reference plate assembly pressed
1. Remove the positioning guide assembly. against to the left and right sides.
{MC:5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly} FPDC0522.AI

{MC:11.2_Sheet-feeder Unit Positioning Guide

Assembly}

2. Remove the reference plate assembly.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-33

5.4 Film Edge Sensor Assembly
n Removing Procedure
1. Open the head cover.
2. Open the head assembly.
FPDC0523.AI
MC-34
5. Remove the film edge sensor assembly.
<NOTE>
• As the removal method of the film edge sensor assembly is the same for
the left and right sides, only the removal of the left side is described.
• On the back side of the cover, there is “L” or “R” marked, which denotes
that the mounting position of the cover is left or right.

3. Remove the cleaning roller.

4. Remove the platen guide.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-34
 MC-35
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
• Check that there are no dusts adhered to the slit of the encoder plate.
• When installing the film edge sensor assembly, be careful not to install the
left and right sides incorrectly.
• Install so that when the film edge sensor assembly actuator is moved
gently, it moves towards the front.
• On the mounting positions, “L” is marked on the left and “R” on the right
when viewed from the front.

n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
After replacing the film edge sensor assembly, perform the compensation of the film
edge sensor position.
{MU:3.3 [7-6]_Edge Sen.Po.>}

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-35
 MC-36
5.5 Cleaning Roller Detection n Reinstalling Procedure
Sensor (SD14) Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover and upper rear cover. FPDC0524.AI

2. Remove the cleaning roller detection sensor (SD14).

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-36
 MC-37
6. SUB-SCANNING SECTION 3. Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1).

6.1 Sub-scanning Motor (ME1)

6.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation

n Removing Procedure
FPDC0620.AI

<NOTE>
When replacing the sub-scanning motor (ME1), also replace the ME1 driver
board at the same time.

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover
• Front cover
• Right cover

2. Remove the duct.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-37
 MC-38
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
The shaft of the sub-scanning motor (ME1) is D cut.
When tighten the screw (WP3x6), tighten so that the shaft touches the D cut
surface vertically.

4. Replace the ME1 driver board.

{MC:10.6_ME1 Driver Board}

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-38
 MC-39
6.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Sub-scanning Motor
(ME1)
After replacing the sub-scanning motor (ME1), check and adjust the film conveyance
as follows.

1. Turn ON the power of the equipment and print the grid and flat pattern.
2. Measure the sub-scanning length C and C' of the grid and flat pattern
and check that it is within the specified value.
{MU:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}

3. If the measured value is outside the specified value, adjust the sub-
scanning speed using “[7-5] Sub Scan.>”
{MU:3.3 [7-5]_Sub Scan.>}

4. Print the grid and flat pattern again and check that the sub-scanning
length is within the specified value.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-39
 MC-40
6.2 Flywheel 3. Remove the flywheel removal tool.
n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover FPDC0621.AI

• Right cover
• Left cover
<NOTE>
As the removal method of the flywheel is the same for the left and right
sides, only the removal method of the left side is described.

2. Remove the flat belt (left).

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-40
 MC-41
4. Remove the flywheel. n Reinstalling Procedure
<NOTE> Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
By rotating the TP4x8 screw, the tool and flywheel can be removed together.
• Use the tool only for removing the flywheel. It need not be used for
reinstalling.
• The flat belt has a front and back side. When attaching it to the flywheel, place
the marked side out.

• The flywheel has a front and back side. Make sure that the tapered side of the
flywheel coincides with the tapered side of the shaft attaching portion.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-41
 MC-42
6.3 Platen Roller 5. Remove the timing belt.
n Removing Procedure
CAUTION
The platen roller is easily deformed or scratched by pressure FPDC0622.AI

and /or impact. Pay attention to the following.

• Do not hold the platen roller tightly with your hands or place it so that it is
subjected to unnecessary pressure.
• Store the platen roller in its packaging until just before installation.
• Do not remove the protective sheet until the sub-scanning motor (MC1) has
been installed.

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Open the head assembly.

3. Remove the cleaning roller.
4. Remove the flywheel (left).
{MC:6.2_Flywheel}

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Be careful not to scratch the platen roller with the edge of the side frame
when removing the platen roller.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-42

6. Remove the platen roller.
MC-43
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• The new platen roller is wrapped in protective sheet to avoid scratches to the
roller surface.
• When reinstalling the removed platen roller or a platen roller not wrapped in
protective sheet, wrap the platen roller with protective sheet and secure with
tape.

n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Rotate the flywheel by hand, and check that the timing belt, platen roller, etc. are
rotating normally.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-43
 MC-44
7. HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 3. Open the head assembly and remove the cleaning roller.
4. Remove the cover.
7.1 Head Cooling Fan (FANP1, FANP2)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover.

2. Remove the cover.
FPDC0720.AI

5. Close the head assembly.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-44
 MC-45
6. Remove the head cooling fan (FANP1, FANP2).
CAUTION
As the flexible cable may damage when the head cooling fan (FANP1/FANP2) is
in the removed state, do not open/close the head assembly.
{MC:8.1_Thermal Head Assembly/n Precautions on Opening/Closing the Head
Assembly}

<REMARKS>
With the head cooling fan and duct attached, as the thermal head will be
positioned to the shaft side, it will not touch the head pressurization arm assembly
during open/close of the thermal head. When they are removed, as the thermal
head will be moved to the head pressurization arm assembly side, it will touch the
assembly.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
Reinstall the head cooling fan (FANP1, FANP2) so that the label faces inside.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-45
 MC-46
7.2 Head UP/Down Drive Motor (MH1) 5. Remove the head up/down drive motor (MH1).
n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover and head up/down section

cover. FPDC0721.AI

2. Remove the operation panel.

{MC:10.1_Operation Panel}

3. Open the head assembly.

<NOTE>
If the head assembly for resolving problems such as motor malfunctions,
etc. does not open, rotate the motor gear with the hand as shown in the
following figure, release the pressure on the head assembly, and open it.

n Reinstalling Procedure
4. Remove the cleaning roller. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-46
 MC-47
7.3 Head Pressurization Arm Assembly n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Removing Procedure <NOTE>
Before reinstalling the head pressurization arm assembly and closing the head
1. Remove the upper cover and head up/down section assembly, move the head pressurization arm to the home position.
cover. FPDC0722.AI

2. Open the head assembly and remove the cleaning

roller.

3. Remove the head pressurization arm assembly.

n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
When the head pressurization assembly has been replaced, perform a check/
adjustment of the thermal head pressure.
{MU:3.3 [7-10]_NipAdjustment>}

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-47
 MC-47.1
7.4 Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head
Pressure
When the parts shown in the figure below have been replaced, perform a check/
adjustment of the thermal head pressure.
{MU:3.3 [7-10]_NipAdjustment>}

{SP:07B_HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 2}

{SP:08_HEAD}

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-47.1
 MC-47.2
BLANK PAGE

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-47.2
 MC-48
8. HEAD Contact Points
l
Open and close making sure the following parts do not touch each other.
Bracket (Two locations)
8.1 Thermal Head Assembly

8.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation

n Precautions on Opening/
Closing the Head Assembly FPDC0810.AI

CAUTION
Opening/closing the head assembly with the head cooling fan assembly and
duct removed may cause the flexible cable of the thermal head assembly to
touch the head pressurization arm assembly bracket and damage. To open/
close the head assembly in this state, perform the following procedure.

Position of the Head Cooling Fan Assembly and Duct

l

Flexible cable

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-48
 MC-48.1
Open/Close Procedure
l 2. With the thermal head assembly moved to the shaft side, open/close
the head assembly.
1. Hold the heat sink portion of the thermal head and shaft of the
equipment body, and move the thermal head assembly to the shaft To open:
side. Loosen hands grasping the shaft just before the thermal head assembly moves
onto the arm.

<REMARKS>
With the head cooling fan and duct attached, as the thermal head will be
positioned to the shaft side, it will not touch the head pressurization arm assembly
during open/close of the thermal head. When they are removed, as the thermal
head will be moved to the head pressurization arm assembly side, it will touch the
assembly. To prevent this, there is a need to move the thermal head assembly to
To close:
the shaft side by hand. Loosen hand grasping the shaft just after the thermal head assembly moves past
the head pressurization arm assembly bracket.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-48.1
 MC-48.2
n Removing Procedure 3. Remove the duct.
CAUTION
• Handle the thermal head carefully to avoid burns as the
head is very hot immediately after recording.
• When handling the thermal head, be sure to use a wristband to discharge
static electricity in your body. Otherwise static electricity in the body may
cause damage to the electronic parts on the boards.
• To prevent image deterioration, do not clean the thermal head using
procedures other than those specified.
• Place the removed thermal head in a location free of dust.
• Do not touch the recording portion of the thermal head with bare hands.

1. Remove the upper cover.

2. Remove the cover.

4. Open the head assembly and remove the cleaning roller.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-48.2
 MC-48.3
5. Remove the cover. 7. Remove the head cooling fan assembly.

6. Close the head assembly.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-48.3
 MC-48.4
8. Disconnect the connectors and grounding cable. 10. Remove the thermal head assembly.

CAUTION
When removing the thermal head, be careful not to apply shock to the head
position adjusting cam.

9. Open the head assembly.

CAUTION
When opening/closing the head assembly, be careful not to damage the flexible
cable of the thermal head assembly.
{MC:8.1_Thermal Head Assembly/nPrecautions on Opening/Closing the Head
Assembly}

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-48.4
 MC-49
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
When installing the thermal head, secure the cables at the positions shown in
the figure below.
Left Side
l

Right Side
l

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-49
 MC-50
8.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Thermal Head n Adjusting the Head Power Voltage
After replacing the thermal head, perform the following adjustment.
1. Remove the upper cover, right cover, and front cover.
n Transferring the Head Power Voltage
2. Remove the control box front cover.
1. Check that the data storage folder is already created in the PC for
servicing.
<REMARKS>
The data storage folder can be created by creating a “Establish name_Printer
name” folder using DPX2 Copy Tool available in the main unit software CD-R.
Data strage folder: “C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish
name_Printer name”
{MU:4.1.5_Creating the Data Storage Folder}

2. Connect the network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to

which the equipment is connected.

3. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.

{MU:4.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Web Server
Start)}
{MU:4.2.3_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Starting PC-
Utility) }

4. Register the PC for servicing.

{MU:4.4 [PC1-1-4]_Registration service pc}

5. Copy the files in the Head Data FD to the “Head” folder (C:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\
Head) in the PC for servicing.
Transfer the head data to the equipment by executing “[PC4-3] Head
Data” of the PC-Utility.
{MU:4.4 [PC4-3]_Head Data>}

6. End the PC-Utility.

7. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-50
 MC-51
3. Remove the duct. 4. Remove the control box right cover.

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-51
 MC-52
5. Connect the connector and grounding cable from power supply unit 7. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
disconnected at the step 4.
8. After the equipment sets into the standby mode, start the M-Utility.
9. Display the head power voltage setting value at “[8-3] Head Voltage.>”
and note it down.
{MU:3.3 [8-3]_HEAD Voltage>}

10. Set the head power voltage output to ON at “[8-4] 16VH Ope.>”.
{MU:3.3 [8-4]_16VH Ope.>}

11. Measure head power voltage at the voltage measuring point on the
right side of the control box.

6. Remove the interlock release tool. Insert the tool into the head cover
interlock.
{Safety Precaution}

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-52
 MC-53
12. Check that the measured value is within ±0.05V of the value set. n Checking the Image
If the voltage value is different from the value set, rotate the voltage adjustment
volume on the right side of the power supply unit to adjust. 1. Execute “[4-1] AUTO F.D.C.>” using the M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [4-1]_AUTO F.D.C.>}

2. Execute “[4-2] Check Density”, and check that there are no problems
in the image density.
{MU:3.3 [4-2]_Check Density>}

3. Print grid and flat pattern, and check that there are no unevenness and
scratches on the output film.
{MU:3.3 [3-3]_Grid&FlatPat.>}

4. Clear the total counter to zero.

{MU:3.3 [1-1-6-3]_Set Odo-cnt>}

5. End the M-Utility.

6. Start the PC-Utility again.
7. Backup the individual data.
{MU:4.4 [PC2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
13. Set the head power voltage output to OFF.
8. End the PC-Utility.
n Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head Pressure
9. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
1. Perform a check/adjustment of the thermal head pressure. 10. Reinstall the removed parts to the equipment.
{MU:3.3 [7-10]_NipAdjustment>}

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-53
 MC-54
9. FILM RELEASE SECTION 5. Remove the density measurement light-sensing board (PDD15A)
attaching stay.
<NOTE>
9.1 Density Measurement Light- When reinstalling the stay, be careful not to damage the platen roller.
Sensing Board (PDD15A)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover. FPDC0910.AI

2. Open the head assembly.

3. Remove the cleaning roller.
4. Remove the head up/down section cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-54
 MC-55
6. Remove the density measurement light-sensing board (PDD15A).
<NOTE>
• Be careful not to lose the filter.
• Be careful not to scratch or dirty the filter.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-55
 MC-56
9.2 Density Measurement Light- 5. Remove the density measurement light-sensing board (PDD15A)
attaching stay.
Emitting Board (LED15A)
<NOTE>
n Removing Procedure When reinstalling the stay, be careful not to damage the platen roller.

1. Remove the upper cover. FPDC0911.AI

2. Open the head assembly.

3. Remove the cleaning roller.
4. Remove the head up/down section cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-56
 MC-57
6. Remove the density measurement light-emitting board (LED15A). n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Press the LED cover of the density measurement light-emitting board (LED15A)
against the position shown below and secure.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-57
 MC-58
10. CONTROLLER n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

10.1 Operation Panel

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper cover and ejection cover.

2. Remove the operation panel.
FPDC1020.AI

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-58
 MC-59
10.2 Controller Cooling Fan (FANK1) n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Removing Procedure <NOTE>
Reinstall the controller cooling fan (FANK1) so that the label faces outside.
1. Remove the following covers.
• Upper cover FPDC1021.AI

• Ejection cover
• Front cover

2. Remove the CPU board.

{MC:10.3_CPU Board}

3. Move the SND board.

{MC:10.4_SND Board}

4. Remove the controller cooling fan (FANK1).

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-59
 MC-60
10.3 CPU Board 3. Remove the CPU board assembly.
CAUTION 4. Remove the THC board, image memory board, lithium battery, and CF
from the CPU board assembly.
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing
maintenance of boards and optical units.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage
to electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
FPDC1022.AI

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover
• Ejection cover
• Front cover

2. Remove the control box upper cover.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
After replacing the CPU board, system date and time must be set using the
M-Utility.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-60
 MC-61
10.4 SND Board 4. Remove the SND board.
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing
maintenance of boards and optical units.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage
to electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
FPDC1023.AI

10.4.1 Removal/Reinstallation

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover
• Ejection cover
• Front cover

2. Remove the CPU board.

{MC:10.3_CPU Board}

3. Remove the control box front cover.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-61
 MC-61.1
10.4.2 Precautions on Replacement of SND Board 1. Disconnect the relay cable.
When replacing the P, R, T version SND board with board after the S or U versions,
there is a need to remove the relay cable attached with diode.
<REMARKS>
• The P, R, T versions were connected with relay cable attached with diode, but
versions S, U or later are mounted in the SND board.
• At shipment, equipment mounted with SND boards of versions S, U or later are not
connected with this relay cable attached with diode.

List of equipment shipped mounted with P, R, T version SND boards

l
66580013 66920070 67020083 67120176 67120189 67120282
66580014 66920071 67020084 67120177 67120190 67120283
66480015 66920072 67020085 67120178 67120255 67120284
66580016 66920073 67020086 67120179 67120256 67120285
66920061 66920074 67020087 67120180 67120257 67120341
66920062 66920075 67020088 67120181 67120258 67120342
66920063 66920076 67120089 67120182 67120259 67120343
66920064 66920077 67120090 67120183 67120276 67120344
66920065 66920078 67120171 67120184 67120277 67120347
66920066 66920079 67120172 67120185 67120278 67120356
66920067 66920080 67120173 67120186 67120279 67120357
66920068 67020081 67120174 67120187 67120280 67120405
66920069 67020082 67120175 67120188 67120281 -

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-61.1
 MC-61.2
BLANK PAGE

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-61.2
 MC-62
10.5 Power Supply Unit 3. Remove the control box front cover.
10.5.1 Removal/Reinstallation

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

FPDC1024.AI

• Upper cover
• Ejection cover
• Front cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Remove the control box upper cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-62
 MC-63
4. Remove the power supply unit.
CAUTION
To prevent misconnection at the replacement of the power supply unit, do not
engage or disengage the faston terminal of the power supply unit.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-63
 MC-64
10.5.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Power Supply Unit 3. Remove the duct.
After replacing the power supply unit, head power voltage (+16VH) must be adjust+.
to the voltage of the thermal head installed, adjust the +16VH as follows.

1. Remove the upper cover, right cover, and front cover.

2. Remove the control box front cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-64
 MC-65
4. Remove the control box right cover. 5. Connect the connector and grounding cable from power supply unit
disconnected at the step 4.

6. Remove the interlock release tool. Insert the tool into the head cover
interlock.
{Safety Precaution}

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-65
 MC-66
7. Turn ON the power of the equipment. 12. Check that the measured value is within ±0.05V of the value set.
If the voltage value is different from the value set, rotate the voltage adjustment
8. After the equipment sets into the standby mode, start the M-Utility. volume on the right side of the power supply unit to adjust.

9. Display the head power voltage setting value at “[8-3] Head Voltage.>”
and note it down.
{MU:3.3 [8-3]_HEAD Voltage>}
→ The head power voltage setting value is displayed on the main body control
panel.

10. Set the head power voltage output to ON at “[8-4] 16VH Ope.>”.
{MU:3.3 [8-4]_16VH Ope.>}
→ The head power voltage is output.

11. Measure head power voltage at the voltage measuring point on the
right side of the control box.

13. Set the head power voltage output to OFF.

14. End the M-Utility.
15. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
16. Reinstall the removed parts to the equipment.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-66
 MC-67
10.6 ME1 Driver Board 3. Remove the ME1 driver board.
n Removing Procedure
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing FPDC1025.AI

maintenance of boards and optical units.

Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage
to electronic parts on the boards and optical units.

<NOTE>
When replacing the ME1 driver board, replace the sub-scanning motor (ME1) at
the same time.

1. Remove the upper cover and front cover.

2. Remove the control box front cover.

4. Replace the sub-scanning motor (ME1).

{MC:6.1_Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1)}

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-67

10.7 Lithium Battery
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY
AN INCORRECT TYPE.DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES
ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
MC-68
3. Replace the lithium battery.
<NOTE>
Manufacturer: SANYO Electric Co., Ltd.
Model No.: CR17335SE-CN18
FPDC1026.AI Part No.: 125N0150

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cover
• Ejection cover
• Front cover

2. Remove the CPU board.

{MC:10.3_CPU Board}

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
After replacing the lithium battery, system date and time must be set using the
M-Utility.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-68
 MC-69
10.8 CF (Compact Flash Memory) 10.8.2 Recovery of CF
If the CF of the equipment currently running damages, refer to “13. RECOVERY
PROCEDURE FOR CF (COMPACT FLASH MEMORY)” and recover the contents.
10.8.1 Removal/Reinstallation {MC:13_RECOVERY PROCEDURE FOR CF (COMPACT FLASH MEMORY)}

n Removing Procedure <NOTE>

FPDC1027.AI

• Physically damaged CF cannot be recovered.

1. Remove the following covers. • As all settings are initialized after recovery, there is a need to restore the
• Upper cover equipment individual data.
• Ejection cover
• Front cover

2. Remove the CPU board.

{MC:10.3_CPU Board}

3. Remove the CF.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-69
 MC-70
10.9 Control Box 4. Remove the control box rear cover.
n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following covers.

• Upper cove FPDC1036.A

• Ejection cover
• Front cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Remove the CPU board.

{MC:10.3_CPU Board}

3. Remove the control box front cover.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-70
 MC-71
5. Disconnect the connector and grounding cable from the control box.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-71
 MC-72
6. Remove the control box.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-72
 MC-73
10.10 Head Voltage Switching Relay 4. Remove the head voltage switching relay assembly.
Assembly

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the covers. FPDC1037.A

• Upper cover
• Ejection cover
• Front cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Remove the CPU board.

{MC:10.3_CPU Board}

3. Remove the control box.

{MC:10.9_Control Box}

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-73
 MC-74
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
After reinstalling the head voltage switching relay assembly, clamp the input
clamp to the relay (at two places).
At this time, arrange the output cable from the relay so that it comes on top of
the input cable, and clamp so that the tie band of the input cable comes to the
center of two clamps.

<REMARKS>
• Depending on the time of the manufacturing lot, the input cable may be clamped in
some equipment and not in others at shipment. In whichever case, clamp it when
reinstalling the head voltage switching relay assembly.
• If not clamped as instructed above, the relay will not operate correctly due to
vibrations from the magazine shutter close operations during printing, resulting in
inconsistent density.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-74
 MC-75
11. SHEET-FEEDER UNIT Part Name Part Shape/Position Refer to

As the disassembly procedure of the sheet-feeder unit is more or less the same as
the equipment main body, only parts with different procedures are indicated here. {MC:4.3_Suction
Suction cup
For other parts with the same procedure, refer to the disassembly procedure of the Cup}
equipment. If the difference lies only in the removal of covers, descriptions are omitted
here. FPDC1114.AI

Refer to the procedure of the equipment or the following table to check if procedures
are described in the following for parts of the sheet-feeder unit.

Part Name Part Shape/Position Refer to

Bellows {MC:4.4_Bellows}

FPDC1115.AI

Cover {MC:1_COVER}

{MC:4.5_Removal
FPDC1110.AI
Removal drive cam
Drive Cam}

{MC:3.1_Film Size FPDC1116.AI

Film size detection sensor as- Detection Sensor

sembly (SA21, SA22, SA23) Assembly (SA11/
SA12/SA13)}
{MC:4.6_Removal
Removal conveyance roller
FPDC1111.AI

lower
Conveyance Roller
Lower}

{MC:11.1_Sheet- FPDC1117.AI

feeder Unit Film

Film removing motor (MB21)
Removing Motor
(MB21)}
{MC:4.7_Suction Cup
Suction cup arm HP detection
FPDC1112.AI

sensor (SB12)
Arm HP Detection
Sensor (SB11)}

FPDC1118.AI

{MC:4.2_Suction Cup
Suction cup arm
Arm}
{MC:4.8_Film Surface
Film surface detection sensor
FPDC1113.AI (SB22)
Detection Sensor
(SB12)}
FPDC1119.AI

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-75
 MC-76
Part Name Part Shape/Position Refer to

{MC:4.9_Suction Cup
Suction cup arm upper dead- Arm Upper Deadpoint
point detection sensor (SB23) Detection Sensor
(SB13)}
FPDC1120.AI

{MC:11.2_Sheet-
feeder Unit
Positioning guide assembly
Positioning Guide
Assembly}
FPDC1121.AI

{MC:5.2_Reference
Reference plate drive motor
(MD22)
Plate Drive Motor
(MD12)}
FPDC1122.AI

{MC:5.3_Reference
Reference plate assembly
Plate Assembly}

FPDC1123.AI

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-76
 MC-77
11.1 Sheet-feeder Unit Film 3. Remove the film removing motor (MB21).
Removing Motor (MB21)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following equipment main body covers. FPDC1112.AI

• Upper cover
• Front cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Remove the following sheet-feeder unit covers.

• Lower front cover
• Lower right cover
• Lower left cover

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-77
 MC-78
11.2 Sheet-feeder Unit Positioning 3. Remove the conveyance roller.
Guide Assembly

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the following equipment main body covers. FPDC1121.AI

• Upper cover
• Front cover
• Right cover
• Left cover

2. Remove the following sheet-feeder unit covers.

• Lower front cover
• Lower right cover
• Lower left cover
• Lower rear open/close cover
• Lower rear cover

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-78
 MC-79
4. Remove the positioning guide assembly.

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-79
 MC-80
12. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT
SOFTWARE
The main unit software is provided on CD-R. The DPX2 Copy Tool included in this
main unit software CD-R is required for installing the main unit software.

n Installing the Main Unit Software

There are two ways of installing the main unit software.
1) Installing from the PC for servicing:
Copy the main unit software in the main unit software CD-R to the FTP folder of the
PC for servicing, and install in the equipment via the network.
{MC:12.1_Installing from the PC for Servicing}
2) Installing from the USB memory
Copy the main unit software in the main unit software CD-R to the USB memory,
and connect the USB memory to the equipment and install.
This enables the software to be installed without the need to bring the PC for
servicing to the place where the equipment is installed.
{MC:12.2_Installing from the USB Memory}

n Types of Main Unit Software Installations

• Version upgrade:
The concerned files excluding individual data of the currently installed software are
overwritten.
• Full installation:
The concerned files including individual data of the currently installed software are
overwritten.

CAUTION
Do not perform settings, etc. of the equipment during the installation of the
main unit software.

<NOTE>
• As performing full installation will clear the individual data in the CF (Compact
Flash memory), the individual data needs to be installed after completing full
installation. Use the latest individual data for installation.
• In version upgrades, individual data will be preserved.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-80
 MC-81
12.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing 3. Enter the drive name into [Input drive of FTP-Home].
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software using the PC for
servicing. Use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder in the PC for servicing
4. Click [Copy] of [Please specify the drive of FTP-Home].
when performing full installation or version upgrading of the equipment.
<REMARKS>
To prepare for times when the PC for servicing does not have a CD drive or the main
unit software CD-R was not brought to the place where the equipment is installed, it is
recommended that “12.1.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing” is
performed beforehand at the service center or service station beforehand, etc.

12.1.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing

Insert the latest main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for servicing,
and copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.

1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.

2. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
→ “DPX2CopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX2 Copy Tool] window is
displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPX2CopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it. → The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000). When completed, the [Success.] screen appears.
<NOTE>
5. [OK]
“DPX2CopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPX2CopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on 6. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX2 Copy Tool] window.
the desktop, etc.
7. Unload the main unit software CD-R form the CD-ROM drive.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-81

12.1.2 Upgrading the Version from the PC for Servicing
1. Copy the latest main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing.
{MC:12.1.1_Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing}
2. Check that the preparations of the PC for servicing have been
completed.
{MU:4.1_Work Preparations of PC for Servicing}
MC-82
7. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].
<REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{IN:3.2.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}

3. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which 8. Close the logout window.
the equipment is connected.

4. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
5. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
{MU:4.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Web Server
Start)}
{MU:4.2.3_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Starting PC-
Utility)}
6. [Upgrading] → [Execute]
9. Reboot the equipment so that the software is upgraded.
10. Check that the equipment whose software version has been upgraded
starts and operates normally.
11. Shutdown the PC for servicing.
12. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
to which the equipment is connected.

→ The main unit software is transferred (version upgrade) in the equipment.

When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-82
 MC-83
12.1.3 Full Installation from the PC for Servicing 7. [Full Install] → [Execute]
1. Copy the latest main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing.
{MC:12.1.1_Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing}

2. Check that the preparations of the PC for servicing have been

completed.
{MU:4.1_Work Preparations of PC for Servicing}

3. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which

the equipment is connected.

4. Turn ON the power of the equipment.

5. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
{MU:4.1.3_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Web Server
Start)}
{MU:4.1.3_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Starting PC-
Utility)}
→ The main unit software is transferred (full installation) in the equipment.
6. If the PC for servicing does not contain the latest individual data, When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.
import the individual data from the equipment.
{MU:4.4 [PC2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
8. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].
<REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{IN:3.2.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}

9. Close the logout window.

10. Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit
software become effective.

11. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.

{MU:4.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Web Server
Start)}
{MU:4.2.3_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Starting PC-
Utility)}

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-83
 MC-84
12. Restore the individual data saved in the PC for servicing prior to the 23. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
full installation. to which the equipment is connected.
{MU:4.4 [PC2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
<REMARKS>
The individual data restored will become effective after the equipment is
rebooted.

13. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].
<REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{IN:3.2.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}

14. Close the logout window.

15. Reboot the equipment so that the individual data becomes effective.
16. Start the M-Utility during initialization.
17. Execute [1-1-1.Set Date>] of the M-Utility to set the system date and
time.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-1]_Set Date>}

18. Execute [1-1-6-3.Set Odo-cnt>] of the M-Utility to set the film counter.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-6-3]_Set Odo-cnt>}

19. Execute [1-1-6-4.Set Rem.Films>] of the M-Utility to set the remaining

number of films.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-6-4]_Set Rem. Films>}

20. End the M-Utility.

21. Check that the equipment which has been fully installed starts and
operates normally.

22. Shutdown the PC for servicing.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-84
 MC-85
12.2 Installing from the USB Memory 12.2.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the USB Memory
Insert the latest main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for servicing,
Using the USB memory, perform full install or version upgrade of the main unit and copy the main unit software to the USB memory.
software. It is recommended that the main unit software is copied to the USB memory
<NOTE> beforehand at the service center or service station, etc.
• The USB memory corresponding to the following cannot be used. Use an
appropriate USB memory.
1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
• USB memory formatted in a file system other than FAT/FAT32 2. Connect the USB memory to the USB port of the PC for servicing.
• USB memory sold as having security features
• USB memory, of which the entirety or the “DRYPIX2000” folder and its 3. Insert the main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive.
contents are compressed → “DPX2CopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX2 Copy Tool] window is
• USB memory, of which the entirety or the “DRYPIX2000” folder and its displayed.
contents are encrypted
<REMARKS>
• USB memory, of which the entirety or the “DRYPIX2000” folder and its
contents are secured by authentication such as passwords If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPX2CopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
Also ensure that the Windows DOS command [CHKDSK/F] (with “Fix” option) and start it.
be not executed for the files in the USB memory. Otherwise, the equipment
may encounter file access problems. <NOTE>
• The USB memory is set with the volume label.
“DPX2CopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive.
{MU:4.1.2_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing} “DPX2CopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on
the desktop, etc.
<REMARKS>
• The USB memory of 128 MB is sufficient.
• To shorten the transfer time, use of the USB 2.0 specifications USB memory is
recommended.
• To install the main unit software from the USB memory, there is no need to connect
the PC for servicing to the network.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-85
 MC-86
4. Enter the drive name into [Input drive of USB].
5. Click [Copy] of [Copy for upgrading], or [Copy for full installation].
CAUTION
Do not remove the USB memory while copying (while the USB memory access
lamp is blinking).

→ The main unit software is copied to the USB memory. When completed, the
[Success] screen appears.

6. [OK]
7. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX2 Copy Tool] window.
8. Remove the CD-R from the PC for servicing.
9. Display the [Safely Remove Hardware] screen from the task tray of
the PC for servicing, execute the cancellation procedure of the USB
memory connected to ensure removal can be carried out safely.

10. Remove the USB memory from the PC for servicing.

11. Shutdown the PC for servicing.
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-86
 MC-87
12.2.2 Upgrading the Version from the USB Memory 7. Execute version upgrading.
1. Copy the main unit software to be upgraded to the USB memory. [Are you sure?] →
{MC:12.2.1_Copying the Main Unit Software to the USB Memory} → The data in the USB memory is loaded in the equipment. When installation
2. Turn ON the power of the equipment. completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.

3. Start the M-Utility during initialization.
4. Remove the LAN cover and open the blind plate.
CAUTION
When touching the blind plate of the USB connector, be sure to use a wristband
to ground yourself. Otherwise the equipment may not operate properly.
5. Connect the USB memory to the USB connector of the CPU board.
8. Check that "Completed.” is displayed and remove the USB memory.
<REMARKS>
After executing M-Utility operations, no commands need to be executed for
removing the USB memory.
9. Reinstall the removed plate and the LAN cover.
10. Reboot the equipment so that the software is upgraded.
11. Check that the equipment whose software version has been upgraded
starts and operates normally.

6. Select [2-1-1.Upgrade>].
[0.RETURN>] → → [2.USB Memory>] → → [2-1.

Installation>] → → [2-1-1.Upgrade>] →

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-87
 MC-88
12.2.3 Full Installation from the USB Memory 7. Select [2-1-2.Full install>].
1. Copy the main unit software to be fully installed in the USB memory. [0.RETURN>] → → [2.USB Memory>] → → [2-1.
{MC:12.2.1_Copying the Main Unit Software to the USB Memory}
Installation>] → → [2-1-1.Upgrade>] → → [2-1-2.Full
2. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
install>] →
3. Start the M-Utility during initialization.
8. Execute full installation.
4. Remove the LAN cover and open the blind plate.
CAUTION
[Are you sure?] →
→ The data in the USB memory is loaded in the equipment. When installation
When touching the blind plate of the USB connector, be sure to use a wristband
completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.
to ground yourself. Otherwise the equipment may not operate properly.
9. Check that "Completed.” is displayed and remove the USB memory.
5. Connect the USB memory to the USB connector of the CPU board. <REMARKS>
After executing M-Utility operations, no commands need to be executed for
removing the USB memory.

10. Reinstall the removed plate and the LAN cover.

11. Reboot the equipment so that changes of the main unit software
become effective.

12. Start the M-Utility during initialization.

13. Execute [2-2-2.Load from USB>] of the M-Utility to restore the
individual data saved prior to the full installation.
{MU:3.3 [2-2-2]_Load from USB>}
<REMARKS>
6. Execute [2-2-1.Save to USB>] of the M-Utility, and save the individual The individual data restored will become effective after the equipment is
data before full installation in the USB memory. rebooted.
{MU:3.3 [2-2-1]_Save to USB>}
<REMARKS> 14. Reboot the equipment so that the individual data becomes effective.
If the latest individual data has already been saved in the USB memory, skip this
step.
15. Start the M-Utility during initialization.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-88
 MC-89
16. Execute [1-1-1.Set Date>] of the M-Utility to set the system date and
time.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-1]_Set Date>}

17. Execute [1-1-6-3.Set Odo-cnt>] of the M-Utility to set the film counter.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-6-3]_Set Odo-cnt>}

18. Execute [1-1-6-4.Set Rem.Films>] of the M-Utility to set the remaining

number of films.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-6-4]_Set Rem. Films>}

19. End the M-Utility.

20. Check that the equipment which has been fully installed starts and
operates normally.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-89
 MC-90
13. RECOVERY PROCEDURE FOR CF 13.1 When not Using the Main Unit Software
(COMPACT FLASH MEMORY) CD-R at the Installed Place
If the CF damages while the equipment is operating, it can be recovered by writing the 13.1.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing
main unit software.
To prepare for times when the PC for servicing does not have a CD drive or the main
There are two ways of recovering the CF. unit software CD-R is not available at the installed place, perform this procedure at the
1) Copy the main unit software from the CD-R to the HD of the PC for servicing, and service center, service station, etc. occasionally.
write it from the PC for servicing to the CF at the place where the equipment is
installed without using the CD-R. 1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
(CD-R → PC for servicing → CF)
{MC:13.1_When not Using the Main Unit Software CD-R at the Installed 2. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
Place} → The DPX2 Copy Tool starts up automatically, and [DPX2 Copy Tool] window is
2) Write the main unit software directly in the CF from the main unit software CD-R. displayed.
(CD-R → CF)
If the PC for servicing does not have a CD drive, or if the main unit software CD-R
is not available at the installed place, perform method 1).
{MC:13.2_When Using the Main Unit Software CD-R at the Installed Place}
<NOTE>
• Physically damaged CF cannot be recovered.
• As all settings are initialized after recovery, there is a need to restore the
equipment individual data.
• With the method in 1), instead of using the main unit software copied to the
FTP folder of the PC for servicing, copy from the separate CD-R.

<REMARKS>
To prepare for times when the PC for servicing does not have a CD drive or the main
unit software CD-R was not brought to the place where the equipment is installed, it is
recommended that “13.1.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing” be
performed at the service center or service station beforehand.
3. End the DPX2 Copy Tool by clicking the [EXIT] button.
4. Open Windows Explorer on the PC for servicing.
5. Create a new folder anywhere in the PC for servicing.
6. Copy and paste all the contents of the CD-R to this folder.
7. Remove the main unit software CD-R from the PC for servicing.
8. Shutdown the PC for servicing.
This ends the process to copy the main unit software to the PC for servicing.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-90
 MC-91
13.1.2 Transferring the Main Unit Software to CF 5. Enter the drive name of the compact flash reader in [Input drive of CF-
Perform this procedure at the place where the equipment is installed. Writer].
1. Remove the CF from the equipment. 6. Click [Copy] of [CD->CF (Recovery CF)].
2. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
3. Insert the CF into the compact flash reader connected to the PC for
servicing.

4. Double-click the “DPX2CopyTool.exe” in the main unit software copied

to the PC for servicing, and start the DPX2 Copy Tool.

→ The main unit software is copied and CF is recovered. When copy ends
normally, the “Success” message will be displayed.

7. [OK]
8. Return the CF to the equipment and restore the equipment individual
data.

9. Reboot the equipment, and check that it operates normally.

10. Shutdown the PC for servicing.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-91
 MC-92
13.2 When Using the Main Unit Software CD-R at 5. Enter the drive name of the compact flash reader in [Input drive of CF-
Writer].
the Installed Place
6. Click [Copy] of [CD->CF (Recovery CF)].
1. Remove the CF from the equipment.
2. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
3. Insert the CF into the compact flash reader connected to the PC for
servicing.

4. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
→ The DPX2 Copy Tool starts up automatically, and [DPX2 Copy Tool] window is
displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start up automatically, double-click the “DPX2CopyTool.exe” in the
CD-R.

→ The main unit software is copied and CF is recovered. When copy ends
normally, the “Success” message will be displayed.

7. [OK]
8. Return the CF to the equipment and restore the equipment individual
data.

9. Reboot the equipment, and check that it operates normally.

10. Remove the main unit software CD-R from the PC for servicing.
11. Shutdown the PC for servicing.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-92
 MC-93
14. CF IMAGE ACQUISITION TOOL (CF- n Preparations

Tool Frontend)
If the PC for servicing does not have a CD-ROM drive, copy CF-Tool Frontend to the
PC beforehand.
If the tool can be directly started from the CD-R on a PC at the place where this
The CD-R of main unit software version V2.3 or later also contains the CF image equipment is installed, this procedure is not required.
acquisition tool “CF-Tool Frontend”.
CF-Tool Frontend is a maintenance support tool for acquiring all CF contents as image
data and saving them on files in the PC for servicing. 1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
Use this tool when errors occur during the startup of the equipment, to collect
information on this equipment that has failed to start.
2. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
n Operating Environment → The DPX2 Copy Tool starts up automatically, and the [DPX2 Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
l OS
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) or Windows XP Professional (SP2)
l External Devices
CD-ROM drive, compact flash reader

3. End the DPX2 Copy Tool by clicking the [EXIT] button.

4. Open the Windows Explorer on the PC for servicing.
5. Create a new folder anywhere in the PC for servicing.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-93
 MC-94
6. Copy/paste the following three files on the CD-R into this folder. n Configuration of CF-Tool Frontend
• CFTool_FrontEnd.exe
• rawreadnt.exe
• rawritent.exe

• [Image File (Raw Data)] : Enter the path and name of the file storing the data read
from CF.
• [...] : Use is prohibited
• [CF Drive] : Select the drive letter of the compact flash reader.
• [Read] : Read the data from CF and save the image data in the
file specified at [Image File (Raw Data)].
• [Write] : Write button (Use is prohibited)
<NOTE>
Clicking [Write] writes files forcibly into the drive selected at [CF Drive]. So be
careful not to click it.

7. Remove the CD-R from the PC.

8. Shutdown the PC for servicing.
This ends copy of CF-Tool Frontend to the PC for servicing.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-94
 MC-95
n Acquiring CF Images

1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.

2. Insert the CF removed from the equipment into the compact flash
reader connected to the PC for servicing.

3. Double-click “CFTool_FrontEnd.exe” in the PC for servicing.

→ CF-Tool Frontend starts.

4. Enter the name of the file storing the CF image at [Image File (Raw
Data)] (enter the full path).
<NOTE>
• Do not use the [...] button.
• Enter the filename in the full path.

5. Select the drive letter of the compact flash reader at [CF Drive].
6. [Read]

→ The CF image will be read. When reading completes, the “Success” message
will be displayed.
<REMARKS>
As the CF image is about 128 MB, it may take several minutes to read with
USB2.0.

7. [OK]
016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MC-95
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) All pages

04.27.2012 07 Revised (FM6040) 53

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL

REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

(DRYPIX Lite)

016-201-07E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

04.27.2012 FM6040
 MC-1
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, <INSTRUCTIONS>
The diagrams in this manual display the CHECK and FIT ON icons where necessary.
REPLACEMENTS, AND ADJUSTMENTS When removing/reinstalling, following these icons.

• CHECK icon
: When reinstalling removed parts, this is indicated if
This chapter does not describe parts which require no special note or adjustments in reinstalling positions must be checked or adjusted.
removal and installation.
This symbol is shown in illustrations of parts removal
For details on the removal of these parts, refer to the Service Parts List.
CHECK procedures. Whenever this is shown, be sure to refer to “n
Also follow the precautions below when performing inspections, replacements, and
CHECK/Adjusting procedure”.
adjustments of parts.

WARNING • FIT ON icon : When installing parts, this is indicated if alignment to the
boss is required. However, this is not indicated on bosses
To prevent electrical shocks, be sure to turn OFF the power of this equipment used for enhancing assembly and preventing assembly
before starting work. accidents.

WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warnings and cautions described in “SAFETY PRECAUTION”.
{SAFETY PRECAUTION}

CAUTION
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance
of boards. Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to
electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
• Never remove the screws painted in red.

<INSTRUCTIONS>
• The screws painted in yellow must be adjusted after the installation of parts. When
installing parts, follow the check/adjustment procedure provided.
• Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable
and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts with
retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws
removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon installation.
After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states,
follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining
screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-1
 MC-2
1. COVER 1.2 Left Cover

n Removing Procedure
1.1 Right Cover
1. Remove the left cover.
n Removing Procedure Head cover

1. Remove the right cover. Left cover

Head cover

Right cover

#1
5-TP3x6

#1 F0044.ai
5-TP3x6
n Reinstalling Procedure
F0043.ai
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-2
 MC-3
1.3 Head Cover 1.4 Upper Tray Cover

n Removing Procedure n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the right cover. 1. Remove the operation panel.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover} {MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.1_Operation Panel}

2. Remove the head cover. 2. Remove the Stay.

Head cover
Stay
#1 #1
DT3x6 2-BR3x12

#2
2-DT3x6

F0046.ai

F0045 ai
3. Remove the Upper Tray Cover.
n Reinstalling Procedure #2
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. 2-DT3x6 Upper tray
cover

#1
Extension
tray

F0047 ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-3
 MC-4
1.5 Lower Tray Cover 1.6 Front Cover

n Removing Procedure n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the upper tray cover. 1. Remove the lower tray cover.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.4_Upper Tray Cover} {MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.5_Lower Tray Cover}

2. Remove the lower tray cover. 2. Remove the Front cover.

Lower tray
cover Front cover

#1
2-DT3x6

F0048.ai
#1
n Reinstalling Procedure 4-TP3x6 F0049.ai

Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. n Reinstalling Procedure

Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-4
 MC-5
1.7 Upper Rear Cover 1.8 Rear Cover

n Removing Procedure n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the head cover. 1. Remove the upper rear cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.3_Head Cover} {MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.7_Upper Rear Cover}

2. Remove the upper rear cover. 2. Remove the rear cover.

Upper rear cover
Rear cover

#1
4-DT3x6 #1
4-TP3x6

F0050.ai
F0051 ai

n Reinstalling Procedure n Reinstalling Procedure

Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-5
 MC-6
1.9 Lower Right Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit) 1.10 Lower Left Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit)

n Removing Procedure n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the front cover. 1. Remove the front cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.6_Front Cover} {MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.6_Front Cover}

2. Remove the lower right cover. 2. Remove the lower left cover.
Lower left cover

Lower right cover #1

4-TP3x6

#1
5-TP3x6

F0053.ai F0054.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure n Reinstalling Procedure

Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-6
 MC-7
1.11 Lower Front Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the lower right cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.9_Lower Right Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit)}

2. Remove the lower left cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.10_Lower Left Cover (Sheet-Feeder Unit)}

3. Remove the lower front cover.

Lower front
cover

#1
4-TP3x6

F0055.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-7
 MC-8
2. FRAME 4. Remove the head cover interlock switch (SK12).
<NOTE>

2.1 Head Cover Interlock Switch (SK12) To disconnect the faston terminal of micro-switch, press the unlocking latch
located on the connector as shown below.

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the operation panel. Faston terminal

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.1_Operation Panel} Latch

2. Remove the stay.

#1 Stay
4-DT3x8
F0117.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
When connecting the faston terminal, ensure that they are facing as shown below.
Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to disconnect when performing periodic
maintenance, etc.

F0001 ai

3. Remove the head cover interlock switch (SK12) assembly.

SK12 Assy

#1 COM NO
DT3x8

Latch
F0118.ai

F0002.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-8
 MC-9
2.2 Rear Cover Interlock Switch (SK21) <NOTE>
To disconnect the faston terminal of micro-switch, press the unlocking latch
located on the connector as shown below.
n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the lower rear open/close cover.

Faston terminal
Latch

#1 F0117.ai

Lower rear
open/close cover
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
F0056 ai

When connecting the faston terminal, ensure that they are facing as shown below.
2. Remove the rear cover interlock switch (SK21). Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to disconnect when performing periodic
maintenance, etc.

#1
DT3x6

COM NO

#2
CN (COM)
CN (NO) Latch
F0118.ai

SK21

F0057.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-9
 MC-10
3. MAGAZINE SET SECTION 3.2 Magazine Shutter Open/Close Mechanism

n Removing Procedure
3.1 Film Size Detection Sensor Assembly (SA11/
SA12/SA13) 1. Remove the left cover.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.2_Left Cover}
n Removing Procedure 2. Remove the gear fixing cover.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.5_Removal Drive Cam}
1. Remove the positioning guide assembly.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly} 3. Remove the magazine shutter open/close mechanism.
2. Remove the film size detection sensor assemblies (SA11/SA12/SA13).

#1
Spring

#1
2-TP3x6 #2 #3
Connectors x 3 DT3x6
Sensor assembly

#4
Cover Magazine shutter open/close mechanism
F0058.ai
#2
E3
n Reinstalling Procedure F0060.ai

Reinstall in the reverse order of removal

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-10
 MC-11
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<REMARKS>
Assemble the magazine shutter open/close mechanism as shown below.

F0061.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-11
 MC-12
4. REMOVAL SECTION 4. Disconnect the cables from the frame.
RLY32A

4.1 Film Removing Motor (MB11)

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the power supply unit.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.6_Power Supply Unit}

2. Remove the power switch and AC inlet.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.9_Power Switch and AC Inlet}
#1
3. Disconnect the cables from the RLY32A board. Cable
(SL1 14.8V2, SL1 14.8V GND2)
RLY32A F0063.ai

5. Remove the frame.

#1
5-DT3x6

#1
Cable
(CN1, X3, X4, X5, X6)

F0062.ai

Frame

F0064.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-12
 MC-13
6. Remove the film removing motor (MB11) assembly. 4.2 Suction Cup Arm

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the positioning guide assembly.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly}

2. Remove the film conveyance guide.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.7_Film Conveyance Guide}

#2
3. Move the suction cup arm.
#1 MB1
2-M4x8 Cable (MB1) <REMARKS>
When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as
F0065.ai
shown in the following figure.

7. Remove the film removing motor (MB11).

#1
2-M4x8

Shock absorber
F0007 ai

MB1

F0066.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

#1
Suction cup arm
F0067.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-13
 MC-14
4. Remove the suction cup arm. 4.3 Suction Cup

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the suction cup arm.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.2_Suction Cup Arm}
#3
2-DT3x6
2. Remove the suction cup.

#1
Clamps x 3

#2
CN (SB12)

Suction cup arm

#2
Suction cup
#1
Nozzle

F0069 ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
F0068.ai
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
After reinstallation, move the suction cup arm to the home position before inserting the
magazines.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-14
 MC-15
4.4 Bellows nCHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Check for air leak by the following steps.
n Removing Procedure 1. Suction the film with the suction cup manually and check that the film
does not drop off for about 60 seconds.
1. Remove the suction cup arm.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.2_Suction Cup Arm} 2. Press the suction cup arm against the film until the bottommost
position of the actuator for detection SB12 passes the SB12 detection
2. Remove the suction cup unit. point.
#1 #2
3. Remove the bellows. [Press] Suction cup arm [Lift] Suction cup arm

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• If the bellows has been removed, be sure to replace the O-ring.
• When reinstalling, insert the second groove from the top of the bellows into the
plate.
• Leave a clearance of about 0.5 to 1.0 mm between the bellows anf holder.
Film
2nd groove
Actuator Suction
Bellows 16 mm

Sense
point
Clearance about 0.5 to 1.0 mm
Holder SB12

FPDC0407.AI
FPDC0408 AI

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-15
 MC-16
4.5 Removal Drive Cam 3. Disconnect the cables from the gear fixing cover.
DETAIL A #1
n Removing Procedure Clamp x6
Cable
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm to the home
position and then begin work.
If the suction cup arm assembly is not at the home position during the work, a phase
shift occurs.

<REMARKS>
The removing procedure of the removal drive cam is common between the left and
right sides. A
This section describes the removing procedure for the left side only.
Cover

1. Remove the left cover.

F0071.ai

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.2_Left Cover}

4. Remove the bracket under the gear fixing cover.
2. Disconnect the spring and brackets from the gear fixing cover.
DETAIL A #2 Cover
Bracket DT3x6

A
#1 #2
Bracket E2
#1 DT3x6 F0072.ai
Cover
Spring
F0070 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-16
 MC-17
5. Remove the two gears and gear fixing cover. 6. Remove the removal drive cam together with the crank.
#4
<NOTE>
Link
When removing the removal drive cam, be careful not to drop or lose the suction
cup arm assembly bearing.

Bearing

Crank
#1
2-DT3x6

#6
Gear 2
#6
Gear 1

#5
#2 #3
cover
E6 Bearing F0073 ai

Removal drive cam

F0074 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-17
 MC-18
n Reinstalling Procedure 2. Trial fit the Gear 1 and the Gear 2 to adjust the position of the Gear 3.
<INSTRUCTIONS> #1: Align the hole on the removal drive can with the hole on the Gear 1.
#2: Align the rib on the Gear 1 with the l mark on the Gear 2.
When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm to the home
position and then begin work. #3: Align the rib on the Gear 2 with the rib on the Gear 3.
If the suction cup arm assembly is not at the home position during the work, a phase
shift occurs. Removal drive cam Removal drive cam

<REMARKS> Gear 3
The removing procedure of the removal drive cam is common between the left and
right sides.
This section describes the removing procedure for the left side only.

#1
1. Reinstall the crank and the removal drive cam as well to the removal
section.
Bearing Gear 1 Gear 2
#2
#3

Crank
F0076.ai

3. Remove the trial fit Gear 1 and the Gear 2.

Removal drive cam

F0074.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-18
 MC-19
4. Align the rib position of gear 1 to the l mark on gear 2, and reinstall to 6. Check that each gear is reinstalled properly.
the gear fixing cover. #1: The hole on the removal drive cam and the hole on the Gear 1 must be
<NOTE> aligned.
#2: The rib on the Gear 1 and the l mark on the Gear 2 must be aligned.
At this time, the two holes on gear 1 should be at the following positions (upper).
#3: The rib on the Gear 2 and the rib on the Gear 3 must be aligned.
Gear 1 Hole
Gear 2

Gear 2
Gear 1
Cover
Removal drive cam Removal drive cam
Gear 3
Rib/Mark
F0075.ai

5. Remove the two gears and gear fixing cover.

#1

Gear 1 Gear 2
#2
#3

#3
Gear 1
2-DT3x6
F0078 ai
Gear 2
7. Reinstall the spring and cover and bracket.
8. Reinstall the cable to the gear fixing cover.

Cover
#2 #1
E6 Bearing F0077.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-19
 MC-20
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 4.6 Removal Conveyance Roller (Lower)
After reinstalling the removal drive cam, check that the suction cup arm moves
smoothly. Also visually check that the suction cup arm is horizontal. n Removing Procedure
<REMARKS>
When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as shown 1. Remove the positioning guide assembly.
in the following figure. {MC (DRYPIX Lite):5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly}

2. Remove the magazine shutter open/close mechanism.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):3.2_Magazine Shutter Open/Close Mechanism}
<NOTE>
When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm assembly to
the upper deadpoint first.

3. Remove the removal conveyance roller (lower).

F0007.ai #1 #2 #3
2-E5 Gear x 2 Bearing x 2

<NOTE>
After checking the operation, move the suction cup arm to the home position.

#4
Removal conveyance roller
(lower)
F0079.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-20
 MC-21
4.7 Film Conveyance Guide 3. Remove the connector (SB12).
n Removing Procedure 4. Remove the connectors (SD11, SD13).
5. Remove the film conveyance guide.
1. Remove the positioning guide assembly. 3.#2 3.#1
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly} CN (SB12) Clamp x3

2. Remove the screws securing the film conveyance guide.

5.
#1 Guide
4-DT3x6

Guide

F0080 ai

4.#1 4.#2 4.#3

Clamp x6 CN (SD11) CN (SD13) F0081.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-21
 MC-22
4.8 Conveyance Entrance Sensor (SD11) 4.9 Reference Plate HP Detection Sensor
(SD13)
n Removing Procedure
n Removing Procedure
1. Remove the film conveyance guide.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.7_Film Conveyance Guide} 1. Remove the film conveyance guide.
2. Remove the conveyance entrance sensor (SD11). {MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.7_Film Conveyance Guide}

2. Remove the reference plate HP detection sensor (SD13).

Guide

#1
SD13

Guide

#1
SD11 F0085.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

F0086.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-22
 MC-23
4.10 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor 3. Remove the suction cup arm HP detection sensor (SB11).
(SB11)
#1
SB11
n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the film conveyance guide. Bracket

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.7_Film Conveyance Guide}

2. Remove the suction cup arm HP detection sensor (SB11) together with
its bracket.

F0083.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
A Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

DETAIL A

#2
Clamp x1

#1
CN (SB11)

#3 SB11 Bracket
2-DT3x6 F0082.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-23
 MC-24
4.11 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB12) 4.12 Suction Cup Arm Upper Deadpoint Detection
Sensor (SB13)
n Removing Procedure
n Removing Procedure
1. Remove the suction cup arm.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.2_Suction Cup Arm} 1. Remove the right cover.
2. Remove the film surface detection sensor (SB12). {MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}

2. Remove the film conveyance guide.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.7_Film Conveyance Guide}

3. Move the suction cup arm.

<REMARKS>
When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as
shown in the following figure.

#1
SB12 F0007 ai
F0084 ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

#1
Suction cup arm
F0067.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-24
 MC-25
4. Remove the suction cup arm upper deadpoint detection sensor (SB13)
together with its bracket.

#2
DT3x6

SB13 #1
Bracket CN (SB13)
F0087.ai

5. Remove the suction cup arm upper deadpoint detection sensor (SB13).
Bracket

#1
SB13

F0088 ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-25
 MC-26
5. CONVEYOR SECTION 4. Remove the conveyance roller.
<NOTE>

5.1 Positioning Guide Assembly Remove the #6 vertical conveyance roller only when the sheet-feeder unit (option)
is installed.

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the rear cover. #3

Gear cover
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.8_Rear Cover}

2. Remove the left cover. #1

Clamp
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.2_Left Cover}

3. Remove the vertical conveyor guide assembly. #5 #4 #2

Bearing x 2 Gear x 2 DT3x6
<NOTE>
Only when the sheet-feeder unit (option) is reinstalled, implement this procedure.

#1
2-DT3x6 #6
Vertical
#2 conveyance
Guide assembly roller
F0089.ai #7 #8 #9
2-TP3x6 Conveyance guide Conveyance roller F0090.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-26
 MC-27
5. Remove the cable routed along the vertical conveyance guide. 7. Remove the positioning guide assembly.

#1
Guide
Reference plate

Cable

#1 #3
Clamp x15 F0091 ai
2-TP3x6

6. Remove the vertical conveyance guide. #4

Guide assembly
#2
CN (MD12) F0092.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
When installing the positioning guide assembly, be sure to move the left and right
reference plates inside and then install.
Guide
2-DT3x6
F0003.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-27
 MC-28
5.2 Conveyor section motor (MD11) 5.3 Reference Plate Drive Motor (MD12)

n Removing Procedure n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the right cover. 1. Remove the positioning guide assembly.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover} {MC (DRYPIX Lite):5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly}

2. Remove the conveyor section motor (MD11). 2. Remove the reference plate operation motor (MD12).
#1
CN (MD11)

#1
Clamp x2

MD12 #2
2-N3x6
#2
MD11 2-DT3x6
F0101.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

F0093.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-28
 MC-29
5.4 Reference Plate Assembly n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
n Removing Procedure <NOTE>
Reinstall so that the gears engage with the reference plate assembly pressed against
1. Remove the positioning guide assembly. to the left and right sides.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):5.1_Positioning Guide Assembly}

2. Remove the reference plate assembly.

#1
2-DT3x6

#2
Conveyance guide

#4
Bearing x 2

Reference plate assembly #3

2-E4
F0094.ai F0095 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-29
 MC-30
5.5 Film Edge Sensor Assembly 5. Remove the film edge sensor assembly.
#2
n Removing Procedure DT3x6 #1 Guide
PS3x8
#1
1. Open the head cover. PS3x8

2. Open the head assembly. #2

3. Remove the cleaning roller. A
DT3x6

4. Remove the platen guide.

Guide
DETAIL A DETAIL B

Edge sensor
Assembly
Edge sensor
Assembly
F0097 ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
#1 #2 Check that there are no dusts adhered to the slit of the encoder plate.
CN2-J CN1-J F0096.ai

n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
After replacing the film edge sensor assembly, perform the compensation of the film
edge sensor position.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC10-7-1]_Edge Sen. Posi.}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-30
 MC-31
5.6 Conveyance exit sensor (SD12) 3. Remove the conveyance exit sensor (SD12) together with its bracket.
n Removing Procedure
DETAIL A
#2 #1
SD12
DT3x6 CN (SD12)
1. Remove the film edge sensor assembly.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):5.5_Film Edge Sensor Assembly}

2. Remove the guide.

A

DETAIL A #1
Guide

Bracket
F0115.ai

4. Remove the conveyance exit sensor (SD12).

SD12

Bracket
F0114.ai

F0116.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-31
 MC-32
6. SUB-SCANNING SECTION 3. Disconnect the sub-scanning motor (ME1) connector.

6.1 Sub-scanning Motor (ME1)

6.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the film conveyance guide. #1

ME1
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):4.7_Film Conveyance Guide} CN (ME1)

2. Manually rotate the film removing motor (MB11) to move the suction F0008 ai

cup arm frontward.

4. Release the cables.
<REMARKS>
When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as
shown in the following figure.

F0007 ai
DETAIL A

#1
Arm #2 #1 #3 Cable
F0006.ai
Bracket DT3x6 4-Clamp
F0012 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-32
 MC-33
5. Remove the flywheel. 7. Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1) along with the damper.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):6.2_Flywheel}
#1
6. Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1) assembly along with the flat WP3x6
(3B)
belt.

ME1

Damper

DETAIL A
ME1 Assembly
#2
2-TP3x6 F0014.ai

8. Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1).

#1
2-TP3x6

Damper
#1 Belt
3-DT3x6 Connector
F0013.ai

ME1

F0015.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-33
 MC-34
n Reinstalling Procedure 6.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Sub-scanning Motor
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. (ME1)
<NOTE> After replacing the sub-scanning motor (ME1), check and adjust the film conveyance
as follows.
The shaft of the sub-scanning motor (ME1) is D cut.
When tighten the screw (WP3x6), tighten so that the shaft touches the D cut surface 1. Turn ON the power of the equipment and print the grid and flat pattern.
vertically.
WP3x6 D cut surface 2. Measure the sub-scanning length C and C' of the grid and flat pattern
(3B) and check that it is within the specified value.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}

3. If the measured value is outside the specified value, adjust the sub-
scanning speed using “[PC10-5] Sub Scan.>”
ME1
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.3 [PC10-5]_Sub Scan.}

4. Print the grid and flat pattern again and check that the sub-scanning
length is within the specified value.

Damper

F0016.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-34
 MC-35
6.2 Flywheel 3. Remove the bracket.
<REMARKS> #2
The flywheel removal tool is not installed on this equipment. Bracket
When performing this procedure, prepare one in advance as a tool for servicing.

n Removing Procedure
#1
1. Remove the left cover. 2-DT3x6

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.2_Left Cover} #4

Bracket
2. Remove the tension coil spring for belt tension.

#3
2-DT3x6
F0010 ai

4. Release the flat belt.

#1 #1
Spring Belt

F0009.ai

F0011 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-35
 MC-36
5. Release the cables. 6. Remove the flywheel.
<NOTE>
By rotating the TP4x8 screw, the tool and flywheel can be removed together.

#1 Jig

#2
TP4x8
A

DETAIL A

Flywheel

#2 #1 #3 Cable
Bracket DT3x6 4-Clamp
F0098.ai
F0017.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-36
 MC-37
n Reinstalling Procedure 6.3 Platen Roller
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE> n Removing Procedure
• Use the tool only for removing the flywheel. It need not be used for reinstalling. CAUTION
• The flat belt has a front and back side. When attaching it to the flywheel, place the
marked side out. The platen roller is easily deformed or scratched by pressure and /or impact.
Pay attention to the following.
Marked side • Do not hold the platen roller tightly with your hands or place it so that it is
subjected to unnecessary pressure.
• Store the platen roller in its packaging until just before installation.
• Do not remove the protective sheet until the platen roller has been installed.

1. Remove the flywheel.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):6.2_Flywheel}

2. Remove the right cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}

3. Remove the timing belt.

F0119 ai

• The flywheel has a front and back side. Make sure that the tapered side of the
flywheel coincides with the tapered side of the shaft attaching portion.

Flywheel

Shaft

#2 #1
Belt Spring

F0099 ai

4. Remove the film edge sensor assembly.

F0120 ai

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):5.5_Film Edge Sensor Assembly}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-37
 MC-38
5. Remove the platen roller. n Reinstalling Procedure
<INSTRUCTIONS> Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Be careful not to scratch the platen roller with the edge of the side frame when
removing the platen roller. • The new platen roller is wrapped in protective sheet to avoid scratches to the roller
surface.
#2 #1 • When reinstalling the removed platen roller or a platen roller not wrapped in
Pulley E5 protective sheet, wrap the platen roller with protective sheet and secure with tape.

n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Rotate the flywheel by hand, and check that the timing belt, platen roller, etc. are
rotating normally.

Platen roller

#5
DT3x6

#6
Plate spring

#4 #3
Bearing holder TP3x6
F0100 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-38
 MC-39
7. HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 3. Remove the head cooling fan (FANP1).
#1
4-PS3x8 FANP1
#2
7.1 Head Cooling Fan (FANP1) Bracket

n Removing Procedure

1. Open the head cover.

2. Remove the head cooling fan (FANP1) assembly.
#2
CN (FANP1)
#1 FANP1 Assembly
2-TP4x8
F0019.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

F0018.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-39
 MC-40
7.2 Head UP/Down Drive Motor (MH1) 4. Remove the motor assembly along with the gear assembly.
Gear Assembly Motor Assembly
n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the right cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}

2. Open the head assembly.

Head assembly

#1
3-DT3x6
#2
CN (MH1)
F0022 ai

5. Remove the bracket.

#1
4-DT3x6
F0020.ai Bracket

3. Remove the bracket assembly.

Bracket assembly

Motor assembly

F0023.ai

#1 #1
TP3x6 3-DT3x6

F0021.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-40
 MC-41
6. Remove the four gears. 8. Remove the head up/down drive motor (MH1).
#1 #3
Plain Bearing 2-Gear #1
Damper

#2
Shaft
Motor (MH1)

#4 F0026.ai

Shaft
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
#5
2-Gear

F0024 ai

7. Remove the bracket assembly.

Bracket assembly

#1
2-TP4x8

Motor assembly

F0025.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-41
 MC-42
7.3 Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head
Pressure
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC10-8]_Nip Adjust}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-42
 MC-43
8. HEAD 3. Remove the duct.
A
8.1 Thermal Head Assembly

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the rear cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.8_Rear Cover}

2. Remove the head cooling fan (FANP1) assembly.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):7.1_Head Cooling Fan (FANP1)}

DETAIL A #1 #2
4-DT3x6 4-DT3x6

Duct (Top) Duct (Lower)

F0102.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-43
 MC-44
4. Remove the cable connectors (H1-CN1 through H1-CN5) and the two 5. Remove the thermal head assembly.
FG cables.
<NOTE>
#1 Thermal head assembly When putting down the thermal head assembly temporarily, face the sensor side
H1-CN1 ~ H1-CN5, FG,HH1 ~ HH2 H1-CN2
upward.
FG H1-CN4
Thermal head assembly
H1-CN3 H1-CN5 H1-CN1

F0029 ai

#1
Thermal head assembly
FG
HH2 HH1

F0030 ai

F0028.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-44
 MC-45
8.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Thermal 8.2.2 Adjusting the Head Power Voltage
Head 1. Remove the right cover.
After replacing the thermal head, perform the following adjustment. {MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}

8.2.1 Transferring the Head Power Voltage 2. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
1. Check that the data storage folder is already created in the PC for 3. After the equipment sets into the standby mode, start the PC-Utility.
servicing.
4. Display the head power voltage setting value at “16VH” and note it
<REMARKS> down.
The data storage folder can be created by creating a “Establish name_Printer {MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC8-4]_16VH}
name” folder using DPX2 Copy Tool available in the main unit software CD-R.
Data strage folder: “C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish 5. Set the head power voltage output to ON at “Head Voltage.”.
name_Printer name” {MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC8-3]_Head Voltage.}
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.4_Setting Grouping Symbols}
6. Measure head power voltage at the voltage measuring point on the
right side of the control box.
2. Connect the network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to
which the equipment is connected. DETAIL A
3. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the
Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}

4. Register the PC for servicing.

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC1-1-5]_Registration service pc} (-)

5. Copy the files in the Head Data CD-R to the “Head” folder (C:\Program (+)
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\ A
Head) in the PC for servicing.
Transfer the head data to the equipment by executing “[PC4-4] Head
Data” of the PC-Utility. F0103.ai

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC4-4]_Head Data}

6. End the PC-Utility.

7. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-45

7. Check that the measured value is within ±0.05V of the value set.
If the voltage value is different from the value set, rotate the voltage adjustment
volume on the right side of the power supply unit to adjust.
Head voltage
adjustment volume
MC-46
8.2.4 Checking the Image
1. Execute “Automatic Density Correction” using the U-Utility.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):2.3 [U-1]_Automatic Density Correction}
2. Execute “Check Density” using the PC-Utility, and check that there are
no problems in the image density.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC7-2]_Check Density}

3. Print grid and flat pattern, and check that there are no unevenness and
scratches on the output film.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC6-2]_Grid & Flat}

4. Clear the total counter to zero.

Screwdriver 5. Backup the individual data.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC2]_Transfer Indv. Data}

6. End the PC-Utility.

Power supply unit
7. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
F0104 ai

8. Set the head power voltage output to OFF. 8. Reinstall the removed parts to the equipment.
8.2.3 Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head Pressure

1. Perform a check/adjustment of the thermal head pressure.

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC10-8]_Nip Adjust}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-46
 MC-47
9. FILM RELEASE SECTION 3. Remove the density measurement light-sensing board (PDD28A)
attaching stay.
<NOTE>
9.1 Density Measurement Light-Sensing Board When reinstalling the stay, be careful not to damage the platen roller.
(PDD28A)
#2 #1
#3
Clamp x2 Connector
n Removing Procedure 2-DT3x6
Stay
1. Open the head cover.
2. Open the head assembly.

F0105 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-47
 MC-48
4. Remove the density measurement light-sensing board (PDD28A). 9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board
<NOTE> (LED28A)
• Be careful not to lose the filter.
• Be careful not to scratch or dirty the filter. n Removing Procedure
PDD28A
#1 1. Open the head cover.
2-TP3x6
2. Open the head assembly.
3. Remove the density measurement light-sensing board (PDD28A)
attaching stay.

Filter <NOTE>
When reinstalling the stay, be careful not to damage the platen roller.

#2 #1
#3
Clamp x2 Connector
2-DT3x6
Stay

F0042.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

F0105 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-48
 MC-49
4. Remove the density measurement light-emitting board (LED28A). n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Guide <INSTRUCTIONS>
Press the LED cover of the density measurement light-emitting board (LED28A)
against the position shown below and secure.
LED28A
Bracket
#1
2-DT3x6 #5
2-TP3x6
#3
#1
Clamp
LED Cover F0032 ai

#4
CN

#2
LED Assembly

F0031.AI

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-49
 MC-50
10. CONTROLLER 10.2 Control Box
CAUTION
10.1 Operation Panel Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards and optical units.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
n Removing Procedure on the boards and optical units.

1. Remove the right cover.

n Removing Procedure
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}

2. Remove the left cover. 1. Remove the front cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.2_Left Cover} {MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.6_Front Cover}

3. Remove the operation panel. 2. Remove the stay.

Panel #1
#2
2-DT3x6
CN (PNL28A-CN1)

Stay
#1
4-TP3x6

F0107.ai

F0106 ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-50
 MC-51
3. Remove the control box cover. 5. Remove the control box.

Cover

5.#2 CN
#1 (1,4~7,9,11,12~20,,22~24,26~28)
8-DT3x6

F0108.ai

4. Remove the screws securing the control box.

5.#1
CN
(THH6)

4.
Control Box 4-DT3x6
F0039.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-51
 MC-52
10.3 Controller Cooling Fan (FANK1) 3. Remove the control box cover.
n Removing Procedure
Cover
1. Remove the front cover.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.6_Front Cover}

2. Remove the stay.

#1
2-DT3x6

#1
8-DT3x6

F0108.ai

Stay
4. Remove the controller cooling fan (FANK1) together with its bracket.

#2 FANK1
F0107.ai
2-DT3x6

#1
CN20

F0109.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-52
 MC-53
5. Remove the controller cooling fan (FANK1). 10.4 CPU Board
Bracket
CAUTION
• Replace the CPU board if the lithium battery has worn out.
• Return the old CPU board to the Parts Center (factory).
Label • Improper replacement of the battery may result in explosion. Do not remove
or replace the lithium battery by itself.
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
• Make sure to follow this procedure as there is a possibility of fire or explosion
unless the above procedure is followed.

n Removing Procedure
BR3x20
1. Remove the CF.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.8_CF (Compact Flash Memory)}

2. Remove the SND board.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.5_SND board}

3. Remove the CPU board assembly.

4. Remove the spacer, fan from the CPU board assembly.
F0110.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure CPU Board #2

Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. #1 Fan
<NOTE> 4-Spacer

Reinstall the controller cooling fan (FANK1) so that the label faces outside.

F0033.ai

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-53
 MC-54
n Reinstalling Procedure 10.5 SND Board
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
<NOTE>
After replacing the CPU board, system date and time must be set using the PC-Utility. Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards and optical units.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards and optical units.

n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the control box.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.2_Control Box}

2. Remove the SND board along with the CPU board.

#1
SND / CPU Board

Box

F0034.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-54
 MC-55
3. Remove the SND board. 10.6 Power Supply Unit
#1
SND Board CN21 n Removing Procedure

1. Remove the control box.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.2_Control Box}

2. Remove the support.

#2
7-DT3x6 Support
4-TP3x6
CPU Board

F0035.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

#1
DT3x6
F0111.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-55
 MC-56
3. Pull out the power supply unit. 4. Remove the power supply unit.
Power supply
Power Supply DETAIL A

#1
#1
AL-L
2-DT3x6
AL-N
AL-E

DETAIL B
#2
(A) : SL5 +12V (G) : SL5 +24V
(B) : SL5 +12V GND (H) : SL5 +24V GND
(C) : SL4 +3.3V (I) : MVMJ-CN1
F0112.ai
(D) : SL4 +3.3V GND (J) : SL1-CN1
(E) : SL4 +5V (K) : SL1 14.8V 2, SL1 +14.8V
(F) : SL4 +5V GND (L) : SL1 14.8V GND2, SL1 +14.8V GND

(C) (D)
(J)
(A)

(B) (K)

(I)
(L)
(G)

(H)
(F) (E)
F0036.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-56
 MC-57
10.7 RLY32A Board 10.8 CF (Compact Flash Memory)

n Removing Procedure 10.8.1 Removal/Reinstallation

1. Remove the power supply unit. n Removing Procedure

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.6_Power Supply Unit}
1. Remove the right cover.
2. Remove the RLY32A Board.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}
DETAIL A
#1 2. Remove the CF.
#2 CN1,
4-DT3x6 X1, X2,
X3, X4,
X5, X6

DETAIL A

RLY32A
A

#1
CF
F0038.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

F0113.ai

n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-57
 MC-58
10.8.2 Recovery of CF 10.9 Power Switch and AC Inlet
If the CF of the equipment currently running damages, refer to “11. RECOVERY
PROCEDURE FOR CF (COMPACT FLASH MEMORY)” and recover the contents.
n Removing Procedure
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):11_RECOVERY PROCEDURE FOR CF (COMPACT FLASH
MEMORY)}
<NOTE>
1. Remove the control box.
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):10.2_Control Box}
• Physically damaged CF cannot be recovered.
• As all settings are initialized after recovery, there is a need to restore the equipment 2. Remove the cable connected to the power switch.
individual data.
3. Remove the box containing the power switch and the AC inlet.

A
DETAIL A

2.
AC Switch AL-L
3. #2 3. #1 AL-N
AC Inlet 3-DT3x6 N4x8
F0040 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-58
 MC-59
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
When connecting the cable connectors to the power switch and AC inlet, refer to the
following figure.

AC Switch
AC Inlet

AC Switch

LINE-L (B) LOAD-L (B)

LINE-N (W) LOAD-N (W)

L (B) N/N

AC Inlet FG / E F0041 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-59
 MC-60
11. RECOVERY PROCEDURE FOR CF 11.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC
(COMPACT FLASH MEMORY)} for Servicing
When the CF becomes defective while the equipment is running, it can be restored by <NOTE>
writing the main unit software. If the PC for servicing does not have a CD-ROM drive or the CD-R containing the
<NOTE> main unit software is not available at the site of installation, perform this procedure
beforehand on the service center or service station, etc.
• The CF cannot be restored if it is physically damaged.
• As all settings are initialized after restoring, there is a need to restore the equipment
individual data. 1. Connect the CF reader/writer to the PC for servicing.
• Do no use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.
Instead copy from the CD-R containing the main unit software. 2. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
3. Insert the CD-R with the main unit software into the CD-ROM drive.
l What to Prepare → The DPX Lite Copy Tool automatically starts, and the [DPX Lite Copy Tool]
• CD-ROM drive screen appears.
• CF reader/writer
4. Click [EXIT] to quit the DPX Lite Copy Tool.
5. Open Windows Explorer of the PC for servicing.
6. Create a new folder anywhere in the PC for servicing.
7. Copy and paste “CFImage.img” and “DDWin.exe” in the CD-R
containing the main unit software to this new folder.

8. Remove the CD-R containing the main unit software from the PC for
servicing.
This ends the procedure for copying the software to the PC for servicing.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-60
 MC-61
11.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF 6. Click [Choose file].
1. Remove the CF from the equipment. 7. Select [All files] at [Files of type], and select [CFImage.img].
2. Insert the CF into the CF reader/writer connected to the PC for 8. Click [Open].
servicing.

3. Double-click “DDWin.exe” in the PC for servicing to start DD for

Windows.

4. Click [Choose disk].

→ The [Choosing a disk] screen appears.

5. Select the CF reader/writer disk, and click [OK]. 9. Click [Restore].

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-61

10. Click [Yes] twice until writing starts.
→ When writing ends, the following screen appears.
MC-62
15. Start the equipment and then the PC-Utility.
16. Restore the equipment data in the equipment.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC2]_Transfer Indv. Data}

17. Reboot the equipment and check that it operates normally.

11. Click [Verify].

12. Click [Yes] twice until comparison starts.
→ When comparison ends, the following screen appears.

13. Execute [Safely Remove Hardware] and remove the CF.

14. Reinstall the CF in the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-62
 MC-63
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MC-63
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.31.2006 00 New release (FM4832) All pages

03.24.2006 01 Revised (FM4903) All pages
06.30.2006 01 Revised (FM4924) All pages
08.31.2006 02 Revised (FM4958) 4, 8, 15, 17, 21, 25, 26, 28, 37, 41,

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 10.02.2006 03 Revised (Change of corporate name and
42, 54-113
77, 78
corporate logo) (FM4992)
10.18.2006 03 Revised (FM5036) 12, 41-43, 43.1, 43.2, 112-115
02.15.2007 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software 7, 8, 10-17, 22, 23, 23.1, 23.2, 24,
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5075) 25, 25.1, 25.2, 26, 27, 33, 34, 34.1,
34.2, 35, 38-40, 45, 46, 50, 51,
55-61, 61.1, 61.2, 62-73, 73.1, 73.2,
74-123
03.31.2008 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software 4, 7, 10, 12, 28, 41, 45, 47, 59, 59.1,

SERVICE MODE (MU) (DRYPIX 2000) version V2.2, V2.3 and V2.4, etc.) (FM5332) 59.2, 62, 63, 65, 73.2, 74, 75, 77.1,
77.2, 82, 91, 98, 101-103, 107,
107.1, 107.2, 108, 118, 120, 123-125
01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) Cover

016-201-06E DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 MU-1
1. OUTLINE OF SERVICE MODE 1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode
This manual indicate the keys of the operation panel as follows.

1.1 Transition of Modes in DRYPIX 2000

The service mode provides functions required for troubleshooting and maintenance.
The service mode consists of the following three modes. Of these U-Utility and
M-Utility are called main unit service mode.
U-Utility (User-Utility) Mode
l
Mode for the user to perform normal maintenance operations such as density
correction, etc.
M-Utility (Maintenance-Utility) Mode
l
Mode for starting M-Utility on the operation panel, and performing settings,
troubleshooting, and maintenance operations of this equipment.
This mode is intended only for service engineers.
PC-Utility Mode
l
Mode for starting PC-Utility on the PC for servicing connected to the network, and
performing settings, troubleshooting, and maintenance operations of this equipment.
PC-Utility is stored in the equipment main body and can be started by operating via
the PC for servicing. To start up PC Utility, Internet Explorer must be installed as a
browser on the PC for servicing.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-1
 MU-2
1.3 Operations of Main Unit Service Modes 1.4 Details of Message Display
Each menu of the U-Utility and M-Utility has a tree structure classified by function. The following shows details of the operation panel during M-Utility.
Selecting a menu item at a certain menu displays the menu below.
If > is displayed at the end of a menu name, it means that there are menu items in the
lower tree level.

<ENTER> Key (
l )
Executes the displayed menu and confirms the entered setting value. Moves to the
menu in the lower tree level if present.

<CANCEL> Key (
l )
Pressing this key while a menu is being selected or while execution results are
displayed moves to the menu in the upper tree level.

<UP> key (
l )/<DOWN> Key( )
If there are multiple items in the same tree level, pressing these keys displays the
upper or lower item.
If the setting entered is a numeral, pressing these keys will display it in the ascending
order or descending order. Characters will be displayed as follows English upper case
↔ English lower case ↔ numbers ↔ symbols in the ascending order/descending
order.
[←] (Termination Symbol)
l
Symbol used when entering characters in the M-Utility command. If the number of
characters set is less than the number of inputtable characters, enter [←] and set as a
termination character.
<REMARKS>
The following table shows 20h to 7Eh characters of the 1-byte code table. The SP in
the table means space. In the utility of this equipment, pressing the <UP> key moves
the character entered from the top left to right of the table.

Alphabets/Numerals
SP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c
d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r
s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 <NOTE>
Symbols
[Wait..] and [Completed.] may not be displayed for some menus.
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + - . / :
< = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ←

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-2
 MU-3
1.5 Note on Executing Service Mode
Turning the power OFF while writing in the CF (compact flash) or USB memory, or
while exchanging data with the PC for servicing may damage the data.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-3
 MU-4
2. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY) Other than the U-Utility menu, the following U-Utility menu which functions with the
press of operation panel keys is also available.
The U-Utility functions are intended for both the user and service engineer.
[8] Counter Display
<NOTE>
[9] Counter Reset
Menus which can be executed differ according to the state before transition.
[10] Automatic Density Correction

<REMARKS>
2.1 U-Utility Menu Tree
[4. Film Output>] is displayed only when it is set to “Enable” by M-Utility. It is not
U-Utility displayed by default because its default setting is “Disable”.
[1] Set Date>
[1-1] Check Date 2.2 Starting and Ending U-Utility
[1-2] YYYY>
[2] Check Version n Starting U-Utility
[3] Film Counters>
l Starting from initialization mode
[3-1] User Counter>
After turning ON the power of the equipment, the startup screen will be displayed for
[3-1-1] Check Counters about 1 minute and 10 seconds, after which the software version will be displayed for
[3-1-2] Initiate> about 15 seconds. While the software version is displayed, press the <CANCEL> key
for about 2 seconds until you hear a blip.
[3-2] Set Rem.Films>
[3-2-1] Initiate>
l Starting from routine mode
Press the <CANCEL> key of the operation panel for about 2 seconds until you hear a
[4] Film Output> blip.
[4-1] 17-Steps>
n Ending U-Utility
[4-2] SMPTE>
While [0.RETURN>] is displayed at the top menu of U-Utility, press the <ENTER> key.
[4-3] Cleaning Film [Are you sure?] appears on the message display. Press the <ENTER>key to end
[5] QC> U-Utility.
[5-1] QC PATTERN
[5-2] SETTINGS>
[5-2-1] BUILD-in DEN.>
[5-2-1-1] Auto
[5-2-1-2] Manual>
[6] Sleep Mode>
[7] Calibration

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-4
 MU-5
2.3 Details of U-Utility Commands [2] Check Version
[1] Set Date>
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the equipment main unit software version.
[1-1] Check Date
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for displaying the currently set system date (year, month, day, hour, minute) 1. Press the <ENTER> key to switch the display.
and checking if it is correct. Each the <ENTER> key is pressed, the software version/software ID changes.

[1-2] YYYY>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for correcting the system date (year, month, day, hour, minute).

<OPERATIONS>

1. Change the value using the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and confirm with
the <ENTER> key.
<REMARKS>
The input range of [hh>] (hours) is 0 to 23.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective immediately.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-5
 MU-6
[3] Film Counters> [3-2] Set Rem.Films>

[3-2-1] Initiate>
[3-1] User Counter>
<FUNCTION>
[3-1-1] Check Counters Command for setting the number of remaining films on the magazines loaded in the
equipment to 100 and implementing automatic density correction.
<FUNCTION>
<OPERATIONS>
Command for displaying the number of magazines loaded on the equipment on the
total counter.
1. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and select the magazine.
<OPERATIONS> [Mag in Slot1]/[Mag in Slot2]

1. Pressing the <UP> key/<DOWN> key switches the magazine number. 2. Press the <ENTER> key.
→ The confirmation message “Are you sure?” appears.
[3-1-2] Initiate>
3. Press the <ENTER> key again.
<FUNCTION> → Automatic density correction is performed and the number of remaining films
is set to 100.
Command for resetting the user counter.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and select the magazine.

[Mag in Slot1]/[Mag in Slot2]

2. Press the <ENTER> key.

→ The confirmation message “Are you sure?” appears.

3. Press the <ENTER> key again.

→ The user counter is cleared.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-6
 MU-7
[4] Film Output> [4-2] SMPTE>

<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
Command for outputting the test pattern (17-steps pattern/SMPTE pattern). 1. Select the output slot.
<NOTE> [Slot1]/[Slot2]

In order to execute this menu, set [1-1-9.User 17-Steps>] or [1-1-10.User 2. Select the AE Title.
SMPTE>] to [Enable] beforehand using M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-9]_User 17-Steps>} 3. Select the number of output frames.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-10]_User SMPTE>} [1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]

4. Select the LUT number.

[4-1] 17-Steps>
[LUT1]/[LUT2]/[LUT3]/[LUT4]/[LUT5]/[LUT6]/[LUT7]/[LUT8]

<OPERATIONS> 5. Select the correction type.

[Sharp]/[Smooth]/[Medium]
1. Select the output slot.
[Slot1]/[Slot2] 6. Select the correction method.
→ The 17-steps pattern is output. [None]/[CUBIC]
→ The SMPTE pattern is output.

[4-3] Cleaning Film

<FUNCTION>
If white vertical stripes/black vertical stripes occur due to dirt on the thermal head
(dirt which cannot be removed by hand), output the cleaning film to clean the thermal
head.
<NOTE>
This menu is available from main unit software version V2.4 or later.

<REMARKS>
• As this function pushes the thermal head against the film and conveys it without
heating the film, nothing is printed on the film output.
• The width of the output film is automatically selected.
Width: 26x36>35x43>25x30>20x25
• If the film is the same size in both slots, film will be output from the slot with lesser
films.
• Number of film output is 1.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-7
 MU-8
[5] QC> [5-2] SETTINGS>

[5-2-1] BUILD-IN DEN.>

<FUNCTION>
Command for outputting QC test pattern and performing density measurement for <FUNCTION>
evaluating the images of this equipment. Command for setting the baseline values and established criteria of the internal
<NOTE> densitometer.
In order to execute this menu, set [1-1-4-1. Enable QC>] to [Enable] beforehand [5-2-1-1] Auto
using M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-4-1]_Enable QC>} <FUNCTION>
Command for automatically setting the baseline values and established criteria of the
[5-1] QC PATTERN internal densitometer.

[5-2-1-2] Manual>
<FUNCTION>
Command for outputting the special test pattern and displaying the density value <OPERATIONS>
measured on the internal densitometer of the equipment and measured results.

<OPERATIONS> 1. [Manual] → [Slot1>] → [Density0>]

1. Select the output slot. 2. Set [Baseline].
[Slot1]/[Slot2] 3. Set [Criteria].
2. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and check the density value and 4. Perform the same procedure for [Density1>], [Density2>], [Density3>]
measured results. and [Density4>] (When a density value 4 is “enabled”).

5. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, return to step 1 and set

slot 2.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-8
 MU-9
[6] Sleep Mode> [7] Calibration

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether or not to transition to the sleep mode. Command for measuring and correcting the head resistance value.
<REMARKS>
<Default>
Execution time: Approximately 1 minute
[OFF]

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select [ON]/[OFF].
<REMARKS>
The transition time can be set using M-Utility.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-9
 MU-10
2.4 Other Utilities [10] Automatic Density Correction
Other than the U-Utility implemented using the command menu tree, a utility menu
executed just by pressing the operation panel keys is available. <FUNCTION>
{MD:1.3.2_Operation Panel/n Action When a Key is Pressed}
Command for outputting the 24-steps pattern and performing automatic density
correction.
[8] Counter Display
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. While the equipment is in the standby state, press the <Automatic
Command for displaying user counter.
density measurement> key ( ) for about one second until you hear
<OPERATIONS> a blip.

1. While the equipment is in the standby state, press the <Counter 2. Select the output slot.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]
display> key ( ) for about one second until you hear a blip. → Automatic density correction starts.
2. Pressing the <UP> key/<DOWN> key switches the magazine slot.
<REMARKS>
In equipment using main unit software version V2.3 or later, pressing
[9] Counter Reset
the <Offline> key ( ) during automatic measurement stops automatic
measurement.
<FUNCTION>
Command for resetting user counter.

<OPERATIONS>

1. While the equipment is in the standby state, press the <Counter reset>
key ( ) for about one second until you hear a blip.
2. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and select the magazine.
[Mag in Slot1]/[Mag in Slot2]

3. Press the <ENTER> key.

→ The confirmation message “Are you sure?” appears.

4. Press the <ENTER> key again.

→ The user counter is cleared.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-10

3. M-UTILITY (MAINTENANCE-UTILITY)
3.1 U-Utility Menu Tree
M-Utility
[1] System>
[1-1] Configuration>
[1-1-1] Set Date>
[1-1-1-1] Check Date
[1-1-1-2] YYYY>
[1-1-2] Set Magazines>
[1-1-3] Option Slot>
[1-1-3-1] Enable Slot>
[1-1-4] Set QC>
[1-1-4-1] Enable QC>
[1-1-4-2] Set Tgt. Den.>
[1-1-4-3] Printing Dmax>
[1-1-6] Film Counters>
[1-1-6-1] Check Counters
[1-1-6-2] Init.Trip-cnt>
[1-1-6-3] Set Odo-cnt>
[1-1-6-4] Set Rem.Films>
[1-1-7] Set Network>
[1-1-7-1] DICOM>
[1-1-7-1-1] AE-title>
[1-1-7-1-2] Port No.>
A B C D
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
MU-11
A B C D
[1-1-7-2] NETWORK>
[1-1-7-2-1] IP Address>
[1-1-7-2-2] Sub Net mask>
[1-1-7-2-3] Host name>
[1-1-7-2-4] Gateways.>
[1-1-7-2-5] Show Mac Addr.>
[1-1-7-2-6] Regist PC>
[1-1-8] Ele Save Mode>
[1-1-8-1] Transit. Time>
[1-1-9] User 17-Steps>
[1-1-10] User SMPTE>
[1-2] Error Log>
[1-2-1] Show Err. Log
[1-2-2] Clear>
[1-2-3] Save Log File>
[1-2-4] Logging mode>
[1-3] Set Panel>
[1-3-1] Alarm Sound>
[1-3-2] Alarm Volume>
[1-3-3] Language>
[1-3-4] Size Type>
[2] USB Memory>
[2-1] Installation>
[2-1-1] Upgrade>
[2-1-2] Full install>
[2-2] Save/Load>
[2-2-1] Save to USB>
[2-2-2] Load from USB>
E
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-11
 MU-12
E F G

[3] Film Output> [7-4] Print Posi.>

[3-3] Grid&FlatPat.> [7-4-1] MD12>
[3-6] SMPTE> [7-4-2] MD22>
[3-13] CleaningFilm> [7-5] Sub Scan.>
[4] F.D.C.> [7-6] Edge Sen.Po.>
[4-1] AUTO F.D.C.> [7-7] Edge Sen.Mo.>
[4-2] Check Density> [7-8] Edge Sen.LED>
[4-3] 24-Steps> [7-9] Sensor Monit.>
[4-4] Manual F.D.C.> [7-9-1] Each>
[4-5] Densitometer> [7-9-2] All
[4-5-1] 24-Steps> [7-10] NipAdjustment>
[4-5-2] Set Colle. T.> [8] Head Check>
[4-5-3] Clr Colle. T.> [8-1] Temperature
[4-5-4] DM Sen. Moni.> [8-2] Fan Operation>
[4-6] Densito. Lamp> [8-3] Head Voltage.
[6] Print Posit.> [8-4] 16VH Ope.>
[6-1] Side Margin>
[6-2] Enable Shift>
[6-3] Top Margin>
[6-3-1] Adjust>
[6-3-2] Initialize>
[7] Check Mech.>
[7-1] Film Removing>
[7-2] Motor Ope.>
[7-2-1] MD11>
[7-2-2] ME1>
[7-3] Head U/D>

F G

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-12
 MU-13
3.2 Starting and Ending M-Utility 3.2.2 Ending M-Utility
At M-Utility top menu, press the <ENTER> key while [0.RETURN>] is displayed.
After [Are you sure?] is displayed on the message display, pressing the <ENTER> key
3.2.1 Starting M-Utility ends M-Utility and initializes the equipment.

n Starting from the Initialization Processing Mode

After turning ON the power of the equipment, the startup display will be displayed
for about 1 minute and 10 seconds, after which the software version number will be
displayed for about 15 seconds.
While the software version number is displayed, press the <CANCEL> key for about
two seconds while pressing the <UP> key until you hear a blip.
<REMARKS>
The equipment enters the following mode after M-Utility ends.
• Start from initialization mode: Initial self-diagnosis
• Start from routine mode: Returns to the routine mode after re-initialization
self-diagnosis
• Start from error processing mode: Cannot end M-Utility (Reboot the equipment by
power OFF/ON).

<NOTE>
Pressing the key after the software version number disappears is invalid. In this
case, restart the equipment, display the software version number, or enter the
routine mode and then start M-Utility.

n Starting from the Routine Mode/Error Processing Mode

Press the <CANCEL> key for about two seconds until you hear a blip while pressing
the <UP> key during the routine mode or while the error message is displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-13
 MU-14
3.3 Details of M-Utility Commands [1-1-2] Set Magazines>

[1] System> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>

Command for setting whether all magazines mounted on the equipment are used/film
size.
[1-1] Configuration>
<OPERATIONS>
[1-1-1] Set Date>
1. Select the magazine number.
[1-1-1-1] Check Date [Magazine1] to [Magazine7]

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> 2. Select whether the magazine selected is used, and select the film size.
• [1. 35x43]
Command for displaying the currently set system date and time (year, month, day,
hours, and minutes) for checking if correct. • [2. 26x36]
• [3. 25x30]
[1-1-1-2] YYYY> • [4. 20x25]
• [5. Not in use]
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for correcting the system date and time (year, month, day, hours, and
3. Select [Blue] for the film base color.
minutes).
<DEFAULT VALUE>
<OPERATIONS> “Magazine1: 35x43/Blue”, “Magazine2: 26x36/Blue”, “Magazine3: 20x25/Blue”,
“Magazine4: 25x30/Blue”, “Magazine5 to Magazine7: Not in use”
1. Change the values with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
<ENTER> key to confirm. <IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
<REMARKS> The settings made will be effective after reboot.

The input range for [hh>] (hour) is 0 to 23.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective immediately.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-14
 MU-15
[1-1-3] Option Slot> [1-1-4-2] Set Tgt. Den.>

[1-1-3-1] Enable Slot <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>

Command for setting the density of each step wedge used when recording the image
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> QC pattern of U-Utility.
Command for setting whether there is a sheet-feeder unit. Set when installing the <NOTE>
removal unit.
The density step to be set is the middle wedge (1 to 3).
<OPERATIONS> "Density 4” (Dmax) and “Density 0” (Fog) cannot be set.

1. Select whether there is a sheet-feeder unit. <OPERATIONS>

[Enable]/[Disable]
1. Select magazine.
<DEFAULT>
“Disable” 2. Select the desired density step.
[Density1] to [Density3]
<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after reboot. 3. Enter the density value applied to the density step.
Enter a value 100 times the density value.
[1-1-4] Set QC>
<REMARKS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> Input range: “Density1; 20 to 250”, “Density2; 20 to 250”, “Density3; 192 to 250”
Command for performing settings related to the image QC function.
<DEFAULT>
[1-1-4-1] Enable QC>
“Density1: 048”, “Density2: 102”, “Density3: 192”
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
Command for setting whether to enable/disable the image QC function. In order to use The settings made will be effective immediately.
the image QC function using U-Utility, this setting must be set to “Enable”.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select whether to enable/disable the image QC function.

[Enable]/[Disable]

<DEFAULT>
“Disable”

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after reboot.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-15
 MU-16
[1-1-4-3] Printing Dmax> [1-1-6] Film Counters>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> [1-1-6-1] Check Counters

Command for setting whether to enable/disable the “density 4” step wedge for density
measurement in the QC test pattern of U–Utility. <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
<NOTE> Command for displaying the number of films counted by the film counter. The counts
of the user counter and total counter for magazines 1 to 7 are displayed.
“Density4” means the uppermost wedge (density=Dmax).
If set to disable, the guide number (4) is not shown and the density is Fog. <REMARKS>
[3.Film Counters>] of U-Utility displays only the user count for the magazine mounted.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select whether to enable/disable density value 4.
• [Enable]: Prints “density 4” wedge to the QC test pattern. 1. Display the film counter and press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and
• [Disable]: Returns to the previous screen without changing settings. refer to the number of films which can be used.
<REMARKS>
<DEFAULT>
<Display format>
“Disable” U-Mag.X=BBBBBB
T-Mag.X=CCCCCC
<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
Mag.X: Magazine number
The settings made will be effective immediately.
BBBBBB: User counter value
CCCCCC: Total counter value

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-16
 MU-17
[1-1-6-2] Init.Trip-cnt> [1-1-6-4] Set Rem.Films>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for resetting the user counter for each magazine. Command for changing the number of remaining films on the magazines loaded in the
equipment.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the number of the magazine to be reset.
→ The confirmation message “Are you sure?” appears.
1. Select the magazine slot.
2. Press the <ENTER> key. 2. Enter the number of remaining films.
→ The user counter is reset. <REMARKS>

<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES> Input range: 0 to 101 (fixed at three digits) (“101” should be entered only
immediately after films have been loaded.)
The changes made will be effective immediately.

[1-1-6-3] Set Odo-cnt> <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>

The changes made will be effective immediately.
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for changing the counter value of the total film counter.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the number of the magazine to change the counter value.

2. Enter the counter value.
<REMARKS>
Input range: 0 to 999999 (6 digits)

<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective immediately.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-17
 MU-18
[1-1-7] Set Network> [1-1-7-1-2] Port No.>

[1-1-7-1] DICOM> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>

Command for setting the port number of the TCP communication used for DICOM
[1-1-7-1-1] AE-title> communication.

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting the name of the printer to be used for DICOM communication.
1. Enter the port number (decimal).
<OPERATIONS> <REMARKS>

1. Enter the AE Title (fixed at 16 digits). Input range: 0 to 65535

<REMARKS> <NOTE>
• If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, enter “←” to set as the Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved.
end of the character string. In this case, spaces will be set for the remaining • 20051: Port used by PC for servicing
number of digits.
• 21: FTP port
• The following are not accepted.
• All spaces → After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered
• Space for the first digit values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.
• The characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbol characters
within 20h to 7Eh of the 1-byte code table. <DEFAULT>
{MU:1.3_Operations of Main Unit Service Modes} “0000017238”

→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered <IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.
The settings made will be effective after reboot.
<DEFAULT>
“DRYPIX”

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after reboot.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-18
 MU-19
[1-1-7-2] NETWORK> [1-1-7-2-2] SubNetMask

CAUTION <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Set the NETWORK menu after disconnecting the network cables (equipment Command for setting the subnet mask of this equipment.
side or network equipment side). Re-connect them after completing settings
and rebooting the equipment. <OPERATIONS>
When setting the NETWORK menu, the security will be vulnerable temporarily.

<INSTRUCTIONS>
1. Enter the subnet mask (decimal).
<REMARKS>
Confirm details such as IP address assigned to this equipment and subnet
mask with the network administrator of the installation site. • Input range: 000 to 255
• Out of input range if no value is input.
[1-1-7-2-1] IP Address
→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for setting the IP address used on this equipment. <DEFAULT>
“255.255.000.000”
<OPERATIONS>
<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
1. Enter the IP address (decimal). The settings made will be effective after reboot.
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 000 to 255
• The following are not accepted.
• “000.000.000.000”
• “255.255.255.255”
• No value is entered.

→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.

<DEFAULT>
“172.016.001.030”

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after reboot.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-19
 MU-20
[1-1-7-2-3] Hostname [1-1-7-2-4] Gateways.>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for setting the host name of the equipment used for TCP communication. Command for setting the gateway address of this equipment.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Enter the host name (maximum 16 digits). 1. Enter the gateway address (decimal).
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower • Input range: 000 to 255
cases), numbers, and hyphen “-”. • If no value is entered, it will be taken as outside the input range.
• If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, enter “←” to set as the • Outside input range: “255.255.255.255”
end of the character string. • If no value is entered or “000.000.000.000” is entered, it will be taken as
• The following are unaccepted. incomplete setting.
• Space
• Less than 2 characters → After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered
• First character is a number. values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.

→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered <DEFAULT>
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed. None

<DEFAULT> <IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>

“fujiprinter” The settings made will be effective after reboot.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS> [1-1-7-2-5] Show Mac Addr.>

The settings made will be effective after reboot.
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
The MAC address of this equipment (12 digits) is displayed.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-20
 MU-21
[1-1-7-2-6] Regist PC> [1-1-8] Ele Save Mode>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> [1-1-8-1] Transit.Time>

Command for registering the PC for servicing to enable file transfer. Any unregistered
PC for servicing is limited in function and does not support “[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data” <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
and “[PC4] File Transfer” of PC-Utility. Command for setting the timer value when this equipment shifts into the sleep mode.
<REMARKS> （unit: minute）
Only one PC for servicing can be registered. Only the one registered last supports file <OPERATIONS>
transfer.
1. Set the sleep mode transition time.
<OPERATIONS> <REMARKS>

1. Enter the IP address of the current PC for servicing. Input range: “0”, “15”, “30”, “45”

<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“172.016.001.080” “0” (No sleep mode operations)

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after reboot.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-21
 MU-22
[1-1-9] User 17-Steps> [1-2] Error Log>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> [1-2-1] Show Err. Log

Command for setting whether to enable/disable the 17-steps pattern output of U-Utility.
To output 17-steps pattern of U-Utility, this setting must be set to “Enable”. <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for displaying the error log (including details).
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select whether to enable/disable the 17-steps pattern output.
[Enable]/[Disable] 1. Display the error log and pressing the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and
refer to all logs logged.
<DEFAULT>
“Disable”
<Displayed Contents>

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after reboot.

[1-1-10] User SMPTE>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> YY: Index display

Command for setting whether to enable/disable the SMPTE pattern output of the X: Category of source of error (P:Printer, F:Formatter)
U-Utility. To output SMPTE pattern of U-Utility, this setting must be set to “Enable”. AAAA: Error code (Hexadecimal 4 digits)
BBBB: Detailed error code (Hexadecimal 4 digits)
<OPERATIONS> CCCCCC: Date of error generation
DDDD: Time of error generation
1. Select whether to enable/disable the SMPTE pattern output. <REMARKS>
[Enable]/[Disable]
• The latest error log is displayed. If 0 error log, “nothing” is displayed.
<DEFAULT> • The error log saves the latest 50 errors.
“Disable”
[1-2-2] Clear
<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after reboot. <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for clearing the error log.

[1-2-3] Save Log File>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for saving the printer log data and analysis data on the memory of the CPU
board in the CF.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-22
 MU-23
[1-2-4] Logging mode> <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> 1. Select the log acquisition mode.
For setting whether to write analysis logs out of the logs written in CF (operation logs • [Enable]: Saves operation data logs and analysis logs.
and analysis logs) when the equipment is shut down. • [Disable]: Saves operation data logs only.
{MD:2.5.1_Ending Process} <REMARKS>
<NOTE> Log acquisition mode and list of saved logs
This menu is available from main unit software version V2.1 or later. : Log to be saved, -: Logs not to be saved
Log type Logging mode (Enable) Non-log acquisition mode
<REMARKS> Error log  
Purpose of use of each log IOT  
ISC  
Log type Details
Mechanical log  
Records equipment failures. Cover open is also record-
Error log Edge sensor log  
ed as error. Magazine open is not taken as error.
Records ON/OFF state of sensors and motors in PFIF log  
IOT timechart format. Special viewer is required for referenc- Log when jam occurs  
Operation data log

ing.
DICOM log  -
Records reception of messages between tasks of con-
ISC Main log  -
veyance and print functions.
Mechanism log Records control of ON/OFF of sensors and motors, etc. Output log  -
Records edge sensor reading values during 35x43 cm PCUTL log  -
Edge sensor log
size printing. Spooler log  -
Records message transmission/reception between the Trace log  -
PFIF log
formatter and printer.
Jam log Collects logs related to jams when jams occur.
DICOM communication log with connected part. Log
DICOM log
volume is heavy.
<DEFAULT>
Log on control of all applications. Records start and “Disable”
Main log termination time, control transition time with each sub-
system, etc. <IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
Analysis log

Records progress to printing after image processing The settings made will be effective immediately.
Output log
completes.
PCUTL log PC-Utility function processing trace.
Records results of printing request. Also records infor-
Spooler log mation such as remaining films when printing is request-
ed.
Trace log Records start state between sub-systems on chart.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-23
 MU-23.1
[1-3] Set Panel> [1-3-2] Alarm Volume>

[1-3-1] Alarm Sound> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>

Command for setting the volume of the operation panel.
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <REMARKS>
Command for setting how the alarm of the operation panel sounds.
The setting result is saved as a individual file.
<REMARKS>
• There is no alarm sound checking function. <OPERATIONS>
• The setting result is saved as a individual file.
1. Select the alarm volume.
<OPERATIONS> [HIGH]/[MEDIUM]/[LOW]

1. Select the alarm pattern. <DEFAULT>

• [OFF]: OFF “HIGH”
• [PULSE]: The alarm sounds three seconds and stops. <IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
• [ON]: ON
The settings made will be effective immediately.
<DEFAULT>
“PULSE”

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective immediately.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-23.1
 MU-23.2
BLANK PAGE

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-23.2
 MU-24
[1-3-3] Language> [1-3-4] Size Type>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for setting how the display language (Japanese/English) of the operation Command for setting the unit for displaying film size on the operation panel.
panel sounds.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the display method.
1. Select the display language. • [CM]: Displayed in cm
[Japanese]/[English] • [INCH]: Displayed in inch
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“English” “CM”
<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS> <IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after reboot. The settings made will be effective after reboot.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-24
 MU-25
[2] USB Memory <OPERATIONS>

n Copying Main Unit Software to the USB Memory

[2-1] Installation>
1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
[2-1-1] Upgrade
2. Connect the USB memory to the USB port of the PC for servicing.
[2-1-2] Full install
3. Insert the main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive.
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> → “DPX2CopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX2 Copy Tool] window is
Using the USB memory, perform full install or version upgrade of the main unit displayed.
software. <REMARKS>
For details on version upgrading or full installation procedure using the USB memory,
refer to “Inspections, Replacements, Adjustments (MC)”. If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPX2CopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
{MC:12.2_Installing from the USB Memory}
<NOTE> <NOTE>
• The USB memory corresponding to the following cannot be used. Use an “DPX2CopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive.
appropriate USB memory. “DPX2CopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on
• USB memory formatted in a file system other than FAT/FAT32 the desktop, etc.
• USB memory sold as having security features
• USB memory, of which the entirety or the “DRYPIX2000” folder and its
contents are compressed
• USB memory, of which the entirety or the “DRYPIX2000” folder and its
contents are encrypted
• USB memory, of which the entirety or the “DRYPIX2000” folder and its
contents are secured by authentication such as passwords
Also ensure that the Windows DOS command [CHKDSK/F] (with “Fix” option)
be not executed for the files in the USB memory. Otherwise, the equipment
may encounter file access problems.
• The USB memory is set with the volume label.
{MU:4.1.2_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}

<REMARKS>
• The USB memory of 128 MB is sufficient.
• To shorten the transfer time, use of the USB 2.0 specifications USB memory is
recommended.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-25
 MU-25.1
4. Enter the drive name into [Input drive of USB].
5. Click [Copy] of [Copy for upgrading], or [Copy for full installation].
CAUTION
Do not remove the USB memory while copying (while the USB memory access
lamp is blinking).

→ The main unit software is copied to the USB memory. When completed, the
[Success] screen appears.

6. [OK]
7. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX2 Copy Tool] window.
8. Remove the CD-R from the PC for servicing.
9. Display the [Safely Remove Hardware] screen from the task tray of
the PC for servicing, execute the cancellation procedure of the USB
memory connected to ensure removal can be carried out safely.

10. Remove the USB memory from the PC for servicing.

11. Shutdown the PC for servicing.
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-25.1
 MU-25.2
n Installing from the USB Memory 8. If full installation has been performed, perform the following procedure
as well.
1. Remove the LAN cover and open the blind plate. (i) Restore the individual data.
CAUTION (ii) Reboot the equipment.
When touching the blind plate of the USB connector, be sure to use a wristband
to ground yourself. Otherwise the equipment may not operate properly. (iii) Set the system date and time.
(iv) Set the number of remaining films.
2. Connect the USB memory to the USB connector of the CPU board. (v) Set the total film counter.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.

3. Select the installation type.

• [Upgrade]: Version upgrade
• [Full Install]: Full installation

4. [Are you sure?] →

→ The data in the USB memory is loaded in the equipment. When installation
completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.

5. Check that "Completed.” is displayed and remove the USB memory.

6. Reinstall the removed plate and the LAN cover.
7. Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit
software become effective.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-25.2
 MU-26
[2-2] Save/Load <OPERATIONS>
[2-2-1] Save to USB> 1. Remove the LAN cover and open the blind plate.
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> CAUTION
Command for saving equipment internal data to the USB memory. Applicable data are When touching the blind plate of the USB connector, be sure to use a wristband
equipment individual data/analysis data. to ground yourself. Otherwise the equipment may not operate properly.
<NOTE>
Create all the following folders in the USB memory beforehand. 2. Connect the USB memory to the USB connector of the CPU board.
[USB Drive]
┗ DRYPIX 2000
┣ Param
┃ ┣ Indv
┃ ┗ Other
┣ Operation
┗ Log

3. [2-2-1.Save to USB>]→ → [Are you sure?] →

→ The equipment internal data is saved in the USB memory.
When installation completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.

4. Check that "Completed.” is displayed and remove the USB memory.

5. Reinstall the removed plate and the LAN cover.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-26
 MU-27
[2-2-2] Load from USB> <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> 1. Remove the LAN cover and open the blind plate.
Command for loading data in the USB memory to the equipment. Applicable data are
equipment individual data. CAUTION
<NOTE> When touching the blind plate of the USB connector, be sure to use a wristband
to ground yourself. Otherwise the equipment may not operate properly.
If loading the data in the equipment data FD or head data FD provided with the
equipment, create the following folder in the USB memory beforehand, and copy
the data from the FD to the Indv folder. 2. Connect the USB memory to the USB connector of the CPU board.
[USB Drive]
┗ DRYPIX 2000
┣ Param
┃ ┣ Indv
┃ ┗ Other
┣ Operation
┗ Log

3. [2-2-2.Load from USB>] → → [Are you sure?] →

→ The data in the USB memory is loaded in the equipment.
When installation completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.

4. Check that "Completed.” is displayed and remove the USB memory.

5. Reinstall the removed plate and the LAN cover.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after reboot.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-27
 MU-28
[3] Film Output> 5. Select the interpolation type.
[Sharp]/[Smooth]/[Medium]

[3-3] Grid&FlatPat.> 6. Select the interpolation method.

[CUBIC]/[NONE]
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
<REMARKS>
Command for outputting Grid & Flat pattern.
If [NONE] is selected, no interpolation is carried out, and the image is reduced
<REMARKS> according to the selected number of frames and film size.
• Grid & Flat pattern is used for measuring the recorded image format and checking
unevenness, etc. → One sheet of SMPTE pattern is printed.
• The density of flat part is 1.2. When printing completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.

[3-13] CleaningFilm>
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. If white vertical stripes/black vertical stripes occur due to dirt on the thermal head
[Slot1]/[Slot2] (dirt which cannot be removed by hand), output the cleaning film to clean the thermal
head.
2. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 99). <NOTE>
→ Grid & Flat pattern is printed.
This menu is available from main unit software version V2.4 or later.
When printing completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.
<REMARKS>
[3-6] SMPTE>
As this function pushes the thermal head against the film and conveys it without
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> heating the film, nothing is printed on the film output.
Command for outputting the SMPTE pattern.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]
[Slot1]/[Slot2]
<NOTE>
2. Select the AE Title. (Selection of client setting) Select the slot with large width.
Slot width: 26x36>35x43>25x30>20x25
3. Select the number of printing frames.
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
2. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 99).
4. Select the LUT number. → The cleaning film will be output.
[LUT1] to [LUT8] If output completes normally, [Completed.] will be displayed.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-28
 MU-29
[4] F.D.C.> [4-2] Check Density>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
[4-1] AUTO F.D.C.> Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps data measured by the
density measurement section on the operation panel.
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
<OPERATIONS>
Command for automatically measuring the density by the density measurement
section while printing 24-steps patterns and creating the density correction table from
the measurement data. 1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
<REMARKS> [Slot1]/[Slot2]
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed.
• Automatic density correction is carried out so that the image density tone curve
becomes appropriate. Execute it during installation, periodic maintenance, and When printing completes normally, the density value of the first step is
when the film lot changes. displayed on the operation panel.
• Automatic density correction must be carried out for each magazine. 2. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key to check the density value of each
step.
<OPERATIONS> l Specified Values
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. Step Dmax 3.0

[Slot1]/[Slot2] 1 fog
→ The 24-steps pattern is printed. 2
Density should be between densities
of step 1 and step 3.
When printing completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.
Density should be between densities
3
<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS> of step 2 and step 4.

The settings made will be effective after they are executed. 4 0.30 ±0.07
5 0.48 ±0.07
6 0.66 ±0.07
7 0.84 ±0.07
8 1.02 ±0.07
9 1.20 ±0.07
10 1.38 ±0.07
11 1.56 ±0.07
12 1.74 ±0.07
13 1.92 ±0.07
14 2.10 ±0.09
15 2.40 ±0.11
16 2.70 ±0.11
17 3.00 ±0.11

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-29
 MU-30
[4-3] 24-Steps> [4-4] Manual F.D.C.>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for displaying the 24-steps density data most recently measured by [4-1. Command for entering the 24-steps density value measured using the external
AUTO F.D.C.>] on the operation panel. densitometer, and performing density correction calculation based on this value.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. 1. Output the 24-steps pattern and measure the density of each step
[Slot1]/[Slot2] using the external densitometer.
{MU3.3 [4-1]_AUTO F.D.C.}
2. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key to check the density value of each
step. 2. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
Initially, the density of the first line is displayed. [Slot1]/[Slot2]
→ The density input screen for the first step will be displayed on the operation
panel.
<REMARKS>
The previous 24-steps density value saved is displayed. However, the default
value when M-Utility is started is “0”.

3. Enter the density values (0 to 399) of each step measured at step 1.

<REMARKS>
The specified values of the input range for each step are as follows.
• Should be between 0 and 399.
• Should be above the density value of the previous step.

→ After entering the density of all 24 points, pressing the <ENTER> key
executes the 24-steps density calculation.
When printing completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after they are executed.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-30
 MU-31
[4-5] Densitometer [4-5-2] Set Colle. T.>

[4-5-1] 24-Steps> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for printing one sheet of the 24-steps pattern required for calibration of the
built-in densitometer, and measuring the density values.
The measurement results are recorded internal for [4-5-2.Set Colle. T.>].
<REMARKS>
Correction calculation is not performed, only measurement.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]
→ One sheet of the 24-steps pattern is printed.
When printing completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.
Command for creating calibration tables for calibrating measured values to match the
measured values of the built-in densitometer and external reference densitometer.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Measure the density of each step of the 24-steps pattern printed by
[4-5-1.24-Setps>] using the external reference densiometer.
2. Enter the density vallues (0 to 399) of each step of the pattern
measured at step 1.
→ After entering the density of all 24 points, pressing the <ENTER> key
executes the 24-steps density calculation.
When calibration tables are created normally, “Completed.” is displayed.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
The settings made will be effective after they are executed.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-31
 MU-32
[4-5-3] Clr Colle. T.> [4-6] Densito.Lamp>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for linearly initializing densitometer calibration tables. Command for turning ON/OFF the density measurement LED of the built-in
densitometer.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. [Are you sure?] → 1. Select [ON].
→ The calibration tables are cleared.
→ The density measurement LED turns ON.
When it completes normally, “Completed.” is displayed.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF SETTINGS>
2. Select [OFF].
→ The density measurement LED turns OFF.
The settings made will be effective after they are executed.

[4-5-4] DM Sen. Moni.

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for monitoring whether the density sensor of the internal densitometer is
operating normally.

<OPERATIONS>

1. The state of the density measurement section sensor is displayed in a

constant cycle.
Shield the density measurement section sensor with the film, and
check that low values are displayed for high density areas of the film
and high values for low density areas.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-32
 MU-33
[6] Print Posit.> l Input Example/Moving Direction

[6-1] Side Margin

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Adjusts the image position in the main scanning direction in units of pixel. (1 pixel =
84.7 µm)
Specifies and adjusts the relative adjustment value for the image position currently
set.
<REMARKS>
• Adjustments cannot be performed for 26 x 36 cm film size as the head width and
film width are more or less the same.
• The setting result is saved as a individual file.

<OPERATIONS>

n When [6-1-1.Adjust>] is selected

n When [6-1-2.Initialize>] is selected
1. At [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>], print Grid & Flat pattern.
Print on 35 x 43 cm, 25 x 30 cm, or 20 x 25 cm film. 1. Select the printed film size.
2. At [6-1.Side Margin>], select the film size used in step 1. [35x43]/[25x30]/[20x25]

[35x43]/[25x30]/[20x25] 2. [Are you sure?] →

3. Measure the main scanning image position B of Grid & Flat pattern.
{MU:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
4. Enter the distance to be moved by the image (0 to ±100).
<REMARKS>
Enter a total of four digits consisting of symbol (+/-) and three digits.
→ The setting is initialized and “Completed.” is displayed.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective immediately.

→ If the value entered is normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.

5. Print Grid & Flat pattern again and check that the main scanning
image position is within the specification.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-33
 MU-34
[6-2] Enable Shift> [6-3] Top Margin>
Command for adjusting the gap from the leading edge of the film to the outer frame of
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> the image (recording tip position).
Command for turning ON/OFF the recording position shift function for preventing wear <REMARKS>
of the head.
The setting result is saved as an individual file.
<OPERATIONS>
[6-3-1] Adjust>
1. Select the type of image.
[Routine Image] : Nomal image <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
[Test Image] : Test pattern image Command for adjusting the recording tip position.
2. Select whether to turn the function ON or OFF. <OPERATIONS>
[Enable]/[Disable]
1. At [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>], print Grid & Flat pattern.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted. 2. At [6-3.Top Margin>], select the magazine slot.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]

3. Select the film size used in step 1.

[35x43]/[26x36]/[25x30]/[20x25]

4. Measure the recording tip length A of Grid & Flat pattern.

{MU:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}

5. Enter the value of A measured (10 to 2000).

<REMARKS>
Enter a value which is 100 times the value of A.
Example: If A is 12 mm, enter 1200.

→ If the value entered is normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.

6. Print Grid & Flat pattern again and check that the recording tip
position is within the specification.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective immediately.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-34
 MU-34.1
[6-3-2] Initialize>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for initializing the recording tip position.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot.

[Slot1]/[Slot2]

2. Select the printed film size.

[35x43]/[26x36]/[25x30]/[20x25]

3. [Are you sure?] →

→ The setting is initialized and “Completed.” is displayed.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective immediately.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-34.1
 MU-34.2
BLANK PAGE

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-34.2
 MU-35
[7] Check Mech.> l Check Individual Operations

1. [Home Position] → → [Unit Ope.>] →

[7-1] Film Removing>
2. Check individual operations in the following order:
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> [Film Surface] → [Film Suction] → [Upper Limit] → [Film Fanning] →
Command for checking the operations of the removal mechanism. [Film Release] → [Pre-feeding] → [Grip Release]

<OPERATIONS> → Individual operations will be carried out to the selected position. “Wait..” is
displayed while it is executed. If operations end normally, “Completed.” will be
displayed.
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
[Slot1]/[Slot2] l Check Series of Operations

2. Execute [Home Position]. 1. [Home Position] → → [Film Convey>] →

→ The suction cup arm moves to the home position. → A series of removal operations are performed. “Wait..” is displayed while it is
<NOTE> executed. If operations end normally, “Completed.” will be displayed.

If [Home Position] is not executed first, error will result.

3. “Completed.” → → [Home Position]

4. Execute [l Check Individual Operations] or [l Check Series of
Operations] to check the operation.
<NOTE>
After executing the above check, be sure to remove film at the conveyance
entrance.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-35
 MU-36
[7-2] Motor Ope.> <OPERATIONS>
[7-2-1] MD11> 1. Select the operation type.
[CW]/[CCW]/[STOP]
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
<REMARKS>
Command for checking the operation of the conveyance motor (MD11).
[CCW]: Film conveyance direction

2. Select the speed condition.

[LOW]/[MIDDLE]/[HIGH]
→ MD11 drives.
<REMARKS>
To discontinue operations halfway through, go back to “operation type” and select
[STOP].

3. Check the operations of MD11.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-36
 MU-37
[7-2-2] ME1> <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> 1. Select the operation type.
Command for checking the operation of the sub-scanning motor (ME1). [CCW]/[STOP]
<REMARKS>
[CCW]: Film conveyance direction

2. Select the speed condition.

[LOW]/[HIGH]
→ ME1 drives.
<REMARKS>
To discontinue operations halfway through, go back to “operation type” and select
[STOP].

3. Check the operations of ME1.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-37
 MU-38
[7-3] HEAD U/D>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for checking the operation of the the head up/down drive motor (MH1).

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the film size.

[35x43]/[26x36]/[[25x30]/[20x25]
<REMARKS>
The number of motor rotations differs according to the selected film size.

2. Select the operation type.

• [Home Position] : Move to the home position (SH1)
• [Grip Position] : Move to the head pressurization position
→ MH11 drives. “Wait..” is displayed while it is executed.

3. Check the MH1 operations.

→ When MH1 operations end normally, “Completed.” will be displayed.
<NOTE>
When checking operations with a different film size after executing [Grip
Position], return to [Home Position] once.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-38
 MU-39
[7-4] Print Posi.>

[7-4-1] MD12>

[7-4-2] MD22>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for checking the operations of the reference plate drive motor (MD12/
MD22).

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the reference plate drive motor.

[MD12]/[MD22]

2. Select the film size.

[35x43]/[26x36]/[25x30]/[20x25]

3. Select the operation type.

• [Home Position] : Moves to the home position
• [Positioning] : Moves to the width adjusting position
→ The motor drives. “Wait..” is displayed while it is executed.

4. Check the operations of the motor.

→ When motor operations end normally, “Completed.” will be displayed.
<NOTE>
When checking operations with a different film size after executing
[Positioning], return to [Home Position] once.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-39
 MU-40
[7-5] Sub Scan.> [7-5-3] Adjust>
Command for adjusting the rotating speed of the sub-scanning motor (ME1). If
magnification error of the image occurs in the sub-scanning direction (film conveyance <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
direction), perform this adjustment. Command for adjusting the sub-scanning speed setting.
[7-5-1] Sub Scan.Speed. <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> 1. At [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>], print Grid & Flat pattern.
Command for displaying the sub-scanning speed（PPS）setting current set.
2. At [7-5-3.Adjust>], select the film size used in step 1.
[7-5-2] Initialize>
[35x43]/[26x36]/[25x30]/[20x25]
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> 3. Measure the sub-scanning lengths C and C’ of Grid & Flat pattern.
Command for initializing the sub-scanning speed setting. {MU:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}

<OPERATIONS> 4. Enter the four digit average (1/10 mm unit) of C and C’ measured.
→ If the value entered is normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.
1. [Are you sure?] →
→ The setting is initialized, and “Completed.” will be displayed.
5. Print Grid & Flat pattern again and check that the sub-scanning length
is within the specification.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective immediately.
The changes made will be effective immediately.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-40
 MU-41
[7-6] Edge Sen.Po.> 5. Enter the F value at [7-6-1.Left>]. (Range: -999 to 999)
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <REMARKS>

Command for setting the edge position of the film measured by the film edge sensor.
Perform this adjustment when replacing the film edge sensor with a new one.
<REMARKS>
The film size detectable by the film edge sensor is 35x43cm only.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set “[PC6-4] No Edge mode” to [ON].
2. At [3-6.SMPTE.>], print 35 x 43 cm size SMPTE pattern.
3. Measure the printed E of SMPTE pattern.
<NOTE>
If E is “0” and there is no margin on the left side of the film, enter “-100” at
[7-6-1.Left>] and repeat the procedure from the step 2.
Enter a value (three digits) 100 times -9.99 mm to 9.99 mm.
Example: If F is 1 mm, enter 100.
→ If the value entered is normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.
6. Measure E’ of SMPTE pattern.
<NOTE>
If E’ is “0” and there is no margin on the right of the film, enter “-100” at [7-6-2.
Right>].
Re-print the SMPTE pattern and repeat the step 6.
7. Find F’ from the measured E’ value according to the following formula.
F’ = E’ - 0.42
8. Enter the F’ value at [7-6-2.Right>]. (Range: -999 to 999)
<REMARKS>
The input conditions are the same as [7-6-1.Left>].

→ If the value entered is normal, “Completed.” will be displayed.

9. Re-print SMPTE pattern again and check that E and E’ are 0.7 mm or
less.
If it is not 0.7 mm or less, go back to the step 2. and repeat the procedure.
If it is 0.7 mm or less, reboot the equipment.

<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective immediately.

4. Find F from the measured E value according to the following formula.

F = E - 0.42

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-41
 MU-42
[7-7] Edge Sen.Mo.> [7-8] Edge Sen.LED>

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for monitoring the operations of the film edge sensor. Command for turning ON/OFF the edge sensor LED. However, this command is not
used in most cases because the edge sensor LED is internally installed and you
<OPERATIONS> cannot check its ON/OFF status in the normal assembled condition.
The procedure “n With Printing” below should be used mainly for design evaluation <OPERATIONS>
purposes. In the field, this procedure should be used to log for analysis when the
film edge sensor is not working correctly. Use this function only if requested and as
instructed by the Service headquarters. 1. Select [ON].
→ LED of the film edge sensor lights up.
n With Printing
2. Select [OFF].
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. → The LED goes off.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]
→ Grid & Flat pattern will be printed.

n Checking the Operations of the Film Edge Sensor Alone

1. [With no print] →
→ The counter value of the sensor will be displayed immediately.

2. Confirm that the film edge sensor is active by the display of the
counter value.
<REMARKS>
The displayed counter value indicates the lateral shift of recording position in
pixels.

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-42
 MU-43
[7-9] Sensor Monit.> n Display Example
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for performing sensor monitoring. Sensor monitoring can be performed on
sensors, interlocks, and fuses.
Sensor monitoring consists of two methods; selecting a sensor and displaying the ON/
OFF status (alarm sounds) and grouping sensors and displaying their status.
• Individually displaying and checking: Select [Each] in the following procedure.
• Grouping and checking: Select [All] in the following procedure.
<REMARKS>
For [Each], can also check with the alarm which sounds according to ON.

<OPERATIONS>

n Displaying Individually and Checking

1. [7-9-1.Each] →
2. Select one of the below.
• [7-9-1-1.Sensor 1>]
• [7-9-1-2.Sensor 2>]
• [7-9-1-3.Fuse>]

3. Select the sensor using the <UP> key/<DOWN> key, and check sensor
operations.

n Grouping and Checking

1. [7-9-2.All] →
2. Switch the display using the <UP> key/<DOWN> key, and check
sensor operations.

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-43
 MU-43.1
n Display [7-10] NipAdjustment>

Symbol Name Status when “1” is displayed <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>

SA11 Film size detection sensor 1 (Upper) Shielded Command for checking/adjusting the thermal head pressure after replacing the
SA12 Film size detection sensor 2 (Upper) Shielded thermal head related parts.
SA13 Film size detection sensor 3 (Upper) Shielded <REMARKS>
SA21 Film size detection sensor 1 (Lower) Shielded For the relevant parts, refer to “MC7.4 Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head Pressure”.
SA22 Film size detection sensor 2 (Lower) Shielded {MC:7.4_Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head Pressure}
SA23 Film size detection sensor 3 (Lower) Shielded
SB11 Suction cup arm HP detection sensor (Upper) Shielded <OPERATIONS>
SB12 Film surface detection sensor (Upper) Shielded
SB13 Suction cup arm upper dead-point detection Shielded 1. Remove the upper cover.
sensor (Upper)
SB21 Suction cup arm HP detection sensor (Lower) Shielded
2. When the equipment is in standby mode, measure the height of the
left and right head pressure springs at the positions shown in the
SB22 Film surface detection sensor (Lower) Shielded figure below.
SB23 Suction cup arm upper dead-point detection Shielded
sensor (Lower)
SD11 Conveyance entrance sensor (Upper) Film present
SD12 Conveyance exit sensor Shielded
SD13 Reference plate HP detection sensor (Upper) Shielded
SD14 Cleaning roller detection sensor Shielded (Cleaning roller present)
SD21 Conveyance entrance sensor (Lower) Film present
SD23 Reference plate HP detection sensor (Lower) Shielded
SH1 Head position detection sensor Shielded (HP)
INTLKL Interlock switch Cover closed
TPH1 Thermal protector Disconnected
FUSE1 Fuse 1 (MB11) Disconnected
FUSE2 Fuse 2 (MD12, MH1) Disconnected
FUSE3 Fuse 3 (MD11, MD22, ME1) Disconnected
FUSE4 Fuse 4 (MB21) Disconnected
FUSE5 Fuse 5 (HH1, Relay, FANP1, FANP2) Disconnected
FUSE6 Fuse 6 (Thermal head power) Disconnected
FUSE7 Fuse 7 (HH2) Disconnected
FUSE8 Fuse 8 (Sensor power, LED15A) Disconnected
FUSE9 Fuse 9 (FANK1) Disconnected

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-43.1
 MU-43.2
3. Obtain the average height of the two springs. 11. In the numeric input field, enter a 10-fold value of the difference
between averages obtained in step 8.
<REMARKS>
<REMARKS>
As a guideline, the value should be 8 to 10mm.
• When the difference between averages is 2.5 mm, enter “25”.
4. Remove the interlock release tool and insert it into the head cover • Value range: 10 to 59
• The value takes effect upon entry.
interlock.

5. Power ON the equipment and start the M-Utility. 12. Repeat steps 6 through 9 to check the head pressure.
6. Print a grid & flat pattern of 35 x 43 cm size.
During printing, measure the height of the spring at the positions shown in step 2
when the thermal head is at the pressurized position.
{MU:3.3 [3-3]_Grid&FlatPat.>}

CAUTION
During printing, do not touch the driving mechanism. Ensure that tools such as
metal ruler do not touch the terminals.

7. Obtain the average of the spring heights measured in step 6.

<REMARKS>
As a guideline, the value should be 11 to 14mm.

8. Obtain the difference between the average obtained in step 3 (when

the equipment is at rest) and the average obtained in step 7 (when
printing is performed).

9. Check that the difference between the averages obtained above is

within the specifications below. When the value does not meet the
specification, perform a head pressure adjustment.
3.4mm ≤ difference of averages < 4.6mm

10. Select [7-10.NipAdjustment>].

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-43.2
 MU-44
[8] Head Check> [8-3] Head Voltage.

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
[8-1] Temperature Command for displaying the head power voltage (+16VH) described in the individual
equipment data file.
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <REMARKS>
Command for monitoring the temperature of thermistors (THH1 to THH6). • The second place after the decimal point is rounded up and displayed.
<REMARKS> • The displayed voltage value varies depending on the thermal head. As a guideline,
The 100 times value of the temperature is displayed. (Unit: °C) a value in the neighborhood of 14.0 V is normal.

<OPERATIONS> [8-4] 16VH Ope.>

1. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key, and check the measured <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
temperature of each thermistor. Command for turning ON/OFF the head power (+16VH) when adjusting the head
power voltage.
[8-2] Fan Operation>
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for tuning ON/OFF the head cooling fans (FANP1, FANP2).
1. Select [ON].
→ 16VH is output.
<OPERATIONS>
2. Adjust the head power voltage.
1. Select the operations of the cooling fan. 3. After adjusting, select [OFF].
• [ON>]: Fan rotates.
→ Output of 16VH stops.
• [OFF]: Fan stops
• [Normal Ope.>]: Fan operates normally.
<REMARKS>
Setting to [Normal Ope.>] switches the heater to normal operations as well.

2. If [ON>] or [Normal Ope.>] is selected, select the drive voltage.

[14V]/[18V]/[21V]/[24V]

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-44
 MU-45
4. PC-Utility 4.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing

To change the settings of the equipment, using FTP communication as the interface,
OS
l
access the setting file in the equipment directly and edit it using PC-Utility. Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) or Windows XP Professional (SP2)
Edit this setting file on the browser of the PC for servicing.
Display
l
As there is no need to connect to the equipment, use the “DPX2 Copy Tool” in the
main unit software CD-R for executing the following function. 800 x 600 pixels or higher-resolution display

• Copy the main unit software (CD → PC for servicing/CD → USB memory) Network Interface
l
{MU:4.4 [PC5]_Upgrading} Ethernet port should be usable.
{MU:3.3 [2]_USB Memory} External Connecting Device
l
• Create/delete the folder saving various data of the equipment (“Establish
name_Printer name” folder in the FTP directory) The CD-ROM drive, USB memory, and compact flash reader should be usable.
{MU:4.1.5_Creating the Data Storage Folder} Browser
l
• Recovery of CF (compact flash memory) Internet Explorer should be installed.
{MC:13_RECOVERY PROCEDURE FOR CF (COMPACT FLASH MEMORY)} <NOTE>
When any pop-up blocker tool such as Google Toolbar is installed, the pop-up
4.1 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing blocker feature must be disabled.
When using the PC-Utility, set the FTP site directory in the PC for servicing in the
service center service station, etc. beforehand. Others
l
<NOTE> The FTP of the Internet Information Service should be operating.
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T straight cable is required for
connecting the PC for servicing.

<REMARKS>
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the PC for servicing to this
equipment via the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for
servicing to this equipment using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T crossing
cable.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-45
 MU-46
4.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing 4.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
To perform transmission and reception of various data with the equipment, there is a
l Setting a Windows Account for the PC for Servicing need to set the FTP site directory of the PC for servicing.
The username and password should be registered. Described here is the setting method for an example of Windows 2000.
• User: dryprinter Settings are performed in the same way basically for Windows XP, however
• Password: fujifilm precautionary items and addition setup items may be provided.
• Access permission: Administrator {MU:4.1.6_Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing}

<REMARKS> <NOTE>
To set the FTP site directory of the PC, Internet Information Services (IIS)
The above are already set and need not be set for PCs for servicing using DI Tools for
function (one of the Windows 2000 components) is required.
FUJIFILM imager equipment other than this equipment.
This Internet Information Services (IIS) will not be installed in the standard
installation of Windows 2000. If not installed in the PC used, install it as follows.
l Setting the FTP Site Directory
The FTP site directory should be set as follows Installing the Internet Information Services (IIS)
n
“Any drive name”:\Program Files\fujifilm\DRYPIX”
{MU:4.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
l Setting the USB Memory Volume Label Panel].
The USB memory is set with the volume label.
This setting is not necessary when no USB memory is to be used.
2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
<REMARKS> 3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
A USB memory can be used when upgrading the main unit software.
4. Select the checkbox of [Internet Information Services (IIS)] from the
[Components:] list, and click [Next].

5. Follow the instructions of the [Windows Components Wizard] dialog

to install the Internet Information Services (IIS).
If the message [Insert Disk] appears halfway through to prompt for the
“Windows 2000 CD-ROM” to be inserted, insert the CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive and click [OK].
<REMARKS>
If the [Microsoft Windows 2000 CD] window appears upon inserting the “Windows
2000 CD-ROM”, click [Exit] to close the window.

6. After completing installation, click [Finish].

7. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-46
 MU-47
Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
n 9. Set the directory of the FTP site (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX) at
[Local Path:] , and select the checkboxes of [Read], [Write], and [Log
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control visits].
Panel].
<NOTE>
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon. If the directory of the FTP site is not set to “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
DRYPIX”, the PC-Utility will not operate properly. If using other applications
3. Double-click the [Internet Services Manager] icon. on the same PC, after using the PC-Utility, return to the settings noted down
at step 8.
4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer] In addition, “C:\inetpub\ftproot” is the default value of Windows 2000 and
list. can be changed.

5. Check that [Default FTP Site] is set to [Running]. If set to [Stopped] or

[Pause], right-click [Default FTP Site] and select [Start].

6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and click [Properties] from the pop-up
menu.

7. Click the [Home Directory] tab.

8. Note down the path set at [Local Path:].
<NOTE>

As Windows 2000 has only one home directory for all accounts, if another
directory (folder name) has already been specified for [Local Path:], other
applications may be using it.

10. Click [OK].

11. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-47
 MU-48
4.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols 5. Click the [Time] tab.
When the [Regional Options] of the PC for servicing is not English, check the setting
of the grouping symbol, and change it if different from below. 6. Check that [Time separator] is “ : ” (colon).
n Checking Procedure

1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control

Panel].

2. Double-click the [Regional Options] icon.

3. Click the [Numbers] tab.
4. Check that [Decimal symbol] is “ . ” (period).

<NOTE>
If as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for [Digit
grouping symbol] and [Decimal symbol], change the symbol for [Digit
grouping symbol].

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-48
 MU-49
7. Click the [Date] tab.
8. Check that [Date separator] is “ / ” (slash).

9. Click [OK].
10. Close the [Control Panel] window.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-49

4.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder
Create the storage folder for various data of the equipment.
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
→ The “DPX2CopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX2 Copy Tool] window
is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPX2CopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
2. Enter the FTP site root directory at [Input drive of FTP-Home].
{MU:4.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
3. Enter [Establish name] and [Printer host name].
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
MU-50
4. [Make]
→ Data strage folder is created and the [Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
• Data strage folder:
“C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer
name”
• The data storage folder contains the following four empty folders:
• “Head” folder: Location for storing head data
• “Indv” folder: Location for storing individual data
• “Log” folder: Location for storing log data
• “Operation” folder: Location for storing equipment operation data
5. [OK]
6. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX2 Copy Tool] window.
7. Close all windows opened on the windows desktop.
8. Unload the main unit software CD-R from the CD-ROM drive.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-50

4.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC
for Servicing
When using the Windows XP (SP2) PC for servicing, the following precautions and
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software.
MU-51
n Windows Firewall Settings
Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, implement FTP site directory settings,
Windows XP will also require additional setting of the TCP Port number used by the
[Default FTP Site] to the Windows Firewall Exceptions. Set as follows.

n Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) 1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] →[Control
Panel].
If IIS has not been installed in the Windows XP PC for servicing to be used, perform
the additional install in the same way.
Also, during the installing procedure, check the following.
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
1. Select the checkmark in the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] 3. Double-click the [Internet Information Services] icon.
checkbox from the [Components:] list at [Add/Remove Windows
Components], and click [Details...]. 4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer]
list.
2. Check that the checkmark is selected in the [File Transfer Protocol 5. Double-click the [FTP Sites] folder from the [Name] list.
(FTP) Service] checkbox from the [Subcomponents of Internet
Information Services (IIS):] list. If not selected, select the checkmark,
and click [OK]. 6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and select [Properties].
<NOTE> 7. At the [FTP Site] tab, note down the number displayed at [TCP Port:]
If [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service] is not selected at the of [Identification] (“21” in the following screen example).
[Subcomponents of Internet Information Services (IIS):] list, [Default FTP
Site] will be disabled, disabling directory settings of the FTP site hereafter.

3. Proceed with the installation procedure according to the instructions

displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-51
 MU-52
8. Click [Cancel]. 14. Enter “FTP” in [Name:], and enter the number noted down at step 7. in
[Port number:] (“21” in the following screen example).
9. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
10. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].

11. Double-click the [Windows Firewall] icon.

12. Click the [Exceptions] tab.

15. Click [OK].

13. Click [Add Port...].

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-52
 MU-53
16. Check that the checkmark of the [FTP] checkbox has been added in 17. Click the [Advanced] tab.
the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab.
<REMARKS>
18. Click [Settings] of [Network Connection Settings].
The contents of the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab of
the Windows Firewall shown below are just an example, and actual contents
displayed will differ according to the state of use of the PC for servicing (different
programs and service names may be registered).

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-53
 MU-54
19. Select the checkbox of [FTP Server] of [Advanced Settings] window. 21. Click [OK] of the [Advance Settings] window.

→ This will display the [Service Settings] window.

22. Click [OK].
20. Check that host name is entered at [Name or IP address (for example
192.168.0.12) of the computer hosting this service on your network:] 23. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
then click [OK].
n Disabling Browser’s Pop-up Blocker
When the PC for servicing runs Windows XP (SP2 or later), the browser’s pop-up
blocker must be disabled.

→ Returns to the [Advanced Settings] window.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-54
 MU-55
4.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations 4.2.3 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment
(Starting PC-Utility)
4.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
Connect PC for servicing to the network. 1. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.
1. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which 2. Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
the equipment is connected. <ENTER> key on the key board.
http://equipment IP address:20051/USER/Login.htm
4.2.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Web
<NOTE>
Server Start)
When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.
Start the Web server of the equipment.

1. Turn ON the power of the equipment. → The login screen is displayed.

2. After the equipment sets into the standby state, press the <UP> key/
<DOWN> key on the operation panel together for about 5 seconds
until you hear a blip.

→ The web server of the equipment starts.The display on the operation panel
will not change even when the Web sever is started by the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-55
 MU-56
3. Enter the following username and password, select the language →When Utility starts, [PC-UTL Executing] is displayed on the operation panel
of the equipment.
(English) and click [Login].
Login: dryprinter
Password: fujifilm

→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-56
 MU-57
4.2.4 PC-Utility Operations n Selecting Menu Command
Select PC-Utility menu, and perform equipment settings, etc.
<NOTE> 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
command name.
When PC-Utility is left unaccessed for 20 minutes after it is connected, the
equipment will terminate the Web server and disconnect PC Utility. In this case, <REMARKS>
your settings in progress will not be saved. Items marked with “+” contain sub-menu items for commands below them.
To continue your settings, etc., for PC-Utility, you must terminate Internet
Explorer and restart the Web server.

→ The command execution window appears in the upper right frame of the
window.
<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3], or command of the client setting is
selected, the setting values already set for the equipment are displayed in the
command execution window.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-57
 MU-58
n Executing Command l To Operate the Equipment

l To Change the Equipment Settings 1. To check the operation of the equipment, select/enter the operation
conditions, etc. in the command execution window, and click [Execute].
1. To change the equipment settings, select/enter the setting values in
the command execution window, and click [Execute].
<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3] is selected, scroll the command
execution window until the command is visible.

→ The equipment operates according to the operation conditions. When the

operation has completed successfully, [Command completed.] is displayed.

→ When the equipment settings have been changed successfully, [Command

completed.] is displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-58
 MU-59
l To Register A New Client 3. For equipment using main unit software version V2.2 or later, select
<REMARKS> [Add] to create clients based on default settings.

In equipment using main unit software version V2.2 or later, the client setting copy
function is added. This function copies client settings already set so that they can be
used for other clients.
In equipment using main unit software version V2.4 or later, the client list collective
editing function is provided.
{MU:4.4 [PC3-3a]_Read CLTInfo}
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
Client].
To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the
client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title].
<NOTE>
• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied
client for the new client.
• ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied.

2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title].

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-59
 MU-59.1
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-59.1
 MU-59.2
BLANK PAGE

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-59.2
 MU-60
l To Delete the Client → If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Delete Client].

2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].

3. [Execute]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-60
 MU-61
l To Change the Client Name 3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title].
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the 4. [Execute]
[Change Client Name].

2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title].

→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-61
 MU-61.1
l To Change the Client Settings → The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
name of the client whose settings is to be changed.

2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].

3. [Execute]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-61.1
 MU-61.2
4. Change the client settings.
5. [Execute]

→ The client settings is changed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-61.2
 MU-62
4.2.5 Disconnecting the Equipment

1. After completing settings, click [Logout] button of the maintenance

tree.

→ The equipment performs reinitialization and [PC-UTL Executing] disappears.

→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].

2. Close the logout window.

<REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{MU:4.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-62
 MU-63
4.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree A B

PC-Utility
[PC1-4] Log data
[PC1] System information and setup
[PC1-4-1] Display Error Log
[PC1-1] Setting1
[PC1-4-2] Clear Error Log
[PC1-1-1] Set DICOM
[PC1-4-3] Display DICOM Log
[PC1-1-1-1] AE Title
[PC1-4-4] Logging Mode
[PC1-1-1-2] Port No.
[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data
[PC1-1-2] Set Network
[PC3] Client Configuration
[PC1-1-2-1] IP Address
[PC3-1] Add Client
[PC1-1-2-2] Sub Net Mask
[PC3-2] Delete Client
[PC1-1-2-3] Gateway
[PC3-3] Change Client Name
[PC1-1-2-4] Host Name
[PC3-3a] Read CLTInfo
[PC1-1-3] Display Mac address
[PC3-4] Clients
[PC1-1-4] Registration service pc
[PC3-4-1] Protocol
[PC1-2] Setting2
[PC3-4-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)
[PC1-2-1] Set Magazines
[PC3-4-1-2] N Event Report RQ
[PC1-2-2] Option Slot
[PC3-4-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range
[PC1-2-3] Enable QC (0116H Warning)
[PC1-2-4] Set Target Den. [PC3-4-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox
[PC1-2-5] Printing Dmax (B604H Warning)
[PC1-2-6] Set Rem.Films [PC3-4-1-5] Change Film Size
[PC1-2-7] User 17-Steps [PC3-4-1-6] Use System Timeout
[PC1-2-8] User SMPTE [PC3-4-1-7] Presentation LUT
[PC1-2-9] Display indv. data [PC3-4-1-8] Precede Picking Up
[PC1-3] Setting3 [PC3-4-1-9] Use Max/Min Density
[PC1-3-1] Set Date [PC3-4-1-10] Extension Format ID
[PC1-3-2] Ele Save Mode [PC3-4-1-11] Use Default Annotation
[PC1-3-3] Set Alarm [PC3-4-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable 110H[F])
[PC1-3-4] Set Language [PC3-4-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14
[PC1-3-5] Size Type

A B C D E

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-63
 MU-64
C D E F G H

[PC3-4-2] Magnify [PC3-4-4] LUT1 to LUT8

[PC3-4-2-1] Default Smoothing Type [PC3-4-4-1] Max Density
[PC3-4-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/ [PC3-4-4-2] Min Density
Crop Behavior [PC3-4-4-3] γTable No
[PC3-4-2-3] Magnification Type [PC3-4-4-4] Contrast
[PC3-4-2-4] Requested Image Size [PC3-4-4-5] Number of Tuning Points
[PC3-4-2-5] Default Magnification Type [PC3-4-4-6] Density
[PC3-4-2-6] Default Smoothing Type [PC3-4-4-7] Shift
[PC3-4-2-7] Default Requested Image Size [PC3-4-4-8] Contrast
[PC3-4-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior [PC3-4-5] Output Format
[PC3-4-2-9] Procedure [PC3-4-5-1] Film Size
[PC3-4-2-10] Edge Detection [PC3-4-5-2] Medium Type
[PC3-4-2-11] Detection Level [PC3-4-5-3] Film Orientation
[PC3-4-2-12] Sharpness [PC3-4-5-4] Border Density
[PC3-4-2-13] Character Color [PC3-4-5-5] Polarity
[PC3-4-3] LUT Common [PC3-4-5-6] Trim
[PC3-4-3-1] Default LUT [PC3-4-5-7] Trim Width
[PC3-4-3-2] Illumination [PC3-4-5-8] Trim Density
[PC3-4-3-3] Ambient Light [PC3-4-5-9] Number of Copies
[PC3-4-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#) [PC3-4-5-10] Print Priority
[PC3-4-3-5] Default Illumination [PC3-4-5-11] Default Number of Copies
[PC3-4-3-6] Default Ambient Light [PC3-4-5-12] Default Print Priority
[PC3-4-3-7] Procedure [PC3-4-5-13] Default Medium Type
[PC3-4-5-14] Default Film Orientation
F G H [PC3-4-5-15] Default Film Size
[PC3-4-5-16] Default Border Density
[PC3-4-5-17] Default Trim

I J K L

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-64
 MU-65
I J K L M

[PC3-4-5-18] Default Polarity [PC6] OutputFilm

[PC3-4-5-19] Mirror [PC6-1] Cleaning Film
[PC3-4-5-20] Margin Between Image [PC6-2] Grid & Flat
[PC3-4-5-21] Image Layout [PC6-3] SMPTE
[PC3-4-5-22] Processing Type [PC6-4] No Edge mode
[PC3-4-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area [PC7] F.D.C.
[PC3-4-5-24] Image Crop Side Area [PC7-1] Auto F.D.C.
[PC3-4-6] Annotation [PC7-2] Check Density
[PC3-4-6-1] Annotation Font [PC7-3] 24-Steps
[PC3-4-6-2] Annotation Extend [PC7-4] Display 24-Steps
[PC3-4-6-3] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/ [PC7-5] Manual F.D.C.
Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right [PC7-6] Set Collect.T.
[PC3-5] Common [PC7-7] Clear Collect.T.
[PC3-5-1] Data Transfer Timeout [PC8] Head Check
[PC3-5-2] Association Count [PC8-1] Fan Operation
[PC3-5-3] Logging DICOM [PC8-2] 16VH
[PC3-5-4] Model [PC8-3] Head Voltage.
[PC3-5-5] Manufacturer [PC8-4] Head Regist
[PC3-5-6] Default Client [PC9] Print Position
[PC3-6] Sarmaker [PC9-1] Side Margin
[PC4] File Transfer [PC9-2] Top Margin
[PC4-1] Single File
[PC4-2] Analysis Data N
[PC4-3] Head Data
[PC4-4] G-curve Data
[PC4-5] Operation Data
[PC5] Upgrading
[PC5-1] Full Install
[PC5-2] Upgrading
M

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-65
 MU-66
N

[PC10] Check Mech

[PC10-1] Film Removing
[PC10-2] Motor Ope
[PC10-3] HEAD U/D
[PC10-4] Positioning Film
[PC10-4-1] Unit Ope
[PC10-5] Sub Scan
[PC10-6] Edge Sensor
[PC10-6-1] Edge Sen.Posi
[PC10-6-2] LED ON/OFF
[PC10-7] Nip Adjust

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-66
 MU-67
4.4 PC-Utility Command Details [PC1-1-1-2] Port No.

[PC1] System information and setup <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the port number of the equipment.

[PC1-1] Setting1 <OPERATIONS>

[PC1-1-1] Set DICOM 1. Enter the port number (decimal).

Command for setting the DICOM communication of the equipment. <REMARKS>
[PC1-1-1-1] AE Title Input range: 0 to 65535

<FUNCTION> 2. [Execute]
Command for setting the name of the printer for 10 pix/mm recording.
3. Reboot the equipment.
<OPERATIONS>
[PC1-1-2] Set Network
1. Enter the AE Title (16 digits).
[PC1-1-2-1] IP Address
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the <FUNCTION>
1-byte code table.
Command for setting the IP address of the equipment.
• Do not enter upper and lower cases incorrectly.
• The following are not accepted. <REMARKS>
• All spaces • Input range: 0 to 255
• Space for the first digit • Unaccepted: “0.0.0.0”, “255.255.255.255”, no value is entered
• First character is a number

<OPERATIONS>
2. [Execute]
1. Enter the IP address (decimal).
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-67
 MU-68
[PC1-1-2-2] Sub Net Mask [PC1-1-2-4] Host Name

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the subnet mask of the equipment. Command for setting the host name of the equipment.
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
• Input range: 0 to 255 • The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower cases),
• If no value is entered, it will be unacceptable. numbers, and hyphen “-”.
• The following are unaccepted.
• Space
<OPERATIONS> • Less than 2 characters
• Name starting with a number.
1. Enter the subnet mask (decimal).
2. [Execute] <OPERATIONS>
3. Reboot the equipment. 1. Enter the host name (maximum 16 digits).
[PC1-1-2-3] Gateway 2. [Execute]
<FUNCTION> 3. Reboot the equipment.
Command for setting the default gateway address of the equipment.
[PC1-1-3] Display Mac address
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 0 to 255 <FUNCTION>
• Unaccepted: “0.0.0.0”, “255.255.255.255” The MAC address of the CPU board is displayed.
• If no value is entered, it will be taken as incomplete setting.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Enter the default gateway address (decimal).

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-68
 MU-69
[PC1-1-4] Registration service pc [PC1-2] Setting2

<FUNCTION> [PC1-2-1] Set Magazines

Command for registering the PC for servicing to enable file transfer. Any unregistered
PC for servicing is limited in function and does not support “[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data” <FUNCTION>
and “[PC4] File Transfer” of PC-Utility. Command for setting the films for each magazine.
<REMARKS>
<OPERATIONS>
Only one PC for servicing can be registered. Only the one registered last supports file
transfer.
1. Select the magazine number.
<OPERATIONS> 2. Select whether to use this magazine number or not.
1. Enter the establish name. 3. Select the film size.
<NOTE> • [8x10] : 20cm x 25cm
• [10x12] : 25cm x 30cm
Use one-byte alphanumeric when entering establish name. • [10x14] : 26cm x 36cm
• [14x17] : 35cm x 43cm
2. Enter the IP address of the current PC for servicing.
4. Select [Blue] for the film base color.
3. [Execute]
5. [Execute]
4. Reboot the equipment.
6. Reboot the equipment.
[PC1-2-2] Option Slot

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether sheet-feeder unit is mounted.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select whether to use sheet-feeder unit or not.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-69
 MU-70
[PC1-2-3] Enable QC [PC1-2-5] Printing Dmax

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling the image QC function of the U-Utility. Command for enabling/disabling step edge pattern [Density 4].

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.

2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. [PC1-2-6] Set Rem. Films

[PC1-2-4] Set Target Den. <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the number of films remaining in each magazine.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the target density of each magazine. <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the magazine number.
1. Select the magazine number. 2. Enter the number of remaining films.
2. Set the density value. 3. [Execute]
• [Density 1] : Density of the first step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 2))
• [Density 2] : Density of the second step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 3))
[PC1-2-7] User 17-Steps
• [Density 3] : Density of the third step (Range: 192 to 250)
<FUNCTION>
3. [Execute] Command for setting whether to display “17-Steps” at [4.Film Output>] of the U-Utility.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-70
 MU-71
[PC1-2-8] User SMPTE [PC1-3] Setting3

<FUNCTION> [PC1-3-1] Set Date

Command for setting whether to display “SMPTE” at [4.Film Output>] of the U-Utility.
<FUNCTION>
<OPERATIONS> Command for setting the system date and time.

1. Select the value to be set. <OPERATIONS>

2. [Execute] 1. Enter the system date and time.
3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]
[PC1-2-9] Display indv. data [PC1-3-2] Ele Save Mode

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
The modified date of the equipment individual data is displayed. Command for setting the timer value when this equipment shifts into the sleep mode.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the sleep mode transition time.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-71
 MU-72
[PC1-3-3] Set Alarm [PC1-3-5] Size Type

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the alarm. Command for setting the display type of the film size displayed on the operation panel.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the alarm. 1. Select the type of the film size to be displayed.
• [OFF] : No alarm is sounded. • [CM] : Displayed in cm.
• [ON] : Alarm is sounded. • [INCH] : Displayed in inches.
• [PULSE] : Alarm stops after about three seconds.
3. [Execute]
2. Select the alarm tone.
[LOW]/[MEDIUM]/[HIGH]
4. Reboot the equipment.
3. [Execute]
[PC1-3-4] Set Language

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the display language of the operation panel.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the display language.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-72
 MU-73
[PC1-4] Log data [PC1-4-3] Display DICOM Log

[PC1-4-1] Display Error Log <FUNCTION>

Command for displaying DICOM logs.
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying error logs.
<OPERATIONS>

<OPERATIONS> 1. [Execute]
→ The DICOM logs are displayed.
1. [Execute]
→ The error logs are displayed.

[PC1-4-2] Clear Error Log

<FUNCTION>
Command for deleting error logs.

<OPERATIONS>

1. [Execute]
→ All error logs are deleted.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-73
 MU-73.1
[PC1-4-4] Logging Mode <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Select the log acquisition mode.
For setting whether to write analysis logs out of the logs written in CF (operation logs • [Enable]: Saves operation data logs and analysis logs.
and analysis logs) when the equipment is shut down. • [Disable]: Saves operation data logs only.
{MD:2.5.1_Ending Process}
<REMARKS>
<NOTE>
Log acquisition mode and list of saved logs
This menu is available from main unit software version V2.1 or later. : Log to be saved, -: Logs not to be saved
Log type Logging mode (Enable) Non-log acquisition mode
<REMARKS>
Error log  
Purpose of use of each log IOT  
Log type Details ISC  
Records equipment failures. Cover open is also record- Mechanical log  
Error log
ed as error. Magazine open is not taken as error. Edge sensor log  
Records ON/OFF state of sensors and motors in PFIF log  
IOT timechart format. Special viewer is required for referenc-
Log when jam occurs
Operation data log

ing.  
Records reception of messages between tasks of con- DICOM log  -
ISC
veyance and print functions. Main log  -
Mechanism log Records control of ON/OFF of sensors and motors, etc. Output log  -
Records edge sensor reading values during 35x43 cm PCUTL log  -
Edge sensor log
size printing.
Spooler log  -
Records message transmission/reception between the
PFIF log Trace log  -
formatter and printer.
Jam log Collects logs related to jams when jams occur.

DICOM log
DICOM communication log with connected part. Log
volume is heavy. 2. [Execute]
Log on control of all applications. Records start and
Main log termination time, control transition time with each sub-
system, etc.
Analysis log

Records progress to printing after image processing

Output log
completes.
PCUTL log PC-Utility function processing trace.
Records results of printing request. Also records infor-
Spooler log mation such as remaining films when printing is request-
ed.
Trace log Records start state between sub-systems on chart.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-73.1
 MU-73.2
[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data

<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring individual data files.
The files to be transferred are the files in the “Indv” folder (C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\
DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Indv).

<OPERATIONS>

1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered.

{MU:4.4 [PC1-1-4]_Registration service pc}

2. Select transfer direction.

• [PC <- Printer] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
• [PC -> Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment

3. [Execute]
→ File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If this function is used, the “CLTInfo.txt” file in the “indv” folder of the PC for
servicing will be transferred.
This file is written in the format where the setting information of each client is
partitioned by a comma “setting item, setting value”.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-73.2
 MU-74
[PC3] Client Configuration 3. For equipment using main unit software version V2.2 or later, select
[Add] to create clients based on default settings.

[PC3-1] Add Client To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the
client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title].
<REMARKS>
<NOTE>
In equipment using main unit software version V2.2 or later, the client setting copy
function is added. This function copies client settings already set so that they can be • When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied
used for other clients. client for the new client.
In equipment using main unit software version V2.4 or later, the client list collective • ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied.
editing function is provided.
{MU:4.4 [PC3-3a]_Read CLTInfo}

1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
Client].

2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title].

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-74
 MU-75
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-75
 MU-76
[PC3-2] Delete Client → If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Delete Client].

2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].

3. [Execute]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-76
 MU-77
[PC3-3] Change Client Name 3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title].
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the 4. [Execute]
[Change Client Name].

2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title].

→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-77
 MU-77.1
[PC3-3a] Read CLTInfo 3. Open the “Indv” folder, and open “CLTInfo.csv” located in the
Main unit software version V2.4 or later is added with a function which allows you, equipment individual data using Microsoft Excel.
using Microsoft Excel, to edit “CLTInfo.csv” data created when equipment individual
data is saved and add/correct/delete client settings in lists. It is convenient when
setting the same client settings for multiple DRYPIX 2000s.
<NOTE>
• Observe the following precautions when editing with software other than
Microsoft Excel.
• Do not change the filename (“CLTInfo.csv”) and file format (partitioned using
comma).
• Do not use double quotations ( “ ) and commas ( , ) for annotations.
• Do not delete the initially registered clients (“default”, “FCR-CSL”,
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST”).
• When adding clients, make sure none of the parameter values are insufficient.
• Make sure that parameter values are within the range prescribed in the DICOM
Confirm Statement.
• Up to 64 clients can be registered.
• Renaming a client using the editing function will register the client as the very
last one and displays it at the bottommost level of the maintenance tree.
• If the extension format has been specified, the annotation cannot be set. 4. Add/correct/delete client settings.
• This function is provided for main unit software version V2.4 or later.
<REMARKS>
In the following example, “FCR-CSL” is copied and a client called “FCR-CSL2” is
n Procedure for Collectively Editing Client Settings added.
(1) Copy the “FCR-CSL” column.
Use the “CLTInfo.csv” in the “Indv” folder loaded in the PC for servicing or the USB
(2) Paste the copied column to the blank column.
memory.
(3) Change the client name to “FCR-CSL2”.
1. Save the equipment individual data of the printer. (4) Change the client settings.

l When Saving in the PC for Servicing

{MU:4.4 [PC2]_Transfer Indv. Data}

l When Saving in the USB Memory

{MU:3.3 [2-2-1]_Save to USB>}

2. When using a USB memory, connect it to the equipment.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-77.1
 MU-77.2
5. Save the data by [Save] in the CSV format in the folder where “CLTInfo.
csv” was located.

6. Select [Read CLTInfo] of PC-Utility.

7. Select the folder storing the edited “CLTInfo.csv”.
[Service PC]/[USB memory]

8. [Execute]
→ “CLTInfo.csv” is sent to the equipment.

9. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-77.2
 MU-78
[PC3-4] Clients → The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
Command for setting the various parameters for the client (image output device).
<REMARKS>
The parameters related to the image processing of each client set here apply when
image processing parameters are not set for the image data sent by the client.

n To Change the Client Settings

1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
name of the client whose settings is to be changed.

2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].

3. [Execute]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-78
 MU-79
4. Change the client settings. [PC3-4-1] Protocol

5. [Execute] [PC3-4-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how unexpected data received should be treated.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1: indicate] : Send error message

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-4-1-2] N Event Report RQ

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how N Event Report Requests (report of events to clients)
should be treated.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

→ The client settings is changed. • [0: disable] : No report sent
• [1: enable] : Send report

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-79
 MU-80
[PC3-4-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H Warning) [PC3-4-1-5] Change Film Size

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting how data out of range should be treated. If the film size/specified by the client differ from that of the printer, set whether to
change film.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
1. Select one of the following.
• [1: indicate] : Send error message • [0: 0116H (W)]
Enables film to be changed. Details of errors which occur when the film is
2. [Execute] changed can be set whether to send to the client or not by setting [Attribute
List error (0107H Warning)], [Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H
3. Reboot the equipment. Warning)], [Image Size is Larger than Imagebox (B604H Warning)].
• [272: 0110H (F)]
[PC3-4-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H Warning) Details of errors are sent to the client, without changing the film.
• [21317: 5345H (F)]
<FUNCTION> Details of errors (unique values for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to the client,
In the BIB N-SET mode (when image data is received in frames), images are reduced without changing the film.
if they are too large to fit the image frame. Select whether to notify that the image has <REMARKS>
been reduced.
Set the following according to the client system.
<OPERATIONS>
QA-WS771 • For QA-WS771 software version A05 or later: [21317:5345H
(F)]
1. Select the value to be set. • For QA-WS771 software version A04 or earlier: [272:0110H
(F)]
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1: indicate] : Send error message HI-C655D • For HI-C655D software version A08/B00 or later:
[21317:5345H (F)]
2. [Execute] • For HI-C655D software version A07 or earlier: [272:0110H (F)]
CR-IR346CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
3. Reboot the equipment. for FCR XG-1)
CR-IR348CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
for FCR5000 series)
Synapse [0:0116H (W)]
Other modalities Set according to operating environment of installation site.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-80
 MU-81
[PC3-4-1-6] Use System Timeout [PC3-4-1-8] Precede Picking Up

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
If problems occur when the association of clients which are continuously connected is Command for setting whether to use the pre-removal function for starting removal
disconnected at the timeout value set at the printer, set to ignore timeout. operations immediately after receiving the output request to increase the printing
For details, refer to “Modality Connection List”. speed.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: No] : Ignore timeout • [0: No] : The pre-removal function is not used.
• [1: Yes] : Enable timeout • [1: Yes] : The pre-removal function is used.
<NOTE> 2. [Execute]
Select [0: No] (ignore timeout) for equipment resulting in problems.
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute] [PC3-4-1-9] Use Max/Min Density
3. Reboot the equipment. <FUNCTION>
[PC3-4-1-7] Presentation LUT Command for setting whether to use the minimum density value and maximum density
value of the equipment or client.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting whether to use LUT information sent from the client.

<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: Printer] : Printer side
1. Select the value to be set. • [1: Modality] : Client side
• [0: No] : LUT sent from the client is not used. 2. [Execute]
• [1: Yes] : LUT sent from the client is used.
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-81
 MU-82
[PC3-4-1-10] Extension Format ID [PC3-4-1-11] Use Default Annotation

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Enter the ID to differentiate the extension format used by the specific client. Select whether to use “Annotation” set at “[PC3-4-6] Annotation”.
<NOTE> {MU:4.4 [PC3-4-6]_Annotation}

If the extension format is set even though annotation has been set, the following <OPERATIONS>
error message will be displayed. (Main unit software version V2.4 or later)
“ERROR: Both ‘Extension Format ID’ and ‘Annotation’ are set.”
{MU:4.4 [PC3-4-6]_Annotation}
1. Select the value to be set.
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS> Select [0:No] if “CR” is set for “[PC3-4-1-10] Extension Format ID”.

1. Selected the ID referring to the table below. • [0: No] : Not used
• [1: Yes] : Use
Manufacturer Model ID Use Default Annotation
Siemens - SM If user requires annotation output
2. [Execute]
set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No]. 3. Reboot the equipment.
Philips Easy Vision EV No
[PC3-4-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F])
HITACHI Medico DR2000 Series HM No
Clavis View HM If user requires annotation output <FUNCTION>
set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No]. Command for enabling/disabling base color change function.
FUJIFILM QA-WS771 CR No
<OPERATIONS>
HI-C655D CR No
CR-IR346CL
(Console for FCR XG-1)
CR No 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: disable] : Disables the base color change function
CR-IR348CL CR No
(Console for FCR 5000 • [1: enable] : Enables the base color change function
series)
Synapse CR No
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-82
 MU-83
[PC3-4-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14 [PC3-4-2] Magnify
Command for setting the default value for enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION>
[PC3-4-2-1] Default Smoothing Type
Command for setting whether to define 11x14” size as 25.7x36.4 cm or 27.9x35.6 cm.
<NOTE> <FUNCTION>
27.9x35.6 cm is currently not available. Command for setting the default smoothing type.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.

[1: Sharp]/[2: Medium]/[3: Smooth]
• [0: 27.9x35.6 cm]
• [1: 25.7x36.4 cm] 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-83
 MU-84
[PC3-4-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior n Enlargement/Reduction Processing
<FUNCTION> Setting Processing Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3

Command for setting the default values if the client does not send the Requested Response status 0000H(S) B60AH(W) *1 0116H(W)
Decimate/Crop Behavior tag (image reduction treatment). Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Taking Ignoring (2020,
duction interpolation (CUBIC (2010,0060)=CUBIC, 0030), enlarges/re-
<OPERATIONS> DECI- interpolation). reduces image by duces image to fit
MATE interpolation (CUBIC into image box. If
interpolation ). reducing, reduces
1. Select the required settings. image by interpola-
tion (CUBIC interpo-
• [1: DECIMATE] : Reduces images by interpolation to fit into the image box. lation).
• [2: CROP] : Cuts away the outer perimeter taking the image center as
Response status 0000H(S) B609H(W) *1 B609H(W) *1
the origin.
• [3: FAIL] : Rejects reception because the image does not fit into the Enlargement/re- Cuts away unneces- Cuts away unneces- Centers image en-
duction sary parts after cen- sary parts after cen- larged/reduced (CU-
image box. tering the specified tering the specified BIC interpolation) at
CROP
2. [Execute] image and image
box.
image and image
box.
the size specified by
(2020,0030) with the
image box, and cuts
3. Reboot the equipment. away unnecessary
parts.
Response status 0000H(S) C603H(F) C603H(F)
FAIL Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Images are not re- Images are not re-
duction interpolation (CUBIC ceived. ceived.
interpolation).

However, conditions are as follows.

• Condition 1: (2010,0060)=CUBIC. When image is larger than the image box, and
image is reduced.
• Condition 2: (2010, 0060)=NONE. When image is larger than the image box.
• Condition 3: When size specified by (2020,0030) is larger than the image box.

The meanings of response status are as follows.

B609H(W) : Image size is larger than the Image Box size. The Image has been
cropped to fit.
B60AH(W) : Image size or Combined Print Image size is larger than the Image Box
size.
Image or Combined Print Image has been decimated to fit.

*1: If B604H(W) is ignored at Protocol setting, 0000H (S) is returned.

{MU:4.4[PC3-4-1-4]_Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H Warning)}

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-84
 MU-85
[PC3-4-2-3] Magnification Type [PC3-4-2-5] Default Magnification Type

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the magnification type. Command for setting whether to use the magnification type of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: NONE] : No magnification is implemented
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: CUBIC] : Magnification is implemented • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-4-2-4] Requested Image Size
[PC3-4-2-6] Default Smoothing Type
<FUNCTION>
Command for specifying the length of the image line printed in one image frame.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use smoothing type of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the length. (Range: 0 to 7000)
1. Select the value to be set.
2. [Execute] • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-85
 MU-86
[PC3-4-2-7] Default Requested Image Size [PC3-4-2-9] Procedure

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the Requested Image Size of the equipment or Command for setting the enlargement/reduction processing.
the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. [0: A-VR]/[1: SSM]
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment. [PC3-4-2-10] Edge Detection

[PC3-4-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the edge enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION> If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
Command for setting whether to use the Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior of the and [Smooth].
equipment or the client if the client does not send the Requested Decimate/Crop
Behavior tag (image reduction treatment). <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: OFF] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is not performed.
1. Select the value to be set. • [1: ON] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is performed.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-86
 MU-87
[PC3-4-2-11] Detection Level [PC3-4-2-13] Character Color

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the edge detection level value. Command for setting the continuous emphasis density settings flag (the color
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium], specified for characters).
and [Smooth]. If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
and [Smooth].
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the edge detection level value. (Range: 1 to 1023.)
1. Select the value to be set.
2. [Execute] [0: White]/[1: Black]

3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]

[PC3-4-2-12] Sharpness 3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the sharpness adjustment parameter.
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
and [Smooth].

<OPERATIONS>

1. Set the sharpness adjustment parameter. (Range: -70 to 300.)

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-87
 MU-88
[PC3-4-3] LUT Common [PC3-4-3-3] Ambient Light
Set the common settings for the tone correction processing parameters.
<FUNCTION>
[PC3-4-3-1] Default LUT
Command for setting ambient light.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting the default LUT number.
1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535)
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
1. Select the LUT number. The total of the “[PC3-4-3-3] Ambient Light” and “[PC3-4-3-2] Illumination”
values should be less than 4000.
[1] to [8]

2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-4-3-2] Illumination [PC3-4-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting illumination. Command for setting whether to use the LUT number of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535) 1. Select the value to be set.
<NOTE> • [0: Printer] : Printer side
The total of the “[PC3-4-3-2] Illumination” and “[PC3-4-3-3] Ambient Light” • [1: Modality] : Client side
values should be less than 4000.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-88
 MU-89
[PC3-4-3-5] Default Illumination [PC3-4-3-7] Procedure

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the illumination settings of the equipment or the Command for setting the tone correction processing method.
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the tone correction processing method.
1. Select the value to be set. [0: SAR]/[1: BAR]
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-4-3-6] Default Ambient Light

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the ambient light of the equipment or the client.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-89
 MU-90
[PC3-4-4] LUT1 to LUT8 [PC3-4-4-3] γ Table No
Set the default values for the tone correction processing parameters for each LUT
number (LUT1 to LUT8). <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the γ table number.
[PC3-4-4-1] Max Density
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the maximum density. 1. Set the γ table number.
• For SAR: 11 to 99
<OPERATIONS>
• For BAR: 1 to 20 (set within 1 to 10)
1. Set the maximum density value. 2. [Execute]
• For SAR, set the maximum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range:
0 to 300) 3. Reboot the equipment.
• For BAR, set the maximum density by percentage. (Range: 0 to 100)
[PC3-4-4-4] Contrast
2. [Execute]
<FUNCTION>
3. Reboot the equipment.
Command for setting the contrastr.
[PC3-4-4-2] Min Density
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
1. Set the contrast value.
Command for setting the minimum density.
• For SAR, set the contrast in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 10 to 400)
<OPERATIONS> • For BAR, this contrast setting does not exist for the SAR method.

1. Set the minimum density value. 2. [Execute]

• For SAR, set the minimum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (The 3. Reboot the equipment.
value of the minimum density must be lower than that of the maximum
density.) (Range: 0 to 300)
• For BAR, Min Density setting is not required.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-90
 MU-91
[PC3-4-4-5] Number of Tuning Points [PC3-4-4-7] Shift

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of the tuning points. Command for setting the shift density.
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
used). used).

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Set the number of tuning points (Range: 0 to 5) 1. Set the shift density in multiples of 100. (Range: -100 to 100)
The [Density], [Shift], [Contrast] values must be set for each tuning point when Follow the rule of Min Density<Density ± Shift<Max Density.
the number of tuning points is set to 1 or more.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-4-4-8] Contrast
[PC3-4-4-6] Density
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the contrast at the tuning point.
Command for setting the tuning density. For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if used).
used).
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the contrast at the tuning point in multiples of 100. (Range: 10 to
1. Set the tuning density in multiples of 100. (Range: 1 to 300) 400)
Follow the rule of Min Density<Density<Max Density.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-91
 MU-92
[PC3-4-5] Output Format [PC3-4-5-3] Film Orientation
Command for setting the client-dependent default settings for the output format.
<FUNCTION>
[PC3-4-5-1] Film Size
Set the film orientation.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting the default film size.
1. Select the film orientation.
<OPERATIONS> [1: PORTRAIT]/[2: LANDSCAPE]

1. Select the film size. 2. [Execute]

[1: 8x10]/[2: 10x14]/[4: 14x17]/[5: 10x12]
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
[PC3-4-5-4] Border Density
3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
[PC3-4-5-2] Medium Type
Command for setting the border density.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Set the default film base color.
1. Set the border density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0 to
<OPERATIONS> 300)

1. Select the film base color. 2. [Execute]

[1: Blue]/[2: Clear]
3. Reboot the equipment.
<NOTE>
Select the [1: Blue]. [PC3-4-5-5] Polarity

<FUNCTION>
2. [Execute]
Command for setting whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
3. Reboot the equipment. <OPERATIONS>

1. Select whether to reverse the black/white of the image.

• [1: Normal] : Black/white reversal off
• [2: Reverse] : Black/white reversal on

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-92
 MU-93
[PC3-4-5-6] Trim [PC3-4-5-8] Trim Density

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to print trimming. Command for setting the image trim density.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select whether to print trimming. 1. Set the image trim density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0
• [0: OFF] : Without trim to 300)
• [1: ON] : With trim
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-4-5-9] Number of Copies
[PC3-4-5-7] Trim Width
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the default number of print copies.
Command for setting the trim width.
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
If the setting of the “[PC3-4-5-6] Trim” is [OFF] the value set for the “[PC3-4-5-7] 1. Set number of print copies. (Range: 1 to 99)
Trim Width” will be invalid.
2. [Execute]
<OPERATIONS> 3. Reboot the equipment.
1. Set the width of the trim in pixels. (Range: 1 to 9) [PC3-4-5-10] Print Priority

2. [Execute] <FUNCTION>
3. Reboot the equipment. Command for setting the print priority level.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

• [1: HIGH]
• [2: MEDIUM]
• [3: LOW]

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-93
 MU-94
[PC3-4-5-11] Default Number of Copies [PC3-4-5-13] Default Medium Type

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the number of copies setting of the equipment or Command for setting the film base color priority level setting of equipment or the
the client. client.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [1: Modality] : Client side

2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-4-5-12] Default Print Priority [PC3-4-5-14] Default Film Orientation

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the print priority setting of the equipment or the Command for setting whether to use the film orientation setting of the equipment or
client. the client.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [1: Modality] : Client side

2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-94
 MU-95
[PC3-4-5-15] Default Film Size [PC3-4-5-17] Default Trim

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the film size priority level setting of equipment or the client. Command for setting whether to use the print trimming setting of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-4-5-16] Default Border Density
[PC3-4-5-18] Default Polarity
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the border density setting of the equipment or
<FUNCTION>
the client. Command for setting whether to use reverse the black/white setting of the equipment
or the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
1. Select the value to be set.
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-95
 MU-96
[PC3-4-5-19] Mirror [PC3-4-5-21] Image Layout

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting film surface/back. Command for setting how image frames are arranged.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select how image frames are arranged.
• [0: OFF(Normal)] : Glossy side to back • [0: concentration]:
• [1: ON(Mirror)] : Glossy side to front Sets the image frames in the center of the film (secures the setting value of
[Margin Between Image]).
2. [Execute] • [1: spread]:

3. Reboot the equipment. Sets the image frames in the center within each of the remaining image blocks
that are secured by the setting value of [Margin Between Image].

[PC3-4-5-20] Margin Between Image <NOTE>

For [concentration], all images on the film must be of the same size. In
<FUNCTION> the following cases, images will be arranged by [spread] even if set to
[concentration] because image sizes vary.
Command for setting the margin between image frames on the film.
• When images of different sizes are included on one film.
<NOTE> • When the output image size (width of image) on the film is specified
Normally, the default value for the margin between image frames should be (Requested Image Size) in the image data sent from the client.
used. Do not change the default setting unless requested by a user because of
layout problems.
2. [Execute]
<OPERATIONS> 3. Reboot the equipment.
1. Set the margin between image frames on the film in the range of 0 to
50. (unit: pixel)

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-96
 MU-97
[PC3-4-5-22] Processing Type [PC3-4-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the density processing calculation method. Command for setting whether the top or bottom is to be trimmed from CR image that
is larger than the image box.
<OPERATIONS> <REMARKS>

1. Select the value to be set. The applicable film sizes are 20x25 cm, 26x36 cm, 35x43cm, 25x30 cm.

• [0: Type1]
• [1: Type2] <OPERATIONS>
<REMARKS>
1. Select the value to be set.
Type 1: Density processing calculation method which interpolates the measured
density. [0: Upper]/[1: Lower]/[2: Both]
Type 2: Density processing calculation method with smoother tonal representation
than Type1. Tonal conversion continuity is better in low density areas
2. [Execute]
below density of 0.4.
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute] [PC3-4-5-24] Image Crop Side Area

3. Reboot the equipment. <FUNCTION>

Command for setting whether the left or right is to be trimmed from CR image that is
larger than the image box.
<REMARKS>
The applicable film sizes are 20x25 cm, 26x36 cm, 25x30 cm.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

[0: Left]/[1: Right]/[2: Both]

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-97
 MU-98
[PC3-4-6] Annotation [PC3-4-6-3] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/Lower
Set and enter the character string of the annotation to be printed on film. Center/Lower Right
<NOTE>
<FUNCTION>
If annotation is set even though the extension format has been set, the following
error message will be displayed. (Main unit software version V2.4 or later) Select the place for entering the annotation text, and enter the annotation text
“Because ‘Extension Format ID’ is set, ‘Annotation’ cannot be set.” character.
{MU:4.4 [PC3-4-1-10]_Extension Format ID} <OPERATIONS>

[PC3-4-6-1] Annotation Font 1. Select the place for entering the annotation text.
• [Upper Left] : Character string printed on the upper left corner of the film
<FUNCTION> • [Upper Center] : Character string printed on the top of the film in the center
Command for setting the font type of the annotation. • [Upper Right] : Character string printed on the upper right corner of the film
• [Lower Left] : Character string printed on the lower left corner of the film
<OPERATIONS> • [Lower Center] : Character string printed on the bottom of the film in the center
• [Lower Right] : Character string printed on the lower right corner of the film
1. Select the font.
• [0: Japanese] <NOTE>
• [1: Western]
• If annotations are set, the image area will be smaller than when
2. [Execute] annotations are not set, and image will be printed in reduced size.
• Though annotations can be printed anywhere (upper/lower, left/ center/
3. Reboot the equipment. right of the film), they may be missing at some locations. Therefore when
printing annotations at several locations, check that none is missing
[PC3-4-6-2] Annotation Extend during printing.

<FUNCTION> 2. Enter the annotation text character in the [Value] string.

Command for setting the extension of the printing area of annotations along the height
<REMARKS>
of the characters.
<NOTE> • Up to 64 one-byte size characters can be entered.
• In addition to standard characters, macros are also available.
Use of this function is prohibited.
• If the annotation character string becomes long after macro conversion, make
sure that no characters are missing.

3. [Execute]
4. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-98
 MU-99
[PC3-5] Common [PC3-5-3] Logging DICOM

[PC3-5-1] Data Transfer Timeout <FUNCTION>

Command for setting whether to save the record of communication with the client as
<FUNCTION> log information, and the communication record level.
Command for setting the timeout value for network communication.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Enter the timeout value. (Unit: seconds) • [0: none] : No logging of communication record
<REMARKS> • [1: normal] : Normal log information
• [2: detail] : Detailed log information (default)
• The timeout value is the maximum time limit for the printer to wait for data to
arrive. If data does not arrive within the set time, a timeout occurs. 2. [Execute]
• Normally, use the default timeout. If this default value does not work properly
for the connected DICOM client, set the value given by the DICOM client. 3. Reboot the equipment.
• Setting range: 30 to 3600 (default value: 300)

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-2] Association Count

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of associations to be established together for
DICOM connection.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Set according to the installation environment.

[1] to [10] (default value: 10)

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-99
 MU-100
[PC3-5-4] Model [PC3-5-6] Default Client

[PC3-5-5] Manufacturer <FUNCTION>

Command for setting whether to apply parameters set at [default] for unregistered clients.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the <OPERATIONS>
printer.
1. Select the value to be set.
<OPERATIONS> • [0: Yes] : Applies the [default] settings. (default)
• [1: No] : The [default] settings will not be applied.
1. Enter the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the
printer. 2. [Execute]
<NOTE>
3. Reboot the equipment.
• Both the [Model] (manufacturing model name) and [Manufacturer]
(manufacturer name) must be no more than 64 characters long.
• This name is used by the client to acquire the name of the printer on the
network.
• Normally the default for the model and manufacturer names should be
used (Model: DRYPIX, Manufacturer: FUJIFILM Corporation respectively).
Where multiple printers are installed at a single location, each must be
identified by a unique name determined in consultation with the users.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-100
 MU-101
[PC3-6] Sarmaker 4. Click the [Copy File Path] button.
Perform this procedure when adjusting LUT using SAR MAKER. → The SAR MAKER directory will be copied to the Windows clipboard.
1. In the maintenance tree, click [Sarmaker].
2. Select the FTP root drive of the PC for servicing.
3. [Execute]

5. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.

6. Paste the address copied to the Windows clipboard to the address bar
and press the <ENTER> key on the keyboard.
→ The SAR MAKER directory will be displayed.
→ The message [Please use Sarmaker] is displayed in the lower right frame of <REMARKS>
the PC-Utility window.
Location of “ocsarmk.exe”:
“C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\ocsarmk.exe”
(“FTP site directory\DPX2000\ocsarmk.exe”)

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-101

7. Double-click “ocsarmk.exe”.
→ The SAR MAKER window appears.
8. In the menu bar, click [Mode].
→ The [Mode] window appears.
9. Select [Density] (maximum density).
10. [OK]
016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
MU-102
11. Select [GAMMA No.].
→ The tone curve (gamma curve) is drawn. (Dark red)
12. Select the number of tuning points from [tuning point].
13. Enter [DMAX] (maximum density) and [DMIN] (minimum density).
14. Enter [density] (density fine adjustment value), [shift] (shift density),
and [contrast] for each tuning point.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-102
 MU-103
15. [Adjust] 21. Close the logout window.
→ Another tone curve is drawn reflecting the entered data. (Bright red) <REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{MU:4.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}

16. Go back to PC-Utility and open the client settings window. Open the
LUT settings window for the relevant client and enter the value set via
Sarmaker.

17. [Save]
→ The [save complete] window appears and the converted LUT data is saved
as “sar_savedata.txt”. The save destination is the folder “C:\Program Files\
Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000” (the same hierarchical level as “ocsarmk.exe”).
No operation is required for this file.

18. [OK]
19. Click to close SAR MAKER.
20. Click the [Logout] button in the maintenance tree to end the PC-Utility.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-103
 MU-104
[PC4] File Transfer [PC4-2] Analysis Data

Transfer data files between the equipment and PC for servicing. <FUNCTION>
<NOTE> Command for transferring analysis data files from the equipment.
A log file for analysis is transferred to the “Log” folder (C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\
To perform file transfer, “[PC1-1-4] Registration service pc” must have been DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Log) of the PC for servicing.
performed in advance.
<OPERATIONS>
[PC4-1] Single File
1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered.
<FUNCTION> {MU:4.4 [PC1-1-4]_Registration service pc}
Command for transferring manually selected data file to the equipment. 2. [Execute]
<OPERATIONS> → File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered. file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.

{MU:4.4 [PC1-1-4]_Registration service pc}

2. Enter the file name to be transferred.

3. Select the type of file.
• [Parameter] : Parameter file
• [Program] : Program file

4. [Execute]
→ File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-104
 MU-105
[PC4-3] Head Data [PC4-4] G-curve Data

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for transferring head data file to the equipment. After the thermal head is Command for transferring gamma curve data file.
replaced, the files in the “Head data FD” supplied with the head must be transferred to
the equipment. <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered.
1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered. {MU:4.4 [PC1-1-4]_Registration service pc}

{MU:4.4 [PC1-1-4]_Registration service pc} 2. Select transfer direction.

2. Copy the files in the Head Data FD to the “Head folder” (C:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\
Head) in the PC for servicing.
3. Input the thermal head number (7 digits) of the label affixed on a new
thermal head.
• [PC <- Printer] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
• [PC -> Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment
3. [Execute]
→ File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.

[PC4-5] Operation Data

<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring operation data files from the equipment.
4. [Execute] A CSV format file is transferred to the “Operation” folder (C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\
DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Operation) of the PC for
→ File transfer starts. servicing.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed. <OPERATIONS>

1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered.

{MU:4.4 [PC1-1-4]_Registration service pc}

2. [Execute]
→ File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] screen will be
displayed. If the file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-105
 MU-106
[PC5] Upgrading

Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software.

Use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder in the PC for servicing when
performing full installation or version upgrading of the equipment.
For details on version upgrading or full installation procedure using the PC for
servicing, refer to “Inspections, Replacements, Adjustments (MC)”.
{MC:12.1_Installing from the PC for Servicing}
<NOTE>
Before starting this procedure, the individual data should be backed up because
it will be initialized by [Full Install].

[PC5-1] Full Install

[PC5-2] Upgrading

n Copying main unit software to the PC for servicing

<OPERATIONS> → The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000).
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive. → When completed, the [Success.] screen appears.
→ “DPX2CopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX2 Copy Tool] window is 4. [OK]
displayed.
<REMARKS> 5. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX2 Copy Tool] window.
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPX2CopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
6. Unload the main unit software CD-R from the CD-ROM drive.
<NOTE>
“DPX2CopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPX2CopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on
the desktop, etc.

2. Enter the drive name into [Input drive of FTP-Home].

3. Click [Copy] of [Please specify the drive of FTP-Home].

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-106
 MU-107
n Transferring the Main Unit Software to the Equipment (Full 4. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
Install/Upgrading) tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
<OPERATIONS> from the printer. Please close this page.].
<REMARKS>
1. When performing full installation, save individual data first. If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
2. Start the PC-Utility. not be displayed.
{MU:4.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
3. [Full Install] or [Upgrading] → [Execute]
5. Close the logout window.
6. Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit
software become effective.

7. If full installation has been performed, perform the following procedure

as well.
• Restoring the individual data
• Reboot the equipment
• Setting the system date and time
• Setting the film counter
• Setting the number of remaining films

→ The main unit software is transferred (version upgrade or full installation) in

the equipment.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-107
 MU-107.1
[PC6] OutputFilm [PC6-2] Grid & Flat

<FUNCTION>
[PC6-1] Cleaning Film Command for printing Grid & Flat pattern.

<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
If white vertical stripes/black vertical stripes occur due to dirt on the thermal head
(dirt which cannot be removed by hand), output the cleaning film to clean the thermal 1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
head. [Slot1]/[Slot2]
<NOTE>
2. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 99).
This menu is available from main unit software version V2.4 or later.
3. [Execute]
<REMARKS> → Grid & Flat pattern is printed.
As this function pushes the thermal head against the film and conveys it without
heating the film, nothing is printed on the film output.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.

[Slot1]/[Slot2]
<NOTE>
Select the slot with large width.
Slot width: 26x36>35x43>25x30>20x25

2. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 99).

<REMARKS>
Enter in single-byte alpha-numerals.

3. [Execute]
→ The cleaning film will be output.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-107.1
 MU-107.2
[PC6-3] SMPTE [PC6-4] No Edge mode

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for printing SMPTE pattern. Command for enabling or disabling the no edge mode when printing the test pattern.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. 1. Select ON/OFF of the no edge mode.
[Slot1]/[Slot2] [OFF]/[ON]

2. Select [Image Matrix] (Number of frames). 2. [Execute]

[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12] → The set value is updated.

3. Select [LUT Number].

[LUT1] to [LUT8]

4. Select [Interpolaton type].

[SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]

5. Select [Interpolation algorithm/method].

[CUBIC]/[NONE]
<REMARKS>
If [NONE] is selected, no interpolation is carried out, and the image is reduced
according to the selected number of frames and film size.

6. [Execute]
→ One sheet of SMPTE pattern is printed.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-107.2
 MU-108
BLANK PAGE

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-108
 MU-109
[PC7] F.D.C. [PC7-2] Check Density

<FUNCTION>
[PC7-1] Auto F.D.C. Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps density data
measured by the density measurement section.
<FUNCTION>
<OPERATIONS>
Command for automatically measuring the density by the density measurement
section while printing 24-steps patterns and creating the density correction table from
the measurement data. 1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]
<OPERATIONS>
2. [Execute]
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. → The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the 17-steps data is displayed on the PC
[Slot1]/[Slot2] for servicing.

2. [Execute] 3. Check the results of execution.

→ The 24-steps pattern is output and automatic density correction is executed. l Specified Values
Step Dmax 3.0
1 fog
Density should be between densities
2
of step 1 and step 3.
Density should be between densities
3
of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30 ±0.07
5 0.48 ±0.07
6 0.66 ±0.07
7 0.84 ±0.07
8 1.02 ±0.07
9 1.20 ±0.07
10 1.38 ±0.07
11 1.56 ±0.07
12 1.74 ±0.07
13 1.92 ±0.07
14 2.10 ±0.09
15 2.40 ±0.11
16 2.70 ±0.11
17 3.00 ±0.11

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-109
 MU-110
[PC7-3] 24-Steps [PC7-5] Manual F.D.C.

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for outputting the 24-steps pattern using the current setting value. Command for entering the 24-steps density value measured using the external
densitometer, and performing density correction calculation based on this value.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]
1. Output 24-steps pattern at [PC7-3.24-Steps].
2. [Execute] 2. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
→ The 24-steps pattern is printed. [Slot1]/[Slot2]

[PC7-4] Display 24-Steps

3. Measure the film output at step 1 using an external densitometer, and
enter the density values of each step (0 to 399).
<FUNCTION> <NOTE>
Command for displaying the 24-steps density data most recently measured by [PC7-1. The specified values for the input range of each step are as follows.
Auto F.D.C.]. • Should be between 0 and 399.
• Should be above the density value of the previous step.
<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. 4. [Execute]

[Slot1]/[Slot2] → Correction is executed.

2. [Execute]
→ The corrected 24-steps density data is displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-110
 MU-111
[PC7-6] Set Collect. T.

<FUNCTION>
Command for creating density calibration table for calibrating the internal densitometer
and initializing the densitometer calibration table.
<NOTE>
Perform [PC7-3.24-Steps] beforehand, otherwise the this function will not be
effective.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Output 24-steps pattern at [PC7-3.24-Steps], and measure the density

value of each step using an external reference densitometer.

2. Enter the density value of each measured step (0 to 399).

3. [Execute]
→ The calibration table is created.

[PC7-7] Clear Collect. T.

<FUNCTION>
Command for initializing densitometer calibration tables.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.

[Slot1]/[Slot2]

2. [Execute]
→ The calibration tables are cleared.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-111
 MU-112
[PC8] Head Check [PC8-3] Head Voltage.

<FUNCTION>
[PC8-1] Fan Operation Command for displaying the head power voltage (+16VH) described in the individual
equipment data file.
<FUNCTION>
1. [Execute]
Command for tuning ON/OFF the head cooling fans (FANP1, FANP2).
→ The head power voltage is displayed.
<OPERATIONS> <REMARKS>

1. Select operation. • The displayed voltage is 100 times value.

• The second place after the decimal point is rounded up and displayed.
• [OFF] : Fan stops • The displayed voltage value varies depending on the thermal head. As a
• [ON] : Fan rotates guideline, a value in the neighborhood of 14.0 V is normal.
• [Usually] : Fan operates normally

2. [Execute] [PC8-4] Head Regist.

→ The fan rotates.
<FUNCTION>
3. [Usually] → [Execute] Command for correcting the resistance value inconsistency of the thermal head.
→ The fan returns to normal operations.
<OPERATIONS>
[PC8-2] 16VH
1. [Execute]
<FUNCTION> → The resistance value inconsistency of the thermal head is corrected.
Command for turning ON/OFF the head power (+16VH) when adjusting the head
power voltage.

<OPERATIONS>

1. [ON] → [Execute]
→ 16VH is output.

2. Adjust the head power voltage.

3. [OFF] → [Execute]
→ Output of 16VH stops.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-112
 MU-113
[PC9] Print Position l Input Example/Moving Direction

[PC9-1] Side Margin

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Adjusts the image position in the main scanning direction in units of pixel. (1 pixel =
84.7 µm)
Specifies and adjusts the relative adjustment value for the image position currently
set.
<REMARKS>
• Adjustments cannot be performed for 26 x 36 cm film size as the head width and
film width are more or less the same.
• The setting result is saved as a individual file.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Print Grid & Flat pattern.

Print on 35 x 43 cm, 25 x 30 cm, or 20 x 25 cm film.

2. Select the film size printed at step 1.

• [14x17] : 35 x 43 cm size
• [10x12] : 25 x 30 cm size
• [8x10] : 20 x 25 cm size

3. Measure the main scanning image position B of Grid & Flat pattern.
{MU:APPENDIX 1._SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}

4. Enter the distance to be moved by the image (0 to +-100).

<REMARKS>
Enter a total of four digits consisting of symbol (+/-) and three digits.

5. [Execute]
6. Print Grid & Flat pattern again and check that the main scanning
image position is within the specification.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-113
 MU-114
[PC9-2] Top Margin

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for adjusting the gap from the leading edge of the film to the outer frame of
the image (recording tip position).
<REMARKS>
The setting result is saved as an individual file.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Print Grid & Flat pattern.

2. Select the magazine slot used at step 1.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]

3. Select the film size printed at step 1.

• [14x17] : 35 x 43 cm size
• [10x14] : 26 x 36 cm size
• [10x12] : 25 x 30 cm size
• [8x10] : 20 x 25 cm size

4. Measure the recording tip length A of Grid & Flat pattern.

{MU:APPENDIX 1._SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}

5. Enter the value of A measured (0 to 200).

<REMARKS>
• Enter a value which is 100 times the value of A.
Example: If A is 1.2 mm, enter 120.
• The adjustment value will be initialized when “0” is entered.

6. [Execute]
7. Print Grid & Flat pattern again and check that the recording tip
position is within the specification.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-114
 MU-115
[PC10] Check Mech. [PC10-2] Motor Ope.

Command for checking mechanism operations of the equipment. <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>

Command for checking the operation of the conveyance motor.
[PC10-1] Film Removing
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for checking the operations of the removal mechanism. 1. Select the motor type.
• [MD11]: Conveyor section motor
<OPERATIONS> • [ME1]: Sub-scanning motor

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. 2. Select the rotation direction.
[Slot1]/[Slot2] [Stop]/[CW]/[CCW]
CAUTION
2. [Home Position] → [Execute]
→ The suction cup arm moves to the home position. Do not select [CW], if [ME1] is selected.
<NOTE>
<REMARKS>
If [Home Position] is not executed first, error will result.
[CCW] :Film conveyance direction

3. Check individual operations in the following order: 3. Select the speed condition.
[Film Surface] → [Film Suction] → [Upper Limit] → [Film Fanning] → [Film
Release] → [Pre-feeding] → [Grip Release] → [Film Convey] [High Speed]/[Middle Speed]/[Low Speed]
<NOTE>
→ Individual operations will be carried out to the selected position.
If operations end normally, [Command completed.] will be displayed. Do not select [Middle Speed], if [ME1] is selected.

4. [Execute]
→ The motor drives.
If operations end normally, [Command completed.] will be displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-115
 MU-116
[PC10-3] HEAD U/D [PC10-4] Positioning Film

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> [PC10-4-1] Unit Ope.

Command for checking the operation of the the head up/down drive motor (MH1).
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
<OPERATIONS> Command for checking the operations of the reference plate drive motor (MD12/
MD22).
1. Select the operation type.
• [Home Position]: Move to the home position (SH1)
<OPERATIONS>
• [Grip Position]: Move to the head pressurization position
1. Select the motor type.
2. Select the film size. [MD12]/[MD22]
<REMARKS> 2. Select the film size.
The number of motor rotations differs according to the selected film size.
3. Select the operation type.
3. [Execute] [Home Position]/[Positioning]

→ MH1 drives. 4. [Execute]

If operations end normally, [Command completed.] will be displayed.
<NOTE>
When checking operations with a different film size after executing [Grip
Position], return to [Home Position] once.
→ The motor drives.
If operations end normally, [Command completed.] will be displayed.
<NOTE>
When checking operations with a different film size after executing
[Positioning], return to [Home Position] once.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-116
 MU-117
[PC10-5] Sub Scan.

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for adjusting the sub-scanning speed setting.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Print Grid & Flat pattern.

2. Measure the sub-scanning lengths C and C’ of Grid & Flat pattern.
{MU:APPENDIX 1._SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}

3. Select the film size.

4. Enter the four digit average (1/10 mm unit) of C and C’ measured.
<REMARKS>
• Enter a value which is 10 times the average value.
• The adjustment value will be initialized when “0” is entered.

5. [Execute]
6. Print Grid & Flat pattern again and check that the sub-scanning length
is within the specification.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-117
 MU-118
[PC10-6] Edge Sensor 4. Find F from the measured E value according to the following formula.
F = E - 0.42
[PC10-6-1] Edge Sen.Posi.
5. Select [Left] at [Edge sensors].
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for setting the edge position of the film measured by the film edge sensor. 6. Enter the F value at [Offset data]. (Range: -999 to 999)
Perform this adjustment when replacing the film edge sensor with a new one. <REMARKS>
<REMARKS>
Enter a value (three digits) 100 times -9.99 mm to 9.99 mm.
The film size detectable by the film edge sensor is 35x43cm only. Example: If F is 1 mm, enter 100.

<OPERATIONS> 7. Measure E’ of SMPTE pattern.

1. Set “[PC6-4] No Edge mode” to [ON].
2. Print 35 x 43 cm size SMPTE pattern.
3. Measure the E of the printed SMPTE pattern.
<NOTE>
If the value of E is “0” and there is no blank space on the left side of the
film, select [Left] in step 5, enter “-100” at [Offset data], and repeat from
step 2.
<NOTE>
If E’ is “0” and there is no blank space on the right side of the film, select
[Right] at step 9, enter “-100” at [Offset data], re-output the SMPTE and
repeat from step 7.
8. Find F’ from the measured E’ value according to the following formula.
F’ = E’ - 0.42
9. Select [Right] at [Edge sensors].
10. Enter the F’ value at [Edge sensors Right]. (Range: -999 to 999)
<REMARKS>
The input condition are the same as [Edge sensors Left].

11. [Execute]
12. Re-print SMPTE pattern again and check that E and E’ are 0.7 mm or

less.
If it is not 0.7 mm or less, go back to the step 2. and repeat the procedure.
If it is 0.7 mm or less, reboot the equipment.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-118
 MU-119
[PC10-6-2] LED ON/OFF

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for turning ON/OFF the film edge sensor LED. However, this command is
not used in most cases because the edge sensor LED is internally installed and you
cannot check its ON/OFF status in the normal assembled condition.

<OPERATIONS>

1. [ON] → [Execute]
→ LED of the film edge sensor lights up.

2. [OFF] → [Execute]
→ The LED goes off.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-119
 MU-120
[PC10-7] Nip Adjust 3. Obtain the average height of the two springs.
<FUNCTION> <REMARKS>

Command for checking/adjusting the thermal head pressure after replacing the As a guideline, the value should be 8 to 10 mm.
thermal head related parts.
<REMARKS> 4. Remove the interlock release tool and insert it into the head cover
For the relevant parts, refer to “MC7.4 Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head Pressure”. interlock.
{MC:7.4_Check/Adjustment of Thermal Head Pressure} {Safety Precaution}

5. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which

<OPERATIONS> the equipment is connected.

1. Remove the upper cover. 6. Turn ON the power of the equipment.

2. When the equipment is in standby mode, measure the height of the
left and right head pressure springs at the positions shown in the
figure below.
7. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
{MU:4.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Web Server
Start)}
{MU:4.2.3_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Starting PC-
Utility)}

8. Print a grid & flat pattern of 35 x 43 cm size.

During printing, measure the height of the spring at the positions shown in step 2
when the thermal head is at the pressurized position.
{MU:4.4 [PC6-2]_Grid&Flat}

CAUTION
During printing, do not touch the driving mechanism. Ensure that tools such as
metal ruler do not touch the terminals.

9. Obtain the average of the spring heights measured in step 8.

<REMARKS>
As a guideline, the value should be 11 to 14 mm.

10. Obtain the difference between the average obtained in step 3 (when
the equipment is at rest) and the average obtained in step 9 (when
printing is performed).

11. Check that the difference between the averages obtained above is
within the specifications below. When the value does not meet the
specification, perform a head pressure adjustment.
3.4 mm ≤ difference of averages < 4.6 mm

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-120
 MU-121
12. Select “[PC10-7] Nip Adjust”.
13. In the numeric input field, enter a 10-fold value of the difference
between averages obtained in step 10.
<REMARKS>
• When the difference between averages is 2.5 mm, enter “25”.
• Value range: 10 to 59
• The value takes effect upon entry.

14. [Execute]
15. Repeat steps 8 through 11 to check the head pressure.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-121
 MU-122
APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR (Unit: mm)
EACH FILM SIZE Position 35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
A 12.0 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 9.5 ±1.0
(B’ + B”)/2 12.6 ±0.8 12.9 ±1.5 11.2 ±1.0 10.5 ±1.0
| B’ – B” | ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.1
(C + C’)/2 403.5 ±1.5 233.0 ±1.0 278.8 ±1.0 180.0 ±1.0
| C – C’ | ≤1.2 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
D, D’ 328.7 ±0.5 338.6 ±0.5 229.5 ±0.5 230.9 ±0.5
| D – D’ | ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-122
 MU-123
n Settings
APPENDIX 2. AUTOMATIC INITIAL Using ImagerServicePCSetting changes the following settings of the PC for servicing.
SETTING TOOL FOR l Imager User Registration
PC FOR SERVICING The following Windows users will be added.
• User name : dryprinter
(ImagerServicePCSetting) • Password : fujifilm
• Permission setting : Administrator
The CD-R of main unit software version V2.4 or later also contains the automatic initial
setting tool for the PC for servicing “ImagerServicePCSetting”. l FTP Server Installing Drive
ImagerServicePCSetting is a tool for preventing the PC for servicing from Set the FTP root directory from the input drive.
malfunctioning due to omitted or incorrect settings. If “C” is entered for the installing drive, the FTP root directory will be set to “C:¥Program
Files¥FujiFilm¥DRYPIX”.
n Operating Environment
l Windows Firewall Setting
l OS Set the Windows firewall.
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) or Windows XP Professional (SP2)
l Pop-up Blocker Disable Setting
l Browser Disable the pop-up blocker function of Internet Explorer.
Internet Explorer 6/7 <NOTE>
l FTP Function • Settings changed cannot be undone with ImagerServicePCSetting.
The Internet Information Service (IIS) must be preinstalled. • Data import may be slow in some environments of the PC for servicing used.
In such cases, check [Exceptions] setting of “4.1.6 Precaution and Settings in
l PC Display Resolution the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing/nnnn Windows Firewall Settings”.
Above 800 x 600 {MU:4.1.6_Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for
Servicing/n Windows Firewall Settings}
l User Permission
Administrator

n Preparations
Install Internet Information Service (IIS).
{MU:4.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC/n Installing the Internet
Information Services (IIS)}
{MU:4.1.6_Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing/
n Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS)}

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-123
 MU-124
n Operations 5. Copy and paste “Imgsvpc.exe” in the main unit software CD-R to any
desired place in the PC for servicing.
1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing. <NOTE>
2. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive. Do not paste to file path containing 2-byte code characters.
→ The DPX2 Copy Tool starts up automatically, and [DPX2 Copy Tool] window is
displayed.

3. End the DPX2 Copy Tool by clicking the [EXIT] button.

4. Open Windows Explorer on the PC for servicing.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-124
 MU-125
6. Double-click “Imgsvpc.exe”.
→ The [ImagerServicePCSetting] window opens, displaying the current settings
of the PC for servicing.

7. Click the [Configure] according to the state of the PC for servicing.

→ Settings are changed.

8. Remove the main unit software CD-R from the PC for servicing.
9. Shutdown the PC for servicing.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual MU-125
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) All pages

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE MODE (MU) (DRYPIX Lite)

016-201-06E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 MU-1
1. OUTLINE OF SERVICE MODE 1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode
Turning the power OFF while writing in the CF (compact flash) or USB memory, or
while exchanging data with the PC for servicing may damage the data.
1.1 Transition of Modes in DRYPIX Lite
The service mode provides functions required for troubleshooting and maintenance.
U-Utility (User-Utility) Mode
l
Mode for the user to perform normal maintenance operations such as density
correction, etc.
PC-Utility Mode
l
Mode for starting PC-Utility on the network-connected PC for servicing, to configure
settings or to perform troubleshooting and maintenance operations of this equipment.
PC-Utility is stored in the equipment main body and can be started by operating via
the PC for servicing. To start up PC Utility, Internet Explorer must be installed as a
browser on the PC for servicing.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-1
 MU-2
2. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY) 2.2 Starting and Ending U-Utility
The U-Utility functions are intended for both the user and service engineer. n Starting U-Utility
<NOTE>
In the stand-by mode, press the [Utility] button on the operation panel.
Menus which can be executed differ according to the state before transition.
n Ending U-Utility
U-Utility ends when its execution is completed.
2.1 U-Utility Menu Tree
U-Utility
[U-1] Automatic Density Correction
[U-2] QC
[U-3] Setting the Date and Time
[U-4] Calibration
[U-5] SMPTE Pattern
[U-6] 17-Steps
[U-7] Cleaning Film
[U-8] Counter Reset
[U-9] Film Counter Zero Clear

<REMARKS>
Every time the [Utility] button is pressed, the display changes to the next menu.
Pressing the Utility button while [U-8] is being displayed exits the Utility menu and sets
the idling state. (The number of films remaining will be displayed.)

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-2
 MU-3
2.3 Details of U-Utility Commands [U-5] SMPTE Pattern
[U-1] Automatic Density Correction
<FUNCTION>
Command for outputting SMPTE test patterns.
<FUNCTION>
<NOTE>
Command for outputting the 24-steps pattern and performing automatic density
correction. In order to execute this menu, set [User SMPTE] to [Enable] beforehand using
PC-Utility.
[U-2] QC
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> Select the SMPTE pattern output pattern number to be output.
<REMARKS>
Command for outputting QC test pattern and performing density measurement for
evaluating the images of this equipment. The output parameters must be set using the PC-Utility beforehand.
<NOTE>
In order to execute this menu, set [Enable QC] to [Enable] beforehand using PC- [U-6] 17-Steps
Utility.

<FUNCTION>
[U-3] Setting the Date and Time
Command for printing the 17-steps pattern.
<NOTE>
<FUNCTION> In order to execute this menu, set [User 17-Steps] to [Enable] beforehand using
Command for displaying the currently set system date (year, month, day, hour, minute) PC-Utility.
and checking if it is correct.

[U-4] Calibration

<FUNCTION>
Command for measuring and correcting the head resistance value.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-3
 MU-4
[U-7] Cleaning Film

<FUNCTION>
If white vertical stripes/black vertical stripes occur due to dirt on the thermal head
(dirt which cannot be removed by hand), output the cleaning film to clean the thermal
head.
<REMARKS>
As this function pushes the thermal head against the film and conveys it without
heating the film, nothing is printed on the film output.

[U-8] Reset Film Counters

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of remaining films on the magazines loaded in the
equipment to 100 and implementing automatic density correction.

[U-9] Film Counter Zero Clear

<FUNCTION>
Command for clearing the number of remaining films to zero. (The number of
remaining films will be displayed as zero.)
Loading a new film outputs a cleaning film.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-4
 MU-5
3. PC-Utility 3.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing

To change the settings of the equipment, using FTP communication as the interface,
OS
l
access the setting file in the equipment directly and edit it using PC-Utility. Microsoft Windows 2000(SP4)/ Windows XP Professional (SP2/SP3)/ Windows Vista
Edit this setting file on the browser of the PC for servicing. (32bit)/ Windows 7 (32bit)
As there is no need to connect to the equipment, use the “DPX Lite Copy Tool” in the <REMARKS>
main unit software CD-R for executing the following function. • Edition for Windows VISTA
• Copy the main unit software (CD → PC for servicing/CD → USB memory) Professional/ Ultimate
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC5]_Upgrading} • Edition for Windows 7
• Create/delete the folder saving various data of the equipment (“Establish name_ Professional/ Ultimate
Printer name” folder in the FTP directory)
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.5_Creating the Data Storage Folder} Display
l
• Recovery of CF (compact flash memory)
800 x 600 pixels or higher-resolution display
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):11_RECOVERY PROCEDURE FOR CF (COMPACT
FLASH MEMORY)} Network Interface
l
Ethernet port should be usable.
3.1 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing
External Connecting Device
l
When using the PC-Utility, set the FTP site directory in the PC for servicing in the The CD-ROM drive, USB memory, and compact flash reader should be usable.
service center service station, etc. beforehand.
<NOTE> Browser
l
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T straight cable is required for connecting Internet Explorer 6/7/8/9 should be installed.
the PC for servicing. <NOTE>
When any pop-up blocker tool such as Google Toolbar is installed, the pop-up blocker
<REMARKS> feature must be disabled.
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the PC for servicing to this
equipment via the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for Others
l
servicing to this equipment using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T crossing
cable. The FTP of the Internet Information Service should be operating.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-5

3.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing
l Setting a Windows Account for the PC for Servicing
The username and password should be registered.
• User: dryprinter
• Password: fujifilm
• Access permission: Administrator
<REMARKS>
The above are already set and need not be set for PCs for servicing using DI Tools for
FUJIFILM imager equipment other than this equipment.
l Setting the FTP Site Directory
The FTP site directory should be set as follows
“Any drive name”:\Program Files\fujifilm\DRYPIX”
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
l Setting the USB Memory Volume Label
The USB memory is set with the volume label.
This setting is not necessary when no USB memory is to be used.
<REMARKS>
A USB memory can be used when upgrading the main unit software.
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
MU-6
3.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
To perform transmission and reception of various data with the equipment, there is a
need to set the FTP site directory of the PC for servicing.
Described here is the setting method for an example of Windows 2000.
Settings are performed in the same way basically for Windows XP, however
precautionary items and addition setup items may be provided.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.6_Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC
for Servicing}
<NOTE>
To set the FTP site directory of the PC, Internet Information Services (IIS) function (one
of the Windows 2000 components) is required.
This Internet Information Services (IIS) will not be installed in the standard installation
of Windows 2000. If not installed in the PC used, install it as follows.
Installing the Internet Information Services (IIS)
n
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
4. Select the checkbox of [Internet Information Services (IIS)] from the
[Components:] list, and click [Next].
5. Follow the instructions of the [Windows Components Wizard] dialog
to install the Internet Information Services (IIS).
If the message [Insert Disk] appears halfway through to prompt for the
“Windows 2000 CD-ROM” to be inserted, insert the CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive and click [OK].
<REMARKS>
If the [Microsoft Windows 2000 CD] window appears upon inserting the “Windows
2000 CD-ROM”, click [Exit] to close the window.
6. After completing installation, click [Finish].
7. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-6

Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
n 9. Set the directory of the FTP site (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX) at
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
3. Double-click the [Internet Services Manager] icon.
4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer]
list.
MU-7
[Local Path:] , and select the checkboxes of [Read], [Write], and [Log
visits].
<NOTE>
If the directory of the FTP site is not set to “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX”,
the PC-Utility will not operate properly. If using other applications on the same
PC, after using the PC-Utility, return to the settings noted down at step 8.
In addition, “C:\inetpub\ftproot” is the default value of Windows 2000 and can be
changed.

5. Check that [Default FTP Site] is set to [Running]. If set to [Stopped] or

[Pause], right-click [Default FTP Site] and select [Start].

6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and click [Properties] from the pop-up
menu.

7. Click the [Home Directory] tab.

8. Note down the path set at [Local Path:].
<NOTE>
As Windows 2000 has only one home directory for all accounts, if another
directory (folder name) has already been specified for [Local Path:], other
applications may be using it.

10. Click [OK].

11. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-7
 MU-8
3.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols 5. Click the [Time] tab.
When the [Regional Options] of the PC for servicing is not English, check the setting
of the grouping symbol, and change it if different from below. 6. Check that [Time separator] is “ : ” (colon).
n Checking Procedure

1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control

Panel].

2. Double-click the [Regional Options] icon.

3. Click the [Numbers] tab.
4. Check that [Decimal symbol] is “ . ” (period).

<NOTE>
If as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for [Digit
grouping symbol] and [Decimal symbol], change the symbol for [Digit grouping
symbol].

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-8
 MU-9
7. Click the [Date] tab.
8. Check that [Date separator] is “ / ” (slash).

9. Click [OK].
10. Close the [Control Panel] window.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-9
 MU-10
3.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder 4. [Make]
Create the storage folder for various data of the equipment. #1[Enter]
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
→ The “DPXLiteCopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX Lite Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<NOTE>
If the OS of the PC for servicing is Windows 7 or Windows Vista, close the
DPX Lite Copy Tool screen. Then, open the CD-ROM from Explorer, and start
"DPXLiteCopyTool.exe" by right-clicking it and selecting "Run as administrator".

<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXLiteCopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.

FPDU0403.AI

#3[Enter] #2[Enter] #4[Click]

→ Data strage folder is created and the [Success.] screen appears.

<REMARKS>
• Data strage folder:
“C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer
name”
• The data storage folder contains the following four empty folders:
• “Head” folder: Location for storing head data
• “Indv” folder: Location for storing individual data
• “Log” folder: Location for storing log data
2. Enter the FTP site root directory at [Input drive of FTP-Home]. • “Operation” folder: Location for storing equipment operation data
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}

3. Enter [Establish name] and [Printer host name]. 5. [OK]

6. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX Lite Copy Tool] window.
7. Close all windows opened on the windows desktop.
8. Unload the main unit software CD-R from the CD-ROM drive.
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-10

3.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC
for Servicing
When using the Windows XP (SP2) PC for servicing, the following precautions and
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software.
MU-11
n Windows Firewall Settings
Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, implement FTP site directory settings,
Windows XP will also require additional setting of the TCP Port number used by the
[Default FTP Site] to the Windows Firewall Exceptions. Set as follows.

n Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) 1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] →[Control
Panel].
If IIS has not been installed in the Windows XP PC for servicing to be used, perform
the additional install in the same way.
Also, during the installing procedure, check the following.
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
1. Select the checkmark in the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] 3. Double-click the [Internet Information Services] icon.
checkbox from the [Components:] list at [Add/Remove Windows
Components], and click [Details...]. 4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer]
list.
2. Check that the checkmark is selected in the [File Transfer Protocol 5. Double-click the [FTP Sites] folder from the [Name] list.
(FTP) Service] checkbox from the [Subcomponents of Internet
Information Services (IIS):] list. If not selected, select the checkmark,
and click [OK]. 6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and select [Properties].
<NOTE> 7. At the [FTP Site] tab, note down the number displayed at [TCP Port:]
If [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service] is not selected at the [Subcomponents of [Identification] (“21” in the following screen example).
of Internet Information Services (IIS):] list, [Default FTP Site] will be disabled,
disabling directory settings of the FTP site hereafter.

3. Proceed with the installation procedure according to the instructions

displayed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-11
 MU-12
8. Click [Cancel]. 14. Enter “FTP” in [Name:], and enter the number noted down at step 7. in
[Port number:] (“21” in the following screen example).
9. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
10. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].

11. Double-click the [Windows Firewall] icon.

12. Click the [Exceptions] tab.

15. Click [OK].

13. Click [Add Port...].

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-12
 MU-13
16. Check that the checkmark of the [FTP] checkbox has been added in 17. Click the [Advanced] tab.
the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab.
<REMARKS>
18. Click [Settings] of [Network Connection Settings].
The contents of the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab of
the Windows Firewall shown below are just an example, and actual contents
displayed will differ according to the state of use of the PC for servicing (different
programs and service names may be registered).

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-13
 MU-14
19. Select the checkbox of [FTP Server] of [Advanced Settings] window. 21. Click [OK] of the [Advance Settings] window.

→ This will display the [Service Settings] window.
20. Check that host name is entered at [Name or IP address (for example
192.168.0.12) of the computer hosting this service on your network:]
then click [OK].
22. Click [OK].
23. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
n Disabling Browser’s Pop-up Blocker
When the PC for servicing runs Windows XP (SP2 or later), the browser’s pop-up
blocker must be disabled.

→ Returns to the [Advanced Settings] window.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-14
 MU-15
3.1.7 Settings in the Use of Windows Vista PC for Servicing 3. Select [Administrative Tools] on the [System and Maintenance]
When using the Windows Vista PC for servicing, the following precautions and window.
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software.

n Checking installation of IIS

Ensure that [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager] is installed on the [Control
Panel] [Administrative Tools] window.

1. Select [Control Pane] from [Start button].

FPCU1025.ai

FPCU1023.ai

2. Select [System and Maintenance] on the [Control Panel] window.

FPCU1024.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-15
 MU-16
4. Check if [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager] is displayed n Installing IIS
on the [Administrative Tools] window. Install IIS from [Programs and Features] of [Control Panel].
If [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is not displayed,
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.7_Settings in the Use of Windows Vista PC for
Servicing/nInstalling IIS}
1. Select [Programs] from [Control Panel].
If [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is displayed,
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.7_Settings in the Use of Windows Vista PC for
Servicing/nSetting IIS}

FPCU1027.ai

2. Select [Programs and Features] from [Programs].

FPCU1026.ai

FPCU1028.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-16

3. Select [Turn Windows features on or off] on the [Programs and
Features] window.
MU-17
5. On the "Windows Features"screen, select the check boxes of "FTP
Server" and "IIS Management Console".
Click the plus sign next to [Internet Information Services] to expand the sub
items, click [FTP Server] under [FTP Publishing Service], click [IIS Management
Console] under [Web Management Tools], and then click the [OK] button.

FPCU1029.ai

4. As the [User Account Control] window is displayed, click [Continue].

G0001.ai

Wait for a few moments.

FPCU1031.ai

6. After the window above disappears, perform [3.1.7 Settings in the Use
of Windows Vista PC for Servicing/nChecking installation of IIS] to
ensure that IIS is installed correctly.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-17
 MU-18
n Setting IIS 3. Right click [Default FTP Site] on the [Internet Information Services (IIS)
Specify the Home directly for FTP on [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager] 6.0 Manager] window and select [Properties].
of [Administrative Tools].

1. Double click [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager] on the

[Control Panel] window.

FPCU1033.ai

FPCU1032.ai

2. As the [User Account Control] window is displayed, click [Continue].

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-18
 MU-19
4. Open the [Home Directory] tab from the [Default FTP Site Properties]
window and set the items as follows and then click [OK].

Tick these three items.

FPCU1034.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-19
 MU-20
n Setting Firewall 3. Select [Allow a program through Windows Firewall] on the [Windows
Firewall] window.
1. Select [Security]] on the [Control Panel] window.

FPCU1044.ai

2. Select [Windows Firewall] on the [Security] window. FPCU1046.ai

FPCU1045.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-20
 MU-21
4. Tick the following items on the [Exceptions] tab and click [OK].
• Core Networking
• File and Printer Sharing
• FTP(Port:21)
• Network Discovery

FPCU1036.ai

FPCU1037.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-21
 MU-22
3.1.8 Settings in the Use of Windows 7 PC for Servicing 3. Select [Administrative Tools] on the [System and Security] window.
When using the Windows 7 PC for servicing, the following precautions and additional [Administrative Tools].
settings are required for operating the service tool software.

n Checking installation of IIS

Ensure that [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is installed by checking
[Administrative Tools] of [Control Panel].

1. Select [Control Panel] from [Start Button].

FPCU1009.ai

FPCU1007.ai

2. Select [System and Security] on the [Control Panel] window.

FPCU1008.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-22
 MU-23
4. Check if [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is displayed on
the [Administrative Tools] window.
If [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is not displayed,
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.8_Settings in the Use of Windows 7 PC for
Servicing/nInstalling IIS}
If [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] is displayed,
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.8_Settings in the Use of Windows 7 PC for
Servicing/nSetting IIS}

FPCU1010.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-23
 MU-24
n Installing IIS 3. Tick [FTP Service] on the [Windows Features] window.
Install IIS from [Programs] of [Control Panel].

1. Select [Programs] from the [Control Panel] window.

FPCU1013.ai

Wait a few moments.

FPCU1011.ai

2. Select [Turn Windows features on or off] in [Programs and Features]

on the [Programs] window. FPCU1014.ai

4. After the window above disappears, perform [3.1.8 Settings in the Use
of Windows 7 PC for Servicing/nChecking installation of IIS] to ensure
that IIS is installed correctly.

FPCU1012.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-24
 MU-25
n Setting IIS 3. Set [FTP site name] and [Physical path] on [Site Information] of the [Add
Specify the home directory for the FTP on [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] FTP Site] window and the click [Next].
of [Administrative Tools]. <NOTE>
1. Select [Internet Information Service (IIS) Manager] on the Select the drive in which DI Tool is installed.
[Administrative Tools] window. e.g.) C:\Prgram Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX
D:\Prgram Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX etc.

Enter “dryprinter”

FPCU1017.ai

FPCU1015.ai

2. Right click the connected PC name on the [Internet Information

Service (IIS) Manager] window and select [Add FTP Site...].

FPCU1016.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-25
 MU-26
4. Select [No SSL]] on [Binding and SSL Settings] of the [Add FTP Site]
window and click [Next].

FPCU1018.ai

5. Tick [Basic] of [Authentication] on the [Add FTP Site] window and

select [Specified users] of [Allow access to:]. After entering [dryprinter],
elect [Read] and [Write] of [Permissions] and click [Finish].

FPCU1019.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-26
 MU-27
n Setting Firewall 3. Right click [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)] and select
[Enable Rule].
1. Start [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security] from [Administrative
Tools].

FPCU1022.ai

4. Restart the PC.

FPCU1020.ai

2. Select [Inbound Rules] from left click menu on the [Windows Firewall
with Advanced Security] window and right click [FTP Server (FTP
Traffic-In)] to select [Enable Rule].

FPCU1021.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-27

3.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations
3.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network
Connect PC for servicing to the network.
1. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which
the equipment is connected.
MU-28
3.2.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment
(Starting PC-Utility)
Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.
1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
2. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.
3. Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
<ENTER> key on the key board.
http://equipment IP address:20051/USER/Login.htm
<NOTE>
When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.

→ The login screen is displayed.

G0002.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-28
 MU-29
3. Enter the following username and password, select the language 3.2.3 PC-Utility Operations
(English) and click [Login]. Select PC-Utility menu, and perform equipment settings, etc.
Login: dryprinter n Selecting Menu Command
Password: fujifilm
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
command name.
<REMARKS>
Items marked with “+” contain sub-menu items for commands below them.

→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.

Command execution window

#1
[Click] Command name

G0004 ai

→ The command execution window appears in the upper right frame of the
window.
<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3], or command of the client setting is
selected, the setting values already set for the equipment are displayed in the
command execution window.
G0003.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-29
 MU-30
n Executing Command l To Operate the Equipment

l To Change the Equipment Settings 1. To check the operation of the equipment, select/enter the operation
conditions, etc. in the command execution window, and click [Execute].
1. To change the equipment settings, select/enter the setting values in
the command execution window, and click [Execute].
<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3] is selected, scroll the command
execution window until the command is visible.

#1 → The equipment operates according to the operation conditions. When the

#2
[Select/Enter] operation has completed successfully, [Command completed.] is displayed.
[Click]

G0005 ai

→ When the equipment settings have been changed successfully, [Command

completed.] is displayed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-30
 MU-31
l To Register A New Client 3. Select [Add] to create clients based on default settings.
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the
Client]. client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title].

2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title]. <NOTE>

• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied client
for the new client.
• ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-31
 MU-32
4. [Execute] l To Delete the Client
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Delete Client].
tree.
2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].
3. [Execute]

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-32
 MU-33
→ If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed, l To Change the Client Name
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Change Client Name].

2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title].

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-33
 MU-34
3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title]. l To Change the Client Settings

4. [Execute] 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
name of the client whose settings is to be changed.

2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].

3. [Execute]

→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-34
 MU-35
→ The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
4. Change the client settings.
5. [Execute]

→ The client settings is changed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-35
 MU-36
3.2.4 Disconnecting the Equipment

1. After completing settings, click [Logout] button of the maintenance

tree.

[Click]

G0006.ai

→ The equipment performs reinitialization and [PC-UTL Executing] disappears.

→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].

2. Close the logout window.

<REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-36
 MU-37
3.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree A B

PC-Utility
[PC1-3] Setting3
[PC1] System information and setup
[PC1-3-1] Set SMPTE
[PC1-1] Setting1
[PC1-3-2] Set Date
[PC1-1-1] Check Version
[PC1-3-3] Ele Save Mode
[PC1-1-2] Set DICOM
[PC1-3-4] Set Alarm
[PC1-1-2-1] AE Title
[PC1-3-5] Automated F.D.C.
[PC1-1-2-2] Port No.
[PC1-3-6] Set OEM
[PC1-1-3] Set Network
[PC1-3-7] Reboot
[PC1-1-3-1] IP Address
[PC1-4] Log data
[PC1-1-3-2] Sub Net Mask
[PC1-4-1] Display Error Log
[PC1-1-3-3] Gateway
[PC1-4-2] Clear Error Log
[PC1-1-3-4] Host Name
[PC1-4-3] Display DICOM Log
[PC1-1-4] Display Mac address
[PC1-4-4] Logging Mode
[PC1-1-5] Registration service pc
[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data
[PC1-2] Setting2
[PC3] Client Configuration
[PC1-2-1] Set Magazines
[PC3-1] Add Client
[PC1-2-2] Option Slot
[PC3-2] Delete Client
[PC1-2-3] Enable QC
[PC3-3] Change Client Name
[PC1-2-4] Set Target Den.
[PC3-4] Read CLTInfo
[PC1-2-5] Printing Dmax
[PC3-5] Clients
[PC1-2-6] Set Rem.Films
[PC3-5-1] Protocol
[PC1-2-7] User 17-Steps
[PC3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)
[PC1-2-8] User SMPTE
[PC3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ
[PC1-2-9] Set Side Position Revision ON/OFF
[PC3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range
[PC1-2-10] Check Counters (0116H Warning)
[PC1-2-11] Display indv. data [PC3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox
(B604H Warning)
[PC3-5-1-5] Change Film Size
[PC3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout

A B C D E F

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-37
 MU-38
C D E F G H I

[PC3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT [PC3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8

[PC3-5-1-8] Precede Picking Up [PC3-5-4-1] Max Density
[PC3-5-1-9] Use Max/Min Density [PC3-5-4-2] Min Density
[PC3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID [PC3-5-4-3] γTable No
[PC3-5-1-11] Use Default Annotation [PC3-5-4-4] Contrast
[PC3-5-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable 110H[F]) [PC3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points
[PC3-5-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14 [PC3-5-4-6] Density
[PC3-5-2] Magnify [PC3-5-4-7] Shift
[PC3-5-2-1] Default Smoothing Type [PC3-5-4-8] Contrast
[PC3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior [PC3-5-5] Output Format
[PC3-5-2-3] Magnification Type [PC3-5-5-1] Film Size
[PC3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size [PC3-5-5-2] Medium Type
[PC3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type [PC3-5-5-3] Film Orientation
[PC3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type [PC3-5-5-4] Border Density
[PC3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size [PC3-5-5-5] Polarity
[PC3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior [PC3-5-5-6] Trim
[PC3-5-2-9] Procedure [PC3-5-5-7] Trim Width
[PC3-5-2-10] Edge Detection [PC3-5-5-8] Trim Density
[PC3-5-2-11] Detection Level [PC3-5-5-9] Number of Copies
[PC3-5-2-12] Sharpness [PC3-5-5-10] Print Priority
[PC3-5-2-13] Character Color [PC3-5-5-11] Default Number of Copies
[PC3-5-3] LUT Common [PC3-5-5-12] Default Print Priority
[PC3-5-3-1] Default LUT [PC3-5-5-13] Default Medium Type
[PC3-5-3-2] Illumination [PC3-5-5-14] Default Film Orientation
[PC3-5-3-3] Ambient Light [PC3-5-5-15] Default Film Size
[PC3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#) [PC3-5-5-16] Default Border Density
[PC3-5-3-5] Default Illumination [PC3-5-5-17] Default Trim
[PC3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light [PC3-5-5-18] Default Polarity
[PC3-5-3-7] Procedure [PC3-5-5-19] Mirror
G H I J K L M

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-38
 MU-39
J K L M N

[PC3-5-5-20] Margin Between Image [PC7] F.D.C.

[PC3-5-5-21] Image Layout [PC7-1] Auto F.D.C.
[PC3-5-5-22] Processing Type [PC7-2] Check Density
[PC3-5-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area [PC7-3] 24-Steps
[PC3-5-5-24] Image Crop Side Area [PC7-4] Display 24-Steps
[PC3-5-6] Annotation [PC7-5] Manual F.D.C.
[PC3-5-6-1] Annotation Font [PC7-6] Set Collect.T.
[PC3-5-6-2] Annotation Extend [PC7-7] Clear Collect.T.
[PC3-5-6-3] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/ [PC7-8] DM Sensor Monitor
Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right [PC7-9] Density LED ON/OFF
[PC3-6] Common [PC8] Head Check
[PC3-7] Sarmaker [PC8-1] Temperature
[PC4] File Transfer [PC8-2] Fan Operation
[PC4-1] Single file [PC8-3] Head Voltage.
[PC4-2] Analysis Data [PC8-4] 16VH
[PC4-3] Analysis Data (USB) [PC8-5] Head Regist.
[PC4-4] Head Data [PC9] Print Position
[PC4-5] G-curve Data [PC9-1] Side Margin
[PC4-6] Operation Data [PC9-2] Top Margin
[PC5] Upgrading
[PC5-1] Full Install
[PC5-2] Upgrading
[PC5-3] Full Install (USB)
[PC5-4] Upgrading (USB)
[PC6] Output Film
[PC6-1] Cleaning Film
[PC6-2] Grid & Flat
[PC6-3] SMPTE
[PC6-4] No Edge mode
N O

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-39
 MU-40
O

[PC10] Check Mech.

[PC10-1] Film Removing
[PC10-2] Motor Ope.
[PC10-3] HEAD U/D
[PC10-4] Positioning Film
[PC10-4-1] Unit Ope.
[PC10-5] Sub Scan.
[PC10-6] Sensor Monitor
[PC10-7] Edge Sensor
[PC10-7-1] Edge Sen.Posi.
[PC10-7-2] Edge Sensor Monitor
[PC10-7-3] LED ON/OFF
[PC10-8] Nip Adjust

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-40
 MU-41
3.4 PC-Utility Command Details [PC1-1-2-2] Port No.

[PC1] System information and setup <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the port number of the equipment.

[PC1-1] Setting1 <OPERATIONS>

[PC1-1-1] Check Version 1. Enter the port number (decimal).

Command for displaying various versions of the equipment. <REMARKS>
[PC1-1-2] Set DICOM Input range: 0 to 65535
Command for setting the DICOM communication of the equipment.

[PC1-1-2-1] AE Title
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the name of the printer for 10 pix/mm recording. [PC1-1-3] Set Network

<OPERATIONS> [PC1-1-3-1] IP Address

1. Enter the AE Title (16 digits). <FUNCTION>

<REMARKS> Command for setting the IP address of the equipment.
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the <REMARKS>
1-byte code table. • Input range: 0 to 255
• Do not enter upper and lower cases incorrectly. • Unaccepted: “0.0.0.0”, “255.255.255.255”, no value is entered
• The following are not accepted.
• All spaces
• Space for the first digit <OPERATIONS>
• First character is a number
1. Enter the IP address (decimal).
2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-41
 MU-42
[PC1-1-3-2] Sub Net Mask [PC1-1-3-4] Host Name

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the subnet mask of the equipment. Command for setting the host name of the equipment.
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
• Input range: 0 to 255 • The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower cases),
• If no value is entered, it will be unacceptable. numbers, and hyphen “-”.
• The following are unaccepted.
• Space
<OPERATIONS> • Less than 2 characters
• Name starting with a number.
1. Enter the subnet mask (decimal).
2. [Execute] <OPERATIONS>
3. Reboot the equipment. 1. Enter the host name (maximum 16 digits).
[PC1-1-3-3] Gateway 2. [Execute]
<FUNCTION> 3. Reboot the equipment.
Command for setting the default gateway address of the equipment.
[PC1-1-4] Display Mac address
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 0 to 255 <FUNCTION>
• Unaccepted: “0.0.0.0”, “255.255.255.255” The MAC address of the CPU board is displayed.
• If no value is entered, it will be taken as incomplete setting.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Enter the default gateway address (decimal).

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-42
 MU-43
[PC1-1-5] Registration service pc [PC1-2] Setting2

<FUNCTION> [PC1-2-1] Set Magazines

Command for registering the PC for servicing to enable file transfer. Any unregistered
PC for servicing is limited in function and does not support “[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data” <FUNCTION>
and “[PC4] File Transfer” of PC-Utility. Command for setting the films for each magazine.
<REMARKS>
<OPERATIONS>
Only one PC for servicing can be registered. Only the one registered last supports file
transfer.
1. Select the magazine number.
<OPERATIONS> 2. Select whether to use this magazine number or not.
1. Enter the establish name. 3. Select the film size.
<NOTE> • [8x10] : 20cm x 25cm
• [10x12] : 25cm x 30cm
Use one-byte alphanumeric when entering establish name. • [10x14] : 26cm x 36cm
• [14x17] : 35cm x 43cm
2. Enter the IP address of the current PC for servicing.
4. Select [Blue] for the film base color.
3. [Execute]
5. [Execute]
4. Reboot the equipment.
6. Reboot the equipment.
[PC1-2-2] Option Slot

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether sheet-feeder unit is mounted.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select whether to use sheet-feeder unit or not.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-43
 MU-44
[PC1-2-3] Enable QC [PC1-2-5] Printing Dmax

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling the image QC function of the U-Utility. Command for enabling/disabling step edge pattern [Density 4].

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.

2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. [PC1-2-6] Set Rem. Films

[PC1-2-4] Set Target Den. <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the number of films remaining in each magazine.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the target density of each magazine. <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the magazine number.
1. Select the magazine number. 2. Enter the number of remaining films.
2. Set the density value. 3. [Execute]
• [Density 1] : Density of the first step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 2))
• [Density 2] : Density of the second step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 3))
[PC1-2-7] User 17-Steps
• [Density 3] : Density of the third step (Range: 192 to 250)
<FUNCTION>
3. [Execute] Command for setting whether to display “17-Steps” at [4.Film Output>] of the U-Utility.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-44
 MU-45
[PC1-2-8] User SMPTE [PC1-2-11] Display indv. data

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to display “SMPTE” at [4.Film Output>] of the U-Utility. The modified date of the equipment individual data is displayed.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC1-2-9] Set Side Position Revision ON/OFF

<FUNCTION/>
Command for turning ON/OFF the recording position shift function for preventing wear
of the head.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the type of image.

[Routine Image] : Nomal image
[Test Image] : Test pattern image

2. Select whether to turn the function ON or OFF.

[Enable]/[Disable]

3. [Execute]
4. Reboot the equipment.
[PC1-2-10] Check Counters

<FUNCTION>
Command for resetting the user counter, changing the total film counter settings, or
displaying the film count of all counters.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-45
 MU-46
[PC1-3] Setting3 [PC1-3-3] Ele Save Mode

[PC1-3-1] Set SMPTE <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the timer value when this equipment shifts into the sleep mode.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting parameters for printing SMPTE test patterns using U-Utility.
<OPERATIONS>

<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the sleep mode transition time.

1. Select the setting number. 2. [Execute]
[1]/[2]/[3]/[4]/[5] 3. Reboot the equipment.
2. Select [AE Title]. [PC1-3-4] Set Alarm
3. Select [Image Matrix].
<FUNCTION>
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
Command for setting the alarm.
4. Select [LUT Number].
[LUT1]/[LUT2]/[LUT3]/[LUT4]/[LUT5]/[LUT6]/[LUT7]/[LUT8]
<OPERATIONS>

5. Select [Interpolation type]. 1. Select the alarm.

[SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH] • [OFF] : No alarm is sounded.
• [ON] : Alarm is sounded.
6. Select [Interpolation algorithm method]. • [PULSE] : Alarm stops after about three seconds.
[CUBIC]/[NONE]
2. Select the alarm tone.
[PC1-3-2] Set Date
[LOW]/[MEDIUM]/[HIGH]

<FUNCTION> 3. [Execute]
Command for setting the system date and time.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Enter the system date and time.

2. [Execute]

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-46
 MU-47
[PC1-3-5] Automated F.D.C. [PC1-4] Log data

<FUNCTION> [PC1-4-1] Display Error Log

Command for executing automatic density correction or outputting the cleaning film at
every film loading. <FUNCTION>
Command for displaying error logs.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [OFF] : The cleaning film will be output. 1. [Execute]
• [ON] : The 24-steps pattern is output and automatic density correction is → The error logs are displayed.
executed.
[PC1-4-2] Clear Error Log
2. [Execute]
<FUNCTION>
[PC1-3-6] Set OEM
Command for deleting error logs.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for turning ON/OFF of the OEM settings.

<OPERATIONS> 1. [Execute]
→ All error logs are deleted.
1. Select the value to be set. [PC1-4-3] Display DICOM Log
2. [Execute] <FUNCTION>
[PC1-3-7] Reboot Command for displaying DICOM logs.

<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
If the equipment needs to be rebooted after completing command settings, execute
this menu and reboot or shut down the equipment.
1. [Execute]
Even if the “Abnormal Operations” errors occurred, execute this menu and reboot the → The DICOM logs are displayed.
equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-47
 MU-48
[PC1-4-4] Logging Mode <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Select the log acquisition mode.
For setting whether to write analysis logs out of the logs written in CF (operation logs • [Enable]: Saves operation data logs and analysis logs.
and analysis logs) when the equipment is shut down. • [Disable]: Saves operation data logs only.
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
Purpose of use of each log Log acquisition mode and list of saved logs
Log type Details : Log to be saved, -: Logs not to be saved
Log type Logging mode (Enable) Non-log acquisition mode
Records equipment failures. Cover open is also record-
Error log
ed as error. Magazine open is not taken as error. Error log  
Records ON/OFF state of sensors and motors in IOT  
IOT timechart format. Special viewer is required for referenc-
ISC
Operation data log

ing.  

Records reception of messages between tasks of con- Mechanical log  

ISC
veyance and print functions. Edge sensor log  
Mechanism log Records control of ON/OFF of sensors and motors, etc. PFIF log  
Records edge sensor reading values during 35x43 cm Log when jam occurs  
Edge sensor log
size printing.
DICOM log  -
Records message transmission/reception between the
PFIF log Main log  -
formatter and printer.
Output log  -
Jam log Collects logs related to jams when jams occur.
PCUTL log  -
DICOM communication log with connected part. Log
DICOM log
volume is heavy. Spooler log  -
Log on control of all applications. Records start and Trace log  -
Main log termination time, control transition time with each sub-
system, etc.
Analysis log

Output log
Records progress to printing after image processing
completes. 2. [Execute]
PCUTL log PC-Utility function processing trace.
Records results of printing request. Also records infor-
Spooler log mation such as remaining films when printing is request-
ed.
Trace log Records start state between sub-systems on chart.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-48
 MU-49
[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data

<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring individual data files.
The files to be transferred are the files in the “Indv” folder (C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\
DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Indv).

<OPERATIONS>

1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered.

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC1-1-5]_Registration service pc}

2. Select transfer direction.

• [PC <- Printer] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
• [PC -> Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment

3. [Execute]
→ File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If this function is used, the “CLTInfo.txt” file in the “indv” folder of the PC for
servicing will be transferred.
This file is written in the format where the setting information of each client is
partitioned by a comma “setting item, setting value”.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-49
 MU-50
[PC3] Client Configuration 3. Select [Add] to create clients based on default settings.
To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the
[PC3-1] Add Client client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title].
<NOTE>
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied client
Client].
for the new client.
2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title]. • ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-50
 MU-51
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-51
 MU-52
[PC3-2] Delete Client → If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Delete Client].

2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].

3. [Execute]

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-52
 MU-53
[PC3-3] Change Client Name 3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title].
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the 4. [Execute]
[Change Client Name].

2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title].

→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-53
 MU-54
[PC3-4] Read CLTInfo 3. Open the “Indv” folder, and open “CLTInfo.csv” located in the
Using Microsoft Excel, the “CLTinfo.csv” created when equipment data is saved can equipment individual data using Microsoft Excel.
be edited, and client settings can be added/revised/deleted in lists. It is convenient
when setting the same client settings for multiple DryPix Lites.
<NOTE>
• Observe the following precautions when editing with software other than Microsoft
Excel.
• Do not change the filename (“CLTInfo.csv”) and file format (partitioned using
comma).
• Do not use double quotations ( “ ) and commas ( , ) for annotations.
• Do not delete the initially registered clients (“default”, “FCR-CSL”,
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST”).
• When adding clients, make sure none of the parameter values are insufficient.
• Make sure that parameter values are within the range prescribed in the DICOM
Confirm Statement.
• Up to 64 clients can be registered.
• Renaming a client using the editing function will register the client as the very last
one and displays it at the bottommost level of the maintenance tree.
• If the extension format has been specified, the annotation cannot be set. 4. Add/correct/delete client settings.
<REMARKS>
n Procedure for Collectively Editing Client Settings In the following example, “FCR-CSL” is copied and a client called “FCR-CSL2” is
Use the “CLTInfo.csv” in the “Indv” folder loaded in the PC for servicing or the USB added.
memory. (1) Copy the “FCR-CSL” column.
(2) Paste the copied column to the blank column.
1. Save the equipment individual data of the printer. (3) Change the client name to “FCR-CSL2”.
(4) Change the client settings.
l When Saving in the PC for Servicing
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC2]_Transfer Indv. Data}

2. When using a USB memory, connect it to the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-54

5. Save the data by [Save] in the CSV format in the folder where “CLTInfo.
csv” was located.
6. Select [Read CLTInfo] of PC-Utility.
7. Select the folder storing the edited “CLTInfo.csv”.
MU-55
[PC3-5] Clients
Command for setting the various parameters for the client (image output device).
<REMARKS>
The parameters related to the image processing of each client set here apply when
image processing parameters are not set for the image data sent by the client.

[Service PC]/[USB memory]

n To Change the Client Settings

1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
name of the client whose settings is to be changed.

2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].

3. [Execute]

8. [Execute]
→ “CLTInfo.csv” is sent to the equipment.

9. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-55
 MU-56
→ The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
4. Change the client settings.
5. [Execute]

→ The client settings is changed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-56
 MU-57
[PC3-5-1] Protocol [PC3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H Warning)

[PC3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning) <FUNCTION>

Command for setting how data out of range should be treated.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how unexpected data received should be treated. <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
1. Select the value to be set. • [1: indicate] : Send error message
• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1: indicate] : Send error message 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment. [PC3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H Warning)

[PC3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ <FUNCTION>

In the BIB N-SET mode (when image data is received in frames), images are reduced
<FUNCTION> if they are too large to fit the image frame. Select whether to notify that the image has
Command for setting how N Event Report Requests (report of events to clients) been reduced.
should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. • [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [0: disable] : No report sent • [1: indicate] : Send error message
• [1: enable] : Send report
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-57
 MU-58
[PC3-5-1-5] Change Film Size [PC3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
If the film size/specified by the client differ from that of the printer, set whether to If problems occur when the association of clients which are continuously connected is
change film. disconnected at the timeout value set at the printer, set to ignore timeout.
For details, refer to “Modality Connection List”.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select one of the following.
• [0: 0116H (W)]
1. Select the value to be set.
Enables film to be changed. Details of errors which occur when the film is • [0: No] : Ignore timeout
changed can be set whether to send to the client or not by setting [Attribute • [1: Yes] : Enable timeout
List error (0107H Warning)], [Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H <NOTE>
Warning)], [Image Size is Larger than Imagebox (B604H Warning)].
• [272: 0110H (F)] Select [0: No] (ignore timeout) for equipment resulting in problems.
Details of errors are sent to the client, without changing the film.
• [21317: 5345H (F)] 2. [Execute]
Details of errors (unique values for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to the client,
without changing the film. 3. Reboot the equipment.
<REMARKS>
[PC3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT
Set the following according to the client system.
QA-WS771 • For QA-WS771 software version A05 or later: [21317:5345H <FUNCTION>
(F)]
• For QA-WS771 software version A04 or earlier: [272:0110H Command for setting whether to use LUT information sent from the client.
(F)]
<OPERATIONS>
HI-C655D • For HI-C655D software version A08/B00 or later:
[21317:5345H (F)]
• For HI-C655D software version A07 or earlier: [272:0110H (F)] 1. Select the value to be set.
CR-IR346CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)] • [0: No] : LUT sent from the client is not used.
for FCR XG-1) • [1: Yes] : LUT sent from the client is used.
CR-IR348CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
for FCR5000 series) 2. [Execute]
Synapse
Other modalities
[0:0116H (W)]
Set according to operating environment of installation site.
3. Reboot the equipment.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-58
 MU-59
[PC3-5-1-8] Precede Picking Up [PC3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the pre-removal function for starting removal Enter the ID to differentiate the extension format used by the specific client.
operations immediately after receiving the output request to increase the printing <NOTE>
speed.
If the extension format is set even though annotation has been set, the following error
<OPERATIONS> message will be displayed.
“ERROR: Both ‘Extension Format ID’ and ‘Annotation’ are set.”
1. Select the value to be set. {MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC3-5-6]_Annotation}
• [0: No] : The pre-removal function is not used.
• [1: Yes] : The pre-removal function is used. <OPERATIONS>
2. [Execute] 1. Selected the ID referring to the table below.
3. Reboot the equipment. Manufacturer Model ID Use Default Annotation
[PC3-5-1-9] Use Max/Min Density Siemens - SM If user requires annotation output
set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No].
<FUNCTION>
Philips Easy Vision EV No
Command for setting whether to use the minimum density value and maximum density
HITACHI Medico DR2000 Series HM No
value of the equipment or client.
Clavis View HM If user requires annotation output
<OPERATIONS> set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No].
1. Select the value to be set. FUJIFILM QA-WS771 CR No

• [0: Printer] : Printer side HI-C655D CR No

• [1: Modality] : Client side CR-IR346CL CR No
(Console for FCR XG-1)
2. [Execute] CR-IR348CL CR No
(Console for FCR 5000
3. Reboot the equipment. series)
Synapse CR No

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-59
 MU-60
[PC3-5-1-11] Use Default Annotation [PC3-5-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Select whether to use “Annotation” set at “[PC3-4-6] Annotation”. Command for setting whether to define 11x14” size as 25.7x36.4 cm or 27.9x35.6 cm.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC3-5-6]_Annotation} <NOTE>
<OPERATIONS> 27.9x35.6 cm is currently not available.

1. Select the value to be set. <OPERATIONS>

<NOTE>
Select [0:No] if “CR” is set for “[PC3-4-1-10] Extension Format ID”.
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: 27.9x35.6 cm]
• [1: 25.7x36.4 cm]
• [0: No] : Not used
• [1: Yes] : Use 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F])

<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling base color change function.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: disable] : Disables the base color change function
• [1: enable] : Enables the base color change function

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-60
 MU-61
[PC3-5-2] Magnify [PC3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior
Command for setting the default value for enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION>
[PC3-5-2-1] Default Smoothing Type
Command for setting the default values if the client does not send the Requested
Decimate/Crop Behavior tag (image reduction treatment).
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default smoothing type. <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the required settings.
• [1: DECIMATE] : Reduces images by interpolation to fit into the image box.
1. Select the value to be set. • [2: CROP] : Cuts away the outer perimeter taking the image center as
[1: Sharp]/[2: Medium]/[3: Smooth] the origin.
• [3: FAIL] : Rejects reception because the image does not fit into the
2. [Execute] image box.

3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]

3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-61
 MU-62
n Enlargement/Reduction Processing [PC3-5-2-3] Magnification Type

Setting Processing Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 <FUNCTION>

Response status 0000H(S) B60AH(W) *1 0116H(W) Command for setting the magnification type.
Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Taking Ignoring (2020,
duction interpolation (CUBIC (2010,0060)=CUBIC, 0030), enlarges/ <OPERATIONS>
DECI- interpolation). reduces image by reduces image to
MATE interpolation (CUBIC
interpolation ).
fit into image box. If
reducing, reduces 1. Select the value to be set.
image by interpola- • [0: NONE] : No magnification is implemented
tion (CUBIC interpo-
lation). • [1: CUBIC] : Magnification is implemented
Response status 0000H(S) B609H(W) *1 B609H(W) *1 2. [Execute]
Enlargement/re- Cuts away unneces- Cuts away unneces- Centers image en-
duction sary parts after cen-
tering the specified
sary parts after cen-
tering the specified
larged/reduced (CU-
BIC interpolation) at
3. Reboot the equipment.
CROP image and image image and image the size specified by
box. box. (2020,0030) with the [PC3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size
image box, and cuts
away unnecessary <FUNCTION>
parts.
Response status 0000H(S) C603H(F) C603H(F) Command for specifying the length of the image line printed in one image frame.

FAIL Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Images are not re- Images are not re- <OPERATIONS>
duction interpolation (CUBIC ceived. ceived.
interpolation).
1. Select the length. (Range: 0 to 7000)
However, conditions are as follows. 2. [Execute]
• Condition 1: (2010,0060)=CUBIC. When image is larger than the image box, and
image is reduced. 3. Reboot the equipment.
• Condition 2: (2010, 0060)=NONE. When image is larger than the image box.
• Condition 3: When size specified by (2020,0030) is larger than the image box.

The meanings of response status are as follows.

B609H(W) : Image size is larger than the Image Box size. The Image has been
cropped to fit.
B60AH(W) : Image size or Combined Print Image size is larger than the Image Box
size.
Image or Combined Print Image has been decimated to fit.

*1: If B604H(W) is ignored at Protocol setting, 0000H (S) is returned.

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4[PC3-5-1-4]_Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H
Warning)}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-62
 MU-63
[PC3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type [PC3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the magnification type of the equipment or the Command for setting whether to use the Requested Image Size of the equipment or
client. the client.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [1: Modality] : Client side

2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type [PC3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use smoothing type of the equipment or the client. Command for setting whether to use the Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior of the
equipment or the client if the client does not send the Requested Decimate/Crop
<OPERATIONS> Behavior tag (image reduction treatment).

1. Select the value to be set. <OPERATIONS>

• [0: Printer]
• [1: Modality]
: Printer side
: Client side
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
2. [Execute] • [1: Modality] : Client side

3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]

3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-63
 MU-64
[PC3-5-2-9] Procedure [PC3-5-2-11] Detection Level

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the enlargement/reduction processing. Command for setting the edge detection level value.
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
<OPERATIONS> and [Smooth].

1. Select the value to be set. <OPERATIONS>

[0: A-VR]/[1: SSM]
1. Set the edge detection level value. (Range: 1 to 1023.)
2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-2-10] Edge Detection
[PC3-5-2-12] Sharpness
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the edge enlargement/reduction processing.
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium], Command for setting the sharpness adjustment parameter.
and [Smooth]. If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
and [Smooth].
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Set the sharpness adjustment parameter. (Range: -70 to 300.)
• [0: OFF] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is not performed.
• [1: ON] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is performed. 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-64
 MU-65
[PC3-5-2-13] Character Color [PC3-5-3] LUT Common
Set the common settings for the tone correction processing parameters.
<FUNCTION>
[PC3-5-3-1] Default LUT
Command for setting the continuous emphasis density settings flag (the color
specified for characters).
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium], <FUNCTION>
and [Smooth]. Command for setting the default LUT number.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the LUT number.
[0: White]/[1: Black] [1] to [8]
2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-3-2] Illumination

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting illumination.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535)

<NOTE>
The total of the “[PC3-4-3-2] Illumination” and “[PC3-4-3-3] Ambient Light” values
should be less than 4000.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-65
 MU-66
[PC3-5-3-3] Ambient Light [PC3-5-3-5] Default Illumination

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting ambient light. Command for setting whether to use the illumination settings of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535)
<NOTE>
1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
The total of the “[PC3-4-3-3] Ambient Light” and “[PC3-4-3-2] Illumination” values • [1: Modality] : Client side
should be less than 4000.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment. [PC3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light
[PC3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting whether to use the ambient light of the equipment or the client.
Command for setting whether to use the LUT number of the equipment or the client. <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [1: Modality] : Client side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-66
 MU-67
[PC3-5-3-7] Procedure [PC3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8
Set the default values for the tone correction processing parameters for each LUT
<FUNCTION> number (LUT1 to LUT8).
Command for setting the tone correction processing method.
[PC3-5-4-1] Max Density
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
1. Select the tone correction processing method. Command for setting the maximum density.
[0: SAR]/[1: BAR]
<OPERATIONS>
2. [Execute]
1. Set the maximum density value.
3. Reboot the equipment. • For SAR, set the maximum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range:
0 to 300)
• For BAR, set the maximum density by percentage. (Range: 0 to 100)

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-4-2] Min Density

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the minimum density.

<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the minimum density value.
• For SAR, set the minimum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (The
value of the minimum density must be lower than that of the maximum
density.) (Range: 0 to 300)
• For BAR, Min Density setting is not required.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-67
 MU-68
[PC3-5-4-3] γ Table No [PC3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the γ table number. Command for setting the number of the tuning points.
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
<OPERATIONS> used).

1. Set the γ table number. <OPERATIONS>

• For SAR: 11 to 99
• For BAR: 1 to 20 (set within 1 to 10)
1. Set the number of tuning points (Range: 0 to 5)
The [Density], [Shift], [Contrast] values must be set for each tuning point when
2. [Execute] the number of tuning points is set to 1 or more.

3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]

[PC3-5-4-4] Contrast 3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION> [PC3-5-4-6] Density

Command for setting the contrastr. <FUNCTION>

<OPERATIONS> Command for setting the tuning density.
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
1. Set the contrast value. used).

• For SAR, set the contrast in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 10 to 400) <OPERATIONS>
• For BAR, this contrast setting does not exist for the SAR method.

2. [Execute] 1. Set the tuning density in multiples of 100. (Range: 1 to 300)

Follow the rule of Min Density<Density<Max Density.
3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-68
 MU-69
[PC3-5-4-7] Shift [PC3-5-5] Output Format
Command for setting the client-dependent default settings for the output format.
<FUNCTION>
[PC3-5-5-1] Film Size
Command for setting the shift density.
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
used). <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default film size.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the shift density in multiples of 100. (Range: -100 to 100)
Follow the rule of Min Density<Density ± Shift<Max Density. 1. Select the film size.
[1: 8x10]/[2: 10x14]/[4: 14x17]/[5: 10x12]
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-4-8] Contrast
[PC3-5-5-2] Medium Type
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the contrast at the tuning point. <FUNCTION>
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if Set the default film base color.
used).
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>

1. Set the contrast at the tuning point in multiples of 100. (Range: 10 to 1. Select the film base color.
400) [1: Blue]/[2: Clear]
<NOTE>
2. [Execute] Select the [1: Blue].
3. Reboot the equipment.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-69
 MU-70
[PC3-5-5-3] Film Orientation [PC3-5-5-6] Trim

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Set the film orientation. Command for setting whether to print trimming.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the film orientation. 1. Select whether to print trimming.

[1: PORTRAIT]/[2: LANDSCAPE] • [0: OFF] : Without trim
• [1: ON] : With trim
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-5-4] Border Density
[PC3-5-5-7] Trim Width
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the border density. <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the trim width.
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
1. Set the border density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0 to If the setting of the “[PC3-4-5-6] Trim” is [OFF] the value set for the “[PC3-4-5-7] Trim
300) Width” will be invalid.

2. [Execute] <OPERATIONS>
3. Reboot the equipment. 1. Set the width of the trim in pixels. (Range: 1 to 9)
[PC3-5-5-5] Polarity
2. [Execute]
<FUNCTION> 3. Reboot the equipment.
Command for setting whether to reverse the black/white of the image.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select whether to reverse the black/white of the image.

• [1: Normal] : Black/white reversal off
• [2: Reverse] : Black/white reversal on

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-70
 MU-71
[PC3-5-5-8] Trim Density [PC3-5-5-11] Default Number of Copies

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the image trim density. Command for setting whether to use the number of copies setting of the equipment or
the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the image trim density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0
to 300) 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: Printer] : Printer side
2. [Execute] • [1: Modality] : Client side
3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]
[PC3-5-5-9] Number of Copies 3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION> [PC3-5-5-12] Default Print Priority
Command for setting the default number of print copies.
<FUNCTION>
<OPERATIONS> Command for setting whether to use the print priority setting of the equipment or the
client.
1. Set number of print copies. (Range: 1 to 99)
<OPERATIONS>
2. [Execute]
1. Select the value to be set.
3. Reboot the equipment. • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
[PC3-5-5-10] Print Priority
2. [Execute]
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the print priority level. 3. Reboot the equipment.
<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the value to be set.

• [1: HIGH]
• [2: MEDIUM]
• [3: LOW]

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-71
 MU-72
[PC3-5-5-13] Default Medium Type [PC3-5-5-15] Default Film Size

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the film base color priority level setting of equipment or the Command for setting the film size priority level setting of equipment or the client.
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [1: Modality] : Client side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-5-16] Default Border Density
[PC3-5-5-14] Default Film Orientation
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting whether to use the border density setting of the equipment or
Command for setting whether to use the film orientation setting of the equipment or the client.
the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [1: Modality] : Client side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-72
 MU-73
[PC3-5-5-17] Default Trim [PC3-5-5-19] Mirror

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the print trimming setting of the equipment or the Command for setting film surface/back.
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.
1. Select the value to be set. • [0: OFF(Normal)] : Glossy side to back
• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [1: ON(Mirror)] : Glossy side to front
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment.
[PC3-5-5-20] Margin Between Image
[PC3-5-5-18] Default Polarity
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the margin between image frames on the film.
Command for setting whether to use reverse the black/white setting of the equipment <NOTE>
or the client.
Normally, the default value for the margin between image frames should be used. Do
<OPERATIONS> not change the default setting unless requested by a user because of layout problems.

1. Select the value to be set. <OPERATIONS>

• [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side 1. Set the margin between image frames on the film in the range of 0 to
50. (unit: pixel)
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-73
 MU-74
[PC3-5-5-21] Image Layout [PC3-5-5-22] Processing Type

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting how image frames are arranged. Command for setting the density processing calculation method.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select how image frames are arranged. 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: concentration]: • [0: Type1]
Sets the image frames in the center of the film (secures the setting value of • [1: Type2]
[Margin Between Image]). <REMARKS>
• [1: spread]:
Type 1: Density processing calculation method which interpolates the measured
Sets the image frames in the center within each of the remaining image blocks
density.
that are secured by the setting value of [Margin Between Image].
Type 2: Density processing calculation method with smoother tonal representation
<NOTE> than Type1. Tonal conversion continuity is better in low density areas
For [concentration], all images on the film must be of the same size. In the below density of 0.4.
following cases, images will be arranged by [spread] even if set to [concentration]
because image sizes vary.
• When images of different sizes are included on one film.
2. [Execute]
• When the output image size (width of image) on the film is specified (Requested
Image Size) in the image data sent from the client.
3. Reboot the equipment.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-74
 MU-75
[PC3-5-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area [PC3-5-6] Annotation
Set and enter the character string of the annotation to be printed on film.
<FUNCTION> <NOTE>
Command for setting whether the top or bottom is to be trimmed from CR image that
If annotation is set even though the extension format has been set, the following error
is larger than the image box.
message will be displayed.
<REMARKS> “Because ‘Extension Format ID’ is set, ‘Annotation’ cannot be set.”
The applicable film sizes are 20x25 cm, 26x36 cm, 35x43cm, 25x30 cm. {MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC3-5-1-10]_Extension Format ID}

<OPERATIONS> [PC3-5-6-1] Annotation Font

1. Select the value to be set. <FUNCTION>

[0: Upper]/[1: Lower]/[2: Both] Command for setting the font type of the annotation.

2. [Execute] <OPERATIONS>
3. Reboot the equipment. 1. Select the font.
• [0: Japanese]
[PC3-5-5-24] Image Crop Side Area
• [1: Western]
<FUNCTION> 2. [Execute]
Command for setting whether the left or right is to be trimmed from CR image that is
larger than the image box. 3. Reboot the equipment.
<REMARKS>
[PC3-5-6-2] Annotation Extend
The applicable film sizes are 20x25 cm, 26x36 cm, 25x30 cm.
<FUNCTION>
<OPERATIONS> Command for setting the extension of the printing area of annotations along the height
of the characters.
1. Select the value to be set. <NOTE>
[0: Left]/[1: Right]/[2: Both] Use of this function is prohibited.
2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-75

[PC3-5-6-3] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/Lower
Center/Lower Right
<FUNCTION>
Select the place for entering the annotation text, and enter the annotation text
character.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the place for entering the annotation text.
• [Upper Left] : Character string printed on the upper left corner of the film
• [Upper Center] : Character string printed on the top of the film in the center
• [Upper Right] : Character string printed on the upper right corner of the film
• [Lower Left] : Character string printed on the lower left corner of the film
• [Lower Center] : Character string printed on the bottom of the film in the center
• [Lower Right] : Character string printed on the lower right corner of the film
MU-76
[PC3-6] Common
[PC3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the timeout value for network communication.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the timeout value. (Unit: seconds)
<REMARKS>
• The timeout value is the maximum time limit for the printer to wait for data to
arrive. If data does not arrive within the set time, a timeout occurs.
• Normally, use the default timeout. If this default value does not work properly
for the connected DICOM client, set the value given by the DICOM client.
• Setting range: 30 to 3600 (default value: 300)

<NOTE>
2. [Execute]
• If annotations are set, the image area will be smaller than when annotations
are not set, and image will be printed in reduced size. 3. Reboot the equipment.
• Though annotations can be printed anywhere (upper/lower, left/ center/ right
of the film), they may be missing at some locations. Therefore when printing [PC3-6-2] Association Count
annotations at several locations, check that none is missing during printing.
<FUNCTION>
2. Enter the annotation text character in the [Value] string. Command for setting the number of associations to be established together for
DICOM connection.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 64 one-byte size characters can be entered. <OPERATIONS>
• In addition to standard characters, macros are also available.
• If the annotation character string becomes long after macro conversion, make 1. Set according to the installation environment.
sure that no characters are missing. [1] to [10] (default value: 10)

3. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
4. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-76
 MU-77
[PC3-6-3] Logging DICOM [PC3-6-4] Model

<FUNCTION> [PC3-6-5] Manufacturer

Command for setting whether to save the record of communication with the client as
log information, and the communication record level. <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the
<OPERATIONS> printer.

1. Select the value to be set. <OPERATIONS>

• [0: none] : No logging of communication record
• [1: normal] : Normal log information 1. Enter the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the
printer.
• [2: detail] : Detailed log information (default)
<NOTE>
2. [Execute]
• Both the [Model] (manufacturing model name) and [Manufacturer] (manufacturer
3. Reboot the equipment. name) must be no more than 64 characters long.
• This name is used by the client to acquire the name of the printer on the
network.
• Normally the default for the model and manufacturer names should be used
(Model: DRYPIX, Manufacturer: FUJIFILM Corporation respectively). Where
multiple printers are installed at a single location, each must be identified by a
unique name determined in consultation with the users.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-77
 MU-78
[PC3-6-6] Default Client [PC3-7] Sarmaker
Perform this procedure when adjusting LUT using SAR MAKER.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to apply parameters set at [default] for unregistered clients.
1. In the maintenance tree, click [Sarmaker].
<OPERATIONS> 2. Select the FTP root drive of the PC for servicing.
1. Select the value to be set. 3. [Execute]
• [0: Yes] : Applies the [default] settings. (default)
• [1: No] : The [default] settings will not be applied.

2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment.

→ The message [Please use Sarmaker] is displayed in the lower right frame of
the PC-Utility window.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-78
 MU-79
4. Click the [Copy File Path] button. 7. Start “ocsarmk.exe”.
→ The SAR MAKER directory will be copied to the Windows clipboard. → The SAR MAKER window appears.
<NOTE>
• If the OS of the PC for servicing is Windows XP or Windows 2000, start
"ocsarmk.exe" by double-clicking it.
• If the OS of the PC for servicing is Windows 7 or Windows Vista, start
"ocsarmk.exe" by right-clicking it and selecting "Run as administrator".

5. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.

6. Paste the address copied to the Windows clipboard to the address bar
and press the <ENTER> key on the keyboard.
→ The SAR MAKER directory will be displayed.
<REMARKS> 8. In the menu bar, click [Mode].
Location of “ocsarmk.exe”: → The [Mode] window appears.
“C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\ocsarmk.exe”
(“FTP site directory\DPX2000\ocsarmk.exe”)

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-79
 MU-80
9. Select [Density] (maximum density). 11. Select [GAMMA No.].
→ The tone curve (gamma curve) is drawn. (Dark red)
10. [OK]

12. Select the number of tuning points from [tuning point].

13. Enter [DMAX] (maximum density) and [DMIN] (minimum density).
14. Enter [density] (density fine adjustment value), [shift] (shift density),
and [contrast] for each tuning point.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-80
 MU-81
15. [Adjust] 21. Close the logout window.
→ Another tone curve is drawn reflecting the entered data. (Bright red) <REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}

16. Go back to PC-Utility and open the client settings window. Open the
LUT settings window for the relevant client and enter the value set via
Sarmaker.

17. [Save]
→ The [save complete] window appears and the converted LUT data is saved
as “sar_savedata.txt”. The save destination is the folder “C:\Program Files\
Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000” (the same hierarchical level as “ocsarmk.exe”).
No operation is required for this file.

18. [OK]
19. Click to close SAR MAKER.
20. Click the [Logout] button in the maintenance tree to end the PC-Utility.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-81
 MU-82
[PC4] File Transfer [PC4-2] Analysis Data

Transfer data files between the equipment and PC for servicing. <FUNCTION>
<NOTE> Command for transferring analysis data files from the equipment.
A log file for analysis is transferred to the “Log” folder (C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\
To perform file transfer, “[PC1-1-5] Registration service pc” must have been performed DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Log) of the PC for servicing.
in advance.
<OPERATIONS>
[PC4-1] Single File
1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered.
<FUNCTION> {MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC1-1-5]_Registration service pc}
Command for transferring manually selected data file to the equipment. 2. [Execute]
<OPERATIONS> → File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered. file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC1-1-5]_Registration service pc} [PC4-3] Analysis Data (USB)
2. Enter the file name to be transferred. <FUNCTION>
3. Select the type of file. Command for transferring the analysis data from the equipment to the USB device.
• [Parameter] : Parameter file
<OPERATIONS>
• [Program] : Program file

4. [Execute] 1. Select transfer direction.

→ File transfer starts. • [Save to USB]
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the • [Load from USB]
file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.
2. [Execute]
→ Data transfer starts.

3. Reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-82
 MU-83
[PC4-4] Head Data [PC4-5] G-curve Data

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for transferring head data file to the equipment. After the thermal head is Command for transferring gamma curve data file.
replaced, the files in the “Head data CD-R” supplied with the head must be transferred
to the equipment. <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered.
1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered. {MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC1-1-5]_Registration service pc}

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC1-1-5]_Registration service pc} 2. Select transfer direction.

2. Copy the files in the Head Data CD-R to the “Head folder” (C:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\
Head) in the PC for servicing.
3. Input the thermal head number (7 digits) of the label affixed on a new
thermal head.
• [PC <- Printer] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
• [PC -> Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment
3. [Execute]
→ File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.

[PC4-6] Operation Data

<FUNCTION>
4. [Execute] Command for transferring operation data files from the equipment.
A CSV format file is transferred to the “Operation” folder (C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\
→ File transfer starts. DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Operation) of the PC for
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the servicing.
file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.
<OPERATIONS>

1. Check that the PC for servicing is registered.

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC1-1-5]_Registration service pc}

2. [Execute]
→ File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] screen will be
displayed. If the file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-83
 MU-84
[PC5] Upgrading 3. Click [Copy] of [Please specify the drive of FTP-Home].
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software.
Use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder in the PC for servicing when
performing full installation or version upgrading of the equipment.
For details on version upgrading or full installation procedure using the PC for
servicing, refer to “Inspections, Replacements, Adjustments (MC)”.
<NOTE>
Before starting this procedure, the individual data should be backed up because it will
be initialized by [Full Install].

[PC5-1] Full Install

[PC5-2] Upgrading

n Copying main unit software to the PC for servicing

<OPERATIONS>

1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive. → The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (C:\Program Files\
→ “DPXLiteCopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX Lite Copy Tool] window FujiFilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000).
is displayed. → When completed, the [Success.] screen appears.
<NOTE>
4. [OK]
• If the OS of the PC for servicing is Windows 7 or Windows Vista, close the
DPX Lite Copy Tool screen. Then, open the CD-ROM from Explorer, and start
"DPXLiteCopyTool.exe" by right-clicking it and selecting "Run as administrator".
5. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX Lite Copy Tool] window.
• “DPXLiteCopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive. 6. Unload the main unit software CD-R from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXLiteCopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on the
desktop, etc.

<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXLiteCopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.

2. Enter the drive name into [Input drive of FTP-Home].

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-84
 MU-85
n Transferring the Main Unit Software to the Equipment (Full 4. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
Install/Upgrading) tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
<OPERATIONS> from the printer. Please close this page.].
<REMARKS>
1. When performing full installation, save individual data first. If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
2. Start the PC-Utility. not be displayed.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
3. [Full Install] or [Upgrading] → [Execute]
5. Close the logout window.
6. Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit
software become effective.

7. If full installation has been performed, perform the following procedure

as well.
• Restoring the individual data
• Reboot the equipment
• Setting the system date and time
• Setting the film counter
• Setting the number of remaining films

→ The main unit software is transferred (version upgrade or full installation) in

the equipment.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-85
 MU-86
[PC5-3] Full Install (USB) [PC5-4] Upgrading (USB)

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for executing a full installation of the main unit software using a USB Command for upgrading the main unit software using a USB memory.
memory.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Copy the main unit software to a USB memory.
1. Copy the main unit software to a USB memory.
2. Remove the right cover.
2. Remove the right cover. {MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}
3. Connect the USB memory to the USB connector.
3. Connect the USB memory to the USB connector.
4. Connect the PC-Utility, and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Connect the PC-Utility, and follow the on-screen instructions.
5. After confirming that "Completed" is displayed, remove the USB
5. After confirming that "Completed" is displayed, remove the USB memory.
memory.
6. Install the right cover.
6. Install the right cover. {MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.1_Right Cover}
7. Restart the equipment.
7. Restart the equipment. The installation takes effect.
The installation takes effect.

8. Restore the individual data.

9. Restart the equipment.
10. Set the system date and time.
11. Set the number of remaining films.
12. Set the total counter.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-86
 MU-87
[PC6] OutputFilm [PC6-2] Grid & Flat

<FUNCTION>
[PC6-1] Cleaning Film Command for printing Grid & Flat pattern.

<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
If white vertical stripes/black vertical stripes occur due to dirt on the thermal head
(dirt which cannot be removed by hand), output the cleaning film to clean the thermal 1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
head. [Slot1]/[Slot2]
<REMARKS>
2. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 99).
As this function pushes the thermal head against the film and conveys it without
heating the film, nothing is printed on the film output. 3. [Execute]
→ Grid & Flat pattern is printed.
<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.

[Slot1]/[Slot2]
<NOTE>
Select the slot with large width.
Slot width: 26x36>35x43>25x30=20x25

2. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 99).

<REMARKS>
Enter in single-byte alpha-numerals.

3. [Execute]
→ The cleaning film will be output.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-87
 MU-88
[PC6-3] SMPTE [PC6-4] No Edge mode

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for printing SMPTE pattern. Command for enabling or disabling the no edge mode when printing the test pattern.

<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. 1. Select ON/OFF of the no edge mode.
[Slot1]/[Slot2] [OFF]/[ON]

2. Select [Image Matrix] (Number of frames). 2. [Execute]

[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12] → The set value is updated.

3. Select [LUT Number].

[LUT1] to [LUT8]

4. Select [Interpolaton type].

[SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]

5. Select [Interpolation algorithm/method].

[CUBIC]/[NONE]
<REMARKS>
If [NONE] is selected, no interpolation is carried out, and the image is reduced
according to the selected number of frames and film size.

6. [Execute]
→ One sheet of SMPTE pattern is printed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-88
 MU-89
[PC7] F.D.C. [PC7-2] Check Density

<FUNCTION>
[PC7-1] Auto F.D.C. Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps density data
measured by the density measurement section.
<FUNCTION>
<OPERATIONS>
Command for automatically measuring the density by the density measurement
section while printing 24-steps patterns and creating the density correction table from
the measurement data. 1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]
<OPERATIONS>
2. [Execute]
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. → The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the 17-steps data is displayed on the PC
[Slot1]/[Slot2] for servicing.

2. [Execute] 3. Check the results of execution.

→ The 24-steps pattern is output and automatic density correction is executed. l Specified Values
Step Dmax 3.0
1 fog
Density should be between densities
2
of step 1 and step 3.
Density should be between densities
3
of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30 ±0.07
5 0.48 ±0.07
6 0.66 ±0.07
7 0.84 ±0.07
8 1.02 ±0.07
9 1.20 ±0.07
10 1.38 ±0.07
11 1.56 ±0.07
12 1.74 ±0.07
13 1.92 ±0.07
14 2.10 ±0.09
15 2.40 ±0.11
16 2.70 ±0.11
17 3.00 ±0.11

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-89
 MU-90
[PC7-3] 24-Steps [PC7-5] Manual F.D.C.

<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for outputting the 24-steps pattern using the current setting value. Command for entering the 24-steps density value measured using the external
densitometer, and performing density correction calculation based on this value.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]
1. Output 24-steps pattern at [PC7-3.24-Steps].
2. [Execute] 2. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.
→ The 24-steps pattern is printed. [Slot1]/[Slot2]

[PC7-4] Display 24-Steps

3. Measure the film output at step 1 using an external densitometer, and
enter the density values of each step (0 to 399).
<FUNCTION> <NOTE>
Command for displaying the 24-steps density data most recently measured by [PC7-1. The specified values for the input range of each step are as follows.
Auto F.D.C.]. • Should be between 0 and 399.
• Should be above the density value of the previous step.
<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. 4. [Execute]

[Slot1]/[Slot2] → Correction is executed.

2. [Execute]
→ The corrected 24-steps density data is displayed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-90
 MU-91
[PC7-6] Set Collect. T. [PC7-8] DM Sensor Monitor

<FUNCTION>
Command for creating density calibration table for calibrating the internal densitometer
and initializing the densitometer calibration table.
<NOTE>
Perform [PC7-3.24-Steps] beforehand, otherwise the this function will not be effective.
<FUNCTION>
Command for monitoring whether the density measurement sensor of the internal
densitometer is operating normally or not.
<NOTE>
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the equipment.
If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute other menus.

<OPERATIONS>
[PC7-9] Density LED ON/OFF
1. Output 24-steps pattern at [PC7-3.24-Steps], and measure the density
value of each step using an external reference densitometer. <FUNCTION>
2. Enter the density value of each measured step (0 to 399). Command for turning ON/OFF the density measurement LED of the built-in
densitometer.
3. [Execute] <OPERATIONS>
→ The calibration table is created.
1. Command for turning ON/OFF of the LED for the internal densitometer.
[PC7-7] Clear Collect. T. [ON]/[OFF]

<FUNCTION> 2. [Execute]
Command for initializing densitometer calibration tables.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed.

[Slot1]/[Slot2]

2. [Execute]
→ The calibration tables are cleared.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-91
 MU-92
[PC8] Head Check [PC8-3] Head Voltage.

<FUNCTION>
[PC8-1] Temperature Command for turning ON/OFF the head power (+14.8V) when adjusting the head
power voltage.
<FUNCTION>
<OPERATIONS>
Command for performing temperature monitoring of each thermistor.
<REMARKS> 1. [ON] → [Execute]
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first → 14.8V is output.
decimal point.
2. Adjust the head power voltage.
<NOTE>
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the equipment.
3. [OFF] → [Execute]
If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute other menus. → Output of 14.8V stops.

[PC8-2] Fan Operation

<FUNCTION>
Command for tuning ON/OFF the head cooling fans (FANP1, FANP2).

<OPERATIONS>

1. Select operation.
• [OFF] : Fan stops
• [ON] : Fan rotates
• [Usually] : Fan operates normally

2. [Execute]
→ The fan rotates.

3. [Usually] → [Execute]
→ The fan returns to normal operations.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-92
 MU-93
[PC8-4] 16VH [PC9] Print Position
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the head power voltage (+14.8V) described in the individual [PC9-1] Side Margin
equipment data file.
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
1. [Execute]
Adjusts the image position in the main scanning direction in units of pixel. (1 pixel =
→ The head power voltage is displayed. 84.7 µm)
<REMARKS> Specifies and adjusts the relative adjustment value for the image position currently
set.
• The displayed voltage is 100 times value.
<REMARKS>
• The second place after the decimal point is rounded up and displayed.
• The displayed voltage value varies depending on the thermal head. As a • Adjustments cannot be performed for 26 x 36 cm film size as the head width and
guideline, a value in the neighborhood of 14.0 V is normal. film width are more or less the same.
• The setting result is saved as a individual file.

[PC8-5] Head Regist.

<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
Command for correcting the resistance value inconsistency of the thermal head.
1. Print Grid & Flat pattern.
Print on 35 x 43 cm, 25 x 30 cm, or 20 x 25 cm film.
<OPERATIONS>
2. Select the film size printed at step 1.
1. [Execute] • [14x17] : 35 x 43 cm size
→ The resistance value inconsistency of the thermal head is corrected. • [10x12] : 25 x 30 cm size
• [8x10] : 20 x 25 cm size

3. Measure the main scanning image position B of Grid & Flat pattern.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):APPENDIX 1._SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM
SIZE}

4. Enter the distance to be moved by the image (0 to +-100).

<REMARKS>
Enter a total of four digits consisting of symbol (+/-) and three digits.

5. [Execute]
6. Print Grid & Flat pattern again and check that the main scanning
image position is within the specification.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-93
 MU-94
l Input Example/Moving Direction [PC9-2] Top Margin

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for adjusting the gap from the leading edge of the film to the outer frame of
the image (recording tip position).
<REMARKS>
The setting result is saved as an individual file.

<OPERATIONS>

1. Print Grid & Flat pattern.

2. Select the magazine slot used at step 1.
[Slot1]/[Slot2]

3. Select the film size printed at step 1.

• [14x17] : 35 x 43 cm size
• [10x14] : 26 x 36 cm size
• [10x12] : 25 x 30 cm size
• [8x10] : 20 x 25 cm size

4. Measure the recording tip length A of Grid & Flat pattern.

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):APPENDIX 1._SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM
SIZE}

5. Enter the value of A measured (0 to 200).

<REMARKS>
• Enter a value which is 100 times the value of A.
Example: If A is 1.2 mm, enter 120.
• The adjustment value will be initialized when “0” is entered.

6. [Execute]
7. Print Grid & Flat pattern again and check that the recording tip
position is within the specification.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-94
 MU-95
[PC10] Check Mech. [PC10-2] Motor Ope.

Command for checking mechanism operations of the equipment. <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>

Command for checking the operation of the conveyance motor.
[PC10-1] Film Removing
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for checking the operations of the removal mechanism. 1. Select the motor type.
• [MD11]: Conveyor section motor
<OPERATIONS> • [ME1]: Sub-scanning motor

1. Select the magazine slot if the sheet-feeder unit is installed. 2. Select the rotation direction.
[Slot1]/[Slot2] [Stop]/[CW]/[CCW]

2. [Home Position] → [Execute] CAUTION

→ The suction cup arm moves to the home position. Do not select [CW], if [ME1] is selected.
<NOTE>
<REMARKS>
If [Home Position] is not executed first, error will result.
[CCW] :Film conveyance direction

3. Check individual operations in the following order: 3. Select the speed condition.
[Film Surface] → [Film Suction] → [Upper Limit] → [Film Fanning] → [Film
Release] → [Pre-feeding] → [Grip Release] → [Film Convey] [High Speed]/[Middle Speed]/[Low Speed]
<NOTE>
→ Individual operations will be carried out to the selected position.
If operations end normally, [Command completed.] will be displayed. Do not select [Middle Speed], if [ME1] is selected.

4. [Execute]
→ The motor drives.
If operations end normally, [Command completed.] will be displayed.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-95
 MU-96
[PC10-3] HEAD U/D [PC10-4] Positioning Film

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> [PC10-4-1] Unit Ope.

Command for checking the operation of the the head up/down drive motor (MH1).
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
<OPERATIONS> Command for checking the operations of the reference plate drive motor (MD12/
MD22).
1. Select the operation type.
• [Home Position]: Move to the home position (SH1)
<OPERATIONS>
• [Grip Position]: Move to the head pressurization position
1. Select the motor type.
2. Select the film size. [MD12]/[MD22]
<REMARKS> 2. Select the film size.
The number of motor rotations differs according to the selected film size.
3. Select the operation type.
3. [Execute] [Home Position]/[Positioning]

→ MH1 drives. 4. [Execute]

If operations end normally, [Command completed.] will be displayed. → The motor drives.
<NOTE> If operations end normally, [Command completed.] will be displayed.
When checking operations with a different film size after executing [Grip Position], <NOTE>
return to [Home Position] once.
When checking operations with a different film size after executing [Positioning],
return to [Home Position] once.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-96
 MU-97
[PC10-5] Sub Scan. [PC10-6] Sensor Monitor

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE> <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for adjusting the sub-scanning speed setting. Command for performing sensor monitoring.
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS>
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the equipment.
1. Print Grid & Flat pattern.
2. Measure the sub-scanning lengths C and C’ of Grid & Flat pattern.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):APPENDIX 1._SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM
SIZE}

3. Select the film size.

4. Enter the four digit average (1/10 mm unit) of C and C’ measured.
<REMARKS>
• Enter a value which is 10 times the average value.
• The adjustment value will be initialized when “0” is entered.

5. [Execute]
6. Print Grid & Flat pattern again and check that the sub-scanning length
is within the specification.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-97
 MU-98
[PC10-7] Edge Sensor 4. Find F from the measured E value according to the following formula.
F = E - 0.42
[PC10-7-1] Edge Sen.Posi.
5. Select [Left] at [Edge sensors].
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for setting the edge position of the film measured by the film edge sensor. 6. Enter the F value at [Offset data]. (Range: -999 to 999)
Perform this adjustment when replacing the film edge sensor with a new one. <REMARKS>
<REMARKS>
Enter a value (three digits) 100 times -9.99 mm to 9.99 mm.
The film size detectable by the film edge sensor is 35x43cm only. Example: If F is 1 mm, enter 100.

<OPERATIONS> 7. Measure E’ of SMPTE pattern.

<NOTE>
1. Set “[PC6-4] No Edge mode” to [ON].
If E’ is “0” and there is no blank space on the right side of the film, select [Right]
2. Print 35 x 43 cm size SMPTE pattern. at step 9, enter “-100” at [Offset data], re-output the SMPTE and repeat from step 7.

3. Measure the E of the printed SMPTE pattern.
<NOTE>
If the value of E is “0” and there is no blank space on the left side of the film,
select [Left] in step 5, enter “-100” at [Offset data], and repeat from step 2.
8. Find F’ from the measured E’ value according to the following formula.
F’ = E’ - 0.42
9. Select [Right] at [Edge sensors].
10. Enter the F’ value at [Edge sensors Right]. (Range: -999 to 999)
<REMARKS>
The input condition are the same as [Edge sensors Left].

11. [Execute]
12. Re-print SMPTE pattern again and check that E and E’ are 0.7 mm or
less.
If it is not 0.7 mm or less, go back to the step 2. and repeat the procedure.
If it is 0.7 mm or less, reboot the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-98
 MU-99
[PC10-7-2] Edge Sensor Monitor

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for monitoring changes in the film edge sensor used in the correction of the
scanning position. This monitoring of changes allows checking of the quantitative film
tilt degree during printing, and checking of the film edge sensor alone.
<NOTE>
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the equipment.
If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute other menus.

[PC10-7-3] LED ON/OFF

<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for turning ON/OFF the film edge sensor LED. However, this command is
not used in most cases because the edge sensor LED is internally installed and you
cannot check its ON/OFF status in the normal assembled condition.

<OPERATIONS>

1. [ON] → [Execute]
→ LED of the film edge sensor lights up.

2. [OFF] → [Execute]
→ The LED goes off.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-99
 MU-100
[PC10-8] Nip Adjust 8. Print a grid & flat pattern of 35 x 43 cm size.
During printing, measure the height of the spring at the positions shown in step 2
<FUNCTION> when the thermal head is at the pressurized position.
Command for checking/adjusting the thermal head pressure after replacing the {MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC6-2]_Grid&Flat}
thermal head related parts.
CAUTION
<OPERATIONS> During printing, do not touch the driving mechanism. Ensure that tools such as
metal ruler do not touch the terminals.
1. Remove the upper cover.
2. When the equipment is in standby mode, measure the height of the 9. Obtain the average of the spring heights measured in step 8.
left and right head pressure springs at the positions shown in the <REMARKS>
figure below.
As a guideline, the value should be 11 to 14 mm.
3. Obtain the average height of the two springs.
<REMARKS>
10. Obtain the difference between the average obtained in step 3 (when
the equipment is at rest) and the average obtained in step 9 (when
As a guideline, the value should be 8 to 10 mm. printing is performed).

4. Remove the interlock release tool and insert it into the head cover 11. Check that the difference between the averages obtained above is
within the specifications below. When the value does not meet the
interlock.
specification, perform a head pressure adjustment.
{Safety Precaution (DRYPIX Lite)}
3.4 mm ≤ difference of averages < 4.6 mm
5. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which 12. Select “[PC10-8] Nip Adjust”.
the equipment is connected.

6. Turn ON the power of the equipment. 13. In the numeric input field, enter a 10-fold value of the difference
between averages obtained in step 10.
7. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment. <REMARKS>
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the • When the difference between averages is 2.5 mm, enter “25”.
Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)} • Value range: 10 to 59
• The value takes effect upon entry.

14. [Execute]
15. Repeat steps 8 through 11 to check the head pressure.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-100
 MU-101
APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR
EACH FILM SIZE
{MU (DRYPIX 2000):APPENDIX 1._SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-101
 MU-102
APPENDIX 2. AUTOMATIC INITIAL n Settings

SETTING TOOL FOR

Using ImagerServicePCSetting changes the following settings of the PC for servicing.
l Imager User Registration
PC FOR SERVICING The following Windows users will be added.
(ImagerServicePCSetting) • User name
• Password


: dryprinter
: fujifilm
ImagerServicePCSetting is a tool for preventing the PC for servicing from • Permission setting : Administrator
malfunctioning due to omitted or incorrect settings.
l FTP Server Installing Drive
n Operating Environment Set the FTP root directory from the input drive.
If “C” is entered for the installing drive, the FTP root directory will be set to “C:¥Program
l OS Files¥FujiFilm¥DRYPIX”.
Microsoft Windows 2000(SP4)/ Windows XP Professional (SP2/SP3)/ Windows Vista l Windows Firewall Setting
(32bit)/ Windows 7 (32bit) Set the Windows firewall.
l Browser l Pop-up Blocker Disable Setting
Internet Explorer 6/7/8/9 Disable the pop-up blocker function of Internet Explorer.
l FTP Function <NOTE>
The Internet Information Service (IIS) must be preinstalled. • Settings changed cannot be undone with ImagerServicePCSetting.
l PC Display Resolution • Data import may be slow in some environments of the PC for servicing used. In
such cases, check [Exceptions] setting of “4.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use
Above 800 x 600 of Windows XP PC for Servicing/nnnn Windows Firewall Settings”.
l User Permission {MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.6_Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows
XP PC for Servicing/n Windows Firewall Settings}
Administrator

n Preparations
Install Internet Information Service (IIS).
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC/n Installing
the Internet Information Services (IIS)}
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.6_Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC
for Servicing/n Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS)}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-102
 MU-103
n Operations 5. Copy and paste “Imgsvpc.exe” in the main unit software CD-R to any
desired place in the PC for servicing.
1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing. <NOTE>
2. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive. Do not paste to file path containing 2-byte code characters.
→ The DPX Lite Copy Tool starts up automatically, and [DPX Lite Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<NOTE>
If the OS of the PC for servicing is Windows 7 or Windows Vista, close the
DPX Lite Copy Tool screen. Then, open the CD-ROM from Explorer, and start
"DPXLiteCopyTool.exe" by right-clicking it and selecting "Run as administrator".

3. End the DPX Lite Copy Tool by clicking the [EXIT] button.
4. Open Windows Explorer on the PC for servicing.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-103
 MU-104
6. Double-click “Imgsvpc.exe”.
→ The [ImagerServicePCSetting] window opens, displaying the current settings
of the PC for servicing.

7. Click the [Configure] according to the state of the PC for servicing.

→ Settings are changed.

8. Remove the main unit software CD-R from the PC for servicing.
9. Shutdown the PC for servicing.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-104
 MU-105
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-105
 MU-106
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-106
 MU-107
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual MU-107
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.31.2006 00 New release (FM4846) All pages

03.24.2006 01 Revised (FM4902) All pages
06.30.2006 01 Revised (FM4923) 2-9, 13, 15-27, 30, 32-51
08.31.2006 02 Revised (FM4957) 21, 22, 36-51

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 10.02.2006 03 Revised (Change of corporate name and
corporate logo) (FM4992)
All pages

10.18.2006 03 Revised (FM5035) 4, 7, 8, 12, 13, 15, 19, 22, 30, 32,
33, 35, 43, 44
02.15.2007 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software 1, 3-34, 43, 44
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5074)
03.31.2008 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software 3, 7, 8, 12, 13, 15, 18-22, 30, 32, 34,
version V2.2, V2.3 and V2.4, etc.) (FM5329) 35, 43, 44
01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5919) Cover,19

SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

(DRYPIX 2000)

016-201-06E DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5919
 SP-1
How to Use Service Character Significance The alphabet denotes a difference in
the specifications. Parts differing in
 RECOMMENDED QUANTITIES
Consumable parts or parts OF SPARE PARTS
Parts List A that will be replaced at short inter-
vals.
the suffix are not compatible with each
other. Version number is omitted in the It is recommended as a rough guide to
Parts that may become faulty ac- list. keep in stock a certain quantity of parts
B cidentally and have a according to the rank (A, B, C, D, E)
 RANK relatively high failure rate.  PART NAME assigned to the parts, as follows. For
Parts that have a sufficiently long periodically replaced parts, keep them
PART NAME represents a general name
 Handling RANK characters C MTBF, but are expected to have a
in stock separately. Adjust the stock
relatively high failure rate. of a part.
(Parts that are handled in a special quantity of service parts depending on
Parts that have a sufficiently long
manner during parts management, such D MTBF, but are expected to be-  QTY. the number of working units (N).
as replacement) come faulty. Quantity used in a single system : Q
QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty Parts that are necessary for fault N=1
analysis, or parts that may be in each unit.
R
Must be
Repairable A part whose quantity is suffixed with Rank A = 1 + Q × 0.3
returned. E needed in case of unexpected
accidents such as man-induced -S represents a small part that is Rank C = 1 + Q × 0.05
Must be Rank D = 1 + Q × 0.02
returned.
damage. shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a
Q
(We use for
Not repairable part is ordered in quantity of 1, a pack 2 ≤ N ≤ 10
<The RANK guide> containing 50 pieces of that part is
analysis.)
The Fault RANK characters, Handling Rank A = 2 + N × Q × 0.3
Must not be supplied.) Rank C = 2 + N × Q × 0.05
returned. RANK characters, and Export
Rank D = 1 + N × Q × 0.02
(Consumable regulation-applicable character are  REMARKS
T part. Not Not repairable assigned in that order. 11 ≤ N ≤ 300
applicable to Thus, at least one character or up to The REMARKS column indicates a Rank A = 3 + N × Q × 0.3
free-of-charge three characters are assigned in the unique name or relevant information of Rank C = 3 + N × Q × 0.05
warranty.) RANK column. each part. Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
without Must not be
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned.  REF. NO.  SERIAL NUMBER  PRECAUTIONS TO BE
 Export regulation-applicable REF. NO. is a part number indicated in The units may contain different parts OBSERVED WHEN RETURNING
the Service Parts Exploded Views. For depending on their shipment control PARTS FOR REPAIR
character number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates
parts having different functions, they are
(Parts with the following character are clearly distinguished in the REMARKS the shipment control number to which When returning a component for repair,
controlled by Export regulation.) and SERIAL NUMBER columns. the relevant parts are applicable. If the pack it in the same manner as for the
Character Significance SERIAL NUMBER column is blank, the supplied substitute, using the substitute
+
Parts applicable to export  PART NUMBER parts are applicable to all the relevant packing materials.
regulations. units. The shipment control number is The use of different packing materials or
PART NUMBER is a code number that represented by lower five digits of eight- packing methods may incur damage to
 Fault RANK characters is unique to each part. An alphabetic digit number indicated on the rating packed component during transit.
letter at the rightmost position of the indication label.
(Which provide reference for code number has the following meaning.
determining the recommended stock
quantity) For hardware  REFER TO
All parts are assigned with one of The alphabet denotes the version The "REFER TO" column shows
characters A through E. number of a part. If parts have different reference sections concerning the part.
version numbers, they are upward- Clicking the reference section in the
compatible. “REFER TO” column jumps to the top
page of the reference section where the
For software related information is in.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-1
 SP-2
INDEX

INDEX 01 INDEX 02 INDEX 03 INDEX 10 INDEX 11 INDEX 12

● カバー ● フレーム ● マガジンセット部 ● 制御部 ● 増設枚葉ユニット ● 車載キット
COVER FRAME MAGZINE SET SECTION CONTROLLER SHEET-FEEDER UNIT MOUNTING ACCESSORY
KIT

FPDZ001A.AI FPDZ002A.AI FPDZ003A.AI FPDZ010A.AI FPDZ012A.AI

FPDZ011A AI

INDEX 04 INDEX 05 INDEX 06 INDEX 13 INDEX 14 INDEX 15

● 枚葉部 ● 搬送部 ● 副走査部 ● ケーブル ● 回路図 ● 部品番号検索表
REMOVAL SECTION CONVEYOR SECTION SUB-SCANNING SECTION CABLE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM PARTS NOS. SEARCH
TABLE

FPDZ004A.AI FPDZ005A.AI FPDZ006A.AI

INDEX 07 INDEX 08 INDEX 09 INDEX 16

● ヘッド駆動部 ● ヘッド部 ● 排出部 ● 締結用および配線用の
HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION HEAD FILM RELEASE SECTION サービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for
Securing and Wiring

FPDZ007A.AI FPDZ008A.AI FPDZ009A.AI

016-201-03C
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-2
 SP-3

01A

カバー 1
COVER 1


カバー 1
COVER 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350Y100183 カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1.1}
D 2 376Y100004 メカニカルフィルタ Mechanical Filter 1 {PM:3.6}
D 3 316N100032D 止め具 Stand 1 －
FPDZ0111.AI D 4 350N100153H カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1.1}
D 5 350Y100182 カバー Cover 1 －
D 6 332N0600 ストッパ Stopper 1 {Safety:1.1}
A 7 393N0011 刃物 Cutter 1 －

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-3
 SP-4

01B

カバー 2
COVER 2


カバー 2
COVER 2 01B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N100232C カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.1}
D 2 405N100092 銘板 Label 1 －
D 3 405N100091 銘板 Label 1 －
FPDZ0112.AI D 4 350N100158G カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.4}
D 5 350N100226D カバー Cover 2 －
D 6 350Y100180 カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2 3}
D 7 350N100190F カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2 2}
D 8 350Y100181 カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.4}
D 9 350N100159H カバー Cover 1 －
D 10 350N100186E カバー Cover 1 －
D 11 376N100008D フィルター Filter 1 {PM:3.6}
D 12 345N100090D ルーバ Louver 1 －
D 13 319N100308A 軸 Shaft 2 －
D 14 350N100145G カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.6}
D 15 350N100255E カバー Cover 2 {MC:1.2 5}
D 16 316S1007 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 1 －
D 17 316S1006 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 1 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-4
 SP-5

02

フレーム
FRAME


フレーム
FRAME 02
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 363N2368A ガイド Guide 2 －
D 2 356N100375C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
{MC:2.1}
D 3 128S0987 マイクロスイッチ Micro Switch 2 SK11, SK12
{MC:2.2}
FPDZ0211.AI
D 4 366N100005B アクチュエータ Actuator 1 －
D 5 345N100096 板 Plate 1 －
D 6 356N100735 ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 7 366N100010 アクチュエータ Actuator 1 －
D 8 356N100577C 止め具 Bracket 1 －
D 9 357Y100010H ベース Base 1 －
D 10 367S0055 ゴム足 Rubber Foot 4 －
D 11 350N100193E カバー Cover 1 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-5
 SP-6

03A

マガジンセット部 1
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 1


マガジンセット部 1
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 1 03A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 356N100512A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
SA11, SA12,
D 2 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 {MC:3.1}
SA13
FPDZ0311.AI D 3 319N100206B 軸 Shaft 1 －
D 4 334N100060A ローラ Roller 2 －
D 5 332N100035 軸受け Plate 2 －
D 6 388N100060C 引張りコイルばね Tension Coil Spring 2 －
D 7 309N100009B 座金 Washer 2 －
D 8 363N100089B ガイドレール Guide Rail 2 －
D 9 363N100048D ガイドレール Guide Rail 4 －
D 10 386N100024A 緩衝機材 Shock Absober 1 －
D 11 316S6005 クリップ Clip 3 －
D 12 341N100006C アーム Arm 1 {MC:3.2}
D 13 346N100005B 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 2 {MC:3.2}
D 14 346N100006E 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 1 {MC:3.2}
D 15 329N100002C カム Cam 1 {MC:3.2}
D 16 356N100592 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:3.2}
D 17 332N100006C ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:3.2}
D 18 388N100079D 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1 {MC:3.2}
D 19 388N100119A 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1 {MC:3.2}

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-6
 SP-7

03B

マガジンセット部 2
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 2


マガジンセット部 2
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 2 03B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
20x25/
- 1 819Y100002H/L マガジン Magazine 1 {IN:5.8}
26x36 cm
20x25/
D 2.1 405N100095 銘板 Label 1 －
FPDZ0312.AI
26x36 cm
D 2.2 405N100426 銘板 Label 1 25x30 cm －
D 3 316N100034A 止め具 Stopper 1 －
D 4 332N0602 ストッパ Stopper 1 －
D 5 316N100029B 止め具 Plate 4 －
D 6 345N100032D 遮板 Actuator 1 －
For 20x25 cm
D 7 347N1726 調整板 Guide 4 {IN:5.8.2}
size
For 20x25 cm
D 8.1 347N100053C 調整板 Guide 4 {IN:5.8.2}
size
For 25x30 cm
D 8.2 347N100178A 調整板 Guide 4 {IN:5.8.2}
size
For 25x30 cm
D 9 898Y100173 キット（四切） Kit 1 {IN:5.8.2}
size

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-7
 SP-8

03C

マガジンセット部 3
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 3


マガジンセット部 3
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 3 03C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
- 1 819Y100001H マガジン Magazine 1 35x43 cm {IN:5.8}
D 2 405N10094 銘板 Label 1 －
D 3 316N100034A 止め具 Stopper 1 －
FPDZ0313.AI D 4 332N0602 ストッパ Stopper 1 －
D 5 316N100029B 止め具 Plate 4 －
D 6 345N100032D 遮板 Actuator 1 －

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-8
 SP-9

04A

枚葉部 1
REMOVAL SECTION 1


枚葉部 1
REMOVAL SECTION 1 04A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 356Y100095 ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:4.2}
D 2 356Y100056E ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 3 335N0089A フランジ Flange 2 －
FPDZ0411.AI D 4 322SP201 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 －
D 5 334Y100045B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:4.6}
D 6 319Y100007A 軸 Shaft 1 －
D 7 341N100014B アーム Arm 4 {MC:4.5}
D 8 341N100015C アーム Arm 4 {MC:4.5}
D 9 327N100006D 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:4.5}
D 10 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 4 －
D 11 356Y100096F ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.5}
D 12 327N1105802C 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:4.5}
D 13 327N1102802B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 14 327N100041B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 15 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB11 {MC:4.1}
D 16 386N1307A 防振ゴム Shock Absorber 1 {MC:4.1}
D 17 327N1088001D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 18 356Y100097G ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.5}

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-9
 SP-10

04B

枚葉部 2
REMOVAL SECTION 2


枚葉部 2
REMOVAL SECTION 2 04B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 341Y100010 アーム Arm 1 {MC:4.2}
D 2 332N0612 ストッパ Stopper 2 －
D 3 322N100017B すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 8 －
FPDZ0412.AI D 4 341N100013D アーム Arm 1 －
D 5 402N0020A ベローズ Bellows 2 {MC:4.4}
D 6 375N100012A シール Sheild 2 {MC:4.4}
D 7 346N100014B 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 2 －
D 8 388N100078 圧縮コイルばね Tension Spring 4 －
D 9 316Y100003A 止め具 Holder 2 －
D 10 392N100001 吸着盤 Suction Cup 2 {MC:4.3}
D 11 371N0123A ノズル Nozzle 2 －
D 12 334Y100035 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
E 13 390N100002A ウエイト Plate 4 －
D 14 322N100018B すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 8 －
D 15 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SB12 {MC:4.8}
D 16 366N100004B アクチュエータ Actuator 1 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-10
 SP-11

04C

枚葉部 3
REMOVAL SECTION 3


枚葉部 3
REMOVAL SECTION 3 04C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 313N100049F ステー Stay 1 －
{MC:4.7}
D 2 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SB11, SB13
{MC:4.9}
D 3 356N100558A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
FPDZ0413.AI
D 4 346N100015C 補助板 Support Plate 2 －
D 5 356N100532A ブラケット Bracket 2 －
D 6 356N100401B ブラケット Bracket 2 －
D 7 316S0462 止め具 Stopper 1 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-11
 SP-12

05A

搬送部 1
CONVEYOR SECTION 1


搬送部 1
CONVEYOR SECTION 1 05A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 341Y100019F アーム Arm 1 －
D 2 322N100029B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 6 －
D 3 335N100018A フランジ Flange 3 －
FPDZ0511.AI D 4 324Y100011B タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Gear 1 －
D 5 323S3385 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 －
D 6 388N100090E 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1 －
D 7 362N100007E/F 受 Support 2 －
A 8 334Y100059D ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
D 9 313N100050E ステー Stay 1 －
D 10 363Y100087A ガイド Guide 5 －
D 11 334N0072C ローラ Roller 5 －
D 12 363N100167D ガイド Guide 1 －
D 13 322N100027C すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 －
D 14 322SP212 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 －
D 15 363N100170 ガイド Guide 3 －
D 16 356N100493B ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 17 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SD12, SD14 {MC:5.5}
D 18 363N100166B ガイド Guide 4 －
D 19 334Y100060E/F ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
D 20 363N100108D ガイド Guide 4 －
D 21 313N100053F ステー Stay 1 －
D 22 350N100241A カバー Cover 1 －
D 23 356Y100158D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.4}
D 24 356Y100157D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.4}
D 25 388N100100B 引張コイルばね Tension Spring 1 －
D 26 366N100007 アクチュエータ Actuater 1 －
D 27 113Y1888A ボードアセンブリ PIS25A 1 SS1, SS2 －

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-12
 SP-13

05B

搬送部 2
CONVEYOR SECTION 2


搬送部 2
CONVEYOR SECTION 2 05B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 356N100436B ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 2 360N100010D ハウジング Housing 1 －
D 3 388N1211A 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 2 －
FPDZ0512.AI D 4 319N100177B 軸 Shaft 1 －
D 5 334N100041C ローラ Roller 1 －
D 6 356N100417C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 7 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD11 －
D 8 363N100238 ガイド Guide 1 －
D 9 313N100020C ステー Stay 1 －
D 10 363N100101D ガイド Guide 4 －
D 11 334N0072C ローラ Roller 24 －
D 12 363N100133D ガイド Guide 4 －
D 13 356N100447D ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 14 363N100185C ガイド Guide 1 －
D 15 363N100124C ガイド Guide 3 －
D 16 405N100090 銘板 Label 1 －
D 17 319N100198A 軸 Shaft 1 －
D 18 342N100009E レバー Lever 1 －
D 19 350N100147H カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.7}
D 20 342N100008E レバー Lever 1 －
D 21 388N100057C ばね Spring 1 －
D 22 356N100418C ブラケット Bracket 1 －

ローラ（REF.5）を交換する場合は軸（REF.4）も同時に交換すること。ただし、軸を交換する場合はロー
ラを交換する必要はない
When replacing the Roller (REF. 5), also replace the Shaft (REF. 4). However, replacement of the Roller
is not necessary if the Shaft is to be replaced.

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-13
 SP-14

05C

搬送部 3
CONVEYOR SECTION 3


搬送部 3
CONVEYOR SECTION 3 05C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N100034D 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 2 327N100036D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 3 327N100035C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
FPDZ0513.AI D 4 356N100376D ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 5 386S1089 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
D 6 118SX208A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD11 －
D 7 356N100540A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 8 146S0029A フォトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD13 －
D 9 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 1 －
D 10 327N100033C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 11 356N100419C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 12 334Y100044F ローラ Roller 1 －
D 13 322N100034F 軸受け Bearing 1 －
D 14 388N100144 ばね Spring 1 －
D 15 309S0006 座金 Washer 2 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-14
 SP-15

05D

搬送部 4
CONVEYOR SECTION 4


搬送部 4
CONVEYOR SECTION 4 05D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 363Y100054J ガイド Guide 1 －
D 2 388N100048A ばね Spring 1 －
D 3 322SY067 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 －
FPDZ0514.AI D 4 363N100111D ガイド Guide 1 －
D 5 363Y100085F ガイド Guide 1 －
D 6 313N100041B ステー Stay 2 －
D 7 322N100025D 軸受 Bearing 2 －
D 8 327N100044D ラック Rack 2 －
D 9 313N100042C ステー Stay 1 －
D 10 363N100132B ガイド Guide 3 －
D 11 356N100511A ブラケット Bracket 2 －
D 12 327N100039D ギア Gear 1 －
D 13 356Y100125E/F ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 14 118YX282C モータ Motor 1 MD12 {MC:5.2}
D 15 319N100175B 軸 Shaft 2 －

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-15
 SP-16

06

副走査部
SUB-SCANNING SECTION


副走査部
SUB-SCANNING SECTION 06
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 401N0894D 押え板 Pressure Plate 1 －
D 2 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 4 －
D 3 341Y100017B アーム Arm 1 －
FPDZ0611.AI D 4 322SP213 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 －
D 5 324N1042 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2 －
D 6 388N100089B 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 2 －
D 7 323N100011 平ベルト Belt 2 －
D 8 341N100026A アーム Arm 1 －
D 9 388N100088B 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 2 －
D 10 324N1038C 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2 {MC:6.2}
D 11 324N3184A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Gear 1 －
{MC:6.1}
D 12 118YA184A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME1
{MC:10.6}
D 13 386S1089 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
D 14 360N0509G ハウジング Housing 1 －
D 15 324Y1002E 平ベルト車 Wheel 1 －
D 16 309S0127 座金 Washer 1 －
D 17 401N0911D 押え板 Pressure Plate 1 －
D 18 334Y100039G ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.3}
D 19 343N0075D フック Hook 1 －
D 20 401N100010A 押え板 Pressure Plate 1 －
D 21 341N100036A アーム Arm 1 －
D 22 324N100011A ベルト車 Belt Gear 1 －
D 23 341Y100021A アーム Arm 1 －
D 24 319Y100018A 軸 Shaft 1 －
D 25 313N100052C ステー Stay 1 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-16
 SP-17

07A

ヘッド駆動部 1
HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 1


ヘッド駆動部 1
HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 1 07A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 351N100004B 化粧板 Bracket 1 －
D 2 369N100023E 管 Duct 2 －
D 3 351N100011A 化粧板 Bracket 1 －
FPDZ0711.AI D 4 356N100564E ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 5 386N100038A 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 4 －
D 6 119S0093 電動ファン Electric Fan 2 FANP1, FANP2 {MC:7.1}
D 7 369N100030H 管 Duct 1 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-17
 SP-18

07B

ヘッド駆動部 2
HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 2


ヘッド駆動部 2
HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 2 07B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 322N100027C すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 －
D 2 327N100059B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 3 327N100058C はすば歯車 Helical Gear 1 －
FPDZ0712.AI D 4 319N100288B 軸 Shaft 1 －
D 5 356Y100171D ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 6 327N100055B ウォームギア Worm Gear 1 －
D 7 327N100057B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 8 356N100513B ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 9 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SH1 －
D 10 356N100488A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 11 386N1307A 防振ゴム Shock Absorber 1 －
D 12 118SX210 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 MH1 {MC:7.2}
D 13 341Y100062 アーム Arm 1 {MC:7.3}

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-18
 SP-19

08

ヘッド部
HEAD


ヘッド部
HEAD 08
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
DETAIL A
D 1 854Y100006 記録部 Thermal Head 1 {MC:8.1}
2
D 2 401Y100005 圧板 Pressure Plate 2 －
-- 3 -- -- -- -- －
2 1 FPDZ0811.AI D 4 350N100259C カバー Cover 1 －
D 5 356N100526D ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 6 350N100258B カバー Cover 1 －
A D 7 341N100034D アーム Arm 1 －
D 8 362N100010D 受け Support 1 －
D 9 388N100064B 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 1 －
D 10 319Y100021H 軸 Shaft 1 －
D 11 341N100033D アーム Arm 1 －
4
D 12 351N100009E 化粧板 Bracket 1 －
2-TP3x6
TP3x6 D 13 356N100398J ブラケット Bracket 1 －

(Head Data FD) 5 D 14 351N100007D 化粧板 Bracket 1 －

D 15 364N100017 ガード Harness Guard 1 －
6 D 16 388N100099D 板ばね Leaf Spring 1 －
TP3x6
D 17 356N100529C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
E4 D 18 388N100132C 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 1 －
8 D 19 322SY339 すべり軸受け Ball Baring 1 －
TP3x6
D 20 386S1096 ショックアブソーバ Shock Absorber 1 －
7
D 21 356N100492E ブラケット Bracket 1 －
9
2-DT3x6
DT3x6

14
17 2-TP3x6
10
21 2-TP3x6 11
20 12
13
19 TP3x6
18 2-TP3x6

2-TP3x6

15 DT3x6

16

FPDZ0801.AI

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-19
 SP-20

09

排出部
FILM RELEASE SECTION


排出部
FILM RELEASE SECTION 09
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 113Y1532B PDD15A PDD15A 1 {MC:9.1}
D 2 605N0033 ガラス板 Filter 1 －
D 3 347N1783 スペーサ Spacer 1 －
FPDZ0911.AI D 4 363Y100074C ガイド Guide 1 －
D 5 363N100179A ガイド Guide 1 －
D 6 356N100486C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 7 113Y1531B LED15A LED15A 1 {MC:9.2}
D 8 322N100027C すべり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 －
D 9 324N3183 タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Gear 1 －
D 10 387N0148A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 －
D 11 327N1101905 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 12 334Y100080 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1 －
D 13 334Y100056C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-20
 SP-21

10A

制御部 1
CONTROLLER 1


制御部 1
CONTROLLER 1 10A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 845Y0129A パネル部 Panel 1 {MC:10.1}
D 2 120S3415 ソケット Socket 1 －
D 3 356Y100185B ブラケット Bracket 1 －
FPDZ1011.AI -- 4 -- -- -- -- －
D 5 313N100035E ステー Stay 1 －
D 6 128S0993 スイッチ Switch 1 －
D 7 363N100175B ガイド Guide 1 －
D 8 363N100193D ガイド Guide 2 －
D 9 131Y0003 リレー Relay 1 {MC:10.10}
D 10 356N100555A ブラケット Bracket 2 －
D 11 313N100060B ステー Stay 2 －
D 12 313N100061B ステー Stay 1 －

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-21
 SP-22

10B

制御部 2
CONTROLLER 2


制御部 2
CONTROLLER 2 10B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N100229F カバー Cover 1 －
D 2 350N100228E カバー Cover 1 －
D 3 363N100190C ガイド Guide 3 －
FPDZ1012.AI CR 4 113Y1885S/U SND25A SND25A 1 {MC:10.4}
D 5 356N100519F ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 6 355Y100048F フレーム Frame 1 －
D 7 316N100030C 止め具 Bracket 1 －
D 8 369N100029C ダクト Duct 1 －
D 9 386N100044 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
D 10 369N100022D ダクト Duct 1 －
D 11 386N100043 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
D 12 350N100149F カバー Cover 1 －
355Y100038G/
D 13 フレーム Frame 1 －
H
D 14 119S0053 電動ファン Electric Fan 1 FANK1 {MC:10.2}
D 15 364S0068 ガード Guard 1 －
CR 16 125Y0078A 電源 Power Supply 1 PSU25A {MC:10.5}
D 17 350N100148D カバー Cover 1 －
356Y100121C/
D 18 ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D
D 19 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1 THH6 －
D 20 356N9087 ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 21 356N100438E/F ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 22 356N100568A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 23 350N100192A カバー Cover 1 －
D 24 347S0136A スペーサ Spacer 1 －
D 25 356N100499F ブラケット Bracket 1 －
CR 26 113Y1890N CPU25A CPU25A 1 {MC:10.3}
CR 27 113Y1886D THC25A THC25A 1 －
D 28 114Y5001101A 記憶素子 CF Card 1 {MC:10.8}
D 29.1 102N100001 ボードアセンブリ Printed Circuit Board 1 512 MB DIMM －
D 29.2 102N100002/A ボードアセンブリ Printed Circuit Board 1 1 GB DIMM －
D 30 125N0150 リチウム電池 Lithium Battery 1 {MC:10.7}
D 31 375N100018 テープ Tape 1 －
D 32 375N100016A テープ Tape 1 －
D 33 375N100017 テープ Tape 2 －
A 34 137S1277 ヒューズ Fuse 2 AC/DC48V 2A －
AC/DC48V
A 35 137S1278 ヒューズ Fuse 1 －
3.2A
A 36 137S1280 ヒューズ Fuse 7 AC/DC48V 5A －

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-22
 SP-23

11A

増設枚葉ユニット 1
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 1


増設枚葉ユニット 1
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 1 11A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N100238E カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.8}
D 2 350N100240G カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.9}
D 3 350N100226D カバー Cover 2 －
D 4 350N100239H カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.9}
FPDZ110A.AI
D 5 350N100145G カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.10}

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-23
 SP-24

11B

増設枚葉ユニット 2
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 2


増設枚葉ユニット 2
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 2 11B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 363N2368A ガイド Guide 1 －
D 2 356N100375C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 3 128S0987 マイクロスイッチ Micro Switch 1 SK21 {MC:11}
D 4 366N100005B アクチュエータ Actuator 1 －
FPDZ110B.AI
D 5 345N100096 板 Plate 1 －
D 6 368N100001C 摺動台 Bracket 1 －
D 7 316N100028B 止め具 Bracket 1 {IN:5.6}
D 8 316N100036B 止め具 Bracket 1 {IN:5.6}
D 9 357Y100010H ベース Base 1 －
D 10 367S0055 ゴム足 Rubber Foot 4 －
D 11 350N100193E カバー Cover 1 －
D 12 316N100035B 止め具 Bracket 1 {IN:5.6}
D 13 368N100002D 摺動台 Bracket 1 －
D 14 316N100027B 止め具 Bracket 1 {IN:5.6}
D 15 356N100576C 止め具 Bracket 1 {IN:5.6}

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-24
 SP-25

11C

増設枚葉ユニット 3
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 3


増設枚葉ユニット 3
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 3 11C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 313N100054 ステー Stay 1 －
D 2 363N100175B ガイド Guide 1 －
E 3 353Y100006C シャーシ Chassis 1 －
E 4 313N100046D ステー Stay 1 －
FPDZ110C.AI
E 5 353Y100007C シャーシ Chassis 1 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-25
 SP-26

11D

増設枚葉ユニット 4
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 4


増設枚葉ユニット 4
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 4 11D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 356N100512A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
SA21, SA22,
D 2 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 {MC:11}
SA23
D 3 319N100206B 軸 Shaft 1 －
FPDZ110D.AI
D 4 334N100060A ローラ Roller 2 －
D 5 332N100035 軸受け Plate 2 －
D 6 388N100060C 引張りコイルばね Tension Coil Spring 2 －
D 7 309N100009B 座金 Washer 2 －
D 8 363N100089B ガイドレール Guide Rail 2 －
D 9 363N100048D ガイドレール Guide Rail 4 －
D 10 386N100024A 緩衝機材 Shock Absober 1 －
D 11 316S6005 クリップ Clip 3 －
D 12 341N100006C アーム Arm 1 －
D 13 346N100005B 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 2 －
D 14 346N100006E 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 1 －
D 15 329N100002C カム Cam 1 －
D 16 356N100592 ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 17 332N100006C ストッパ Stopper 1 －
D 18 388N100079D 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1 －
D 19 388N100119A 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1 －

上表は本体マガジンセット部 1（03A）と同じ。
The table shown above is the same as that of the Magazine Set Section 1 (03A).

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-26
 SP-27

11E

増設枚葉ユニット 5
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 5


増設枚葉ユニット 5
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 5 11E
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 356Y100095 ブラケット Bracket 2 －
D 2 356Y100056E ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 3 335N0089A フランジ Flange 2 －
D 4 322SP201 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 －
FPDZ110E.AI
D 5 334Y100045B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:11}
D 6 319Y100007A 軸 Shaft 1 －
D 7 341N100014B アーム Arm 4 －
D 8 341N100015C アーム Arm 4 －
D 9 327N100006D 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 10 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 4 －
D 11 356Y100096F ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 12 327N1105802C 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 13 327N1102802B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 14 327N100041B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 15 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB21 {MC:11.1}
D 16 386N1307A 防振ゴム Shock Absorber 1 {MC:11.1}
D 17 327N1088001D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 18 356Y100097G ブラケット Bracket 1 －

上表は本体枚葉部 1（04A）と同じ。
The table shown above is the same as that of the Removal Section 1 (04A).

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-27
 SP-28

11F

増設枚葉ユニット 6
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 6


増設枚葉ユニット 6
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 6 11F
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 341Y100010 アーム Arm 1 {MC:11}
D 2 332N0612 ストッパ Stopper 2 －
D 3 322N100017B すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 8 －
D 4 341N100013D アーム Arm 1 －
FPDZ110F.AI
D 5 402N0020A ベローズ Bellows 2 {MC:11}
D 6 375N100012A シール Sheild 2 －
D 7 346N100014B 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 2 －
D 8 388N100078 圧縮コイルばね Tension Spring 4 －
D 9 316Y100003A 止め具 Holder 2 －
D 10 392N100001 吸着盤 Suction Cup 2 {MC:11}
D 11 371N0123A ノズル Nozzle 2 －
D 12 334Y100035 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
E 13 390N100002A ウエイト Plate 4 －
D 14 322N100018B すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 8 －
D 15 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SB22 {MC:11}
D 16 366N100004B アクチュエータ Actuator 1 －

上表は本体枚葉部 2（04B）と同じ。
The table shown above is the same as that of the Removal Section 2 (04B).

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-28
 SP-29

11G

増設枚葉ユニット 7
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 7


増設枚葉ユニット 7
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 7 11G
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 313N100049F ステー Stay 1 －
D 2 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SB21, SB23 {MC:11}
D 3 356N100558A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 4 346N100015C 補助板 Support Plate 2 －
FPDZ110G.AI
D 5 356N100532A ブラケット Bracket 2 －
D 6 356N100401B ブラケット Bracket 2 －
D 7 316S0462 止め具 Stopper 1 －

上表は本体枚葉部 3（04C）と同じ。
The table shown above is the same as that of the Removal Section 3 (04C).

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-29
 SP-30

11H

増設枚葉ユニット 8
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 8


増設枚葉ユニット 8
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 8 11H
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 356N100436B ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 2 360N100010D ハウジング Housing 1 －
D 3 388N1211A 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 2 －
D 4 319N100177B 軸 Shaft 1 －
FPDZ110H.AI
D 5 334N100041C ローラ Roller 1 －
D 6 356N100417C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 7 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD21 －
D 8 363N100238 ガイド Guide 1 －
D 9 313N100020C ステー Stay 1 －
D 10 363N100101D ガイド Guide 4 {IN:5.6}
D 11 334N0072C ローラ Roller 24 {IN:5.6}
D 12 363N100133D ガイド Guide 4 －
D 13 356N100447D ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 14 363N100185C ガイド Guide 1 －
D 15 405N100089 銘板 Label 1 －
D 16 319N100207A 軸 Shaft 1 －
D 17 342N100009E レバー Lever 2 －
D 18 350N100146H カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.2.11}
D 19 388N100120B ばね Spring 1 －
D 20 356N100418C ブラケット Bracket 1 －

上表の REF.1 ～ 14 の PART NO. は本体搬送部 2（05B）REF.1 ～ 14 の PART NO. と同じ。

The part numbers of REF. 1 to 14 are the same as those of REF. 1 to 14 of the Conveyor Section 2 (05B).

ローラ（REF.5）を交換する場合は軸（REF.4）も同時に交換すること。ただし、軸を交換する場合はロー
ラを交換する必要はない
When replacing the Roller (REF. 5), also replace the Shaft (REF. 4). However, replacement of the Roller
is not necessary if the Shaft is to be replaced.

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-30
 SP-31

11I

増設枚葉ユニット 9
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 9


増設枚葉ユニット 9
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 9 11I
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N100034D 平歯車 Spur Gear 6 {IN:5.6}
D 2 356Y100115D ブラケット Bracket 1 {IN:5.6}
D 3 327N100035C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 4 146S0029A フォトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD23 －
FPDZ110I.AI
D 5 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 1 －
D 6 327N100033C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 7 356N100419C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 8 334Y100044F ローラ Roller 1 －
D 9 322N100034F 軸受け Bearing 1 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-31
 SP-32

11J

増設枚葉ユニット 10
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 10


増設枚葉ユニット 10
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 10 11J
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 363Y100088D ガイド Guide 1 －
D 2 388N100048A ばね Spring 1 －
D 3 322SY067 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 －
D 4 363N100111D ガイド Guide 1 －
FPDZ110J.AI
D 5 363Y100086E ガイド Guide 1 －
D 6 313N100041B ステー Stay 2 －
D 7 322N100025D 軸受 Bearing 2 －
D 8 327N100044D ラック Rack 2 －
D 9 313N100042C ステー Stay 1 －
D 10 363N100132B ガイド Guide 3 －
D 11 356N100511A ブラケット Bracket 2 －
D 12 327N100039D ギア Gear 1 －
D 13 356Y100125E/F ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 14 118YX282C モータ Motor 1 MD22 {MC:11}
D 15 319N100175B 軸 Shaft 2 －

上表の REF.1 と 5 を除く全ての PART NO. は本体搬送部 4（05D）と同じ。

All part numbers except for REF. 1 and 5 in the table above are the same as those of the Conveyor
Section (05D).

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-32
 SP-33

11K

増設枚葉ユニット 11
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 11


増設枚葉ユニット 11
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 11 11K
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 356Y100155A ブラケット Bracket 1 {IN:5.6}
D 2 327N100034D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {IN:5.6}
D 3 327N100033C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {IN:5.6}
D 4 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 1 －
FPDZ110K.AI
D 5 313N100058C ステー Stay 1 {IN:5.6}
D 6 363N100104F ガイド Guide 3 {IN:5.6}
D 7 334N0072C ローラ Roller 3 {IN:5.6}
D 8 388N100045E ばね Spring 3 {IN:5.6}
D 9 313N100025C ステー Stay 1 {IN:5.6}
D 10 334Y100072B ローラ Roller 1 {IN:5.6}
D 11 322N100034F 軸受け Bearing 1 －

016-201-04C
02.15.2007 FM5074
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-33
 SP-34

12

車載キット
MOUNTING ACCESSORY KIT


車載キット
MOUNTING ACCESSORY KIT 12
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 316Y100011 止め具 Bracket 2 －
D 2 309N100013 座金 Washer 4 －
D 3 304S1000820 六角ボルト Bolt 4 R8x20 －
D 4 308S0411 特殊ねじ Special Screw 4 M4x25 －
FPDZ1211.AI
D 5 309S0120008 平座金 Washer 4 W8 －
D 6 309S0220008 ばね座金 Washer 4 SW8 －
D 7 382N100023 テープ Tape 2 Long －
D 8 382N100024 テープ Tape 4 Short －
D 9 317S1066 キャップ Cap 4 －

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-34
 SP-35

13

ケーブル
CABLE
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS CONNECTION DIAGRAM
E 1 136Y9493C ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 2 136Y9494B ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 3 136Y9496D ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 4 136Y9497B ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 5 136Y9501A ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 6 136Y9503D ケーブル Cable 1 3/8
E 7 136Y9509B ケーブル Cable 1 3/8
E 8 136Y9510C ケーブル Cable 1 5/8
E 9 136Y9513C ケーブル Cable 1 5/8
E 10 136Y9514B ケーブル Cable 1 5/8
E 11 136Y9516D ケーブル Cable 2 4/8
E 12 136Y9535F ケーブル Cable 1 4/8
E 13 136Y9582B ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 14 136Y9583B ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 15 136Y9584A ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 16 136Y9585B ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 17 136Y9586B ケーブル Cable 1 3/8
E 18 136Y9588A ケーブル Cable 1 6/8
E 19 136Y9589B ケーブル Cable 1 5/8
E 20 136Y9590A ケーブル Cable 1 5/8
E 21 136Y9594A ケーブル Cable 1
E 22 136Y9599A ケーブル Cable 1 2/8
E 23 136Y9605B ケーブル Cable 1 8/8
E 24 136Y9606B ケーブル Cable 1 8/8
E 25 136Y9607 ケーブル Cable 1 8/8

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-35
 SP-36

14

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

��
854Y100005

A A

H1-CN3 H1-CN4

1
2

1
2
136Y9584

電源

1
1

1
1
125N0148
B
RLY TB-1 TB-2 B
136Y9497 136Y9582 (リレー） 136Y9583
CNPS2-P CNPS2-J
SL1+15.3V 1 ＋15.3V 1 1 1 RLY-4 RLY-3 1 1
TB-1
N.C 2 2 N.C 1
SL1+15.3VGND 1 ＋15.3V(GND) 3 3 1 RLY-2 RLY-1 1
1

TB-2
1
RLY-5 RLY-6

1
C C

100V-120V NFB TB
136Y9493 (ブレーカ） 136Y9494 136Y9496 (端子台）

1
200V-240V
AC Inlet
CNPS1-J CNPS1-P

2 RLYON
3 VHEDH
NFB_LINE-L
L 1 AC(L) 1 AC(L) FG1

1 +24V

4 GND
1 1 1 1 AL-L 1 +3.3V 136Y9599

5 N.C
6 N.C
NFB_LOAD-L AC(N) SL4+3.3V 1
2 2
NFB_LINE-N
N 1 AC(N) 1 1 1 +3.3VGND
1 SL4+3.3VGND 136Y9585
N 1 AL-N
NFB_LOAD-N
SL4+5V 1 +5V SND25A-CN26
D D
1 AL-E
SL4+5VGND 1 +5VGND SND25A-CN2-J SND25A-CN2-P
R1 1 1 136Y9595 1 SND25A-CN2
136Y9594 6 6 6
2 2 2
1 SL5+12V 1 +12V
E 7 7 7
1 GND
E 136Y9493 3 3 3
SL5+12VGND 1 +12VGND 8 8 8 SND25A
4 4 4 113Ｙ1885
9 9 9
E 5 5 5 E
SL1-CN1 S+ 10 10 10
1 D1
2 S-
3 N.C
4 N.C
5 N.C
6 N.C
7 N.C
8 N.C
9 +R
F 10 -R F

SL5+24V 1 +24V 136Y9501 1 SND25A-CN1

SL5+24VGND 1 +24VGND 2

MVMJ-CN1 1 N.C
2 N.C
G G
3 0VAUX 136Y9599 1 SND25A-CN3
4 12VAUX 2
5 FANALM 3
6 GINH 4
N.C 5

機種 5001 ユニット <ユニット>

名称 回路図 補助名称 DRYPIX 2000
H H
コード Z22Y0005001 Rev. 4
頁
2
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-03C
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-36
 SP-37

14

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SND25A-CN6 1 VCCH 136Y9586 1 CNVCC

7 GNDH 7
A 2 +24V 2 A
8 +24VGND 8
3 +3.3V 3
9 +3.3VGND 9
4 +5V 4
10 +5VGND 10
5 +12V 5
11 +12VGND 11
6 +5VAUX 6
12 +5VAUXGND 12
B B

SND25A-CN4 1 +3.3V 136Y9503 1 CPU25A-CNPOW

11 N.C 2
2 +3.3V 3
12 N.C
N.C 4
3 GND 5
C
SND25A GND CPU25A-CNFP N.C C
113Y1885 13 6 1
4 +5V 7 2 N.C
14 PS_ON 8 3 N.C 1 PNL25A-CN2
5 GND 9 4 P-BTN 136Y9606 2
15 GND 10 5 GND 3
6 +5V 11 CPU25A 6 N.C 4
16 GND 12 113Y1890 7 N.C
7 GND N.C
N.C 13 8
17 GND 14 9 N.C
8 PWR_OK 15 10 N.C
18 N.C GND
D N.C 16 11 PNL25A D
9 5VAUX 17 12 LED
113Y1891
19 +5V 18 13 N.C
10 +12V
N.C 19
20 N.C 20

CPU25A-CNCOM2 1 DCD 136Y9606 1 PNL25A-CN1

2 RXD 2
3 TXD 3
E SND25A-CN19 1 N.C 1 CPU25A-CNCAN E
N.C 4 DTR 4
2 N.C 2
N.C 5 GND 5
3 CAN＋ 136Y9509 3
6 DSR 6
4 CAN－ 4
7 RTS 7
8 CTS 8
9 RI 9
10 +5V 10

F F

CNPIDE
1
2

39
G G
40

機種 5001 ユニット <ユニット>

名称 回路図 補助名称 DRYPIX 2000

H H
コード Z22Y0005001 Rev. 4
頁
3
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-03C
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-37
 SP-38

14

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

THC25A-CN3 A1 VDD 136Y9535 A1 H1-CN2

B1 GND B1
A A2 VDD A2 A

B2 GND B2
A3 /STROBE A3
B3 GND B3
A4 DATA IN 1 A4
B4 GND B4
A5 DATA IN 2 A5
B5 GND B5
A6 A6 �
CPU25A DATA IN 3
854Y100005
113Y1890 113Y1886 B6 GND B6
B A7 DATA IN 4 A7 B
B7 GND B7
A8 DATA IN 5 A8
B8 GND B8
A9 DATA IN 6 A9
B9 GND B9
A10 DATA IN 7 A10
B10 GND B10
A11 DATA IN 8 A11
B11 GND B11
C A12 DATA IN 9 A12 C
B12 GND B12
A13 DATA IN 10 A13
B13 GND B13
A14 DATA IN 11 A14
B14 GND B14
A15 DATA IN 12 A15
B15 GND B15
A16 DATA IN 13 A16
B16 GND B16
D
A17 DATA IN 14 A17 D
B17 GND B17

THC25A-CN4 A1 DATA IN 15 136Y9535 A1 H1-CN1

B1 GND B1
A2 DATA IN 16 A2
B2 GND B2
E A3 DATA IN 17 A3 E
B3 GND B3
A4 DATA IN 18 A4
B4 GND B4
A5 DATA IN 19 A5
B5 GND B5
A6 DATA IN 20 A6
B6 GND B6
A7 DATA IN 21 A7
B7 GND B7
F A8 DATA IN 22 A8 F
B8 GND B8
A9 /LATCH 1 A9
B9 GND B9
A10 /LATCH 2 A10
B10 GND B10
A11 /LATCH 3 A11
B11 GND B11
A12 CLOCK 1 A12
B12 GND B12
G A13 CLOCK 2 A13 G
B13 GND B13
A14 CLOCK 3 A14
B14 GND B14

136Y9516 機種 5001 ユニット <ユニット>

FG1 FG2
1 1
H 名称 回路図 補助名称 DRYPIX 2000 H

コード Z22Y0005001 Rev. 4

頁
4
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-03C
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-38
 SP-39

14

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

CNSD11-J CNSD11 CNSD11-P

SND25A-CN23 1 VCC_SENS 136Y9589 3 1 136Y9510 1
2 SD11V 2 2 2
A
3 GND 1 3 3 146S0086 A

4 VCC_SENS
5 SD13V
6 GND
7 VCC_SENS 1
8 SA11V 2
GND 3 146S0029
9
10 VCC_SENS
113Y1885
11 SA12V
12 GND
B
13 VCC_SENS 1 B

14 SA13V 2 A
15 GND 3 146S0029
16 VCC_SENS
17 SB11V
18 GND
19 VCC_SENS 1
20 SB12V 2
21 GND 3 146S0029
22 VCC_SENS
C 23 SB13V C

24 GND
1
2 A1
3 146S0029

CNS21/23-P CNS21/23-J CNSD21-J CNSD21 CNSD21-P

SND25A-CN24 1 VCC_SENS 136Y9590 1 1 136Y9513 3 1 136Y9514 1
SD21V 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
GND 146S0086 2
3 3 3 1 3 3
D VCC_SENS 3 146S0029 D
4 4 4
5 SD23V 5 5
6 GND 6 6
7 VCC_SENS 7 7 1
SA21V 1
8 8 8 2 1
GND 146S0029 2
9 9 9 3
VCC_SENS 3 146S0029
10 10 10
11 SA22V 11 11
12 GND 12 12
13 VCC_SENS 13 13 1
E SA23V 1 E
14 14 14 2
GND 2
15 15 15 3 146S0029
VCC_SENS 3 146S0029
16 16 16
17 SB21V 17 17
18 GND 18 18
19 VCC_SENS 19 19 1
20 SB22V 20 20 2 A
21 GND 21 21 3 146S0029
22 VCC_SENS 22 22
23 SB23V 23 23
F 24 GND 24 24 F

25 N.C 1
26 N.C 2
3 146S0029

1
2
3 146S0029
G G

1
2
3 146S0029

1 機種 5001 ユニット <ユニット>

H 2 名称 回路図 補助名称 DRYPIX 2000 H

3 146S0029
コード Z22Y0005001 Rev. 4
頁
5
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-03C
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-39
 SP-40

14

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SND25A-CN21 1 VCC_SENS 136Y9606 1

2 SH1V 2
3 GND 3
A 146S0029 A
4 VCC_SENS
5 SD14V
6 GND
7 VCC_SENS 1
8 SD12V 2
9 GND 3 146S0086
10 SSCT
11 VCC_SENS
12 GND
SND25A SS1_a
B 113Y1885 13 1 1 B
14 SS1_b 2
15 SSCT 3 146S0086
16 VCC_SENS
17 GND
18 SS2_a
19 SS2_b
20 N.C
1 A
2
3 113Y1888A
ME1-DRV-CN3
C SND25A-CN22 1 VCC_SENS 136Y9588 1 4 （ SS1 ） C

2 ME1CLKC 2 5
3 VCC_SENS 3
4 ME1CWB 4
5 VCC_SENS 5 D V
6 ME1EN 6 141N0002
N.C 7 1 A
N.C 8 2
N.C 9 3 113Y1888A
N.C10 4 （ SS2 ）
D 5 D

H1-CN5
SND25A-CN25 1 THH1H 136Y9606 1 1
2 THH1L 2 2 THH1
3 THH2H 3 3
4 THH2L 4 4 851N0005
5 THH3H 5 5
E
6 THH3L 6 6 E
THH2
7 THH4H 7 7
8 THH4L 8 8 851N0005
9 THH5H 9 9
10 THH5L 10 10
11 THH6H THH3
12 THH6L THH6
13 VCC_SENS 1 851N0005
14 GND 2 THH6
15 LED ON_Cb
THH4
F 16 +12V_PDD 115Y0041 F

17 AGND
851N0005
18 -12V_PDD
19 LOGOUT
N.C 1 LED15A-CN85 THH5
20 A
N.C 2
21 113Y1531 �
N.C 3 851N0005
22 854Y100005

G G
1 PDD15A-CN87
2 1 A
3 113Y1532
4

機種 5001 ユニット <ユニット>

名称 回路図 補助名称 DRYPIX 2000

H H
コード Z22Y0005001 Rev. 4
頁
6
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-03C
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-40
 SP-41

14

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

TPH1 TPH1
SND25A-CN34 1 TPH1-COM 136Y9607 1 黒 BLK COM NC
2 TPH1-NC 2 黒 BLK
A
3 HH1-ON/OFF A
115Y100010
4 HH1-G
5 HH1-ON/OFF HH1-1
6 HH1-G 1
7 N.C 2 HH1-1 117Y100013

HH1-2
1
2 HH1-2 117Y100013
B B

ヘッド部
854Y100005
SK12
SK12-NO
SK12-COM
SND25A-CN38 1 SK12-COM 136Y9607 1 1 128S0987
2 SK12-NO
3 N.C
4 N.C
C C

D ME1
113Y1885 ME1-DRV-CN2 1 136Y9607 1
2 2
3 3 ME1
SND25A-CN33 1 +24V 136Y9607 1 ME1-DRV-CN1
GND 4 4 118YA184
2 2
D MH1A N.C 3 5 5 D
3
4 MH1 ACOM
5 MH1AB
6 MH1 B
MH1 BCOM MH1 ME1-DRV
7 141N0002
8 MH1BB 136Y9607 1
2
3 MH1
4 118SX210
5
E E
6

FANP1
SND25A-CN35 1 FANP1 136Y9607 4 +24V
2 GND N.C 3 N.C
3 FANP2 N.C 2 ALARM FANP1 119S0093
4 GND 1 GND
F F

292254-4
FANP2
4 +24V
N.C 3 N.C
SND25A-CN39 1 +24V N.C 2 ALARM FANP2 119S0093
2 N.C 1 GND
3 ALARM FANK11 119S0053
4 GND
292254-4
G G

機種 5001 ユニット <ユニット>

名称 回路図 補助名称 DRYPIX 2000

H H
コード Z22Y0005001 Rev. 4
頁
7
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-03C
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-41
 SP-42

14

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SK11
SK11-COM SK11-NO
SND25A-CN36 1 SK11-COM 136Y9607 1 1 128S0987
A
2 SK11-NO A

M
SND25A-CN31 1 MB11A 136Y9607 1
2 MB11 ACOM 2
B B
3 MB11AB 3
MB11 B 11
4 4 118SX210
5 MB11 BCOM 5
6 MB11BB 6
7 MD11A
SND25A 8 MD11 BCOM
113Y1885 9 MD11B
10 MD11AB MD11
11 MD11 ACOM 1
12 MD11BB 2
C C
13 MD12A 3
MD12AB 11
14 4 118SX208
15 MD12 COM 5
16 MD12B 6
17 MD12BB
18 N.C

MD12
5
D 4 D
3 M 12
2 118YX282
SND25A-CN37 1 SK21-COM 136Y9607 1
2 SK21-NO
3 N.C
292254-5

SK21
CNSK21-P CNSK21-J
SK21-COM SK21-NO
1 1 136Y9605 1 1 128S0987
E E
8 8
SND25A-CN32 1 MB21A 136Y9607 2 2
2 MB21 ACOM 9 9
3 MB21AB 3 3
4 MB21B 10 10
5 MB21 BCOM 4 4
6 MB21BB 11 11
7 MD22A 5 5 M
8 MD22AB 12 12 1
F
9 MD22 COM 6 6 2 F
10 MD22B 13 13 3 1
11 MD22BB 7 7 4 118SX210
12 N.C N.C 14 14 N.C 5
6

CNSK21-J
1 136Y9607 MD22
8 5
G G
2 N.C 4
9 N.C 3 M
3 N.C 2 118YX282
10 N.C 1
4 N.C
11 N.C
292254-5
5 N.C
12 N.C
N.C 機種 5001 ユニット <ユニット>
6
13 N.C 名称 回路図 補助名称 DRYPIX 2000
H
7 N.C H

14 N.C コード Z22Y0005001 Rev. 4

頁
8
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-03C
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-42
 SP-43

15
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
102N100001 10B-29.1
102N100002/A 10B-29.2
113Y1531B 09-07
113Y1532B 09-01
113Y1885S/U 10B-04
113Y1886D 10B-27
113Y1888A 05A-27
113Y1890N 10B-26
114Y5001101A 10B-28
115Y0041A 10B-19
118SX208A 05C-06
118SX210 04A-15
118SX210 07B-12
118SX210 11E-15
118YA184A 06-12
118YX282C 05D-14
118YX282C 11J-14
119S0053 10B-14
119S0093 07A-06
120S3415 10A-02
125N0150 10B-30
125Y0078A 10B-16
128S0987 02-03
128S0987 11B-03
128S0993 10A-06
131Y0003 10A-09
136Y9493C 13-01
136Y9494B 13-02
136Y9496D 13-03
136Y9497B 13-04
136Y9501A 13-05
136Y9503D 13-06
136Y9509B 13-07
136Y9510C 13-08
136Y9513C 13-09
136Y9514B 13-10
136Y9516D 13-11
136Y9535F 13-12
136Y9582B 13-13
136Y9583B 13-14
136Y9584A 13-15
136Y9585B 13-16
136Y9586B 13-17
136Y9588A 13-18
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
136Y9589B 13-19
136Y9590A 13-20
136Y9594A 13-21
136Y9599A 13-22
136Y9605B 13-23
136Y9606B 13-24
136Y9607 13-25
137S1277 10B-34
137S1278 10B-35
137S1280 10B-36
146S0029A 03A-02
146S0029A 04B-15
146S0029A 04C-02
146S0029A 05C-08
146S0029A 07B-09
146S0029A 11D-02
146S0029A 11F-15
146S0029A 11G-02
146S0029A 11I-04
146S0086 05A-17
146S0086 05B-07
146S0086 11H-07
304S1000820 12-03
305N100013 12-02
308S0411 12-04
309N100009B 03A-07
309N100009B 11D-07
309S0006 05C-15
309S0120008 12-05
309S0127 06-16
309S0220008 12-06
313N100020C 05B-09
313N100020C 11H-09
313N100025C 11K-09
313N100035E 10A-05
313N100041B 05D-06
313N100041B 11J-06
313N100042C 05D-09
313N100042C 11J-09
313N100046D 11C-04
313N100049F 04C-01
313N100049F 11G-01
313N100050E 05A-09
313N100052C 06-25
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
313N100053F 05A-21
313N100054 11C-01
313N100058C 11K-05
313N100060B 10A-11
313N100061B 10A-12
316N100027B 11B-14
316N100028B 11B-07
316N100029B 03B-05
316N100029B 03C-05
316N100030C 10B-07
316N100032D 01A-03
316N100034A 03B-03
316N100034A 03C-03
316N100035B 11B-12
316N100036B 11B-08
316S0462 04C-07
316S0462 11G-07
316S1006 01B-17
316S1007 01B-16
316S6005 03A-11
316S6005 11D-11
316Y100003A 04B-09
316Y100003A 11F-09
316Y100011 12-01
317S1066 12-09
319N100175B 05D-15
319N100175B 11J-15
319N100177B 05B-04
319N100177B 11H-04
319N100198A 05B-17
319N100206B 03A-03
319N100206B 11D-03
319N100207A 11H-16
319N100288B 07B-04
319N100308A 01B-13
319Y100007A 04A-06
319Y100007A 11E-06
319Y100018A 06-24
319Y100021H 08-10
322N100017B 04B-03
322N100017B 11F-03
322N100018B 04B-14
322N100018B 11F-14
322N100025D 05D-07
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
322N100025D 11J-07
322N100027C 05A-13
322N100027C 07B-01
322N100027C 09-08
322N100029B 05A-02
322N100034F 05C-13
322N100034F 11I-09
322N100034F 11K-11
322N1003 04A-10
322N1003 05C-09
322N1003 06-02
322N1003 11E-10
322N1003 11I-05
322N1003 11K-04
322SP201 04A-04
322SP201 11E-04
322SP212 05A-14
322SP213 06-04
322SY067 05D-03
322SY067 11J-03
322SY339 08-19
323N100011 06-07
323S3385 05A-05
324N100011A 06-22
324N1038C 06-10
324N1042 06-05
324N3183 09-09
324N3184A 06-11
324Y100011B 05A-04
324Y1002E 06-15
327N100006D 04A-09
327N100006D 11E-09
327N100033C 05C-10
327N100033C 11I-06
327N100033C 11K-03
327N100034D 05C-01
327N100034D 11I-01
327N100034D 11K-02
327N100035C 05C-03
327N100035C 11I-03
327N100036D 05C-02
327N100039D 05D-12
327N100039D 11J-12
327N100041B 04A-14
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
327N100041B 11E-14
327N100044D 05D-08
327N100044D 11J-08
327N100055B 07B-06
327N100057B 07B-07
327N100058C 07B-03
327N100059B 07B-02
327N1088001D 04A-17
327N1088001D 11E-17
327N1101905 09-11
327N1102802B 04A-13
327N1102802B 11E-13
327N1105802C 04A-12
327N1105802C 11E-12
329N100002C 03A-15
329N100002C 11D-15
332N0600 01A-06
332N0602 03B-04
332N0602 03C-04
332N0612 04B-02
332N0612 11F-02
332N100006C 03A-17
332N100006C 11D-17
332N100035 03A-05
332N100035 11D-05
334N0072C 05A-11
334N0072C 05B-11
334N0072C 11H-11
334N0072C 11K-07
334N100041C 05B-05
334N100041C 11H-05
334N100060A 03A-04
334N100060A 11D-04
334Y100035 04B-12
334Y100035 11F-12
334Y100039G 06-18
334Y100044F 05C-12
334Y100044F 11I-08
334Y100045B 04A-05
334Y100045B 11E-05
334Y100056C 09-13
334Y100059D 05A-08
334Y100060E/F 05A-19
334Y100072B 11K-10
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
334Y100080 09-12
335N0089A 04A-03
335N0089A 11E-03
335N100018A 05A-03
341N100006C 03A-12
341N100006C 11D-12
341N100013D 04B-04
341N100013D 11F-04
341N100014B 04A-07
341N100014B 11E-07
341N100015C 04A-08
341N100015C 11E-08
341N100026A 06-08
341N100033D 08-11
341N100034D 08-07
341N100036A 06-21
341Y100010 04B-01
341Y100010 11F-01
341Y100017B 06-03
341Y100019F 05A-01
341Y100021A 06-23
341Y100062 07B-13
342N100008E 05B-20
342N100009E 05B-18
342N100009E 11H-17
343N0075D 06-19
345N100032D 03B-06
345N100032D 03C-06
345N100090D 01B-12
345N100096 02-05
345N100096 11B-05
346N100005B 03A-13
346N100005B 11D-13
346N100006E 03A-14
346N100006E 11D-14
346N100014B 04B-07
346N100014B 11F-07
346N100015C 04C-04
346N100015C 11G-04
347N100053C 03B-08.1
347N100178A 03B-08.2
347N1726 03B-07
347N1783 09-03
347S0136A 10B-24

016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-43

15
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
350N100145G 01B-14
350N100145G 11A-05
350N100146H 11H-18
350N100147H 05B-19
350N100148D 10B-17
350N100149F 10B-12
350N100153H 01A-04
350N100158G 01B-04
350N100159H 01B-09
350N100186E 01B-10
350N100190F 01B-07
350N100192A 10B-23
350N100193E 02-11
350N100193E 11B-11
350N100226D 01B-05
350N100226D 11A-03
350N100228E 10B-02
350N100229F 10B-01
350N100232C 01B-01
350N100238E 11A-01
350N100239H 11A-04
350N100240G 11A-02
350N100241A 05A-22
350N100255E 01B-15
350N100258B 08-06
350N100259C 08-04
350Y100180 01B-06
350Y100181 01B-08
350Y100182 01A-05
350Y100183 01A-01
351N100004B 07A-01
351N100007D 08-14
351N100009E 08-12
351N100011A 07A-03
353Y100006C 11C-03
353Y100007C 11C-05
355Y100038G/H 10B-13
355Y100048F 10B-06
356N100375C 02-02
356N100375C 11B-02
356N100376D 05C-04
356N100398J 08-13
356N100401B 04C-06
356N100401B 11G-06
016-201-05C
03.31.2008 FM5329
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
356N100417C 05B-06
356N100417C 11H-06
356N100418C 05B-22
356N100418C 11H-20
356N100419C 05C-11
356N100419C 11I-07
356N100436B 05B-01
356N100436B 11H-01
356N100438E/F 10B-21
356N100447D 05B-13
356N100447D 11H-13
356N100486C 09-06
356N100488A 07B-10
356N100492E 08-21
356N100493B 05A-16
356N100499F 10B-25
356N100511A 05D-11
356N100511A 11J-11
356N100512A 03A-01
356N100512A 11D-01
356N100513B 07B-08
356N100519F 10B-05
356N100526D 08-05
356N100529C 08-17
356N100532A 04C-05
356N100532A 11G-05
356N100540A 05C-07
356N100555A 10A-10
356N100558A 04C-03
356N100558A 11G-03
356N100564E 07A-04
356N100568A 10B-22
356N100576C 11B-15
356N100577C 02-08
356N100592 03A-16
356N100592 11D-16
356N100735 02-06
356N9087 10B-20
356Y100056E 04A-02
356Y100056E 11E-02
356Y100095 04A-01
356Y100095 11E-01
356Y100096F 04A-11
356Y100096F 11E-11
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
356Y100097G 04A-18
356Y100097G 11E-18
356Y100115D 11I-02
356Y100121C/D 10B-18
356Y100125E/F 05D-13
356Y100125E/F 11J-13
356Y100155A 11K-01
356Y100157D 05A-24
356Y100158D 05A-23
356Y100171D 07B-05
356Y100185B 10A-03
357Y100010H 02-09
357Y100010H 11B-09
360N0509G 06-14
360N100010D 05B-02
360N100010D 11H-02
362N100007E/F 05A-07
362N100010D 08-08
363N100048D 03A-09
363N100048D 11D-09
363N100089B 03A-08
363N100089B 11D-08
363N100101D 05B-10
363N100101D 11H-10
363N100104F 11K-06
363N100108D 05A-20
363N100111D 05D-04
363N100111D 11J-04
363N100124C 05B-15
363N100132B 05D-10
363N100132B 11J-10
363N100133D 05B-12
363N100133D 11H-12
363N100166B 05A-18
363N100167D 05A-12
363N100170 05A-15
363N100175B 10A-07
363N100175B 11C-02
363N100179A 09-05
363N100185C 05B-14
363N100185C 11H-14
363N100190C 10B-03
363N100193D 10A-08
363N100238 05B-08
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
363N100238 11H-08
363N2368A 02-01
363N2368A 11B-01
363Y100054J 05D-01
363Y100074C 09-04
363Y100085F 05D-05
363Y100086E 11J-05
363Y100087A 05A-10
363Y100088D 11J-01
364N100017 08-15
364S0068 10B-15
366N100004B 04B-16
366N100004B 11F-16
366N100005B 02-04
366N100005B 11B-04
366N100007 05A-26
366N100010 02-07
367S0055 02-10
367S0055 11B-10
368N100001C 11B-06
368N100002D 11B-13
369N100022D 10B-10
369N100023E 07A-02
369N100029C 10B-08
369N100030H 07A-07
371N0123A 04B-11
371N0123A 11F-11
375N100012A 04B-06
375N100012A 11F-06
375N100016A 10B-32
375N100017 10B-33
375N100018 10B-31
376N100008D 01B-11
376Y100004 01A-02
382N100023 12-07
382N100024 12-08
386N100024A 03A-10
386N100024A 11D-10
386N100038A 07A-05
386N100043 10B-11
386N100044 10B-09
386N1307A 04A-16
386N1307A 07B-11
386N1307A 11E-16
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual
SP-44
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
386S1089 05C-05 405N10094 03C-02
386S1089 06-13 605N0033 09-02
386S1096 08-20 819Y100001H 03C-01
387N0148A 09-10 819Y100002H/L 03B-01
388N100045E 11K-08 845Y0129A 10A-01
388N100048A 05D-02 854Y100006 08-01
388N100048A 11J-02 898Y100173 03B-09
388N100057C 05B-21
388N100060C 03A-06
388N100060C 11D-06
388N100064B 08-09
388N100078 04B-08
388N100078 11F-08
388N100079D 03A-18
388N100079D 11D-18
388N100088B 06-09
388N100089B 06-06
388N100090E 05A-06
388N100099D 08-16
388N100100B 05A-25
388N100119A 03A-19
388N100119A 11D-19
388N100120B 11H-19
388N100132C 08-18
388N100144 05C-14
388N1211A 05B-03
388N1211A 11H-03
390N100002A 04B-13
390N100002A 11F-13
392N100001 04B-10
392N100001 11F-10
393N0011 01A-07
401N0894D 06-01
401N0911D 06-17
401N100010A 06-20
401Y100005 08-02
402N0020A 04B-05
402N0020A 11F-05
405N100089 11H-15
405N100090 05B-16
405N100091 01B-03
405N100092 01B-02
405N100095 03B-02.1
405N100426 03B-02.2
SP-44
 SP-45

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. 締結用および配線用のサービス部品について 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

■ ねじ・止め輪・座金・ナット・配線用部品の中で、使用個数の多い部品はサー  Screws, stopper rings, washers, nuts, wiring parts, etc. used in a large number
ビス部品として用意されている。 are provided as service parts.

■ 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位  Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts.
とする。 Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.

■ サービス部品の納入時、部品コードをサービスマニュアルで使用されてい  The table in “5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table” is provided for
る記号に読替えるための表が「5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表」に用意 converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used in the
されている。 service manual.
{SP16_5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表 } {SP:16_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table}

2. ねじ類 2. Screws

■ 鉄系のねじの処理はクロメート処理から亜鉛めっき + 白色３価クロメート  Iron screw treatment has been changed from chromate treatment to zinc plating/
処理に変更された。 white trivalent chromate treatment.
■ 新規機種においては、クロメート処理のねじの供給はなくなる。ただし、
 Chromate treated screws will be no longer provided for new models. However,
出荷済の一部の機種においては、引き続きクロメート処理のねじは供給さ
in some models already shipped, chromate treated screws will continue to be
れる。クロメート処理以外のねじの処理は従来とおりである。
supplied. Other screw treatments will be as usual.
■ サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方
 The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are
法はサービスマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。
described. This description method is the same as that in this Service Manual.

A2 .6x16 A 2 .6 x 1 6
長さ
Length
ね じ の 呼び
N omi nal di ameter
ね じ の 種 類 を あらわす文字
C haracter i ndi cati ng screw type

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-45
 SP-46

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

参考情報 参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information 記号 部品コード Reference information
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
A2.6x16 BR3x6 308S0401
鋼
A3x4 ばね座金組込みな BR3x8 308S0402
亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
べ小ねじ
A3x6 ロメート BR3x10
A3x8 色：うすい白色 BR3x12 308S0404
Cross recessed
A3x15 pan head screw BR3x16 308S0405 鋼
Steel
with spring 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
A4x8 Zinc plating/White BR3x32
washer ロメート
A4x10 trivalent chromating BR3x35
Color: Light white 色：うすい白色
A4x40 BR4x6
ばね座金・平座金
B2x5 BR4x8 308S0406 Steel
組込み十字穴付六
Zinc plating/White
B2.5x5 BR4x10 308S0407 角ボルト
trivalent chromating
B3x4 BR4x12 308S0408 Color: Light white
Cross recessed
B3x6 BR4x15 hexagon head
B3x8 BR4x16 screw with spring
and plain washers
B3x10 鋼 BR4x20
B3x12 ばね座金・平座金 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク BR4x25
組込みなべ小ねじ ロメート
B3x16 色：うすい白色 BR4x30
B3x18 Cross recessed BR4x35 308S9420435 鋼
B3x20 pan head screw Steel BR4x40 308S9420440 クロメート
with spring and Zinc plating/White
B3x30 plain washers trivalent chromating BR5x10 308S9420510 Steel
B3x35 Color: Light white BR5x12 308S9420512 Chromating
B4x8 BR6x12 308S9420612
B4x10 六角頭デルタイト 鋼
DT3x6 306S0101 ネジ 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
B4x30
ロメート
B4x35 Hexagon head 色：うすい白色
DT3x8
B4x45 deltight screw
Steel
DT4x8
Zinc plating/White
trivalent chromating
DT4x12 Color: Light white

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-46
 SP-47

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

参考情報 参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information 記号 部品コード Reference information
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
*N2x4 301S2000204 十字穴付さら小ね ステンレス
*S3x5 じ 不動態化処理
*N2x10 301S2000210 十字穴付なべ小ね ステンレス
*N3x6 301S2000306 じ 不動態化処理
Cross recessed Stainless steel
*S3x10
*N3x8 Cross recessed Stainless steel flat head screw Passive state treatment
*N3x10 pan head screw Passive state treatment *T3x4 301S3000304
*N4x10 301S2000410 *T3x6
PK2.5x3 六角穴付止めねじ *T3x8 301S3000308
鋼
PK3x10 （くぼみ先） *T4x4 301S3000404
黒色酸化処理
PK4x16 Hexagon socket *T4x5 十字穴付トラス小 ステンレス
Steel ねじ 不動態化処理
set screw with *T4x6
PK6x5 Black oxide treatment
cup point *T4x8 Cross recessed Stainless steel
鋼 *T4x10 truss head screw Passive state treatment
亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
Ps3x6 306S0151 六角頭樹脂用タッ *T4x12
ロメート
ピングねじ
色：うすい白色 *T4x16 301S3000416
Hexagon head *T4x25
Steel
tapping screw *T4x35 301S3000435
Ps3x8 306S0152 Zinc plating/White
with cup point
trivalent chromating 鋼
Color: Light white TP3x6 308S0414 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
Q3x10 六角頭 TP ねじ ロメート
色：うすい白色
Q3x12
TP4x6 308S0416 Cross recessed
Q4x6 hexagon head TP Steel
Q4x8 Screw Zinc plating/White
鋼 trivalent chromating
Q4x10 六角穴付ボルト TP4x8 308S0424
黒色酸化処理 Color: Light white
Q4x12
Hexagon socket ステンレス
Q4x14 Steel
head bolt *V3x6 301S4000306 バインド小ねじ 不動態化処理
Black oxide treatment
Q4x30
Q6x12 Bind screw Stainless steel
*V3x10
Passive state treatment
Q6x25
Q8x20

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-47
 SP-48

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
WP3x3 303S0101
WP3x4 303S0102
WP3x5 303S0103
WP3x6 303S0104
WP3x8 303S0105
WP3x10 303S0106
WP4x4 303S0107
WP4x5 303S0108 六角穴付き止めネ 鋼
WP4x6 303S0109 ジ 亜鉛めっき／リン酸塩処
WP4x8 303S0110 (W ポイント） 理

WP4x10 303S0111 Hexagon socket Steel

WP4x12 303S0112 head set screw Zinc plating/Phosphate
WP4x16 303S0113 (double -point) treatment

WP5x5 303S0114
WP5x6 303S0115
WP5x8 303S0116
WP5x10 303S0117
WP6x6 303S0118
WP6x8 303S0119
WP6x10 303S0120

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-48
 SP-49

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
3. 止め輪、座金、ナット類 参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information
3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information 鋼
W3
Symbol Part code 亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
ロメート
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
W4 色：うすい白色
E3 鋼 平座金
E4 亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク Steel
W5
ロメート Plain washer Zinc plating/White trivalent
色：うすい白色 chromating
W12 Color: Lingh white
E6 Steel
E 形止め輪 Zinc plating/White trivalent *W5 309S0120005 SUS304
chromating
E ring 鋼
Color: Lingh white
亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
*E3 315S3050030 ステンレス ロメート
不動態化処理 六角ナット 色：うすい白色
*E4 315S3050040 Na3
Stainless steel Hexagon nut Steel
*E6 315S3050060 Passive state treatment Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
鋼
Color: Lingh white
亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
KL4 ロメート
K-CL リング 色：うすい白色

K-CL ring Steel

KL6 Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
Color: Lingh white
鋼
SW3 亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
ロメート
ばね座金 色：うすい白色
SW4
Spring washer Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
SW12 chromating
Color: Lingh white

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-49
 SP-50

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
4. 配線用部品 参考情報
Reference information
記号 部品コード
4. Wiring Parts 概略外形寸法など（mm）
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称
Approx. external
参考情報 Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc.
Reference information
記号 部品コード
Symbol Part code 概略外形寸法など（mm） コードクランプ
形状 部品名称
Approx. external KGES-4 11x20x10 (WxHxD)
Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc. Cord clamp

コードクランプ
コードクランプ
EDS-0607U 14x9x4 (WxHxD)
LAMS-05 9x23x5 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp
Cord clamp

LWS-3S VO 316S1242 13x10x29 (WxHxD)

EDS-17L 55x26x5 (WxHxD) LWS-3S-2W
コードクランプ 15x13x2 (WxHxD)
VO コードクランプ
Cord clamp LWS-5S-2W
EDS-25L 316S2028 75x32x5 (WxHxD) 318S1130 Cord clamp 15x18x2 (WxHxD)
VO
LWS-8S-
318S1195 15x25x3 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ 2.5W VO
EDS-2 20x10x5 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp コードクランプ
PCB-3S 316S0268 15x13x7 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp
コードクランプ
FGC-8 10x10x25 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp SB-2718 318S1032 35x26x6 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ

ケーブルクランプ Cord clamp

KFCS-3002 316S1244 53x10x15 (WxHxD) SB-4025 316S0029 48x33x6 (WxHxD)
Cable clamp
ホースクランプ
SNP-1-HSO 12x12x4 (WxHxD)
Hose clamp

T18R 316S1001 束線部品 100x2.5 (LxW)

T30R 316S1002 152x3.5 (LxW)
Cable tie
T50R 316S1003 202x4.7 (LxW)

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-50
 SP-51

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
5. ［部品コード］→［記号］読替表 ■ ねじ類
この表は、サービス部品納入時、サービス部品の部品コードをサービスマニュアル記載
の記号に読替えるときに使用すること。  Scurews
部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table
301S2000204 *N2x4 303S0105 WP3x8 Q4x14
Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols 301S2000210 *N2x10 303S0106 WP3x10 Q4x30
used in this Service Manual. 301S2000306 *N3x6 303S0107 WP4x4 Q6x12
*N3x8 303S0108 WP4x5 Q6x25
*N3x10 303S0109 WP4x6 Q8x20
301S2000410 *N4x10 303S0110 WP4x8 306S0101 DT3x6
301S3000304 *T3x4 303S0111 WP4x10 DT3x8
*T3x6 303S0112 WP4x12 DT4x8
301S3000308 *T3x8 303S0113 WP4x16 DT4x12
301S3000404 *T4x4 303S0114 WP5x5 306S0151 Ps3x6
*T4x5 303S0115 WP5x6 306S0152 Ps3x8
*T4x6 303S0116 WP5x8 308S0401 BR3x6
*T4x8 303S0117 WP5x10 308S0402 BR3X8
*T4x10 303S0118 WP6x6 BR3x10
*T4x12 303S0119 WP6x8 308S0404 BR3x12
301S3000416 *T4x16 303S0120 WP6x10 308S0405 BR3x16
*T4x25 PK3x10 308S0406 BR4x8
301S3000435 *T4x35 PK4x16 308S0407 BR4x10
301S4000306 *V3x6 PK6x5 308S0408 BR4x12
*V3x10 PK2.5x3 BR4x16
*S3x5 Q3x10 BR4x20
*S3x10 Q3x12 BR4x25
303S0101 WP3x3 Q4x6 308S0414 TP3x6
303S0102 WP3x4 Q4x8 308S0416 TP4x6
303S0103 WP3x5 Q4x10 308S0424 TP4x8
303S0104 WP3x6 Q4x12 A3x4

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-51
 SP-52

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 ■ 止め輪、座金、ナット類

Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
A3x6 308S9420440 BR4x40  Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts
A3x8 308S9420510 BR5x10 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号
A3x15 308S9420512 BR5x12 Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
A4x8 308S9420612 BR6x12 Na3 SW3 315S3050040 *E4
A4x10 BR3x32 309S0120005 *W5 SW4 315S3050060 *E6
A4x40 BR3x35 W3 SW12 E3
A2.6x16 BR4x6 W4 KL4 E4
B2x5 BR4x15 W5 KL6 E6
B3x4 W12 315S3050030 *E3
B3x6
■ 配線用部品
B3x8
B3x10
 Wiring Parts
B3x12
部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号
B3x16
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
B3x18
316S0029 SB-4025 FGC-8 EDS-17L
B3x20
KGES-4 316S1242 LWS-3S VO 318S1130 LWS-5S-2W VO
B3x30
316S0268 PCB-3S 316S1244 KFCS-3002 LAMS-05
B3x35
316S1001 T18R EDS-0607U LWS-3S-2W VO
B4x8
LW S - 8 S - 2 . 5 W
B4x10 316S1002 T30R 316S2028 EDS-25L 318S1195
VO
B4x30 316S1003 T50R SNP-1-HSO
B4x35 EDS-2 318S1032 SB-2718
B4x45
B2.5x5
BR4x30
308S9420435 BR4x35

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-52
 SP-53

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

BLANK PAGE

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-53
 SP-54

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

BLANK PAGE

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-54
 SP-55

16

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

BLANK PAGE

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual SP-55
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5919) All pages

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL

SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

(DRYPIX Lite)

016-201-06E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5919
 SP-1
How to Use Character Significance The alphabet denotes a difference in
the specifications. Parts differing in
 RECOMMENDED QUANTITIES
Consumable parts or parts OF SPARE PARTS
Service Parts List A that will be replaced at short inter-
vals.
the suffix are not compatible with each
other. Version number is omitted in the It is recommended as a rough guide to
Parts that may become faulty ac- list. keep in stock a certain quantity of parts
B cidentally and have a according to the rank (A, B, C, D, E)
 RANK relatively high failure rate.  PART NAME assigned to the parts, as follows. For
Parts that have a sufficiently long periodically replaced parts, keep them
PART NAME represents a general name
 Handling RANK characters C MTBF, but are expected to have a
in stock separately. Adjust the stock
relatively high failure rate. of a part.
(Parts that are handled in a special quantity of service parts depending on
Parts that have a sufficiently long
manner during parts management, such D MTBF, but are expected to be-  QTY. the number of working units (N).
as replacement) come faulty. Quantity used in a single system : Q
QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty Parts that are necessary for fault N=1
analysis, or parts that may be in each unit.
R
Must be
Repairable A part whose quantity is suffixed with Rank A = 1 + Q × 0.3
returned. E needed in case of unexpected
accidents such as man-induced -S represents a small part that is Rank C = 1 + Q × 0.05
Must be Rank D = 1 + Q × 0.02
returned.
damage. shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a
Q
(We use for
Not repairable part is ordered in quantity of 1, a pack 2 ≤ N ≤ 10
<The RANK guide> containing 50 pieces of that part is
analysis.)
The Fault RANK characters, Handling Rank A = 2 + N × Q × 0.3
Must not be supplied.) Rank C = 2 + N × Q × 0.05
returned. RANK characters, and Export
Rank D = 1 + N × Q × 0.02
(Consumable regulation-applicable character are  REMARKS
T part. Not Not repairable assigned in that order. 11 ≤ N ≤ 300
applicable to Thus, at least one character or up to The REMARKS column indicates a Rank A = 3 + N × Q × 0.3
free-of-charge three characters are assigned in the unique name or relevant information of Rank C = 3 + N × Q × 0.05
warranty.) RANK column. each part. Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
without Must not be
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned.  REF. NO.  SERIAL NUMBER  PRECAUTIONS TO BE
 Export regulation-applicable REF. NO. is a part number indicated in The units may contain different parts OBSERVED WHEN RETURNING
the Service Parts Exploded Views. For depending on their shipment control PARTS FOR REPAIR
character number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates
parts having different functions, they are
(Parts with the following character are clearly distinguished in the REMARKS the shipment control number to which When returning a component for repair,
controlled by Export regulation.) and SERIAL NUMBER columns. the relevant parts are applicable. If the pack it in the same manner as for the
Character Significance SERIAL NUMBER column is blank, the supplied substitute, using the substitute
+
Parts applicable to export  PART NUMBER parts are applicable to all the relevant packing materials.
regulations. units. The shipment control number is The use of different packing materials or
PART NUMBER is a code number that represented by lower five digits of eight- packing methods may incur damage to
 Fault RANK characters is unique to each part. An alphabetic digit number indicated on the rating packed component during transit.
letter at the rightmost position of the indication label.
(Which provide reference for code number has the following meaning.
determining the recommended stock
quantity) For hardware  REFER TO
All parts are assigned with one of The alphabet denotes the version The "REFER TO" column shows
characters A through E. number of a part. If parts have different reference sections concerning the part.
version numbers, they are upward- Clicking the reference section in the
compatible. “REFER TO” column jumps to the top
page of the reference section where the
For software related information is in.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-1
 SP-2

01

カバー
COVER


カバー
COVER 01
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N102118B 操作パネルカバー Operation Panel Cover 1 －
A 2 393N100002D 刃物 Cutter 1 －
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 3 113Y100329C 1 －
（PNL28A） (PNL28A)
D 4 316S3151 キャッチ Catch 1 －
D 5 350N102115C 上面カバー Top Cover 1 －
D 6 316N100032D 止め具 Stand 1 －
1 2
D 7 350N102187C 背面上カバー Rear-Side Top Cover 1 －
17 3
D 8 350N102188B 背面下カバー Rear-Side Bottom Cover 1 －
D 9 350N102193B キャップ Cap 1 －
4
D 10 350N102116C 右側面カバー Right-Hand Side Cover 1 －
5 D 11 350N102186C 前面カバー Front Cover 1 －
D 12 350N102132B トレイ下カバー Tray Bottom Cover 1 －
D 13 350N102120B トレイ上カバー Tray Top Cover 1 －
D 14 362N100561B 受 Support 1 －
7
D 15 387N100031 帯電防止材 Antistatic Member 1 －
E 16 313N100260B ステー Stay 1 －
D 17 350N102117C 左側面カバー Left-Hand Side Cover 1 －
16

14 15 6

13

11
10 9

12
FPDL0101.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-2
 SP-3

02

フレーム
FRAME


フレーム
FRAME 02
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 367S0055 ゴム足 Rubber Foot 4 －
D 2 363N2368A ガイド Guide 1 －
D 3 128S1143 マイクロスイッチ Micro Switch 1 －

1
1

1
FPDL0201.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-3
 SP-4

03A

マガジンセット部 1
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 1


マガジンセット部 1
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 1 03A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 309N100105A 座金 Washer 2 －
D 2 363N101080A ガイドレール Guide Rail 2 －
D 3 363N100048D ガイドレール Guide Rail 4 －
1 D 4 388N100834 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 2 －
2
D 5 386N100432 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
E 6 356N105918 ブラケット Bracket 1 －

3 D 7 332N100006C ストッパ Stopper 1 －

9 D 8 388N100850 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 1 －

4 3 D 9 334N100307A ローラ Roller 2 －

D 10 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 －
1
D 11 341N100006C アーム Arm 1 －

2 D 12 329N100002C カム Cam 1 －

4
5
10

9
8 7

11

12
FPDL0301.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-4
 SP-5

03B

マガジンセット部 2
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 2


マガジンセット部 2
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 2 03B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
- 1 819Y100012 マガジン Magazine 1 20x25/26x36 cm －
For 20x25 cm
D 2 347N100053C 調整板 Guide 4 －
size
1 For 20x25 cm
D 3 347N100926 調整板 Guide 2 －
size
D 4 345N101103 遮板 Actuator 1 －

3
4

2
3

FPDL0302.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-5
 SP-6

03C

マガジンセット部 3
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 3


マガジンセット部 3
MAGAZINE SET SECTION 3 03C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
- 1 819Y100013 マガジン Magazine 1 35x43 cm －
D 2 345N101103 遮板 Actuator 1 －

FPDL0303.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-6
 SP-7

04A

枚葉部 1
REMOVAL SECTION 1


枚葉部 1
REMOVAL SECTION 1 04A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 2 －
D 2 327N1102802B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 3 327N1105802C 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 4 327N100006D 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 5 327N1088001D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 6 341N100015C アーム Arm 4 －
D 7 341N100014B アーム Arm 4 －
D 8 322SP201 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 －
D 9 335N0089A フランジ Flange 4 －
D 10 386N1307A 防振ゴム Shock Absorber 1 －
D 11 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 －

8
4 9
1 3 6
6

2 7 9
8
7
5

10
7
11 6

7 4

2 3

FPDL0401.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-7
 SP-8

04B

枚葉部 2
REMOVAL SECTION 2


枚葉部 2
REMOVAL SECTION 2 04B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 －
D 2 341Y100227 アーム Arm 1 －
D 3 322N100017B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 －
D 4 322N100018B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 －
D 5 388N100078 圧縮コイルバネ Tension Spring 4 －
D 6 402N0020A ベローズ Bellows 2 －
D 7 375N0095 シール Sheild 2 －
D 8 316Y100003A 止め具 Holder 2 －
D 9 392N100001 吸着盤 Suction Cup 2 －
D 10 371N100129 ノズル Nozzle 2 －
D 11 334Y100035 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －

A
1

1 3
4
3
4

1 3
3 3 4
4
4

5
6
5
7

8
A 11 9

10
FPDL0402.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-8
 SP-9

05A

搬送部 1
CONVEYOR SECTION 1


搬送部 1
CONVEYOR SECTION 1 05A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO

DETAIL A DETAIL B D
D
1
2
322SP213
334Y100204
すべり軸受け
ゴムローラ
Plain Bearing
Rubber Roller
2
1
－
－
D 3 334N100196 ローラ Roller 7 －
D 4 363N100108D ガイド Guide 3 －
D 5 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 －

19 D 6 363N101060B ガイド Guide 5 －

17 D 7 363N101086C ガイド Guide 1 －
3 D 8 362N100580 受 Support 2 －
21 20 D 9 334Y100059D ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
3
19 D 10 363N101087C ガイド Guide 1 －
3
11 D 11 363N100167D ガイド Guide 4 －
3 21 18 D 12 366N100007 アクチュエータ Actuator 2 －
11 12
22 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
17 D 13 113Y100332A 2 －
11 14 （PIS28A） (PIS28A)
13 D 14 388N100856 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 2 －
11 7 D 15 363N101081B ガイド Guide 1 －
8
D 16 363N101082B ガイド Guide 1 －

9 D 17 324Y100011B タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Gear 2 －

13
D 18 323S3422 タイミングベルト Timing Belt Gear 1 －
8 D 19 322N100029B すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 2 －
10
12 D 20 324N3184A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Gear 1 －
D 21 335N100018A フランジ Flange 2
A
－
15 D 22 388N100858 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 1 －

14

B
16
6
6

1 6
6
5 6

3
4 2
3
4
3
4
1

FPDL0501.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-9
 SP-10

05B

搬送部 2
CONVEYOR SECTION 2


搬送部 2
CONVEYOR SECTION 2 05B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 334N100196 ローラ Roller 9 －
D 2 363N100133D ガイド Guide 3 －

DETAIL A
D 3 363N101057C ガイド Guide 3 －
D 4 363N100124C ガイド Guide 2 －
D 5 363N101056B ガイド Guide 2 －
D 6 363N101055B ガイド Guide 1 －
D 7 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 －
D 8 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 －
D 9 360N100010D ハウジング Housing 1 －
9
D 10 388N100852 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Spring 2 －
D 11 334N100041C ローラ Roller 1 －
10
10

11

A 7
5 8
6

5
1
2 1
2 1
1 2
1
3 1
4 3
4 3

FPDL0502.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-10
 SP-11

05C

搬送部 3
CONVEYOR SECTION 3


搬送部 3
CONVEYOR SECTION 3 05C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N100041B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 2 327N100034D 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 3 327N100033C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 4 322N1003 軸受け Bearing 3 －
D 5 334Y100202 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
D 6 334Y100203 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
D 7 388N100855 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Spring 1 －

A D
D
8
9
322N100316B
327N100492A
軸受け
平歯車
Bearing
Spur Gear
1
1
－
－
D 10 327N100509 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －

A E 11 310S6009 ピン Pin 1 －
D 12 386S1089 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
D 13 118SX208 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 －

5
B

6
4
2 1

4
3

DETAIL A A B

12
7
13
4
1
9
8
2

11
10

FPDL0503.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-11
 SP-12

05D

搬送部 4
CONVEYOR SECTION 4


搬送部 4
CONVEYOR SECTION 4 05D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
1 D 1 388N100807A 板バネ Leaf Spring 1 －
D 2 363Y100355B ガイド Guide 1 －
3 D 3 388N100048A 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 1 －

2 D 4 363Y100356C ガイド Guide 1 －

D 5 322N100025D 軸受け Bearing 2 －
D 6 363N100132B ガイド Guide 3 －
D 7 327N100039D ギア Gear 1 －
D 8 118YX282D モータ Motor 1 －

B' A' 5

6
B A
B' A' 6

6
7

B A

FPDL0504.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-12
 SP-13

06

副走査部
SUB-SCANNING SECTION


副走査部
SUB-SCANNING SECTION 06
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 334Y100039G ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
D 2 118N100067 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 －
D 3 386S1089 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
D 4 388N100857 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Spring 2 －

1 D 5 322SP213 軸受け Bearing 4 －

D 6 322SF251 軸受け Bearing 1 －
D 7 323N100011 平ベルト Belt 1 －
D 8 324N100158 平ベルト車 Wheel 2 －
D 9 324N100157 平ベルト車 Wheel 1 －
D 10 324N100108 平ベルト車 Wheel 1 －
D 11 322SF255 軸受け Bearing 1 －
D 12 388N100825 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 1 －
D 13 322N1003 軸受け Bearing 2 －
D 14 388N100827 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 1 －

14 13

4
5
4
5 2
13
12 3
8
7

5 8
9 6
5

11
10

FPDL0601.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-13
 SP-14

07A

ヘッド駆動部 1
HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 1


ヘッド駆動部 1
HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 1 07A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 119N100058 電動ファン Fan 1 －
D 2 350N102149B ファンカバー Fan Cover 1 －

FPDL0701.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-14
 SP-15

07B

ヘッド駆動部 2
HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 2


ヘッド駆動部 2
HEAD UP/DOWN SECTION 2 07B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 322N100315B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 5 －
D 2 350N102121A ギアカバー Gear Cover 1 －
D 3 327N100481A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 4 327N100480B 歯車 Gear 1 －
D 5 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 －
D 6 316N100241 止め具 Receiver 1 －
D 7 327N100483A ウォームギア Worm Gear 1 －

6 D 8 327N100493A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －

DETAIL A D
D
9
10
118SX210
386N1307A
ステッピングモータ
防振ゴム
Stepping Motor
Shock Absorber
1
1
－
－
8 D 11 327N100486A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 12 327N100485A はずば歯車 Helical Gear 1 －
7

5 1 9

1 10

12

11

3 A

2 1
FPDL0702.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-15
 SP-16

08

ヘッド部
HEAD


ヘッド部
HEAD 08
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 854Y100023 記録部 Thermal Head 1 －
D 2 388Y100018 圧板 Pressure Plate 2 －
2 DETAIL A D 3 362N100010D 受け Support 1 －
D 4 388N100862 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Spring 1 －

5 D 5 388N100861 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Spring 1 －

2 D 6 322SY057 すべり軸受け Bearing 1 －
1 D 7 322SY339 すべり軸受け Bearing 1 －
D 8 386S1096 ショックアブソーバ Shock Absorber 1 －
4 D 9 388N100824A 板バネ Leaf Spring 1 －
3 D 10 388N100823A 板バネ Leaf Spring 1 －
6

(Head Data CD) A

8
DETAIL B 7

9 B

DETAIL C
10
C

FPDL0801.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-16
 SP-17

09

排出部
FILM RELEASE SECTION


排出部
FILM RELEASE SECTION 09
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
1 D 1 113Y100335A 1 －
（PDD28A） (PDD28A)
D 2 605N0033 ガラス板 Filter 1 －
D 3 347N1783 スペーサ Spacer 1 －
2
D 4 363Y100362B ガイド Guide 1 －
3 D 5 363N101107A ガイド Guide 1 －
D 6 347N1728B ピンホール Pinhole 1 －
4 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 7 113Y100334A 1 －
（LED28A） (LED28A)
5 D 8 363N101108 ガイド Guide 4 －
D 9 322N100315B すべり軸受け Ball Bearing 2 －
D 10 334Y100237 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1 －
D 11 334Y100236A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
6

8 7
8

8
8
9

11

10

FPDL0901.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-17
 SP-18

10

制御部
CONTROLLER


制御部
CONTROLLER 10
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
DETAIL A C 1 125N0148B 電源 Power Supply 1 －
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 2 113Y100698 1 －
8 （RLY32A） (RLY32A)
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 3 113Y100699 1 －
（CPU32A） (CPU32A)
中国を除く各
国
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 4.1 113Y100697F 1 Countries －
（SND32A） (SND32A)
except for
China
中国のみ
9 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
C 4.2 113Y100765A 1 Only inside －
（SND32B） (SND32B)
China
1A
A 5 137S1417 ヒューズ Fuse 2 －
LM10(D)CDL
5A
10 A 6 137S1423 ヒューズ Fuse 4 －
LM50(D)CDL
D 7 119S0053A 電動ファン Electric Fan 1 －
D 8 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1 －
7
D 9 128S1140 スイッチ Switch 1 －
4,5,6
D 10 120S5277 ソケット Socket 1 －
D 11 114Y50011103A 記憶素子 CF Card 1 －
D 12 102N100037 ボードアセンブリ Printed Circuit Board 1 1GB DIMM －

12
2

11

FPDL1001.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-18
 SP-19

11A

増設枚葉ユニット 1
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 1


増設枚葉ユニット 1
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 1 11A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350N102128B 右側面カバー Right-Hand Side Cover 1 －
D 2 350N102186C 前面カバー Front Cover 1 －
D 3 350N102127B 左側面カバー Left-Hand Side Cover 1 －

2
1
FPDL1101.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-19
 SP-20

11B

増設枚葉ユニット 2
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 2


増設枚葉ユニット 2
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 2 11B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 367S0055 ゴム足 Rubber Foot 4 －

1
1

FPDL1102.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-20
 SP-21

11C

増設枚葉ユニット 3
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 3


増設枚葉ユニット 3
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 3 11C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 309N100105A 座金 Washer 2 －
1
2 D 2 363N101080A ガイドレール Guide Rail 2 －
D 3 363N100048D ガイドレール Guide Rail 4 －
D 4 388N100834 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 2 －
3 D 5 386N100432 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
D 6 388N100849 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 1 －
3
D 7 332N100006C ストッパ Stopper 1 －
9 1 D 8 388N100850 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 1 －

4 D 9 334N100307A ローラ Roller 2 －

2 D 10 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 －
D 11 341N100006C アーム Arm 1 －
3 D 12 346N100005B 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 2 －
D 13 346N100006E 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 1 －
3
D 14 329N100002C カム Cam 1 －

4
5
10

8 7 6
9

11

12

12

13

14
FPDL1103.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-21
 SP-22

11D

増設枚葉ユニット 4
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 4


増設枚葉ユニット 4
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 4 11D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 2 －
D 2 327N1102802B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 3 327N1105802C 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 4 327N100006D 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 －
D 5 327N1088001D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 6 341N100015C アーム Arm 4 －
D 7 341N100014B アーム Arm 4 －
D 8 322SP201 軸受 Bearing 4 －
8 D 9 335N0089A フランジ Flange 4 －
9
D 10 386N1307A 防振ゴム Shock Absorber 1 －
D 11 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 －

4 9
8
1 3 6
6

2 7
7
5

10
7
11 6

7 4

2 3

FPDL1104.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-22
 SP-23

11E

増設枚葉ユニット 5
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 5


増設枚葉ユニット 5
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 5 11E
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0102 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 －
D 2 341Y100313 アーム Arm 1 －
D 3 366N100050A アクチュエータ Actuator 1 －
D 4 322N100017B すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 8 －
D 5 322N100018B すべり軸受け Plain Bearing 8 －
D 6 388N100078 圧縮コイルバネ Tension Spring 4 －
D 7 402N0020A べローズ Bellows 2 －
D 8 375N0095 シール Shield 2 －

2 D 9 316Y100003A 止め具 Holder 2 －

D 10 392N100001 吸着盤 Suction Cup 2 －
B D 11 371N100129 ノズル Nozzle 2 －
D 12 334Y100035 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
3
A
1

1 4
B 5
4
5

1 4
4 4 5
5
5

6
7
6
8

A 12 10

11

FPDL1105.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-23
 SP-24

11F

増設枚葉ユニット 6
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 6


増設枚葉ユニット 6
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 6 11F
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 －
D 2 363N101056B ガイド Guide 2 －
D 3 345N101110 遮板 Shield 2 －
D 4 363N101055B ガイド Guide 1 －
D 5 343N0088 フック Hook 1 －
D 6 128S1143 マイクロスイッチ Micro Switch 1 －
D 7 363N2368A ガイド Guide 1 －
D 8 360N100426A ハウジング Housing 1 －
D 9 388N100852 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Spring 2 －
D 10 334N100309 ローラ Roller 1 －
E 11 316S3144 キャッチ Catch 2 －
D 12 350Y101978 背面カバー Rear Cover 1 －
2
4
A D 13 363N101057C ガイド Guide 3 －
D 14 334N100196 ローラ Roller 9 －

B 3 D 15 363N100124C ガイド Guide 2 －

D 16 363N100133D ガイド Guide 3 －
2 1

7 6

DETAIL A DETAIL B 11

11 12

13
8

14
9
9 13 14
14
15
13
14 16
10
15 14
14
16
16
FPDL1106.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-24
 SP-25

11G

増設枚葉ユニット 7
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 7


増設枚葉ユニット 7
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 7 11G
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 322N1003 軸受け Bearing 3 －

A D
D
2
3
327N100034D
327N100041B
平歯車
平歯車
Spur Gear
Spur Gear
6
2
－
－
D 4 327N100033C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 5 334Y100202 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
D 6 363N100132B ガイド Guide 3 －
D 7 334Y100203 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 －
D 8 322N100316 軸受け Bearing 1 －
D 9 327N100035C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －

A
6
5
6
1 2
6 3

1
8 4

DETAIL A
A

1
3

2
2

FPDL1107.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-25
 SP-26

11H

増設枚葉ユニット 8
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 8


増設枚葉ユニット 8
SHEET-FEEDER UNIT 8 11H
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N100033C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －
D 2 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 1 －
D 3 363N101069A ガイド Guide 3 －
D 4 334N100196 ローラ Roller 3 －
D 5 388N100851 ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Spring 3 －
D 6 334Y100203 ローラ Roller 1 －
D 7 322N100316B 軸受 Bearing 1 －

A D 8 327N100034D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 －

3
4
3
4
3
5 2
4 1
5
5

DETAIL A

FPDL1108.ai

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-26
 SP-27

12

ケーブル
CABLE
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS CONNECTION DIAGRAM
E 1 136Y103274 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 2 136Y103275 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 3 136Y103276 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 4 136Y103277 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 5 136Y103278 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 6 136Y103279 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 7 136Y103280 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 8 136Y103281 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 9 136Y103282 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 10 136Y103283 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 11 136Y103284 ケーブル Cable 1 3/10
E 12 136Y103285 ケーブル Cable 1 3/10
E 13 136Y103287 ケーブル Cable 1 6/10
E 14 136Y103288 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 15 136Y103289 ケーブル Cable 1 6/10
E 16 136Y103290 ケーブル Cable 1 7/10
E 17 136Y103291 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 18 136Y103292 ケーブル Cable 1 7/10
E 19 136Y103293 ケーブル Cable 1 7/10
E 20 136Y103294 ケーブル Cable 1 8/10
E 21 136Y103295 ケーブル Cable 1 8/10
E 22 136Y103296 ケーブル Cable 1 8/10
E 23 136Y103297 ケーブル Cable 1 8/10
E 24 136Y103298 ケーブル Cable 1 9/10
E 25 136Y103299 ケーブル Cable 1 9/10
E 26 136Y103300 ケーブル Cable 1 9/10
E 27 136Y103301 ケーブル Cable 1 9/10
E 28 136Y103302 ケーブル Cable 1 10/10
E 29 136T103303 ケーブル Cable 1 10/10
E 30 136Y103304 ケーブル Cable 1 3/10

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-27
 SP-28

13

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

䊓䉾䊄
㪏㪌㪋㪰㪈㪇㪇㪇㪇㪌

A
㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪊㪇㪍 㪚㪥㪭㪚㪚 A
㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪇⿒ 㪈㪌㪇 㪈 㪟㪈 㪚㪥㪊 㪟㪈 㪚㪥㪋
㪈㪌㪇 㪉 㪈 㪈㪎㪐㪐㪌㪏 㪉
㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪇㤥 㪊㪈㪍㪇㪋㪈 㪉
㪌㪌㪌㪐 㪇㪉㪧

㪈
㪉

㪈
㪉
㔚Ḯ 㪌㪌㪌㪏㪧㪙㪫㪣 㪏㪍㪌 㪈㪈㪋㪇
㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪎㪐
㪈㪉㪌㪥㪇㪈㪋㪏
㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪉⿒ 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪉㤥

㪈
㪈

㪈
㪈
㪝㪥㪈㪅㪉㪌 㪌
B
㪈 㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪎㪎 B
㪪㪣㪈㪂㪈㪋㪅㪏㪭㪉 㪯㪊 㪯㪋 㪯㪌 㪯㪍
㪈 䋫㪈㪋㪅㪏㪭 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪉⿒ 㪈㪈㪇 㪈
㪪㪣㪈㪂㪈㪋㪅㪏㪭 㪯㪈
㪝㪥㪌㪅㪌 㪌
㪩㪣㪰㪊㪉㪘
㪝㪥㪈㪅㪉㪌 㪌 㪈㪈㪊䌙㪈㪇㪇㪍㪐㪏
㪈 㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪐㪈 㪪㪧㪪 㪐㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇
㪪㪣㪈㪂㪈㪋㪅㪏㪭㪞㪥㪛㪉
㪈 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪉㤥 㪐㪌 㪈
㪪㪣㪈㪂㪈㪋㪅㪏㪭㪞㪥㪛 㪯㪉
䋫㪈㪋㪅㪏㪭㩿㪞㪥㪛㪀
㪝㪥㪌㪅㪌 㪌 㪩㪣㪰㪊㪉㪘 㪚㪥㪈 㪧㪟㪩 㪍
㪪㪧㪟 㪇㪇㪉㪫 㪧㪇㪅㪌㪪

C 㪪㪮 C

㪈
㪉
㪊
㪋
㪌
㪍
㪠㫅㫃㪼㫋 㪈㪉㪏㪪㪈㪈㪋㪇 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪋⿒ 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪋⿒
㪈㪇㪇㪭 㪈㪉㪇㪭
㪉㪇㪇㪭 㪉㪋㪇㪭 㪈㪉㪇㪪㪌㪉㪎㪎 㪠㪩 㪈㪈 㪘㪈 㪈㪇 㪉㪙 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪋㤥 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪋㤥

㪭㪟㪜㪛㪟
㪩㪣㪰㪦㪥
㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪎㪍
㪘㪚 㪘㪚 㪧㪈㪉㪚㪝㪊㪍 㪈㪅㪇 㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪎㪋 㪋㪎㪇

㪂㪉㪋㪭

㪞㪥㪛
㪣㪠㪥㪜 㪣 㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪏㪇
㪣 㪈 㪘㪚㩿㪣㪀 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪍㤥 㪈㪇㪇 㪈 㪈 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪏㤥 㪏㪌 㪈
㪘㪣 㪣 㪈 㪂㪊㪅㪊㪭

㪌 㪥㪅㪚
㪍 㪥㪅㪚
㪪㪣㪋㪂㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪪㪧㪪 㪍㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇 㪣㪦㪘㪛 㪣 㪪㪧㪪 㪉㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇
㪣㪠㪥㪜 㪥

㪈
㪉
㪊
㪋
㪥 㪈 㪘㪚㩿㪥㪀 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪍⊕ 㪈 㪈 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪏⊕ 㪈 㪈 㪂㪊㪅㪊㪭㪞㪥㪛
㪘㪣 㪥 㪪㪣㪋㪂㪊㪅㪊㪭㪞㪥㪛
㪥 㪈 㪪㪝㪫 㪍㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇㪥
㪪㪧㪪 㪉㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇
㪣㪦㪘㪛 㪥
㪪㪧㪪 㪉㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇 㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪎㪏 㪪㪧㪪 㪍㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇 㪈 㪂㪌㪭 㪪㪥㪛㪊㪉㪘 㪚㪥㪈㪋
㪪㪧㪪 㪍㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇 㪪㪣㪋㪂㪌㪭
D
㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪉⊕ 㪪㪧㪪 㪉㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇 㪧㪟㪩 㪍 D

㪩㪈 㪪㪣㪋㪂㪌㪭㪞㪥㪛 㪈 㪂㪌㪭㪞㪥㪛 㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪏㪈 㪪㪧㪟 㪇㪇㪉㪫 㪧㪇㪅㪌㪪

㪪㪧㪪 㪉㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪉⿒ 㪋㪎㪇
㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪏✛㪆㤛䈱䍛䍨䍽䍐䍵䍷 㪈
㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪉㤥 㪉 㪪㪥㪛㪊㪉㪘 㪚㪥㪉㪋
㪐㪇 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪉⿒ 㪊
㪈 㪞㪥㪛 㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪎㪌 㪈 㪘㪣 㪜 㪪㪣㪌㪂㪈㪉㪭 㪈 㪂㪈㪉㪭 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪉㤥 㪋㪎㪇
㪜 㪪㪧㪪 㪉㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇 㪪㪧㪪 㪉㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇 㪋
㪈 㪎㪌 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪉⿒ 㪋㪍㪇
㪜 㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪏㪏 㪌
㪈 㪂㪈㪉㪭㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪝㪫 㪍㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇㪥 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪉㤥 㪋㪍㪇
㪬㪣㪈㪇㪈㪌 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪍✛㪆㤛䈱䍛䍨䍽䍐䍵䍷 㪪㪣㪌㪂㪈㪉㪭㪞㪥㪛 㪈㪇 㪪㪥㪛㪊㪉㪘
㪈

㪎㪌 㪪㪧㪪 㪉㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪋⿒ 㪌㪍㪇

㪈

㪍 㪈㪈㪊䌙㪈㪇㪇㪍㪐㪎
㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪋㤥 㪎
㪝㪞㪋 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪋⿒
E 㪝㪞㪌 㪏 E
㪝㪥㪈㪅㪉㪌 㪋㩿㪫㪩㪘㪥㪪㪧㪘㪩㪜㪥㪫㪀 㪝㪥㪈㪅㪉㪌 㪋㩿㪫㪩㪘㪥㪪㪧㪘㪩㪜㪥㪫㪀 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪋㤥 㪌㪍㪇 㪐
㪪㪣㪈 㪚㪥㪈 㪈 㪪㪂 㪌㪌㪌㪎 㪈㪇㪩
㪉 㪪 㪌㪌㪌㪍㪧㪙㪫㪣
㪊 㪥㪅㪚
㪋 㪥㪅㪚
㪌 㪥㪅㪚
㪍 㪥㪅㪚
㪎 㪥㪅㪚
㪏 㪥㪅㪚
㪧㪟㪛㪩 㪈㪇㪭㪪 㪐 㪂㪩
F 㪪㪧㪟㪛 㪇㪇㪈㪫 㪧㪇㪅㪌 㪈㪇 㪩 F

㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪏㪉
㪪㪣㪌㪂㪉㪋㪭 㪈 㪂㪉㪋㪭 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪏⿒ 㪌㪈㪇 㪈 㪪㪥㪛㪊㪉㪘 㪚㪥㪉㪉
㪪㪣㪌㪂㪉㪋㪭㪞㪥㪛 㪈 㪂㪉㪋㪭㪞㪥㪛 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪈㪏㤥 㪌㪈㪇 㪉
㪪㪧㪪 㪉㪈㪫 㪉㪌㪇
㪌㪌㪌㪎 㪇㪉㪩
㪌㪌㪌㪍㪧㪙㪫㪣
㪤㪭㪤㪡 㪚㪥㪈 㪈 㪥㪅㪚
㪉 㪥㪅㪚 㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪊㪉㪏㪊
G G
㪊 㪇㪭㪘㪬㪯 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪍㕍 㪋㪍㪇 㪈 㪪㪥㪛㪊㪉㪘 㪚㪥㪉㪍
㪋 㪌㪭㪘㪬㪯 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪍㕍 㪉
㪌 㪝㪘㪥㪘㪣㪤 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪍㕍 㪊
㪍 㪞㪠㪥㪟 㪬㪣㪈㪇㪇㪎 㪘㪮㪞㪉㪍㕍 㪋㪍㪇 㪋
㪌㪉㪍㪋 㪇㪍
㪌㪉㪍㪊㪧㪙㪫㪣 㪥㪅㪚 㪌
㪧㪟㪩 㪌
㪪㪧㪟 㪇㪇㪉㪫 㪧㪇㪅㪌㪪

ᯏ⒳  ࡙ ࠶࠻ ࡙࠾࠶࠻
ฬ⒓ ࿁〝࿑ ⵬ഥฬ⒓ &4;2+: :
H H
ࠦ ࠼ <0 4GX 㪟
㗁
ን჻ࡈࠗ࡞ࡓᩣᑼળ␠ 㪉
㪈㪇
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-28
 SP-29

13

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

G G

H H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-29
 SP-30

13

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

G G

H H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-30
 SP-31

13

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

G G

H H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-31
 SP-32

13

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

G G

H H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-32
 SP-33

13

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

G G

H H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-33
 SP-34

13

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

G G

H H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-34
 SP-35

13

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

G G

H H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-35
 SP-36

13

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

G G

H H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-36
 SP-37

14
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
102N100037 10-12
113Y100329C 01-3
113Y100332A 05A-13
113Y100334A 09-7
113Y100335A 09-1
113Y100697F 10-4.1
113Y100698 10-2
113Y100699 10-3
113Y100765A 10-4.2
114Y50011103A 10-11
115Y0041A 10-8
118N100067 06-2
118SX208 05C-13
118SX210 04A-11
118SX210 07B-9
118SX210 11D-11
118YX282D 05D-8
119N100058 07A-1
119S0053A 10-7
120S5277 10-10
125N0148B 10-1
128S1140 10-9
128S1143 02-3
128S1143 11F-6
136T103303 12-29
136Y103274 12-1
136Y103275 12-2
136Y103276 12-3
136Y103277 12-4
136Y103278 12-5
136Y103279 12-6
136Y103280 12-7
136Y103281 12-8
136Y103282 12-9
136Y103283 12-10
136Y103284 12-11
136Y103285 12-12
136Y103287 12-13
136Y103288 12-14
136Y103289 12-15
136Y103290 12-16
136Y103291 12-17
136Y103292 12-18
136Y103293 12-19
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
136Y103294 12-20
136Y103295 12-21
136Y103296 12-22
136Y103297 12-23
136Y103298 12-24
136Y103299 12-25
136Y103300 12-26
136Y103301 12-27
136Y103302 12-28
136Y103304 12-30
137S1417 10-5
137S1423 10-6
146S0086 05A-5
146S0086 05B-7
146S0086 11F-1
146S0102 03A-10
146S0102 04B-1
146S0102 05B-8
146S0102 07B-5
146S0102 11C-10
146S0102 11E-1
309N100105A 03A-1
309N100105A 11C-1
310S6009 05C-11
313N100260B 01-16
316N100032D 01-6
316N100241 07B-6
316S3144 11F-11
316S3151 01-4
316Y100003A 04B-8
316Y100003A 11E-9
322N100017B 04B-3
322N100017B 11E-4
322N100018B 04B-4
322N100018B 11E-5
322N100025D 05D-5
322N100029B 05A-19
322N1003 04A-1
322N1003 05C-4
322N1003 06-13
322N1003 11D-1
322N1003 11G-1
322N1003 11H-2
322N100315B 07B-1
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
322N100315B 09-9
322N100316 11G-8
322N100316B 05C-8
322N100316B 11H-7
322SF251 06-6
322SF255 06-11
322SP201 04A-8
322SP201 11D-8
322SP213 05A-1
322SP213 06-5
322SY057 08-6
322SY339 08-7
323N100011 06-7
323S3422 05A-18
324N100108 06-10
324N100157 06-9
324N100158 06-8
324N3184A 05A-20
324Y100011B 05A-17
327N100006D 04A-4
327N100006D 11D-4
327N100033C 05C-3
327N100033C 11G-4
327N100033C 11H-1
327N100034D 05C-2
327N100034D 11G-2
327N100034D 11H-8
327N100035C 11G-9
327N100039D 05D-7
327N100041B 05C-1
327N100041B 11G-3
327N100480B 07B-4
327N100481A 07B-3
327N100483A 07B-7
327N100485A 07B-12
327N100486A 07B-11
327N100492A 05C-9
327N100493A 07B-8
327N100509 05C-10
327N1088001D 04A-5
327N1088001D 11D-5
327N1102802B 04A-2
327N1102802B 11D-2
327N1105802C 04A-3
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
327N1105802C 11D-3
329N100002C 03A-12
329N100002C 11C-14
332N100006C 03A-7
332N100006C 11C-7
334N100041C 05B-11
334N100196 05A-3
334N100196 05B-1
334N100196 11F-14
334N100196 11H-4
334N100307A 03A-9
334N100307A 11C-9
334N100309 11F-10
334Y100035 04B-11
334Y100035 11E-12
334Y100039G 06-1
334Y100059D 05A-9
334Y100202 05C-5
334Y100202 11G-5
334Y100203 05C-6
334Y100203 11G-7
334Y100203 11H-6
334Y100204 05A-2
334Y100236A 09-11
334Y100237 09-10
335N0089A 04A-9
335N0089A 11D-9
335N100018A 05A-21
341N100006C 03A-11
341N100006C 11C-11
341N100014B 04A-7
341N100014B 11D-7
341N100015C 04A-6
341N100015C 11D-6
341Y100227 04B-2
341Y100313 11E-2
343N0088 11F-5
345N101103 03B-4
345N101103 03C-2
345N101110 11F-3
346N100005B 11C-12
346N100006E 11C-13
347N100053C 03B-2
347N100926 03B-3
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
347N1728B 09-6
347N1783 09-3
350N102115C 01-5
350N102116C 01-10
350N102117C 01-17
350N102118B 01-1
350N102120B 01-13
350N102121A 07B-2
350N102127B 11A-3
350N102128B 11A-1
350N102132B 01-12
350N102149B 07A-2
350N102186C 01-11
350N102186C 11A-2
350N102187C 01-7
350N102188B 01-8
350N102193B 01-9
350Y101978 11F-12
356N105918 03A-6
360N100010D 05B-9
360N100426A 11F-8
362N100010D 08-3
362N100561B 01-14
362N100580 05A-8
363N100048D 03A-3
363N100048D 11C-3
363N100108D 05A-4
363N100124C 05B-4
363N100124C 11F-15
363N100132B 05D-6
363N100132B 11G-6
363N100133D 05B-2
363N100133D 11F-16
363N100167D 05A-11
363N101055B 05B-6
363N101055B 11F-4
363N101056B 05B-5
363N101056B 11F-2
363N101057C 05B-3
363N101057C 11F-13
363N101060B 05A-6
363N101069A 11H-3
363N101080A 03A-2
363N101080A 11C-2
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
363N101081B 05A-15
363N101082B 05A-16
363N101086C 05A-7
363N101087C 05A-10
363N101107A 09-5
363N101108 09-8
363N2368A 02-2
363N2368A 11F-7
363Y100355B 05D-2
363Y100356C 05D-4
363Y100362B 09-4
366N100007 05A-12
366N100050A 11E-3
367S0055 02-1
367S0055 11B-1
371N100129 04B-10
371N100129 11E-11
375N0095 04B-7
375N0095 11E-8
386N100432 03A-5
386N100432 11C-5
386N1307A 04A-10
386N1307A 07B-10
386N1307A 11D-10
386S1089 05C-12
386S1089 06-3
386S1096 08-8
387N100031 01-15
388N100048A 05D-3
388N100078 04B-5
388N100078 11E-6
388N100807A 05D-1
388N100823A 08-10
388N100824A 08-9
388N100825 06-12
388N100827 06-14
388N100834 03A-4
388N100834 11C-4
388N100849 11C-6
388N100850 03A-8
388N100850 11C-8
388N100851 11H-5
388N100852 05B-10
388N100852 11F-9

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-37
 SP-38

14

部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
388N100855 05C-7
388N100856 05A-14
388N100857 06-4
388N100858 05A-22
388N100861 08-5
388N100862 08-4
388Y100018 08-2
392N100001 04B-9
392N100001 11E-10
393N100002D 01-2
402N0020A 04B-6
402N0020A 11E-7
605N0033 09-2
819Y100012 03B-1
819Y100013 03C-1
854Y100023 08-1

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-38
 SP-39

15

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. 締結用および配線用のサービス部品について 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

■ ねじ・止め輪・座金・ナット・配線用部品の中で、使用個数の多い部品はサー  Screws, stopper rings, washers, nuts, wiring parts, etc. used in a large number
ビス部品として用意されている。 are provided as service parts.

■ 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位  Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts.
とする。 Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.

■ サービス部品の納入時、部品コードをサービスマニュアルで使用されてい  The table in “5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table” is provided for
る記号に読替えるための表が「5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表」に用意 converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used in the
されている。 service manual.
{SP16_5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表 } {SP:16_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table}

2. ねじ類 2. Screws

■ 鉄系のねじの処理はクロメート処理から亜鉛めっき + 白色３価クロメート  Iron screw treatment has been changed from chromate treatment to zinc plating/
処理に変更された。 white trivalent chromate treatment.
■ 新規機種においては、クロメート処理のねじの供給はなくなる。ただし、
 Chromate treated screws will be no longer provided for new models. However,
出荷済の一部の機種においては、引き続きクロメート処理のねじは供給さ
in some models already shipped, chromate treated screws will continue to be
れる。クロメート処理以外のねじの処理は従来とおりである。
supplied. Other screw treatments will be as usual.
■ サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方
 The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are
法はサービスマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。
described. This description method is the same as that in this Service Manual.

A2 .6x16 A 2 .6 x 1 6
長さ
Length
ね じ の 呼び
N omi nal di ameter
ね じ の 種 類 を あらわす文字
C haracter i ndi cati ng screw type

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-39
 SP-40

15

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

参考情報 参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information 記号 部品コード Reference information
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
A2.6x16 BR3x6 308S0401
鋼
A3x4 ばね座金組込みな BR3x8 308S0402
亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
べ小ねじ
A3x6 ロメート BR3x10
A3x8 色：うすい白色 BR3x12 308S0404
Cross recessed
A3x15 pan head screw BR3x16 308S0405 鋼
Steel
with spring 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
A4x8 Zinc plating/White BR3x32
washer ロメート
A4x10 trivalent chromating BR3x35
Color: Light white 色：うすい白色
A4x40 BR4x6
ばね座金・平座金
B2x5 BR4x8 308S0406 Steel
組込み十字穴付六
Zinc plating/White
B2.5x5 BR4x10 308S0407 角ボルト
trivalent chromating
B3x4 BR4x12 308S0408 Color: Light white
Cross recessed
B3x6 BR4x15 hexagon head
B3x8 BR4x16 screw with spring
and plain washers
B3x10 鋼 BR4x20
B3x12 ばね座金・平座金 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク BR4x25
組込みなべ小ねじ ロメート
B3x16 色：うすい白色 BR4x30
B3x18 Cross recessed BR4x35 308S9420435 鋼
B3x20 pan head screw Steel BR4x40 308S9420440 クロメート
with spring and Zinc plating/White
B3x30 plain washers trivalent chromating BR5x10 308S9420510 Steel
B3x35 Color: Light white BR5x12 308S9420512 Chromating
B4x8 BR6x12 308S9420612
B4x10 六角頭デルタイト 鋼
DT3x6 306S0101 ネジ 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
B4x30
ロメート
B4x35 Hexagon head 色：うすい白色
DT3x8
B4x45 deltight screw
Steel
DT4x8
Zinc plating/White
trivalent chromating
DT4x12 Color: Light white

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-40
 SP-41

15

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

参考情報 参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information 記号 部品コード Reference information
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
*N2x4 301S2000204 十字穴付さら小ね ステンレス
*S3x5 じ 不動態化処理
*N2x10 301S2000210 十字穴付なべ小ね ステンレス
*N3x6 301S2000306 じ 不動態化処理
Cross recessed Stainless steel
*S3x10
*N3x8 Cross recessed Stainless steel flat head screw Passive state treatment
*N3x10 pan head screw Passive state treatment *T3x4 301S3000304
*N4x10 301S2000410 *T3x6
PK2.5x3 六角穴付止めねじ *T3x8 301S3000308
鋼
PK3x10 （くぼみ先） *T4x4 301S3000404
黒色酸化処理
PK4x16 Hexagon socket *T4x5 十字穴付トラス小 ステンレス
Steel ねじ 不動態化処理
set screw with *T4x6
PK6x5 Black oxide treatment
cup point *T4x8 Cross recessed Stainless steel
鋼 *T4x10 truss head screw Passive state treatment
亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
Ps3x6 306S0151 六角頭樹脂用タッ *T4x12
ロメート
ピングねじ
色：うすい白色 *T4x16 301S3000416
Hexagon head *T4x25
Steel
tapping screw *T4x35 301S3000435
Ps3x8 306S0152 Zinc plating/White
with cup point
trivalent chromating 鋼
Color: Light white TP3x6 308S0414 亜鉛めっき／白色 3 価ク
Q3x10 六角頭 TP ねじ ロメート
色：うすい白色
Q3x12
TP4x6 308S0416 Cross recessed
Q4x6 hexagon head TP Steel
Q4x8 Screw Zinc plating/White
鋼 trivalent chromating
Q4x10 六角穴付ボルト TP4x8 308S0424
黒色酸化処理 Color: Light white
Q4x12
Hexagon socket ステンレス
Q4x14 Steel
head bolt *V3x6 301S4000306 バインド小ねじ 不動態化処理
Black oxide treatment
Q4x30
Q6x12 Bind screw Stainless steel
*V3x10
Passive state treatment
Q6x25
Q8x20

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-41
 SP-42

15

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
WP3x3 303S0101
WP3x4 303S0102
WP3x5 303S0103
WP3x6 303S0104
WP3x8 303S0105
WP3x10 303S0106
WP4x4 303S0107
WP4x5 303S0108 六角穴付き止めネ 鋼
WP4x6 303S0109 ジ 亜鉛めっき／リン酸塩処
WP4x8 303S0110 (W ポイント） 理

WP4x10 303S0111 Hexagon socket Steel

WP4x12 303S0112 head set screw Zinc plating/Phosphate
WP4x16 303S0113 (double -point) treatment

WP5x5 303S0114
WP5x6 303S0115
WP5x8 303S0116
WP5x10 303S0117
WP6x6 303S0118
WP6x8 303S0119
WP6x10 303S0120

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-42
 SP-43

15

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
3. 止め輪、座金、ナット類 参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information
3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
参考情報
記号 部品コード Reference information 鋼
W3
Symbol Part code 亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
形状 部品名称 材質、処理など
ロメート
Shape Parts name Material/treatment,etc.
W4 色：うすい白色
E3 鋼 平座金
E4 亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク Steel
W5
ロメート Plain washer Zinc plating/White trivalent
色：うすい白色 chromating
W12 Color: Lingh white
E6 Steel
E 形止め輪 Zinc plating/White trivalent *W5 309S0120005 SUS304
chromating
E ring 鋼
Color: Lingh white
亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
*E3 315S3050030 ステンレス ロメート
不動態化処理 六角ナット 色：うすい白色
*E4 315S3050040 Na3
Stainless steel Hexagon nut Steel
*E6 315S3050060 Passive state treatment Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
鋼
Color: Lingh white
亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
KL4 ロメート
K-CL リング 色：うすい白色

K-CL ring Steel

KL6 Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
Color: Lingh white
鋼
SW3 亜鉛めっき + 白色 3 価ク
ロメート
ばね座金 色：うすい白色
SW4
Spring washer Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
SW12 chromating
Color: Lingh white

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-43
 SP-44

15

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
4. 配線用部品 参考情報
Reference information
記号 部品コード
4. Wiring Parts 概略外形寸法など（mm）
Symbol Part code 形状 部品名称
Approx. external
参考情報 Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc.
Reference information
記号 部品コード
Symbol Part code 概略外形寸法など（mm） コードクランプ
形状 部品名称
Approx. external KGES-4 11x20x10 (WxHxD)
Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc. Cord clamp

コードクランプ
コードクランプ
EDS-0607U 14x9x4 (WxHxD)
LAMS-05 9x23x5 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp
Cord clamp

LWS-3S VO 316S1242 13x10x29 (WxHxD)

EDS-17L 55x26x5 (WxHxD) LWS-3S-2W
コードクランプ 15x13x2 (WxHxD)
VO コードクランプ
Cord clamp LWS-5S-2W
EDS-25L 316S2028 75x32x5 (WxHxD) 318S1130 Cord clamp 15x18x2 (WxHxD)
VO
LWS-8S-
318S1195 15x25x3 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ 2.5W VO
EDS-2 20x10x5 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp コードクランプ
PCB-3S 316S0268 15x13x7 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp
コードクランプ
FGC-8 10x10x25 (WxHxD)
Cord clamp SB-2718 318S1032 35x26x6 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ

ケーブルクランプ Cord clamp

KFCS-3002 316S1244 53x10x15 (WxHxD) SB-4025 316S0029 48x33x6 (WxHxD)
Cable clamp
ホースクランプ
SNP-1-HSO 12x12x4 (WxHxD)
Hose clamp

T18R 316S1001 束線部品 100x2.5 (LxW)

T30R 316S1002 152x3.5 (LxW)
Cable tie
T50R 316S1003 202x4.7 (LxW)

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-44
 SP-45

15

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
5. ［部品コード］→［記号］読替表 ■ ねじ類
この表は、サービス部品納入時、サービス部品の部品コードをサービスマニュアル記載
の記号に読替えるときに使用すること。  Scurews
部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table
301S2000204 *N2x4 303S0105 WP3x8 Q4x14
Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols 301S2000210 *N2x10 303S0106 WP3x10 Q4x30
used in this Service Manual. 301S2000306 *N3x6 303S0107 WP4x4 Q6x12
*N3x8 303S0108 WP4x5 Q6x25
*N3x10 303S0109 WP4x6 Q8x20
301S2000410 *N4x10 303S0110 WP4x8 306S0101 DT3x6
301S3000304 *T3x4 303S0111 WP4x10 DT3x8
*T3x6 303S0112 WP4x12 DT4x8
301S3000308 *T3x8 303S0113 WP4x16 DT4x12
301S3000404 *T4x4 303S0114 WP5x5 306S0151 Ps3x6
*T4x5 303S0115 WP5x6 306S0152 Ps3x8
*T4x6 303S0116 WP5x8 308S0401 BR3x6
*T4x8 303S0117 WP5x10 308S0402 BR3X8
*T4x10 303S0118 WP6x6 BR3x10
*T4x12 303S0119 WP6x8 308S0404 BR3x12
301S3000416 *T4x16 303S0120 WP6x10 308S0405 BR3x16
*T4x25 PK3x10 308S0406 BR4x8
301S3000435 *T4x35 PK4x16 308S0407 BR4x10
301S4000306 *V3x6 PK6x5 308S0408 BR4x12
*V3x10 PK2.5x3 BR4x16
*S3x5 Q3x10 BR4x20
*S3x10 Q3x12 BR4x25
303S0101 WP3x3 Q4x6 308S0414 TP3x6
303S0102 WP3x4 Q4x8 308S0416 TP4x6
303S0103 WP3x5 Q4x10 308S0424 TP4x8
303S0104 WP3x6 Q4x12 A3x4

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-45
 SP-46

15

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring

部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 ■ 止め輪、座金、ナット類

Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
A3x6 308S9420440 BR4x40  Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts
A3x8 308S9420510 BR5x10 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号
A3x15 308S9420512 BR5x12 Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
A4x8 308S9420612 BR6x12 Na3 SW3 315S3050040 *E4
A4x10 BR3x32 309S0120005 *W5 SW4 315S3050060 *E6
A4x40 BR3x35 W3 SW12 E3
A2.6x16 BR4x6 W4 KL4 E4
B2x5 BR4x15 W5 KL6 E6
B3x4 W12 315S3050030 *E3
B3x6
■ 配線用部品
B3x8
B3x10
 Wiring Parts
B3x12
部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号 部品コード 記号
B3x16
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
B3x18
316S0029 SB-4025 FGC-8 EDS-17L
B3x20
KGES-4 316S1242 LWS-3S VO 318S1130 LWS-5S-2W VO
B3x30
316S0268 PCB-3S 316S1244 KFCS-3002 LAMS-05
B3x35
316S1001 T18R EDS-0607U LWS-3S-2W VO
B4x8
LW S - 8 S - 2 . 5 W
B4x10 316S1002 T30R 316S2028 EDS-25L 318S1195
VO
B4x30 316S1003 T50R SNP-1-HSO
B4x35 EDS-2 318S1032 SB-2718
B4x45
B2.5x5
BR4x30
308S9420435 BR4x35

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-46
 SP-47
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06C
01.27.2012 FM5919
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual SP-47
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.31.2006 00 New release (FM4832) All pages

03.24.2006 01 Revised (FM4903) All pages
06.30.2006 01 Revised (FM4924) 1-5, 7-14, 21-24, 27-37
10.18.2006 03 Revised (FM5036) 10, 31

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 02.15.2007 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5075)
6, 10, 13, 18-20

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) Cover

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

(DRYPIX 2000)

016-201-06E DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 PM-1
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Refer to Maintenance Work
Work time
(Min.)
Remarks

ITEMS 3.11 Greasing

• Head up/down worm gear
3

3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head 3 Clean with ethanol

1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items 3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Convey-
or Exit Roller
(3) Wet cloth

3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt 2 Check for scratches and tears
n Maintenance to be Performed after One Year of Use Wet cloth
3.15 Reinstalling Covers (5) -
Work time
Refer to Maintenance Work Remarks • Reinstalling covers -
(Min.)
Power ON 5 • Reinstalling the cleaning roller -
Starting M-Utility - Start during initialization • Reinstalling the magazine -
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error 2 Power ON -
Logs 3.16 Checking/Adjusting the DC Voltage 2 Tester
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Check- 10 • Checking/adjusting head power volt-
ing Images age (+16VH)
• 17-steps pattern • Checking/adjusting other DC voltages
• Grid & Flat pattern 3.17 Calibration 2 U-Utility
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 10 3.18 Final Operation Checks/Checking Im- 1
• Head cover ages
• Rear open/close cover • Automatic density correction
• Lower rear open/close cover (option) • 17-steps pattern
3.4 Checking Fan Operations 2 • Grid & Flat pattern
• Head cooling fan 3.19 Setting Date and Time 1
• Power supply fan Power OFF - -
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection (3) - 3.20 Cleaning Covers 5 Wet cloth
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing Air Filters 5 Clean with vacuum cleaner 3.21 Checking for Improper Protective 5 -
Grounding
• Head cover filter
3.22 Replacing the Film Cutter 1 -
• Left cover filter
3.23 Work Completion Report - -
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 5 Clean with ethanol after washing
Ending M-Utility - -
3.8 Removing Covers (3) -
Power OFF - -
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Clean- 35 Wet cloth, cleaning cloth, vacu-
ing Inside the Equipment um cleaner
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement 3
Section and Film Release Section
• Density measurement section light- Clean with ethanol using cotton
receiving board and filter swab
• Film release section exit roller Wet cloth

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-1
 PM-2
n Maintenance to be Performed after Two Years of Use Refer to Maintenance Work
Work time
Remarks
(Min.)
Work time 3.15 Reinstalling Covers (5) -
Refer to Maintenance Work Remarks
(Min.)
• Reinstalling covers -
Power ON 5
• Reinstalling the cleaning roller -
Starting M-Utility - Start during initialization
• Reinstalling the magazine -
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error 2
Logs Power ON -
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Check- 10 3.16 Checking/Adjusting the DC Voltage 2 Tester
ing Images • Checking/adjusting head power volt-
• 17-steps pattern age (+16VH)
• Grid & Flat pattern • Checking/adjusting other DC voltages
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 10 3.17 Calibration 2 U-Utility
• Head cover 3.18 Final Operation Checks/Checking Im- 1
ages
• Rear open/close cover
• Automatic density correction
• Lower rear open/close cover (option)
• 17-steps pattern
3.4 Checking Fan Operations 2
• Grid & Flat pattern
• Head cooling fan
3.19 Setting Date and Time 1
• Power supply fan
Power OFF - -
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection (3) -
3.20 Cleaning Covers 5 Wet cloth
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing Air Filters 5 Replace
3.21 Checking for Improper Protective 5 -
• Head cover filter Grounding
• Left cover filter 3.22 Replacing the Film Cutter 1 -
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 5 Clean with ethanol after washing 3.23 Work Completion Report - -
Ending M-Utility - -
3.8 Removing Covers (3) -
Power OFF - -
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Clean- 35 Wet cloth, cleaning cloth, vacu-
ing Inside the Equipment um cleaner
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement 3
Section and Film Release Section
• Density measurement section light- Clean with ethanol using cotton
receiving board and filter swab
• Film release section exit roller Wet cloth
3.11 Greasing 3
• Head up/down worm gear
3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head 3 Clean with ethanol
3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Convey- (3) Wet cloth
or Exit Roller
3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt 2 Check for scratches and tears
Wet cloth

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-2
 PM-3
n Maintenance to be Performed after Three Years of Use Refer to Maintenance Work
Work time
Remarks
(Min.)
Work time 3.15 Reinstalling Covers (5) -
Refer to Maintenance Work Remarks
(Min.)
• Reinstalling covers -
Power ON 5
• Reinstalling the cleaning roller -
Starting M-Utility - Start during initialization
• Reinstalling the magazine -
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error 2
Logs Power ON -
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Check- 10 3.16 Checking/Adjusting the DC Voltage 2 Tester
ing Images • Checking/adjusting head power volt-
• 17-steps pattern age (+16VH)
• Grid & Flat pattern • Checking/adjusting other DC voltages
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 10 3.17 Calibration 2 U-Utility
• Head cover 3.18 Final Operation Checks/Checking Im- 1
ages
• Rear open/close cover
• Automatic density correction
• Lower rear open/close cover (option)
• 17-steps pattern
3.4 Checking Fan Operations 2
• Grid & Flat pattern
• Head cooling fan
3.19 Setting Date and Time 1
• Power supply fan
Power OFF - -
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection (3) -
3.20 Cleaning Covers 5 Wet cloth
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing Air Filters 5 Clean with vacuum cleaner
3.21 Checking for Improper Protective 5 -
• Head cover filter Grounding
• Left cover filter 3.22 Replacing the Film Cutter 1 -
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 5 Replace 3.23 Work Completion Report - -
Ending M-Utility - -
3.8 Removing Covers (3) -
Power OFF - -
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Clean- 35 Wet cloth, cleaning cloth, vacu-
ing Inside the Equipment um cleaner
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement 3
Section and Film Release Section
• Density measurement section light- Clean with ethanol using cotton
receiving board and filter swab
• Film release section exit roller Wet cloth
3.11 Greasing 3
• Head up/down worm gear
3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head 3 Clean with ethanol
3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Convey- (3) Wet cloth
or Exit Roller
3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt 2 Check for scratches and tears
Wet cloth

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-3
 PM-4
n Maintenance to be Performed after Four Years of Use Refer to Maintenance Work
Work time
Remarks
(Min.)
Work time 3.15 Reinstalling Covers (5) -
Refer to Maintenance Work Remarks
(Min.)
• Reinstalling covers -
Power ON 5
• Reinstalling the cleaning roller -
Starting M-Utility - Start during initialization
• Reinstalling the magazine -
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error 2
Logs Power ON -
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Check- 10 3.16 Checking/Adjusting the DC Voltage 2 Tester
ing Images • Checking/adjusting head power volt-
• 17-steps pattern age (+16VH)
• Grid & Flat pattern • Checking/adjusting other DC voltages
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 10 3.17 Calibration 2 U-Utility
• Head cover 3.18 Final Operation Checks/Checking Im- 1
ages
• Rear open/close cover
• Automatic density correction
• Lower rear open/close cover (option)
• 17-steps pattern
3.4 Checking Fan Operations 2
• Grid & Flat pattern
• Head cooling fan
3.19 Setting Date and Time 1
• Power supply fan
Power OFF - -
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection (3) -
3.20 Cleaning Covers 5 Wet cloth
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing Air Filters 5 Replace
3.21 Checking for Improper Protective 5 -
• Head cover filter Grounding
• Left cover filter 3.22 Replacing the Film Cutter 1 -
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 5 Clean with ethanol after washing 3.23 Work Completion Report - -
Ending M-Utility - -
3.8 Removing Covers (3) -
Power OFF - -
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Clean- 35 Wet cloth, cleaning cloth, vacu-
ing Inside the Equipment um cleaner
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement 3
Section and Film Release Section
• Density measurement section light- Clean with ethanol using cotton
receiving board and filter swab
• Film release section exit roller Wet cloth
3.11 Greasing 3
• Head up/down worm gear
3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head 3 Clean with ethanol
3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Convey- (3) Wet cloth
or Exit Roller
3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt 2 Check for scratches and tears
Wet cloth

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-4
 PM-5
n Maintenance to be Performed after Five Years of Use Refer to Maintenance Work
Work time
Remarks
(Min.)
Work time 3.15 Reinstalling Covers (5) -
Refer to Maintenance Work Remarks
(Min.)
• Reinstalling covers -
Power ON 5
• Reinstalling the cleaning roller -
Starting M-Utility - Start during initialization
• Reinstalling the magazine -
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error 2
Logs Power ON -
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Check- 10 3.16 Checking/Adjusting the DC Voltage 2 Tester
ing Images • Checking/adjusting head power volt-
• 17-steps pattern age (+16VH)
• Grid & Flat pattern • Checking/adjusting other DC voltages
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 10 3.17 Calibration 2 U-Utility
• Head cover 3.18 Final Operation Checks/Checking Im- 1
ages
• Rear open/close cover
• Automatic density correction
• Lower rear open/close cover (option)
• 17-steps pattern
3.4 Checking Fan Operations 2
• Grid & Flat pattern
• Head cooling fan
3.19 Setting Date and Time 1
• Power supply fan
Power OFF - -
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection (3) -
3.20 Cleaning Covers 5 Wet cloth
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing Air Filters 5 Clean with vacuum cleaner
3.21 Checking for Improper Protective 5 -
• Head cover filter Grounding
• Left cover filter 3.22 Replacing the Film Cutter 1 -
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 5 Clean with ethanol after washing 3.23 Work Completion Report - -
Ending M-Utility - -
3.8 Removing Covers (3) -
Power OFF - -
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Clean- 35 Wet cloth, cleaning cloth, vacu-
ing Inside the Equipment um cleaner
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement 3
Section and Film Release Section
• Density measurement section light- Clean with ethanol using cotton
receiving board and filter swab
• Film release section exit roller Wet cloth
3.11 Greasing 3
• Head up/down worm gear
3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head 3 Clean with ethanol
3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Convey- (3) Wet cloth
or Exit Roller
3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt 2 Check for scratches and tears
Wet cloth

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-5

1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle
In this chapter, the following symbols are indicated for every maintenance item. Before
beginning the respective maintenance work, be sure to confirm the cycle indicated by
the symbols.
: Maintenance to be performed after one year of use.
: Maintenance to be performed after two years of use.
: Maintenance to be performed after three years of use.
PM-6
1.3 Precautions on Periodic Maintenance
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable
and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts
with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining
screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original states
upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the
abovementioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual
to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the
parts.

<REMARKS>
As the TP screws and DT screws have similar shapes, differentiate them according to
their colors.
TP screw: Blue
DT screw: Silver

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-6
 PM-7
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW

START A

3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs 3.15 Reinstalling Covers

3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images 3.16 Checking/Adjusting the DC Voltage

3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 3.17 Calibration

3.4 Checking Fan Operations 3.18 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images

3.5 Checking Magazine Detection 3.19 Setting Date and Time

3.6 Cleaning/Replacing Air Filters 3.20 Cleaning Covers

3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 3.21 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding

3.8 Removing Covers 3.22 Replacing the Film Cutter

3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Cleaning Inside the Equipment 3.23 Work Completion Report

3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section and Film END

Release Section

3.11 Greasing

3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head

3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Conveyor Exit Roller

3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-7
 PM-8
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 4. Refer to each error code displayed to confirm if serious errors have
occurred.
To correct the errors, refer to “TROUBLESHOOTING, 2.3 Error Code
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs Table”. To analyze error codes, refer to detailed information on errors in
“TROUBLESHOOTING, 2.2 Format of Detailed Information”.
{MT:2.3_Error Code Table}
Check whether errors have occurred using M-Utility. If errors have occurred, correct {MT:2.2_Format of Detailed Information}
them appropriately. If necessary, save the error logs and delete those error logs.
l Saving Error Logs
n Procedure Save the log files in the PC for servicing as necessary.
l Deleting Error Logs
l Checking Error Logs

1. Turn ON the power of the equipment. 1. Select [1-2-2.Clear>].

[1-2-3.Save Log Files>] → → [1-2.Err.Log>] → → [1-2-2.
2. Start M-Utility during initialization.
Clear>] →
3. Select [1-2-1.Show Err. Log>].
[0.RETURN>] → → [1.System>] → → [1-1.Configuration>] 2. Clear the log file.
→ → [1-2.Err.Log>] → → [1-2-1.Show Err. Log>] → [Are you sure?] →

→ The latest error log window appears. If 0 error log, “nothing” is displayed. → Clears all log data.

<REMARKS>
The following shows an example of the error log display.
lFormat

lDetails of display
YY : Index display
X : Category of error source (P:Printer, F:Formatter)
AAAA : Error code (hexadecimal 4 digits)
BBBB : Detailed error information (Hexadecimal 4 digits)
CCCCCC : Date of error generation
DDDD : Time of error generation

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-8
 PM-9
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Step Dmax 3.0
Images 1 fog
Density should be between densities
2
of step 1 and step 3.
Print 17-steps pattern and Grid & Flat pattern using M-Utility, and check the density Density should be between densities
3
correction function, recorded image format, and there are no unevenness on the of step 2 and step 4.
images and scratches. 4 0.30 ±0.07
5 0.48 ±0.07
n Procedure
6 0.66 ±0.07
l 17-steps Pattern 7 0.84 ±0.07
The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is 8 1.02 ±0.07
displayed on the operation panel. Check from this data that the density value is within 9 1.20 ±0.07
the specification.
10 1.38 ±0.07
1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state.
11 1.56 ±0.07

2. Select [4-2.Check Density>]. 12 1.74 ±0.07

13 1.92 ±0.07
[1-2-2.Clear>] → → [1-2.Err.Log>] → → [1.System>] → 14 2.10 ±0.09

→ [4.F.D.C.>] → → [4-1.AUTO F.D.C.>] → → [4-2.Check 15 2.40 ±0.11

16 2.70 ±0.11
Density>] → 17 3.00 ±0.11

3. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, select magazine slot 1.

[1.Slot1 >] →
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
displayed on the operation panel.

4. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key to display the measured value of

each step, and check that they are within the specified values shown
in the following table.

5. If several magazines are used, check the density of all magazines.

6. After checking the density, show the upper tree level of M-Utility.
“Check Density” screen → → [4-2.Check Density>] → →
[4.F.D.C.>]

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-9
 PM-10
l Printing Grid & Flat Pattern l Specified Value for Each Film Size
Print Grid & Flat pattern, and check the operations of the mechanism system and
conveyor system, recorded image format, and also check for unevenness and
scratches on the images.

1. Select [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>].
[4.F.D.C.>] → → [3.Film Output>] → → [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>]

2. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, select magazine slot 1.

[1.Slot1 >] →

3. Set the number of printed sheets to “One”.

[Copies=001] →
→ One film of Grid & Flat pattern is printed and “Completed.” is displayed on
the operation panel.

4. Check the following.

• If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
• If film jam has occurred.
• If the format of the recorded image is correct.
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches.
<NOTE>
If the recorded image format is outside the specified value, execute “Service
Mode 3.3 [6-1] Side Margin>, [6-3] Top Margin>, [7] Sub Scan.>”.

5. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, print also from the lower
magazine (Slot 2) and check for scratches.
(Unit: mm)
6. If using several film sizes, check the format for all film sizes. Position 35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
A 12.0 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 9.5 ±1.0
(B’ + B”)/2 12.6 ±0.8 12.9 ±1.5 11.2 ±1.0 10.5 ±1.0
| B’ – B” | ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.1
(C + C’)/2 403.5 ±1.5 233.0 ±1.0 278.8 ±1.0 180.0 ±1.0
| C – C’ | ≤1.2 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
D, D’ 328.7 ±0.5 338.6 ±0.5 229.5 ±0.5 230.9 ±0.5
| D – D’ | ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-10
 PM-11
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function n Procedure
l Check the Head Cover Interlock (SK12)
Interlocks are provided at the rear open/close cover (SK11), head cover (SK12), and
lower rear open/close cover (SK21). 1. Select [7-2.Motor Ope.>].
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening these covers
while executing M-Utility. → [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>] → → [3.Film Output>] → →

[7.Check Mech.>] → → → [7-1.Film Removing>]→ →

[7-2.Motor Ope.>] →

2. Select [7-2-1.MD11>].
[7-2-1.MD11>] →

3. Select the rotating direction [CCW].
→ [2.CCW>] →

4. Select [HIGH] for the speed.

→ [3.HIGH] →
→ MD11 drives.

5. Open the head cover.

Check that the operating sound of the MD11 stops.

6. Close the head cover.

7. Drive MD11.
[2.CCW>] → → [3.HIGH] →

Check that the operating sound of the MD11 can be heard.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-11
 PM-12
l Check the Rear Open/close Cover Interlock (SK11)

8. Open the rear open/close cover.

Check that the operating sound of the MD11 stops.

9. Close the rear open/close cover.

10. Drive MD11.
[2.CCW>] → → [3.HIGH] →

Check that the operating sound of the MD11 can be heard.

l Check the Lower Rear Open/close Cover Interlock (SK21) (Only when
Mounting the optional Sheet-feeder Unit)

11. Open the lower rear open/close cover.

Check that the operating sound of the MD11 stops.

12. Close the lower rear open/close cover.

13. Drive MD11.
[2.CCW>] → → [3.HIGH] →

Check that the operating sound of the MD11 can be heard.

l Stop MD11 (Common Procedure)

14. Stop MD11

[2.CCW>] → → [3.STOP] →
→ MD11 stops.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-12
 PM-13
3.4 Checking Fan Operations 2. Set the operations of the head cooling fan to “ON”.
[8-2-3.Normal Ope.>] → → [8-2-1.ON>] →
Altogether operations of three fans need to be checked.
3. Set driving voltage to “+24V”.
[1.14V] → → [4.24V] →

4. Place hand in front of the louver at the back of the head cover, and
check fan operations and wind direction.

l Check the Controller Fan (FANK1)

5. Set the operations of the head cooling fan to “OFF”.

[8-2.Fan Operation>] → → [8-2-1.ON>] → → [8-2-2.OFF] →

6. Place hand in front of the ventilation ducts on the right cover of

the equipment, and check the controller fan operations and wind
direction.

7. Return the operations of the head cooling fan back to “Normal”.

[8-2.Fan Operation>] → → [8-2-2.OFF] → → [8-2-3.Normal

Ope.>] → → [1.14V] →
n Procedure
l End M-Utility
l Check the Head Cooling Fans (FANP1, FANP2)

1. Select [8-2.Fan Operation>].

8. End M-Utility.
[8-2.Fan Operation>] → → [8.Head Check>] → →
[7-2-1.MD11>] → → [7-2.Motor Ope.>] → → [7.Check Mech.>] →
[0.RETURN>] → → [Are you sure?] →
→ [8.Head Check>] → → [8-1.Temperature>] → →
→ M-Utility ends.
[8-2.Fan Operation>] →

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-13
 PM-14
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection

Check the magazine.

n Procedure

1. Remove and insert the magazine during routine operations, and check
that the alarm sounds. After inserting the magazine, check that the
equipment performs initialization operations.

2. Pull out the magazine from the equipment, and check the following
items for magazine damage.
• If the magnet/sponge/metal plate in the magazine has peeled off.
• If the open/close cover hinge is damaged.
• If the spacer for switching film size can be attached/switched normally.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-14
 PM-15
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing Air Filters 4. Remove the air filter attached to the left cover and clean with a
vacuum cleaner.


Clean and replace the air filters attached to the head cover and left cover.
<NOTE>
Check if the filter is dirty. If dirty, replace the filter. Or replace once every two
years.
If the filter dirt is persistent, replace even if before two years.

n Procedure

1. Open the head cover.

2. Remove the air filter attached to the head cover and clean with a
vacuum cleaner.

5. Attach the air filter.

3. Attach the air filter.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-15
 PM-16
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 3. Wash the cleaning roller removed using water or warm water.
4. Wipe the cleaning roller dry with a dry cloth.
Inspect the cleaning roller, wash away dirt with water, and clean with absolute ethanol.
<NOTE>
5. Clean the cleaning roller with a cloth moistened adequately with
absolute ethanol.
Replace the cleaning roller every three years. Wiping with absolute ethanol helps vaporize the water remaining on the
cleaning roller.
n Procedure 6. Leave the cleaning roller to dry until the completion of maintenance
work.
l Cleaning the cleaning roller
7. Close the head assembly.
1. Open the head assembly. Check that the equipment detects no cleaning roller and that the alarm sounds.
2. Remove the cleaning roller. 8. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-16
 PM-17
3.8 Removing Covers

n Procedure

1. Remove the magazine, and remove covers in the order of upper cover,
front cover, right cover, left cover, lower front cover, lower right cover,
and lower left cover.
<REMARKS>
The lower front cover, lower right cover, and lower left cover are covers of the
optional sheet-feeder unit.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-17
 PM-18
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Cleaning 2. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, remove the vertical
conveyance guide.
Inside the Equipment

Clean the suction cup and rubber roller of the removal section, and clean inside the
equipment.

n Procedure

1. Remove the rear cover, rear open/close cover, lower rear cover, and
lower rear open/close cover.
<REMARKS>
The rear lower open/close cover and lower rear cover are covers of the optional
sheet-feeder unit.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-18
 PM-19
3. Remove the upper conveyor entrance roller. 4. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, remove the lower
conveyor entrance roller.
<REMARKS>
Remove the #6 vertical conveyance roller only when the optional sheet-feeder
unit is mounted.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-19
 PM-20
5. Remove the film positioning guide assembly. 6. Remove the film conveyance guide.
l Upper Film Positioning Guide Assembly l Upper Conveyor

l Lower Conveyor
l Lower Film Positioning Guide Assembly

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-20
 PM-21
7. Rotate the shaft of the film removing motor (MB11/MB21) and move 8. Clean the suction cup with a wet cloth.
the suction cup arm to the upper deadpoint.

9 Clean the removed conveyor entrance roller and vertical conveyance

roller with a wet cloth.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-21

l Cleaning Inside the Equipment
1. Remove the dusts and dirt in the equipment such as frame,
mechanism unit, and inside the controller section, etc. with a cleaning
cloth or vacuum cleaner, etc.
2. Check the inside of the mechanism unit visually, and clean if dirty.
PM-22
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section
and Film Release Section
Clean the density measurement section light-receiving board (PDD board) light-
receiving surface, filter, and film release section exit roller.

3. Rotate the shaft of the film removing motor (MB11/MB21) and move n Procedure
the suction cup arm to the home position.
1. Open the head assembly.
4. Clean the rollers and guides of the parts removed in the following
order and reinstall to the equipment. 2. Remove the head up/down section cover.
• Film conveyance guide (Upper/lower)
• Film positioning guide assembly (Upper/lower)
• Conveyor entrance roller (Upper/lower)
• Conveyance guide, vertical conveyance roller
• Vertical conveyance guide
• Lower rear open/close cover
• Lower rear cover
• Rear open/close cover
• Rear cover

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-22

3. Remove the density measurement section light-receiving board
attaching stay
PM-23
4. Clean the density measurement section light-receiving board light-
receiving surface, filter surfaces (front/back sides) and rear with a
cotton swab moistened with absolute ethanol
<NOTE>
Be careful not to drop the filter.

5. Attach the density measurement section light-receiving board.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-23
 PM-24
6. Clean the film release section exit roller with a moist cloth. 3.11 Greasing

Apply oil to the worm gear of the head up/down section.

n Procedure

1. Apply a small amount of Molykote (EM-30L) to the worm gear of the

head up/down section.

7. Attach the density measurement section light-receiving board

attaching stay.
2. Reinstall the head up/down section cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-24
 PM-25
3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head 3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Conveyor
Exit Roller
Clean the thermal head.

n Procedure Clean the platen roller and conveyor exit roller.

n Procedure
1. Clean the thermal head recording section and guide surface with a
cloth moistened adequately with absolute ethanol.
1. Rotate the flywheel in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure,
and clean the platen roller and conveyor exit roller with a moist cloth.

2. Clean the film conveyance route of the sub-scanning section with a

moist cloth.

3. Attach the platen guide and close the head assembly.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-25
 PM-26
3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt 3.15 Reinstalling Covers

Inspect/clean the sub-scanning section rubber belt. Reinstall the covers and check that no screws are missing and that there are no gaps
with the main body.
n Procedure
n Procedure
1. Check for scratches and tears on the rubber belts (left/right) of the
sub-scanning section and check if the belt tension is normal. 1. Reinstall the following covers except for the right cover, front cover
and upper cover.
2. Clean the rubber belts (left/right) of the sub-scanning section with a • Lower left cover
moist cloth.
• Lower right cover
• Lower front cover
• Left cover

2. Reinstall the cleaning roller.

3. Reinstall the magazine.
4. Check that no screws are missing and that there are no gaps with the
main body.

016-201-01E
03.24.2006 FM4903
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-26
 PM-27
3.16 Checking/Adjusting the DC Voltage 2. Remove the duct.

Using a tester, measure each DC output voltage. If outside the specification, adjust
with the adjusting volume on the power supply unit.
CAUTION
Observe the following to prevent electrical hazards.
• Do not touch the voltage terminal and tester probe.

n Procedure
l Checking/adjusting Head Power Voltage (+16VH)

1. Remove the control box front cover.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-27
 PM-28
3. Remove the control box right cover. 4. Connect the connector and grounding cable from power supply unit
disconnected at the step 3.

5. Remove the interlock release tool. Insert the tool into the head cover
interlock.
{Safety Precaution}

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-28
 PM-29
6. Turn ON the power of the equipment. l Checking/adjusting Other DC Voltages

7. After the equipment sets into the standby mode, start M-Utility. 1. Measure other DC voltage at the voltage measuring point on the right
side of the control box.
8. Display the head power voltage setting value at [8-3.Head Voltage.>] If the voltage differs from the specified value, rotate the voltage adjustment
and note it down. volume on the right side of the power supply unit to adjust.

[0.RETURN>] → → [8.Head Check>] → → [8-1.Temperature] 2. After checking/adjusting the DC voltage, turn OFF the power of the
equipment.
→ → [8-3.Head Voltage>] →
→ The head power voltage setting value is displayed on the operation panel.
3. Remove the interlock release tool and reinstall at the original position.
{MU:3.3 [8-3]_HEAD Voltage>} 4. Reinstall the right cover , front cover and upper cover.
9. Set the head power voltage output to ON at [8-4.16VH Ope.>].
→ [8-3.Head Voltage>] → → [8-4.16VH Ope.>] → →

[8-4-1.ON] →
→ The head power voltage is output.

10. Measure head power voltage at the voltage measuring point on the
right side of the control box.
{l Voltage Measurement Position}

11. Check that the measured value is within ±0.05V of the value set.
If the voltage value is different from the value set, rotate the voltage adjustment
volume on the right side of the power supply unit to adjust.
{l Specified Voltage Value}
{l Adjustment Volume}

12. Set the head power voltage output to OFF.

[8-4-1.ON] → → [8-4-2.OFF] →
→ The head power voltage output stops.

13. End M-Utility.

[8-4-2.OFF] → → [8-4.16VH Ope.>] → → [8.Head Check>] →

→ [0.RETURN>] → → [Are you sure?] →

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-29
 PM-30
l Voltage Measurement Position l Adjustment Volume

l Specified Voltage Value

Measured position
(Pin number)
Voltage name Specified value Remarks
– +
Head power Varies from 12.9 to 16.0 V Measured voltage
(+16VH) 7 1 depending on the thermal head must be within ±0.05
voltage mounted. % of the set value.
+24V 8 2 +24V ±2% (+23.52 to +24.48V) -
+3.3V 9 3 +3.3V ±2% (+3.23 to +3.37V) -
+5V 10 4 +5V ±2% (+4.90 to +5.10V) -
+12V 11 5 +12V ±2% (+11.76 to +12.24V) -
Fixed
+5VS 12 6 +5V ±5% (+4.75 to +5.25V)
(Not adjustable)

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-30
 PM-31
3.17 Calibration

To correct any inconsistencies in the thermal head resistance, measure each

resistance of the head and update the correction data by executing the calibration.

n Procedure

1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.

2. Start the U-Utility.
3. Select [7.Calibration].
[0.RETURN>] → → [7.Calibration] →
→ The calibration starts. When the calibration completes normally, [Completed.]
is displayed on the operation panel.
<REMARKS>
Execution time: Approximately 1 minute

4. End the U-Utility.

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-31
 PM-32
3.18 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images l 17-steps Pattern

1. Select [4-2. Check Density>].

Perform final operation check after completing preventive maintenance by performing → [4-1.AUTO F.D.C.] → → [4-2.Check Density>] →
automatic density correction, and printing 17-steps pattern and Grid & Flat pattern,
and recheck the density correction function, format of the recorded image, and
check that there are no unevenness on the image and scratches. Also check that the 2. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, select magazine slot 1.
mechanism and conveyor system are operating normally during film conveyance.
{PM:3.2_Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images} [1.Slot1 >] →
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
n Procedure displayed on the operation panel.

l Automatic Density Correction 3. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key to display the measured value of
each step, and check that they are within the specified values shown
1. Start M-Utility after the equipment is in the standby state. in the following table.

2. Select [4-1.AUTO F.D.C.>]. 4. If several magazines are used, check the density of all magazines.
[0.RETURN>] → → [4.F.D.C.>] → → [4-1.AUTO F.D.C.>] →

3. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, select magazine slot 1.

[1.Slot1 >] →
→ The 24-steps density pattern is printed and automatic density correction is
executed.

4. If there are several magazines, perform automatic density correction

on all magazines.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-32
 PM-33
5. After checking the density, show the upper tree level of M-Utility. l Printing Grid & Flat Pattern

“Check Density” screen→ → [4-2.Check Density>] → → 1. Select [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>].

[4.F.D.C.>] [4.F.D.C.>] → → [3.Film Output>] → → [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>]

→
Step Dmax 3.0
1 fog 2. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, select magazine slot 1.
Density should be between densities
2
of step 1 and step 3. [1.Slot1 >] →
Density should be between densities
3
of step 2 and step 4. 3. Set the number of printed sheets to “One”.
4 0.30 ±0.07
[Copies=001] →
5 0.48 ±0.07
6 0.66 ±0.07 → One film of Grid & Flat pattern is printed and “Completed.” is displayed on
the operation panel.
7 0.84 ±0.07
8 1.02 ±0.07 4. Check the following.
9 1.20 ±0.07 • If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
10 1.38 ±0.07 • If film jam has occurred.
• If the format of the recorded image is correct.
11 1.56 ±0.07
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches.
12 1.74 ±0.07
{Specified Value for Each Film Size}
13 1.92 ±0.07
14 2.10 ±0.09 5. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, print also from the lower
magazine (Slot 2) and check for scratches.
15 2.40 ±0.11
16 2.70 ±0.11 6. If using several film sizes, check the format for all film sizes.
17 3.00 ±0.11

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-33
 PM-34
3.19 Setting Date and Time 7. After correcting the system date and time, press the <CANCEL> key
and show the top tree level of M-Utility.

[1-1-1-2.YYYY>] → → [1-1-1.Set Date>] → → [1-1.Configuration>]

Check the system date and time, and reset the date and time if incorrect.

n Procedure 8. End the M-Utility.

1. Display [1-1-1.Set Date]. [1-1.Configuration>] → → [1.System>] → → [0.RETURN>]

→ [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>] → → [3.Film Output>] → → → → [Are you sure?] →

[1.System>] → → [1-1.Configuration>] → → [1-1-1.Set Date>] 9. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
2. Display [1-1-1-1. Check Date] and check the current value set.
[1-1-1.Set Date>] → → [1-1-1-1.Check Date] →
→ The current system date and time are displayed.

3. Check that the date and time are correct and press the <CANCEL> key.
l To Correct the System Date and Time:
Proceed from step 4. onwards.
l If the System Date and Time are Correct:
Press the <CANCEL> key another two times to display [1-1. Configuration>]
and proceed from step 8. onwards.

4. Correct the system date and time.

[1-1-1-1.Check Date] → → [1-1-1-2.YYYY>] →

5. Select the correct value using the up arrow key/down arrow key, and
confirm the selection using the <ENTER> key.
→ Pressing the <ENTER> key moves the cursor to the right. Pressing it after
entering the final digit shows the lower tree level.

6. In the same way, correct the month [1-1-1-2-1.MM>], day [1-1-1-2-1-1-1.

DD>], hours [1-1-1-2-1-1-1.hh>], and minutes [1-1-1-2-1-1-1.mm>].
<REMARKS>
The range for [1-1-1-2-1-1-1.hh>] is 0 to 23.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-34
 PM-35
3.20 Cleaning Covers 3.21 Checking for Improper Protective
Grounding
Wipe covers with a moist cloth.

n Procedure
1. Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire
connections are established in the same manner as for installation.
1. Wipe the covers with a moistened cloth.
2. Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are
secured and connected in the same manner as for installation.

3. Check that the removed screws are properly tightened.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-35

3.22 Replacing the Film Cutter
1. Replace the film cutter.
016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
PM-36
3.23 Work Completion Report
After completing preventive maintenance, notify the user that the density tone curve
has changed because density correction was carried out.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-36
 PM-37
BLANK PAGE

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-37
 PM-38
BLANK PAGE

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-38
 PM-39
BLANK PAGE

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PM-39
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) All pages

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

(DRYPIX Lite)

016-201-06E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 PM-1
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 1.2 Notation of Age
PROGRAM The following notations are mentioned for the respective maintenance programs.
Check what the notation means before starting the task.
1Y : Procedure performed at an age of 1 year.
2Y : Procedure performed at an age of 2 years.
1.1 How to Use the Preventive Maintenance 3Y : Procedure performed at an age of 3 years.
4Y : Procedure performed at an age of 4 years.
Volume 5Y : Procedure performed at an age of 5 years.

• Perform the corresponding maintenance programs according to the notations of age

( 1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y ).
• The preventive maintenance program list is prepared for the respective ages of 1, 2,
3, 4, and 5 years. As the tasks to be performed depend on the age of service, follow
the list in carrying out the preventive maintenance program.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-1
 PM-2
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List
The preventive maintenance program is defined in terms of the age of the machine. When the age of the machine reaches the specified value, take each action of the preventive
maintenance program corresponding to the age. Take the action referring to the list, as the program differs depending on the age of the machine.
<INSTRUCTION>
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws.
To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are
restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.

 Preventive Maintenance Program List

Cycle Time
Maintenance program requirements Replacement Parts Tools and Instruments Used
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y (min)
3.1 Checking the Error Logs      2
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images      10
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function      10
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation      2
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection      3
3.6 Cleaning the Air Filters      5 Vacuum cleaner
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller      5 Cleaning roller (replace every 3 years) Absolute ethanol
3.8 Removing Covers      3
• Wet cloth
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Cleaning Inside the Equip-
     30 • Cleaning cloth
ment
• Vacuum cleaner
• Absolute ethanol
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section and Film Re-
     3 • Cotton swab
lease Section
• Wet cloth
3.11 Greasing      3 Molykote (EM-30)
3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head      3 Absolute ethanol
3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Conveyor Exit Roller      3 Wet cloth
3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt      2 Wet cloth
3.15 Reinstalling Covers      5
3.16 Calibration      2
3.17 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images      1
3.18 Setting Date and Time      1
3.19 Cleaning Covers      5 Wet cloth
3.20 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding      5
3.21 Replacing the Film Cutter      1 Film Cutter
3.22 Work Completion Report      -

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-2
 PM-3
1.3.1 Maintenance Program at the Age of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
Years
Maintenance program at the age of 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 years
( 1Y , 2Y , 3Y , 4Y , 5Y )
Time
Tools and
Maintenance program requirements Replacement Parts
Instruments Used
(min)
3.1 Checking the Error Logs 2
3.2 Printing/Checking Convey-
10
ance/Checking Images
3.3 Checking the Interlock
10
Function
3.4 Checking Fan Operations 2
3.5 Checking Magazine Detec-
3
tion
3.6 Cleaning the Air Filters 5 Air Filters Vacuum cleaner
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning roller (replace
5 Absolute ethanol
Cleaning Roller every 3 years)
3.8 Removing Covers 3
3.9 Cleaning the Removal • Wet cloth
Section, Cleaning Inside the 30 • Cleaning cloth
Equipment • Vacuum cleaner
3.10 Cleaning the Density • Absolute ethanol
Measurement Section and 3 • Cotton swab
Film Release Section • Wet cloth
3.11 Greasing 3 Molykote (EM-30)
3.12 Cleaning the Thermal
3 Absolute ethanol
Head
3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roll-
3 Wet cloth
er and Conveyor Exit Roller
3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the
2 Wet cloth
Rubber Belt
3.15 Reinstalling Covers 5
3.16 Calibration 2
3.17 Final Operation Checks/
1
Checking Images
3.18 Setting Date and Time 1
3.19 Cleaning Covers 5 Wet cloth
3.20 Checking for Improper
5
Protective Grounding
3.21 Replacing the Film Cutter 1 Film Cutter
3.22 Work Completion Report -

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-3
 PM-4
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW

START A

3.1 Checking the Error Logs 3.15 Reinstalling Covers

3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images 3.16 Calibration

3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 3.17 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images

3.4 Checking Fan Operations 3.18 Setting Date and Time

3.5 Checking Magazine Detection 3.19 Cleaning Covers

3.6 Cleaning the Air Filters 3.20 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding

3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 3.21 Replacing the Film Cutter

3.8 Removing Covers 3.22 Work Completion Report

3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Cleaning Inside the Equipment END

3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section and Film

Release Section

3.11 Greasing

3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head

3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Conveyor Exit Roller

3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-4
 PM-5
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking
Images
3.1 Checking the Error Logs 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y

Print 17-steps pattern and Grid & Flat pattern using PC-Utility, and check the density
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y
correction function, recorded image format, and there are no unevenness on the
Check whether errors have occurred using PC-Utility. If errors have occurred, correct images and scratches.
them appropriately. If necessary, save the error logs and delete those error logs.
n Procedure
n Procedure
1. The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density
l Checking Error Logs measurement section is displayed on the PC-Utility screen. Check
from this data that the density value is within the specification.
1. Turn ON the power of the equipment. {IN (DRYPIX Lite):8.2_Checking Density}

2. Start PC-Utility during initialization. 2. Print Grid & Flat pattern, and check the operations of the mechanism
system and conveyor system, recorded image format, and also check
3. Check the error log. for unevenness and scratches on the images.
{IN (DRYPIX Lite):10.2.1_Checking the Error Logs} {IN (DRYPIX Lite):8.3_Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image
Unevenness and Scratches}
l Saving Error Logs
Save the log files in the PC for servicing as necessary.
l Deleting Error Logs

1. Clear the log file.

{IN (DRYPIX Lite):10.2.2_Deleting Error Logs}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-5
 PM-6
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 3.4 Checking Fan Operations
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y

n Procedure n Procedure

1. Check the interlock function of the head cover and the rear lower 1. Check whether the head cooling fan (FANP1) and the controller fan
open/close cover. (FANK1) are operating normally.
{IN (DRYPIX Lite):8.4_Checking the Interlock Function} {IN (DRYPIX Lite):8.5_Checking Fan Operations}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-6
 PM-7
3.5 Checking Magazine Detection 3.6 Cleaning the Air Filters
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y

n Procedure n Procedure

1. End the PC-Utility. 1. Clean the Air Filters.

2. Remove and insert the magazine during routine operations, and check
that the alarm sounds. After inserting the magazine, check that the
equipment performs initialization operations.

3. Pull out the magazine from the equipment, and check the following
items for magazine damage.
• If the magnet/sponge/metal plate in the magazine has peeled off.
• If the open/close cover hinge is damaged.
• If the spacer for switching film size can be attached/switched normally.

4. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-7
 PM-8
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 3.8 Removing Covers
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y

<NOTE>
n Procedure
Replace the cleaning roller every three years.
1. Remove the magazine.
n Procedure
2. Remove the covers.
1. Remove the cleaning roller. {MC (DRYPIX Lite):1._Cover}

2. Wash the cleaning roller removed using water or warm water.

3. Wipe the cleaning roller dry with a dry cloth.
4. Clean the cleaning roller with a cloth moistened with absolute ethanol.
Wiping with absolute ethanol helps vaporize the water remaining on the
cleaning roller.

5. Leave the cleaning roller to dry until the completion of maintenance

work.
<REMARKS>
Do not install the cleaning roller now.

6. Close the head assembly.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-8
 PM-9
3.9 Cleaning the Removal Section, Cleaning 3. Remove the vertical conveyor guide assembly.
Inside the Equipment <REMARKS>
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y Only when the sheet-feeder unit (option) is reinstalled, implement this procedure.
Clean the suction cup and rubber roller of the removal section, and clean inside the
equipment.

n Procedure

1. Remove the rear cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.8_Rear Cover}

2. Remove the rear guide assembly.

#1
[Remove]
4-DT3x6
Guide Assembly

I0011 ai

Guide Assembly #2
#1
[Remove]
[Remove]
2- DT3x6
Clamp x15 I0001.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-9
 PM-10
4. Remove the conveyance roller. 6. Remove the vertical conveyance guide.
<REMARKS>
Only when the sheet-feeder unit (option) is reinstalled, implement this procedure.

#3
[Remove]
Gear cover
#1
[Release]
Clamp Conveyance guide

#5 #1
#4 #2
[Remove] [Remove]
[Remove] [Remove]
2-DT3x8
I0013.ai

Bearing x 2 Gear x 2 DT3x6

7. Remove the film positioning guide assembly.
#1
[Move]
Reference plate

#6
[Remove]
Vertical
conveyance
#3
roller #8 #9
#7 [Remove]
[Remove] [Remove]
[Remove] Conveyance 2-DT3x6
Upper conveyor
2-TP3x6 guide entrance roller Film positioning guide
0012 ai
assembly
5. Using a wet cloth, clean the conveyor entrance roller and vertical #2
[Disconnect]
conveyance roller removed in Step 4. Connector 0014 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-10
 PM-11
8. Rotate the shaft of the film removing motor and move the suction cup 10. Remove the dusts and dirt in the equipment with a cleaning cloth or
arm to the upper deadpoint. vacuum cleaner, etc.
<REMARKS>
11. Rotate the shaft of the film removing motor and move the suction
When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as cup arm to the home position.
shown in the following figure.

0015 ai

DETAIL A

#1
A [Move]
Arm
I0016.ai

9. Clean the suction cup with a wet cloth.

#1
[Cleaning]
Suction cup

I0002.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-11
 PM-12
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section 3. Remove the PDD board together with the stay.
and Film Release Section #3 #2
[Remove] [Release]
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y
2-DT3x6 Clamp x3 #1
Clean the PDD board light-receiving surface, filter, and film release section exit roller. [Disconnect]
PDD28A
n Procedure

1. Open the head assembly.

2. Remove the head up/down section cover.

PDD Board Stay

I0003.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-12
 PM-13
4. Remove the PDD board, and clean the light-receiving surface and filter 6. Clean the film release section exit roller with a moist cloth.
surfaces (front/back sides) of the board with a cotton swab moistened
with absolute ethanol.
<NOTE>
Be careful not to drop the filter.

#2 #1
[Remove] [Remove]
PDD Board 2-TP3x6
#1
[Cleaning]
Roller

Filter

I0005.ai

7. Install the PDD board together with the stay.

Light-receiving surface
0004 ai

5. Attach the PDD board.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-13
 PM-14
3.11 Greasing 3.12 Cleaning the Thermal Head
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y

Apply oil to the worm gear of the head up/down section.

n Procedure
n Procedure
1. Clean the thermal head recording section and guide surface with a
1. Apply a small amount of Molykote (EM-30L) to the worm gear of the cloth moistened adequately with absolute ethanol.
head up/down section. #1
[Cleaning] Thermal head
Recording section and Guide surface

#1
Worm gear
[Apply] EM-30L

I0006.ai

2. Reinstall the head up/down section cover. I0007.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-14
 PM-15
3.13 Cleaning the Platen Roller and Conveyor 3.14 Inspecting/Cleaning the Rubber Belt
Exit Roller 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y

1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y
n Procedure
n Procedure
1. Rotate the flywheel by hand, and check for scratches and tears on the
rubber belts of the sub-scanning section.
1. Rotate the flywheel in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure,
and clean the platen roller and conveyor exit roller with a moist cloth. 2. Clean the rubber belts of the sub-scanning section with a moist cloth.
#1 Conveyor exit roller
[Cleaning] Platen roller

1.
[Check]
Belt
2.
[Cleaning]
Belt

Flywheel

Flywheel

0008 ai

2. Clean the film conveyance route of the sub-scanning section with a

I0009.ai

moist cloth.

3. Close the head assembly.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-15
 PM-16
3.15 Reinstalling Covers 3.16 Calibration
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y

To correct any inconsistencies in the thermal head resistance, measure each

n Procedure resistance of the head and update the correction data by executing the calibration.

1. Reinstall the all covers. n Procedure

2. Reinstall the cleaning roller. 1. Turn ON the power of the equipment by pressing the standby switch.
3. Reinstall the magazine. 2. Start the U-Utility by pressing the utility button.
4. Check that no screws are missing and that there are no gaps with the 3. Press the <ENTER> key several times until [U-4] is displayed on the
main body. operation panel.

4. Press the <ENTER> key to start the calibration.

→ When the calibration completes normally, "No. of films remaining" is
displayed.
Utility boutton Display panel
Enter boutton
Stand-by switch

0010 ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-16
 PM-17
3.17 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images 3.18 Setting Date and Time
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y

Perform final operation check after completing preventive maintenance by performing Check the system date and time, and reset the date and time if incorrect.
automatic density correction, and printing 17-steps pattern and Grid & Flat pattern,
and recheck the density correction function, format of the recorded image, and n Procedure
check that there are no unevenness on the image and scratches. Also check that the
mechanism and conveyor system are operating normally during film conveyance. 1. Check the system date and time.
n Procedure → If the system date and time is not correct, correct it via [Set Date] of the PC-
Utility.
l Automatic Density Correction

1. Start the PC-Utility.

2. Select Automatic density correction.
[Density Correction] → [Automatic Density Correction]

3. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, select magazine slot 1.

4. Click the [Execute] button.
→ The 24-steps density pattern is printed and automatic density correction is
executed.

5. If there are several magazines, perform automatic density correction

on all magazines.

l 17-steps Pattern
{IN (DRYPIX Lite):8.2_Checking Density}

l Printing Grid & Flat Pattern

{IN (DRYPIX Lite):8.3_Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image
Unevenness and Scratches}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-17
 PM-18
3.19 Cleaning Covers 3.20 Checking for Improper Protective
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y Grounding
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y
n Procedure

1. Wipe the covers with a moistened cloth. 1. Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire
connections are established in the same manner as for installation.

2. Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are
secured and connected in the same manner as for installation.

3. Check that the removed screws are properly tightened.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-18
 PM-19
3.21 Replacing the Film Cutter 3.22 Work Completion Report
1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y 5Y After completing preventive maintenance, notify the user that the density tone curve
has changed because density correction was carried out.
1. Replace the film cutter.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PM-19
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.31.2006 00 New release (FM4832) All pages

03.24.2006 01 Revised (FM4903) All pages
06.30.2006 01 Revised (FM4924) All pages
08.31.2006 02 Revised (FM4958) 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 18-93

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 10.02.2006 03 Revised (Change of corporate name and
corporate logo) (FM4992)
25, 80

10.18.2006 03 Revised (FM5036) 6-8, 31, 32, 35, 35.1, 35.2, 36, 38,
40, 41, 48-50, 71, 88-99
02.15.2007 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software 6-9, 9.1, 9.2, 10, 11, 14, 19-23, 23.1,
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5075) 23.2, 24, 29, 32-35, 35.1, 38, 39,
41-47, 47.1, 47.2, 47.3, 47.4, 48-51,
56-62, 63-69, 71, 74, 75, 77-83,
85-89
03.31.2008 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software 4, 10, 11, 21, 21.1, 21.2, 60, 64, 65,

INSTALLATION (IN) 01.27.2012 06

version V2.2, V2.3 and V2.4, etc.) (FM5332)
Revised (FM5920)
68, 70, 72, 78, 83, 87
Cover

(DRYPIX 2000)

016-201-06E DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 IN-1
1. SPECIFICATIONS n Weight
l 1 Magazine Specifications
1.1 Equipment Dimensions and Weight Approximately 43 kg (including 1 magazine)
l 2 Magazine Specifications
n Dimensions Approximately 59 kg (including 2 magazines)

l 1 Magazine Specifications n Center of gravity

530 mm x 590 mm x 400 mm (W x D x H)
l 1 Magazine Specifications
l 2 Magazine Specifications Height: 177 mm
530 mm x 590 mm x 580 mm (W x D x H) From right side: 261 mm
From rear side: 183 mm
<NOTE>
The height (W) and depth (D) do not include magazines and local protrusions. l 2 Magazine Specifications
Height: 280 mm
From right side: 261 mm
From rear side: 179 mm

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-1
 IN-2
1.2 Environmental Requirements n When Mounted Onboard a Vehicle
l Operating (with the Power Conducted)
n When Installed at a Fixed Location
Temperature/Humidity : 15 ˚C (40 - 70 %RH) to 30 ˚C (15 - 70 %RH)
l Operating (with the Power Conducted) (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 650 to 1060 hPa
Temperature/Relative humidity : 15 ˚C (40 - 70 %RH) to 30 ˚C (15 - 70 %RH)
(No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 650 to 1060 hPa

l Non-operating (with No Power Conducted/Not Including Film)

l Non-operating (with No Power Conducted/Not Including Film)
Temperature : 0 to 45 ˚C (No freezing)
Relative humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 650 to 1060 hPa
Temperature : -10 to 55 ˚C (no icing allowed)
Humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 650 to 1060 hPa
n Floor (Installation Surface) Vibration Requirement
Frequency: 10 to 55 Hz
Amplitude: 0.015 mm or less

n Floor Levelness
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around

n Floor Flatness
10 mm or less

n Static Magnetic Field

DC 100 Gauss or less

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-2
 IN-3
n Vibration Conditions When Mounted Onboard a Vehicle
(When the Optional Mounting Accessory Kit is Used.)
• Random vibration 5 to 500Hz
• 24-hour vibrations for each of X, Y and Z axis
72 hours in totality (300,000 km are assumed.)
• Acceleration 1G

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-3
 IN-4
1.3 Electrical Requirements n Power Cable
<NOTE>
n Frequency
If the power cable is not packed together with the equipment, be sure to use a
Single phase 50 to 60 Hz power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.

n Line Voltage
l For U.S. and Canada
100 to 240 V ±10%
Acceptable variation: ±10% • UL-listed detachable power supply cable
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines) • Hospital-grade Type Plug
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
n Capacity • Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
500 VA or less • Cable type: SJT

n Rated Current l For Europe

5 to 2 A • Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
n Power Consumption • Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Maximum 500 W • Cable type: H05VV-F

n Electric Energy n Network Cable

Printing: Approximately 270 Wh {IN:6.1_Connecting the Network Cable}
Stand-by: Approximately 150 Wh
Sleep mode: Approximately 100 Wh
Remote standby mode: Approximately 10 Wh

n Maximum Heat Generation

Printing: Approximately 1000 kJ
Stand-by: Approximately 550 kJ

n Heater Maximum Load Power

48 W x 2

n Thermal Head Maximum Load Power

1152 W

n Grounding Resistance
100 Ω or less

n Overload Protection
10 A

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-4
 IN-5
1.4 Other Specifications 1.5 Equipment Installation Space
<NOTE>
n Start-up Time
The following space does not include space for people.
Approximately 4 min. (Room temperature 25 ˚C)
Approximately 3 min. (Room temperature 25 ˚C/ Sleep mode)

n Noise 1.5.1 Installation Space

Front: Magazine S; More than 400 mm
Printing: Approximately 49 dB (excluding transient noises) Magazine L; More than 500 mm
Stand-by: Approximately 42 dB Rear: More than 150 mm
Top: More than 500 mm
n Earthquake Measures Left: More than 50 mm
Fall prevention fixture kit (Optional mounting accessory kit) Right: More than 50 mm

1.5.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work

Front: Magazine S; More than 400 mm
Magazine L; More than 500 mm
Rear: More than 200 mm
Top: More than 700 mm
Left: More than 100 mm
Right: More than 100 mm

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-5
 IN-6
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW

START
A B
4.2.3 Cart (Option)
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
4.2.4 Magazine (Option)
3.1 Precautions on Installation
4.2.5 Expanded Memory Board (Option)
3.2 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing
4.2.6 Mounting Accessory Kit (Option)
3.2.1 Environment of PC for Servicing
4.3 Checking Components
3.2.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing
5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND
3.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directry of the PC ASSEMBLING/INSTALLING OPTIONS
3.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbols
5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures (Tape)
3.2.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder
5.1.1 Equipment Main Body
3.2.6 Precautions and Setting in the Use of Windows XP PC
for Servicing 5.1.2 Sheet-feeder Unit

3.2.7 How to Operate PC-Utility 5.1.3 Magazine

3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts 5.2 Assembling of Cart

3.4 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves 5.3 Temporary Installation onto Cart

3.4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility(EMC) 5.4 Installing Equipment Fixtures

4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION 5.4.1 When Installing Only Equipment Main Body

4.1 Carrying 5.4.2 When Installing the Equipment with the Sheet-feeder Unit

4.2 Unpacking and Unloading 5.5 Affixing the Car-mounting Tape

4.2.1 Equipment Main Body 5.6 Installing the Sheet-feeder Unit to the Equipment Main Body

4.2.2 Sheet-feeder Unit (Option)

A B C
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-6
 IN-7

C D
5.7 Exchanging the Image Memory Board 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS

5.8 Setting Magazines 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance
Operations
5.8.1 Affixing the Film Size Label
8.2 Checking Density
5.8.2 Changing the Magazine Size
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness
5.8.3 Setting the Magazine Number and Scratches

6. CONNECTING CABLES 8.4 Checking the Interlock Function

6.1 Connecting the Network Cable 8.5 Checking Fan Operations

6.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance 8.6 Ending the M-Utility

7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT 8.7 Settings the Image QC Function

7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility 8.8 Connecting to the Network

7.1.1 Setting the Magazine and Powering ON 9. CLIENT SETTINGS

7.1.2 Starting the M-Utility 9.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network

7.2 System Settings 9.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment
(Web Server Start)
7.2.1 Configuration Settings
9.3 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment
7.2.2 Operation Panel Settings (Starting PC-Utility)

7.2.3 Network Settings 9.4 System Settings via PC-Utility

7.3 Ending System Settings 9.5 Registering the PC for Servicing

D E
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-7
 IN-8

E F
9.6 Client Settings 11.4 Cleaning the Equipment

9.7 Disconnecting the Equipment 11.5 Affixing the Main Power Switch OFF Caution Label

9.8 Ending the Equipment END

10. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION

10.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment

10.2 Checking film Output and Images from Connected Equipment

10.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment

11. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT

11.1 Backing Up Individual Data

11.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs When Errors Occur
during Installation

11.2.1 Checking Error Logs

11.2.2 Deleting Error Logs

11.3 Installation

11.3.1 Installing the Equipment without Using Fixtures

11.3.2 Installing the Equipment and Securing with Fixtures

11.3.3 Securing the Equipment Main Body to the Cart

11.3.4 Installing the Equipment in a Vehicle

F
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-8

3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
3.1 Precautions on Installation
The machine installation site must satisfy the “n Installation Site Requirements” below.
Also be sure to complete procedures beforehand for necessary construction work,
electrical utility, and air-conditioning system installation.
Note that UL/TÜV is not effective when used as mobile type because usage of this
equipment as mobile type has not been applied for with UL/TÜV-PS.
n Installation Site Requirements
Avoid the following installation sites.
• Places where the temperature drastically changes.
• Places near heat sources such as heaters.
• Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur.
• Places where the equipment may be exposed to any corrosive gas.
• Dusty places.
• Places where the equipment is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock.
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
IN-9
n Prevention of Condensation
When transporting an equipment to a hospital from outdoors where the temperature
is low such as cold regions, condensation may occur inside the equipment. Take
precautions against the following to prevent this condensation.
• Transport the equipment indoors without removing the vinyl packaging wrapping the
equipment body. However, the cardboard boxes can be removed outdoors as this
will not cause condensation.
• After transporting indoors, refer to the following table and wait until the equipment
settles to the indoor temperature, and then remove the vinyl.
• Install the equipment, touch the sheet metal portions such as magazine insert slot
and rear cover guide plats, etc. and check that no condensation has occurred, and
then turn ON the power.
• If the vinyl is accidentally removed outdoors, wrap the equipment up in the vinyl
tightly again before transporting indoors.
<REMARKS>
The following table shows the approximate time to wait before removing the vinyl after
transporting the equipment into a room with 50% humidity.
Extend the waiting time shown if the indoor humidity is high. If humidity is low, the
waiting time can be shortened.
Example: Humidity 70%→Increase waiting time by 40%
Humidity 30%→Decrease waiting time by 30%

External temperature
Indoor
temperature
10ºC 5ºC 0ºC -5ºC -10ºC -15ºC -20ºC
30 70 110 140
10ºC - - -
minute minute minute minute
30 70 110 140 175
15ºC - -
minute minute minute minute minute
30 65 100 135 170 205
20ºC -
minute minute minute minute minute minute
30 60 100 130 170 200 240
25ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute
60 100 130 165 200 235 270
30ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-9

n Power Supply and Grounding
Check that the outlet for connecting the power cable of this equipment is
independently wired from the switch-board. Connect only this equipment to this outlet.
Do not connect other devices.
n Power Cable
Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.
l For U.S. and Canada
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
• Hospital-grade Type Plug
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
• Cable type: SJT
l For Europe
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
• Cable type: H05VV-F
IN-9.1
n Network Connection
As the equipment needs to be connected to the network, prepare network materials
and parts and complete constructions beforehand.
Prepare the network materials and accessories according to the place of installation
as they are not designated parts.
n Board Handling Precautions
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
boards.
n Additional Protective Grounding
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. This
installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical
facility construction.
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used
room” are given below.
l Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.

n Differentiating TP Screws and DT Screws

As the TP screws and DT screws have similar shapes, differentiate them according to
their colors.
• TP screw: Blue
• DT screw: Silver

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-9.1
 IN-9.2
BLANK PAGE

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-9.2
 IN-10
3.2 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing 3.2.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing
Use a PC for servicing for performing settings for each client (image output equipment) l Setting a Windows Account for the PC for Servicing
connected to the network and storage of equipment data.
The username and password should be registered.
Prepare the PC for servicing for installation work.
• User: dryprinter
<NOTE> • Password: fujifilm
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T straight cable is required for • Access permission: Administrator
connecting the PC for servicing.
<REMARKS>
<REMARKS> The above are already set and need not be set for PCs for servicing using DI Tools for
FUJIFILM imager equipment other than this equipment.
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the PC for servicing to this
equipment via the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for
servicing to this equipment using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T crossing l Setting the FTP Site Directory
cable. The FTP site directory should be set as follows
“Any drive name”:\Program Files\fujifilm\DRYPIX”
{IN:3.2.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
3.2.1 Environment of PC for Servicing
l Setting the USB Memory Volume Label
OS
l
The USB memory is set with the volume label.
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) or Windows XP Professional (SP2) This setting is not necessary when no USB memory is to be used.
Display
l <REMARKS>
800 x 600 pixels or higher-resolution display A USB memory can be used when upgrading the main unit software.
Network Interface
l
Ethernet port should be usable.
External Connecting Device
l
The CD-ROM drive, USB memory, and compact flash reader should be usable.
Browser
l
Internet Explorer should be installed.
<NOTE>
When any pop-up blocker tool such as Google Toolbar is installed, the pop-up
blocker feature must be disabled.

Others
l
The FTP of the Internet Information Service should be operating.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-10
 IN-11
3.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
n
To perform transmission and reception of various data with the equipment, there is a
need to set the FTP site directory of the PC for servicing. 1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Described here is the setting method for an example of Windows 2000. Panel].
Settings are performed in the same way basically for Windows XP, however
precautionary items and addition setup items may be provided. 2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
{IN:3.2.6_Precautions and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing}
<NOTE> 3. Double-click the [Internet Services Manager] icon.
To set the FTP site directory of the PC, Internet Information Services (IIS)
function (one of the Windows 2000 components) is required.
4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer]
list.
This Internet Information Services (IIS) will not be installed in the standard
installation of Windows 2000. If not installed in the PC used, install it as follows.
5. Check that [Default FTP Site] is set to [Running]. If set to [Stopped] or
[Pause], right-click [Default FTP Site] and select [Start].
Installing the Internet Information Services (IIS)
n
6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and click [Properties] from the pop-up
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control menu.
Panel].
7. Click the [Home Directory] tab.
2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon. 8. Note down the path set at [Local Path:]
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Components]. <NOTE>

4. Select the checkbox of [Internet Information Services (IIS)] from the As Windows 2000 has only one home directory for all accounts, if another
directory (folder name) has already been specified for [Local Path:], other
[Components:] list, and click [Next].
applications may be using it.
5. Follow the instructions of the [Windows Components Wizard] dialog
to install the Internet Information Services (IIS).
If the message [Insert Disk] appears halfway through to prompt for the
“Windows 2000 CD-ROM” to be inserted, insert the CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive and click [OK].
<REMARKS>
If the [Microsoft Windows 2000 CD] window appears upon inserting the “Windows
2000 CD-ROM”, click [Exit] to close the window.

6. After completing installation, click [Finish].

7. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-11

9. Set the directory of the FTP site (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX) at
[Local Path:] , and select the checkboxes of [Read], [Write], and [Log
visits].
<NOTE>
If the directory of the FTP site is not set to “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
DRYPIX”, the PC-Utility will not operate properly. If using other applications
on the same PC, after using the PC-Utility, return to the settings noted down
at step 8.
In addition, “C:\inetpub\ftproot” is the default value of Windows 2000 and
can be changed.
IN-12
3.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbols
When the [Regional Options] of the PC for servicing is not English, check the setting
of the grouping symbol, and change it if different from below.
n Checking Procedure
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
2. Double-click the [Regional Options] icon.
3. Click the [Numbers] tab.
4. Check that [Decimal symbol] is “ . ” (period).

10. Click [OK].

11. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
<NOTE>
If as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for [Digit
grouping symbol] and [Decimal symbol], change the symbol for [Digit
grouping symbol].

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-12
 IN-13
5. Click the [Time] tab. 7. Click the [Date] tab.
6. Check that [Time separator] is “ : ” (colon). 8. Check that [Date separator] is “ / ” (slash).

9. Click [OK].
10. Close the [Control Panel] window.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-13

3.2.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder
Create the storage folder for various data of the equipment.
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
→ The “DPX2CopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX2 Copy Tool] window
is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPX2CopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
2. Enter the FTP site root directory at [Input drive of FTP-Home].
{IN:3.2.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
3. Enter [Establish name] and [Printer host name].
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
IN-14
4. [Make]
→ Data strage folder is created and the [Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
• Data strage folder:
“C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPX2000\Printers\Establish name_Printer
name”
• The data storage folder contains the following four empty folders:
• “Head” folder: Location for storing head data
• “Indv” folder: Location for storing individual data
• “Log” folder: Location for storing log data
• “Operation” folder: Location for storing equipment operation data
5. [OK]
6. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX2 Copy Tool] window.
7. Close all windows opened on the windows desktop.
8. Unload the main unit software CD-R from the CD-ROM drive.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-14

3.2.6 Precautions and Settings in the Use of Windows XP
PC for Servicing
When using the Windows XP (SP2) PC for servicing, the following precautions and
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software.
IN-15
n Windows Firewall Settings
Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, implement FTP site directory settings,
Windows XP will also require additional setting of the TCP Port number used by the
[Default FTP Site] to the Windows Firewall Exceptions. Set as follows.

n Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) 1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] →[Control
Panel].
If IIS has not been installed in the Windows XP PC for servicing to be used, perform
the additional install in the same way.
Also, during the installing procedure, check the following.
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
1. Select the checkmark in the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] 3. Double-click the [Internet Information Services] icon.
checkbox from the [Components:] list at [Add/Remove Windows
Components], and click [Details...]. 4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer]
list.
2. Check that the checkmark is selected in the [File Transfer Protocol 5. Double-click the [FTP Sites] folder from the [Name] list.
(FTP) Service] checkbox from the [Subcomponents of Internet
Information Services (IIS):] list. If not selected, select the checkmark,
and click [OK]. 6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and select [Properties].
<NOTE> 7. At the [FTP Site] tab, note down the number displayed at [TCP Port:]
If [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service] is not selected at the of [Identification] (“21” in the following screen example).
[Subcomponents of Internet Information Services (IIS):] list, [Default FTP
Site] will be disabled, disabling directory settings of the FTP site hereafter.

3. Proceed with the installation procedure according to the instructions

displayed.

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-15
 IN-16
8. Click [Cancel]. 14. Enter “FTP” in [Name:], and enter the number noted down at step 7. in
[Port number:] (“21” in the following screen example).
9. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
10. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].

11. Double-click the [Windows Firewall] icon.

12. Click the [Exceptions] tab.

15. Click [OK].

13. Click [Add Port...].

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-16
 IN-17
16. Check that the checkmark of the [FTP] checkbox has been added in 17. Click the [Advanced] tab.
the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab.
<REMARKS>
18. Click [Settings] of [Network Connection Settings].
The contents of the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab of
the Windows Firewall shown below are just an example, and actual contents
displayed will differ according to the state of use of the PC for servicing (different
programs and service names may be registered).

016-201-01E
06.30.2006 FM4924
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-17
 IN-18
19. Select the checkbox of [FTP Server] of [Advanced Settings] window. 21. Click [OK] of the [Advance Settings] window.

→ This will display the [Service Settings] window.

22. Click [OK].
20. Check that host name is entered at [Name or IP address (for example
192.168.0.12) of the computer hosting this service on your network:] 23. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
then click [OK].
n Disabling Browser’s Pop-up Blocker
When the PC for servicing runs Windows XP (SP2 or later), the browser’s pop-up
blocker must be disabled.

→ Returns to the [Advanced Settings] window.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-18
 IN-19
3.2.7 How to Operate PC-Utility n Selecting Menu Command
Select PC-Utility menu, and perform equipment settings, etc.
<NOTE> 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
command name.
When PC-Utility is left unaccessed for 20 minutes after it is connected, the
equipment will terminate the Web server and disconnect PC Utility. In this case, <REMARKS>
your settings in progress will not be saved. Items marked with “+” contain sub-menu items for commands below them.
To continue your settings, etc., for PC-Utility, you must terminate Internet
Explorer and restart the Web server.

→ The command execution window appears in the upper right frame of the
window.

<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3], or command of the client settings is
selected, the setting values already set for the equipment are displayed in the
command execution window.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-19
 IN-20
n Executing Command l To Operate the Equipment

l To Change the Equipment Settings 1. To check the operation of the equipment, select/enter the operation
conditions, etc. in the command execution window, and click [Execute].
1. To change the equipment settings, select/enter the setting values in
the command execution window, and click [Execute].
<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3] is selected, scroll the command
execution window until the command is visible.

→ The equipment operates according to the operation conditions. When the

operation has completed successfully, [Command completed.] is displayed.

→ When the equipment settings have been changed successfully, [Command

completed.] is displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-20
 IN-21
l To Register A New Client 3. For equipment using main unit software version V2.2 or later, select
<REMARKS> [Add] to create clients based on default settings.

In equipment using main unit software version V2.2 or later, the client setting copy
function is added. This function copies client settings already set so that they can be
used for other clients.
In equipment using main unit software version V2.4 or later, the client list collective
editing function is provided.
{MU:4.4 [PC3-3a]_Read CLTInfo}
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
Client].
To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the
client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title].
<NOTE>
• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied
client for the new client.
• ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied.

2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title].

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-21
 IN-21.1
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-21.1
 IN-21.2
BLANK PAGE

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-21.2
 IN-22
l To Delete the Client → If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Delete Client].

2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].

3. [Execute]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-22
 IN-23
l To Change the Client Name 3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title].
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the 4. [Execute]
[Change Client Name].

2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title].

→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-23
 IN-23.1
l To Change the Client Settings → The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
name of the client whose settings is to be changed.

2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].

3. [Execute]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-23.1
 IN-23.2
4. Change the client settings.
5. [Execute]

→ The client settings is changed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-23.2
 IN-24
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts n Example of Embedding Procedure
To secure the equipment on the table, or secure the cart on the floor with fixtures, CAUTION
embed the anchor nuts beforehand.
Wear a protective goggle when using a drill.
n Position of the Anchor Nuts to Be Enbedded
<NOTE>
l Position of the Equipment Fixture Bracket (4 Positions) Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.

l Drilling Holes for Embedding Anchor Nuts

l Embedding Anchor Nuts

<NOTE>
• Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
l Position of the Cart Fixture Bracket (2 positions) • Ensure that nut is so positioned that the bolt end slightly protrudes from it
when the bracket is mounted.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-24
 IN-25
3.4 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The DRYPIX 2000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
3.4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) customer or the user of the DRYPIX 2000 should assure that it is used in such an environment.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
devices to the IEC 60601-1-2: 1994 (up to 29999), IEC 60601-1-2: 2001 (after 30001),
RF emissions The DRYPIX 2000 uses RF energy only for its
Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC. CISPR 11 internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful Group 1
are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in a typical medical installation. interference in nearby electronic equipment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference RF emissions
Class A
CISPR 11
to other devices in the vicinity. The DRYPIX 2000 is suitable for use in all
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular Harmonic emissions establishments other than domestic and those
Class A
installation. IEC 61000-3-2 directly connected to the public low-voltage
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be power supply network that supplies buildings
Voltage fluctuations/ used for domestic purposes.
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to flicker emissions Complies
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures; IEC 61000-3-3
• Reorient or relocate the receiving device.
• Increase the separation between the equipment.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
other device(s) are connected.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.

n Further information for IEC 60601-1-2: 2001

• Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs
to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as
follows.
• Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
equipment.
• The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
immunity of the DRYPIX 2000.

Name FUJIFILM parts code General specification

I/F Cable - TIA/EIA-568 Cat5 or more.
Straight cable of UTP type.

• The DRYPIX 2000 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the DRYPIX 2000 should be observed to
verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.

016-201-03E
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-25
 IN-26
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The DRYPIX 2000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The The DRYPIX 2000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the DRYPIX 2000 should assure that it is used in such an environment. customer or the user of the DRYPIX 2000 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level environment - test test level level
guidance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
Electrostatic discharge ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be equipment should be used no closer to any
(ESD) ±4kV contact wood, concrete or ce- IEC 61000-4-6 150kHz - part of the DRYPIX 2000, including cables,
±8kV air ±6kV contact ramic tile. 80MHz than the recommended separation distance
IEC 61000-4-2 If floors are covered calculated from the equation applicable to the
±2kV air with synthetic materi- frequency of the transmitter.
±4kV air al, the relative humid-
±8kV air ity should be at least Recommended separation distance
30%.
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 Vrms d = 1.2
Electrical fast ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
transient/burst IEC lines lines should be that of a IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz - d = 1.2 80 MHz - 800 MHz
±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or 2.5GHz
61000-4-4 lines lines hospital environment. d = 2.3 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality where P is the maximum output power rat-
should be that of a ing of the transmitter in watts (W) according
±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
hospital environment. recommended separation distance in metres
(m).
Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) should be that of a
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
as determined by an electromagnetic site
power supply input hospital environment.
survey,a should be less than the compliance
lines 40 % UT 40 % UT If the user of the
level in each frequency range.b
(60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) DRYPIX 2000 re-
IEC 61000-4-11 for 5 cycles for 5 cycles quires continued op-
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
eration during power
equipment marked with the following symbol:
70 % UT 70 % UT mains interruptions,
(30% dip inUT) (30% dip in UT) it is recommended
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles that the DRYPIX 2000
be powered from an
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT uninterruptible power
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) supply or a battery.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
for 5 s for 5 s
fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency mag- a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) tele-
(50/60 Hz) magnetic netic fields should be
phones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broad-
field at levels characteristic
cast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environ-
of a typical location in
ment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If
IEC 61000-4-8 a typical commercial
the measured field strength in the location in which the DRYPIX 2000 is used exceeds the
or hospital environ-
applicable RF compliance, the DRYPIX 2000 should be observed to verify normal operation.
ment.
If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reori-
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level. enting or relocating the DRYPIX 2000.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-26
 IN-27
Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment and the DRYPIX 2000
The DRYPIX 2000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the DRYPIX 2000 can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile
RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the DRYPIX 2000 as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
output power of m
transmitter
W 150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz
d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separa-
tion distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency
of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range ap-
plies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-27
 IN-28
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION 4.2 Unpacking and Unloading

4.2.1 Equipment Main Body

4.1 Carrying
1. Cut the band and remove the cardboard box.
CAUTION
When moving the equipment over any bumps, move it slowly to avoid shock. 2. Cut the band and remove the protective material covering the
equipment main body.

1. Clear the delivery path of the equipment and carry the equipment to
the installation site.
To ensure that the equipment can be carried out safely to the installation
site, move any obstacle out of the way at the delivery entrance, in corridors
and corners. Also make sure that the elevator is made available to move the
equipment.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-28

3. Remove the separately packaged items.
4. Remove the equipment from the vinyl.
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
IN-29
<INSTRUCTIONS>
The weight of this equipment is approximately 41 kg for one magazine
specifications, and 55 kg for two magazine specifications, with the magazine
removed. Take the following precautions when moving the equipment, etc.
• To prevent injuries resulting in back pain, pay attention to your posture during
the work.
• Be careful not to drop the equipment as this may cause serious injuries.
• Remove the magazine when lifting the equipment.
• The equipment should be lifted by more than one persons in front and more
than one persons at the back. When lifting by two persons, each person
should stand on the left and right side each. As the center of gravity of the
equipment is inclined towards the back, it may turn over or fall.
• When lifting up the equipment, lift at the position shown in the following
figure, hook fingers to the equipment firmly and then lift.
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-29
 IN-30
4.2.2 Sheet-feeder Unit (Option) 3. Cut the band, and remove the protective material covering the
equipment.
1. Remove the separately packaged parts from the box.
2. Remove the sheet-feeder unit together with the inner box.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-30
 IN-31
4.2.3 Cart (Option)

1. Unpack the “Assembly Manual” and cart from the shipping carton.
4.2.4 Magazine (Option)

1. Unpack the magazine and accessories from the shipping carton.

4.2.5 Expanded Memory Board (Option)

1. Unpack the expanded memory board from the shipping carton.

4.2.6 Mounting Accessory Kit (Option)

1. Unpack the mounting accessory kit from the shipping carton.

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-31
 IN-32
4.3 Checking Components n Options
In accordance with the PACKING LIST contained in each carton box, check to ensure No. Product Code Parts No. Remarks
that the contents of the installation package comply with the LIST. DPX 2000 MAGAZINE Large Magazine 819Y100001
The service personnel should always retain the Inspection Data Sheet. LE

n Equipment Main Body DPX 2000 MAGAZINE Small Magazine 819Y100002 Initial setting:
SE 26x36 cm size
Name Qty. Remarks
DPX 2000 10x12 KIT E 25x30 cm size film kit 898Y100173 -
Equipment main body 1
DPX 2000 FEEDER E Sheet-feeder unit 810Y0234 Without magazine

n Accessories DPX 2000 1GB MEM E Expanded frame buffer 102N100002 1GB
memory
No. Name Qty. Remarks DPX 2000 MBL KIT E Mounting accessory kit 898Y100007 For mobile type
1 Fuse 2 2A
DPX 2000 CART E Cart - -
2 Fuse 2 3.2A
DPX 2000 AC CORD Power cable for U.S.A. 136N0427 Common to IR362
3 Fuse 2 5A UL E (Hospital grade)
4 Cutter 1 DPX 2000 AC CORD Power cable for EU 136N0377 Common to IR346
5 Holder 2 For setting cleaning roller EU E
(Spare when damaged)
DPX 2000 AC CORD Power cable for U.K. 136N0450 Common to DRYPIX
FD 1 Individual data FD UK E 4000
6
FD 1 Head data FD
l Large Magazine (35x43 cm size)
7 CD 1 Main unit software CD-R
8 Inspection data sheet 1 No. Name Qty. Remarks

9 Operation manual 2 1 Magazine 1

10 Label 1 Main power switch OFF caution label 2 Label 1 Film size label

l Small Magazine (26x36/20x25 cm size)

<REMARKS>
The name label (10) is provided from equipment shipped in April 2007 onwards. No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Magazine 1
2 Label 1 Film size label
3 Guide 4 Large
4 Guide 4 Small

l 25x30 cm Size Film Kit

No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Guide 4 Large
2 Label 1 Film size label

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-32
 IN-33
l Sheet-feeder Unit l Expanded Frame Buffer Memory
No. Name Qty. Remarks No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Sheet-feeder unit main body 1 1 Expanded memory board 1 1 GB
2 Cover 1
l Mounting Accessory Kit
3 Cover 1
4 Cover 1 No. Name Qty. Remarks

5 Vertical conveyor guide assy 1 1 Bracket 2

6 Gear assy 1 2 Washer 4

7 Bracket 1 3 Bolt 4

8 Bracket 1 4 Special screw 4

9 Bracket 1 5 Washer 4

10 Bracket 1 6 Spring washer 4

11 Bracket 1 7 Tape 2

12 Roller 1 8 Tape 4

13 Bearing 1 9 Cap 4

14 Bearing 1
15 Gear 1
16 TP3x6 26
17 DT3x6 6
18 Code clamp 5
19 Bracket 2 Positioning plate (With arrow labels/ For
equipment main body)
(Interchangeable pair)
20 Bracket 1 Positioning plate L (With arrow label/ For
sheet-feeder unit)
21 Bracket 1 Positioning plate R (With arrow label/ For
sheet-feeder unit)
22 Gear assy 1 Four-gear assy
23 Guide 4

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-33
 IN-34
5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES 2. Open the head cover, and remove the tape.
AND ASSEMBLING/INSTALLING <NOTE>
As the tape (A) shown in the figure cannot be removed completely at this
OPTIONS point, peel off only the portions securing the upper cover.

5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures (Tape)

5.1.1 Equipment Main Body

1. Remove the tape and cushioning material fixing the cover and
extension tray.

3. Open the head assembly, and remove the tape.

4. Close the head assembly.

5. Close the head cover.
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-34
 IN-35
5.1.2 Sheet-feeder Unit 5.1.3 Magazine

1. Remove the tape securing the cover of sheet-feeder unit and buffer
material.
1. Remove the tape securing the magazine shutter, and open/close the
removal side shutter with the hand for more than two times.
<NOTE>
As the shutter will be tight immediately after unpacking, operating the
equipment in this state may damage the shutter open/close mechanism at
the equipment side.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-35
 IN-35.1
5.2 Assembling of Cart 5.3 Temporary Installation onto Cart
Perform this procedure only when the equipment main body is to be installed on the Perform this procedure only when the equipment main body is to be installed on the
cart. cart.

1. Assemble the cart according to the “Assembly Manual” of the cart. 1. Lift the equipment main body and place it on the cart top.
<NOTE>
Ensure that the four rubber feet of the equipment main body fit into the
bosses on the cart top.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-35.1
 IN-35.2
BLANK PAGE

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-35.2
 IN-36
5.4 Installing Equipment Fixtures 3. Remove the brackets ( ) from the mounting accessory kit, and install
one of them by inserting its pins to the bottom of the equipment.
Perform this procedure when fixing the equipment on a table at the installation site or
mounting it in a vehicle.

5.4.1 When Installing Only Equipment Main Body

1. Lift the equipment main body, and place it on a steady surface such as
a tabletop.

2. Move the equipment only enough to let the two rubber feet on the
front come off the tabletop.

CAUTION
Be sure not let the equipment fall from the table.

4. Remove the screws fixing the rubber feet via the holes on the
brackets.

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-36
 IN-37
5. Secure the bracket using the washers ( ) and B4x25 screws ( ) 6. Turn the equipment around, and install the other bracket on the rear
included in the mounting accessory kit. side.
<REMARKS>
When installing the rear bracket, ensure that it is oriented in the same direction
as the front one.

7. Move the equipment to a stable position.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-37
 IN-38
5.4.2 When Installing the Equipment with the Sheet-feeder 3. Remove the brackets ( ) from the mounting accessory kit, and install
Unit one of them by inserting its pins to the bottom of the sheet-feeder
unit.
1. Lift the sheet-feeder unit, and place it on a steady surface such as a
tabletop.

2. Move the equipment only enough to let the two rubber feet on the
front of the sheet-feeder unit come off the tabletop.

CAUTION
Be sure not let the sheet-feeder unit fall from the table.

4. Remove the screws fixing the rubber feet via the holes on the
brackets.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-38
 IN-39
5. Secure the bracket using the washers ( ) and B4x25 screws ( ) 6. Turn the sheet-feeder unit around, and install the other bracket on the
included in the mounting accessory kit. rear side.
<REMARKS>
When installing the rear bracket, ensure that it is oriented in the same direction
as the front one.

7. Move the sheet-feeder unit to a stable position.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-39
 IN-40
5.5 Affixing the Car-mounting Tape
When mounting this equipment in a vehicle, affix the tape for protecting the cover from
being scraped away due to vibration.

1. Open the head cover.

2. Affix the tapes supplied in the mounting accessory kit ( and ) at
the positions shown below.

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-40
 IN-41
5.6 Installing the Sheet-feeder Unit to the 3. Remove the rear cover and rear open/close cover from the equipment
main body.
Equipment Main Body
Place the equipment main body on the sheet-feeder unit. Perform this procedure only
when the sheet-feeder unit is installed to the equipment main body.

1. When there is the optional cart available, perform the procedure with
the equipment main body placed on the cart.
{IN5.3_Temporary Installation onto Cart}

2. Remove the cover from the equipment main body.

<NOTE>
To remove the upper cover, release the hooks shown in the figure below by
pressing the points indicated by the arrows, and then lift the upper cover
upward and rearward.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-41
 IN-42
4. Install the two brackets ( ) to the equipment main body. 5. When there is the cart available, place the sheet-feeder unit ( ) on
the cart.
<NOTE>
Ensure that the four rubber feet of the sheet-feeder unit fit into the bosses
on the cart top.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-42

6. Install the brackets (
, ) to the sheet-feeder unit (
IN-43
). 7. Open the lower rear open/close cover of the sheet-feeder unit.
CAUTION
The lower rear open/close cover may become damaged if it is kept closed while
an attempt is made to place the equipment main body on the sheet-feeder unit.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-43
 IN-44
8. Place the equipment main body so that the arrows on the positioning 9. Make the pin on left rear of the equipment main body contact the side
brackets are roughly aligned. panel of the sheet-feeder unit.

10. Remove the four brackets from the equipment main body and the
sheet-feeder unit.
<NOTE>
The removed the six screws will be used again in step 10.

<NOTE>
There should be an approximately 10 mm clearance between the brackets
of the equipment main body and those of the sheet-feeder unit.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-44
 IN-45
11. Secure the equipment main body to the sheet-feeder unit using the
brackets ( , , ).
<NOTE>
Do not install the front-left bracket now. It will be installed in step 22.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-45

12. Install the gear assy(
IN-46
). 14. Close the lower rear open/close cover.
15. Install the bearing ( ).
<REMARKS>
For ease of installation of the bearing ( ), manually move the film positioning
reference plates inward.
After the bearing is installed, move the film positioning reference plates fully
outward.

13. Install the four guides ( ).

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-46
 IN-47
16. Install the roller ( ), bearing ( ) and gear ( ). 17. Install the vertical conveyor guide assy ( ).

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-47
 IN-47.1
18. Install the gear assy ( ). 19. Disconnect the jumper connector from the equipment main body.
Connect the connector (CNSK21) from the sheet-feeder unit to the
<REMARKS>
equipment.
The screw to be removed in #1 is a screw that originally exists there to secure the
component inside the equipment main body. <NOTE>
At this point, the connector (CNS21) on the sheet-feeder unit is
disconnected but should be left so until it is connected in step 21.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-47.1
 IN-47.2
20. Install the bracket ( ). 22. Install the bracket ( ) to the front-left side of the equipment main
body.

21. Connect the connector (CNS21) and secure the cable with the clamp.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-47.2
 IN-47.3
23. Install the covers ( , , ) of the sheet-feeder unit.

24. Install the covers of the equipment main body.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-47.3
 IN-47.4
BLANK PAGE

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-47.4
 IN-48
5.7 Exchanging the Image Memory Board 3. Remove the 512 MB image memory board from the CPU board.
At shipment, a 512 MB image memory board is installed. Perform the following
procedure to exchange to 1 GB.
4. Insert the 1 GB image memory board into the CPU board slot.
<NOTE>
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of • When installing an image memory board, ensure that the notched side
boards. Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic faces rearward.
parts on the boards. • Insert until the image memory board is secured by the hooks on both
sides of the slot.

1. Remove the upper cover, front cover and ejection cover.

2. Remove the control box upper cover.

5. Reinstall the ejection cover, front cover and upper cover.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-48
 IN-49
5.8 Setting Magazines 5.8.1 Affixing the Film Size Label
Though this equipment can hold up to two magazines concurrently, one magazine can 1. Paste the label of the film size used on the magazine.
be set to any of seven types (Magazine 1 to Magazine 7) by changing the installed
position of the actuator. Each magazine is set to one of Magazine 1 to Magazine 7
according to the actuator position.
As will be described in “7.2 System Settings”, the user can allocate desired film size
to a particular magazine by selecting a magazine number determined by the actuator
position.
Once a magazine is assigned a magazine number by installing the actuator and the
corresponding film size are set via the relevant software, the magazine can be set to
this equipment for use on a random basis.
Detailed in this section are the following three procedures.
5.8.1 Affixing the film size label
5.8.2 Installing the film positioning guides according to the desired film size
5.8.3 Confirming/changing the actuator’s installed position according to the desired
magazine number
<NOTE>
Software settings will be required also for extra magazines if any exist on
your installation site. Without these settings, extra magazines cannot be used.
Confirm the film size for the extra magazines.
{IN:7.2.1_Configuration Setting/n Setting the Film Size}

<REMARKS>
The following are the default settings of option magazines.
• Large size magazine (35x43)
(1) Guide installed: None
(2) Actuator installed: At the “Magazine Number 1” position
• Small size magazine (26x36/20x25)
(1) Guide installed: None (Guide for 20x25 is supplied with the magazine)
(2) Actuator installed: At the “Magazine Number 2” position

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-49

5.8.2 Changing the Magazine Size
1. To change the film size of small size magazines from the default of 26
x 36 cm to 20 x 25 cm or 25 x 30 cm, install the guide.
<REMARKS>
The number of guides to be attached according to the film size is as follows.
• 26x36 cm: None
• 20x25 cm: Guide (large) (for 20x25 cm size) x4,
Guide (small) (for 20x25 cm size) x4
• 25x30 cm: Guide (large) (for 25x30 cm size) x4
IN-50
5.8.3 Setting the Magazine Number
Magazine number refers to a “registration number for the equipment” assigned
exclusively to each magazine. This number is determined according to the position
where the actuator is installed on the magazine (Magazine 1 to Magazine 7). The
equipment detects the actuator position using the three film size detection sensors on
the main body, thereby identifying the magazine number.
<REMARKS>
The default magazine settings and main body software settings may prove applicable
to the user’s needs depending on how many magazines are used for what sizes.
lDefault actuator position
• Large size magazine: Position identified as “Magazine 1” when set to the equipment
• Small size magazine: Position identified as “Magazine 2” when set to the equipment

lDefault software settings

• Magazine 1: 35x43/Blue • Magazine 2: 26x36/Blue
• Magazine 3: 20x25/Blue • Magazine 4: 25x30/Blue
• Magazine 5 to Magazine 7: Not in use
Thus, there is no need to change the magazine settings (“5.6.1” to “5.6.3”) and
magazine-related software settings (described later) from the default if the number of
magazines for the equipment is as follows:
• 1 magazine set for [35x43/Blue]
(with or without an extra magazine for [26x36Blue])....................... Total 2 magazines
• 1 magazine set for [26x36/Blue]
(with or without an extra magazine for [35x43Blue]) ...................... Total 2 magazines
• 2 magazines for [35x43/Blue] and [26x36/Blue].............................. Total 2 magazines
For the 20x25 film size, the [Software settings] (described later) is not required if the
magazine is set as follows:
The software setting “Magazine 3” is 20x25/Blue by default.
• Install the guides at the 20x25 positions.
• For a small size magazine, change the actuator position to the position for “Magazine
3” from its default position for “Magazine 2”.

<NOTE>
Even when the same size is used for multiple magazines, each magazine
number must be unique. Therefore, the actuator positions must be changed
accordingly.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-50
 IN-51
1. Set the magazine number by changing the installed position of the l Removing Actuator
magazine identification actuator.
<NOTE>
Do not duplicate actuator positions among multiple magazines. This
will cause the same magazine number to be duplicated among multiple
magazines, thus disabling the software settings described later.

l Installing Actuator

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-51
 IN-52
n Actuator Installing Position Corresponded to Magazine
Number

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-52
 IN-53
6. CONNECTING CABLES 2. Connect the network cable to the network cable connector.
<NOTE>

6.1 Connecting the Network Cable Use the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T cable (UTP or STP) for the
network cable.

CAUTION <REMARKS>
• Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this
STP: Shielded type
equipment. Only IEC60950/UL60950 specification cables are suitable for
UTP: Unshielded type
connection to this connector.
• At this time, do not connect to the network device.
When performing system settings of the equipment, prevent external
intrusions which may interfere with network security by rebooting only the
3. Secure the network cable with the clamp.
equipment after completing various settings and then connecting to the
network equipment.

1. Check that the main power switch of the equipment is at OFF position
(O).

<NOTE>
At this point, simply connect a network cable to the equipment, but do not
connect the other end to the on-site network.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-53
 IN-54
6.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking 1. Connect the power cable to the equipment.
the Resistance CAUTION
Do not connect the power plug to the outlet at this point.
n Power Cable Information
<NOTE> 2. Secure the power cable with the clamp.
If the power cable is not packed together with the equipment, be sure to use a
power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.

l For U.S. and Canada

• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
• Hospital-grade Type Plug
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
• Cable type: SJT

l For Europe
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
• Cable type: H05VV-F

CAUTION
If the eqiupment is to be installed in the patient environment, see “APPENDIX 1
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING”
{IN:APPENDIX 1_ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING}

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-54
 IN-55
3. Set the main power switch of the equipment to ON ( I ).
4. Using the tester, measure the resistance between the terminals of the
power plug or power cable.

Terminal L-N L-E N-E

Resistance 300 kΩ or more 9 MΩ or more 9 MΩ or more

5. Set the main power switch of the equipment to OFF (O).

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-55
 IN-56
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT 4. Press the power switch on the operation panel.
→ The startup screen appears on the message display.

7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility

Start the equipment and start the M-Utility.

7.1.1 Setting the Magazine and Powering ON

1. Insert into the slot the empty magazine set up in “5.8 Setting
Magazines”. For a 2 magazine setup, both slots must be occupied.

2. Connect the power plug to the outlet.

3. Set the main power switch on the equipment to ON position ( I ).
→ The power lamp on the operation panel lights up. The equipment will not have
started up at this point.
<NOTE>
Normally, leave the main power switch at ON.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-56
 IN-57
7.1.2 Starting the M-Utility
When installing the equipment, the date and system parameters need to be set.
Use M-Utility to set these.

1. After turning ON the power of the equipment, the startup screen will
be displayed for about 1 minute and 10 seconds, after which the
software version number will be displayed for about 15 seconds.
Press the <CANCEL> key for about two seconds until you hear a blip
while pressing the <UP> key while this software version number is
displayed.
<NOTE>
Pressing the keys after the software version number disappears is invalid.
If M-Utility cannot be started during initialization, wait until the equipment
has completed starting up or restart the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-57
 IN-58
7.2 System Settings 5. Select the value with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
<ENTER> key to confirm.
Using M-Utility, perform the system settings of the equipment.
→ Pressing the <ENTER> key moves the cursor to the right. Pressing it after
<NOTE> entering the last digit moves to [1-1-1-2-1.MM>].
The following setting items can be omitted if there is no need to change the
default equipment settings. 6. Correct the month, day, hours, minutes by performing the same
procedure as step 5.
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
All menu commands required for system settings are available via PC-Utility. The input range of [hh >] (hours) is 0 to 23.

7.2.1 Configuration Setting 7. Check the date and time.

[1-1-1-2.YYYY>]→ →[1-1-1-1.Check Date]→
n Setting the System Date and Time
Set the system date and time. 8. After completing revision of the system date and time, pressing the
1. Display [1-1-1.Set Date> ]. <CANCEL> key moves the display to the upper tree level of M-Utility.

[0.RETURN>]→ →[1.System>]→ →[1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1-1-1-1.Check Date]→ →[1-1-1.Set Date>]→ →[1-1.

Configuration>]
→[1-1-1.Set Date>]

2. Display [1-1-1-1.Check Date] and check the current value set.

[1-1-1.Set Date>]→ →[1-1-1-1.Check Date]→
→ The current system date and time are displayed.

3. Check if the system date and time are correct and press the
<CANCEL> key.

l To correct the system date and time:

Perform step 4 onwards.

l If the system date and time are correct:

Press the <CANCEL> key twice to display [1-1. Configuration] and
perform “n Setting the Film Size”.
{n Setting the Film Size}

4. [1-1-1-1.Check Date]→ →[1-1-1-2.YYYY>]→

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-58
 IN-59
n Setting the Film Size 4. With the film base color unchanged from [1.Blue], confirm the setting
Set film size for the magazine whose magazine number has been determined by by pressing the <ENTER> key.
actuator installed position in “5.8 Setting Magazines”. • [1.Blue]
<DEFAULT> → “Completed.” is displayed.
• Magazine 1: 35x43/Blue 5. →[1-1-2-X.MagazineX>]
• Magazine 2: 26x36/Blue
• Magazine 3: 20x25/Blue 6. If there are several magazines, repeat steps 2 to 5, and set the film
• Magazine 4: 25x30/Blue used for all magazines.
• Magazine 5 to Magazine 7: Not in use
7. After completing the setting film sizes of all magazines, move the
display to the upper tree level of M-Utility.
<REMARKS>
If the default film size settings are used as is, skip this setting and perform “n Setting →[1-1-2.Set Magazines>]→ →[1-1.Configuration>]
Whther Sheet-feeder Unit is Present” onwards.
{n Setting Whether Sheet-feeder Unit is Present}

1. Select [1-1-2. Set Magazines>].

[1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1-1-1.Set Date>]→ →[1-1-2.Set

Magazines>]→

2. Select the magazine number.

[1-1-2-1.Magazine1>]→ →[1-1-2-X.MagazineX>] (X indicates

the number from 1 to 7)→

3. Select whether to use the selected magazine number and the film
size with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the <ENTER> key to
confirm.
• [1.35x43>]
• [2.26x36>]
• [3.25x30>]
• [4.20x25>]
• [5.Not in use>]
→ The film size is updated and the screen moves to [1. Blue](film base color
selection menu).

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-59
 IN-60
n Setting Whether Sheet-feeder Unit is Present n Setting QC Function
Set whether the sheet-feeder unit is present. Set the ON/OFF of the image QC function, the density value used for recording with
<DEFAULT> the image QC pattern of U-Utility, and set whether to enable/disable the use of “density
4” in the QC test pattern of U-Utility.
Enable <DEFAULT>

<REMARKS> • Enable QC (QC function ON/OFF setting): Disable

• SetTargetDen. (QC density value setting): Density1; 048, Density2; 120,
If the sheet-feeder unit is not installed, skip to “n Setting QC Function”. Density3; 192
{n Setting QC Function} • EnablingStep4 (Density 4 used/not used setting): Disable

1. Select [1-1-3-1.Enable Slot>]. <REMARKS>

If the image QC function is not used, skip to “n Setting the Sleep Mode”.
[1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1-1-1.Set Date>]→ →[1-1-3.Option
{n Setting the Sleep Mode}
Slot>]→ →[1-1-3-1.Enable Slot>]→
l Setting the QC Function ON/OFF
2. Select whether the sheet-feeder unit is present.
Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
1. Select [1-1-4.SetQC>].
<ENTER> key to confirm. [1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1-1-1.Set Date>]→ →[1-1-4.Set
• [1.Enable]: Sheet-feeder unit present
• [2.Disable]: No sheet-feeder unit QC>]→
→ The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed.
2. Select [1-1-4-1.Enable QC>].
3. →[1-1-3-1.Enable Slot>]
[1-1-4-1.Enable QC>]→
4. Move the display to the upper tree level of M-Utility.
[1-1-3-1.Enable Slot>]→ →[1-1-3.Option Slot>]→ →[1-1.
3. Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
<ENTER> key to confirm.
Configuration>] • [1.Enable]
• [2.Disable]
→ The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed.

4. →[1-1-4-1.Enable QC>].

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-60

l Setting the QC Density Value
5. Display [1-1-4-2.Set Tgt.Den.>].
[1-1-4-1.Enable QC>]→
IN-61
n Setting the Sleep Mode
Set the time value for this equipment to shift to sleep mode.
<DEFAULT>
→[1-1-4-2.Set Tgt.Den.>]→ 0 (No transition to sleep mode)

6. Select the density step “Density1”. <REMARKS>

[1.Magazine1>]→ →[1.Density1>]→ If the sleep mode is not used, skip to “n Setting Whether to Use 17-Steps Pattern”.
{n Setting Whether to Use 17-Steps Pattern}
7. Enter the density value to be applied to the density step. Select the
value with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the <ENTER> key to 1. Select [1-1-8.Ele Save Mode>].
confirm.
→ The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed. [1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1-1-1.Set Date>]→ →[1-1-8.Ele

8. →[1.Density1>]→ →[2.Density2>] Save Mode>]→

9. Enter the density values for “Density 2” and “Density 3” by performing 2. Select [1-1-8-1.Transit.Time>].
the same procedure.
[1-1-8-1.Transit. Time>]→
10. If there are several magazines, check the density of all magazines.
l Setting Whether to Use Density 4 3. Select the timer value for shifting to sleep mode.
Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
11. Select [1-1-4-3.Printing Dmax>]. <ENTER> key to confirm.
• [0]: No transition to sleep mode
→ →[1.Magazine1>]→ →[1-1-4-2.Set Tgt.Den.>]→
• [15]: Transitions to sleep mode after 15 minutes
→[1-1-4-3.Printing Dmax>]→ • [30]: Transitions to sleep mode after 30 minutes
• [45]: Transitions to sleep mode after 45 minutes
12. Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the → The set value is updated and the screen returns to [1-1-8-1. Transit.Time>].
<ENTER> key to confirm.
4. Move the display to the upper tree level of M-Utility.
• [1.Enable]
• [2.Disable] [1-1-8-1.Transit. Time>]→ →[1-1-8.Ele Save Mode>]→ →[1-1.
→ The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed. Configuration>]
13. →[1-1-4-3.Printing Dmax>]

14. Move the display to the upper tree level of M-Utility.

→[1-1-4.Set QC>]→ →[1-1.Configuration>]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-61
 IN-62
n Setting Whether to Use 17-Steps Pattern n Setting Whether to Use SMPTE Pattern
Set whether to enable setting of the test print of the 17-steps pattern at [Test Pattern] Set whether to enable setting of the test print of the SMPTE pattern at [Test Pattern] of
of U-Utility. U-Utility.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
Disable Disable

<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
If the 17-steps pattern is not used, skip to“n Setting Whether to Use SMPTE Pattern”. If the SMPTE pattern is not used, skip to “7.2.2 Operation Panel Settings”.
{n Setting Whether to Use SMPTE Pattern} {IN:7.2.2_Operation Panel Settings}

1. Select [1-1-9.User 17-Steps>]. 1. Select [1-1-10.User SMPTE>].

[1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1-1-1.Set Date>]→ →[1-1-9.User [1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1-1-1.Set Date>]→ →[1-1-10.User

17-Steps>]→ SMPTE>]→

2. Select whether to enable selection 17-steps pattern. Select the 2. Select whether to enable selection SMPTE pattern. Select the
parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the <ENTER> parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the <ENTER>
key to confirm. key to confirm.
• [1.Enable] • [1.Enable]
• [2.Disable] • [2.Disable]
→ The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed. → The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed.

3. →[1-1-9.User 17-Steps>] 3. →[1-1-10.User SMPTE>]

4. Move the display to the upper tree level of M-Utility. 4. Move the display to the upper tree level of M-Utility.
[1-1-9.User 17-Steps>]→ →[1-1.Configuration>] [1-1-10.User SMPTE>]→ →[1-1.Configuration>]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-62
 IN-63
7.2.2 Operation Panel Settings n Setting the Alarm Volume
Set the alarm volume.
n Setting the Alarm
<DEFAULT>
Set the alarm sounding method.
MEDIUM
<DEFAULT>
PULSE
1. Select [1-3-2.Alarm Volume>].
1. Select [1-3-1.Alarm Sound>]. [1-3-1.Alarm Sound>]→ →[1-3-2.Alarm Volume>]→

[1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1-3.Set Panel>]→ →[1-3-1.Alarm 2. Select the alarm volume.

Sound>]→ Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
<ENTER> key to confirm.
2. Select the alarm sounding method. • [1.HIGH]
• [2.MEDIUM]
Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
• [3.LOW]
<ENTER> key to confirm.
→ The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed.
• [1.OFF]: No alarm sound
• [2.PULSE]: Alarm stops after sounding for three seconds 3. →[1-3-2.Alarm Volume>]
• [3.ON]: Alarm is sounded
→ The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed.

3. →[1-3-1.Alarm Sound>]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-63
 IN-64
n Setting the Display Language n Setting Size Type
Set the language displayed on the operation panel. Command for setting the unit for displaying film size on the operation panel.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
English CM

1. Select [1-3-3.Language>]. 1. Select [1-3-4.Size Type>].

[1-3-3.Language>]→ → [1-3-4.Size Type>] →
[1-3-2.Alarm Volume>]→ →[1-3-3.Language>]→

2. Select the display language. 2. Select the display method. Select the parameter with <UP> key/
<DOWN> key, and press the <ENTER> key to confirm.
Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the ・ [1.CM]: Displayed in cm
<ENTER> key to confirm. ・ [2.INCH]: Displayed in inch
• [1.Japanese] → The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed.
• [2.English]
→ The set value is updated and “Completed.” is displayed.
3. →[1-3-4.Size Type>]
3. →[1-3-3.Language>] 4. Move the display to the upper tree level of M-Utility.
[1-3-4.Size Type>]→ →[1-3.Set Panel>]

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-64
 IN-65
7.2.3 Network Settings n Setting Self AE Title
This section describes various network connection settings for this equipment. Setting the printer name used for DICOM communication.
CAUTION <DEFAULT>
Perform the following network settings without connecting the equipment to the DRYPIX
network.
Connect after completing settings and rebooting the equipment. If network
settings have been performed, the security will be vulnerable temporarily. 1. Select [1-1-7.Set Network>].
[1-3.Set Panel>]→ →[1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1-1-1.Set
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network Date>]→ →[1-1-7.Set Network>]→
administrator of the installation site.

<REMARKS>
2. Select [1-1-7-1-1. AE-title>].
The following table shows 20h to 7Eh characters of the 1-byte code table. [1-1-7-1.DICOM>]→ →[1-1-7-1-1.AE-title>]→
In the utility of this equipment, pressing the <UP> key moves the character entered
from the top left to right of the table. The SP in the table means space. 3. Enter the AE Title (16 digits) set to the equipment.
Alphabets/Numerals Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
SP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N <ENTER> key to confirm.
O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c <REMARKS>
d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r • If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, enter “←” to set as the
s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 end of the character string. In this case, spaces will be set for the remaining
7 8 9
number of digits.
• The following are not accepted.
Symbols
• All spaces
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + - . / :
• Space for the first digit
< = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ← • The characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbol characters
within 20h to 7Eh of the 1-byte code table.

→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed. If it is not
displayed, recheck the entered values.

4. →[1-1-7-1-1.AE-title>].

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-65
 IN-66
n Setting the Port Number n Setting the IP Address
Set the port number of the TCP communication used for DICOM communication. Set the IP address of this equipment.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
0000017238 172.016.001.030

1. Select [1-1-7-1-2.Port No.>]. 1. Select [1-1-7-2-1.IP Address>].

[1-1-7-1-1.AE-title>]→ →[1-1-7-1-2.Port No.>]→ [1-1-7-1-2.Port No.>]→ →[1-1-7-1.DICOM>]→ →[1-1-7-2.

2. Enter the port number (decimal/5 digits) set to the equipment. NETWORK>]→ →[1-1-7-2-1.IP Address>]→

Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
<ENTER> key to confirm.
2. Enter the IP address (decimal) set to the equipment.
Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
<NOTE> <ENTER> key to confirm.
As the following port number is reserved, it cannot be set.
<REMARKS>
• 20051: Port used by PC for servicing
• 21: FTP port Input range: 000 to 255
• The following are not accepted.
<REMARKS> • “000.000.000.000”
• “255.255.255.255”
Input range: 0 to 65535 • No value is entered.
→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered
→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed. If it is not
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed. If it is not
displayed, recheck the entered values.
displayed, recheck the entered values.
3. →[1-1-7-1-2.Port No.>]
3. →[1-1-7-2-1.IP Address>]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-66
 IN-67
n Setting the Subnet Mask n Setting the Host Name
Set the subnet mask of this equipment. Set the host name of this equipment used for TCP communication.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
255.255.000.000 fujiprinter

1. Select [1-1-7-2-2.Sub Net mask>]. 1. Select [1-1-7-2-3.Host name>].

[1-1-7-2-1.IP Address>]→ →[1-1-7-2-2.Sub Net mask>]→ [1-1-7-2-2.Sub Net mask>]→ →[1-1-7-2-3.Host name>]→

2. Enter the subnet mask (decimal) set to the equipment. 2. Enter the host name (maximum 16 digits) set to the equipment.
Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the Select the character with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
<ENTER> key to confirm. <ENTER> key to confirm.
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
• Input range: 000 to 255 • The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower
• Out of input range if no value is input. cases), numbers, and hyphen “-”.
• If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, enter “←” to set as the
→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered end of the character string.
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed. If it is not • The following are unaccepted.
displayed, recheck the entered values. • Space

3. →[1-1-7-2-2.Sub Net mask>]

• Less than 2 characters
• First character is a number.

→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed. If it is not
displayed, recheck the entered values.

3. →[1-1-7-2-3.Host name>]

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-67
 IN-68
n Setting the Gateway Address 7.3 Ending System Settings
Set the gateway address of this equipment. Rebooting the equipment enables various system settings changed.
<DEFAULT>
000.000.000.000（None）
1. End the M-Utility.
[1-1-7-2-4.Gateways.>]→ →[1-1-7-2.NETWORK>]→ →[1-1-7.Set
1. Select [1-1-7-2-4.Gateways.>]. Network>]→ →[1-1.Configuration>]→ →[1.System>]→
[1-1-7-2-3.Host name>]→ →[1-1-7-2-4.Gateways.>]→
→[0.RETURN>]→ →[Are you sure?]→
2. Enter the gateway address (decimal) set to the equipment. → The M-Utility ends.
Select the parameter with the <UP> key/<DOWN> key and press the
<ENTER> key to confirm.
2. Press the power switch until you hear a blip.
[Shut down? YES= NO=x] →
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 000 to 255 → The equipments sets in the system termination process and the power goes
• If no value is entered, it will be taken as outside the input range. OFF.
• Outside input range: “255.255.255.255” 3. After more than 5 seconds, turn ON the power switch again.
• If no value is entered or “000.000.000.000” is entered, it will be taken as
incomplete setting. → The equipment reboots.
<REMARKS>
→ After the last digit is entered, pressing the <ENTER> key checks the entered Rebooting enables various system settings changed.
values. If the results are normal, “Completed.” will be displayed. If it is not
displayed, recheck the entered values.

3. →[1-1-7-2-4.Gateways.>]

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-68
 IN-69
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS 3. Push the magazine back into place.

8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction

and Conveyance Operations
Perform automatic density correction for each magazine. Check that film conveyance
operations are normal at the same time.

1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state with the magazines
inserted in the slots.

2. Pull out the magazine to the film loading position and load the film.

→ When the magazine is inserted, automatic density correction is executed, and

the 24-steps pattern is printed. The remaining film count displayed on the
operation panel is “100”.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When printing the 24-steps pattern, check that film conveyance operations
are normal.

<NOTE>
• For a 2 magazine setup, load both magazines with film and push them
back into place.
• Upon detecting that the both magazines are back in place, automatic
density correction is performed in the order of Slot1 (upper) to Slot 2
(lower). Automatic density correction will not be performed with only one
magazine present.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-69
 IN-70
8.2 Checking Density Step Dmax 3.0

The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is 1 fog
displayed on the operation panel. Check from this data that the density value is within Density should be between densities
2
the specification. of step 1 and step 3.

1. Start M-Utility. 3
Density should be between densities
of step 2 and step 4.

2. Select [4-2.Check Density>]. 4 0.30 ±0.07

5 0.48 ±0.07
[0.RETURN>]→ →[4.F.D.C.>]→ →[4-1.AUTO F.D.C.>]→ 6 0.66 ±0.07

→[4-2.Check Density>]→ 7 0.84 ±0.07

8 1.02 ±0.07
3. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, select slot 1. 9 1.20 ±0.07
10 1.38 ±0.07
[1.Slot 1]→
11 1.56 ±0.07
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the density value of each step is measured
12 1.74 ±0.07
by the density measurement section. The x100 value of the 17-steps data is
displayed on the operation panel. 13 1.92 ±0.07

4. Press the <UP> key/<DOWN> key to display the measured value of 14

15
2.10 ±0.09
2.40 ±0.11
each step, and check that they are within the reference value shown in
the following table. 16 2.70 ±0.11

5. If there are several magazines, check the density of all magazines. 17 3.00 ±0.11

6. After checking the density, move the display to the upper tree level of
M-Utility.

“Check Density” screen→ →[4-2.Check Density>]→ →

[4.F.D.C.>]

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-70
 IN-71
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for l Specified Value for Each Film Size
Image Unevenness and Scratches
Print Grid & Flat patterns, and check that the recording image format is within the
specifications shown in the following figure. Also check that there are no unevenness
and scratches on the output film.

1. Select [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>].
[4.F.D.C>] → → [3.Film Output>] → → [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>]

2. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, select slot 1.

[1.Slot1 >] →

3. Set the number of printed sheets to “One”.

[Copies=001] →
→ One sheet of Grid & Flat pattern is printed, then “Completed.” is displayed.

4. → [3-3.Grid&FlatPat.>]
5. Measure the recording image format of the film output.
{lSpecified Value for Each Film Size}

6. Check for image unevenness, scratches, etc. on the printed film.

7. If the optional sheet-feeder unit is mounted, print also from the lower
magazine (Slot 2) and check for scratches.

8. When using several film sizes, check the format of all film sizes.
(Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
A 12.0 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 9.5 ±1.0
(B’ + B”)/2 12.6 ±0.8 12.9 ±1.5 11.2 ±1.0 10.5 ±1.0
| B’ – B” | ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.1
(C + C’)/2 403.5 ±1.5 233.0 ±1.0 278.8 ±1.0 180.0 ±1.0
| C – C’ | ≤1.2 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
D, D’ 328.7 ±0.5 338.6 ±0.5 229.5 ±0.5 230.9 ±0.5
| D – D’ | ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-71
 IN-72
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function 4. Select [HIGH] for the speed.
Interlocks are provided at the rear open/close cover (SK11), head cover (SK12), and →[3.HIGH]→
rear lower open/close cover (SK21).
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening a cover while → MD11 drives.
executing M-Utility.
5. Open the head cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MD11 stops.

6. Close the head cover.

7. Drive MD11.
[2.CCW>]→ →[3.HIGH]→

Check that operating sound of the MD11 can be heard.

l Checking the Rear Open/Close Cover Interlock (SK11)

8. Open the rear open/close cover.

Check that the operating sound of the MD11 stops.

9. Close the rear open/close cover.

10. Drive MD11.
l Checking the Head Cover Interlock (SK12)
[2.CCW>]→ →[3.HIGH]→
1. Select [7-2.Motor Ope. >]. Check that operating sound of the MD11 can be heard.
[3-3.Grid&Flat Pat.]→ →[3.Film Output>]→ →[7.Check
l Checking the Lower Rear Open/Close Cover Interlock (SK21) (Only
Mech.>]→ →[7-1.Film Removing>]→ →[7-2.Motor Ope.>]→ when the sheet-feeder unit is installed)

11. Open the lower rear open/close cover.

Check that the operating sound of the MD11 stops.
2. Select [7-2-1.MD11>].
12. Close the lower rear open/close cover.
[7-2-1.MD11>]→
13. Drive MD11.
3. Select [CCW] for the rotation direction. [2.CCW>]→ →[3.HIGH]→
→[2.CCW>]→
Check that operating sound of the MD11 can be heard.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-72
 IN-73
l Stopping MD11 (Common procedure)

14. Stop MD11.

[2.CCW>]→ →[3.STOP]→
→ MD11 stops.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-73
 IN-74
8.5 Checking Fan Operations l Checking Head Cooling Fan (FANP1, FANP2)

Altogether operations of three fans need to be checked. 1. Select [8-2.Fan Operation>].

[7-2-1.MD11>]→ →[7-2.Motor Ope.>]→ →[7.Check Mech.>]→

→[8.Head Check>]→ →[8-1.Temperature>]→ →

[8-2.Fan Operation>]→

2. Set operations of the head cooling fan to “ON”.

[8-2-3.Normal Ope.>]→ →[8-2-1.ON>]→

3. Set driving voltage to “+24V”.

[1.14V]→ →[4.24V]→

4. Place the hand over the louver at the back of the head cover, and
check fan operations and wind direction.

l Checking Controller Fan (FANK1)

5. Set operations of the head cooling fan to “OFF”.

[8-2.Fan Operation>]→ →[8-2-1.ON>]→ →[8-2-2.OFF]→

6. Place hand over the vents on the right cover of the equipment, and
check fan operations and wind direction.

7. Return operations of the head cooling fan to “Normal”.

[8-2.Fan Operation>]→ →[8-2-2.OFF]→ →[8-2-3.Normal

Ope.>]→ →[1.14V]→

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-74
 IN-75
8.6 Ending the M-Utility
Now that the setting/checking procedure via operation panel at installation is complete,
end M-Utility.

1. End the M-Utility.

[8-2.Fan Operation>]→ →[8.Head Check>]→ →

[0.RETURN>]→ →[Are you sure?]→

→ The M-Utility ends.

8.7 Settings the Image QC Function

To use the image QC function, enter the format baseline value of the image QC
function.
{MU: 2.3 [5]_QC>}
<REMARKS>
Format baseline values by film size

Baseline values Established criteria

A 257.1mm ±12.9mm
35x43 cm
B 343.5mm ±17.2mm
A 257.1mm ±12.9mm
26x36 cm
B 170.8mm ±8.5mm
A 227.3mm ±11.4mm
25x30 cm
B 257.1mm ±12.9mm
A 169.1mm ±8.5mm
20x25 cm
B 227.3mm ±11.4mm

8.8 Connecting to the Network

1. Connect the network cable of this equipment to the network in the
hospital.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-75
 IN-76
9. CLIENT SETTINGS 9.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the
The client settings for this equipment are to be made by starting PC-Utility via the
Network
browser (Internet Explorer) on the PC for servicing that is connected via a network to Connect the PC for servicing to the network.
this equipment with its Web server running.
<NOTE> 1. Connect the network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to
which the equipment is connected.
When PC-Utility is left unaccessed for 20 minutes after it is connected, the
equipment will terminate the Web server and disconnect PC Utility. In this case,
your settings in progress will not be saved.
To continue your settings, etc. for PC-Utility, you must terminate Internet
Explorer and restart the Web server.

n Outline of Connection with PC for Servicing

<NOTE>
Before making these settings, you need to have completed the procedures
described in “3.2 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing”.
{IN:3.2_Work Preparations of PC for Servicing}

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-76
 IN-77
9.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the 9.3 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the
Equipment (Web Server Start) Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)
Start the Web server of the equipment. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing to the equipment.

1. Check that the power of the equipment is ON.
2. Press the <DOWN> key while pressing the <UP>key on the operation
panel for about 5 seconds until you hear a blip.
1. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.
2. Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
<ENTER> key on the key board.
http://equipment IP address:20051/USER/Login.htm
<NOTE>
When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.

→ The login screen is displayed.

→ The Web server starts on the equipment. The display on the operation panel
will not change even when the Web sever is started by the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-77
 IN-78
3. Enter the following username and password, select the language → When PC-Utility starts, [PC-UTL Executing] is displayed on the operation
panel of the equipment.
(English) and click [Login].
Login: dryprinter
Password: fujifilm

→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-78
 IN-79
9.4 System Settings via PC-Utility 9.5 Registering the PC for Servicing
System settings made via M-Utility can be modified via PC-Utility. Register the PC for servicing to enable file transfer. Any unregistered PC for servicing
Using the PC-Utility without starting M-Utility will suffice when the settings are to be is limited in function and does not support “[PC2] Transfer Indv. Data” and “[PC4] File
changed. Transfer” of PC-Utility.
<REMARKS>
DRYPIX 2000
┣ +System information and setup Only one PC for servicing can be registered. Only the one registered last supports file
┃ ┣ Setting1 transfer.
┃ ┃ ┣ Set DICOM
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Network DRYPIX 2000
┃ ┃ ┣ ******** ┣ +System information and setup
┃ ┃ ┗ ******** ┃ ┣ Setting1
┃ ┣ Setting2 ┃ ┃ ┣ ********
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Magazines ┃ ┃ ┣ ********
┃ ┃ ┣ Option Slot ┃ ┃ ┣ ********
┃ ┃ ┣ Enable QC ┃ ┃ ┗ Registration service pc
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Target Den.
┃ ┃ ┣ Printing Dmax 1. Select [Registation service PC] in the maintenance tree.
┃ ┃ ┣ ********
┃ ┃ ┣ User 17-Steps 2. In [Establish name], enter the establish name entered in “3.2.5
┃ ┃ ┣ User SMPTE Creating the Data Storage Folder”.
┃ ┃ ┗ ********
<NOTE>
┃ ┣ Setting3
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Date Use one-byte alphanumeric when entering establish name.
┃ ┃ ┣ Ele Save Mode
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Alarm 3. In [Service PC IP Address], enter the IP address of the current PC for
┃ ┃ ┣ Set Language servicing.
┃ ┃ ┗ Size Type
┃ ┗ +******** 4. [Execute]
→ The PC for servicing is registered with the equipment.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-79
 IN-80
9.6 Client Settings n Protocol
Bold: Default
Set parameters for the connected client using PC-Utility. Item Function Value
Set the items according to the corresponding client settings in “Modality Connection
List”. Attribute list error Send error message for unexpect- 0: not indicate
(0107H Warning) ed data received or ignore warn- 1: indicate
<NOTE> ing
The default values for client parameters listed below are the values for a newly N Event Report RQ Send event report or not 0: disable
registered client and differ from the default values set for “default”, “FCR-CSL”, 1: enable
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST”. Attribute Value Out Of Send error message for out-of- 0: not indicate
Range (0116H Warning) range data received or ignore 1: indicate
warning
1. Newly register the client according to the installation environment. Image Size Is Larger Than Notify that images have been 0: not indicate
imagebox reduced if too large to fit image 1: indicate
DRYPIX 2000 (B604H Warning) frame, or ignore warning
┣ +System information and setup Change Film Size Change film or not
┣ +Transfer Indv. Data
Enables film change. Can set 0: 0116H[W]
┣ +Client Configuration whether to send details of error
┃ ┣ Add Client Details of errors are sent to the 272: 0110H[F]
┃ ┣ Delete Client client, without changing film
┃ ┣ Change Client Name Details of errors (unique values 21317: 5345H[F]
┃ ┣ +Clients for FUJIFILM systems) are sent
to the client,without changing the
┃ ┃ ┣ default film
┃ ┃ ┣ FCR-CSL
Use System Timeout Set timeout of reception from cli- 0: No
┃ ┃ ┣ WatchDRYPIXLink ent or not 1: Yes
┃ ┃ ┗ QC-TEST Presentation LUT Use LUT information sent from cli- 0: No
┃ ┣ Common ent or not 1: Yes
┃ ┗ ******** Precede Picking Up Use precedent removal function 0: No
or not 1: Yes
2. Set the various parameters according to the client setting list shown Use Max/Min Density Which minimum density/maximum 0: Printer
density value is to be used. 1: Modality
below.For details of each feature, refer to “Service Mode (MU) 4.4 PC-
Utility Command Details [PC3] Client Configration”. Extension Format ID Select ID for differentiating when CR (XG-1/CR-Console)
extension format is used CR (Synapse)
{MU:4.4 [PC3]_Client Configration} EV (Philips Easy Vision)
HM (Hitachi DR2000/Clavis
view)
SM (Siemens)
Use Default Annotation Use Annotation or not 0: No
1: Yes
Change Base Color Change base color or not 0: disable
(Disable:110H[F]) 1: enable
Define Film Size of 11x14 Whether to interpret 11x14 size 0: 27.9x35.6
description as 25.7x36.4 cm or as 1: 25.7x36.4
27.9 x 35.6 cm
(The latter size is not used cur-
rently)

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-80
 IN-81
n Magnify n LUT Common
Bold: Default Bold: Default
Item Function Value Item Function Value
Default Smoothing Type Selection of smoothing type 1: Sharp Default LUT Selection of LUT number used as 1 - 8 (1)
2: Medium default
3: Smooth
Illumination Lighting 0 - 65535 (2000) *1
Default Requested Magnification/reduction setting if 1: DECIMATE
Ambient Light Reflected peripheral light 0 - 65535 (10) *1
Decimate/Crop Behavior client does not send information 2: CROP
when images are reduced 3: FAIL Configuration Information Which LUT number is to be used 0: Printer
(Default LUT#) 1: Modality
Magnification Type Set the image enlargement/reduc- 0: NONE
tion processing type 1: CUBIC Default Illumination Which lighting setting is to be 0: Printer
used 1: Modality
Requested Image Size Specify the length of line to be 0 - 7000 (0)
printed on the image for one Default Ambient Light Which reflected peripheral light is 0: Printer
frame to be used 1: Modality
Default Magnification Type Which enlargement/reduction pro- 0: Printer Procedure Selection of tone correction pro- 0: SAR
cessing type is to be used 1: Modality cessing method 1: BAR
Default Smoothing Type Which smoothing type is to be 0: Printer
used 1: Modality *1: The Illumination and Reflective Ambient Light setting value total must be less than 4000.
Default Requested Image Which Requested Image Size is 0: Printer n LUT1 to LUT8
Size to be used 1: Modality
Bold: Default
Default Decimate/Crop Which Decimate/Crop Behavior is 0: Printer
Behavior to be used 1: Modality Item Function Value
Procedure Selection of enlargement/reduc- 0: A-VR Max Density Maximum density value (x100 for 0 - 300
tion processing method 1: SSM SAR, BAR is % value) (BAR: 0 - 100) *2
Edge Detection Perform enlargement/reduction 0: OFF Min Density Minimum density value (x100 for 0 - 300 *2
processing for edge or not 1: ON SAR, No setting for BAR)
Detection Level Edge detection level setting 1 - 1023 (600/800/600) γTable No Selection of γ table number of 11 - 99 (BAR: 1 - 10)
LUT *2, *3
Sharpness Sharpness adjustment parameter -70 - 300 (130/30/80)
setting Contrast Contrast setting (x100, No setting (BAR: 10 - 400) (100)
for SAR)
Character Color Character color setting 0: White
1: Black Number of Tuning Points No. of fine adjustment points for 0 - 5 (0)
SAR
Density Setting of x100 of density value to 1 - 300 (120)
be finely adjusted
Shift Setting of x100 value of move- -100 - 100 (0)
ment density value
Contrast Setting of x 100 of contrast of 10 - 400 (100)
points to be finely adjusted

*2: The default value differs in LUT1 to LUT8.

*3: Up to 20 can be entered for BAR but enter between 1 and 10.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-81
 IN-82
n Output Format Item Function Value
Bold: Default Image Layout Setting of image layout method
Item Function Value Positioning to film center 0: concentration
Film Size Setting of default film size 1: 8x10 Center of remaining segment set 1: spread
2: 10x14 with frame interval value
4: 14x17
5: 10x12 Processing Type Setting of density processing cal- 0: Type1
culation method 1: Type2
Medium Type Setting of default film base color 1: Blue
0: Clear Image Crop UPDWN Area Specifies whether the top or bot- 0: Upper
for CR Image tom is to be trimmed from a CR 1: Lower
Film Orientation Setting of film orientation 1: PORTRAIT image that is larger than the im- 2: Both
2: LANDSCAPE age box.
Border Density Background density (x100 of ac- 0 - 300 (300) Image Crop Side Area for Specifies whether the left or right 0: Left
tual value) CR Image is to be trimmed from a CR image 1: Right
Polarity Reverse the black/white of the im- 1: Normal that is larger than the image box. 2: Both
age 2: Reverse
Trim Whether there is image trim 0: OFF n Annotation
1: ON Bold: Default
Trim Width Width of the trim (pixels) 1 - 9 (1) Item Function Value
Trim Density Image trim density (x100 of actual 0 - 300 (0) Annotation Font Setting of font type of annotation 0: Japanese
value) 1: Western
Number of Copies Default number of print copies 1 - 99 (1) Annotation Extend Setting of magnification degree 1 - 4 (1)
Print Priority Setting of print priority 1: HIGH of annotation printing area along
2: MEDIUM character height
3: LOW Upper Left/Upper Center/Up- Setting of annotation position, and
Default Number of Copies Which number of printed film is to 0: Printer per Right/Lower Left/Lower entering
be used 1: Modality Center/Lower Right
Default Print Priority Which Print Priority is to be used 0: Printer
1: Modality n Common
Bold: Default
Default Medium Type Film base color priority 0: Printer
1: Modality Item Function Value
Default Film Orientation Film orientation priority 0: Printer Data Transfer Timeout Standby time setting when data is 30 - 3600 (300)
1: Modality suspended
(Becomes error when setting time
Default Film Size Film size priority 0: Printer is exceeded)
1: Modality
Association Count Maximum number of accesses to 1 - 10 (10)
Default Border Density Which background density is to be 0: Printer the equipment at the same time
used 1: Modality by DICOM communication
Default Trim Which Trim setting is to be used 0: Printer Logging DICOM DICOM communication log level 0: none
1: Modality setting 1: normal
Defalut Polarity Which Polarity setting is to be 0: Printer 2: detail
used 1: Modality Model Printer manufacture model name DRYPIX
Mirror Setting of film back/front 0: OFF (Normal) Manufacturer Printer manufacturer name FUJIFILM Corporation
1: ON (Mirror)
Default Client Whether to use or not the [default] 0: Yes
Margin between Image Setting of image frame intervals 0 - 50 (20) setting of the [Client:] list for un- 1: No
(Unit: pixel) registered clients

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-82
 IN-83
9.7 Disconnecting the Equipment 9.8 Ending the Equipment
To reboot the equipment and enable the changed system settings, end the equipment
1. After completing settings, click [Logout] button of the maintenance once.
tree.
1. Press the power switch on the operation panel until you hear a blip.
[Shut down? YES= NO=x] →

→ The equipment starts system termination processing, and the power goes OFF.

→ The equipment performs reinitialization and [PC-UTL Executing] disappears.

→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].

2. Close the logout window.

<REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{IN:3.2.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-83
 IN-84
10. CHECKING NETWORK
CONNECTION

10.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment

1. Press the power switch on the operation panel.
2. Check that the equipment starts up.
10.2 Checking Film Output and Images from
Connected Equipment
1. Ask the user to output images from a device on the network connected
to this equipment, and check that films are output normally.
Check the following.
• Images are output without errors.
• Images are normal.

10.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment

1. Press the power switch on the operation panel until you hear a blip.
[Shut down? YES= NO=x ]→

2. Check that the equipment starts termination operations and its power
goes OFF.

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-84
 IN-85
11. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT 4. Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
<ENTER> key on the key board.
http://equipment IP address:20051/USER/Login.htm
11.1 Backing Up Individual Data <NOTE>
Save individual data as backup data in the PC for servicing. When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.
<REMARKS>
→ The login screen is displayed.
The individual data saved in the PC for servicing should be saved as backup on other
media.

1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.

2. Start the Web server of this equipment during initialization.
While the software version number is displayed, press the <DOWN> key while
pressing the <UP> key on the operation panel for about 5 seconds until you hear
a blip.

→ The Web server starts on the equipment. The display on the operation panel
will not change even when the Web sever is started by the equipment.

3. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-85
 IN-86
5. Enter the following username and password, select the language 6. In the maintenance tree, click [Transfer Indv. Data].
(English) and click [Login].
DRYPIX 2000
Login: dryprinter ┣ +********
Password: fujifilm ┣ +Transfer Indv. Data
┣ +********

7. Select “PC<-Printer" for [Select direction].

8. [Execute]
→ The equipment data is saved in the PC for servicing.
[Command completed.] is displayed on the browser when transfer completes.

→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-86
 IN-87
11.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs 11.2.2 Deleting Error Logs
When Errors Occur during Installation 1. Click [Clear Error Log].
Check whether errors occurred during installation using the PC-Utility, and delete the
error log. 2. [Execute]
<REMARKS> → The error log of the equipment is deleted.
After deleting the error log, the logout windows opens indicating “ Command
If error logs need to be saved, implement [Analysis Data] of the PC-Utility before completed.”
executing “11.2.2 Deleting Error Logs”.
3. After completing settings, click [Logout] button of the maintenance
tree.
11.2.1 Checking Error Logs
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens.
1. Click [Display Error Log]. <REMARKS>
DRYPIX 2000 If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
┣ +System information and setup not be displayed.
┃ ┣ Setting1 {IN:3.2.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
┃ ┣ Setting2
┃ ┣ Setting3
┃ ┗ +Log data
4. Close the logout window.
┃
┃
┣ Display Error Log
┣ Clear Error Log
5. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
┃ ┗ ******** 6. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
to which the equipment is connected.
2. [Execute]
→ The error log of the equipment is displayed.

016-201-05E
03.31.2008 FM5332
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-87
 IN-88
11.3 Installation 11.3.3 Securing the Equipment Main Body to the Cart
Move the equipment to the place of installation to enable use by the user. 1. Fit the rubber feet of the equipment main body into the bosses on the
Perform the following installation work. cart top.
• If placing the equipment at the desired plate of the user
{IN:11.3.1_Installing the Equipment without Using Fixtures} 2. From beneath the cart top, remove the screws securing the rubber feet
• If securing the equipment on the table to the cart top.
{IN:11.3.2_Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing with Fixtures}
• If securing the equipment on the cart and then securing the cart on the floor. 3. Secure the equipment main body to the cart top using the supplied
screws.
{IN: 11.3.3_Securing the Equipment Main Body to the Cart}
• If securing the equipment in a vehicle
{IN:11.3.4_Installing the Equipment in a Vehicle}

11.3.1 Installing the Equipment without Using Fixtures

1. Ensure the required installation space around the equipment.

2. Move the equipment to the desired place of the user.
11.3.2 Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing
with Fixtures

1. Move the equipment to the position for embedding the anchor nuts.
2. Secure the equipment with bolts. Attach the caps on the bolts.

4. Move the cart to the position where anchor nuts are embedded.
5. Secure the cables onto the cart using cable ties.
6. Secure the cart to the floor using the bolts.
016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-88
 IN-89
11.3.4 Installing the Equipment in a Vehicle 11.4 Cleaning the Equipment
1. Move the equipment to the position for embedding the anchor nuts. 1. Clean all covers with a moist cloth.
2. Secure the equipment with bolts. Attach the caps on the bolts.
11.5 Affixing the Main Power Switch OFF
Caution Label
1. If the user wishes, affix the “Main power switch OFF caution label” at
the position shown below.

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-89
 IN-90
APPENDIX 1 ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE n Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective
Grounding of the Equipment and Clamp Locations
GROUNDING
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. additional protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical
Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC 60601-1-1. standard of the country to which the equipment is to be installed.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and
isolated supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>
for additional protective grounding” on the next page. 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle connection of additional protective grounding.
electrical facility construction. 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used the connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital
room” are given below. grade earth terminal.
l Patient Environment 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply
from the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-90
 IN-91
APPENDIX 2 DENSITOMETER TM-5 TM-5 TM-5
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
CONVERSION TABLES Measurement
Value
Value Measurement
Value
Value Measurement
Value
Value

0.83 0.83 1.19 1.18 1.55 1.52

Provided in the following pages are the tables for converting densitometer 0.84 0.84 1.20 1.19 1.56 1.53
measurement values to true density values.
Applicable densitometer: TM-5 0.85 0.85 1.21 1.20 1.57 1.54
301RS (with or without filter for DRYPIX 1000/3000) 0.86 0.86 1.22 1.20 1.58 1.55
331RS (with filter for DRYPIX 1000/3000) 0.87 0.87 1.23 1.21 1.59 1.56
0.88 0.87 1.24 1.22 1.60 1.57
<TM-5 Densitometer Conversion Table>
0.89 0.88 1.25 1.23 1.61 1.58
How to Use: Obtain the measurement value using a TM-5 densitometer and locate it 0.90 0.89 1.26 1.24 1.62 1.59
and its converted value in the table below. When the measurement value is 1.00, for
0.91 0.90 1.27 1.25 1.63 1.60
instance, its true density value is 0.99.
0.92 0.91 1.28 1.26 1.64 1.61
TM-5 TM-5 TM-5 0.93 0.92 1.29 1.27 1.65 1.62
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density 0.94 0.93 1.30 1.28 1.66 1.63
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value 0.95 0.94 1.31 1.29 1.67 1.64
0.14 0.15 0.37 0.37 0.60 0.60 0.96 0.95 1.32 1.30 1.68 1.65
0.15 0.16 0.38 0.38 0.61 0.61 0.97 0.96 1.33 1.31 1.69 1.66
0.16 0.17 0.39 0.39 0.62 0.62 0.98 0.97 1.34 1.32 1.70 1.67
0.17 0.18 0.40 0.40 0.63 0.63 0.99 0.98 1.35 1.33 1.71 1.68
0.18 0.19 0.41 0.41 0.64 0.65 1.00 0.99 1.36 1.34 1.72 1.69
0.19 0.20 0.42 0.42 0.65 0.66 1.01 1.00 1.37 1.35 1.73 1.70
0.20 0.20 0.43 0.43 0.66 0.67 1.02 1.01 1.38 1.36 1.74 1.71
0.21 0.21 0.44 0.44 0.67 0.68 1.03 1.02 1.39 1.37 1.75 1.72
0.22 0.22 0.45 0.45 0.68 0.69 1.04 1.03 1.40 1.38 1.76 1.73
0.23 0.23 0.46 0.46 0.69 0.69 1.05 1.04 1.41 1.39 1.77 1.73
0.24 0.25 0.47 0.47 0.70 0.70 1.06 1.05 1.42 1.40 1.78 1.74
0.25 0.26 0.48 0.48 0.71 0.71 1.07 1.06 1.43 1.41 1.79 1.75
0.26 0.27 0.49 0.49 0.72 0.72 1.08 1.07 1.44 1.42 1.80 1.76
0.27 0.28 0.50 0.50 0.73 0.73 1.09 1.08 1.45 1.43 1.81 1.77
0.28 0.29 0.51 0.51 0.74 0.74 1.10 1.09 1.46 1.44 1.82 1.78
0.29 0.30 0.52 0.52 0.75 0.75 1.11 1.10 1.47 1.45 1.83 1.79
0.30 0.31 0.53 0.53 0.76 0.76 1.12 1.11 1.48 1.46 1.84 1.80
0.31 0.32 0.54 0.54 0.77 0.77 1.13 1.12 1.49 1.47 1.85 1.81
0.32 0.33 0.55 0.55 0.78 0.78 1.14 1.13 1.50 1.47 1.86 1.82
0.33 0.34 0.56 0.56 0.79 0.79 1.15 1.14 1.51 1.48 1.87 1.83
0.34 0.34 0.57 0.57 0.80 0.80 1.16 1.15 1.52 1.49 1.88 1.84
0.35 0.35 0.58 0.58 0.81 0.81 1.17 1.16 1.53 1.50 1.89 1.85
0.36 0.36 0.59 0.59 0.82 0.82 1.18 1.17 1.54 1.51 1.90 1.86

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-91
 IN-92
TM-5 TM-5 TM-5 TM-5 TM-5 TM-5
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value Value Value Value
1.91 1.87 2.27 2.22 2.63 2.56 2.99 2.90 3.17 3.06 3.35 3.22
1.92 1.88 2.28 2.23 2.64 2.57 3.00 2.91 3.18 3.07 3.36 3.23
1.93 1.89 2.29 2.24 2.65 2.58 3.01 2.92 3.19 3.08 3.37 3.24
1.94 1.90 2.30 2.25 2.66 2.59 3.02 2.93 3.20 3.09 3.38 3.25
1.95 1.91 2.31 2.26 2.67 2.60 3.03 2.94 3.21 3.10 3.39 3.26
1.96 1.92 2.32 2.27 2.68 2.61 3.04 2.95 3.22 3.11 3.40 3.27
1.97 1.93 2.33 2.28 2.69 2.62 3.05 2.95 3.23 3.12 3.41 3.28
1.98 1.94 2.34 2.29 2.70 2.63 3.06 2.96 3.24 3.13 3.42 3.29
1.99 1.95 2.35 2.30 2.71 2.64 3.07 2.97 3.25 3.14 3.43 3.30
2.00 1.96 2.36 2.31 2.72 2.65 3.08 2.98 3.26 3.15 3.44 3.31
2.01 1.97 2.37 2.32 2.73 2.66 3.09 2.99 3.27 3.15 3.45 3.32
2.02 1.98 2.38 2.33 2.74 2.67 3.10 3.00 3.28 3.16 3.46 3.32
2.03 1.99 2.39 2.34 2.75 2.68 3.11 3.01 3.29 3.17 3.47 3.33
2.04 2.00 2.40 2.35 2.76 2.69 3.12 3.02 3.30 3.18 3.48 3.34
2.05 2.01 2.41 2.36 2.77 2.69 3.13 3.03 3.31 3.19 3.49 3.35
2.06 2.02 2.42 2.37 2.78 2.70 3.14 3.04 3.32 3.20 3.50 3.36
2.07 2.03 2.43 2.38 2.79 2.71 3.15 3.04 3.33 3.20
2.08 2.04 2.44 2.38 2.80 2.72 3.16 3.05 3.34 3.21
2.09 2.05 2.45 2.39 2.81 2.73
2.10 2.06 2.46 2.40 2.82 2.74
2.11 2.06 2.47 2.41 2.83 2.75
2.12 2.07 2.48 2.42 2.84 2.76
2.13 2.08 2.49 2.43 2.85 2.77
2.14 2.09 2.50 2.44 2.86 2.78
2.15 2.10 2.51 2.45 2.87 2.79
2.16 2.11 2.52 2.46 2.88 2.80
2.17 2.12 2.53 2.47 2.89 2.81
2.18 2.13 2.54 2.48 2.90 2.82
2.19 2.14 2.55 2.49 2.91 2.83
2.20 2.15 2.56 2.50 2.92 2.84
2.21 2.16 2.57 2.51 2.93 2.85
2.22 2.17 2.58 2.52 2.94 2.86
2.23 2.18 2.59 2.53 2.95 2.87
2.24 2.19 2.60 2.54 2.96 2.88
2.25 2.20 2.61 2.55 2.97 2.88
2.26 2.21 2.62 2.55 2.98 2.89

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-92
 IN-93
<301RS Densitometer Conversion Table (with filter)> 301RS 301RS 301RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
The table below shows true density values for measurement values obtained using a Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
301RS densitometer with a filter specified for DRYPIX 1000/3000. Value Value Value
How to Use: Obtain the measurement value using a 301RS densitometer and locate 1.05 1.08 1.41 1.45 1.77 1.81
it and its converted value in the table below. When the measurement value is 1.00, for 1.06 1.09 1.42 1.46 1.78 1.82
instance, its true density value is 1.03.
1.07 1.10 1.43 1.47 1.79 1.83
301RS 301RS 301RS 1.08 1.11 1.44 1.48 1.80 1.84
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density 1.09 1.12 1.45 1.49 1.81 1.85
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value 1.10 1.13 1.46 1.50 1.82 1.86
0.15 0.15 0.45 0.46 0.75 0.77 1.11 1.14 1.47 1.51 1.83 1.87
0.16 0.16 0.46 0.47 0.76 0.78 1.12 1.15 1.48 1.52 1.84 1.88
0.17 0.17 0.47 0.48 0.77 0.79 1.13 1.16 1.49 1.53 1.85 1.89
0.18 0.18 0.48 0.49 0.78 0.80 1.14 1.17 1.50 1.54 1.86 1.90
0.19 0.19 0.49 0.51 0.79 0.81 1.15 1.18 1.51 1.55 1.87 1.90
0.20 0.20 0.50 0.52 0.80 0.82 1.16 1.19 1.52 1.56 1.88 1.91
0.21 0.21 0.51 0.53 0.81 0.83 1.17 1.20 1.53 1.57 1.89 1.93
0.22 0.22 0.52 0.54 0.82 0.84 1.18 1.21 1.54 1.58 1.90 1.94
0.23 0.23 0.53 0.55 0.83 0.85 1.19 1.22 1.55 1.59 1.91 1.95
0.24 0.24 0.54 0.56 0.84 0.86 1.20 1.23 1.56 1.60 1.92 1.96
0.25 0.25 0.55 0.57 0.85 0.87 1.21 1.24 1.57 1.61 1.93 1.97
0.26 0.26 0.56 0.58 0.86 0.88 1.22 1.26 1.58 1.62 1.94 1.98
0.27 0.28 0.57 0.59 0.87 0.89 1.23 1.27 1.59 1.63 1.95 1.99
0.28 0.29 0.58 0.60 0.88 0.90 1.24 1.28 1.60 1.64 1.96 2.00
0.29 0.30 0.59 0.61 0.89 0.91 1.25 1.29 1.61 1.65 1.97 2.01
0.30 0.31 0.60 0.62 0.90 0.92 1.26 1.30 1.62 1.66 1.98 2.02
0.31 0.32 0.61 0.63 0.91 0.93 1.27 1.31 1.63 1.67 1.99 2.03
0.32 0.33 0.62 0.64 0.92 0.94 1.28 1.32 1.64 1.68 2.00 2.04
0.33 0.34 0.63 0.65 0.93 0.95 1.29 1.33 1.65 1.69 2.01 2.05
0.34 0.35 0.64 0.66 0.94 0.96 1.30 1.34 1.66 1.70 2.02 2.06
0.35 0.36 0.65 0.67 0.95 0.98 1.31 1.35 1.67 1.71 2.03 2.07
0.36 0.37 0.66 0.68 0.96 0.99 1.32 1.36 1.68 1.72 2.04 2.08
0.37 0.38 0.67 0.69 0.97 1.00 1.33 1.37 1.69 1.73 2.05 2.09
0.38 0.39 0.68 0.70 0.98 1.01 1.34 1.38 1.70 1.74 2.06 2.10
0.39 0.40 0.69 0.71 0.99 1.02 1.35 1.39 1.71 1.75 2.07 2.11
0.40 0.41 0.70 0.72 1.00 1.03 1.36 1.40 1.72 1.76 2.08 2.12
0.41 0.42 0.71 0.73 1.01 1.04 1.37 1.41 1.73 1.77 2.09 2.13
0.42 0.43 0.72 0.74 1.02 1.05 1.38 1.42 1.74 1.78 2.10 2.14
0.43 0.44 0.73 0.75 1.03 1.06 1.39 1.43 1.75 1.79 2.11 2.15
0.44 0.45 0.74 0.76 1.04 1.07 1.40 1.44 1.76 1.80 2.12 2.16

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-93
 IN-94
301RS 301RS 301RS 301RS 301RS 301RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value Value Value Value
2.13 2.17 2.49 2.53 2.85 2.88 3.21 3.24 3.27 3.30 3.33 3.36
2.14 2.18 2.50 2.54 2.86 2.89 3.22 3.25 3.28 3.31 3.34 3.37
2.15 2.19 2.51 2.54 2.87 2.90 3.23 3.26 3.29 3.32 3.35 3.38
2.16 2.20 2.52 2.55 2.88 2.91 3.24 3.27 3.30 3.33 3.36 3.39
2.17 2.21 2.53 2.56 2.89 2.92 3.25 3.28 3.31 3.34
2.18 2.22 2.54 2.57 2.90 2.93 3.26 3.29 3.32 3.35
2.19 2.23 2.55 2.58 2.91 2.94
2.20 2.24 2.56 2.59 2.92 2.95
2.21 2.25 2.57 2.60 2.93 2.96
2.22 2.26 2.58 2.61 2.94 2.97
2.23 2.27 2.59 2.62 2.95 2.98
2.24 2.28 2.60 2.63 2.96 2.99
2.25 2.29 2.61 2.64 2.97 3.00
2.26 2.30 2.62 2.65 2.98 3.01
2.27 2.31 2.63 2.66 2.99 3.02
2.28 2.32 2.64 2.67 3.00 3.03
2.29 2.33 2.65 2.68 3.01 3.04
2.30 2.34 2.66 2.69 3.02 3.05
2.31 2.35 2.67 2.70 3.03 3.06
2.32 2.36 2.68 2.71 3.04 3.07
2.33 2.37 2.69 2.72 3.05 3.08
2.34 2.38 2.70 2.73 3.06 3.09
2.35 2.39 2.71 2.74 3.07 3.10
2.36 2.40 2.72 2.75 3.08 3.11
2.37 2.41 2.73 2.76 3.09 3.12
2.38 2.42 2.74 2.77 3.10 3.13
2.39 2.43 2.75 2.78 3.11 3.14
2.40 2.44 2.76 2.79 3.12 3.15
2.41 2.45 2.77 2.80 3.13 3.16
2.42 2.46 2.78 2.81 3.14 3.17
2.43 2.47 2.79 2.82 3.15 3.18
2.44 2.48 2.80 2.83 3.16 3.19
2.45 2.49 2.81 2.84 3.17 3.20
2.46 2.50 2.82 2.85 3.18 3.21
2.47 2.51 2.83 2.86 3.19 3.22
2.48 2.52 2.84 2.87 3.20 3.23

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-94
 IN-95
<301RS Densitometer Conversion Table (without filter)> 301RS 301RS 301RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
The table below shows true density values for measurement values obtained using a Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
301RS densitometer without a filter. Value Value Value
How to Use: Obtain the measurement value using a 301RS densitometer and locate 1.05 1.11 1.41 1.54 1.77 2.06
it and its converted value in the table below. When the measurement value is 1.00, for 1.06 1.12 1.42 1.55 1.78 2.08
instance, its true density value is 1.05.
1.07 1.13 1.43 1.56 1.79 2.10
301RS 301RS 301RS 1.08 1.14 1.44 1.57 1.80 2.12
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density 1.09 1.15 1.45 1.59 1.81 2.13
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value 1.10 1.17 1.46 1.60 1.82 2.15
0.15 0.16 0.45 0.47 0.75 0.78 1.11 1.18 1.47 1.61 1.83 2.17
0.16 0.17 0.46 0.48 0.76 0.79 1.12 1.19 1.48 1.63 1.84 2.19
0.17 0.18 0.47 0.49 0.77 0.80 1.13 1.20 1.49 1.64 1.85 2.20
0.18 0.19 0.48 0.50 0.78 0.81 1.14 1.21 1.50 1.66 1.86 2.22
0.19 0.20 0.49 0.51 0.79 0.83 1.15 1.22 1.51 1.67 1.87 2.25
0.20 0.21 0.50 0.52 0.80 0.84 1.16 1.23 1.52 1.68 1.88 2.27
0.21 0.22 0.51 0.53 0.81 0.85 1.17 1.24 1.53 1.70 1.89 2.29
0.22 0.23 0.52 0.54 0.82 0.86 1.18 1.26 1.54 1.71 1.90 2.31
0.23 0.24 0.53 0.55 0.83 0.87 1.19 1.27 1.55 1.73 1.91 2.34
0.24 0.25 0.54 0.56 0.84 0.88 1.20 1.28 1.56 1.74 1.92 2.36
0.25 0.26 0.55 0.57 0.85 0.89 1.21 1.29 1.57 1.75 1.93 2.38
0.26 0.27 0.56 0.58 0.86 0.90 1.22 1.31 1.58 1.77 1.94 2.40
0.27 0.28 0.57 0.59 0.87 0.91 1.23 1.32 1.59 1.78 1.95 2.42
0.28 0.29 0.58 0.60 0.88 0.92 1.24 1.33 1.60 1.80 1.96 2.45
0.29 0.30 0.59 0.61 0.89 0.93 1.25 1.34 1.61 1.81 1.97 2.47
0.30 0.31 0.60 0.62 0.90 0.94 1.26 1.35 1.62 1.82 1.98 2.50
0.31 0.32 0.61 0.64 0.91 0.95 1.27 1.37 1.63 1.84 1.99 2.52
0.32 0.33 0.62 0.65 0.92 0.96 1.28 1.38 1.64 1.85 2.00 2.55
0.33 0.34 0.63 0.66 0.93 0.97 1.29 1.39 1.65 1.87 2.01 2.58
0.34 0.35 0.64 0.67 0.94 0.99 1.30 1.40 1.66 1.88 2.02 2.61
0.35 0.36 0.65 0.68 0.95 1.00 1.31 1.42 1.67 1.90 2.03 2.63
0.36 0.38 0.66 0.69 0.96 1.01 1.32 1.43 1.68 1.91 2.04 2.66
0.37 0.39 0.67 0.70 0.97 1.02 1.33 1.44 1.69 1.93 2.05 2.69
0.38 0.40 0.68 0.71 0.98 1.03 1.34 1.45 1.70 1.94 2.06 2.72
0.39 0.41 0.69 0.72 0.99 1.04 1.35 1.46 1.71 1.96 2.07 2.76
0.40 0.42 0.70 0.73 1.00 1.05 1.36 1.48 1.72 1.98 2.08 2.79
0.41 0.43 0.71 0.74 1.01 1.06 1.37 1.49 1.73 2.00 2.09 2.82
0.42 0.44 0.72 0.75 1.02 1.08 1.38 1.50 1.74 2.01 2.10 2.86
0.43 0.45 0.73 0.76 1.03 1.09 1.39 1.51 1.75 2.03 2.11 2.90
0.44 0.46 0.74 0.77 1.04 1.10 1.40 1.53 1.76 2.05 2.12 2.93

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-95
 IN-96
301RS 301RS 301RS <331RS Densitometer Conversion Table (with filter)>
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value The table below shows true density values for measurement values obtained using a
Value Value Value 331RS densitometer with a filter specified for DRYPIX 1000/3000.
2.13 2.97 2.18 3.19 2.23 3.40 How to Use: Obtain the measurement value using a 331RS densitometer and locate
2.14 3.01 2.19 3.23 2.24 3.44 it and its converted value in the table below. When the measurement value is 1.00, for
instance, its true density value is 1.01.
2.15 3.05 2.20 3.28 2.25 3.49
2.16 3.10 2.21 3.32 331RS 331RS 331RS
2.17 3.14 2.22 3.36 Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value
0.13 0.16 0.43 0.45 0.73 0.75
0.14 0.17 0.44 0.46 0.74 0.76
0.15 0.18 0.45 0.47 0.75 0.77
0.16 0.19 0.46 0.48 0.76 0.78
0.17 0.19 0.47 0.49 0.77 0.79
0.18 0.20 0.48 0.50 0.78 0.80
0.19 0.21 0.49 0.51 0.79 0.81
0.20 0.22 0.50 0.52 0.80 0.82
0.21 0.23 0.51 0.53 0.81 0.82
0.22 0.24 0.52 0.54 0.82 0.83
0.23 0.25 0.53 0.55 0.83 0.84
0.24 0.26 0.54 0.56 0.84 0.85
0.25 0.27 0.55 0.57 0.85 0.86
0.26 0.28 0.56 0.58 0.86 0.87
0.27 0.29 0.57 0.59 0.87 0.88
0.28 0.30 0.58 0.60 0.88 0.89
0.29 0.31 0.59 0.61 0.89 0.90
0.30 0.32 0.60 0.62 0.90 0.91
0.31 0.33 0.61 0.63 0.91 0.92
0.32 0.34 0.62 0.64 0.92 0.93
0.33 0.35 0.63 0.65 0.93 0.94
0.34 0.36 0.64 0.66 0.94 0.95
0.35 0.37 0.65 0.67 0.95 0.96
0.36 0.38 0.66 0.68 0.96 0.97
0.37 0.39 0.67 0.69 0.97 0.98
0.38 0.40 0.68 0.70 0.98 0.99
0.39 0.41 0.69 0.71 0.99 1.00
0.40 0.42 0.70 0.72 1.00 1.01
0.41 0.43 0.71 0.73 1.01 1.02
0.42 0.44 0.72 0.74 1.02 1.03

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-96
 IN-97
331RS 331RS 331RS 331RS 331RS 331RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value Value Value Value
1.03 1.04 1.39 1.40 1.75 1.74 2.11 2.10 2.47 2.44 2.83 2.77
1.04 1.05 1.40 1.41 1.76 1.75 2.12 2.11 2.48 2.45 2.84 2.78
1.05 1.06 1.41 1.42 1.77 1.76 2.13 2.12 2.49 2.46 2.85 2.79
1.06 1.07 1.42 1.43 1.78 1.77 2.14 2.13 2.50 2.47 2.86 2.80
1.07 1.08 1.43 1.44 1.79 1.78 2.15 2.13 2.51 2.48 2.87 2.81
1.08 1.09 1.44 1.44 1.80 1.79 2.16 2.14 2.52 2.48 2.88 2.82
1.09 1.10 1.45 1.45 1.81 1.80 2.17 2.15 2.53 2.49 2.89 2.83
1.10 1.11 1.46 1.46 1.82 1.81 2.18 2.16 2.54 2.50 2.90 2.84
1.11 1.12 1.47 1.47 1.83 1.82 2.19 2.17 2.55 2.51 2.91 2.85
1.12 1.13 1.48 1.48 1.84 1.83 2.20 2.18 2.56 2.52 2.92 2.86
1.13 1.14 1.49 1.49 1.85 1.84 2.21 2.19 2.57 2.53 2.93 2.87
1.14 1.15 1.50 1.50 1.86 1.85 2.22 2.20 2.58 2.54 2.94 2.88
1.15 1.16 1.51 1.51 1.87 1.86 2.23 2.21 2.59 2.55 2.95 2.89
1.16 1.17 1.52 1.52 1.88 1.87 2.24 2.22 2.60 2.56 2.96 2.89
1.17 1.18 1.53 1.53 1.89 1.88 2.25 2.23 2.61 2.57 2.97 2.90
1.18 1.19 1.54 1.54 1.90 1.89 2.26 2.24 2.62 2.58 2.98 2.91
1.19 1.20 1.55 1.55 1.91 1.90 2.27 2.25 2.63 2.59 2.99 2.92
1.20 1.21 1.56 1.56 1.92 1.91 2.28 2.26 2.64 2.60 3.00 2.93
1.21 1.22 1.57 1.57 1.93 1.92 2.29 2.27 2.65 2.61 3.01 2.94
1.22 1.23 1.58 1.58 1.94 1.93 2.30 2.28 2.66 2.62 3.02 2.95
1.23 1.24 1.59 1.59 1.95 1.94 2.31 2.29 2.67 2.63 3.03 2.96
1.24 1.25 1.60 1.60 1.96 1.95 2.32 2.30 2.68 2.63 3.04 2.97
1.25 1.26 1.61 1.61 1.97 1.96 2.33 2.31 2.69 2.64 3.05 2.98
1.26 1.27 1.62 1.62 1.98 1.97 2.34 2.32 2.70 2.65 3.06 2.99
1.27 1.28 1.63 1.63 1.99 1.98 2.35 2.33 2.71 2.66 3.07 3.00
1.28 1.29 1.64 1.64 2.00 1.99 2.36 2.34 2.72 2.67 3.08 3.01
1.29 1.30 1.65 1.65 2.01 2.00 2.37 2.34 2.73 2.68 3.09 3.02
1.30 1.31 1.66 1.66 2.02 2.01 2.38 2.35 2.74 2.69 3.10 3.02
1.31 1.32 1.67 1.67 2.03 2.02 2.39 2.36 2.75 2.70 3.11 3.03
1.32 1.33 1.68 1.68 2.04 2.03 2.40 2.37 2.76 2.71 3.12 3.04
1.33 1.34 1.69 1.69 2.05 2.04 2.41 2.38 2.77 2.72 3.13 3.05
1.34 1.35 1.70 1.70 2.06 2.05 2.42 2.39 2.78 2.73 3.14 3.06
1.35 1.36 1.71 1.70 2.07 2.06 2.43 2.40 2.79 2.74 3.15 3.07
1.36 1.37 1.72 1.71 2.08 2.07 2.44 2.41 2.80 2.75 3.16 3.08
1.37 1.38 1.73 1.72 2.09 2.08 2.45 2.42 2.81 2.76 3.17 3.09
1.38 1.39 1.74 1.73 2.10 2.09 2.46 2.43 2.82 2.77 3.18 3.10

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-97
 IN-98
331RS 331RS 331RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value
3.19 3.11 3.30 3.20 3.41 3.30
3.20 3.12 3.31 3.21 3.42 3.31
3.21 3.12 3.32 3.22 3.43 3.32
3.22 3.13 3.33 3.23 3.44 3.33
3.23 3.14 3.34 3.24 3.45 3.34
3.24 3.15 3.35 3.25 3.46 3.35
3.25 3.16 3.36 3.26 3.47 3.36
3.26 3.17 3.37 3.27 3.48 3.36
3.27 3.18 3.38 3.27 3.49 3.37
3.28 3.18 3.39 3.28 3.50 3.38
3.29 3.19 3.40 3.29

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-98
 IN-99
BLANK PAGE

016-201-03E
10.18.2006 FM5036
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual IN-99
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) All pages

04.27.2012 07 Revised (FM6040) 5, 6, 27, 28, 49

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL

INSTALLATION (IN) (DRYPIX Lite)

016-201-07E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

04.27.2012 FM6040
 IN-1
1. SPECIFICATIONS
For details on the installation requirements, refer to "SPECIFICATIONS".
{SPECIFICATIONS:1._SPECIFICATIONS}

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-1
 IN-2
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW

START
A

3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION 5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND

ASSEMBLING/INSTALLING OPTIONS
3.1 Precautions on Installation
5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures (Tape and Buffer material)
3.2 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing
5.1.1 Equipment Main Body
3.3 Flow of PC-Utility Operations
5.1.2 Sheet-feeder Unit
3.4 Embedding Anchor Nuts
5.1.3 Magazine
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
5.2 Assembling of Cart
4.1 Carrying
5.3 Temporary Installation onto Cart
4.2 Unpacking and Unloading
5.4 Installing the Sheet-feeder Unit to the Equipment Main Body
4.2.1 Equipment Main Body
5.5 Setting Magazines
4.2.2 Sheet-feeder Unit (Option)
5.5.1 Affixing the Film Size Label
4.2.3 Cart (Option)
5.5.2 Attach the Guige
4.2.4 Magazine (Option)
5.5.3 Setting the Magazine Number
4.2.5 Mounting Accessory Kit (Option)

4.3 Checking Components

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-2
 IN-3

B C

6. CONNECTING CABLES 8.4 Checking the Interlock Function

8.4.1 Checking the Head Cover Interlock

6.1 Connecting the Network Cable
8.4.2 Checking the Lower Rear Open/Close Cover Interlock
6.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance
8.5 Checking Fan Operations
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT
8.5.1 Checking the Controller Fan
7.1 Setting the Magazine and Powering ON
8.5.2 Checking the Head Cover Fan
7.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)
8.6 Settings the Image QC Function
7.3 System Settings
8.7 Power OFF
7.3.1 Setting 1
8.8 Connecting to the Network
7.3.2 Setting 2
9. CHECKING CONNECTION
7.3.3 Setting 3

7.4 Rebooting the Equipment 9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment

7.5 Client Settings 9.2 Checking film Output and Images from Connected Equipment

8. CHECKING OPERATIONS 9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment

8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance

Operations

8.2 Checking Density D

8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness

and Scratches

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-3
 IN-4

10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT

10.1 Backing Up Individual Data

10.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs

10.2.1 Checking Error Logs

10.2.2 Deleting Error Logs

10.3 Installation The Equipment

10.3.1 Installing the Equipment

10.3.2 Installation onto Cart

10.3.3 Securing the Cart with Fixtures

10.4 Cleaning the Equipment

END

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-4

3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
3.1 Precautions on Installation
The machine installation site must satisfy the “n Installation Site Requirements” below.
Also be sure to complete procedures beforehand for necessary construction work,
electrical utility, and air-conditioning system installation.
Note that UL is not effective when used as mobile type because usage of this
equipment as mobile type has not been applied for with UL.
n Installation Site Requirements
Avoid the following installation sites.
• Places where the temperature drastically changes.
• Places near heat sources such as heaters.
• Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur.
• Places where the equipment may be exposed to any corrosive gas.
• Dusty places.
• Places where the equipment is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock.
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
• Install this device in the place that a patient does not touch.
IN-5
n Prevention of Condensation
When transporting an equipment to a hospital from outdoors where the temperature
is low such as cold regions, condensation may occur inside the equipment. Take
precautions against the following to prevent this condensation.
• Transport the equipment indoors without removing the vinyl packaging wrapping the
equipment body. However, the cardboard boxes can be removed outdoors as this
will not cause condensation.
• After transporting indoors, refer to the following table and wait until the equipment
settles to the indoor temperature, and then remove the vinyl.
• Install the equipment, touch the sheet metal portions such as magazine insert slot
and rear cover guide plats, etc. and check that no condensation has occurred, and
then turn ON the power.
• If the vinyl is accidentally removed outdoors, wrap the equipment up in the vinyl
tightly again before transporting indoors.
<REMARKS>
The following table shows the approximate time to wait before removing the vinyl after
transporting the equipment into a room with 50% humidity.
Extend the waiting time shown if the indoor humidity is high. If humidity is low, the
waiting time can be shortened.
Example: Humidity 70%→Increase waiting time by 40%
Humidity 30%→Decrease waiting time by 30%

External temperature
Indoor
temperature
10ºC 5ºC 0ºC -5ºC -10ºC -15ºC -20ºC
30 70 110 140
10ºC - - -
minute minute minute minute
30 70 110 140 175
15ºC - -
minute minute minute minute minute
30 65 100 135 170 205
20ºC -
minute minute minute minute minute minute
30 60 100 130 170 200 240
25ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute
60 100 130 165 200 235 270
30ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-5
 IN-6
n Power Supply and Grounding n Network Connection
Check that the outlet for connecting the power cable of this equipment is As the equipment needs to be connected to the network, prepare network materials
independently wired from the switch-board. Connect only this equipment to this outlet. and parts and complete constructions beforehand.
Do not connect other devices. Prepare the network materials and accessories according to the place of installation
as they are not designated parts.
n Power Cable
n Board Handling Precautions
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards.
If the power cable is not packed together with the equipment, be sure to use a Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. boards.
Using the cables not corresponding to the conditions below may cause an
electric shock or a fire. n Additional Protective Grounding
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the
l For U.S. and Canada patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. This
installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable facility construction.
• Hospital-grade Type Plug Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor room” are given below.
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher l Patient Environment
• Cable type: SJT
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
l For Europe tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher l Medically-Used Room
• Cable type: H05VV-F Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-6
 IN-7
3.2 Work Preparations of PC for Servicing n Example of Embedding Procedure
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1_Work Preparations of PC for Servicing} CAUTION
Wear a protective goggle when using a drill.
3.3 Flow of PC-Utility Operations
<NOTE>
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operations}
Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
3.4 Embedding Anchor Nuts
l Drilling Holes for Embedding Anchor Nuts
To secure the optional cart on the floor with fixtures, embed the anchor nuts
beforehand.

■ Position of the Anchor Nuts to Be Enbedded

[Drilling]
4 positions
Drill bit diameter: 8.5 mm
Depth: 40 mm FPCB0301.AI

l Embedding Anchor Nuts

<NOTE>
• Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
• Ensure that nut is so positioned that the bolt end slightly protrudes from it when the
bracket is mounted.
581.0 Unit : mm
J0044.ai #3 #4 #5
#1 [Remove] [Install] [Tighten]
[Insert] Nut Bracket Nut
Anchor nut
#2
[Drive]
Rivet

40mm

FPCB0303.AI

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-7
 IN-8
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION 4.2 Unpacking and Unloading

4.2.1 Equipment Main Body

4.1 Carrying
CAUTION
When moving the equipment over any bumps, move it slowly to avoid shock.
1. Clear the delivery path of the equipment and carry the equipment to
the installation site.
To ensure that the equipment can be carried out safely to the installation
site, move any obstacle out of the way at the delivery entrance, in corridors
and corners. Also make sure that the elevator is made available to move the
equipment.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
The weight of this equipment is approximately 30 kg for one magazine
specifications, and 41 kg for two magazine specifications, with the magazine
removed. Take the following precautions when moving the equipment, etc.
• To prevent injuries resulting in back pain, pay attention to your posture during
the work.
• Be careful not to drop the equipment as this may cause serious injuries.
• Remove the magazine when lifting the equipment.
• The equipment should be lifted by more than one persons in front and more
than one persons at the back. When lifting by two persons, each person
should stand on the left and right side each. As the center of gravity of the
equipment is inclined towards the back, it may turn over or fall.
• When lifting up the equipment, lift at the position shown in the following
figure, hook fingers to the equipment firmly and then lift.

J0001.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-8
 IN-9
1. Cut the band and remove the cardboard box. 6. Remove the shipping brackets (four on left and right) from the
equipment main body.
2. Cut the band and remove the protective material covering the
equipment main body.

3. Remove the separately packaged items.

4. Remove the equipment from the vinyl.
5. From the pallet, remove the bolts (four on left and right) that fix the
equipment main body (via shipping brackets). #1
[Remove]
Equipment Shipping brackets 8-DT3x6

Shipping brackets

J0052.ai

#1
[Remove]
4-Bolt J0051.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-9
 IN-10
4.2.2 Sheet-feeder Unit (Option) 4.3 Checking Components
1. Remove the separately packaged parts from the box. According to the following lists, check to ensure that you have all the components to
be installed.The service personnel should always retain the Inspection Data Sheet.
2. Remove the sheet-feeder unit together with the inner box. ■ Equipment Main Body
3. Cut the band, and remove the protective material covering the Name Qty. Remarks
equipment.
Equipment Main Body 1
4.2.3 Cart (Option)
■ Accessories
1. Unpack the “Assembly Manual” and cart from the shipping carton. <Countries except for China>
Name Qty. Remarks
4.2.4 Magazine (Option)
CD-R 1 Main unit software
1. Unpack the magazine and accessories from the shipping carton. CD-R 2 Individual data
Operation manual 1
4.2.5 Mounting Accessory Kit (Option)
CD-R 1 Head data
1. Unpack the mounting accessory kit from the shipping carton. CD-R 1 Reference guide / Quality control
guide : English
Cutter 1
Fuse 2 LM10 (D) CDL : 1A
Fuse 2 LM50 (D) CDL : 5A

<China>
Name Qty. Remarks
CD-R 1 Main unit software
CD-R 2 Individual data
Operation manual 1
CD-R 1 Head data
CD-R 1 Reference guide / Quality control
guide : Chinese
Cutter 1
Fuse 2 LM10 (D) CDL : 1A
Fuse 2 LM50 (D) CDL : 5A

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-10
 IN-11
n Options
No. Product Code Parts No. Remarks
DPX LITE FEEDER E Sheet-feeder unit 810Y100045
DPX LITE MAGAZINE Small size magazine 819Y100012 Initial setting:
SE 26x36 cm size
DPX LITE MAGAZINE Large size magazine 819Y100013
LE
DPX 2000 AC CORD Power cable 136N0427 Common to DRYPIX
UL E (U.S.A. hospital grade) 2000
DPX 2000 AC CORD Power cable (EU) 136N0377 Common to DRYPIX
EU E 2000
DPX 2000 AC CORD Power cable (U.K.) 136N0450 Common to DRYPIX
UK E 2000
DPX 2000 10x12 KIT 25 x 30 cm size film kit 898Y100173 Common to DRYPIX
E 2000
・Label
・Guide

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-11
 IN-12
5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES
AND ASSEMBLING/INSTALLING
OPTIONS

5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures (Tape and

Buffer material)

5.1.1 Equipment Main Body

1. Open the head cover.

2. Remove the thermal head shipping brackets (two).
CAUTION
Starting the equipment without removing the thermal head shipping bracket
may damage the thermal head.
#1 #2
[Remove] Thermal head Thermal head [Remove]
2-DT3x6 shipping bracket shipping bracket 2-DT3x6
J0059.ai

3. Remove the rear cover.

{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1.8_Rear Cover}

4. Remove the cushioning material (three).

[Remove]
Cushioning material J0060.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-12
 IN-13
5.1.2 Sheet-feeder Unit 5.2 Assembling of Cart
1. Remove the tape securing the cover of sheet-feeder unit and buffer Perform this procedure only when the equipment main body is to be installed on the
material. cart.

1. Assemble the cart according to the “Assembly Manual” of the cart.

5.1.3 Magazine

1. Remove the tape securing the magazine shutter, and open/close the 5.3 Temporary Installation onto Cart
removal side shutter with the hand for more than two times. Perform this procedure only when the equipment main body is to be installed on the
<NOTE> cart.

As the shutter will be tight immediately after unpacking, operating the equipment
in this state may damage the shutter open/close mechanism at the equipment
side.
1. Lift the equipment main body and place it on the cart top.
<NOTE>
If the sheet-feeder unit (option) is installed, place the feet of it on the cart top
instead of those of the equipment main body.

FPDB0536 AI

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-13
 IN-14
5.4 Installing the Sheet-feeder Unit to the 2. Remove the shipping brackets (four on left and right) from the sheet-
feeder unit.
Equipment Main Body
Place the equipment main body on the sheet-feeder unit. Perform this procedure only
when the sheet-feeder unit is installed to the equipment main body.

CAUTION
The equipment main body is very heavy. When lifting the equipment, two or
more persons should always cooperate to do so.

■ Connecting Sheet-feeder Unit with Equipment Main Body #1

[Remove]
1. Remove the covers of the equipment main body and the sheet-feeder 8-DT3x6
unit. Shipping brackets
{MC (DRYPIX Lite):1._COVER}
<REMARKS>
In this step, remove the following covers.
<Equipment>
- Head cover
- Right cover
- Left cover
- Upper tray cover
- Upper tray cover
- Lower tray cover
<Sheet-Feeder Unit>
- Lower front cover
J0053.ai

- Lower right cover

- Lower left cover
- Lower rear open/close cover

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-14
 IN-15
3. Remove the lower rear open/close cover of the sheet-feeder unit. 4. Place the equipment main body on the sheet-feeder unit, and secure
it.
#1
[Open] CAUTION
#2
[Remove] When mounting the equipment main body on the sheet-feeder unit, ensure that
the rubber foot of the equipment main body does not land on the gear on the
right side. Otherwise, the gear may become damaged.

Gear Rubber foot

Cover

J0006.ai

4. Remove the stay of the sheet-feeder unit.

#1 Stay
[Remove] NO GOOD GOOD
2-DT3x6
J0008.ai

#1
[Mount]
Equipment

J0007.ai

#2
[Tighten]
2-DT3x6

Sheet feeder unit J0009.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-15
 IN-16
5. Install the bracket <standard accessory>. ■ Installing Roller and Vertical Conveyor Guide Assembly

A
1. Remove the stay from the rear of the equipment main body.
<REMARKS>
The stay removed in this step will not be used later.

Equipment

DETAIL A #3 Stay
[Tighten]
Bracket DT3x6
#1
[Tighten]
Bracket Bracket
DT3x6

#4 #2
#2 [Remove]
[Tighten] Bracket
[Tighten] 2-DT3x6
DT3x6 J0011.ai

DT3x6
J0010.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-16
 IN-17
2. Install the bearing <standard accessory>. 3. Remove the gear cover.
Move the film positioning reference plates inward.
<REMARKS>
After the bearing is installed, move the film positioning reference plates fully #1 #2
outward. [Release] [Remove]
Clamp DT3x6
#1
[More closer]
Reference plate

#3
[Rotate]
Bearing

Gear cover
J0013.ai

#2
[Install]
Bearing

J0012.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-17
 IN-18
4. Install the roller <standard accessory>. 5. Install the gear cover.
#2
#1 [Retain]
[Install] Clamp Gear cover
Roller

DETAIL A

#1
[Tighten]
DT3x6 J0015.ai

6. Remove the cable routed along the vertical conveyance guide.

#2 #3
[Install] [Install]
Bearing Gear
Guide
J0014.ai

Cable

#1
15-Clamp J0054.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-18
 IN-19
7. Remove the vertical conveyance guide. 9. Install the guides removed in Step 8 to the lower rear open/close
cover.
#1
[Tighten]
Lower rear open/close cover
4-TP3x6

Vertical conveyance guide

2-DT3x6
J0055 ai

8. Remove the guides (two) from the vertical conveyance guide removed
in Step 7.
#1 Guide J0057.ai

Vertical conveyance guide [Remove]

4-TP3x6
10. Install the vertical conveyance guide.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

11. Route the cable along the vertical conveyance guide, and secure it
with the clamp.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

Guide J0056.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-19
 IN-20
12. Install the vertical conveyor guide assembly <standard accessory>. ■ Install the gear assembly
Guide assembly
1. Remove the bracket.

#1
Bracket [Remove]
#1
2-DT3x6
[Tighten] J0018.ai

2-DT3x6
2. Remove the gear.
J0016.ai

13. Install the stay <standard accessory>.

Stay

#1
[Remove]
Gear

J0019.ai

#1
[Tighten]
4-DT3x6 J0017.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-20
 IN-21
3. Install the gear assembly <standard accessory>. 5. Install the bracket removed in Step 1.
Gear assembly
Bracket

#1
#1
[Tighten]
[Thigten]
2-DT3ｘ6
2-DT3ｘ6
J0020.ai J0022.ai

4. Install the gear removed in Step 2.

#1
[Insert]
Gear

J0021.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-21
 IN-22
■ Connecting the Cable Connectors 2. Connect the cable connectors [SK21-R] [CN17] to the SND32A board.
1. Remove the controller unit cover. #4 #3
Controller unit cover [Connect] [Connect]
SK21-R CN17
A #1 #5 DETAIL A
[Remove] [Retain]
8-DT3ｘ6 A Clamp

DETAIL A

SND32A board

J0023.ai
#1
[Route]
Cable

#2
[Retain]
Clamp(Small)

J0024.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-22
 IN-23
3. Connect the cable connectors [CN30] [CN31] to the SND32A board. 4. Install the controller unit cover.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
#4 #5 #3
[Connect] [Connect] [Route] 5. Install the lower rear open/close cover.
CN30 CN31 Cable Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

6. Put on all of the covers.

Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.

#6
[Retain]
Clamp

SND32A board

#1
[Route]
Cable

#2
[Retain]
Clamp(Large)

J0025.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-23
 IN-24
5.5 Setting Magazines 5.5.1 Affixing the Film Size Label
Though this equipment can hold up to two magazines concurrently, one magazine can 1. Paste the label of the film size used on the magazine.
be set to any of seven types (Magazine 1 to Magazine 7) by changing the installed
position of the actuator. Each magazine is set to one of Magazine 1 to Magazine 7
according to the actuator.
As will be described in “7.3 System Settings”, the user can allocate desired film size to
a particular magazine by selecting a magazine number determined by the actuator.
Once a magazine is assigned a magazine number by installing the actuator and the
corresponding film size are set via the relevant software, the magazine can be set to
this equipment for use on a random basis.
Detailed in this section are the following three procedures.
Affixing the film size label
Attach the guide
Setting the magazine number
<NOTE>
Software settings will be required also for extra magazines if any exist on your
installation site. Without these settings, extra magazines cannot be used.Confirm the
film size for the extra magazines.
#1
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4[PC1-2-1]_Set Magazines} [Paste]
Film size label FPDB0518.AI
<REMARKS>
The following are the default settings of option magazines.
• Large size magazine (35x43)
(1) Guide installed: None
(2) Actuator installed: At the “Magazine Number 1” position
• Small size magazine (26x36/20x25)
(1) Guide installed: None (Guide for 20x25 is supplied with the magazine)
(2) Actuator installed: At the “Magazine Number 2” position

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-24
 IN-25
5.5.2 Attach the Guide 5.5.3 Setting the Magazine Number
Magazine number refers to a “registration number for the equipment” assigned
1. To change the film size of small size magazines from the default of 26 exclusively to each magazine. This number is determined based on the type of the
x 36 cm to 20 x 25 cm or 25 x 30 cm, install the guide. actuator installed on the magazine (Seven types from Magazine 1 through Magazine
7). The equipment detects the actuator position using the three film size detection
<REMARKS> sensors on the main body, thereby identifying the magazine number.
The number of guides to be attached according to the film size is as follows. <REMARKS>
<Small size magazine>
• 26x36 cm: None The default magazine settings and main body software settings may prove applicable
• 20x25 cm: Guide (large) (for 20x25 cm size) x4, to the user’s needs depending on how many magazines are used for what sizes.
Guide (small) (for 20x25 cm size) x4 Default actuator position
l
• 25x30 cm: Guide (large) (for 25x30 cm size) x4 • Large size magazine: Position identified as “Magazine 1” when set to the equipment
<Large size magazine> • Small size magazine: Position identified as “Magazine 2” when set to the equipment
• No guide is to be installed. Therefore, no guide is supplied with the large size
magazine. Default software settings
l
• Magazine 1: 35x43/Blue • Magazine 2: 26x36/Blue
[Attach] • Magazine 3: 20x25/Blue • Magazine 4: 25x30/Blue
Guide (large) x4
• Magazine 5 to Magazine 7: Not in use
Thus, there is no need to change the magazine settings (“5.5.1” to “5.5.3”) and
magazine-related software settings (described later) from the default if the number of
magazines for the equipment is as follows:
• 1 magazine set for [35x43/Blue]
(with or without an extra magazine for [26x36Blue])....................... Total 2 magazines
• 1 magazine set for [26x36/Blue]
(with or without an extra magazine for [35x43Blue]) ...................... Total 2 magazines
• 2 magazines for [35x43/Blue] and [26x36/Blue].............................. Total 2 magazines
For the 20x25 film size, the [Software settings] (described later) is not required if the
magazine is set as follows:
The software setting “Magazine 3” is 20x25/Blue by default.
Guide (large) • Install the guides at the 20x25 positions.
• Install the actuator for "Magazine Number 3".

<NOTE>
Even when the same size is used for multiple magazines, each magazine number
must be unique. Therefore, the actuator for it must be changed.
For 20x25cm size For 25x30cm size
J0026.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-25
 IN-26
1. Install the magazine identification actuator, and set the magazine ● Magazine 1
number.
<REMARKS> J0028.ai

The actuator is marked with a number for identification. ● Magazine 2

Actuator J0045.ai

● Magazine 3

J0046.ai

● Magazine 4

J0047.ai

● Magazine 5

J0048.ai

#1
[Tighten]
● Magazine 6
M3x8(x2)
Self-tapping screw J0027.ai
J0049.ai

● Magazine 7

J0050.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-26
 IN-27
6. CONNECTING CABLES 2. Connect the network cable to the network cable connector.
<NOTE>

6.1 Connecting the Network Cable ・ Use the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T cable (UTP or STP) for the
network cable.
・ At this point, simply connect a network cable to the equipment, but do not
CAUTION connect the other end to the on-site network.
• Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this
equipment. Only UTP Type straight LAN cables of category 5E or higher are <REMARKS>
appropriate for connection to this connector.
• At this time, do not connect to the network device. STP: Shielded type
UTP: Unshielded type
When performing system settings of the equipment, prevent external
intrusions which may interfere with network security by rebooting only the
equipment after completing various settings and then connecting to the
network equipment.
3. Fit the network cable into the ditch on the cover.

1. Check that the main power switch of the equipment is at OFF position
(O).
Network cable

Main power switch

Ditch
J0003.ai

J0002.ai

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-27
 IN-28
6.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking 1. Connect the power cable to the equipment.
the Resistance CAUTION
Do not connect the power plug to the outlet at this point.
n Power Cable Information
CAUTION 2. Fit the power cable into the ditch on the cover.
Use the power cable provided with this equipment. If the power cable is not
packed together with the equipment, be sure to use a power cable that complies
with the requirements stated below. Using the Cables not corresponding to the
conditions below may cause an electric shock or a fire.

l For U.S. and Canada

• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
• Hospital-grade Type Plug
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
• Cable type: SJT

l For Europe
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
• Cable type: H05VV-F

CAUTION
If the equipment is to be installed in the patient environment, see “APPENDIX 1 Ditch Power cable connector
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING” J0004.ai

{IN (DRYPIX Lite):APPENDIX 1_ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING}

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-28
 IN-29
3. Set the main power switch of the equipment to ON ( I ).
4. Using the tester, measure the resistance between the terminals of the
power plug or power cable.

(U.S.A., Canada, etc.) (Germany, France, (U.K., etc.)

Spain, Sweden, etc.)
E
E
E L
L
L N
N
N
FPCBE515.AI

Terminal L-N L-E N-E

Resistance 300 kΩ or more 9 MΩ or more 9 MΩ or more

5. Set the main power switch of the equipment to OFF (O).

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-29
 IN-30
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT 4. Press the stand-by switch on the operation panel.
Pressing the standby switch displays "888" on the operation panel.
Upon completion of the startup, the number of remaining films is displayed on the
7.1 Setting the Magazine and Powering ON operation panel.
#1
1. Insert into the slot the empty magazine set up in “5.6 Setting Operation panel
[Press]
Stand-by switch
Magazines”. For a 2 magazine setup, both slots must be occupied.

2. Connect the power plug to the outlet.

3. Set the main power switch on the equipment to ON position ( I ).
→ The pilot lamp on the operation panel lights up. The equipment will not have
started up at this point.
J0030.ai

#1
[ON]
主電源

J0029.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-30
 IN-31
7.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC- 7.3 System Settings
Utility) Using the PC-Utility, perform the following system settings of the equipment. Skip
items which can be left at their default values when operating the equipment.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment DRYPIX LITE
(Starting PC-Utility)}
+System information and setup
Setting1
Check Version
Set DICOM
Set Network
Display Mac address
Registration service pc
Setting2
Set Magazines
Option Slot
Enable QC
Set Target Den.
Printing Dmax
Set Rem.Films
User 17-Steps
User SMPTE
Set Side Position Revision ON/OFF
Check Counters
Display indv. data
Setting3
Set SMPTE
Set Date
Ele Save Mode
Set Alarm
Set OEM
Reboot
+Log data
Display Error Log
Clear Error Log
Display DICOM Log
Logging Mode J0036.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-31
 IN-32
7.3.1 Setting 1 Setting1
Set Network
<NOTE> IP Address
Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network administrator of Subnet Mask
the installation site. Gateway
Host Name J0043.ai

Setting1
Set DICOM n IP Address
AE Title Set the IP address (decimal) used for the network.
Port No. J0042.ai

<DEFAULT>
n AE Title “172.16.1.30”
Set the name of the printer (fixed at 16 digits) used in the DICOM protocol. <REMARKS>
<DEFAULT> • Input range: 000 to 255
“DRYPIX” • Values cannot be entered in the following way.
<REMARKS> • “000.000.000.000”
• “255.255.255.255”
• If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the • No value is entered.
remaining number of digits.
• Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh in
the 1-byte code table. n Subnet Mask
• The following are not accepted.
Set the subnet mask (decimal) used for the network.
• All spaces
• Space for the first digit <DEFAULT>
“255.255.0.0”
n Port No. <REMARKS>

Set the port number (decimal/5 digits) used for the network. • Input range: 000 to 255
• If no value is entered, it will be unaccepted.
<DEFAULT>
“17238”
<NOTE>
Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved.
• 23 : Telnet port
• 135, 445, 5000 : OS port
• 20051, 20052 : PC-Utility port

<REMARKS>
Input range: 0 to 65535

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-32
 IN-33
n Gateway n Registering the PC for Servicing
Set the gateway address (decimal) used for the network. Register the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) to enable file transfer.
Any unregistered PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) is limited in
<DEFAULT> function and does not support “Transfer Indv. Data” and “File Transfer” of PC-Utility.
“0.0.0.0” <REMARKS>
<REMARKS> Only one PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) can be registered. Only the
• Input range: 000 to 255 one registered last supports file transfer.
• Invalid input: “255.255.255.255”
• If no value is entered or “000.000.000.000” is entered, it will be taken as incomplete
setting.
1. Select [Registration service pc] in the maintenance tree.
2. In [Establish name], enter a name.
n Host Name <DEFAULT>
Set the host name (maximum 16 digits) used for the network. “Hospital Name”
<NOTE> <NOTE>
The host name must be the same as the name set in "Creating the Data Storage - Use one-byte alphanumeric when entering establish name.
Folder".
- The establish name must be the same as the name set in "Creating the Data
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.4_Setting Grouping Symbols} Storage Folder".
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.4_Setting Grouping Symbols}
<DEFAULT>
“fujiprinter” 3. In [Service PC IP Address], enter the IP address of the current PC for
<REMARKS> servicing (or settings-changeable models).
• Characters which can be entered for the host name include alphabets (upper and
<DEFAULT>
lower case), numerals, and hyphen “-”.
• The following are unaccepted. “172.16.1.20”
• Space 4. [Execute]
• Less than 2 characters
→ The PC for servicing is registered with the equipment.
• First character is a number

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-33
 IN-34
7.3.2 Setting 2 n Set Target Den.
Set the density of each step wedge used when recording the image QC pattern of
n Set Magazines U-Utility.
Command for setting the films for each magazine. <DEFAULT>
<REMARKS>
[Density 1: 48, Density 2: 120, Density 3: 192]
Set the unused film size to “OFF”.
n Printing Dmax
<Parameter> Set whether to enable/disable the “density 4” step wedge for density measurement in
the QC test pattern of U-Utility.
• [14x17]/[10x14]/[10x12]/[8x10]
• [ON]/[OFF] <Parameter>
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
Magazin1: [14x17] <DEFAULT>
Magazin2: [10x14] [OFF]
Magazin3: [8x10]
Magazin4: [10x12] n Set Rem.Films
Magazin5 to 7: [None]
Command for setting the number of films remaining in each magazine.
n Option Slot <Parameter>
Set whether the sheet-feeder unit is present. 0 to 100
<Parameter> <DEFAULT>
[ON]/ [OFF] Magazin1 to 4: 100
<DEFAULT> Magazin5 to 7: 0

[OFF] n User 17-Steps

n Enable QC Command for setting whether to display “17-Steps” at [4.Film Output>] of the U-Utility.

Set whether to enable/disable the image QC function. In order to use the image QC <Parameter>
function using U-Utility, this setting must be set to “Enable”. [ON]/ [OFF]
<Parameter> <DEFAULT>
[ON]/ [OFF] [ON]
<DEFAULT>
[ON]

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-34
 IN-35
n User SMPTE 7.3.3 Setting 3
Command for setting whether to display “SMPTE” at [4.Film Output>] of the U-Utility.
■ Set SMPTE
<Parameter>
Command for setting parameters for outputting SMPTE test patterns using U-Utility.
[ON]/ [OFF]
<Parameter>
<DEFAULT>
Select No. : [1] to [5]
[ON] AE Title
Image Matrix : [1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
LUT Number : [LUT 1] to [LUT 8]
Interpolation type : [SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]
Interpolation algorithm/method : [NONE]/[CUBIC]
<DEFAULT>
1 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
2 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
3 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
4 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
5 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC

n Set Date
Set the system date and time.

n Ele Save Mode

Set the timer value when this equipment shifts into the sleep mode.(unit: minute)
<Parameter>
[0]/ [15]/ [30]/ [45]
<DEFAULT>
[0]

n Set Alarm
Set whether to enable/disable the operation panel beep.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
[ON]

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-35
 IN-36
7.4 Rebooting the Equipment 7.5 Client Settings
Rebooting the equipment enables various system settings changed. Set parameters for the connected client using PC-Utility.

1. Select [Reboot] on the PC-Utility. <NOTE>

The default values for client parameters listed below are the values for a newly
DRYPIX LITE
registered client and differ from the default values set for “default”, “FCR-CSL”,
+System information and setup
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST”.
Setting1
Setting2
Setting3 1. Newly register the client according to the installation environment.
Set SMPTE
Set Date DRYPIX LITE
Ele Save Mode +System information and setup
Set Alarm +Transfer Indv. Data
Set OEM +Client Configuration
Reboot J0037.ai Add Client
Delete Client
2. [Reboot] → [Execute] Change Client Name
→ After “Command completed.” appears in the PC-Utility window, close the Read CLTInfo
window. +Clients
→ The equipment will reboot after about 65 seconds. default
FCR-CSL
3. Close the PC-Utility window. WatchDRYPIXLink
QC-TEST
4. Start the PC-Utility. Common
Client

{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Sarmaker J0038.ai

Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}

2. Set the various parameters according to the client setting list shown
below.For details of each feature, refer to “Service Mode (MU) 3.4 PC-
Utility Command Details [PC3] Client Configuration”.
MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC3]_Client Configuration}
<NOTE>
End the PC-Utility after completing the settings.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-36
 IN-37
n Protocol n Magnify
Bold: Default Bold: Default
Item Function Value Item Function Value
Attribute list error Send error message for unexpect- 0: not indicate Smoothing Type Selection of smoothing type 1: Sharp
(0107H Warning) ed data received or ignore warn- 1: indicate 2: Medium
ing 3: Smooth
N Event Report RQ Send event report or not 0: disable Default Requested Magnification/reduction setting if 1: DECIMATE
1: enable Decimate/Crop Behavior client does not send information 2: CROP
when images are reduced 3: FAIL
Attribute Value Out Of Send error message for out-of- 0: not indicate
Range (0116H Warning) range data received or ignore 1: indicate Magnification Type Set the image enlargement/reduc- 0: NONE
warning tion processing type 1: CUBIC
Image Size Is Larger Than Notify that images have been 0: not indicate Requested Image Size Specify the length of line to be 0 - 7000 (0)
imagebox reduced if too large to fit image 1: indicate printed on the image for one
(B604H Warning) frame, or ignore warning frame
Change Film Size Change film or not Default Magnification Type Which enlargement/reduction pro- 0: Printer
cessing type is to be used 1: Modality
Enables film change. Can set 0: 0116H[W]
whether to send details of error Default Smoothing Type Which smoothing type is to be 0: Printer
used 1: Modality
Details of errors are sent to the 272: 0110H[F]
client, without changing film Default Requested Image Which Requested Image Size is 0: Printer
Size to be used 1: Modality
Details of errors (unique values 21317: 5345H[F]
for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to Default Decimate/Crop Which Decimate/Crop Behavior is 0: Printer
the client,without changing the Behavior to be used 1: Modality
film
Procedure Selection of enlargement/reduc- 0: A-VR
Use System Timeout Set timeout of reception from cli- 0: No tion processing method 1: SSM
ent or not 1: Yes
Edge Detection Perform enlargement/reduction 0: OFF
Presentation LUT Use LUT information sent from cli- 0: No processing for edge or not 1: ON
ent or not 1: Yes
Detection Level Edge detection level setting 1 - 1023 (600/800/600)
Precede Picking Up Use precedent removal function 0: No
Sharpness Sharpness adjustment parameter -70 - 300 (130/30/80)
or not 1: Yes
setting
Use Max/Min Density Which minimum density/maximum 0: Printer
Character Color Character color setting 0: White
density value is to be used. 1: Modality
1: Black
Extension Format ID Select ID for differentiating when CR (XG-1/CR-Console)
extension format is used CR (Synapse)
EV (Philips Easy Vision)
HM (Hitachi DR2000/Clavis
view)
SM (Siemens)
Use Default Annotation Use Annotation or not 0: No
1: Yes
Change Base Color Change base color or not 0: disable
(Disable:110H[F]) 1: enable
Define Film Size of 11x14 Whether to interpret 11x14 size 0: 27.9x35.6
description as 25.7x36.4 cm or as 1: 25.7x36.4
27.9 x 35.6 cm
(The latter size is not used cur-
rently)

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-37
 IN-38
n LUT Common n Output Format
Bold: Default Bold: Default
Item Function Value Item Function Value
Default LUT Selection of LUT number used as 1 - 8 (1) Film Size Setting of default film size 1: 8x10
default 2: 10x14
3: 14x14
Illumination Lighting 0 - 65535 (2000) *1
4: 14x17
Ambient Light Reflected peripheral light 0 - 65535 (10) *1 5: 10x12
Configuration Information Which LUT number is to be used 0: Printer Medium Type Setting of default film base color 1: Blue
(Default LUT#) 1: Modality 0: Clear
Default Illumination Which lighting setting is to be 0: Printer Film Orientation Setting of film orientation 1: PORTRAIT
used 1: Modality 2: LANDSCAPE
Default Ambient Light Which reflected peripheral light is 0: Printer Border Density Background density (x100 of ac- 0 - 300 (300)
to be used 1: Modality tual value)
Procedure Selection of tone correction pro- 0: SAR Polarity Reverse the black/white of the im- 1: Normal
cessing method 1: BAR age 2: Reverse
Trim Whether there is image trim 0: OFF
*1: The Illumination and Reflective Ambient Light setting value total must be less than 4000. 1: ON

n LUT1 to LUT8 Trim Width Width of the trim (pixels) 1 - 9 (1)

Bold: Default Trim Density Image trim density (x100 of actual 0 - 300 (0)
value)
Item Function Value
Number of Copies Default number of print copies 1 - 99 (1)
Max Density Maximum density value (x100 for 0 - 300 (300)
SAR, BAR is % value) (BAR: 0 - 100) Print Priority Setting of print priority 1: HIGH
2: MEDIUM
Min Density Minimum density value (x100 for 0 - 300 (20) 3: LOW
SAR, No setting for BAR)
Default Number of Copies Which number of printed film is to 0: Printer
γTable No Selection of γ table number of 11 - 99 (BAR: 1 - 10) be used 1: Modality
LUT *2, *3
Default Print Priority Which Print Priority is to be used 0: Printer
Contrast Contrast setting (x100, No setting (BAR: 10 - 400) (100) 1: Modality
for SAR)
Default Medium Type Film base color priority 0: Printer
Number of Tuning Points No. of fine adjustment points for 0 - 5 (0) 1: Modality
SAR
Default Film Orientation Film orientation priority 0: Printer
Density Setting of x100 of density value to 1 - 300 (120) 1: Modality
be finely adjusted
Default Film Size Film size priority 0: Printer
Shift Setting of x100 value of move- -100 - 100 (0) 1: Modality
ment density value
Default Border Density Which background density is to be 0: Printer
Contrast Setting of x 100 of contrast of 10 - 400 (100) used 1: Modality
points to be finely adjusted
Default Trim Which Trim setting is to be used 0: Printer
*2: The default value differs in LUT1 to LUT8. 1: Modality
*3: Up to 20 can be entered for BAR but enter between 1 and 10. Default Polarity Which Polarity setting is to be 0: Printer
used 1: Modality
Mirror Setting of film back/front 0: OFF (Normal)
1: ON (Mirror)

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-38
 IN-39
Item Function Value n Annotation
Margin between Image Setting of image frame intervals 0 - 50 (20) Bold: Default
(Unit: pixel) Item Function Value
Image Layout Setting of image layout method Annotation Font Setting of font type of annotation 0: Japanese
Positioning to film center 0: concentration 1: Western
Center of remaining segment set 1: spread Annotation Extend Setting of magnification degree 1 - 4 (1)
with frame interval value of annotation printing area along
character height
Processing Type Setting of density processing cal- 0: Type1
culation method 1: Type2 Upper Left/Upper Center/Up- Setting of annotation position, and
per Right/Lower Left/Lower entering
Image Crop UPDWN Area Specifies whether the top or bot- 0: Upper Center/Lower Right
for CR Image tom is to be trimmed from a CR 1: Lower
image that is larger than the im- 2: Both *4
age box. n Common
Image Crop Side Area for Specifies whether the left or right 0: Left Bold: Default
CR Image is to be trimmed from a CR image 1: Right Item Function Value
that is larger than the image box. 2: Both
Data Transfer Timeout Standby time setting when data is 30 - 3600 (300)
suspended
*4: 14 x 17 Lower (Becomes error when setting time
is exceeded)
Association Count Maximum number of accesses to 1 - 10 (10)
the equipment at the same time
by DICOM communication
Logging DICOM DICOM communication log level 0: none
setting 1: normal
2: detail
Model Printer manufacture model name DRYPIX
Manufacturer Printer manufacturer name FUJIFILM Corporation
Default Client Whether to use or not the [default] 0: Yes
setting of the [Client:] list for un- 1: No
registered clients

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-39
 IN-40
8. CHECKING OPERATIONS 3. Push the magazine back into place.
→ When the magazine is inserted, a cleaning film sheet is output automatically.
The remaining film count displayed on the operation panel is “100”.
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction <INSTRUCTIONS>
and Conveyance Operations When printing the cleaning film, check that film conveyance operations are
normal.
Perform automatic density correction for each magazine. Check that film conveyance
operations are normal at the same time.
<NOTE>
1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state with the magazines
• For a 2 magazine setup, load both magazines with film and push them back
inserted in the slots. into place.
2. Pull out the magazine to the film loading position and load the film. • After detection of the two magazines, cleaning film sheets are output first from
Slot 1 (upper) and then from Slot 2 (lower). Cleaning film output will not start
#2 with only one magazine inserted.
[Open]
Magazine shutter
4. Press the utility button to start the U-Utility.
5. Execute U-1 (automatic density correction).
→ Automatic density correction is executed, and the 24-steps pattern is output.
<NOTE>
Film
For 2 magazine specifications, execute automatic density correction for each
magazine.
To change the slot, press the <ENTER> key with U-1 displayed on the User-
Utility, and then press the menu button.

#1
[Pull out]
Magazine J0033.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-40
 IN-41
8.2 Checking Density 8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for
The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is Image Unevenness and Scratches
displayed on the PC-Utility. Check from this data that the density value is within the
specification. Print grid patterns from each tray, and check that the recording image format is
within the specifications shown in the following figure. Also check that there are no
1. Start the PC-Utility. unevenness and scratches on the output film.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.2.2_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the 1. [Output Film] → [Grid] → [Number of copies]: “1” → [Execute]
Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}
→ The grid pattern is printed.
2. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [Execute] 2. Measure the recording image format of the film.
3. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown {IN (DRYPIX Lite):APPENDIX 3_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
below. <REMARKS>
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is If the recording image format is out of the specifications, perform “Adjusting Main
displayed on the PC-Utility. Scanner”.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.4 [PC9-1]_Side Margin}
Step Dmax 3.0
1 fog
3. Check that there are no problems in the output film image.
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4. 4. If there are several magazines, check the density of all magazines.
4 0.30±0.07
5 0.48±0.07
6 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07
8 1.02±0.07
9 1.20±0.07
10 1.38±0.07
11 1.56±0.07
12 1.74±0.07
13 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09
16 2.70±0.11
17 3.00±0.11

4. If there are several magazines, check the density of all magazines.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-41
 IN-42
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function 8.5 Checking Fan Operations

8.4.1 Checking the Head Cover Interlock 8.5.1 Checking the Controller Fan

1. Click [Check Mech.] → [Motor Ope.], and then set the following: 1. Check that the operations and the wind direction of the controller fan
Motors: MD11 are normal.
Action: CCW Fan
Speed: High speed

2. [Execute]
→ MD11drive and scanner test start.

3. After the drive is started, open the head cover.

Check that the operating sound of the MD11 stops.

4. Close the head cover.

D
IN
W
8.4.2 Checking the Lower Rear Open/Close Cover Interlock
(Only when the sheet-feeder unit is installed)

1. Click [Check Mech.] → [Motor Ope.], and then set the following: J0034.ai

Motors: MD11
Action: CCW
Speed: High speed

2. [Execute]
→ MD11drive and scanner test start.

3. After the drive is started, open the lower rear open/close cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MD11 stops.

4. Close the lower rear open/close cover.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-42
 IN-43
8.5.2 Checking the Head Cover Fan 8.6 Settings the Image QC Function
1. Click [Head Check] → [Fan Operation], and then set the following: To use the image QC function, enter the format baseline value of the image QC
function.
Fan Operation: ON
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):2.3[U-2]_QC}
2. [Execute] <REMARKS>

3. Check that the operations and the wind direction of the head cooling Format baseline values by film size
fans are normal.
Baseline values Established criteria
Fan
A 257.1mm ±12.9mm
35x43 cm
B 343.5mm ±17.2mm
A 257.1mm ±12.9mm
W 26x36 cm
B 170.8mm ±8.5mm
IN
D

A 227.3mm ±11.4mm
25x30 cm
B 257.1mm ±12.9mm
A 169.1mm ±8.5mm
20x25 cm
B 227.3mm ±11.4mm

J0035.ai

4. Using the PC-Utility, set the operation mode to [Usually].

5. [Execute]

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-43
 IN-44
8.7 Power OFF 8.8 Connecting to the Network
Shut down the equipment once.
1. Connect the network cable of this equipment to the network in the
1. Select [Setting3] → [Reboot] on the PC-Utility. hospital.

2. [Shutdown] → [Execute]
→ “Command completed.” is displayed on the PC Utility.

3. Close the PC-Utility.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-44

9. CHECKING CONNECTION
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment
1. Press the stand-by switch on the operation panel.
IN-45
9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
1. On the operation panel, press the standby switch for five seconds.
2. Check that the equipment starts termination operations and its power
goes OFF.

2. Check that the equipment starts up.

9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from
Connected Equipment
1. Output images from a device on the network connected to this
equipment, and check that films are output normally.
Check the following.
• Images are output without errors.
• Images are normal.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-45
 IN-46
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT 10.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs
Check whether errors occurred during installation using the PC-Utility, and delete the
error log.
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data <NOTE>
Save individual data as backup data in the PC for servicing. If error logs need to be saved, implement [Analysis Data] of the PC-Utility before
<REMARKS> executing “Deleting Error Logs”.
The individual data saved in the PC for servicing should be saved as backup on other
media. 10.2.1 Checking Error Logs

1. Start the PC-Utility. 1. Click [Display Error Log].

DRYPIX LITE
2. Click [Transfer Indv. Data]. +System information and setup
DRYPIX LITE +Log data
+System information and setup Display Error Log J0040.ai

+Transfer Indv. Data J0039.ai

2. [Execute]
3. Select “PC<-Printer" for [Select direction]. → The error log of the equipment is displayed.

4. [Execute].
→ The equipment data is saved in the PC for servicing.
[Transfer Indv. data check] is displayed on the browser when transfer
completes.
<REMARKS>
Data storage folder: FTP root directory\DRYPIXLITE\Printers/Establish name_Printer
name\Indv

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-46
 IN-47
10.2.2 Deleting Error Logs 10.3 Installing the Equipment
1. Click [Clear Error Log]. Move the equipment to the place of installation to enable use by the user.
Perform the following installation work.
2. [Execute] • If placing the equipment without fixing on the floor
→ The error log of the equipment is deleted. • If securing the cart on the floor
After deleting the error log, the logout windows opens indicating “ Command
completed.” 10.3.1 Installing the Equipment
3. After completing settings, click [Logout] button of the maintenance 1. Ensure the required installation space around the equipment.
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens. 2. Move the equipment to the desired place of the user.
<REMARKS>
10.3.2 Installation onto Cart
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.
{MU (DRYPIX Lite):3.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}
1. Lift the equipment main body and place it on the cart top.

4. Close the logout window.

5. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
6. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
to which the equipment is connected.

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-47
 IN-48
10.3.3 Securing the Cart with Fixtures <NOTE>
As an anti-earthquake measure, tighten the anti-earthquake measure fixture
1. Move the equipment to the position for embedding the anchor nuts. using the adjustable foot.

2. Rotate the two adjustable foots of the equipment with the hand and
ground to the floor.

3. Rotate the lower nut of the adjustable foot with a spanner and adjust
the height.
Rotate the two nuts equally. Adjust the amount the nut is adjusted so that even
load is applied to the adjustable foot.

<NOTE> Fixture
Rotate the nut until the caster distances from the floor. Button bolt with
hexagonal hole
(M8x20, SW8, W8)
4. Rotate the upper nut of the adjustable foot and push against the cart
to secure.

FPEB0485.AI

Cart
5. Secure the power cable and network cable to the cart using the tie
band.

Caster ［Rotate］Nut

［Rotate］Nut
Max. 1.75 mm
(Rotates for one
round in the case of M12)

Adjustable foot
FPEB0484.AI

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-48
 IN-49
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
1. Clean all covers with a moist cloth.
CAUTION
Ensure cloth is free of residual water and water does not enter the device.

016-201-07E
04.27.2012 FM6040
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-49
 IN-50
APPENDIX 1. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE n Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective
Grounding of the Equipment
GROUNDING
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the Please use power supply cord approved by the electrical standard of the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. country to which the equipment is to be installed.
Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC 60601-1-1.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>
isolated supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
for additional protective grounding” on the next page. connection of additional protective grounding.
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move
electrical facility construction. the connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used grade earth terminal.
room” are given below.
3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply
l Patient Environment from the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Non-Medically Used Room M4
Additional protective
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room. grounding cable

Power cable

Additional protective
grounding cable J0005E.ai

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-50
 IN-51
APPENDIX 2. DENSITOMETER TM-5 TM-5 TM-5
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
CONVERSION TABLES Measurement
Value
Value Measurement
Value
Value Measurement
Value
Value

0.83 0.83 1.19 1.18 1.55 1.52

Provided in the following pages are the tables for converting densitometer 0.84 0.84 1.20 1.19 1.56 1.53
measurement values to true density values.
Applicable densitometer: TM-5 0.85 0.85 1.21 1.20 1.57 1.54
301RS (with or without filter for DRYPIX 1000/3000) 0.86 0.86 1.22 1.20 1.58 1.55
331RS (with filter for DRYPIX 1000/3000) 0.87 0.87 1.23 1.21 1.59 1.56
0.88 0.87 1.24 1.22 1.60 1.57
<TM-5 Densitometer Conversion Table>
0.89 0.88 1.25 1.23 1.61 1.58
How to Use: Obtain the measurement value using a TM-5 densitometer and locate it 0.90 0.89 1.26 1.24 1.62 1.59
and its converted value in the table below. When the measurement value is 1.00, for
0.91 0.90 1.27 1.25 1.63 1.60
instance, its true density value is 0.99.
0.92 0.91 1.28 1.26 1.64 1.61
TM-5 TM-5 TM-5 0.93 0.92 1.29 1.27 1.65 1.62
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density 0.94 0.93 1.30 1.28 1.66 1.63
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value 0.95 0.94 1.31 1.29 1.67 1.64
0.14 0.15 0.37 0.37 0.60 0.60 0.96 0.95 1.32 1.30 1.68 1.65
0.15 0.16 0.38 0.38 0.61 0.61 0.97 0.96 1.33 1.31 1.69 1.66
0.16 0.17 0.39 0.39 0.62 0.62 0.98 0.97 1.34 1.32 1.70 1.67
0.17 0.18 0.40 0.40 0.63 0.63 0.99 0.98 1.35 1.33 1.71 1.68
0.18 0.19 0.41 0.41 0.64 0.65 1.00 0.99 1.36 1.34 1.72 1.69
0.19 0.20 0.42 0.42 0.65 0.66 1.01 1.00 1.37 1.35 1.73 1.70
0.20 0.20 0.43 0.43 0.66 0.67 1.02 1.01 1.38 1.36 1.74 1.71
0.21 0.21 0.44 0.44 0.67 0.68 1.03 1.02 1.39 1.37 1.75 1.72
0.22 0.22 0.45 0.45 0.68 0.69 1.04 1.03 1.40 1.38 1.76 1.73
0.23 0.23 0.46 0.46 0.69 0.69 1.05 1.04 1.41 1.39 1.77 1.73
0.24 0.25 0.47 0.47 0.70 0.70 1.06 1.05 1.42 1.40 1.78 1.74
0.25 0.26 0.48 0.48 0.71 0.71 1.07 1.06 1.43 1.41 1.79 1.75
0.26 0.27 0.49 0.49 0.72 0.72 1.08 1.07 1.44 1.42 1.80 1.76
0.27 0.28 0.50 0.50 0.73 0.73 1.09 1.08 1.45 1.43 1.81 1.77
0.28 0.29 0.51 0.51 0.74 0.74 1.10 1.09 1.46 1.44 1.82 1.78
0.29 0.30 0.52 0.52 0.75 0.75 1.11 1.10 1.47 1.45 1.83 1.79
0.30 0.31 0.53 0.53 0.76 0.76 1.12 1.11 1.48 1.46 1.84 1.80
0.31 0.32 0.54 0.54 0.77 0.77 1.13 1.12 1.49 1.47 1.85 1.81
0.32 0.33 0.55 0.55 0.78 0.78 1.14 1.13 1.50 1.47 1.86 1.82
0.33 0.34 0.56 0.56 0.79 0.79 1.15 1.14 1.51 1.48 1.87 1.83
0.34 0.34 0.57 0.57 0.80 0.80 1.16 1.15 1.52 1.49 1.88 1.84
0.35 0.35 0.58 0.58 0.81 0.81 1.17 1.16 1.53 1.50 1.89 1.85
0.36 0.36 0.59 0.59 0.82 0.82 1.18 1.17 1.54 1.51 1.90 1.86

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-51
 IN-52
TM-5 TM-5 TM-5 TM-5 TM-5 TM-5
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value Value Value Value
1.91 1.87 2.27 2.22 2.63 2.56 2.99 2.90 3.17 3.06 3.35 3.22
1.92 1.88 2.28 2.23 2.64 2.57 3.00 2.91 3.18 3.07 3.36 3.23
1.93 1.89 2.29 2.24 2.65 2.58 3.01 2.92 3.19 3.08 3.37 3.24
1.94 1.90 2.30 2.25 2.66 2.59 3.02 2.93 3.20 3.09 3.38 3.25
1.95 1.91 2.31 2.26 2.67 2.60 3.03 2.94 3.21 3.10 3.39 3.26
1.96 1.92 2.32 2.27 2.68 2.61 3.04 2.95 3.22 3.11 3.40 3.27
1.97 1.93 2.33 2.28 2.69 2.62 3.05 2.95 3.23 3.12 3.41 3.28
1.98 1.94 2.34 2.29 2.70 2.63 3.06 2.96 3.24 3.13 3.42 3.29
1.99 1.95 2.35 2.30 2.71 2.64 3.07 2.97 3.25 3.14 3.43 3.30
2.00 1.96 2.36 2.31 2.72 2.65 3.08 2.98 3.26 3.15 3.44 3.31
2.01 1.97 2.37 2.32 2.73 2.66 3.09 2.99 3.27 3.15 3.45 3.32
2.02 1.98 2.38 2.33 2.74 2.67 3.10 3.00 3.28 3.16 3.46 3.32
2.03 1.99 2.39 2.34 2.75 2.68 3.11 3.01 3.29 3.17 3.47 3.33
2.04 2.00 2.40 2.35 2.76 2.69 3.12 3.02 3.30 3.18 3.48 3.34
2.05 2.01 2.41 2.36 2.77 2.69 3.13 3.03 3.31 3.19 3.49 3.35
2.06 2.02 2.42 2.37 2.78 2.70 3.14 3.04 3.32 3.20 3.50 3.36
2.07 2.03 2.43 2.38 2.79 2.71 3.15 3.04 3.33 3.20
2.08 2.04 2.44 2.38 2.80 2.72 3.16 3.05 3.34 3.21
2.09 2.05 2.45 2.39 2.81 2.73
2.10 2.06 2.46 2.40 2.82 2.74
2.11 2.06 2.47 2.41 2.83 2.75
2.12 2.07 2.48 2.42 2.84 2.76
2.13 2.08 2.49 2.43 2.85 2.77
2.14 2.09 2.50 2.44 2.86 2.78
2.15 2.10 2.51 2.45 2.87 2.79
2.16 2.11 2.52 2.46 2.88 2.80
2.17 2.12 2.53 2.47 2.89 2.81
2.18 2.13 2.54 2.48 2.90 2.82
2.19 2.14 2.55 2.49 2.91 2.83
2.20 2.15 2.56 2.50 2.92 2.84
2.21 2.16 2.57 2.51 2.93 2.85
2.22 2.17 2.58 2.52 2.94 2.86
2.23 2.18 2.59 2.53 2.95 2.87
2.24 2.19 2.60 2.54 2.96 2.88
2.25 2.20 2.61 2.55 2.97 2.88
2.26 2.21 2.62 2.55 2.98 2.89

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-52
 IN-53
<301RS Densitometer Conversion Table (with filter)> 301RS 301RS 301RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
The table below shows true density values for measurement values obtained using a Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
301RS densitometer with a filter specified for DRYPIX 1000/3000. Value Value Value
How to Use: Obtain the measurement value using a 301RS densitometer and locate 1.05 1.08 1.41 1.45 1.77 1.81
it and its converted value in the table below. When the measurement value is 1.00, for 1.06 1.09 1.42 1.46 1.78 1.82
instance, its true density value is 1.03.
1.07 1.10 1.43 1.47 1.79 1.83
301RS 301RS 301RS 1.08 1.11 1.44 1.48 1.80 1.84
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density 1.09 1.12 1.45 1.49 1.81 1.85
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value 1.10 1.13 1.46 1.50 1.82 1.86
0.15 0.15 0.45 0.46 0.75 0.77 1.11 1.14 1.47 1.51 1.83 1.87
0.16 0.16 0.46 0.47 0.76 0.78 1.12 1.15 1.48 1.52 1.84 1.88
0.17 0.17 0.47 0.48 0.77 0.79 1.13 1.16 1.49 1.53 1.85 1.89
0.18 0.18 0.48 0.49 0.78 0.80 1.14 1.17 1.50 1.54 1.86 1.90
0.19 0.19 0.49 0.51 0.79 0.81 1.15 1.18 1.51 1.55 1.87 1.90
0.20 0.20 0.50 0.52 0.80 0.82 1.16 1.19 1.52 1.56 1.88 1.91
0.21 0.21 0.51 0.53 0.81 0.83 1.17 1.20 1.53 1.57 1.89 1.93
0.22 0.22 0.52 0.54 0.82 0.84 1.18 1.21 1.54 1.58 1.90 1.94
0.23 0.23 0.53 0.55 0.83 0.85 1.19 1.22 1.55 1.59 1.91 1.95
0.24 0.24 0.54 0.56 0.84 0.86 1.20 1.23 1.56 1.60 1.92 1.96
0.25 0.25 0.55 0.57 0.85 0.87 1.21 1.24 1.57 1.61 1.93 1.97
0.26 0.26 0.56 0.58 0.86 0.88 1.22 1.26 1.58 1.62 1.94 1.98
0.27 0.28 0.57 0.59 0.87 0.89 1.23 1.27 1.59 1.63 1.95 1.99
0.28 0.29 0.58 0.60 0.88 0.90 1.24 1.28 1.60 1.64 1.96 2.00
0.29 0.30 0.59 0.61 0.89 0.91 1.25 1.29 1.61 1.65 1.97 2.01
0.30 0.31 0.60 0.62 0.90 0.92 1.26 1.30 1.62 1.66 1.98 2.02
0.31 0.32 0.61 0.63 0.91 0.93 1.27 1.31 1.63 1.67 1.99 2.03
0.32 0.33 0.62 0.64 0.92 0.94 1.28 1.32 1.64 1.68 2.00 2.04
0.33 0.34 0.63 0.65 0.93 0.95 1.29 1.33 1.65 1.69 2.01 2.05
0.34 0.35 0.64 0.66 0.94 0.96 1.30 1.34 1.66 1.70 2.02 2.06
0.35 0.36 0.65 0.67 0.95 0.98 1.31 1.35 1.67 1.71 2.03 2.07
0.36 0.37 0.66 0.68 0.96 0.99 1.32 1.36 1.68 1.72 2.04 2.08
0.37 0.38 0.67 0.69 0.97 1.00 1.33 1.37 1.69 1.73 2.05 2.09
0.38 0.39 0.68 0.70 0.98 1.01 1.34 1.38 1.70 1.74 2.06 2.10
0.39 0.40 0.69 0.71 0.99 1.02 1.35 1.39 1.71 1.75 2.07 2.11
0.40 0.41 0.70 0.72 1.00 1.03 1.36 1.40 1.72 1.76 2.08 2.12
0.41 0.42 0.71 0.73 1.01 1.04 1.37 1.41 1.73 1.77 2.09 2.13
0.42 0.43 0.72 0.74 1.02 1.05 1.38 1.42 1.74 1.78 2.10 2.14
0.43 0.44 0.73 0.75 1.03 1.06 1.39 1.43 1.75 1.79 2.11 2.15
0.44 0.45 0.74 0.76 1.04 1.07 1.40 1.44 1.76 1.80 2.12 2.16

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-53
 IN-54
301RS 301RS 301RS 301RS 301RS 301RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value Value Value Value
2.13 2.17 2.49 2.53 2.85 2.88 3.21 3.24 3.27 3.30 3.33 3.36
2.14 2.18 2.50 2.54 2.86 2.89 3.22 3.25 3.28 3.31 3.34 3.37
2.15 2.19 2.51 2.54 2.87 2.90 3.23 3.26 3.29 3.32 3.35 3.38
2.16 2.20 2.52 2.55 2.88 2.91 3.24 3.27 3.30 3.33 3.36 3.39
2.17 2.21 2.53 2.56 2.89 2.92 3.25 3.28 3.31 3.34
2.18 2.22 2.54 2.57 2.90 2.93 3.26 3.29 3.32 3.35
2.19 2.23 2.55 2.58 2.91 2.94
2.20 2.24 2.56 2.59 2.92 2.95
2.21 2.25 2.57 2.60 2.93 2.96
2.22 2.26 2.58 2.61 2.94 2.97
2.23 2.27 2.59 2.62 2.95 2.98
2.24 2.28 2.60 2.63 2.96 2.99
2.25 2.29 2.61 2.64 2.97 3.00
2.26 2.30 2.62 2.65 2.98 3.01
2.27 2.31 2.63 2.66 2.99 3.02
2.28 2.32 2.64 2.67 3.00 3.03
2.29 2.33 2.65 2.68 3.01 3.04
2.30 2.34 2.66 2.69 3.02 3.05
2.31 2.35 2.67 2.70 3.03 3.06
2.32 2.36 2.68 2.71 3.04 3.07
2.33 2.37 2.69 2.72 3.05 3.08
2.34 2.38 2.70 2.73 3.06 3.09
2.35 2.39 2.71 2.74 3.07 3.10
2.36 2.40 2.72 2.75 3.08 3.11
2.37 2.41 2.73 2.76 3.09 3.12
2.38 2.42 2.74 2.77 3.10 3.13
2.39 2.43 2.75 2.78 3.11 3.14
2.40 2.44 2.76 2.79 3.12 3.15
2.41 2.45 2.77 2.80 3.13 3.16
2.42 2.46 2.78 2.81 3.14 3.17
2.43 2.47 2.79 2.82 3.15 3.18
2.44 2.48 2.80 2.83 3.16 3.19
2.45 2.49 2.81 2.84 3.17 3.20
2.46 2.50 2.82 2.85 3.18 3.21
2.47 2.51 2.83 2.86 3.19 3.22
2.48 2.52 2.84 2.87 3.20 3.23

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-54
 IN-55
<301RS Densitometer Conversion Table (without filter)> 301RS 301RS 301RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
The table below shows true density values for measurement values obtained using a Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
301RS densitometer without a filter. Value Value Value
How to Use: Obtain the measurement value using a 301RS densitometer and locate 1.05 1.11 1.41 1.54 1.77 2.06
it and its converted value in the table below. When the measurement value is 1.00, for 1.06 1.12 1.42 1.55 1.78 2.08
instance, its true density value is 1.05.
1.07 1.13 1.43 1.56 1.79 2.10
301RS 301RS 301RS 1.08 1.14 1.44 1.57 1.80 2.12
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density 1.09 1.15 1.45 1.59 1.81 2.13
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value 1.10 1.17 1.46 1.60 1.82 2.15
0.15 0.16 0.45 0.47 0.75 0.78 1.11 1.18 1.47 1.61 1.83 2.17
0.16 0.17 0.46 0.48 0.76 0.79 1.12 1.19 1.48 1.63 1.84 2.19
0.17 0.18 0.47 0.49 0.77 0.80 1.13 1.20 1.49 1.64 1.85 2.20
0.18 0.19 0.48 0.50 0.78 0.81 1.14 1.21 1.50 1.66 1.86 2.22
0.19 0.20 0.49 0.51 0.79 0.83 1.15 1.22 1.51 1.67 1.87 2.25
0.20 0.21 0.50 0.52 0.80 0.84 1.16 1.23 1.52 1.68 1.88 2.27
0.21 0.22 0.51 0.53 0.81 0.85 1.17 1.24 1.53 1.70 1.89 2.29
0.22 0.23 0.52 0.54 0.82 0.86 1.18 1.26 1.54 1.71 1.90 2.31
0.23 0.24 0.53 0.55 0.83 0.87 1.19 1.27 1.55 1.73 1.91 2.34
0.24 0.25 0.54 0.56 0.84 0.88 1.20 1.28 1.56 1.74 1.92 2.36
0.25 0.26 0.55 0.57 0.85 0.89 1.21 1.29 1.57 1.75 1.93 2.38
0.26 0.27 0.56 0.58 0.86 0.90 1.22 1.31 1.58 1.77 1.94 2.40
0.27 0.28 0.57 0.59 0.87 0.91 1.23 1.32 1.59 1.78 1.95 2.42
0.28 0.29 0.58 0.60 0.88 0.92 1.24 1.33 1.60 1.80 1.96 2.45
0.29 0.30 0.59 0.61 0.89 0.93 1.25 1.34 1.61 1.81 1.97 2.47
0.30 0.31 0.60 0.62 0.90 0.94 1.26 1.35 1.62 1.82 1.98 2.50
0.31 0.32 0.61 0.64 0.91 0.95 1.27 1.37 1.63 1.84 1.99 2.52
0.32 0.33 0.62 0.65 0.92 0.96 1.28 1.38 1.64 1.85 2.00 2.55
0.33 0.34 0.63 0.66 0.93 0.97 1.29 1.39 1.65 1.87 2.01 2.58
0.34 0.35 0.64 0.67 0.94 0.99 1.30 1.40 1.66 1.88 2.02 2.61
0.35 0.36 0.65 0.68 0.95 1.00 1.31 1.42 1.67 1.90 2.03 2.63
0.36 0.38 0.66 0.69 0.96 1.01 1.32 1.43 1.68 1.91 2.04 2.66
0.37 0.39 0.67 0.70 0.97 1.02 1.33 1.44 1.69 1.93 2.05 2.69
0.38 0.40 0.68 0.71 0.98 1.03 1.34 1.45 1.70 1.94 2.06 2.72
0.39 0.41 0.69 0.72 0.99 1.04 1.35 1.46 1.71 1.96 2.07 2.76
0.40 0.42 0.70 0.73 1.00 1.05 1.36 1.48 1.72 1.98 2.08 2.79
0.41 0.43 0.71 0.74 1.01 1.06 1.37 1.49 1.73 2.00 2.09 2.82
0.42 0.44 0.72 0.75 1.02 1.08 1.38 1.50 1.74 2.01 2.10 2.86
0.43 0.45 0.73 0.76 1.03 1.09 1.39 1.51 1.75 2.03 2.11 2.90
0.44 0.46 0.74 0.77 1.04 1.10 1.40 1.53 1.76 2.05 2.12 2.93

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-55
 IN-56
301RS 301RS 301RS <331RS Densitometer Conversion Table (with filter)>
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value The table below shows true density values for measurement values obtained using a
Value Value Value 331RS densitometer with a filter specified for DRYPIX 1000/3000.
2.13 2.97 2.18 3.19 2.23 3.40 How to Use: Obtain the measurement value using a 331RS densitometer and locate
2.14 3.01 2.19 3.23 2.24 3.44 it and its converted value in the table below. When the measurement value is 1.00, for
instance, its true density value is 1.01.
2.15 3.05 2.20 3.28 2.25 3.49
2.16 3.10 2.21 3.32 331RS 331RS 331RS
2.17 3.14 2.22 3.36 Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value
0.13 0.16 0.43 0.45 0.73 0.75
0.14 0.17 0.44 0.46 0.74 0.76
0.15 0.18 0.45 0.47 0.75 0.77
0.16 0.19 0.46 0.48 0.76 0.78
0.17 0.19 0.47 0.49 0.77 0.79
0.18 0.20 0.48 0.50 0.78 0.80
0.19 0.21 0.49 0.51 0.79 0.81
0.20 0.22 0.50 0.52 0.80 0.82
0.21 0.23 0.51 0.53 0.81 0.82
0.22 0.24 0.52 0.54 0.82 0.83
0.23 0.25 0.53 0.55 0.83 0.84
0.24 0.26 0.54 0.56 0.84 0.85
0.25 0.27 0.55 0.57 0.85 0.86
0.26 0.28 0.56 0.58 0.86 0.87
0.27 0.29 0.57 0.59 0.87 0.88
0.28 0.30 0.58 0.60 0.88 0.89
0.29 0.31 0.59 0.61 0.89 0.90
0.30 0.32 0.60 0.62 0.90 0.91
0.31 0.33 0.61 0.63 0.91 0.92
0.32 0.34 0.62 0.64 0.92 0.93
0.33 0.35 0.63 0.65 0.93 0.94
0.34 0.36 0.64 0.66 0.94 0.95
0.35 0.37 0.65 0.67 0.95 0.96
0.36 0.38 0.66 0.68 0.96 0.97
0.37 0.39 0.67 0.69 0.97 0.98
0.38 0.40 0.68 0.70 0.98 0.99
0.39 0.41 0.69 0.71 0.99 1.00
0.40 0.42 0.70 0.72 1.00 1.01
0.41 0.43 0.71 0.73 1.01 1.02
0.42 0.44 0.72 0.74 1.02 1.03

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-56
 IN-57
331RS 331RS 331RS 331RS 331RS 331RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value Value Value Value
1.03 1.04 1.39 1.40 1.75 1.74 2.11 2.10 2.47 2.44 2.83 2.77
1.04 1.05 1.40 1.41 1.76 1.75 2.12 2.11 2.48 2.45 2.84 2.78
1.05 1.06 1.41 1.42 1.77 1.76 2.13 2.12 2.49 2.46 2.85 2.79
1.06 1.07 1.42 1.43 1.78 1.77 2.14 2.13 2.50 2.47 2.86 2.80
1.07 1.08 1.43 1.44 1.79 1.78 2.15 2.13 2.51 2.48 2.87 2.81
1.08 1.09 1.44 1.44 1.80 1.79 2.16 2.14 2.52 2.48 2.88 2.82
1.09 1.10 1.45 1.45 1.81 1.80 2.17 2.15 2.53 2.49 2.89 2.83
1.10 1.11 1.46 1.46 1.82 1.81 2.18 2.16 2.54 2.50 2.90 2.84
1.11 1.12 1.47 1.47 1.83 1.82 2.19 2.17 2.55 2.51 2.91 2.85
1.12 1.13 1.48 1.48 1.84 1.83 2.20 2.18 2.56 2.52 2.92 2.86
1.13 1.14 1.49 1.49 1.85 1.84 2.21 2.19 2.57 2.53 2.93 2.87
1.14 1.15 1.50 1.50 1.86 1.85 2.22 2.20 2.58 2.54 2.94 2.88
1.15 1.16 1.51 1.51 1.87 1.86 2.23 2.21 2.59 2.55 2.95 2.89
1.16 1.17 1.52 1.52 1.88 1.87 2.24 2.22 2.60 2.56 2.96 2.89
1.17 1.18 1.53 1.53 1.89 1.88 2.25 2.23 2.61 2.57 2.97 2.90
1.18 1.19 1.54 1.54 1.90 1.89 2.26 2.24 2.62 2.58 2.98 2.91
1.19 1.20 1.55 1.55 1.91 1.90 2.27 2.25 2.63 2.59 2.99 2.92
1.20 1.21 1.56 1.56 1.92 1.91 2.28 2.26 2.64 2.60 3.00 2.93
1.21 1.22 1.57 1.57 1.93 1.92 2.29 2.27 2.65 2.61 3.01 2.94
1.22 1.23 1.58 1.58 1.94 1.93 2.30 2.28 2.66 2.62 3.02 2.95
1.23 1.24 1.59 1.59 1.95 1.94 2.31 2.29 2.67 2.63 3.03 2.96
1.24 1.25 1.60 1.60 1.96 1.95 2.32 2.30 2.68 2.63 3.04 2.97
1.25 1.26 1.61 1.61 1.97 1.96 2.33 2.31 2.69 2.64 3.05 2.98
1.26 1.27 1.62 1.62 1.98 1.97 2.34 2.32 2.70 2.65 3.06 2.99
1.27 1.28 1.63 1.63 1.99 1.98 2.35 2.33 2.71 2.66 3.07 3.00
1.28 1.29 1.64 1.64 2.00 1.99 2.36 2.34 2.72 2.67 3.08 3.01
1.29 1.30 1.65 1.65 2.01 2.00 2.37 2.34 2.73 2.68 3.09 3.02
1.30 1.31 1.66 1.66 2.02 2.01 2.38 2.35 2.74 2.69 3.10 3.02
1.31 1.32 1.67 1.67 2.03 2.02 2.39 2.36 2.75 2.70 3.11 3.03
1.32 1.33 1.68 1.68 2.04 2.03 2.40 2.37 2.76 2.71 3.12 3.04
1.33 1.34 1.69 1.69 2.05 2.04 2.41 2.38 2.77 2.72 3.13 3.05
1.34 1.35 1.70 1.70 2.06 2.05 2.42 2.39 2.78 2.73 3.14 3.06
1.35 1.36 1.71 1.70 2.07 2.06 2.43 2.40 2.79 2.74 3.15 3.07
1.36 1.37 1.72 1.71 2.08 2.07 2.44 2.41 2.80 2.75 3.16 3.08
1.37 1.38 1.73 1.72 2.09 2.08 2.45 2.42 2.81 2.76 3.17 3.09
1.38 1.39 1.74 1.73 2.10 2.09 2.46 2.43 2.82 2.77 3.18 3.10

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-57
 IN-58
331RS 331RS 331RS
Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density Densitometer True Density
Measurement Value Measurement Value Measurement Value
Value Value Value
3.19 3.11 3.30 3.20 3.41 3.30
3.20 3.12 3.31 3.21 3.42 3.31
3.21 3.12 3.32 3.22 3.43 3.32
3.22 3.13 3.33 3.23 3.44 3.33
3.23 3.14 3.34 3.24 3.45 3.34
3.24 3.15 3.35 3.25 3.46 3.35
3.25 3.16 3.36 3.26 3.47 3.36
3.26 3.17 3.37 3.27 3.48 3.36
3.27 3.18 3.38 3.27 3.49 3.37
3.28 3.18 3.39 3.28 3.50 3.38
3.29 3.19 3.40 3.29

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-58
 IN-59
APPENDIX 3. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR (Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
EACH FILM SIZE A 12.0 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 9.5 ±1.0
(B’ + B”)/2 12.6 ±0.8 12.9 ±1.5 11.2 ±1.0 10.5 ±1.0
35 x 43 cm size Conveyance direction 25 x 30 cm size Conveyance direction | B’ – B” | ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.1
A A (C + C’)/2 403.5 ±1.5 233.0 ±1.0 278.8 ±1.0 180.0 ±1.0
| C – C’ | ≤1.2 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
D
D B’ D, D’ 328.7 ±0.5 338.6 ±0.5 229.5 ±0.5 230.9 ±0.5
B’ C C’
| D – D’ | ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5
B
C C’
303.0 ±1.0
B
430.0 ±1.0
B” D’

252.0 ±1.0

B” D’

354.0 ±1.0

26 x 36 cm size Conveyance direction 20 x 25 cm size Conveyance direction

A A

B’ B’ D
D
C C’ B
B 201.0 ±1.0
257.5 ±1.0
C C’
B” D’

B” D’
252.0 ±1.0

364.5 ±1.0 FPDB0700.AI

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual IN-59
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

08.31.2006 02 New release (FM4958) All pages

10.18.2006 03 Revised (FM5036) 3
02.15.2007 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software 1, 3
version V2.0 and V2.1, etc.) (FM5075)

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL 01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) Cover

PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

(DRYPIX 2000)

016-201-06E DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 PC-1
INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX 2000 - Checklist
Checklist  3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION

The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps preformed and record the
values determined at the time a DRYPIX 2000 is installed at a site. This document is
not intended to replace the installation checklist located in the DRYPIX 2000 Service
Manual but to be followed concurrently.
Before passing over this equipment to the customer, check the system connection and
output image (from section 8 on) after service as well as at installation.
Installation Information
Serial Number : ___________________ Software Ver. : ____________________
 4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
 4.3 Checking Components
 5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND ASSEMBLING/INSTALLING OPTIONS
 5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures (Tape)
 5.2 Assembling of Cart
 5.3 Temporary Installation onto Cart
 5.4 Installing Equipment Fixtures
 5.5 Affixing the Car-mounting Tape
 5.6 Installing the Sheet-feeder Unit to the Equipment Main Body

Site Name : ___________________ Installed by : ____________________  5.7 Exchanging the Image Memory Board
 5.8 Setting Magazines
Site Number : ___________________ Signature : ____________________
 6. CONNECTING CABLES
Room Number : ___________________ Date Completed : ____________________  5.5 Exchanging the Image Memory Board
 6.1 Connecting the Network Cable
 6.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance
• Record resistance value measured:
Resistance between L and N : ________Ω
Resistance between L and E : ________Ω
Resistance between N and E : ________Ω

 7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT

 7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility
 7.2 System Settings
 7.2.1 Configuration Setting
 7.2.2 Operation Panel Settings
 7.2.3 Network Settings
 7.3 Ending System Settings

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PC-1
 PC-2
 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
• Check for film jamming  Pass  Fail
 8.2 Checking Density
• Record density value displayed:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.

Step Dmax 3.0 Magazine 1 Magazine 2 Magazine 3 Magazine 4 Magazine 5 Magazine 6 Magazine 7
1 fog
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30 ±0.07
5 0.48 ±0.07
6 0.66 ±0.07
7 0.84 ±0.07
8 1.02 ±0.07
9 1.20 ±0.07
10 1.38 ±0.07
11 1.56 ±0.07
12 1.74 ±0.07
13 1.92 ±0.07
14 2.10 ±0.09
15 2.40 ±0.11
16 2.70 ±0.11
17 3.00 ±0.11

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PC-2
 PC-3
 8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and Scratches  8.4 Checking the Interlock Function
• Check for image unevenness and scratches:  Pass  Fail • Head cover interlock
• Measure recording image format: • Rear open/close cover interlock
Check that the measured values are within the specified values. • Lower rear open/close cover interlock
 8.5 Checking Fan Operations
 8.6 Ending the M-Utility
 8.7 Settings the Image QC Function
 8.8 Connecting to the Network

 9. CLIENT SETTINGS
 9.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network
 9.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Equipment (Web Server Start)
 9.3 How to Operate PC-Utility
 9.4 System Settings via PC-Utility
 9.5 Registering the PC for Servicing
 9.6 Client Settings
 9.7 Disconnecting the Equipment
 9.8 Ending the Equipment

 10. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION

 10.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment
 10.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
 10.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment

 11. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT

 11.1 Backing Up Individual Data
 11.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
 11.3 Installation
(Unit: mm)  11.4 Cleaning the Equipment
Position 35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
 11.5 Affixing the Main Power Switch OFF Caution Label
A 12.0 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 9.5 ±1.0
(B’ + B”)/2 12.6 ±0.8 12.9 ±1.5 11.2 ±1.0 10.5 ±1.0
| B’ – B” | ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.1
(C + C’)/2 403.5 ±1.5 233.0 ±1.0 278.8 ±1.0 180.0 ±1.0
| C – C’ | ≤1.2 ≤0.7 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
D, D’ 328.7 ±0.5 338.6 ±0.5 229.5 ±0.5 230.9 ±0.5
| D – D’ | ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5

016-201-04E
02.15.2007 FM5075
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PC-3
 PC-4
Summary Test:  Pass  Fail
 Leave the final film at the customer site.

Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________

Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PC-4
 PC-5
BLANK PAGE

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PC-5
 PC-6
BLANK PAGE

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PC-6
 PC-7
BLANK PAGE

016-201-02E
08.31.2006 FM4958
DRYPIX 2000 Service Manual PC-7
 CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected

01.27.2012 06 Revised (FM5920) All pages

DRYPIX 2000 SERVICE MANUAL

PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

(DRYPIX Lite)

016-201-06E DRYPIX Lite Service Manual

01.27.2012 FM5920
 PC-1
INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX Lite - Checklist
Checklist  3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION

 4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps preformed and record the  4.3 Checking Components
values determined at the time a DRYPIX Lite is installed at a site. This document is
not intended to replace the installation checklist located in the DRYPIX Lite Service  5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND ASSEMBLING/INSTALLING OPTIONS
Manual but to be followed concurrently.  5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures (Tape)
Before passing over this equipment to the customer, check the system connection and
output image (from section 8 on) after service as well as at installation.  5.2 Assembling of Cart
 5.3 Temporary Installation onto Cart
Installation Information  5.4 Installing Equipment Fixtures
 5.5 Installing the Sheet-feeder Unit to the Equipment Main Body
Serial Number : ___________________ Software Ver. : ____________________  5.6 Setting Magazines

Site Name : ___________________ Installed by : ____________________  6. CONNECTING CABLES

 6.1 Connecting the Network Cable
Site Number : ___________________ Signature : ____________________
 6.2 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance
Room Number : ___________________ Date Completed : ____________________ • Record resistance value measured:
Resistance between L and N : ________Ω
Resistance between L and E : ________Ω
Resistance between N and E : ________Ω

 7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT

 7.1 Setting the Magazine and Powering ON
 7.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)
 7.3 System Settings
 7.3.1 Setting1
 7.3.2 Setting2
 7.3.3 Setting3
 7.4 Rebooting the Equipment
 7.5 Client Settings

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PC-1
 PC-2
 8. CHECKING OPERATIONS
 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
• Check for film jamming  Pass  Fail
 8.2 Checking Density
• Record density value displayed:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.

Step Dmax 3.0 Magazine 1 Magazine 2 Magazine 3 Magazine 4 Magazine 5 Magazine 6 Magazine 7
1 fog
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30 ±0.07
5 0.48 ±0.07
6 0.66 ±0.07
7 0.84 ±0.07
8 1.02 ±0.07
9 1.20 ±0.07
10 1.38 ±0.07
11 1.56 ±0.07
12 1.74 ±0.07
13 1.92 ±0.07
14 2.10 ±0.09
15 2.40 ±0.11
16 2.70 ±0.11
17 3.00 ±0.11

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PC-2
 PC-3
 8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and Scratches  8.4 Checking the Interlock Function
• Check for image unevenness and scratches:  Pass  Fail • Head cover interlock
• Measure recording image format: • Lower rear open/close cover interlock
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.  8.5 Checking Fan Operations
 8.6 Settings the Image QC Function
 8.8 Connecting to the Network

 9. CHECKING CONNECTION
 9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment
 9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
 9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment

 10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT

 10.1 Backing Up Individual Data
 10.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs
 10.3 Installing the Equipment
 10.4 Cleaning the Equipment

(Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
A 12.0 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 11.5 ±1.0 9.5 ±1.0
(B’ + B”)/2 12.6 ±0.8 12.9 ±1.5 11.2 ±1.0 10.5 ±1.0
| B’ – B” | ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.1
(C + C’)/2 403.5 ±1.5 233.0 ±1.0 278.8 ±1.0 180.0 ±1.0
| C – C’ | ≤1.2 ≤0.7 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
D, D’ 328.7 ±0.5 338.6 ±0.5 229.5 ±0.5 230.9 ±0.5
| D – D’ | ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PC-3
 PC-4
Summary Test:  Pass  Fail
 Leave the final film at the customer site.

Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________

Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PC-4
 PC-5
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PC-5
 PC-6
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PC-6
 PC-7
BLANK PAGE

016-201-06E
01.27.2012 FM5920
DRYPIX Lite Service Manual PC-7